Hi Vision 5500

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner
Model EUB-5500
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Principle of Operation ---
Tokyo, Japan
L1E-EA0229-1
CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi

Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to any third party or reproduced
without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Page
Section 1 Introduction................................................................................................................1
Introduction - 1
1.1 Product Overview .........................................................................................................1 - 1
1.2 System Specification ....................................................................................................1 - 2
1.3 Environmental conditions
1.4 System Organization....................................................................................................1 - 3
Section 2 Safety ..........................................................................................................................2 - 1

2.1 Classification of the Equipment..................................................................................2 - 1
2.2 Cautions in Operating the Equipment .......................................................................2 - 1
2.3 Cautions in Maintaining the Equipment ...................................................................2 - 1
2.4 Symbols ........................................................................................................................2 - 2
Section 3 Operation....................................................................................................................3
Operation - 1
3.1 General Operation........................................................................................................3 - 1
3.2 Special Operation for Service Personnel ....................................................................3 - 1
3.2.1 Initialization of system environment ..................................................................3 - 1
3.2.2 Contents of backup data.......................................................................................3 - 3
3.2.3 Saving backup data ..............................................................................................3 - 6
3.2.4 Loading backup data ............................................................................................3 - 7
3.2.5 Displaying software and hardware versions.......................................................3 - 9
3.2.6 Action to be taken when the hard disk crashes..................................................3 - 10
3.2.7 Others of “Service Tools” ......................................................................................3 - 30
3.2.8 Cautions in replacing PCB...................................................................................3 - 39
3.2.9 Backup battery......................................................................................................3 - 40
Section 4 Principle of Operation ...............................................................................................4 - 1

4.1 System Block of EUB-5500..........................................................................................4 - 1
4.2 Basic Composition of EUB-5500 .................................................................................4 - 1
4.2.1 General and board description.............................................................................4 - 1
4.2.2 PRBSW unit circuit description...........................................................................4 - 4
4.2.3 DBF PCB circuit description................................................................................4 - 6
4.2.4 EPI PCB circuit description .................................................................................4 - 8
4.2.5 MAP PCB circuit description ...............................................................................4 - 11
4.2.6 KB & KBIF PCB description................................................................................4 - 17
4.3 BIO Unit EZU-EK25....................................................................................................4 - 20

4.3.2 BIO PCB circuit description.................................................................................4 - 20
4.4 Steerable CW Doppler Unit EZU-ST5 ........................................................................4 - 24
4.4.2 CW circuit description ..........................................................................................4 - 24
(1) L1E-EA0229
4.5 CW Doppler Unit EZU-CW4 .......................................................................................4 - 25
4.5.2 CW PCB circuit description .................................................................................4 - 25
Section 5 Power Unit .................................................................................................................5 - 1

5.1 General and Circuit Description .................................................................................5 - 1
5.2 Power Unit Connectors ................................................................................................5 - 3
Section 6 Monitor Unit ..............................................................................................................6 - 1

6.1 Composition ..................................................................................................................6 - 1
6.2 Specification..................................................................................................................6 - 1
6.3 Installation ...................................................................................................................6 - 4
6.3.1 Cautions in installing the monitor ......................................................................6 - 4
6.3.2 Cautions for safety................................................................................................6 - 5
6.3.3 Replacing the fuse.................................................................................................6 - 5
6.3.4 Degaussing ............................................................................................................6 - 5
6.4 Description of Operation..............................................................................................6 - 5
6.4.1 General ..................................................................................................................6 - 5
6.4.2 Brown tube (CRT) .................................................................................................6 - 5
6.4.3 Main board (AVB401) ...........................................................................................6 - 6
6.4.4 VIDEO board (AVB411) ........................................................................................6 - 7
6.4.5 Socket board (AVB421) .........................................................................................6 - 8
6.4.6 Control board (AVB451)........................................................................................6 - 8
6.4.7 Front control (AVB431).........................................................................................6 - 8
6.4.8 Block diagram .......................................................................................................6 - 9
6.5 Adjustment ...................................................................................................................6 - 10
6.5.1 List of adjusters ....................................................................................................6 - 10
6.5.2 VR adjuster layout ................................................................................................6 - 12
6.6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................6 - 16
6.7 Removing the Cover .....................................................................................................6 - 17
6.8 Detaching and attaching the Filter ............................................................................6 - 18
Section 7 Connector
Connector Arrangement ............................................................................................7 - 1
7.1 Connector Arrangement...............................................................................................7 - 1
7.2 Connection of CN Panel Connectors ...........................................................................7 - 2
7.3 Termination of Video Signals.......................................................................................7 - 5
Section 8 Signal List ..................................................................................................................8 - 1

8.1 EUB-5500 Basic Unit...................................................................................................8 - 1
8.1.1 PRB PCB ...............................................................................................................8 - 1
8.1.2 AWP PCB ...............................................................................................................8 - 3
8.1.3 DBF PVB ...............................................................................................................8 - 6
8.1.4 EPI PCB.................................................................................................................8 - 10
8.1.5 MAP PCB...............................................................................................................8 - 14
8.2 BIO Unit........................................................................................................................8 - 15
8.2.1 BIO PCB ................................................................................................................8 - 15
(2) L1E-EA0229
8.3 CW Unit EZU-ST5, EZU-CW4 ....................................................................................8 - 16
8.6.1 CW PCB .................................................................................................................8 - 16
Section 9 Maintenance...............................................................................................................9
Maintenance - 1
9.1 Fan Filter ......................................................................................................................9 - 1
9.2 Other Maintenance Items............................................................................................9 - 1
Section 10 Parts list

list................................
................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................10
................ 10 - 1
10.1 Cart1............................................................................................................................10 - 1
10.2 Cart2............................................................................................................................10 - 4
10.3 Keyboard .....................................................................................................................10 - 6
10.4 PC unit ........................................................................................................................10 - 8
10.5 Cover ...........................................................................................................................10 - 10
10.6 PCB..............................................................................................................................10 - 12
10.7 Accessories ..................................................................................................................10 - 14
10.8 Monitor........................................................................................................................10 - 16
10.9 Power...........................................................................................................................10 - 18
(3) L1E-EA0229
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 Product Overview

Overview
EUB-5500 is a compact ultrasound scanner with multiple functions equipped with Doppler,
color flow mapping function and so on, which circuits related to image quality are totally
digitalized. It can be connected with phased array probes as well as linear and convex probes,
and applicable to any type of use.
Also, it is fully equipped with various functions such as cine memory, cardiac function
measurement, patient report function and so on. In addition, EUB-5500 runs on WindowsXP
allowing it to be easily connected with various interfaces such as DICOM3.0 and so on.
Features
(1) True Digital Architecture
All sorts of ultrasound image processing for not only the beam former as a crucial point of
image quality but also all mode of B, M, DOP, CFM and CFA are totally digitalized, and
they are controlled by software.
(2) Improved resolution
Weighting of transmission and reception waves together with digital processing mentioned
above realizes high spatial resolution, wide dynamic range and high contrast resolution.
(3) Improved color frame rate and image quality
Parallel beam and latest image processing technologies realize the Quadra beam process of
color image. It achieves substantial improvement of frame rate compared with
conventional techniques, as well as provides color images with high definition and high
resolution.
(4) Applicable to multiple uses
Not only linear and convex probes but also phased array probes can be connected. Thus it
is applicable to uses from abdomen and obstetrics to circulatory organ.
(5) Non-interlaced monitor as a standard
The RGB non-interlaced monitor adopted allows clear images without flickering to be
viewed.
(6) WindowsXP is adopted as an OS.
WindowsXP is adopted for the operating system (OS). It allows DICOM3.0 and various
interfaces to be easily connected.
(7) Easy-to-use keyboard
Key layout considering frequency of uses improves operability.
1-1 L1E-EA0229
1.2 System Specification
1. Probe
(1) Convex type : 2.0 ~ 10MHz
(2) Linear type : 2.5 ~ 13MHz
(3) Phased array type : 2.0 ~ 7.5MHz
2. Image examination mode
(1) Standard configuration : B, B/B, B/M, M
: B/PW, PW, CW, B/CW, CFM-B/CW,
: CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-M, CFM-M,
CFM-B/PW,
(2)Biplane probe connected : Real time B/B (Real time biplane)
NOTE: Refer to Instruction Manual for details

Observe the following environmental conditions for safe and correct operation of the
equipment.
(1) Environmental conditions in operation
・Ambient temperature : +10° C∼ +35° C

・Relative humidity : 30∼85% (subject to no condensation)
・Atmospheric pressure : 700∼1060hPa
(2) Daily storage conditions
・Ambient temperature : -10°C∼ +40°C

・Relative humidity : 10∼90%(subject to no condensation)
(3) Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)
・Ambient temperature : -10°C∼ +60°C

・Relative humidity : 10∼95%(subject to no condensation)
1-2 L1E-EA0229
1.3 System Organization
ＭａｉｎＵｎｉｔ
・EUB-5500 Basic
System
Ｍｏｎｉｔｏｒ PROBEs
・EZU-MT24-S1 ・EUP-XXX Option Units
and Peripherals
Network IF Unit SCSI Card IF Unit BIO Unit CW Unit Steerable CW Unit
・EZU-PI6 ・EZU-PI1 ・EZU-EK25 ・EZU-CW4 ・EZU-ST5
SCSI Printer ・EZU-DA1
BW Printer Color Printer VCR MOD（USB）

・EZU-MO1
NOTE: 1) ECG cable and electrodes are included in the BIO unit EZU-EK25.
2) Secure the peripheral devices to the equipment. If using the equipment without
securing the peripheral devices, they may drop down due to vibration or
inclination when moving the equipment.
For securing the peripheral devices, refer to TECHNICAL GUIDE (Installation).
1-3 6 L1E-EA0229
１.4 Peripheral Device
Table 1.4-1 Recommended Peripheral Devices
Manufacturer’s model, type
Peripheral device Manufacturer
NTSC (EIA)* PAL (CCIR)**
SONY UP-895MD UP-895CE

Black & white
printer P90U P90E
MITSUBISHI
- P91E
UP-1800MD UP-1800EPM
- UP-2800P/UP-2850P
SONY UP-2900MD/UP-
-
2950MD
Color printer UP-21MD
CP700U CP700E
MITSUBISHI - CP900E
CP770DW with SB770(SCSI IF)
Polaroid (UK) Ltd. - TX1300SE
SONY SVO-9500MD SVO-9500MDP
S-VHS VCR PANASONIC AG-MD835 AG-MD835E
MITSUBISHI HS-MD3000U HS-MD3000E
Digital VCR SONY - DSR-20MDP
* for the scaner unit of NTSC (EIA) TV display system
** for the scaner unit of PAL (CCIR) TV display system
NOTICE:
y These devices meet IEC60601-1 compliance.
y To use CP-770DW, EZU-PI1 is required.
1-4 6 L1E-EA0229
Section 2 Safety
2.1 Classification of the Equipment

Classification of this ultrasound scanner by IEC60601-1 and UL2601-1 is as follows:
• Classification by type of protection against electric shock : Class I equipment
• Classification by grade of protection against electric shock : Type B and BF equipment
(General requirements of medical equipment safety by IEC and UL)
2.2 Cautions in Operating the Equipment

(1) For maintenance inspection, refer to [Section 14 Maintenance and Checkup] of the Instruction
Manual.
(2) In moving the equipment, refer to [Section 13 Movement] of the Instruction Manual.
(1) For starting up and shutting down the system, refer to the Instruction Manual [Chapter 4
Operation procedures].
2.3 Cautions in Maintaining the Equipment

(1) Do not use fuses other than rated.
(2) For rating of fuses, refer to labels and marks around the fuse holder.
(3) When removing PCB or connector, turn off ON/STANDBY switch and the breaker switch and
wait more than 10 seconds before entering into the work.
(4) When adjusting the monitor, care should be taken for high voltage.
Table 2.3-1 Fuses of equipment
3.15A/AC250V　（AC100~120V）
F1
External Fuse ― 6.3A/AC250V　（AC220~240V）
F2 1.6A / AC250V
F1 on Filter board in HM-071C 0.5A / AC250V
F2 on Filter board in HM-071C 0.5A / AC250V
F1 on Main converter AC/DC
Power Supply 6.3A / AC250V
Internal Fuse in HM-071C
F2 on Main converter AC/DC
6.3A / AC250V
in HM-071C
Monitor F100 3.0A / AC250V
2-1 L1J-EA0229
2.4 Symbols
IEC establishes symbols to be used for the equipment. The following symbols are used outside
and inside the equipment.
Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF EQUIPMENT
2-2 8 L1E-EA0229
Section 3 Operation
3.1 General Operation

Refer to the Instruction Manual.
3.2 Special Operation for Service Personnel

NOTE: 1) In the following sentences, “click” means placing the arrow pointer onto the object
and pressing the ENTER key.
2) Operations described below are special ones exclusive for the service personnel.
Be sure not to open to the users.
3.2.1 Initialization of system environment

(1) Press Ctrl + Alt + S key to display the “Special Function” dialog.
(2) Select “Service Tools” from the Select item.
(3) After entering “SERVICETOOL” for Password, click the “OK” button to start “Service
Tools”.
NOTE: 3) For entering Password, make sure to type it in capital letters. (With the state of
Caps Lock key located on the keyboard being lit in orange color.)
（2）
（3）
(4) Click the “Reset” button in “Service Tools”.
（4）
）
3-1 L1E-EA0229
(5-A) If selecting “Yes” from “Reset Menu” and clicking the “OK” button, all the setup data is
reset to those when shipped from the factory and the system is rebooted.
NOTE: Time data is retained.

（５−Ａ）
(5-B) If clicking “Cancel” or “Check box”（） in “Reset Menu”, “Reset Menu” ends and the
process returns to “Service Tools”.
NOTICE：Don’t click OK button , where NO is chosen.
（５−Ｂ）
3-2 L1E-EA0229
3.2.2 Contents of backup data
（１）
（２）
（３）（１３）
（１４）
（４）（１５）
（５）（１６）
（６）（１７）
（７）
（１８）
（８）（１９）
（９）
（２２）
（１０）
（１１）
（１２）
（２１）
3-3 L1E-EA0229
（１９）
(1) VCR
VCRSelect the type of VCR to be connected.
(2) Printer
Select print time of the black/white video printer to be connected.
(3) Application
Set application data.
(4) Measure
Set a measurement method, measurement item and so on.
(5) Annotation
Register the hospital name.
(6) Print/REC
Select the recorder to be remotely controlled when clicking the print key and REC key.
(7) US Power
Select the initial value of US power when booting the system.
(8) Image Filing
Set data transfer related items.
(9) Peripherals
Set the connection related to the network and others.
(10) 3D
Set parameters to capture 3D images
(When EZU-3D4 or EZU3D2S is mounted.)
(11) Image Print
Set format for multi-screen printer output.
(12) User Keys
Set user defined function keys.
3-4 L1E-EA0229
(13) Date/Time
Set clock data.
(14) Hosp. Name
Register hospital name.
(15) Char. Clear
Select automatic clearing comments entered onto the screen or not when freeze OFF
and changing application.
(16) Key click
Select sounding a beep or not when clicking a key.
(17) Logo Mark
Select displaying characters of “HITACHI” at the upper left of screen or not.
(18) Foot SW
Select the foot SW.
(19) Screen Saver
Set the screen saver functions.
(20) Guide Line
Register any data to displayed for the puncture guide line.
(21) Preset Operation
Register any data to displayed for the BodyMark and Charavter
(22) Trackball Sensitivity
Register any data to set up a trackball sensitivity to every trackball priority

NOTICE: When version-up software, the backup data above is maintained. It is not reset
to that when shipped from the factory.
3-5 L1E-EA0229
3.2.3 Saving backup data
(1) Select “Backup data” in “Setup” of “Main Menu”.
(2) Select “Copy” in “Backup data”.
（２）
（１）
(3) The following message appears. Set the CD-RW disk to the CD drive and click the “OK”
button. This saves backup data and returns to “Backup data” menu display. Backup
data is saved in the CD-RW disk as a folder titled “EUBBackup” in the CD-RW disk.
（３）
NOTE: Do not save backup data to CD-R. Use the CD-RW.

★ Error message when saving backup data ★
Displayed when the CD-RW disk is not prepared

due to any of the following reasons:
• The CD-RW disk is not set to the CD drive.
• The CD-RW disk is write protected.
• The CD-RW disk has no sufficient free space.
* Clicking the “OK” button returns to the “Backup
data” menu.
3-6 L1E-EA0229
3.2.4 Loading backup data
* Note that this operation deletes backup data saved in the system.
(1) Select “Backup data” in “Setup” of “Main Menu”.
(2) Select “Install” in “Backup data”.
（２）
（１）
(3) The following message appears. If the backup data is to be installed, click the “Yes”
button.
（３）
(4) The following message appears. Set the CD-RW containing the backup data to the CD
drive and click the “OK” button. This installs the backup data and returns to “Backup
data” menu display.
（４）
3-7 L1E-EA0229
(5) Reading of backup data is performed, and equipment will be rebooted, if the O.K.
button is clicked, since the message of the following figure is displayed after a while.
Reading of backup data is an end after a reboot
Note:　This
This case has time in equipment starting depending on the contents of backup data.
When backup data is read at the time of soft upgrade, time borrows from equipment starting
10 minutes to about 15 minutes.
（５）
★ Error message when installing backup data ★
Displayedwhen the CD-RW disk is not prepared

for backup data due to any of the following
reasons:
• The CD-RW disk is not set to CD drive.
• The CD-RW disk has no backup data.
* Clicking the “OK” button returns to the
“Backup data” menu.
3-8 L1E-EA0229
3.2.5 Displaying software and hardware versions
(1) Start “Service Tools”. Refer to 3.2.1 (1), (2) and (3).
(2) Click the “Version” button in “Service Tools”.
（２）
(3) Versions are displayed as shown below:
Software
version
Hardware
version
NOTE: “Not connected” in hardware version indicates no the board installed in the
equipment.
3-9 L1E-EA0229
3.2.6 Action be taken when the hard disk crashes
The followings describe an action to be taken when the hard disk crashes at the customer site.
3.2.6.1 Crash of HDD
Crash of HDD is divided into the following two cases:
1) Hardware crash: Ultrasound scanner does not start up because the HDD cannot be driven
due to degradation of HDD hardware.
2) Software crash: The ultrasound scanner does not start because some file written in HDD
is broken.
These two crashes may not be simply identified. Incase of HDD crash, take the action for
hardware crash.
In either case, the action initializes user setting information. To prevent this initialization,
it is helpful to use “Backup data” of “Main Menu” to backup user setting information
periodically. By restoring this backup to the equipment after taking the action, user setting
information can be protected (Refer to 3.2.3 and 3.2.4 for details).
The action to be taken in the two cases mentioned above will be described in the following
subsections.
3.2.6.2 Preparation before the action

Prepare the following media supplemented to EUB-5500.
1) EUB-5500 System CD (CD-R)
Needs to start Recovery Medium and includes HDD recovery tools. Also, directly it can
run the ultrasound scanner in place of HDD. Hereafter described as CD-R.
2) EUB-5500 Authentic Disk (FD)
Required when the system is provided with any onerous option.
Required for releasing protection of onerous optional functions.
Hereafter described as A-Disk.
A set of these media is supplemented to a system and exclusive to it. If these media
supplemented to the system for which an action is to be taken cannot be prepared, stop HDD
recovery.
NOTE: If using any media of the other system, the unauthorized copy protection function
makes the media unusable after that.
3 - 10 L1E-EA0229
3.2.6.3 Action to be taken when software crashes
In case of a software crash, the system can be recovered by reinstalling the ultrasound
scanner software. The time required is approximately 30 Minutes
Procedure to reinstall software..
Switch on the unit and insert System CD into the ultrasound scanner’s
(1) During the boot phase. A white bar will appear on the screen indicating that the unit is
booting from the System CD when displaying HITACHI Logo mark.
(2) When the start screen appears, ( Approximately 5 Mins ) depress “Ctrl + Alt + E” key
This operation needs to be executed just when the start screen is displayed. If not the e
ultrasound scanner completes the boot up and displays the US image.. In such a case,
turn OFF the system power and retry from the beginning.
NOTICE: The activation time of Explorer is long. Don’t push “Ctrl + Alt + E” key
frequently.
NOTICE: Except for case of invalidating STBY SW, don’t turn off by breaker SW..
3 - 11 L1E-EA0229
(3) Explorer of Windows XP Embedded is started ( Approximately 2 Mins ) and the file
directory in System CD is displayed as below.
Install Folder
System CD
HDD
C drive: System CD: XP Embedded operating system and ultrasound program and
Install program.
D drive: XP Embedded operating system, ultrasound program whitch is to be upgraded
or repaired.
NOTICE : if system setting change is displayed , select the “No” and close the dialog.
3 - 12 L1E-EA0229
(4) Open the “Install” folder on the CD and double click “shortcut of diskmgmt.exe”
(C:/Install/diskmgmt.exe)
A dialog “Computer Management” appears.
(5)Check that the HDD is partitioned as below.

Partition 1: D = 4GB(4,096MB, and primary area) NTFS: ( XP Embedded operating system
and ultrasound program )
Partition 2: F = The other is expand Logical area NTFS: ( Ultrasound work area )
Format partition D drive and actives.

NOTICE: Do not format partition F, because included the user image data.
Close Disk manager.
3 - 13 L1E-EA0229
(6) Press the “OK” button.
(7) Check below, and then press the “OK” button.

The file system is set the NTFS.
The Allocation unit size is set the Default
“Perform a quick format” is not checked. (There is no mark in check box)
“Enable and folder compression” is not checked. (There is no mark in check box)
Set the volume label to a blank.(refer to following photo)
(8) Click the “OK” button.
The progress is displayed on D drive in disk management.

When progress reach the 100% , format is finished and drive status become “Active”
Click the in disk management. the disk management is closed after clicking.
3 - 14 L1E-EA0229
(9)Double click “EUBsys.exe” in Install folder, and then automatically create XP Embedded
operating system image.
(10) Copy “Eub-us” folder from CD (C:/Install) to HDD partition D.
3 - 15 L1E-EA0229
(11) Press “Ctrl + Alt + Del” and select “Shutdown”
Windows Security
Log on information
Shut down
(12) Select the “shut down” and click the OK button.
(13) Push the STBY SW after shutdown and start the system.
When BIOS logo appear on screen , push the eject button of CD drive.
And put out the CD media from CD drive . Close the tray of CD drive .
This operation needs to be executed just when the start screen is displayed. If not the
ultrasound scanner completes the boot up and displays the US image. In such case,
turn OFF the system power and retry from the beginning.
3 - 16 L1E-EA0229
(14) When the start screen appears, ( Approximately 5 Mins ) depress “Ctrl + Alt + E” key
Explorer of Windows XP Embedded is started. ( Approximately 2 Mins )
Check the drive letter of CD drive.
NOTICE: If it is not “H” , change the draive letter to “H”
NOTICE: If system setting change is displayed ,select the “No” and close the dialog. .
(15) Open the “C:/Eub-us/Tools” folder on the HDD partition and double click “shortcut of
diskmgmt.exe” (C:/Eub-us/Tools/diskmgmt.exe)
3 - 17 L1E-EA0229
(16) Move the cursor to D drive on disk0 . press undo key and click the “Change drive letter
and Paths..”.
(17) Click the “Change “ button.
(18) Select the “F” from list and click the “OK” button
3 - 18 L1E-EA0229
(19) Click the “Yes” button.
(20) Click the “Yes” button and continue assignment of drive.
(21)Confirm the drive letter is changed from D to F. Close the dialog by clicking
(22) Shut down in accordance with (11)(12).

Procedure to repairing has been completed now. After this, the ultrasound scanner can be
started as usual.
If option software(s) have been installed on the system, install them again referring to the
option’s Technical Guide.
When the ultrasound scanner software in HDD is installed, protection is applied to
onerous options. This protection needs to be released using A-Disk. For the method to
release it, refer to Appendix A.
3 - 19 L1E-EA0229
If following dialog is displayed during re-booting up , select the “Yes”.
3.2.6.4 Action to be taken when harddisk crashes

In case of Hard (HDD) crash, it is necessary to require the new HDD from factory and change it,
and install all software to the HDD. It can be used the ultrasound system by attached System
CD still sending the new HDD from factory. Refer to as followings:
The following describes a method to recover from software crash.
Procedure for starting the Ultrasound equipment from the System CD
1 Turn on the equipment.
2. Insert the System CD into the CD drive of the Ultrasound equipment during displaying the
BIOS logo
3. The initial window appears and the Ultrasound equipment starts.
3 - 20 L1E-EA0229
[1] Procedure of System CD
(1) Power on the ultrasound equipment.
(2) Immediately insert System CD into the ultrasound scanner’s CD drive when displaying
HITACHI Logo mark.
(3) Displaying ultrasound boot up image and start up the equipment.
Note1: In case of starting up System CD, it cannot be used the optional function (ex.
SCSI printer, DICOM, Network, ODM and etc)
Note2: After starting up the ultrasound software, if displaying dialog of restart up or not
for discovering new hardware, then select “no”.
[2] Procedure to install of the new HDD
Note: In case of attached MO drive (optional EZU-MO1), take off the connector USB cable,
and install as followings. After finished the install, the Drive letter of MO setting “D”.
Power on the ultrasound equipment.
(1) Immediately insert System CD into the ultrasound scanner’s CD drive when displaying
HITACHI Logo mark.
(2) When the start screen appears, depress “Ctrl + Alt + E” key
Note: It is necessary to depress when displaying start screen. If not depress the key;
repeat from (1) by standby switch, as it is finished start up the ultrasound
software.
(3) Explorer of Windows XP Embedded is started and the file directory in System CD is
displayed.
Note: If displaying dialog of restart up or not for new hardware, then select “no”.
(4) Open the “Install” folder from the file directory and double click “shortcut of
diskmgmt.exe” (C:/Install/diskmgmt.exe)
Note: As quite new HDD is sleep mode, if appeared the dialog of discovered new HDD,
press repeating Next button and finish at last.
3 - 21 L1E-EA0229
(5) A dialog “Computer Management” appears.
(6) Move cursor to Disk0 area and press UNDO key, then appear the followings dialog and
select “New Partition…” and press ENTER key.
Note: Not recognized still making partition and logical drive.
(7) Click “Next>” button.
3 - 22 L1E-EA0229
(8) Recognized item of “Primary partition” and click “Next>” button.
(9) Input “4096” (MB) for primary partition size and click “Next>” button.
(10) Recognized “D” for drive letter and click “Next>” button.
(11) Setting item as followings and click “Next>” button.

Set File system to NTFS.
Set allocation unit Default.
Set volume label to blank.
3 - 23 L1E-EA0229
(12) Click “Finish” button.
(13) Start D drive formatting and finish to 100%.
(14) Move cursor to D drive and press UNDO key, and select “Mark partition as Active” on
menu.
(15) Displaying “Active” mark to D drive.
3 - 24 L1E-EA0229
(16) Move cursor to Disk0 unallocated area and press UNDO key, and select “New
partition…” on menu.
(18) Select “Extended partition” and click “Next>” button.
(19) Click “Next>” button. (Partition size is max.)
3 - 25 L1E-EA0229
(20) Click “Finish” Button.
(21) Create the free space in the back of D drive.
(22) Move cursor to the free space area and press UNDO key, and select “New logical drive”
on menu.
3 - 26 L1E-EA0229
(24) Select Logical drive and click “Next>” button.
(25) Click “Next>” button. (Logical drive size is max.)
(26) Recognized “F” for drive letter and click “Next>” button.
(27) Set item as followings and click “Next>” button.

Set File system to NTFS.
Set allocation unit Default.
Set volume label to blank.
3 - 27 L1E-EA0229
(28) Click “Finish” Button.
(29) Start F drive formatting and finish to 100% and create area
(30) Turn off diskmgmt.exe dialog, and copy all of Eub-us folder in C:/ to D:/
(31) Double click Eubsys.exe in C:/Install, then install XP Embedded system. Displaying a
dialog on installing, but close the dialog when finished.
(32) Depress “Ctrl + Alt + Del” and Displaying Windows security image. And press
“Shutdown” button.
(33) Select item of “Shutdown”, Press “OK” button. Then ultrasound equipment is shut
downed.
(34) Quite power off and power on ultrasound equipment, and start up it. When displayed
bios image of HITACHI logo, immediately take off the System CD by using eject button
in front of CD-R/RW drive. After ejected the System CD, closed CD-R/RW tray by using
the eject button again.
Note: If success taking off the System CD, start up from installed HDD. If failed taking
off the System CD, start up from the System CD. Then turn off the power by using
STAND BY SWITCH; repeat same (35) from first.
(35) When displaying the ultrasound start up image, depress “Ctrl + Alt + E”, and then
start explorer.exe program. Verified as following item and figure.
3 - 28 L1E-EA0229
A drive: Floppy Disk drive
C drive: XP Embedded operating system and ultrasound program
D drive: MO Disk drive (Option)
F drive: Ultrasound work area
H drive: CD-R/RW Disk drive
Note1: If the drive letter of device were different, change to correct drive letter by using
C:/Eub-us/Tools/diskmgmt (shortcut)
Note2: If displaying dialog of restart up or not, then select “no” for new hardware.
(36) End of install by depressing “Ctrl + Alt + Del”. Refer to item of (33) and (34) in
detailed.
3 - 29 L1E-EA0229
3.2.7 Others of “Service Tools”
Functions of (1) ~ (11) of “Service Tools” shown in the figure below:
(1) “Guide line” : Refer to the TECHNICAL GUIDE (Installation).
(2) “Color Bar” : Refer to the TECHNICAL GUIDE (Installation).
(3) “G-Scale” : Refer to the TECHNICAL GUIDE (Installation).
(4) “Diagnostic tests” : Executing the check program(refer to 3.2.5.2)
(5) “Connectable probe list” : Displaying the connectable probe list.
(6) “Event viewer” : Displaying the event log viewer for EUB application
software”
(7) “Cntrl+Alt+Del” : Validating the “Cntrl+Alt+Del”.
(8) “WIDE VIEW” :Unusable
(9) “Option” :Unusable
(10) “String Recovery” :Unusable
(11) Connection” :Unusable
（１）（２）
（３）
（４）（５）
（６）
（７）（８）
（９）（１１）
（１０）
3 - 30 L1E-EA0229
3.2.6 Displaying the error log.
(1) Start the “Service tool” .(Refer to 3.2.1 (1),(2),(3).
(2) Click the Event Viewer button in dialog of service tool.
(3) Select the Application to display the Application log of EUB application software.
(Refer to following)
(4) The following list show the kind of application log.
Event ID Type Event log

1 Information Booting started.
2 Information Data check started.
5 Information Booting completed.
6 Information BackUpDB setup started.
7 Information ApplicationDB setup started.
8 Information ApplicationResourceDB setup started.
9 Information BodyMarkDB setup started.
10 Information AnnotationDB setup started.
11 Information FilingDB setup started.
12 Information MeasureemtnDB setup started.
13 Information ProbeDB setup started.
14 Information 3DDB setup started.
15 Information PrinterList setup started.
16 Information WVDB setup started.
17 Information PatientMenuDB setup started.
18 Error Software error occurred.
4097 Information Backup started.
4098 Information Backup completed.
3 - 31 L1E-EA0229
4099 Error Backup error.
12289 Error No Dus file of the probe selected.
12290 Error Dus file decompression failed.
12291 Error Dus file error.
12292 Error BWDSC file loading error.
12293 Error CFMDSC file loading error.
12294 Error DCFM file loading error.
12295 Error DDOP file loading error.
12296 Error Smoothing file loading error.
12297 Warning Probe cannot be selected.
12298 Error Probe ID error.
16385 Error PCI-VME error.
16386 Warning PCI-VME key cannot be opened.
20481 Error BWDSC PCB is missing.
20482 Error CONT PCB is missing.
20483 Error DCSP PCB is missing.
20484 Error CINE PCB is missing.
20486 Error CFMDSC PCB is missing.
20488 Error DVP PCB is missing.
20489 Error SYSTEM-ID loading error.
20490 Error VME arbitration error.
20492 Error Not bus error.
20493 Error Probe identification failed
20495 Error MPTEE interface error.
20496 Error Same value at GND and ST4V.
20497 Error A/D value at D/A 00 and FF is the same.
20498 Error CALIB_MINI_0V is smaller than 0.
20499 Error CALIB_MINI_5V is larger than 255.
20500 Error ATGC A/D value at D/A 00 and FF is the same.
20501 Error CALIB_TGC_0V is smaller than 0.
20502 Error CALIB_TGC_5V is larger than 255.
20503 Error ATT A/D value at D/A 50 and FF is the same.
20504 Error CALIB_ATT_0V is smaller than 0.
20505 Error CALIB_ATT_4V is larger than 255.
20506 Error LOG data of DVP PCB is wrong.
20507 Error TGC EXPO data of DVP PCB is wrong.
20508 Error TGC MANT data of DVP PCB is wrong.
20209 Error LPF COEF data of DVP PCB is wrong.
20510 Error DBF1 PCB is missing.
20514 Error AWP2 PCB is missing.
20515 Error AWP1 PCB is missing.
20216 Error CONT PCB configuration error.
20517 Error DVP PCB configuration error.
20518 Error DCSP PCB configuration error.
20519 Error CFMDSC PCB configuration error.
20520 Error BWDSC PCB configuration error.
20521 Error CINE PCB configuration error.
20522 Error AWP1 PCB configuration error.
3 - 32 L1E-EA0229
20523 Error USSYNC RAM data is wrong.
20524 Error STCW PCB configuration error.
20673 Error WinDriver open werror
20674 Error EPI PCB is not Connected
20675 Error EPI : Open error.
20676 Error EPI : Boot error
28677 Error EPI : DCM error
28678 Error PRB : Config error.
28679 Error PRB PCB is not connected.
28680 Error DBF : Config error.
28681 Error PRB PCB is not connect.
28682 Error BIO : Config error.
28683 Error CW : Config error.
28688 Error MAP0 : Open error.
28692 Error MAP0 : Binary file load error.
28696 Error MAP0 : Boot phase(0) error.
28704 Error MAP0 : SharedParam Write error.
28708 Error MAP0 : MapStatus Read error.
28712 Error MAP0 : RunningCount is stopped.
28716 Error MAP0 : Memory Init error.
28720 Error MAP0 : Boot error.
28724 Error Map Chip Count Failed.
28725 Error Map Liblary read Error.
28726 Error MAP1 PCB Revision read error.
28727 Error MAP2 PCB Revision read error.
3 - 33 L1E-EA0229
３．２．７．２ Executing check program,
(1) Start “Service Tools”. --- See 3.2.1 (1), (2) and (3)
(2) Start “Service Tools”. --- See 3.2.1 (1), (2) and (3)
(3) The following functions are available as check programs.
１） RAM　Tesｔ
A function to check if the memory that is an important component of each PCB works
normally
2) Pattern　Test
A function to check if any PCB is faulty by inserting test patterns into plural points in
the signal processing line.
3) Channel　Test
　A function to check if analog circuits of transmission and reception waves work normally
by channel.
１）
２）
３）
3 - 34 L1E-EA0229
　　　１）　RAM Test
Click the “Execute” button to check the memory. Boards to be checked are DBF, EPI,
MAP1 and MAP2 PCB. The result of memory check is displayed as “SUCCESS” or
“FAILURE”.
After executing memory check, if clicking each button in “Diagnostic Tests” and “Close”
button in “Service Tools”, the following message is displayed. To return to any normal
imaging mode, the system needs to be shut down. Also, after executing memory check,
the other check programs (Pattern Test and Channel Test) cannot be used.
２）　Pattern Test
Press each button in the dialog to perform the following operation. Each button has an image
mode recommendable; therefore, the Test Pattern dialog needs to be displayed after selecting t
3 - 35 L1E-EA0229
he image mode in advance.
button action recommended mode

Fixed Displaying gradation pattern B mode
Lattice Displaying the lattice pattern. B mode
Moving Displaying the moving an axial B mode
beam on US image.
Or the test pattern for a scan is
displayed every [ which was
defined ] number of scan.
OFF All test pattern is terminated
and return normal condition.
OK Test pattern is erased and
return to dialog.
３）　Channel Test
The dialog above allows you to depict a B-image with the transmission wave at the center
1ch and aperture 1ch. Since aperture of the transmission wave is 1ch, if the
transmission wave circuit is missing by even 1ch, it can be observed as a dark line in the
B-image. Further in the M-image, an image can be depicted using a specific 1ch, so any
missing channel may be identified. As well as for the reception wave, any missing
channel can be checked.
To implement this test:
① Connect any probe with no missing channel and select the B/M real mode.
② Click “Channel Test” from “diagnostic Tests”. Display Channel Test and set the
transmission wave or reception wave to 1ch, and check any missing channel by
operating the slide bar at the top of dialog. At this time, if the M-image shows any
dark line, it means a missing channel. Note that, however, an element of the probe
itself can be faulted.
③ After completing the check, close the dialog and click the “Close” button in “Service
Tools” to display the following message. To return to the normal imaging mode, the
system needs to be freeze ON/OFF.
3 - 36 L1E-EA0229
NOTICE: After completing the check, close the dialog and click the “Close” button in “Service
Tools” to display the following message. To return to the normal imaging mode, the
system needs to be freeze ON/OFF.
　　　　Above action is needed every transmission or reception check.
3 - 37 L1E-EA0229
The following details display and operations:
① CH slide bar
② Status display
⑤ Close button
④ Reception 1 ch button
③ Transmission 1ch button
Item Explanation
①　CH slide bar Selects No. of any element to be checked. No. of the element thus
selected is displayed as the Elem. item of ② Status display. This
number is from 0 to 191.
②　Status display 1st item (Elem.): Represents No. of the element for check selected
with the CH slide bar.
2nd item (ch):

(ch): Represents corresponding to element CH No. in
DBF. CH No. is from 0 to 47.
3rd item: None/No check mode, T 1ch/Transmission wave check mode,
R 1ch/Reception wave check mode, T&R 1ch/Transmission and
reception wave check mode
③　Transmission 1ch Sets the transmission wave to 1ch. The last item of Status display
changes to “T 1ch” or “T&R 1ch”. Pressing this button allows any
button
missing channel of transmission or reception wave to be checked.
④　Reception 1ch Sets the reception wave to 1ch. The last item of Status display
changes to “R 1ch” or “T&R 1ch”. Pressing this button allows any
button
missing channel of reception wave to be checked.
⑤　Close button Closes this dialog.
3 - 38 L1E-EA0229
3.2.8 Cautions in replacing EPI PCB
(1) When replacing the EPI
PCB, be sure to turn off the breaker switch located at left side of
the system.
(2) EUB-5500 is numbered as individual ID number for each system, and this ID number is
recorded in ID chip which is equipped on the EPI PCB. (Location on the PCB C8 : Refer
to the figure below.)
In case no ID chip is equipped or an incorrect ID chip for different system is equipped,
the system does not operate correctly. When replacing EPI PCB, make sure to
re-equip this ID chip onto the new PCB to be replaced.
CNF5
CNF8
CN2
C8
EPI P.C.B.
Parts side
3 - 39 L1E-EA0229
3.2.9 Backup battery
EUB-5500 is provided with the backup battery inside the equipment, which backs up
data such as date and time and so on.
The life of this battery is about three years, but
it may differ according to usage of the
equipment.
When this backup battery reaches its life,
booting stops at the screen shown in Fig. 3.2.9-1
when powered on. Follow the steps below to
replace the backup battery.
A message “CMOS checksum bad

– Default configuration used
Fig.3.2.9-1
(1) Turn the breaker switch OFF at the left side of the equipment.
(2) Refer to [3.2.10 Replacing the backup battery] for replacing it with a new one.
(3) If booting the equipment after replacing the backup battery, booting stops at the screen
shown in Fig. 3.2.9-1 .
Press “Ctrl + Alt + Shift” key and then “1” key to continue booting.
(4) In the midway of booting, the following dialog appears. Press the “OK” button.
(5) After booting the equipment, refer to (Subsection 7.10 of [Section 7 Main Menu]) for
setting date and time.
(6) See the instruction manual to check if the equipment works normally.
This completes replacing the backup battery.
3 - 40 L1E-EA0229
3.2.10 Replacing the backup battery
(1) Remove the covers.
(2) Disconnect cables, loose M4 screws and withdraw the PC unit.
(3) Replace the battery and restore the cables and covers to their original positions.
(The battery may be replaced without removing the monitor.)
PC unit
M4 screw
Battery
PC unit
3. 2. 8. 1
3 - 41 L1E-EA0229
Section 4 Principle of Operation
4.1 System Block of EUB-5500

Fig. 4.1.1 shows the system block diagram of EUB-5500.
★ EUB-5500 uses many hardware parts configurable (programmable) by the configuration
data (program data) such as FPGA and DSP on each PCB.
★ mounted on PCB, and FPGA or DSP is configured (programmed) during reset period after
booting the system.
4.2 Basic Composition of EUB-5500

4.2.1 General and board description
Composition: PCBs and units composing the basic part of EUB-5500 are listed below:
1. PC unit
2. KB & KBIF
3. PRBSW unit
4. DBF
5. EPI
6. MAP
7. CNPNL
Overview of units and PCBs:

1. PC unit
With WindowsXP as OS, the PC unit runs a variety of application software to control
the ultrasound scanner as well as interfaces with various media.
A standard PC structure is added with the following two PCI bus add-in boards in
EUB-5500.
Video board : Displays ultrasound image data entered from MAP PCB overlaid
on the computer screen. Also, outputs and inputs TV signals for
VCR playback and recording.
SCSI Card (Option : EZU-PI1)
: Used to connect with SCSI accessory units. This is necessary for
the connection with SCSI printer.
4-1 L1E-EA0229
2. KB & KBIF
Interfaces each key and switch on the control panel with the PC unit.
Also controls turning on LED.
3. PRBSW
A section to interface with the probe, which corresponds to the transmitter/receiver
of ultrasound scanner.
PRBSW gives high voltage pulse to the transducer for driving it, as well as amplifies
echo returned from body tissue.
Also, PRBSW is composed of the following two boards:
(1) PRB PCB
(2) AWP PCB
4. DBF
Outputs transmit signals delayed for each channel to PRBSW PCB, beam-formes the
received wave signals and sums for channels, and outputs it to EPI PCB.
5. EPI
Processes each beam-formed signal of B, M, D and CFM mode from DBF, and outputs
to MAP.
And controls ultrasound transmit/receive focusing and generates various control
signals for ultrasound scan.
6. MAP
After applying smoothing, enhancement and so on to image data from EPI PCB, it
converts them to TV synchronized signals to output them to the Video Board together
with ECG and heart sounds waveform data from BIO PCB.
7. CNPNL
Connects with external peripheral equipment.
4-2 L1E-EA0229
PRBSW
PRBSW DBF EPI MAP
･CPU
･HDD
sPCI BUS ･FDD
CW ･CD-R
･WindowsXP
BIO PCI BUS
USB
4-3
USB MOD
PROBE VIDEO
BOARD KB
MONITOR KB ＆ＫＢＩＦ
SERIAL
MOUSE
PC Keyboard
VCR
SCSI EUB Key
CARD TB
SCSI PRINTER
BASIC
NETWORK,DICOM
L1E-EA0229
OPTION
Fig. 4.1.1　
4.1.1　EUB-5500
EUB-5500 BLOCK DIAGRAM
4.2.2 PRBSW unit circuit description
PRBSW unit is divided into the following 7 blocks.
1. PROBE CONNECT (Probe connector block) (PRB PCB)
Interfaces with the probe.
EUB-5500 can connect three probes.
2. SEL_SW & RELAY (High voltage SW and relay block to switch the vibrator) (PRB PCB)
A circuit to connect 48CH of transducer elements for transmit/receive out of maximum
192CH of transducer elements with the transmit/receive circuit system.
One system is provided for PROBE1 and 2, and one for PROBE3. Connection with
PROBE1 and PROBE2 is switched by a relay.
3. T_AMP (Transmit AMP block) (AWP PCB)
A circuit to amplify transmit signals sent from DBF PCB.
Amplified signals drive the transducer as transmit signal.
4. T/R_DIV (Transmit/Receive separating circuit block) (AWP PCB)
A circuit to separate extremely fine receive signal from high voltage transmit signal.
Also, it is mounted with an attenuation circuit to prevent waveform of receive signals
adjacent to those of high level from distorted due to amplification by PreAMP and gain
control AMP.
5. PREAMP (Primary stage amplifier block) (AWP PCB)
A circuit to amplify receive signals by 26dB.
6. TGCAMP (Gain control amplifier block) (AWP PCB)
An amplifier to amplify receive signals according to setting of B-Gain in order to create
optimum image by setting receive signal to appropriate input voltage level for the AD
converter.
It realizes uniform images by varying amplification factor in the depth direction.
7. R_FIL (Reception wave filter block) (AWP PCB)
A filter circuit to remove a phenomenon called aliasing that occurs when the AD
converter (Analog to Digital) converts receive signal.
4-4 L1E-EA0229
PROBE Receive Line
CONNECT
PROBE1 RELAY
SEL_SW
PROBE
TGC ＲｅｃｅｉｖｅＳｉｇｎａｌ
CONNECT T/R DIV PREAMP R_FIR
AMP Ｔｏ DBF
PROBE2
PROBE SEL_SW
CONNECT
4-5
T_AMP
PROBE3
Transmit Line
Transmit wave signal

From DBF
Fig. 4.2.1
4.2.1 PRBSW unit Block Diagram
L1E-EA0229
4.2.3 DBF PCB circuit description
DBF PCB is divided into the following 4 blocks.
1. Digital Beam Former ASIC (Transmit/Receive beam forming block ••• ASIC)
Generates transmit wave signals based on ultrasound transmit focus data.
Also, beam-formes received signals based on receive focus data then demodulates them
and outputs to EPI PCB as complex signal of I and Q.
Transmit and receive wave focus data is stored in SRAM.
2. AMP (Transmit signal output block)
Amplifies an analog signal (transmit signal) outputted from ASIC by about twofold and
outputs to AWP PCB.
3. ADC (A/D converter block)
Converts received signal (analog signal) outputted from PRBSW PCB to digital signal
and outputs to ASIC.
4. ASIC Controller (Control block)
Controls interface to sPCI BUS (cf. Section 4.2.4) and each ASIC and SRAM.
5. DUS Controller(Digital US control block)
Following instructions on the type of ultrasound beam and shot direction outputted
from US-Scan Controller of EPI PCB, it controls PRBSW PCB and DBF PCB. Digital
control to PRBSW PCB is through serial communication.
4-6 L1E-EA0229
PRBSW Serial I/O
DUS
Controller TGC Control

DBF sPCI Bus
(to AWP)
(from EPI)
ASIC
Controller
SRAM
for Mixing
SRAM SRAM SRAM SRAM SRAM

4-7
SRAM SRAM
for for ・・・・・・・・ for for for for for
Receiving Transmission Receiving Transmission Receiving Receiving Receiving
Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital

・・・・・・・・ 24
Beam Beam Beam Beam Beam DBF_I,Q
(to EPI)
ADC AMP ADC AMP ADC ADC ADC

・・・・・・・・
ADIN_N,P 48
48 (to AWP)
T
(from AWP)
24 STCW
L1E-EA0229
Fig.4.2.3 DBF P.C.B. Block Diagram (to CW)

4.2.4 EPI board circuit explanation
EPI Board consists of next 14 blocks.
1. P/S Conv.（Parallel Serial Conversion）

The Parallel complex data from DBF Board is converted to Serial complex data in this
block.
2. LPF （Low Pass Filter）

Filter processing of the complex data from PS Conv Block is carried out by this LPF.
3. Decim （Decimation:Data Pick Up）

The number of Filtered data is lessened according to display depth. The number
changes also with the sizes of CFM ROI..
4. WPI （RF Interpolation & Pulse Inversion）

Processing of RF Interpolation or Pulse Inversion is performed.
5. Digital-TGC （Digital Time Gain Control）

Digital Time Gain Control is performed at the time of a B(M)-mode.
6. TCI I/F （TCI Bus Interface）

The data after signal processing is changed into a TCI Bus format, and it transmits to a
MAP Board.
7. US-Scan Controller (US scanning controller)

The kind of ultrasound beam, the transmitting direction, and data taking-in timing of
signal processing blocks is controlled by DMA sequencer.
8. US-SYNC Generator (US synchronized signal generator)

It generates the signal which synchronized with ultrasonic transmission of Y-SYNC*
etc. according to PRF.
9. CLK Generator (Generating Clocks)

From a 125MHz crystal oscillator, it generates 8ns, 16ns, 20ns, 32ns, 40ns, 64ns, and
the 4 time cycle clock of transmitting frequency. Clock to other boards is outputted by
LVDS.
4-8 L1E-EA0229
10. PCI Bridge
It connects EPI Board to the PCI bus of the system PC section.
11. sPCI Bridge

It connects EPI Board to the DBF and BIO Board by sPCI Bus. Therefore, port I/O of
their Board can be accessed from PC.
12. Audio DAC (Audio Signal D/A Converter)

D/A conversion of the Digital Doppler Audio signal (IIS Format) is carried out for a
speaker output.
13. SIG SEL & AMP （Select Signal of speaker output & Audio amplifier）
The L/R stereo signal inside a EPI Board and the L/R stereo signal from the outside are
changed, and electric power amplification for driving a speaker is performed.
14. System ID
The equipment ID which can be read from software is given using ID chip.
4-9 L1E-EA0229
FPGA
from DBF
24 to MAP
USRF-I 8
(Fujinon Data) P/S 24 LPF
24
Decim
24
WPI
24
Digital 24 TCI I/F TCIA
24 Conv. -TGC 8
USRF-Q TCIB
from MAP
Sound Data (I S)
2
US-Scan
125MHz Clock Controller TCI header
OSC. Generator Audio
DAC
to SP
US-Sync Sig Sel L
System ID Generator sPCI-Bridge PCI-Bridge & AMP R
to F/E,BIO,Fujinon
sPCI-Bus (Local-Bus) 33MHz
33MHz 32bit PCI-Bus
Fig4.2.3　
Fig4.2.3　EPI PCB Block Diagram
4 - 10 L1E-EA0229
. 4.2.5 MAP PCB circuit description
4.2.5.1 General Description

MAP PCB is divided into the following 6 blocks.
These 6 Blocks are processed by four MAPs (Media Accelerated Processor) carried in two MAP
PCBs.
I BW Echo
Q Processing BW
To
Video Board
BWDSC
TCI Dop
I Doppler
From I I/F Q Calculation
EPI PCB Q
Doppler Sound
CFMDSC
I Color Doppler CFM
Q Calculation
Fig4.2.4 MAP PCB Block Diagram
1. TCI I/F
This block extracts monochrome data, Doppler data and CFM data from the TCI (Transport
Channel Interfaces) data from EPI PCB.
2. BW Echo Processing
This block calculates monochrome scalar data from complex data.
3. Doppler Calculation
This block calculates pulse wave Doppler data or continuous wave Doppler data from
complex data.
4. Color Doppler Calculation

This block calculates CFM data from complex data.
4 - 11 L1E-EA0229
5. CFMDSC
This block performs image processing such as smoothing and SCC to CFM data, and
constructs a CFM image data by Scan Conversion.
6. BWDSC
This block performs image processing, such as Enhance and SCC to monochrome data, and
constructs a monochrome image data by Scan Conversion. And monochrome image data is
compounded with the CFM image data from the CFMDSC block, and is transmitted to a
video board.
4.2.5.2 BW Echo Processing

A processing flow is shown in the following
Envelope １． Detects envelope by orthogonal detection for complex data.
Log
２． Applies logarithmic compression to image data that is now
intensity information.
Pre-Gamma
３． Applies gamma correction to image data applied with

logarithmic compression.
4 - 12 L1E-EA0229
4.2.5.3 Doppler Calculation
Decimation １． Decimates complex data
２． Removes low frequency signal components from Doppler data

Wall Filter
by high pass filter.
Gain Control ３． Amplifies and attenuates Doppler data.
I2S ４． Converts Doppler sound data into I2S（Inter IC Sound）

data.
Doppler Sound
Window Process ５． Multiplies Doppler data by window function.
６． Carries out frequency analysis of Doppler data based on the

FFT
Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT) algorithm.
Power Calculation ７． Calculates brightness of each frequency component from

Doppler complex signal.
８． Applies image processing such as MAX sampling and
Image Process
gamma correction to Doppler data.
4 - 13 L1E-EA0229
4.2.5.4 Color Doppler Calculation
MTI Filter １． Removes unnecessary low velocity signal components form

body tissue structure such as cardiac wall.
Blood Flow Calculation ２． Calculates complex signal of velocity of body tissue motion
Body Tissue Velocity (R & I) from through the MTI filter, and calculates complex signal of
Blood Flow Velocity (R & I)
Blood Flow Intensity
velocity of blood flow, instantaneous reflection intensity of
Blood Flow Variance blood flow and velocity variance of blood flow from MTI filter.
３． Calculates average velocity of body tissue motion and
Velocity average velocity of blood flow.
Calculation
Vmain Vsub Abs Vari
４． Suppresses CFM artifacts from average velocity of body
tissue motion, average velocity of blood flow and reflection
Artifact Suppression
intensity of blood flow.
Velo ５． Amplifies and attenuates CFM data.
Gain
６． Calculates CFA dynamic range in the CFA mode.

CFA Dyn
７． Interpolates complex data of body tissue velocity,
complex data of blood velocity, reflection intensity of
Interpolation
blood flow and velocity variance of blood flow in the
beam direction to double the number of lines.
4 - 14 L1E-EA0229
4.2.5.6 CFMDSC
CFM Data
Smoothing １． Applies smoothing process by median filter or Convolution

filter
SCC
２． Applies frame correlation process.

Cine
Cine I/F
Memory
Data Selector
３． Interfaces with Cine Memory.
(Velo/Abs or Velo/Vari)
Scan Conversion
４． Selects two data from velocity data, velocity variance data
and reflection intensity data according to color map.
X-Y Convolution Filter
５． Constructs a CFM image data by Scan Conversion and

CFM Image Data Affine transformation.
６． Applies smoothing process to a CFM image data.
4 - 15 L1E-EA0229
4.2.5.7 BWDSC
BW Data Dop Data
Data Select & Enhance １． Selects monochrome data or Doppler data and applies
enhance process.
SCC
２． Applies frame correlation process.
Cine I/F Cine

Memory
３． Interfaces with Cine Memory.
Scan Conversion
CFM Image Data ４． Constructs a monochrome image data by Scan

Conversion and Affine transformation.
Post Process
５． Applies post process and RGB conversion to monochrome

image data and color image data, compound image, and
transfer to a video board.
4 - 16 L1E-EA0229
4.2.6 KB & KBIF PCB description
4.2.6.1 KB
Provides appropriate keystroke, key click and illumination by backlight LED as an
control panel of rubber sheet.
(1) LED
Two types of red and green LED. Turned ON/OFF according to the key status.
(2) Key switch
Depressing the key switch outputs ON and releasing it outputs OFF signal.
(3) Toggle switch
Pressing upward or downward the toggle switch outputs ON signal and returning to
the center outputs OFF signal.
(4) Rotary encoder
Depressing the rotary encoder outputs ON signal and releasing it outputs OFF signal.
Turning the rotary encoder clockwise outputs positive value and counterclockwise
negative value.
(5) Slide variable resistor
Variation of resistance outputs variation of data value.
4.2.6.2 KBIF PCB

Controls overall keyboard unit for communication with the main unit (RS232C, PC/2
keyboard, PS/2 mouse) and processes corresponding to each command.
(1) Key scan
Depressing the key obtains a key scan data from the scan line output.
(2) Rotary switch and rotary encoder scan
Depressing the rotary switch detects signals and recognizes the rotary switch selected
to make it ON. Releasing it makes it OFF.
Setting data to any specific address selects a rotary encoder to obtain data from the
specific address.
(3) Slide variable resistor scan
Periodically obtains data of the slide variable resistor converted by the A/D converter
built in CPU.
(4) Interruption process by each signal
Depressing the FREEZE key obtains data from IRQ6.
SYNC_ERR signal acquires data from IRQ5 based on data sent from the system.
R-wave trigger signal acquires data from IRQ7 based on data sent from the ECG unit.
SPARE0 and 1 signals acquire data from the data bus based on data sent from the
system.
(5) PS/2 keyboard interface
Acquires a control command for the OADG standard section of the keyboard by
communicating with the system via the PS/2 keyboard interface.
4 - 17 L1E-EA0229
Transmits data detected by key scan (OADG standard keys) to the system.
(6) RS232C serial interface
Communicates with the system via the RS232C serial interface to acquire a control
command for the supplementary function section.
Transmits data detected by key scan (exclusive keys for EUB), rotary switch scan,
rotary encoder scan, slide variable resistor scan, etc.
(7) Version signal readout
Acquires data from a specific address when turning ON the power.
(8) ON/OFF control of key switch LED
Controls backlight LED (green and red) of keys on request from the system.
(9) Buzzer output control
Sounds the buzzer when detecting key ON.
4.2.6.3 TR unit
Turning the ball acquires relative coordinates in the X and Y directions and outputs data.
In addition, takes in signals corresponding to 2 buttons and outputs them.
(1) Receiving data
Communicates in the serial interface of clock sync to set transmission parameters
based on commands from the main unit.
(2) Transmitting data
Communicates in the serial interface of clock sync to transmit button, XY sign and XY
overflow data in the 1st byte, and relative coordinate data in the X direction in the 2nd
byte and relative coordinate data in the Y direction in the 3rd byte.
4 - 18 L1E-EA0229
COM1 RS232C
CN61
J4
TR CN62 KEYBOARD
CNK1 CNK1 CN62
CN63 MOUSE
CN63
CN80
CNK2 CNK2 CN80
KB KBIF PCB
Fig. 4.2.5
4.2.5 Keyboard Unit Block Diagram
4 - 19 L1E-EA0229
4.3 BIO Unit EZU-EK25
Composition : EZU-EK25 is an option of EUB-5500 and consists of the following
PCB.
1. BIO PCB
Outline of PCB : The PCB executes amplification and filter process of ECG signal,
and controls for display on the monitor.
4.3.2 BIO PCB circuit description

BIO PCB is divided into the following 14 blocks.
1. Instrumentation Amp.
Amplifies the signals obtained from 3 ECG electrodes.
2. Amplifier
Amplifies ECG signal.
3. Volume control
Adjusts the ECG signal to an appropriate volume.
4. Filter
Cuts high frequency with the filter.
5. R-WAVE
The comparator to pick up R-wave from ECG signal.
6. A/D converter
A/D converts the signal outputted from the analog part.
7. Digital filter
Digital processing of a low path filter, a high path filter, a position variable, a
notch filter, etc. is carried out to the A/D converted data.
8. R-Trig control
Outputs R-Trig signal corresponding to ECG ON/OFF.
9. Clock generation circuit
Produces the reference clock (10msec) for Sync1, Sync2 and Heart rate
measurement.
10. Delay counter
Counts down the value given from the CPU and produces Sync1 and Sync2
signals.
11. Sync１/２ circuit
Makes the control signal when scanning the US signal with Sync mode and also
produces the control data for display of Sync mark on BIO waveform displayed on
the monitor.
4 - 20 L1E-EA0229
12. Heart rate counter
Counts the time between R-wave and next R-wave of ECG waveform and read its
counted value with CPU to measure the heart rate value.
13. Time-stamp controller
Controls the signal showing the time which synchronized with US Image,
and makes Time-stamp data in accordance with the timing of ECG data creation.
14. USB data generator
Makes the serial data for USB transmission of the Time-stamp data, ECG data,
SYNC 1/2 and R-trig signal.
4 – 21 L1E-EA0229
ECG R-Trig
R-WAVE
Detector
（5)
ECG signal
ECG（３CH) Instrumentation Amplifier Volume Filter
Amplifier
（2) （4)
（1)
（3)
4 – 22
図４.
図４.３.１ BIO P.C.B. Block Diagram 1
L1E-EA0229
ECG（３CH) A/D
　Analog part
convert
（6)
ＦＰＧＡ
To R-trig
R-Trig
control
（8) USB D+/D-
Digital Filter USB data
generation
（7)
（14)
SYNC1/2 SYNC1/
control
4 – 23
（11)
Clock Delay
Heart late signal
Heart late
generation counter
control
（9) （10)
（12)
Time Stamp signal

Time Stamp
control circuit
（13)
図４.
図４.３.２ BIO P.C.B. Block Diagram 2
L1E-EA0229
4.4 Steerable CW Doppler Unit EZU-ST5
Composition : EZU-ST5 is an option of EUB-5500 and consists of the following
PCBs.
1. CW PCB
Outline of PCB : This is for steerable CW Doppler by sector probe. CW PCB carry out
phase arrangement, addition, demodulation and filter process.
4.4.2 CW circuit description

CW PCB is divided into the following 11 blocks.
1. TRANSMITTING BUFFER (Transmitting buffer part)
A buffer to drive transmit Amp of AWP P.C.B., to the transmit signal sent from
DBF P.C.B.
2. MIXER (Demodulation circuit part)
Detects the element of Doppler shift by mixing with the reference wave.
3. HIGH PASS FILTER (High frequency pass filter part)
Removes the unnecessary low frequency element contained in doppler signal by
body movement, to receive signal of each channnel.
4. ADD (Adding part)
Adds the received signals.
5. HIGH PASS FILTER (High frequency pass filter part)
Removes the unnecessary low frequency element contained in doppler signal by
body movement, for added receive signal.
6. GAIN (Gain process part)
Amplifies or attenuates Doppler signal.
7. ANALOG WALL FILTER (High area pass filter part)
Deletes unnecessary low frequency element which is mixed into Doppler signal by
body movement.
8. ANTI ALIASING FILTER (Anti aliasing filter part)
Deletes unnecessary high frequency element to prevent aliasing by A/D converter
described later.
9. AD CONVERTER (AD convert part)
Converts the added receive signal to digital signal and sends to EPI P.C.B.
10. CW CONTROL (CW control part)
Controls the frequency setting for reference wave, the gain setting and other
settings.
11. LO GENERATOR (Mixing clock generate part)
Generates the clock of Mixer.
4 – 24 L1E-EA0229
4.5 CW Doppler Unit EZU-CW4
Composition : EZU-CW4 is an option of EUB-5500 and consists of the following
PCB.
1. CW PCB
Outline of PCB : This is for CW Doppler by single piece probe, and carries out
transmission and reception, demodulation and filter process of
Doppler signal.
4.5.2 CW PCB circuit description

CW PCB is divided into the following 11 blocks.
1. REFERENCE CLOCK GENERATOR (Reference clock generation circuit part)
Generates transmitting signal clock for CW and reference signal having 90
degrees different phase.
2. TRANSMITTING CIRCUIT (Transmission circuit part)
Outputs transmitting signal clock for CW to the probe through tuning amplifier
and driver circuits.
3. PRE AMP (First step amplification circuit part)
Tunes and amplifies the receiving signal from the single piece prove.
4. NOTCH FILTER (Notch filter circuit part)
Deletes the carrier element, which leak into the circuit, so that the receiving
signal does not saturate with them.
5. MIXER (Demodulation circuit part)
Detects the element of Doppler shift by mixing with the reference wave.
6. GAIN (Gain process part)
Amplifies or attenuates Doppler signal.
7. ANALOG WALL FILTER (High area pass filter part)
Deletes unnecessary low frequency element which is mixed into Doppler signal by
body movement.
8. ANTI ALIASING FILTER (Anti aliasing filter part)
Deletes unnecessary high frequency element to prevent aliasing by A/D converter
described later.
9. AD CONVERTER (AD convert part)
Converts the added receive signal to digital signal and sends to EPI P.C.B.
10. CW CONTROL (CW control part)
Controls the frequency setting for reference wave, the gain setting and other
settings.
11. LO GENERATOR (Mixing clock generate part)
Generates the clock of Mixer.
4 – 25 L1E-EA0229
T_CWS<23..0>
STCW<23..0> TRANSMITTING (From DBF)
BUFFER
MIXER
USRF_I
24 24 24
HIGH PASS HIGH PASS <23..0>
ADD I (To EPI)
FILTER FILTER
PREOUT ANTI
ANALOG
<23..0> GAIN ALIASING ADC
MIXER WALL
(From AWP ) 24 FILTER
24 FILTER
HIGH PASS ADD HIGH PASS USRF_Q
FILTER FILTER Q <23..0>
(To EPI)
LO GENERATOR
24 LO_I CW
CONTROL
STCW PENCIL
24 LO_Q
CW
REFERENCE
CLOCK
TRANSMITTING
4 – 26
GENERATOR
CWTR CIRCUIT
MIXER
(To CW Probe)
PRE NOTCH MIXER

CWS AMP FILTER
(From CW Probe) CW P.C.B.
4F0 REFERRENCE CLOCK CONTROL DATA & CWADCLK

(From EPI P.C.B) PHASE SHIFT DATA (From EPI P.C.B)
EZU-CW4 (From EPI P.C.B)
EZU-ST5
Fig. 4.5.1
4.5.1 EZU-ST5
EZU-ST5/CW4
/CW4 Block Diagram
L1E-EA0229
Section 5 Power Unit
5.1 General and Circuit Description

Composition: EUB-5500 power is composed of the following units.
1. HM-071C : Main power unit.
HM-071K : DC-DC converter unit.
Power unit circuit description:

1. LINE FILTER (Line filter block)
Removes noise on the AC line.
2. TRANS (Transformer block)
Switches over voltage so that each circuit can operate in optimum voltage as well as
isolates the primary and secondary circuits. A temperature fuse is built in the
unit.(120℃)
3. PFC CIRCUIT (PFC circuit block)
Consists of PFC circuit and protection circuit. The PFC circuit suppresses harmonics
as well as improves distortion of voltage waveform and current wave height value to
realize power-factor improvement.
The protection circuit shuts off input by a signal from the overvoltage protection
circuit.
4. MAIN CONVERTER CIRCUIT (Main converter circuit block)
The switching conversion system converts power to voltage and supplies it to each DC
converter via transformer.
5. RECTIFICATION AND SMOOTHING CIRCUIT (Rectification and smoothing circuit
block)
After rectifying by the diode, the power is smoothed by the capacitor to get DC source.
6. REGULATOR CIRCUIT (Regulation circuit block)
The series type regulator system stabilizes DC output and reduces output ripples.
7. OVER CURRENT PROTECTION CIRCUIT (Overcurrent protection circuit block)
When the load is short-circuited or overcurrent occurs, this circuit protects the load or
power circuit.
8. OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION CIRCUIT (Overvoltage protection circuit block)
Protects the load and power circuit when output voltage exceeds over the rating.
9． Filter Circuit
The noise from main converter is reduced by this circuit.
10 Chopper circuit
This circuit provide stable DC output for digital circuit.
5-1 L1E-EA0229
FILTER BＯＡＲＤ
MAIN CONVERTOR DC BOARD

HM－
HM－071C
LINE INPUT
MAIN CONVERTOR AC BOARD

LINE FILTER
PFC CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT_ MAIN　CONVERTER
BREAKER CIRCUIT(DC) Analog HV Unit /
Analog LV Unit
HM－
HM－071K
RECTIFICATION
PFC CIRCUIT FILTER AND
SMOOTHING
CIRCUIT
MAIN
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT(AC)
CHOPPER REGULATOR
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
5-2
TRANS
Analog HV Unit US-UNIT OVER

OVER
CURRENT CURRENT
PROTECTION PROTECTION
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
Analog LV Unit US-UNIT

OVER VOLTAGE OVER VOLTAGE
PROTECTION PROTECTION
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
AC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT

L1J-EA0229
Fig5.1 POWER UNIT Block Diagram

5.2 Power Unit Connectors
HM-071C : CN1 : Connector for the circuit breaker.
CN2 : DC output connector for the analog unit (high-voltage).
CN3 : DC output connector for the analog unit (low-voltage).
CN4 : DC output connector for the digital unit.
CN5 : Connector to switch over AC input voltages.
NTSC system : AC100/110/120V can be switched over.
PAL system : AC220/230/240V can be switched over.
CN6 : AC output connector for the outlet.
CN7 : AC output connector for the monitor
HM-071K : PCB terminal connector : DC(+30V) input connector.

(DC output for the digital unit of HM-071C)
PCB terminal connector : DC output connector for the digital unit.
Connection specification:
HM-071C
Connector Pin No. Signal Remark
No. name
1 OUT L
Input of circuit breaker
2 OUT N
CN1
3 IN L
Output of circuit breaker
4 IN N
5-3 L1E-EA0229
Connector Pin No. Signal name Output Remark
No. voltage
A1 +6.0 +6V Output for AWP PCB
A2 ‐6.0 -6V Output for AWP PCB
A3 +12Vp +12V Output for PRB PCB and AWP PCB
A4 ‐12Vp -12V Output for AWP PCB
A5 NC
A6 +75V +75V Output for AWP PCB
A7 +75-GND
A8 +12Var +4.5∼+12V Controlled by STVC (5bit) of CN3.
Output for AWP PCB
A9 -100V-GND
CN2 A10 ‐100V -100V Output for PRB PCB
B1 +6.0-GND
B2 -6.0-GND
B3 +12Vp-GND
B4 -12Vp-GND
B5 NC
B6 -75V -75V Output for AWP PCB
B7 -75-GND
B8 +12Var-GND
B9 +100V-GND
B10 +100V +100V Output for PRB PCB

No. voltage
A1 STVC0
A2 STVC1 - Control signal of +12Var
A3 STVC2
A4 NC
A5 +5Vc-GND
A6 +5Vc +5V Output for DBF PCB
A7 -12Vb-GND
A8 -12Vb -12V Output for CW & DBF PCB
CN3
B1 STVC3
- Control signal of +12Var
B2 STVC4
B3 GND(STVC)
B4 NC
B5 +5Vc-GND
B6 +5Vc +5V Output for DBF PCB
B7 +12Vb-GND
B8 +12Vb +12V Output for CW & DBF PCB
5-4 L1E-EA0229
No. voltage
A1 +12V
+12V
B1 +12V-GND
A2、A3、B3 +30V Output for HM-071K
A4、B2、B4 +30V-GND +30V
CN4 Output for PC and HM-071K.

A5 +5VSB +5V
Stand-by power of PC
B5 GND
A6 P-CONT −
B6 PROTECT − Protection signal
Connector Input voltage Connection

No.
100Ｖ/220V A1-B2, A2-B1 short
CN5 110Ｖ/230V A1-A3, A2-B1 short
120Ｖ/240V A1-B3, A2-B1 short
Connector Pin Output voltage Remark

No. No.
1 0Ｖ
2 100Ｖ/220V
CN6 3 110Ｖ/230V For the AC outlet
4 120Ｖ/240V
5 GND
Connector Pin Output voltage Remark

No. No.
1 0Ｖ
CN７ 2 100Ｖ For the monitor
3 GND
5-5 L1E-EA0229
HM-071K
PCB Signal name Output Remark GND (PCB
terminal voltage terminal
connector connector)
No.
1a∼1e
+12V-GND -
2a∼2e
3a∼3e +12V - 12a∼12e
5a∼5e 14a∼14e
↓ +30V-GND - 16a∼16e
7a∼7e 18a∼18e
9a∼9e 20a∼20e
↓ +30V - ↓
11a∼11e 26a∼26e
13a∼e +5VSB ‐ 31a∼31e
15e P-CONT - ↓
17e PW-OK - 38a∼38e
19e PROTECT - 43a∼43e
27a∼27e ↓
↓ +5Va +5V Power for 52a∼52e
29a∼29e digital system 59a∼59e
39a∼39e (SELV system) ↓
↓ +5Vb +5V 62a∼62e
41a∼41e 68a∼68e
53a∼53e ↓
↓ +2.5V +2.5V 80a∼80e
57a∼57e 65a∼65e
63a∼63e ↓
↓ +3.3Va +3.3V 99a∼99e
66a∼66e 103a∼103e
81a∼81e ↓
↓ +3.3Vb -3.3V 113a∼113e
83a∼83e ↓
100a∼100e 116a∼116e
+12Va +12V
101a∼101e
111a∼111e -12Va -12V
5-6 L1E-EA0229
HM－
HM－071C MB
LINE INPUT
HM－
HM－071K
From/To CN4 CN4
CN1
Circuit Breaker
PCB TERMINAL To US-UNIT
Input Voltage
CN5 PRB PCB
Select
To CN6 CN2 AWP PCB

CN2
AC OUTLET
5–7
CW PCB
To MONITOR CN7 CN3
CN3
DBF PCB
BIO PCB
Fig5.2 POWER UNIT CONNECT Diagram

L1E-EA0229
Table 5.1 Table of Power Supplies by Unit and PCB
HM-071K(digital unit) HM-071C（analog low-voltage unit） HM-071C（analog high-voltage unit）

+2.5V +3.3Va +3.3Vb +5VSB +5Va +5Vb +12Va -12Va +5Vc +12Vb -12Vb +12var +5Vp +12Vp -12Vp +6.0V -6.0V +75V -75V +100V -100V
PC-MB ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
HD ○ ○
VIDEO ○ ○
PC
FD ○ ○
Unit
5–8
CD-R ○ ○
EPI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
MAP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PRB ○ ○ ○ ○
AWP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
US CW ○ ○
Unit DBF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
BIO ○ ○ ○ ○
KB ○
DBF EPI MAP EPI PC-MB EPI EP EPI DBF DBF DBF AWP AWP AWP AWP AWP AWP AWP AWP PRB PRB
Contact TP TP TP CN10 TP TPI TP Contact Contact Contact TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP C3 C6
Check point
101A-E 3.3VIN +3.3VIN +5VSB 19, 20 5VIN +12V -12V 61A-E 95A-E 97A-E +12Var +5V +12V -12V +6V -6V +75V -75V
(TP30) (TP31)
L1E-EA0229
Section 6 Monitor Unit
6.1 Composition
The EUB-5500 monitor consists of the following unit.
EZU-MT24-S1
6.2 Specification
(1) Signal input impedance : 75Ω terminated
(2) Maximum gain : 32dB or more (with maximum contrast)
(3) Frequency characteristic : 60Hz ~ 30MHz (±3dB)
(When clicking the center of both contrast VR and
brightness VR)
(4) Power input : AC100V±15% (50/60Hz)
(5) Power consumption : About 90VA
(6) Environmental requirements : Temperature 0 ~ 40ºC
Relative humidity 10 ~ 90% (No condensation)
(7) Weight : About 18kg
(8) Signal interface
a) Connector : Mini D-Sub 15-pin
b) Connections : See below:
Pin No. Standard When displaying external TV signal
1 Red Video signal Red Video signal
2 Green Video signal Green Video signal + sync signal
3 Blue Video signal Blue Video signal
4 StandardÅÆExternal StandardÅÆExternal
switching signal switching signal
5 GND GND
6 GND (Red) GND (Red)
7 GND (Green) GND (Green)
8 GND (Blue) GND (Blue)
9 NC NC
10 GND GND
11 (Unused) (Unused)
12 NC NC
13 Horizontal sync signal Horizontal sync signal
14 Vertical sync signal Vertical sync signal
15 NC NC
c) StandardÅÆExternal switchover signal : • Signal level TTL level

• Specification Standard : H level
External : L level
6-1 L1E-EA0229
(9) Display : See below
Standard When displaying external
TV signal
640×480 800×600 NTSC PAL
Horizontal 260±4mm 258±4mm 260±4mm 257±4mm
Vertical 195±3mm 193.5±3mm 195±3mm 193±3mm
(10) Input signal level: See below. (Refer to Fig. 6.1.)

a) Standard
Level
Input signal
640×480 800×600
R 0.7Vp-p
G 0.7Vp-p
B 0.7Vp-p
H-SYNC TTL
V-SYNC TTL
b) When displaying external TV signal

Level
Input signal
NTSC PAL
R 0.716Vp-p 0.698Vp-p
G 0.716Vp-p 0.698Vp-p
G + SYNC
SYNC 0.286Vp-p 0.301Vp-p
B 0.716Vp-p 0.698Vp-p
(11) Input signal timing: See below. (Refer to Fig. 6.2.)

Displaying external
Standard
Item Formula TV signal Unit
640×480 800×600 NTSC PAL
a Display time 25.94 25.76 52.04 51.52 μs
b Blank time c+d+e 5.84 6.24 11.50 12.48 μs
c Front porch 0.38 1.06 1.78 1.76 μs
d Pulse width of horizontal 3.92 3.32 4.70 4.68 μs
sync signal
e Back porch 1.54 1.86 5.02 6.04 μs
f Cycle of horizontal sync a+b 31.78 32.00 63.54 64.00 μs
signal
g Frequency of horizontal 1/f 31.47 31.25 15.735 15.625 kHz
sync signal
h Display time (480H) (600H) (240H) (289H) ms
i Blank time j+k+l (45H) (25H) (22H) (25H) ms
j Front porch (10H) (1H) (4H) (3H) ms
k Pulse width of vertical (2H) (3H) (3H) (3H) ms
sync signal
l Back porch (33H) (21H) (15H) (19H) ms
m Cycle of vertical sync h+i (525H) (625H) (262H) (314H) ms
signal
n Frequency of vertical 1/m 59.94 50.00 60 50 Hz
sync signal
Non- Non-
Scan system Interlaced Interlaced —
interlaced interlaced
6-2 L1E-EA0229
Standard
R.G.B.
“H”
SYNC (TTL level)
“L”
Displaying external TV signal
R.G.B.
SYNC
Fig. 6.1
6.1 Input Signal Level
HORIZONTAL
b a
d e
c f
VERTICAL
i h
k l
j m
Fig. 6.2
6.2 Input Signal Timing
6-3 L1E-EA0229
6.3 Installation
6.3.1 Cautions in installing the monitor
Convergence of the color monitor is affected from external induction magnetic field. Avoid
installing the equipment in any region where induction magnetic field exists. Also observe
the following cautions to obtain stable performance for a long period of time.
(1) Ventilation
To obtain stable performance for a long period of time, keep temperature inside the
cabinet below 50ºC.
Especially fully ventilate in the vertical direction.
(2) Leakage magnetic field
Do not install the monitor in any region near the transformer, fan or the other leakage
magnetic field sources as far as possible. Alternating current leakage magnetic flux
causes fluctuation of images, and direct current magnetic flux (magnet or the like) causes
raster distortion or degradation of image color purity. If it is necessary to install this
equipment in such environment, satisfy the following conditions.
That is, for the transformer, attach the shielding ring and shorting ring to minimize
leakage flux and design its winding of a balanced type. For devices other than the
transformer, use magnetic shielding or non-inductive winding to minimize leakage
magnetic flux. Effect to the monitor may appear in a magnetic field of 0.01 Gauss or
more.
(3) Humidity
This monitor may be operated in a range of 10~90% relative humidity; however, it is
recommended to operate it in a range of 30~70% relative humidity since life of connecting
points of connectors, switches, variable resistors, etc. could become shorter.
(4) Ambient illumination
This monitor uses the black matrix tube showing excellent performance against glare or
reflection in a bright room.
However, to reduce fatigue of operator’s eyes, install it so as to avoid any light source that
may directly illuminate the tube face of CRT.
(5) Dust
This monitor has been designed to minimize accumulation of dust; however, high static
electric field extracts dust through the ventilation holes of cabinet. Therefore, take care
to minimize dust around the monitor.
(6) Power supply voltage
This monitor is built in with the voltage stabilizer circuit, so images are not affected from
voltage fluctuation within the specification.
However, avoid operation exceeding ±10% to prevent excessive heat inside the monitor
and reduced life of the monitor.
Either of 50Hz and 60Hz can be used without modification of the equipment.
(7) Dust on CRT face
Applied high voltage has tendency to collect dust on the tube face of CRT, and it
deteriorates brightness and focusing quality.
6-4 L1E-EA0229
To remove this dust periodically, use soft cloth moistened with silicone type glass cleaner.
Never use thinner or the like instead of the cleaner.
6.3.2 Cautions for safety

NOTE: Observe all the cautions and notices concerning safety labeled on the chassis or CRT.
(1) Hazardous voltage exists in the monitor. When removing the cover to work in the
equipment, be sure to observe general electrical cautions.
(2) Before removing or replacing PCB (module) and parts, turn OFF the power.
(3) Residual charge may remain in the anode cap. Greatest care should be taken for
replacement or inspection maintenance of CRT.
(4) Do not replace any parts at your discretion. Fire, X-ray or other hazard may result.
6.3.3 Replacing the fuse

When the fuse is to be replaced, use that supplemented to the monitor or the same type and
capacity.
The fuse is mounted on the main board (AVB401) inside the monitor. Be sure to turn OFF
the power before removing the cover and replacing the fuse.
6.3.4 Degaussing
This monitor is equipped with the automatic and manual degaussing function.
When turning ON the power, it is automatically degaussed. If the monitor is magnetized in
any reason and color purity of the image is deteriorated, remove the cover and press the
DEGAUSS switch on the VIDEO board (AVB411) to manually degauss.
If this action cannot fully degauss the monitor, use the degaussing coil commercially
available to do so externally.
6.4 Description of Operation

6.4.1 General
This monitor is composed roughly of the following 6 modules:
① Brown tube
② Main board
③ VIDEO board
④ Socket board
⑤ Control board
⑥ Front control board
6.4.2 Brown tube (CRT)
CRT is designed to make a light spot on the fluorescent screen by electron beam emitted
from the electron gun, deflect the electron beam with the deflection coil in a constant cycle,
and display an image by a locus of this light spot.
CRT is composed of the fluorescent screen coated in three colors, shadow mask and electron
gun to emit three electron beams. The electron gun is composed of metal coil heater,
cathode and grid arranged on a line.
6-5 L1E-EA0229
The 3-beam electron gun is arranged in line, so section of three electron beams is arranged
in line horizontally.
Three electron beams emitted from the electron gun are deflected to scan whole fluorescent
screen. Electron beam is blocked off by the shadow mask and hits fluorescent material
only corresponding to each color when it passes through the hole.
A set of dots emits light of red, green and blue depending on color signal intensity to
reproduce every possible color.
6.4.3 Main board (AVB401)

The main board is composed of the following:
① Power supply circuit
② Horizontal deflection and high voltage circuit
③ Vertical deflection circuit
6.4.3.1 Power supply circuit

(1) Main circuit
Input voltage is supplied via the filter and rush current limit circuit. This is rectified
and smoothed by the rectifier diode (D100) and input capacitor (C103) to obtain DC
coarse rectified voltage. This is switched by the main transistor (Q101) and
transformer (T100) to produce each voltage of P120 (+120V), P70 (+70V), P24 (+24V),
P12 (+12V), HEATER (+6.3V) and P5 (+5V).
(2) Control circuit
P120 output voltage is compared with the reference voltage by the detector circuit.
Signal from the detector circuit is fed back to the control circuit via the photo-coupler
(PC100).
The control circuit controls ON time of the main transistor (Q101) to generate
appropriate drive pulse to stabilize the output P120. Switching frequency is
controlled so as to synchronize with the horizontal deflection signal.
(3) Overvoltage and overcurrent protection
In case of overvoltage and overcurrent, this protection circuit keeps the state by IC800
when switching of Q101 stops. To restart it, turn OFF the power for 30 seconds or
more and turn ON again.
(4) +B power circuit
The +B power circuit controls +B voltage including SPCC and horizontal size
adjustment function. Output is adjusted by VR101 (for TV timing) and VR102 (for
PC timing) and stabilized by the control circuit (IC106) and switching of the transistor
(Q122). Switching frequency is controlled so as to synchronize with horizontal
deflection signal.
6.4.3.2 Horizontal deflection and high voltage circuits

In the horizontal and high voltage drive circuit, horizontal AFC circuit IC110 and drive
transistor Q119 drive the deflection coil to flow the horizontal deflection current, and also
drive the flyback transformer (FBT) to supply high voltage of about 24kV to the anode of
CRT.
6-6 L1E-EA0229
High voltage is adjusted by VR105, and stabilized by switching of transistor (Q120) and
control circuit (IC108).
If high voltage increases abnormally in any trouble, the high voltage protection circuit
(IC107) controls high voltage to reduce +B voltage, and stops switching of the horizontal
AFC circuit (IC110) to stop output. To release stop of the protection mode, the power
needs to be turned OFF and then ON.
6.4.3.3 Vertical deflection circuit

In the vertical deflection circuit, the vertical oscillation circuit (IC110) and the drive
circuit (IC109) drive the deflection coil to flow vertical deflection current.
6.4.4 VIDEO board (AVB411)

The VIDEO board is consists of the following circuits:
① Amplifiers for each channel of red, green and blue (VIDEO Amp)
② Sync separation circuit
③ NTSC/PAL signal detection circuit
④ Degauss control circuit
6.4.4.1 VIDEO Amp

(1) Image preamplifier circuit
Image input signal is supplied to the input of image preamplifier (IC300) via the AC
coupling capacitors (C318, C320 and C317).
(2) Contrast control and image post-amplifier circuit
Varying bias voltage of 24-pin of IC300 controls contrast.
Red (VR304), green (VR305) and blue (VR306) adjust gain of image amplifier channels
for a white balance of image.
Also VR308 adjusts brightness of the contrast center.
IC304 is a final stage of image amplifier to output a signal to the cathode of CRT via
the red (Q303, Q304), green (Q305, Q306) and blue (Q307, Q308).
(3) Bias control
The red (Q303, Q304), green (Q305, Q306) and blue (Q307, Q308) controls DC bias to
control brightness and white balance of raster.
The red (VR302), green (VR301) and blue (VR300) adjust white balance, while VR303
adjusts brightness of the brightness center.
6.4.4.2 Sync separation circuit

IC305 automatically separates H. SYNC and V. SYNC for following 3 modes of sync
signal input:
① Composite sync
② H /V mixed sync
③ H /V separated sync
IC305 also generates a cramp pulse in the horizontal back porch period to regenerate DC
level of the image circuit.
6-7 L1E-EA0229
6.4.4.3 NTSC/PAL signal detection circuit
Converts frequency of NTSC (fv: 60Hz) and PAL (fv: 50Hz) to voltage by the F/V converter
(IC301), and compares the voltage by the comparator (IC302) to output switchover
signals.
6.4.4.4 Degauss control circuit
The degauss switch is a momentary type. Once it is pressed, degaussing is kept for
about 10 seconds. It needs not to press continuously.
Also, when turning ON the power, degaussing is automatically effected.
6.4.5 Socket board (AVB421)

This board is mounted with CRT socket and supplies image signal, heater voltage, 1st and
2nd grid voltage and focus voltage to CRT.
6.4.6 Control board (AVB451)

Depending on each timing switchover signal, adjustment variable resistors are switched
over as shown in Table below.
Once it is set, images of respective timing can be displayed without readjustment.
Timing
Name
640×
640×480 800×
800×600 NTSC PAL
HEIGHT VR21 VR20 VR19 VR18
H-PHASE VR17 VR16 VR15 VR14
V-CENT VR13 VR12 VR11 VR10
6.4.7 Front control (AVB431)

The front control includes the brightness and contrast variable resistors.
The brightness variable resistor adjusts brightness of raster, while the contrast variable
resistor adjusts brightness of image.
Either variable resistor is provided with the center click to obtain standard brightness when
centered.
6-8 L1E-EA0229
6.4.8
Sync NTSC/PAL DG control

separation signal circuit
circuit detection
Block diagram
6-9
Power circuit
Horizontal deflection and

high voltage circuit
Vertical deflection circuit
L1E-EA0229
6.5 Adjustment
6.5.1 List of adjusters
(1) Front controller (AVB431)
Name Polarity
No. Function Position Remarks
Device No. Symbol (clockwise)
BRIGHTNESS Brightness of back With center click
1 VR1 Brighter Front
VR raster (Center default)
CONTRAST With center click
2 VR2 Brightness of image Brighter Front
VR (Center default)
(2) Main board
Name Polarity
Higher
1 VR100 P120 DC output voltage Upper Unchangeable
voltage
Horizontal screen size
2 VR101 WIDTH 1 Wider Upper
(For TV timing)
Horizontal screen size
3 VR102 WIDTH 2 Wider Upper
(For PC timing)
High voltage trip
TRIP
4 VR103 point to protect Higher Upper Unchangeable
(HV TRIP)
abnormal high voltage
Correction of side
5 VR104 SPC Upper
pinction
High voltage (Anode
6 VR105 HV ADJ Higher Upper Unchangeable
voltage)
Horizontal frequency Higher
7 VR106 H-HOLD Upper Unchangeable
sync frequency
8 FBT FOCUS Focus − Side
SCREEN
9 FBT Screen voltage (VG2) Brighter Side
(VG2)
6 - 10 L1E-EA0229
(3) VIDEO board (AVB411)
Name Polarity
Raises
1 VR300 B CUT OFF Rear
blue level
White balance of back Raises
2 VR301 G CUT OFF Rear
raster green level
Raises red
3 VR302 R CUT OFF Rear
level
SUB BRT Rated brightness of
4 VR303 Darker Rear
(SUB BRIGHTNESS) back raster
Lowers red
5 VR304 R DRIV Rear
level
White balance of lowers
6 VR305 G DRIV Rear
image green level
Lowers
7 VR306 R DRIV Rear
blue level
Output voltage of F/V
8 VR307 F/V ADJ − Rear Unchangeable
converter
SUB CONT Rated brightness of
9 VR308 Brighter Rear
(SUB CONTRAST) image
Manual degauss Press to
10 SW300 DEGAUSS SW function (for better ON Rear
color purity) (Non-lock)
(4) Control board (AVB451)
Name Polarity
1 VR10 Lower Side PAL timing
2 VR11 Vertical screen Lower Side NTSC timing
V-CENT
3 VR12 position Lower Side 800×600 timing
4 VR13 Lower Side 640×480 timing
5 VR14 To the left Side PAL timing
6 VR15 Horizontal screen To the left Side NTSC timing
H-PHASE
7 VR16 position To the left Side 800×600 timing
8 VR17 To the left Side 640×480 timing
9 VR18 Wider Side PAL timing
10 VR19 Wider Side NTSC timing
HEIGHT Vertical screen size
11 VR20 Wider Side 800×600 timing
12 VR21 Wider Side 640×480 timing
6 - 11 L1E-EA0229
6.5.2 VR adjuster layout
(1) Front controls
CONTRAST VR
POWER ON LED (VR2)
BRIGHTNESS VR
(VR1)
Layout of Front Control VR
6 - 12 L1E-EA0229
(2) Upper controls
P120 (VR100) H-HOLD (VR106)

(Fixed with adhesive) (Fixed with adhesive)
MAIN BOARD HV. ADJ (VR105)

(AVB401) (Fixed with adhesive)
SPC (VR104)
FUSE (F100)
WIDTH 2 (VR102)
TRIP (VR103) WIDTH 1 (VR101)

(Fixed with adhesive)
Layout of Upper Control VR
6 - 13 L1E-EA0229
(3) Rear controls
R DRIV
(VR304)
G DRIV
(VR305)
B DRIV
(VR306)
SUB BRT
(VR303)
R CUT OFF
(VR302)
G CUT OFF
(VR301)
B CUT OFF
(VR300)
DEGAUSS SW
(SW300)
VIDEO board SUB CONT

(AVB411) (VR308)
F/V. ADJ (VR307)

(Fixed with adhesive)
Layout of Rear Control VR
6 - 14 L1E-EA0229
(4) Side controls
CONTROL board
(AVB451)
FBT
FOCUS
SCREEN
Layout of Side Control VR
6 - 15 L1E-EA0229
6.6 Troubleshooting
Protection and
Item
Installation Internal adjustment Failure
Troubleshooting adjustment function
. Find any failure from Adjustment is not correct.
Overload protection due to

signal
of
Effect from magnetic field
Contrast and brightness

VR are set to the
CRT (with deflection yoke)

the column below.
of the other monitor, etc.

interface (Level, timing)
Control board (AVB451)

VIDEO board (AVB411)
Front control (AVB431)

Socket board (AVB411)
. Follow along the line
Main board (AVB401)

Suspected cause
connection
to the right where
Fuse is blown out.
temporary noise.
marked with “○” and
of
then follow upward to
signal cable
find suspected cause
minimum.
Mismatch
and action to be taken
Faulty
described in the upper
columns.
Refer to description in each column
Turn OFF the power

switch and wait for 1 min
Set them in the optimum

Keep clear of magnetic
to retry adjustment.
Put in the rated fuse.

Add rated waveform.
then turn ON again.
Replace the module.

Action
Connect correctly.
source.
range
Image quality
The screen rotates, missing sync. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Too narrow screen width ○ WIDTH 1, 2 VR (VR101, 102) ○ ○
Too wide screen width ○ WIDTH 1, 2 VR (VR101, 102) ○ ○
Too small screen height ○ HEIGHT VR (VR18~21) ○ ○
Too large screen height ○ HEIGHT VR (VR18~21) ○ ○
The screen is not at the center. ○ H-PHASE VR (VR14~17) ○ ○
Ditto ○ V-CENTER VR (VR10~13) ○ ○
The screen is too dark. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The screen is too bright. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
White balance is bad. ○ Adjust white balance. ○
Any of 3 color beams is missing. Adjust white balance. ○ ○ ○
Color purity of white is bad. ○ ○ ○ Degauss switch ○ ○ ○
Image is not sharp (bad focusing). ○ ○ Adjust focusing. ○ ○ ○ ○
No image appears. ○ ○ Adjust contrast and brightness. ○ ○ ○ ○
Overshoot and smear appear. ○ ○ ○
Noise on the screen. ○ ○ ○ ○
The power indicator does not light. ○ ○ ○
Color varies if brightness varies ○ ○ ○ Adjust white balance. ○ ○ ○ ○
Arc in CRT ○ ○
6 - 16 L1E-EA0229
6.7 Removing the Cover
1) Remove M4×10 screws ① (4 locations).

2) Withdraw the cover② backward to detach it.
6 - 17 L1E-EA0229
6.8 Detaching and Attaching the Filter
Bezel Filter
Slot (small)
Slot (small)
Slot (large)
To protect the filter
from wrong insertion
6.8.1 Detaching the filter

(1) Slide the filter to the right
A gap appears between

the bezel and filter
6 - 18 L1E-EA0229
(2) While curving the filter, take the projections (2 locations) at the right side of filter out of
the slots of bezel to detach the filter.
Slot
Slot
6.8.2 Attaching the filter

(1) Set the filter so that the projections of filter (large) come to the lower right facing to the
bezel.
(2) Insert the projections into the slots at the right side facing to the bezel.
(3) Curve the filter and fit the projections into the slots at the left side of bezel.
Slot (small) Slot and

projection (small)
Projection (small)
Slot (small)
Slot and
projection (large)
Projection (small)
6 - 19 L1E-EA0229
Section 7 Connector Arrangement
7.1 Connector Arrangement

Fig 7.1.1 shows external appearance of the CN panel.
Fig 7.1.2 shows connector arrangement of the overall system.
Fig 7.1.1 CN panel
7-1 L1E-EA0229
Fig 7.1.2 Connector arrangement
7.2 Connection of CN panel connector
CN No. PIN No. Signal Name From/To Remark

1 F-FREEZE
To KBIF FOOT SW
2 F-SHUTTER
CN42
3 GND
4 GND
7-2 L1E-EA0229
1 GND
2 F-FREEZE
To KBIF FOOT SW
3 F-SHUTTER
4 GND
5 GND
6 FWD DOP out F
From EPI
7 REV DOP out R
8 GND
9 GND
10 VCR_FWD DOP in F
To EPI
11 VCR_REV DOP in R
12 B_OUT RGB-VIDEO OUT(B)
From VIDEO
13 G_OUT RGB-VIDEO OUT(G-sync)
14 VBSOUT C-VIDEO OUT
From VIDEO
15 BWOUT C-VIDEO
16 R_IN To VIDEO RGB-VIDEO IN(R)
17 R_OUT From VIDEO RGB-VIDEO OUT(R)
18 COUT
From VIDEO Y/C-OUT
19 YOUT
20 G_IN To VIDEO RGB-VIDEO IN(G-sync)
21 GND
22 VBSIN To VIDEO C-VIDEO IN
23 GND
24 B_IN To VIDEO RGB-VIDEO IN(B)
25 GND
CN13
26 CIN
To VIDEO Y/C-IN
27 YIN
28 GND
29 GND
30 GND
31 GND
32 SP_AMODE_G
33 SP_AMODE From DBF
34 SP_AMODE_G
35 GND
36 SP_GAIN_G From DBF
37 GND
38 SP_GAIN From DBF
39 GND
40 SP_GAIN_G
41 SP_USTRIG From DBF SP-711UA control
42 SP_USTRIG_G
43 GND
44 SP_USTRIG_G From DBF
45 GND
46 GND
47 SP_SPARE21 Not used
48 GND
49 GND
50 SP_OFFSET3 Not used
7-3 L1E-EA0229
51 SP_OFFSET2
52 SP_OFFSET1 Not used
53 SP_OFFSET0
54 GND
55 GND
56 SP_RENC
57 SP_RENCZ
58 SP_LENC To EPI
59 SP_PULL SP-711UA control
60 SP_LAREA
61 GND
62 GND
63 SP_FRQ1
To EPI
64 SP_FRQ0
65 SP_SPEED1
66 SP_SPEED0 From EPI
67 SP_UNITON*
68 GND
69 GND
70 VCR_VSEL1*
To DBF
71 VCR_VSEL0*
72 VCR_SM2*
73 VCR_SM1*
74 VCR_SM0* From DBF
75 VCR_STOP*
CN13
76 VCR_FSFT*
77 VCR_VCNT* To DBF
78 VCR_FWD/REW* From DBF
79 VCR_RSTART* To DBF
VCR control
80 VCR_REW* From DBF
81 VCR_RREW* To DBF
82 VCR_FF* From DBF
83 VCR_RFF* To DBF
84 VCR_REC* From DBF
85 VCR_RREC* To DBF
86 VCR_PAUSE* From DBF
87 VCR_RPAUSE* To DBF
88 VCR_PLAY* From DBF
89 VCR_RPLAY* To DBF
90 GND
91 GND
92 COLORSHT*
From DBF Printer shutter
93 BWSHT*
94 GND
95 GND
96 EXTSYNC Not used TV sync
97 GND
98 GND
99 +5.0B
From POWER DC power(5.0V)
100 +5.0B
7-4 L1E-EA0229
7.3 Termination of Video signals
In EUB-5500, video terminals for the monitor and printer are independent each other.
Therefore, every terminal should be terminated when connecting the video device.
7-5 L1E-EA0229
Section 8 Signal List
8.1 EUB-5500 Basic Unit

8.1.1 PRB PCB (PRBSW)
No. Signal Name Terminal No. IN/OUT From/To Description
1 SNSRT 28C OUT PRB-26C Voltage level of temperature
detection for MPTEE
2 AS1 28B OUT AWP-26B Voltage level of angle
detection for MPTEE
3 AS2 28A OUT AWP-26A Voltage level of angle
detection for MPTEE
4 5VUS 28D OUT AWP-26D +5V supply for MPTEE
5 DBF_PRB_D 13C IN DBF-113D DBF to PRBSW serial data
6 PRB_LCK 14D IN DBF-111D PRBSW I/O latch clock.
7 PRB_DBF_D 13E OUT DBF-114D PRBSW to DBF serial data.
8 PRB_CK 13A IN DBF-112D PRBSW I/O serial clock.
9 TRDIV_N 15A IN DBF-108E Trans/Receive switch control
(LVDS Negative Pole).
10 TRDIV_P 16A IN DBF-107E Trans /Receive switch control
(LVDS Positive Pole).
11 BCLK_N 15E IN DBF-110E 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS Negative
Pole). This stops at reception
timing.
12 BCLK_P 16E IN DBF-109E 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS Positive
Pole).
13 PRB_YSYNC_N 15C IN CNF4-29 Y-SYNC* (LVDS Negative Pole).
14 PRB_YSYNC_P 16C IN CNF4-31 Y-SYNC* (LVDS Positive Pole).
15 CWEN_N 17D IN DBF-112E Steering CW mode
(LVDS Negative Pole)
16 CWEN_P 18D IN DBF-111E Steering CW mode
(LVDS Positive Pole)
17 FPGARESET* 17B IN CNF2-73 FPGA Reset for PRBSW.
18 SYSRESET* 18A IN CNF2-75 System Reset signal
19 PRBCONFDONE 18C OUT CNF2-31 FPGA Configuration signal
20 AD_SPARE* 23E OUT AWP-21E Select signal for AD converter
input. Auto-gain Control for
MINI-probe is selected
21 AD_SNSRT* 24B OUT AWP-22B Select signal for AD converter
input. Voltage level of
temperature detection for MPTEE
is selected.
22 AD_ADJUST_RET* 24D OUT AWP-22D Select signal for AD converter
ATGC PTGC is selected
23 AD_ST4V* 25A OUT AWP-23A Select signal for AD converter
input. ADC ref Voltage is
selected.
24 AD_MP5V* 25C OUT AWP-23C Select signal for AD converter
input. MPTEE supply voltage is
selected.
8-1 L1E-EA0229
25 AD_ANGLE* 25E OUT AWP-23E Select signal for AD converter
input. Voltage level of angle
detection is selected.
26 AD_0V* 26B OUT AWP-24B Select signal for AD converter
input. GND voltage level is
selected.
27 AD_THERM* 26D OUT AWP-24D Select signal for AD converter
temperature detection is
selected.
28 ADJCNT<1..0> 27B,27D OUT AWP-25B,25D Select AD_ADJUST_RETUERN signal
(PTGC ATGC voltage)
29 TDO_PRB 12B IN CNF3-11 JTAG Signal (Not used)
30 TCK_PRB 12C IN CNF3-1 JTAG Signal (Not used)
31 TDI_COM 12D IN CNF3-4 JTAG Signal (Not used)
32 TMS_COM 12E IN CNF3-2 JTAG Signal (Not used)
8-2 L1E-EA0229
8.1.2 AWP PCB (PRBSW)
1 T<47..0> 58E,58C,58A,57D, OUT DBF- Ultrasound Transmit Signal
57B,56E,56C,56A, 23C∼23A,
55D,55B,54E,54C, 22E∼22A,
54A,53D,53B,52E, 21E∼21A,
52C,52A,51D,51B, 20E∼20A,
50E,50C,50A,49D, 19E∼19A,
49B,48E,48C,48A, 18E∼18A,
47D,47B,46E,46C, 17E∼17A,
46A,45D,45B,44E, 16E∼16A,
44C,44A,43D,43B, 15E∼15A,
42E,42C,42A,41D, 14E∼14A
41B,40E,40C,40A
2 ADIN_N<47..0> 111C∼111A, OUT DBF- Ultrasound Reception
108E∼108A, 86B,84E,84C,84A, Signal
105E∼105A, 82D,82B,80E,80C, (Differential voltage output)
102E∼102A, 80A,78D,78B,76E,
99E∼99A, 76C,76A,74D,74B,
96E∼96A, 72E,72C,72A,70D,
93E∼93A, 70B,68E,68C,68A,
90E∼90A, 54B,52E,52C,52A,
87E∼87A, 50D,50B,48E,48C,
84E∼84A 48A,46D,46B,44E,
44C,44A,42D,42B,
40E,40C,40A,38D,
38B,36E,36C,36A
3 ADIN_P<47..0> 112C∼112A, OUT DBF- Ultrasound Reception
109E∼109A, 87B,85E,85C,85A, Signal
106E∼106A, 83D,83B,81E,81C, (Differential voltage output)
103E∼103A, 81A,79D,79B,77E,
100E∼100A, 77C,77A,75D,75B,
97E∼97A, 73E,73C,73A,71D,
94E∼94A, 71B,69E,69C,69A,
91E∼91A, 55B,53E,53C,53A,
88E∼88A, 51D,51B,49E,49C,
85E∼85A 49A,47D,47B,45E,
45C,45A,43D,43B,
41E,41C,41A,39D,
39B,35E,35C,35A
4 STCW<23..0> 37B,36E,36C,36A, IN CW- Ultrasound transmit signal
35D,35B,34E,34C, 11D∼11A, for steerable CW
34A,33D,33B,32E, 10E∼10A,
32C,32A,31D,31B, 9E∼9A,
30E,30C,30A,29D, 8E∼8A,
29B,28E,28C,28A 7E∼7A
8-3 L1E-EA0229
5 STCW_N<23..0> 80D∼80A, OUT CW- Steerable CW Reception signal
77E∼77A, 29D∼29A,
74E∼74A, 26E∼26A,
71E∼71A, 23E∼23A,
68E∼68A 19E∼19A,
16E∼16A
6 STCW_P<23..0> 81D∼81A, OUT CW- Steerable CW Reception signal

78E∼78A, 30D∼30A,
75E∼75A, 27E∼27A,
72E∼72A, 24E∼24A,
69E∼69A 20E∼20A,
17E∼17A
7 PTGCCNT_N1 62B IN DBF-88D Pre-attenuater control (10V
Differential Negative Pole).
8 PTGCCNT_P1 63B IN DBF-89D Pre-attenuater control (10V
Differential Positive Pole)
9 ATGCCNT_N1 62D IN DBF-88E Analog-TGC control (10V
0..-5.00V.
10 ATGCCNT_P1 63D IN DBF-89E Analog-TGC control (10V
Differential Positive Pole).
0.. +5.00V.
11 AD_CS* 18A IN DBF-109C AD converter (Angle and thermal
value for MPTEE probe convert
Digital data) chip select signal
12 AD_DCLOCK 18C IN DBF-108C AD converter (Angle and thermal
Digital data) function clock
signal
13 AD_DOUT 18E OUT DBF-107C AD converter (Angle and thermal
Digital data) data output
14 SNSRT 26C IN PRB-28C Voltage level of temperature
detection for MPTEE
15 AS1 32C IN PRB-28B Voltage level of angle
detection for MPTEE
16 AS2 35C IN PRB-28A Voltage level of angle
detection for MPTEE
17 5VUS 34C OUT PRB-28D +5V supply for MPTEE
18 AD_SPARE* 21E IN PRB-23E Select signal for AD converter
MINI-probe is selected
19 AD_SNSRT* 22B IN PRB-24B Select signal for AD converter
temperature detection for MPTEE
is selected.
20 AD_ADJUST_RET* 22D IN PRB-24D Select signal for AD converter
ATGC PTGC is selected
21 AD_ST4V* 23A IN PRB-25A Select signal for AD converter
input. ADC ref Voltage is
selected.
8-4 L1E-EA0229
22 AD_MP5V* 23C IN PRB-25C Select signal for AD converter
input. MPTEE supply voltage is
selected.
23 AD_ANGLE* 23E IN PRB-25E Select signal for AD converter
input. Voltage level of angle
detection is selected.
24 AD_0V* 24B IN PRB-26B Select signal for AD converter
input. GND voltage level is
selected.
25 AD_THERM* 24D IN PRB-26D Select signal for AD converter
temperature detection is
selected.
26 ADJCNY<1..0> 25B,25D IN PRB-27B,27D Select AD_ADJUST_RETUERN signal
(PTGC ATGC voltage)
8-5 L1E-EA0229
8.1.3 DBF PCB
1 T<47..0> 23C∼23A, IN PRBSW- Ultrasound transmit signal
22E∼22A, 58E,58C,58A,57D,
21E∼21A, 57B,56E,56C,56A,
20E∼20A, 55D,55B,54E,54C,
19E∼19A, 54A,53D,53B,52E,
18E∼18A, 52C,52A,51D,51B,
17E∼17A, 50E,50C,50A,49D,
16E∼16A, 49B,48E,48C,48A,
15E∼15A, 47D,47B,46E,46C,
14E∼14A 46A,45D,45B,44E,
44C,44A,43D,43B,
42E,42C,42A,41D,
41B,40E,40C,40A
2 ADIN_N<47..0> 86B,84E,84C,84A, IN PRBSW- Ultrasound Reception Signal
82D,82B,80E,80C, 111C∼111A, (Differential voltage output)
80A,78D,78B,76E, 108E∼108A,
76C,76A,74D,74B, 105E∼105A,
72E,72C,72A,70D, 102E∼102A,
70B,68E,68C,68A, 99E∼99A,
54B,52E,52C,52A, 96E∼96A,
50D,50B,48E,48C, 93E∼93A,
48A,46D,46B,44E, 90E∼90A,
44C,44A,42D,42B, 87E∼87A,
40E,40C,40A,38D, 84E∼84A
38B,36E,36C,36A
3 ADIN_P<47..0> 87B,85E,85C,85A, IN PRBSW- Ultrasound Reception Signal
83D,83B,81E,81C, 112C∼112A, (Differential voltage output)
81A,79D,79B,77E, 109E∼109A,
77C,77A,75D,75B, 106E∼106A,
73E,73C,73A,71D, 103E∼103A,
71B,69E,69C,69A, 100E∼100A,
55B,53E,53C,53A, 97E∼97A,
51D,51B,49E,49C, 94E∼94A,
49A,47D,47B,45E, 91E∼91A,
45C,45A,43D,43B, 88E∼88A,
41E,41C,41A,39D, 85E∼85A
39B,35E,35C,35A
4 USRF_I<23..0> 114A,115A,116A, OUT CNF1- Beamformed signal(I-data)
117A,118A,119A, 1,3,5,7,9,
120A,121A,114B, 11,13,15,17,19,
115B,116B,117B, 21,23,25,27,29,
118B,119B,120B, 31,33,35,37,39,
121B,114C,115C, 41,43,45,47
116C,117C,118C,
119C,120C,121C
5 USRF_Q<23..0> 122A,123A,124A, OUT CNF1- Beamformed signal(Q-data)
125A,126A,127A, 49,
128A,129A,122B, 51,53,55,57,59,
123B,124B,125B, 61,63,65,67,69,
126B,127B,128B, 71,73,75,77,79,
129B,122C,123C, 81,83,85,87,89,
124C,125C,126C, 91,93,95
127C,128C,129C
8-6 L1E-EA0229
6 DBF_BEAM1* 113B OUT CNF1-97 Not used
7 DBF_RSTART* 113C OUT CNF1-99 Reception Start Signal
8 CWSYNC* 112A OUT CNF2-21 Not used
9 CK32ON 139C OUT CNF2-23 Not used
10 DBFCONFDONE 138D OUT CNF2-27 DBF FPGA config. Done signal
11 DMAFC<2..0> 128D,129D,129E IN CNF2-33,35,37 DMA function control number
12 ADJ_YSYNC* 121E IN CNF2-45 DBF Ysync adjustment
13 DBF_YSYNC* 122E IN CNF2-47 DBF Ysync
14 LCK 122D IN CNF2-51 Latch Clock. US Beam parameters
is latced previous to Y-SYNC*
assertion.
15 FFTSTART* 137C IN CNF2-53 FFT calculation start signal
16 CAND* 137D IN CNF2-55 CFM calculation start signal
17 SP_USTRIG* 118E IN CNF2-71 Fujinon scan timing signal
18 FPGARESET* 140C IN CNF2-73 FPGA reset
19 SYSRESET* 131A IN CNF2-75 System reset
20 TMS_COM 140E IN CNF3-2 JTAG TMS signal
21 TDI_COM 139E IN CNF3-4 JTAG TDI signal
22 TCK_DBF1 140D IN CNF3-5 DBF JTAG TCK signal
23 TCK_DBF2 139D IN CNF3-7 DBF JTAG TCK signal
24 TDO_DBF1 138E OUT CNF3-15 DBF JTAG TDO signal
25 TDO_DBF2 137E OUT CNF3-17 DBF JTAG TDO signal
26 S_STOP* 132D OUT CNF3-21 SPCI local bus control signal
27 S_TRDY* 132E OUT CNF3-23 SPCI local bus control signal
28 S_IRDY* 131D IN CNF3-25 SPCI local bus control signal
29 S_ERAME* 131E IN CNF3-27 SPCI local bus control signal
30 S_PRST* 131B IN CNF3-29 SPCI local bus control signal
31 S_PCLK 131C IN CNF3-31 SPCI local bus 30.3ns clock
32 S_CBE<1..0>* 132B,132C IN CNF3-33,35 SPCI local bus control signal
33 S_AD<15..0> 132A,133A,134A, IN/OUT CNF3- SPCI local bus data signal
135A,133B,134B, 37,39,41,43,45,
135B,133C,134C, 47,49,51,53,55,
135C,133D,134D, 57,59,61,63,65,
135D,133E,134E, 67
135E
34 CK4F0US_P 126E IN CNF4-1 Transmission 4 times Reference
Clock for DBF (Positive Pole)
35 CK4F0US_N 127E IN CNF4-3 Transmission 4 times Reference
Clock for DBF (Negative Pole)
36 S_CLK_DBF_P 146B IN CNF4-9 SPCI clock for DBF
(positive edge)
37 S_CLK_DBF_N 146A IN CNF4-11 SPCI clock for DBF
(negative edge)
38 CK32_DBF_P 124E IN CNF4-15 DBF 32ns clock (positive edge)
39 CK32_DBF_N 125E IN CNF4-13 DBF 32ns clock (negative edge)
40 CK64DBF_P 125D IN CNF4-17 DBF 64ns clock (positive edge)
41 CK64DBF_N 126D IN CNF4-19 DBF 64ns clock (negative edge)
42 DBF_PRB_D 113D OUT PRB-13C DBF to PRBSW serial data
43 PRB_LCK 111D OUT PRB-14D PRBSW I/O latch clock
44 PRB_DBF_D 114D IN PRB-13E PRBSW to DBF serial data
45 PRB_CK 112D OUT PRB-13A PRBSW I/O serial clock
46 TRDIV_N 108E OUT PRB-15A Trans/Receive switch control
(LVDS Negative Pole).
8-7 L1E-EA0229
47 TRDIV_P 107E OUT PRB-16A Trans/Receive switch control
(LVDS Positive Pole).
48 BCLK_N 110E OUT PRB-15E 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS Negative
Pole). This stops at reception
timing.
49 BCLK_P 109E OUT PRB-16E 128ns PRBSW clock (LVDS Positive
Pole).
50 CWEN_N 112E OUT PRB-17D Steering CW mode
(LVDS Negative Pole)
51 CWEN_P 111E OUT PRB-18D Steering CW mode
(LVDS Positive Pole)
52 PTGCCNT_N1 88D OUT AWP-62B Pre-attenuator control (10V
Differential Negative Pole)
53 PTGCCNT_P1 89D OUT AWP-63B Pre-attenuator control (10V
54 ATGCCNT_N1 88E OUT AWP-62D Analog-TGC control (10V
0..-5.00V.
55 ATGCCNT_P1 89E OUT AWP-63D Analog-TGC control (10V
0.. +5.00V
56 AD_CS* 109C OUT AWP-18A AD converter (Angle and thermal
Digital data) chip select signal
57 AD_DCLOCK 108C OUT AWP-18C AD converter (Angle and thermal
Digital data) function clock
signal
58 AD_DOUT 107C IN AWP-18E AD converter (Angle and thermal
Digital data) data output
52 COLORSHT* 150E OUT CNPNL BW Printer Control Signal
CN32-4
53 BWSHT* 150D OUT CNPNL Color Printer Control Signal
CN32-3
54 SM2∼0* 150C,150B,150A OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-17, 16, 15
55 PAUSE* 149B OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-14
56 FF* 148D OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-11
57 REW* 148E OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-12
58 STOP* 149D OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-18
59 PLAY* 149A OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-13
60 FWD/REW* 149E OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-19
61 REC* 148C OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-10
62 VCNT* 146D OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-28
8-8 L1E-EA0229
63 FSFT* 149C OUT CNPNL VCR Control Signal
CN32-29
64 VSEL1,0* 148A,147E IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-27, 26
65 RREW* 147A IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-24
66 RREC* 147D IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-21
67 RFF* 147B IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-23
68 RPLAY* 147C IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-22
69 VCRRSTART* 146C IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-20
70 RPAUSE* 146E IN CNPNL VCR Condition Signal
CN32-14
71 T_CWS<23..0> 29D∼29A, OUT CW- Steerable CW Transmission
28E∼28A, 5D∼5A, Signal
27E∼27A, 4E∼4A,
26E∼26A, 3E∼3A,
25E∼25A 2E∼2A,
1E∼1A
72 DBF-CW-D 109D OUT CW-94D Control data (serial)
73 CW_CK 108D OUT CW-91D Clock for control data
74 CW_LCK 107D OUT CW-94E Clock to set control data
75 CW-DBF-D 110D IN CW-105C CW version Data(serial)
76 STCWEN-N 114D OUT CW-102D Steering CW mode control.
77 STCWEN-P 113D OUT CW-103D Steering CW mode control.
78 SP_USTRIG 116E OUT Fujinon trigger signal
79 SP_USTRIG_GND 117E IN/OUT GND for SP_USTRIG
80 SP_AMODE 118D IN Fujinon Input
81 SP_AMODE_GND 119D IN/OUT GND for SP_AMODE
82 SP_GAIN 116D OUT Gain curve for Fujinon Input
83 SP_GAIN_GND 117D IN/OUT GND for SP_GAIN
84 MB_VER<7..0> 140B-137B, IN MB- Mother Board Version signal
140A-137A
85 STVC<4..0> 111A-107A OUT CN3-10,9,3,2,1 Voltage control signal for
Steerable CW transmission.
86 DFRQ1,0 110C,110B IN CND6-14,15 PEN-CW connection status
87 EPRB1,0 108B,107B IN CND6-12,13 PEN-CW connection status
88 ETRIN 109B IN CND6-16 PEN-CW connection status
8-9 L1E-EA0229
8.1.4 EPI PCB
1 USRF_I<23..0> CNF1- IN DBF- Beamformed Signal(I-Data)
1,3,5,7,9, 114A,115A,116A,
11,13,15,17,19, 117A,118A,119A,
21,23,25,27,29, 120A,121A,114B,
31,33,35,37,39, 115B,116B,117B,
41,43,45,47 118B,119B,120B,
121B,114C,115C,
116C,117C,118C,
119C,120C,121C,
CW-
108A,108B,108C,
108D,108E,109A,
109B,109C,109D,
109E,110A,110B,
110C,110D,110E,
111A
2 USRF_Q<23..0> CNF1- IN DBF- Beamformed Signal(Q-Data)
49, 122A,123A,124A,
51,53,55,57,59, 125A,126A,127A,
61,63,65,67,69, 128A,129A,122B,
71,73,75,77,79, 123B,124B,125B,
81,83,85,87,89, 126B,127B,128B,
91,93,95 129B,122C,123C,
124C,125C,126C,
127C,128C,129C
CW-
111B,111C,111D,
111E,112A,112B,
112C,112D,112E,
113A,113B,113C,
113D,113E,114A,
114B
3 DBF_BEAM1* CNF1-97 IN DBF-113B Not Used
4 DBF_RSTART* CNF1-99 IN DBF-113C Reception Start Signal
5 HFRZ CNF2-1 IN CN80-1 Freeze On Signal by Hardware
6 SP_RENCZ CNF2-3 IN CN8-44 Fujinon Sync Signal
7 SP_RENC CNF2-5 IN CN8-45 Fujinon Sync Signal
8 SP_FREQ<1..0> CNF2-7,9 IN CN8-37,38 Fujinon Freq Select Signal
9 SP_UNITON* CNF2-11 IN CN8-34 Fujinon Unit Connect Signal
10 RSYNC CNF2-15 IN BIO-20A ECG R Side Sync Signal
11 LSYNC CNF2-17 IN BIO-20B ECG L Side Sync Signal
12 R-TRIG CNF2-19 IN BIO-10B, ECG R-Trig Signal
CN80-2
13 CWSYNC* CNF2-21 IN DBF-112A, Not Used
CW-103E
14 CK32ON CNF2-23 IN DBF-139C Not Used
15 BIOCONFDONE CNF2-25 IN BIO-4B BIO FPGA Config. Done Signal
16 DBFCONFDONE CNF2-27 IN DBF-138D DBF FPGA Config. Done Signal
17 CWCONFDONE CNF2-29 IN CW-103A CW FPGA Config. Done Signal
18 PRBCONFDONE CNF2-31 IN PRB-18C PRB FPGA Config. Done Signal
19 DMAFC<2..0> CNF2-33,35,37 OUT DBF- DMA Function Control number
128D,129D129E
20 BIO_SDATA CNF2-39 IN/OUT BIO-4A BIO Serial I/F Data Signal
21 BIO_CS* CNF2-41 OUT BIO-7B BIO Serial I/F CS* Signal
22 BIO_YSYNC* CNF2-43 OUT BIO-10D BIO Ysync
8 - 10 L1E-EA0229
23 ADJ_YSYNC* CNF2-45 OUT DBF-121E DBF_Ysync Adjustment
24 DBF_YSYNC* CNF2-47 OUT DBF-122E DBF Ysync
25 YSYNC* CNF2-49 OUT NC Ysync
26 LCK CNF2-51 OUT DBF-122D Latch Clock. US Beam parameters I
latched previous to Y-SYNC*
assertion.
27 FFTSTART* CNF2-53 OUT DBF-137C FFT Calculation Start Signal
28 CNAD* CNF2-55 OUT DBF-137D CFM Calculation Start Signal
29 SYNCERR CNF2-63 OUT CN80-3 Sync Error Signal
30 SP_SPEED<1..0> CNF2-65,67 OUT CN8-35,36 Fujinon Probe Rotation Speed
31 SP_USTRIG* CNF2-71 OUT DBF-118E Fujinon Scan Timing Signal
32 FPGARESET* CNF2-73 OUT PRB-17B, FPGA Reset.
DBF-140C, FPGA Configuration begins after
BIO-26B, FPGARESET* positive edge.
CW-100A
33 SYSRESET* CNF2-75 OUT PRB-18A, System Reset.
DBF-131A, Asserted at Power On and Software
BIO-23B, Boot.
CW-100B,
CN80-4
34 PWSW_KB CNF2-77 OUT CN80-7 Power Off Interruption to
EUB Software through KBIF.
35 STBY CNF2-79 IN CN51-1, Stand-by Switch Signal.
JP10-2
36 STBY- CNF2-80 IN CN51-2, Stand-by Switch Signal.
JP11-2
36 TMS_COM CNF3-2 OUT PRB-12E, JTAG TMS Signal
DBF-140E,
CW-103B,
BIO-17A
37 TDI_COM CNF3-4 OUT PRB-12D, JTAG TDI Signal
DBF-139E,
CW-102B,
BIO-15A
38 TCK_PRB CNF3-1 OUT PRB-12C PRB JTAG TCK Signal
39 TCK_CW CNF3-3 OUT CW-105B CW JTAG TCK Signal
40 TCK_DBF1 CNF3-5 OUT DBF-140D DBF JTAG TCK Signal
41 TCK_DBF2 CNF3-7 OUT DBF-139D DBF JTAG TCK Signal
42 TCK_BIO CNF3-9 OUT BIO-17B BIO JTAG TCK Signal
43 TDO_PRB CNF3-11 IN PRB-12B PRB JTAG TDO Signal
44 TDO_CW CNF3-13 IN CW-104B CW JTAG TDO Signal
45 TDO_DBF1 CNF3-15 IN DBF-138E DBF JTAG TDO Signal
46 TDO_DBF2 CNF3-17 IN DBF-137E DBF JTAG TDO Signal
47 TDO_BIO CNF3-19 IN BIO-15B BIO JTAG TDO Signal
48 S_STOP* CNF3-21 IN DBF-132D, S-PCI Local Bus Control Signal
BIO-23A
49 S_TRDY* CNF3-23 IN DBF-132E, S-PCI Local Bus Control Signal
BIO-25A
50 S_IRDY* CNF3-25 OUT DBF-131D, S-PCI Local Bus Control Signal
BIO-27A
51 S_FRAME* CNF3-27 OUT DBF-131E, S-PCI Local Bus Control Signal
BIO-29A
52 S_PRST* CNF3-29 OUT DBF-131B, S-PCI Local Bus Control Signal
BIO-35A
53 S_PCLK CNF3-31 OUT DBF-131C, S-PCI Local Bus
BIO-37A 30.3ns(33MHz) Clock
8 - 11 L1E-EA0229
54 S_CBE<1..0>* CNF3-33,35 OUT DBF-132B,132C, S-PCI Local Bus Control Signal
BIO-31A,33A
55 S_AD<15..0> CNF3- IN/OUT DBF- S-PCI Local Bus Data Signal
37,39,41,43,45,47, 132A,133A,134A,
49,51,53,55,57,59, 135A,133B,134B,
61,63,65,67 135B,133C,134C,
135C,133D,134D,
135D,133E,134E,
135E
BIO-
23C,24C,25C,26C,
27C,28C,29C,30C,
31C,32C,33C,34C,
35C,36C,37C,38C
56 TCICLK CNF6-1 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-1 TCI Bus 40ns(25MHz) Clock
57 TCISYNC CNF6-3 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-3 TCI Bus Sync Signal
58 TCIEN CNF6-5 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-5 TCI Bus Enable Signal
59 TCIERR* CNF6-7 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-7 TCI Bus Error Signal
60 TCIDA<7..0> CNF6- OUT MAP1,2-CNF6- TCI Bus Data Signal (I-Data)
9,11,13,15, 9,11,13,15,
17,19,21,23 17,19,21,23
61 TCIDB<7..0> CNF6- OUT MAP1,2-CNF6- TCI Bus Data Signal (Q-Data)
25,27,29,31, 25,27,29,31,
33,35,37,39 33,35,37,39
62 IIS_SDATA CNF6-43 IN MAP1,2-CNF6-43 IIS Audio Serial Data Signal
63 IIS_LRCK CNF6-45 IN MAP1,2-CNF6-45 IIS Audio LR Indicate Signal
64 IIS_SCLK CNF6-47 IN MAP1,2-CNF6-47 IIS Audio Sampling Clock
65 IIS_MCLK CNF6-49 IN MAP1,2-CNF6-49 IIS Audio Master Clock
66 TCK_MAP1 CNF6-10 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-10 MAP1 JTAG TCK Signal
67 TCK_MAP2 CNF6-14 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-14 MAP2 JTAG TCK Signal
68 TDO_MAP1 CNF6-18 IN MAP1,2-CNF6-18 MAP1 JTAG TDO Signal
69 TDO_MAP2 CNF6-22 IN MAP1,2-CNF6-22 MAP2 JTAG TDO Signal
70 TMS_COM CNF6-26 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-26 MAP1,2 JTAG TMS Signal
71 TDI_COM CNF6-30 OUT MAP1,2-CNF6-30 MAP1,2 JTAG TDI Signal
72 CK4F0US_P CNF4-1 OUT DBF-126E Transmission 4 times Reference
Clock for DBF (Positive Pole)
73 CK4F0US_N CNF4-3 OUT DBF-127E Transmission 4 times Reference
Clock for DBF (Negative Pole)
74 CK4F0CW_P CNF4-7 OUT CW-105A Transmission 4 times Reference
Clock for CW (Positive Pole)
75 CK4F0CW_N CNF4-5 OUT CW-104A Transmission 4 times Reference
Clock for CW (Negative Pole)
76 S_CLK_DBF_P CNF4-9 OUT DBF-146B S-PCI Clock for DBF
(Positive Pole)
77 S_CLK_DBF_N CNF4-11 OUT DBF-146A S-PCI Clock for DBF
(Negative Pole)
78 S_CLK_BIO_P CNF4-25 OUT BIO-15E S-PCI Clock for BIO
(Positive Pole)
79 S_CLK_BIO_N CNF4-27 OUT BIO-16E S-PCI Clock for BIO
(Negative Pole)
80 CK32DBF_P CNF4-15 OUT DBF-124E DBF 31.2MHz (32nS) Clock (Positive
Pole)
81 CK32DBF_N CNF4-13 OUT DBF-125E DBF 31.2MHz (32nS) Clock (Negative
Pole)
82 CK64DBF_P CNF4-17 OUT DBF-125D DBF 15.6MHz (64nS) Clock.
(Positive Pole)
8 - 12 L1E-EA0229
83 CK64DBF_N CNF4-19 OUT DBF-126D DBF 15.6MHz (64nS) Clock.
(Negative Pole)
84 CK64BIO_P CNF4-23 OUT BIO-15D BIO 15.6MHz (64nS) Clock.
(Positive Pole)
85 CK64BIO_N CNF4-21 OUT BIO-16D BIO 15.6MHz (64nS) Clock.
(Negative Pole)
86 PRB_YSYNC_P CNF4-31 OUT PRB-16C PRB YSYNC* (Positive Pole)
87 PRB_YSYNC_N CNF4-29 OUT PRB-15C PRB YSYNC* (Negative Pole)
88 CWADCLK_P CNF4-39 OUT CW-114D CW AD Clock (Positive Pole)
89 CWADCLK_N CNF4-37 OUT CW-114E CW AD Clock (Negative Pole)
90 RPWSW+ CNF7-1 OUT PCMB- PCMB Power-On signal.
91 RPWSW- CNF7-2 IN PCMB- PCMB Power-On signal.
92 SOUND_REC1 CNF5-1 OUT CN8-95 Sound Signal to VCR
93 SOUND_REC2 CNF5-3 OUT CN8-94 Sound Signal to VCR
94 SOUND_VCR1 CNF5-7 IN CN8-91 Sound Signal from VCR
95 SOUND_VCR2 CNF5-9 IN CN8-90 Sound Signal from VCR
96 SOUND_SP1 CNF5-15 OUT CNS1-1 Sound Signal to Speaker
97 SOUND_SP2 CNF5-13 OUT CNS2-1 Sound Signal to Speaker
98 AD<31..0> J1- IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Data Signal
B20,A20,B21,A22,
B23,A23,B24,A25,
B27,A28,B29,A29,
B30,A31,B32,A32,
A44,B45,A46,B47,
A47,B48,A49,B52,
B53,A54,B55,A55,
B56,A57,B58,A58
99 CBE<3..0>* J1- IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
B26,B33,B44,A52
100 RST* J1-A15 IN PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
101 CLK J1-B16 IN PCMB- PCI Bus 30.3ns(33MHz) Clock
102 IDSEL J1-A26 IN PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
103 FRAME* J1-A34 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
104 IRDY* J1-B35 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
105 DEVSEL* J1-B37 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
106 TRDY* J1-A36 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
107 STOP* J1-A38 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
108 PAR J1-A43 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
109 REQ* J1-B18 OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
110 GNT* J1-A17 IN PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
111 INTA* J1-A6 OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
112 PRSNT1* J1-B9 OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
113 PRSNT2* J1-B11 OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
114 PERR* J1-B40 OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
115 SERR* J1-B42 IN/OUT PCMB- PCI Bus Control Signal
8 - 13 L1E-EA0229
8.1.5 MAP PCB
1 TCICLK CNF6-1 IN EPI-CNF6-1 TCI Bus 40ns(25MHz) Clock
2 TCISYNC CNF6-3 IN EPI-CNF6-3 TCI Bus Sync Signal
3 TCIEN CNF6-5 IN EPI-CNF6-5 TCI Bus Enable Signal
4 TCIERR* CNF6-7 IN EPI-CNF6-7 TCI Bus Error Signal
5 TCIDA<7..0> CNF6- IN EPI-CNF6- TCI Bus Data Signal (I-Data)
9,11,13,15, 9,11,13,15,
17,19,21,23 17,19,21,23
6 TCIDB<7..0> CNF6- IN EPI-CNF6- TCI Bus Data Signal (Q-Data)
25,27,29,31, 25,27,29,31,
33,35,37,39 33,35,37,39
7 IIS_SDATA CNF6-43 OUT EPI-CNF6-43 IIS Audio Serial Data Signal
8 IIS_LRCK CNF6-45 OUT EPI-CNF6-45 IIS Audio LR Indicate Signal
9 IIS_SCLK CNF6-47 OUT EPI-CNF6-47 IIS Audio Sampling Clock
10 IIS_MCLK CNF6-49 OUT EPI-CNF6-49 IIS Audio Master Clock
11 TCK_MAP1 CNF6-10 IN EPI-CNF6-10 MAP1 JTAG TCK Signal
12 TCK_MAP2 CNF6-14 IN EPI-CNF6-14 MAP2 JTAG TCK Signal
13 TDO_MAP1 CNF6-18 OUT EPI-CNF6-18 MAP1 JTAG TDO Signal
14 TDO_MAP2 CNF6-22 OUT EPI-CNF6-22 MAP2 JTAG TDO Signal
15 TMS_COM CNF6-26 IN EPI-CNF6-26 MAP1,2 JTAG TMS Signal
16 TDI_COM CNF6-30 IN EPI-CNF6-30 MAP1,2 JTAG TDI Signal
8 - 14 L1E-EA0229
8.2 BIO Unit EZU-EK25
8.2.1 BIO PCB
1 SCK_BIO_N 16E IN CNF4-27 Spci Clock
2 SCK_BIO_P 15E IN CNF4-25 Spci Clock
3 S_AD15∼1 23C,24C,25C,26C, IN/OUT CNF3- Spci Address Data bus.
27C,28C,29C,30C, 37,39,41,43,45,47,
31C,32C,33C,34C, 49,51,53,55,57,59,
35C,36C,37C,38C 61,63,65,67
4 S_CBE<1..0> 31A,33A IN CNF3-33,35 Byte Enable
5 S_FRME* 29A IN CNF3-27 Spci Cycle Frame
6 S_IRDY* 27A IN CNF3-25 Spci Initiator Ready

7 S_TRDY* 25A OUT CNF3-23 Spci Target Ready
8 S_STOP* 23A OUT CNF3-21 Spci Stop
9 S_PRST* 35A IN CNF3-29 Spci Reset
10 SYNC1 20B IN CNF2-17 ECG SYNC1 signal
11 SYNC2 20A IN CNF2-15 ECG SYNC2 signal
12 64NS_N 16D IN CNF4-21 15.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
13 64NS_P 15D IN CNF4-23 15.6MHz (64nS) System Clock.
14 FPGARESET* 26B IN CNF2-73 FPGA reset.
FPGA configuration begins after
FPGARESET* positive edge.
15 BIOCONFDONE 4B OUT CNF2-25 FPGA configuration
16 R-TRIG 10B OUT CN80-2,CNF2-19 ECG R-Wave Trig Signal
17 BIO_CS* 7B IN CNF2-41 Time Stamp Chip Select
18 BIO_Sdata 4A IN CNF2-39 Time Stamp Serial Data
19 TMS_COM 17A IN CNF3-2 JTAG Test Mode Selector
20 TDI_COM 15A IN CNF3-4 JTAG Test Data input
21 TCK_BIO 17B IN CNF3-9 JTAG Test Clock
22 TDO_BIO 15B OUT CNF3-19 JTAG Test Data output
8 - 15 L1E-EA0229
8.3 CW Unit EZU-ST5,EZU-CW4
8.3.1 CW PCB
1 T_CWS<23..0> 5D∼5A, IN DBF-29D∼29A, Steerable CW Transmission input
4E∼4A, 28E∼28A, Signal
3E∼3A, 27E∼27A,
2E∼2A, 26E∼26A,
1E∼1A 25E∼25A
2 STCW<23..0> 11D∼11A, OUT AWP-37B, 36E, Steerable CW Transmission output
10E∼10A, 36C, 36A, 35D, Signal
9E∼9A, 35B, 34E, 34C,
8E∼8A, 34A, 33D, 33B,
7E∼7A 32E, 32C, 32A,
31D, 31B, 30E,
30C, 30A, 29D,
29B, 28E, 28C,
28A
3 STCW-N<23..0> 29D∼29A, IN AWP-80D∼80A, Steerable CW Reception Signal
26E∼26A, 77E∼77A,
23E∼23A, 74E∼74A,
19E∼19A, 71E∼71A,
16E∼16A 68E∼68A
4 STCW-P<23..0> 30D∼30A, IN AWP-81D∼81A, Steerable CW Reception Signal

27E∼27A, 78E∼78A,
24E∼24A, 75E∼75A,
20E∼20A, 72E∼72A,
17E∼17A 69E∼69A
5 USRF-I<15..0> 111A, OUT EPI-CNF1-31, 29, CW A/D Output Signal

110E∼110A, 27, 25, 23, 21, 19,
109E∼109A, 17, 15, 13, 11, 9,
108E∼108A 7, 5, 3, 1
6 USRF-Q<15..0> 114B∼114A, OUT EPI-CNF1-79, 77, CW A/D Output Signal
113E∼113A, 75, 73, 71, 69, 67,
112E∼112A, 65, 63, 61, 59, 57,
111E∼111B 55, 53, 51, 49
7 CWADCLK_N 114E IN EPI-CNF4-37 CW A/D clock.
8 CWADCLK_P 114D IN EPI-CNF4-39 CW A/D clock.
9 CK4F0CW-N 104A IN EPI-CNF4-5 4 times reference clock for CWREC
(LVDS Negative pole).
10 CK4F0CW-P 105A IN EPI-CNF4-7 4 times reference clock for CWREC
(LVDS Positive pole).
11 DBF-CW-D 94D IN DBF-109D Control data (serial)
12 CW_CK 91D IN DBF-108D Clock for control data
13 CW_LCK 94E IN DBF-107D Clock to set control data
14 CW-DBF-D 105C OUT DBF-110D CW version Data(serial)
15 STCWEN-N 102D IN DBF-114D Steering CW mode control.
16 STCWEN-P 103D IN DBF-113D Steering CW mode control.
17 CWCONFDONE 103A OUT EPI-CNF2-29 FPGA config completion data
18 SYSRESET* 100B IN EPI-CNF2-75 System Reset. Asserted at power on
and software boot.
19 FPGARESET* 100A IN EPI-CNF2-73 FPGA reset.
FPGA configuration begins after
FPGARESET* positive edge.
8 - 16 L1E-EA0229
20 CWSYNC* 103E IN EPI-CNF2-21 Not used.
21 TCK_CW 105B IN EPI-CNF3-3 Not used.
22 TDO_CW 104B IN EPI-CNF3-13 Not used.
23 TMS_COM 103B IN EPI-CNF3-2 Not used.
24 TDI_COM 102B IN EPI-CNF3-4 Not used.
8 - 17 L1E-EA0229
Section 9 Maintenance
9.1 Fan Filter Every day Once a week Once a month Others
Clean the dust-proof air filter at the air inlet of power unit located at the bottom front of
equipment. If the filter is choked, the breaker may be cut off or the power unit may possibly
be damaged.
NOTE: • Be sure to turn OFF the power before cleaning the filter.
• Never turn ON the power unless mounting the filter. Dust around the power unit
may enter into it causing a fire.
9.2 Other Maintenance Items

1. Probe Every day Once a week Once a month Others
(1) After using the equipment, use any tissue or soft cloth to completely wipe off jelly stuck
to the probe.
(2) When wiping off the probe, do not use hard paper or cloth.
(3) Put the probe in the probe holder or probe case, and keep it carefully.
(4) Care should be taken not to give strong shock to the probe or drop it.
2. Control Panel Every day Once a week Once a month Others

(1) After using the equipment, turn OFF the power and completely wipe off jelly stuck to the
surface of control panel.
3. System Cabinet Every day Once a week Once a month Others

(1) Before cleaning the system cabinet, turn OFF the power and extract the power cable
from the power outlet.
(2) Use cloth moistened with a neutral detergent to remove stains, and then wipe off it with
soft dry cloth.
NOTE: • Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
• Care should be taken for any liquid such as a detergent not to directly drop on the
equipment.
• When cleaning the equipment, care should be taken no to drop any liquid on the
inside of equipment, probe, probe connector or control panel.
9-1 L1E-EA0229
4. Monitor Every day Once a week Once a month Others
(1) Before cleaning the monitor, turn OFF the power to the main unit and extract the power
cable from the power outlet.
(2) Use cloth supplemented to the equipment to clean the surface of monitor. Use soft cloth
and glass cleaner to wipe off any sticky stains. Use cloth moistened with a neutral
detergent to clean the top and side faces of monitor cover, and then wipe off them with
soft cloth.
NOTE: • Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
• Care should be taken for any liquid such as a detergent not to directly drop on the
equipment.
• Do not use a glass cleaner made of hydrocarbon.
5. VCR Every day Once a week Once a month Others

(1) Before cleaning VCR, turn OFF the power to the main unit and extract the power cable
from the power outlet.
(2) Use dry cloth to clean the surface of VCR. Use soft cloth and glass cleaner to wipe off
any sticky stains. Do not use moistened cloth or detergent.
(3) Follow the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer to clean the record/
playback head with the head cleaner specified. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of VCR.
6. Video Printer Every day Once a week Once a month Others

(1) Before cleaning the video printer, turn OFF the power to the main unit and extract the
power cable from the power outlet.
(2) Use dry cloth to clean the surface of video printer. Use soft cloth and glass cleaner to
wipe off any sticky stains. Do not use moistened cloth or detergent.
(3) Put the cleaning sheet supplemented to the device, which is specified by the printer
manufacturer, through the printer head to clean it. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of the video printer.
7． Cleaning of the trackball Every day Once a week Once a month Others
- Before you clean the trackball, turn off the unit and unplug the power cable from the
outlet.
- Do not use wet cloth or detergent. If it gets into the trackball unit, it may cause damage.
- You can clean the track ball by turning the ring around the ball to remove the ring, ball
holder, and ball from the trackball unit.
If the ball does not roll smoothly because of dust inside the trackball, use dry, soft cloth to
remove the dust.
9-2 L1E-EA0229
grip
ball holder ring
Cleaning of the trackball
9-3 73 L1E-EA0173
Section 10 Parts List
1. CART1
10-1 L1E-EA0229
2. CART2
10-4
L1E-EA0229
2. CART2
KEY No. PARTS NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS
1 7319017A TOP SHEILED/6500 1
2 J839A106 FG CLAMP/6500 1
3 7319215E CORE/6500 1
4 7511408A MB PCB/5500 1
5 7321641A TOP SHASSIS/5500 1
6 7312642A BTM SHASSIS/5500 1
7 1481564B GUIDE 3.5MM 2 for DBF
8 J8991105 GUIDE 50-6030 10
9 7416598A SLD PLATE/6500 2
10 7418415A SLD PLATE/5500 1
11 7323765A PCB COVER/5500 1
12 7416827A PCB FAN SET/6500 1
13 1475231A FAN NET/6500 3
14 7418420A PCB RUBBER/5500 1
15 7323766A BTM FAN PLT/5500 1
16 7418571A BTM FAN SET/5500 1
17 7416604A PS COVER/6500 1
18 J836A048 GND TERMINAL 1
19 7416602A MT PANEL/6500 1
20 J8320206 OUTLET 8210-I 1
21 J839A124 CABLE CLIP 1
22 7218757A REAR COVER/5500 1
23 7419805A REAR PLT A/5500 1
24 7419806A REAR PLT B/5500 1
25 7415785A REAR SPONGE/6500 2
26 2455033A CORD HOLDER 1
27 7415786A AIR FILTER/6500 1
28 7420761A CLAMP PLATE/5500 1
29 7420762A CLAMP A 1
30 7420763B CLAMP B 2
31 7419925A MAP FAN UNIT/5500 1
32 7420909A HD BASE/5500 1
33 7419583A PCB GUIDE/5500 2
34 7415963A PRB BTM SPT/6500 1
35 7218943A R-COVER/5500USA 1 USA
10-5
L1E-EA0229
1. CART1
1 7218905A CART/5500 1
2 7312175B CASTER/6500 4
3 7324997B CASTER COVER 4
4 7415673B HANDLE/5500 2
5 7319012A VCR BASE/6500 1
6 7319011A OP-PLATE/6500 1
7 7319019A TRAY/6500 1
8 7416594C CN-COVER/5500 1
9 7415783A F-SPONGE A/6500 1
10 7415784A F-SPONGE B/6500 1
11 1434754A ADJUSTING KNOB 1
12 1427110A SLIDING PLATE B 1
13 144095XA KNOB WASHER 1
14 1416371A SLIDING PLATE A 2
15 1469374A HANGER BASE/6500 1
16 7416607C F-BLIND PLT/5500 1
17 7418412A BLIND PLT A/5500 1
18 7418413A BLIND PLT B/5500 1
19 7413414A BLIND PLT C/5500 1
20 7418417A ECG BLIND/5500 2
21 7324030A CD-RW UNIT 1
22 7419818A CD-R PLATE/5500 1
23 7323332A FD PLATE/5500 1
24 7419616A MOD BLIND/5500 1
25 7315074A FD UNIT 1
26 UoF324 EZU-MO1 1
27 7419924A KB FAN UNIT/5500 1
28 7418574A SP-CABLE L/5500 1
29 7415755A SP-CABLE R/5500 1
30 K214A116 BRKER 100V/6500 1 100V
31 K214A117 BRKER 230V/6500 1 230V
32 7317898A SW-CABLE/6500 1
33 7416601A OUT-PNL SLD/6500 1
34 J8310801 OUTLET 8200-I 2 100V
35 7416599A OUT-PNL(N)/6500 1 100V
10-2 L1E-EA0229
36 7319731A OUTLET(N)/6500 1 100V
37 J8310501 OUTLET NC-183C 4 230V
38 7416600A OUT-PNL(E)/6500 1 230V
39 7319732A OUTLET(E)/6500 1 230V
40 7319018A CN-PANEL/6500 1
41 7510161A CN-PCB/5500 1
42 7419749A CN-SHIELD/5500 1
43 7420022A CN-PNL UNIT/5500 1
44 7216682A P.S. HM-071C 1 100V
45 7216682B P.S. HM-071CE 1 230V
46 7319377B P.S. HM-071C 1 120V
47 7418968A ECG PANEL/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
48 7419966A ECG SLD/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
49 7419720A ECG BOX/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
50 7416610C CW PANEL/5500 1
51 7416611A CW SHIELD/6500 1
52 7417170C CW UNIT/5500 1
53 7218940A CART/5500USA 1 USA
54 7417919B CN-COVER/5500USA 1 USA
10-3 L1E-EA0229
3. KEYBOARD
10-6 L1E-EA0229
3. KEYBOARD
1 7319385F KEYBOARD UNIT(E) 1 ENGLISH
2 7319385G KEYBOARD UNIT(F) 1 FRANCH
3 7320775B KB COVER(E) 1 ENGLISH
4 7320775C KB COVER(F) 1 FRANCH
5 7320775W RUBBER KEY SET-E 1 ENGLISH
6 7320775Y RUBBER KEY SET-F 1 FRANCH
7 7320775L PADDLE SET 1
8 7320775M ENCORDER 5
9 7320775N PDL RUBBER SET 1
10 7320775P KB PCB 1
11 7320775Q KBIF PCB 1
12 7320775R TB PLATE 1
13 7320775T LIGHT TRACK BALL 1
14 7320775D KNOB SET 1
15 7323484A B GAIN CAP 1
16 7323484B CFA GAIN CAP 1
17 7323484C CW GAIN CAP 1
18 7323484D M GAIN CAP 1
19 7323484E ANGLE CAP 1
20 7323484F B GAIN KNOB 1
21 7323484G GAIN KNOB 4
22 7320775F VOL KNOB SET 1
23 7420871A VOL KNOB 8
10-7 L1E-EA0229
4. PC UNIT
L1E-EA0229
10-8
4. PC UNIT
1 7218910A PC UNIT/5500 1 w/o HDD
2 7218756A PC RACK/5500 1
3 7416847A PC RAIL/6500 2
4 7419926A PC FAN UNIT/5500 1
5 7323252Ｂ PCMB/8500 1
6 7413124A FD CABLE 1
7 7413123A HD CABLE 1
8 7319181A MEMORY PCB 1
9 K641A005 PCMB BATTERY 1
10 7413437C CPU2 1
11 7325076A CPU FAN 1
12 7419573A VIDEO PCB 1
13 7418573A CN69 CABLE/5500 1
14 7412262A HD UNIT(NL) 1
15 7420908A HD PLATE/5500 1
16 7511277A MAP1 PCB/5500 1
17 7511277B MAP2 PCB/5500 1
18 7511275A EPI PCB/5500 1
19 7315726A SCSI BRD/PI1 1 EZU-PI1
L1E-EA0229
10-9
5. COVER
10-10 L1E-EA0229
5. COVER
1 7112095A S-COVER L/6500 1
2 7112096A S-COVER R/6500 1
3 7112097A B-COVER L/6500 1
4 7112098A B-COVER R/6500 1
5 7112099B OPTION BASE/5500 1
6 7112100A BUMPER/6500 1
7 7111880A PRB HOLDER/6500 1
8 L931A049 HOLDER KNOB/6500 2
9 7215817D F-COVER/5500 1
10 7215818C TOP COVER/5500 1
11 7415788A SW LABEL/6500 1
12 7417225A UREA SCREW L=6 4
13 7417225C UREA SCREW L=10 8
10-11 L1E-EA0229
6. PCB
10-12 L1E-EA0229
6. PCB
KEY NO. PARTS NO. PART NAME QTY REMARKS
1 7323170A PRB-SW UNIT/5500 1
2 7511409A PRB PCB/6500 1
3 7511410A AWP PCB/5500 1
4 7418408A PRB PLATE/5500 2
5 7323183A PRB SHLD F/5500 1
6 7321646A PRB SHLD R/5500 1
7 UoF281 EZU-ST5 1
8 UoF320 EZU-CW4 1
9 7511411A DBF PCB/5500 1
10 7511406A BIO PCB/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
11 7319339A POWER PCB/5500 1
10-13 L1E-EA0229
7. ACCESSORIES
10-14 L1E-EA0229
7. ACCESSORIES
1 7416612A VCR CASE/6500 1
2 7416613A CASE PLATE/6500 1
3 1384039B PRB HANGER/6500 1
4 7421322A RUBBER FOOT/5500 4
5 J8611101 ECG CLIP 1 EZU-EK25
6 S290A007 BELT/6500 6
7 M6450316 M3 SCREW 4
8 7417225A UREA SCREW L=6 4
10 1469554B MO DISK (230MB) 1
11 7412783A MO DISK (640MB) 1
12 J749A019 CD-RW DISK 1
13 13777XXF DUST COVER 1
14 13777XXD DUST COVER 1 USA
15 7313483U CLOTH FOR CRT 1
16 S2909001 ULTRASOUND JELLY 2
17 J8329001 2P-3P ADAPTER 1
18 N3100406 SOCKET SCREW(M6) 1
19 N3100404 SOCKET SCREW(M4) 1
20 J8390813 COAD BAND 5
21 J8390755 CABLE TIE 10
22 7326351A CU EXTIN.BOARD/5500 1
23 7326351B DBF EXTIN.BOARD/5500 1 for DBF
24 7326351C PCI EXTIN.BOARD/5500 1 for MAP,EPI
25 UOF197 EZU-TH4 1
26 E910A037 POWER CORD 1 100/120V
27 E910A038 POWER CORD 1 230V
28 1477344A EARTH CORD 1
29 UoF907 EZU-RO1 1
30 7324262A ECG CABLE 1 EZU-EK25
31 7315798A SCSI CABLE/Pi1 1 EZU-Pi1
32 7414389A LAN CABLE/Pi2 1 EZU-Pi6
33 UoF582 EZU-FS1 1
34 UoF230 EZU-FS2 1
VINYL COVER,
35 7419321A V-COVER/65-5500 1 NOT USA
10-15 L1E-EA0229
8. MONITOR
10-16 L1E-EA0229
8. MONITOR
1 7313483N FILTER/MT24 1
2 7313483B B-CVR/MT24 1
3 7313483C TILT/MT24 1
4 7313483D CRT/MT24 1
5 7313483E BASE/MT24 1
6 7313483F SIDE/MT24 1
7 7313483G FTG/MT24 1
8 7313483H MAIN BOARD/MT24 1
9 7321445A VIDEO BRD/MT24-1 1
10 7313483K CONT BRD/MT24 1
11 7321445B VR BOARD/MT24-1 1
12 7313483M LED BOARD/MT24 1
13 7313483V BEZEL/MT24 1
14 7313483P KNOB/MT24 1
15 7313483Q AC FILTER/MT24 1
16 7313483R AC CABLE/MT24 1
17 7313483S SIGNAL/MT24 1
18 7313483T FUSE/MT24 1
10-17 L1E-EA0229
9. POWER SUPPLY
⑨ ⑩ ⑲
⑱
⑰
⑫ ⑭
⑮⑯
⑪
②③
⑬
① ④
①
⑤
⑦⑧
10-18 L1E-EA0229
9. POWER SUPPLY
1 7320729A FILTER /071C 1
2 7320729B FUSE 6.3A/250V 1 100V
3 7320729C FUSE 3.15A/250V 1 230V
4 7320729D FUSE 1.6A/250V 1
5 7320729E BONNET/071C 1
6 7320729F SHIELD PLT/071C 1
7 7320729G TRANSFOMER/07C 1 100~120V
8 7320729H TRANSFOMER/07C 1 220~240V
9 7320729J A-LV PCB/071C 1
10 7320729K A-HV PCB/071C 1
11 7320729L SUB-PS BD/071C 1
12 7320729M MC-DC PCB/071C 1
13 7320729N MC-AC PCB/071C 1
14 7320729P SHASSIS/071C 1
15 7320729Q FAN L ASSY/071C 1
16 7320729R FAN R ASSY/071C 1
17 7320729S FILTER PCB/071C 1
18 7320729T CN-CASE/071C 1
19 7320729U CN-COVER/071C 1
10-19 L1E-EA0229
Model EUB-5500
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Installation ---
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EA0237-1
CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi

Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced
without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corpo ration .
Copyright Hitachi medical Corporation 2003. All rights reserved.
Note to users EUB-5500 Installation
This technical guide is a manual to install the EUB-5500 ultrasound scanner and its peripheral
devices (option).
Since the authorized service engineer will carry out installation of this system, please hand over
this Technical Guide to him.
Contents
Section 1 Installation of Standard Composition ･･････････････････････････････････ 1-1
Section 2 Installation of PC Printer ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-1
Section 3 Installation of Video Printer ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 3-1
Section 4 Installation of Analog Color Printer ······························································· 4-1
Section 5 Installation of Digital Color Printer ······························································· 5-1
Section 6 Installation of Video Cassette Recorder ························································· 6-1
Section 7 Installation of MINI-PROBE Interface Unit (EZU-MS6)······························· 7-1
Section 8 Cable Connection with Scanner Unit in Combination with Options ············· 8-1
Section 9 Installation of Steerable CW Doppler Unit (EZU-ST5)·································· 9-1
Section 10 Installation of Single element CW Doppler Unit (EZU-CW4) ······················· 10-1
Section 11 Installation of Biosignal Gating Unit (EZU-EK25)········································ 11-1
Section 12 Installation of SCSI card (EZU-Pi1)······························································· 12-1
Section 13 Installation of Network interface unit (EZU-Pi6) ·········································· 13-1
Section 14 Installation of MO drive unit (EZU-MO1)······················································ 14-1
Section 15 Installation of Omni Directional M mode unit (EZU-OD2)···························· 15-1
Section 16 Installation of Probe hanger unit (EZU-TH4) ･･･････････････････････････ 16-1
Section 17 Release of Option protect on payment···························································· 17-1
Appendix ······················································································································ Appendix-1
( 1 ) 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 1 Installation of Standard Composition
1.1 Packing list
(1) Main unit ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 1

(2) Display monitor (EZU-MT24-S1) ･････････････････････ 1
(3) Probe hanger･･･････････････････････････････････････ 1
(4) Ultrasound jelly ････････････････････････････････････ 2
(5) Dust cover ･････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(6) Fuse ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 1set
(7) CD-RW disk ････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(8) VCR case ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(9) VCR case plate ･････････････････････････････････････ 1
(10) Rubber foot･････････････････････････････････････････ 4
(11) M3 screw (for video printer) ･･････････････････････････ 4
(12) Urea screw ･････････････････････････････････････････ 4
(13) Belt ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 6
(14) Cable clip ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 4
(15) Coad band ･････････････････････････････････････････ 5
(16) Cable tie ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 10
(17) Hexagon wrench (M6) (for monitor fixation) ･･･････････ 1
(18) Hexagon wrench (M4) (for power unit cover removal) ･･ 1
1- 1 L2E-EA0237
1.2 Installation of Monitor display
1.2.1 Detaching Covers
(1) Remove the probe hanger knob, the top cover and the rear cover.
Fig.1-1
1- 2 L2E-EA0237
1.2.2 Mounting the monitor display
(1) Loosen four hexagon socket head bolts with the supplied hexagon wrench.
(2) Put the monitor and fixed with the hexagon wrench.
(3) It is wired for the power cable and the signal cable.
(4) The signal cable passed through the core, and the FG clamp is wound around the signal cable
and fixed.
(5) Install the cover in the same way.
(6) Mount the Probe hanger.
Fig.1-2
1- 3 L2E-EA0237
1.3 Installation of the cable clip
(1) The probe cable can be fixed when a cable clip is installed on the back of the panel base.
Install it after you ask a customer the existence of the necessity.
(But, the space disappears by the construction of option loading, and it may not be able to be
installed.)
1.4 Entry procedure of needle guide line data

Registration of the needle guideline is essential to patient safety.
Therefore, the registration data is not disclosed to the user and the registration must be
carried out by a Hitachi engineer or authorized dealer’s engineer at installation of the
equipment or when the user obtains the probe.
[For registration of needle guideline, refer to Technical Guide (Installation) (L2E-FP0128)]
1.5 Operation Check
After completion of the mounting work, referring to the instruction manual checks that the
function can be normally operated.
1.6 Necessary Tools
(1) Screwdriver ･･････････････････････････ 1
(2) Hexagon wrench (M6) ･････････････････ 1 (EUB-5500 accessory)
1- 4 L2E-EA0237
Section 2 Installation of PC Printer
2.1 Detaching Covers

(1) Remove the rear cover, rear plate and connector cover.
Fig.2-1
2.2 Cable connection with main unit
(1) PC printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.2-2.
Fig.2-2
Cable Connection of PC printer cables
Main unit PC printer Cable name

LINE OUTPUT
Power cable
(Front panel)
CN91
Printer cable
(Rear panel)
2- 1 L2E-EA0237
2.3 Setting place of the PC printer
(1) When connecting the PC printer with EUB-5500, the PC printer must be
placed out side of the Patient Environment to avoid an electrical shock .
Regarding the Patient Environment, IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for
medical electrical systems describes for the area which is shown in Fig.2-3.
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 2-3
＜CAUTION＞
Make sure to use the PC printer which complies with IEC Publication
60950 Standard (Safety of information processing equipment including the
equipment for office use) or IEC Publication 60601-1 Standard (Safety of
medical electrical equipment).
＜WARNING＞
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place the PC printer to be
connected with EUB-5500 within the area of the Patient Environment.
2- 2 L2E-EA0237
2.4 Installing Printer Driver
(1) Overview
To install the printer driver, the explorer needs to be displayed on the system.
(2) Installing the printer driver

① After checking if the power to the main unit is OFF, turn on the power to the main
unit.
② The logobitmap screen of the main unit appears after starting OS.
At this time, press the “E” key while pressing the “Ctrl” key and “Alt” key. This
displays the Explorer dialog.
NOTICE: This operation needs to carry out while the booting screen is displayed. If it
could not be carried out, turn off the power to main unit and turn on again,
and then retry the same procedure.
③ After the Explorer dialog is displayed, insert FD or CD having the printer driver into
the main unit.
④ Double click [My computer] - [Control Panel] - [Printer and FAX] - [Printers].
⑤ Refer to the instruction manual supplemented to the PC printer for installing the
printer driver.
Fig.2-4
NOTICE: When installation with MO, EZU-MO1 becomes necessary separately.
2- 3 L2E-EA0237
⑥ If installation is finished, push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “Del”key, express “Windows
Security” on the dialog box.
Windows Security
WindowsＸＰ
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig.2-5
⑦ Click “Shotdown” on dialog box.

⑧ Express “Shutdown Windows” on dialog box. Select “Shutdown”,click “OK”.
Shutdown Windows
WindowsＸＰ
Shutdown ↓
OK
Fig.2-6
⑨ If the monitor's LED put out the light, and breaker switch OFF on the left side of the
scanner unit.
2.5 Checking Operation

(1) When completing all steps, check if functions work normally while referring to the
instruction manual (Appendix AA) of EUB-5500.
PRINT
(2) Make sure that the PC printer can print image by pressing button on the
scanner unit.
2- 4 L2E-EA0237
Section 3 Installation of Video Printer
3.1 Installation of Video Printer

(1) Remove three fixing screws of the video printer.
(2) Remove the connector cover.
(3) Fix a video printer on the option base with M3 screws which are accessories of the
main unit.
(4) Connect the cables to the main unit as shown in Fig.3-2.
(5) Bundle the cables and put the covers back.
Fig.3-1
3- 1 L2E-EA0237
(1) Video printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.3-2.
Setting 75Ω(impedance) selection switch to ON.
Fig.3-2
Cable Connection of Video printer cables
Main unit Video printer Cable name

LINE OUTPUT AC IN Power cable
PRINTER VIDEO IN BNC cable
PRINTER B/W REMOTE Stereo mini cable
3- 2 L2E-EA0237
3.3 Example of adjusting a print image
(1) Adjust the brightness and contrast by using the BRIGHT and CONTRAST knobs on the front
of the printer.
3- 3 L2E-EA0237
Section 4 Installation of Analog Color Printer
4.1 Installation of Analog Color Printer

(2) The stopper screw of the bottom is removed and installed in the rear panel.
(3) Connect the cables to the main unit. (Refer to 4.2 chapter)
(4) Fix the analog color printer on the option base with the belt which are accessories of the
main unit.
Fig.4-1
4- 1 L2E-EA0237
« A » SONY : UP-1800MD/EPM, 1850MD/EPM, 2800P, 2850P, 2900MD, 2950MD
(1) Analog color printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.4-2 .
(This chapter is how to connect the S terminal. Refer to Section 8 for the connection with the
RGB terminal.)
Fig.4-2
Cable Connection of Analog color printer cables
Main unit Option unit Cable name
VCR-Y/C (IN) OUT (S-VIDEO) Video signal cable
（S terminal- S terminal
VCR-Y/C (OUT) INPUT (S-VIDEO) cable for S-VHS）
PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Print remote cable
4- 2 L2E-EA0237
« B » Mitsubishi: CP700U/700E
RGB terminal.)
Fig.4-3
LINE OUTPUT AC LINE Power cable
VCR−Y/Ｃ (IN) S-VIDEO (OUT) Video signal cable

(S terminal-S terminal
VCR−Y/Ｃ (OUT) S-VIDEO (IN) cable for S-VHS)
PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Print remote cord
4- 3 L2E-EA0237
« C » Mitsubishi: CP900E
RGB terminal.)
Fig.4-4

LINE OUTPUT AC LINE Power cable
VCR−Y/Ｃ (IN) S-VIDEO (OUT) Video signal cable
(S terminal-S terminal
VCR−Y/Ｃ (OUT) S-VIDEO (IN) cable for S-VHS)
PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Print remote cord
4- 4 L2E-EA0237
« D » Polaroid (UK) Ltd.: TX1300SE
RGB terminal.)
Fig.4-5

VCR-Y/C (IN) S-VIDEO(Y/C) (OUT) Video signal cable
(S terminal - S terminal
VCR-Y/C (OUT) S-VIDEO(Y/C) (IN)
cable for S-VHS)
Grounding terminal Grounding cable
PRINTER-COLOR REMOTE Remote cable
4- 5 L2E-EA0237
Section 5 Installation of Digital Color Printer
Install SCSI card (EZU-Pi1), before install Digital color printer. « Refer to Section 12 »
And in the case that the SCSI card is install at the time of shipment, do not install
the printer driver because it as already been install.
5.1 Installation of Digital Color Printer

(2) The stopper screw of the bottom is removed and installed in the rear panel.
(4) Fix the digital color printer on the option base with the belt which are accessories of the
main unit.
Fig.5-1
5-1 L2E-EA0237
Mitsubishi: CP770DW with SB770
(1) Digital color printer and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.5-2 .
Fig.5-2
Cable Connection of Digital color printer cables
LINE OUTPUT
AC LINE Power cable
( Front panel )
SCSI card ( EZU-Pi1 ) SCSI cable
SCSI
( Rear panel ) ( EZU-Pi1 )
SCSI terminater
( supplied with Digital
SCSI
color printer: CP770DW
with SB770 )
5-2 L2E-EA0237
5.3 Install of SCSI printer driver
To the scanner unit has the SCSI card (EZU-Pi1), start the SCSI card driver, install of SCSI
printer driver, release of option protect for SCSI printer.
Prepare “Authentic Dick”: FD (supplied with the scanner unit) and “SCSI printer driver”: FD
(CP770D (SCSI)(FOR XP)), and make sure installation of SCSI card (EZU-Pi1).
5.3.1 Install SCSI printer driver (Mitsubishi: CP770DW with SB770)
(1) Make sure connect digital color printer to the scanner unit, switch ON on the digital color
printer it checks that the scanner unit has connected with a digital color printer.
(2) Switch ON, start the scanner unit.
(3) Express the logobitmap, and push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “E”key soon. Start “Explore”.
Fig 5-3
5-3 L2E-EA0237
(4) Double click [My computer] - [Control Panel] - [Printers and Faxes] - [Add Printer].
Fig 5-4
(5) Click “Next>”.
Fig 5-5
5-4 L2E-EA0237
(6) Express “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.
Make sure select “Local printer attached to this computer”, and make sure that
“Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer” isn’t checked, and click
“Next>”.
Fig 5-6
(7) Select “LPT1 ” on Port of “Use the follow port”, and click “Next>”.
Fig 5-7
5-5 L2E-EA0237
(8) Set the SCSI printer driver CP770D(SCSI)(FOR XP), select “Have Disk…”.
Fig 5-8
(9) Click “OK”.
Fig 5-9
5-6 L2E-EA0237
(10) Make sure select “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on list of “Printers”, and select “Next>”.
Fig 5-10
(11) Make sure select “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on Printer name, and select “Next>”.
Fig 5-11
5-7 L2E-EA0237
(12) Make sure select “Do not share this printer”, and select “Next>”.
Fig 5-12
(13) Select “No”, and click “Next>”.
Fig 5-13
5-8 L2E-EA0237
(14) Select “Finish”.
Fig 5-14
(15) Select “Continue Anyway”.
Fig 5-15
5-9 L2E-EA0237
(16) Finish “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.
Wait to express icon of “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI )” on the “window of Printers and
Faxes”. Then select that icon.
Fig 5-16
(17) Express “window of MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)”.

Select “Properties “ on the Printer menu.
Fig 5-17
5 - 10 L2E-EA0237
(18) Express “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI) Properties” on dialog box.
S e l e c t “Ports tab”, select “CP770D(2:0:5)” on the list and click “OK”.
Ports tab
Select
Fig 5-18
(19) Put out the SCSI printer driver CP770D (SCSI)(FOR XP).
5 - 11 L2E-EA0237
(20) Push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “Del”key, express “Windows Security”on the dialog box.
Windows Security
WindowsＸＰ
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig 5-19
(21) Click “Shutdown” on dialog box.
(22) Express “Shutdown Windows” on dialog box. Select “Shutdown”,click “OK”.
Shutdown Windows
WindowsＸＰ
Shutdown ↓
OK
Fig 5-20
(23) If the monitor's LED put out the light, and breaker switch OFF on the left side of the
Ultrasound scanner unit.
5 - 12 L2E-EA0237
5.3.2 Release of option protect.
(1)Refer to section 17 release option protect, release protect.

(2)After release of option protect,wait to start the scanner unit automatrically.
( 3 ) P u s h “Main Menu”key on keyboard, and select menu(“Setup”→”Print Key”)
,make sure express “Printer(SCSI)” on menu of “Print Key”.
(4)Switch OFF to the scanner unit.
5.4 Establishment SCSI printer
5.4.1 Establishment Print Key
(1)Push “Main Menu”key on the keyboard.

(2)Select “Setup”→”Print/REC Key” on “Main Menu”,express “Print/REC Assignment” menu.
(3)Select “SCSI Printer” on “Print/REC Assignment”menu.
SCSI Printer:
The scanner unit has
SCSI Card(EZU-Pi1)
Fig 5-21
5 - 13 L2E-EA0237
5.4.2 Select SCSI printer and regulate quality of image
It is necessary to select SCSI printer and printer.
(1)Push “Main Menu” on the keyboard.

(2)Select menu(“Setup”→” Peripherals”→” Printer(SCSI)”) on “Main Menu”.
The scanner unit has

SCSI Card(EZU-Pi1)
Fig 5-22
(3)Express the dialog box of “Printer(SCSI)”.

(4)Click the listbox on “Select Printer”.
(5)Select SCSI printer for connection.
(6)After select, click “OK”.
Fig 5-23
5 - 14 L2E-EA0237
5.4.3 Requlate quality of image for digital color printer
(Mitsubishi：CP770DW with SB770)
Select TAB on dialog box of “Printer (SCSI)”, requlate quality of image.
(1)Select TAB” MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on the dialog box of “Printer(SCSI)”.

Express head regulate quality of image in the digital color printer(Mitsubishi：
CP770DW with SB770).
(2)Select this head, be able to change .
Select TAB.
Fig 5-24
1 ) R e d 、Green、Blue：
Regulate Level of RGB(limits: ＋128∼−128).
2)Contrast：
Regulate Level of contrast(limits: ＋128∼−128).
3)Brightness：
Regulate Level of brightness(limits:＋128∼−128).
(3)Regulate quality of image by each printer.

(Example：If red is in deep color, select “-“ side on red).
(4)If click “Reset”, reset (in early level).
(5)If click “Cancel”, cancel the level until clicking “OK”.
(6)If select all head, click “OK”. Keep all head.
5.5 Operating check
(1) After completion of all the works, referring to the instruction manual of the EUB-5500,
check that all the functions can be normally operated.
5 - 15 L2E-EA0237
Section 6 Installation of Video Cassette Recorder

(1) Remove the connector cover and the bumper.
(2) Connect the cables to the main unit. (Refer to 6.3 chapter)
(3) Case plate is fixed, and the belt is passed through the main unit.
Fig.6-1
6- 1 L2E-EA0237
6.2 Installation of Video Cassette Recorder
(1) Video Cassette Recorder is fixed with the belt, and a cable is connected. (Refer to 6.3 chapter)
(2) Fix the connector cover and the VCR case.
Fig.6-2
6- 2 L2E-EA0237
« A » SONY : SVO-9500MD/MDP
(1) Video Cassette Recorder and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.6-3 .
(For the Video Cassette Recorder printer to be installed in combination with Analog color
printer, refer to Section 8.)
Fig.6-3
Cable Connection of Video Cassette Recorder (SONY : SVO-9500MD/MDP)
VCR-Y/C (OUT) VIDEO IN-S VIDEO Video signal cable

VCR-Y/C ( IN) VIDEO OUT-S VIDEO cable for S-VHS)
VCR-CONT REMOTE (34P) EZU-RO1 cable(option) *
DOP-F (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH-1/L)
DOP-F (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH-1/L) Stereo AUDIO

cable
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH-2/R)
DOP-R (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH-2/R)

NOTE: The cable marked with * is required for remote control from the keyboard on the
main unit.
6- 3 L2E-EA0237
«B» PANASONIC : AG-MD830/E
(For the Video Cassette Recorder printer to be installed in combination with Analog color printer,
refer to Section 8.)
Fig.6-4
Cable Connection of Video Cassette Recorder (PANASONIC : AG-MD830/E)
VCR-Y/C (OUT) INPUT-S VIDEO Video signal cable

VCR-Y/C ( IN) OUTPUT-S VIDEO cable for S-VHS)
VCR-CONT REMOTE (34P) EZU-RO1 cable(option) *
DOP-F (IN) OUTPUT-AUDIO-CH1
DOP-F (OUT) INPUT-AUDIO-CH1 Stereo AUDIO
DOP-R (IN) OUTPUT-AUDIO-CH2 cable
DOP-R (OUT) INPUT-AUDIO-CH2

main unit.
6- 4 L2E-EA0237
« C » MITSUBISHI : HS-MD3000
(For the Video Cassette Recorder printer to be installed in combination with Analog color printer,
refer to Section 8.)
Fig.6-5
Cable Connection of Video Cassette Recorder (MITSUBISHI : HS-MD3000)
VCR-Y/C (OUT) S- VIDEO IN Video signal cable

VCR-Y/C ( IN) S – VIDEO OUT cable for S-VHS)
VCR-CONT REMOTE EZU-RO1 cable(option) *
DOP-F (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH1 L)
DOP-F (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH1 L) Stereo AUDIO
DOP-R (IN) AUDIO OUT (CH2 R) cable
DOP-R (OUT) AUDIO IN (CH2 R)

main unit.
6- 5 L2E-EA0237
Section 7 Installation of MINI-PROBE Interface Unit (EZU-MS6)
7.1 Packing list (from EUB-5500 packing lists)
(1) AUTENTIC DISK ･････････････････････････････ 1
(Protection release work is to use DISK which is surely being packed in this unit.)
« Refer to Section 17 »
(2) Signal cable ･････････････････････････････ 1
(3) Block core ･････････････････････････････ 1
(4) M4 screw ･････････････････････････････ 1
(5) FG clamp ･････････････････････････････ 1
7.2 Mounting the block core and the FG clamp
(1) The block core is installed in the power cable, and the FG clamp is installed in the signal
cable.
Fig.7-1
7- 1 L2E-EA0237
7.3 Installation of MINI-PROBE system (SP-711UA)
(3) Fix the MINI-PROBE system on the tray with the belt which are accessories of the main unit.
Fig.7-2
7- 2 L2E-EA0237
(1) MINI-PROBE system and main unit are connected as shown in Fig.7-3.
Fig.7-3
Cable Connection of MINI-PROBE system

MPIF I/O connector Signal cable
7- 3 L2E-EA0237
7.5 Confirming MINI-PROBE system
Follow the steps below to confirm that the MINI-PROBE software has been successfully installed.
If not installed correctly, execute working of release. (Refer to section 17)
(1) Connect the MINI-PROBE.
Press key, make sure express ”5:MINI-PRB” on “Select Probe” of dialog box
PROBE
(2)
“Select Probe with Application”.
Fig.7-4
7- 4 L2E-EA0237
Section 8 Cable Connection with Scanner Unit in Combination
with Options
Connect the Analog color printer to the RGB Terminal in the case of the Analog color printer
and VCR.
Table 8-1 Peripheral device
Peripheral Manufacturer’s model, type

Manufacturer
device NTSC PAL
UP- 1800MD UP- 1800EPM

SONY
UP- 1850MD UP- 1850EPM
Analog
CP700U CP700E
color printer MITSUBISHI
- CP900E
Polaroid(UK)Ltd. - TX1300SE
SONY S V O-9 5 0 0 M D S V O-9 5 0 0 M D P

VCR
PANASONIC A G- M D 8 3 5 A G- M D 8 3 5 E
Fig.8-1
8- 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 9 Installation of Steerable CW Doppler Unit (EZU-ST5)
9.1 Packing list
(1) CW PCB ･････････････････････････････ 1
9.2 Mounting Steerable CW Doppler Unit
(1) Remove the PCB fixing plate. (Refer to Appendix 1.)
(2) Mount the CW PCB. 【 SLOT No.3 】
(3) Mount the PCB fixing plate (Refer to Appendix 1.)
Fig.9-1
9- 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 10 Installation of Single Element CW Doppler Unit (EZU-CW4)
10.1 Packing list
(1) CW PCB ･････････････････････････････ 1
10.2 Mounting S ingle Element CW Doppler Unit
(2) Mount the CW PCB. 【 SLOT No.3 】
Fig.10-1
10 - 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 11 Installation of Biosignal Gating Unit (EZU-EK25)
11.1 Packing list
(1) ECG connector box ････････････････････････････ 1
(2) BIO PCB ･････････････････････････････ 1
(3) ECG cable ･････････････････････････････ 1
(4) ECG clip ･････････････････････････････ 3
(5) USB cable ･････････････････････････････ 1
11.2 Mounting Biosignal Gating Unit
(2) Mount the BIO PCB, CNB1 and USB cables are connected. 【 SLOT No.6 】
(3) CNB3 cable is connected to the ECG connector box, and it is installed in the main unit.
Fig.11-1
11 - 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 12 Installation of SCSI card (EZU-Pi1)
(1) SCSI card ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(2) SCSI cable ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(3) SCSI printer driver (Mitsubishi : CP770DW with SB770)(FOR XP) ･････ 1
( 4 ) M３screw ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
12.2 Mounting SCSI card
(1) Remove the Top cover. (Refer to Appendix 2.)
(2) Mount the SCSI card. 【 SLOT No.”D” 】
(3) Connect the SISI cable.
(4) Mount the Top cover. (Refer to Appendix 2.)
* Installation of printer driver. « Refer to Section 5 »
Fig.12-1
12 - 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 13 Installation of Network interface unit (EZU-Pi6)
13.1 Parts of setting
(1) LAN cable ････････････････････････････････････････ 1

(2) AUTHENTIC DISK ････････････････････････････････････ 1
13.2 Mounting Net work interface unit
(1) Remove the Rear plate A.

(2) LAN cable connected to CN92.
(3) Mount the Rear plate A.
Fig.13-1
13.3 Release of option protect
(1) Refer to section 17 release option protect, release protect.
13 - 1 L2E-EA0237
13.4 Setting for network connection
13.4.1 Main unit
Ⅰ. Set the computer name and work group
(1)Start up the main unit.
(2)Express the logobitmap, and push “Ctrl”key, “Alt”key and “E”key soon. Start “Explore”.
Double click [My computer] - [Control Panel] - [System].
Fig.13-2
(3) Express “System Properties” on dialog box. Select “Computer Name” tab and click
“Change…”.
Fig.13-3
13 - 2 L2E-EA0237
(4) Express “Computer Name Changes” on dialog box. Select the item to be changed and click
“OK”.
Fig.13-4
(5) Click “OK”.
Fig.13-5
(6) Click “OK”.
Fig.13-6
13 - 3 L2E-EA0237
(7) Click “No”.
Fig.13-7
NOTE: To connect to the existing network, ask your network manager about the computer name
and work group.
A setting example of connection between this unit and one PC is shown in Table 13-1.
Set the same name

Table 13-1 A Setting Example of One to One
Computer Name Work Group
Main unit EUB-US WORKGROUP
PC MYCOMPUTER WORKGROUP
Set different name
Ⅱ. Set property of TCP/IP
(1) Double click [My computer] - [Control Panel] - [Network Connect…].
Fig.13-8
13 - 4 L2E-EA0237
(2) Select “Local Area Connection” and push UNDO
key.
Select “Properties”.
Fig.13-9
(3) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) ” and click “Properties”.
Fig.13-10
13 - 5 L2E-EA0237
(4) Set the items to be set on the TCP/IP, and click “OK”.
NOTE: In connection with the existing network, ask the network manager about the settings
necessary for connection with the network such as IP address and domain.
A setting example of connection between the main unit and one PC is shown in Table 13-2.
To connect the main unit to one PC, click the radio button “Use the following IP address” in the
“General” tab, and make the setting only in the IP Address and Subnet mask.
Fig.13-11
Table 13-2 A Setting only in the IP address and Subnet mask

Computer Name Work Group
Main unit 172.19.5.130 255.255.0.0
PC 172.19.5.135 255.255.0.0
Set different figure for only It is made the same setup.

the last.(1∼255)
13 - 6 L2E-EA0237
13.4.2 Setting for PC (OS : WindowsNT)
(1) By clicking “Start” button at the left bottom of the screen and moving the cursor pointer to
“Setting”, the “Control Panel” appears at the right side. Click this button to display the
Control Panel folder.
Fig.13-12
(2) Double clicking Network in the Control Panel folder displays the Network Dialog
(Refer to 13-13).
(3) Clicking “Change” button displays the Identification Change dialog (Refer to 13-14).
(4) Select the item to be changed and click “OK”.
NOTE: To connect to the existing network, ask your network manager about the computer
name and work group.
A setting example of connection between this unit and one PC is shown in Table 13-1.
Fig.13-13 Fig.13-14
13 - 7 L2E-EA0237
Ⅱ. Set property of TCP/IP
(1) Select the Protocol tab on the Network dialog. (Refer to Fig. 13-15.)
(2) Select the TCP/IP protocol from the Network protocol, and click “Property” button.
(Refer to Fig. 13-15.)
The TCP/IP Protocol dialog is displayed. (Refer to Fig. 13-16.)
(3) Set the items to be set on the TCP/IP, and click “OK”.
To connect the main unit to one PC, referring to Table 13-2, make the setting only in the IP
Address and Subnet Mask.
Fig.13-15 Fig.13-16
13 - 8 L2E-EA0237
13.4.3 Setting for PC (OS : Windows2000/WindowsXP)
NOTE: The Windows of Windows2000 uses Windows2000 Professional as an example.

and the screen of WindowsXP uses WindowsXP Professional as an example.
“Setting”, “Control Panel” appears at the right side.
NOTE: On windows XP, Click this “Control Panel” to display the Control Panel folder.
(2) Clicking “Control Panel” button displays the Control Panel folder. (Refer to Fig. 13-17.)
NOTE: On Windows XP, There may be cases where the folder shown in Fig. 13-17-1 is not
displayed. In such case, click “Switch to Classis View” button shown with the
arrow(2) in the Fig. 13-17.
(3) Double clicking “System” in the Control Panel folder displays the “System Property” dialog
shown in Fig. 13-18.
(4) To change Computer Name or Work Group, click “Property” button (WindowsXP: “Change”
button).
(5) Clicking “Property” button displays “Identification Change” (WindowsXP: Computer Name
Change” dialog. Input the new name and click “OK” button.
NOTE: If any change is made, the PC must be restarted.
name and work group. A settin g example of connection between this unit and one PC
is
shown in Table 13-1.
Windows2000 （3） (3)

WindowsXP
Fig.13-17
13 - 9 L2E-EA0237
（2）
Fig.13-17-1 Classic Display
Windows2000 WindowsXP
Fig.13-18
Fig.13-19
13 - 10 L2E-EA0237
Ⅱ.Setting TCP/IP
“Setting”, the “Control Panel” appears at the right side. Click this “Control Panel” to
display the Control Panel folder.
NOTE: On WindowsXP, the “Control Panel” can be directly clicked from “Start” button.
(2) Clicking “Control Panel” button displays the Control Panel folder. (Refer to Fig. 13-17.)
(3) Double clicking “Network and Dial-up Connection” (WindowsXP: Network Connection) in
the
Control Panel folder displays the “Network and Dial-up Connection (WindowsXP: Network
Connection) folder shown in Fig. 13-20.
(4) Selecting “Property” item at the bottom by clicking the right mouse button on “Local Area
Connection” displays the “Local Area Connection Property”. (Refer to Fig. 13-21.)
(5) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” in the Connection items and click the Property button.
( 6 ) “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Property” shown in fig. 13-22 is displayed. Input the data and
c l i c k “OK” button.
Fig.13-20 Network and Dial-up Connection
13 - 11 L2E-EA0237
Fig.13-21 Local Area Connection Propaty
Fig.13-22 Internet Protocol Propaty
13 - 12 L2E-EA0237
13.4.4 Setting for PC (OS : Windows95/Windows98/WindowsMe)
NOTE: The windows of Windows98 are used as example.
Ⅰ.Set the computer name and work group
(1)By clicking “Start” button at the left bottom of the screen and moving the cursor pointer to
“Setting”, the “Control Panel” appears at the right side.
(2)Clicking “Control Panel” button displays the Control Panel folder. (Refer to Fig. 13-23.)
(3)Double clicking “Network” in the Control Panel folder displays “Network” shown in Fig. 13-24.
(4)To change computer name or work group, click “Identification” tab. (Refer to Fig. 13-24.)
(5)Input data in the item to be changed and click “OK” button.
NOTE: If any change is made, the PC must be restarted.
name and work group. A setting example of connection between this unit and one PC is
shown in Table 13-1.
Fig.13-23 Control Panel
Fig.13-24 Network
13 - 13 L2E-EA0237
Ⅱ.Setting TCP/IP
(1)By clicking “Start” button at the left bottom of the screen and moving the cursor pointer to
“Setting”, the “Control Panel” appears. Click this “Control Panel”.
(2)Clicking “Control Panel displays the Control Panel folder. (Refer to Fig. 13-23.)
(3)Double clicking “Network” in the Control Panel folder displays “Network” shown in Fig. 13-2 5 .
Click “Network Setting” tab in the Network.
(4)Select “TCP/IP” protocol from network components and click the Property button.
(5)“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Property” shown in fig. 13-26 is displayed. Input the data and
click
“OK” button.
Fig.13-25 Network Fig.13-26 TCP/IP Property
13 - 14 L2E-EA0237
1 3 . 5 File Sharing
13.5.1 Checking Validity of File Sharing (only for Windows95/Windows98/WindowsME)
If any of Windows95/Windows98/WindowsME is used, carry out the following steps to make file
sharing valid before setting File Sharing.
(1)Double click “Network” in Control Panel.

(2)Click “Network Setting” tab in “Network” shown in Fig. 13-25 and click “File and Printer
Sharing” button.
(3)“File and Printer Sharing” dialog is displayed. Check that the box for “I want to be able to
give others access to my files. ” is checked. (Refer to Fig. 13-27.)
Fig.13-27 File and Printer Sharing
13.5.2 File Sharing
To share the specific file, follow the next operation steps.

(1) Click the right mouse button on the folder to be shared and select “Sharing” (WindowsXP:
Sharing and Security).
(2) The Folder Property shown in Fig. 13-28 is displayed. Put a check mark in “Sharing this
folder” and click “OK” button.
NOTE: It is necessary to have set File Sharing from “Network Setup Wizard” on WindowsXP.
NOTE: When it is express by the format that is different from the screen of Property of the
F i g . 8 -28, and remove the check of “ Use simple file sharing ” by Control Panel
→ Folder Options → View tab. (Refer to Fig. 13-29.)
Remove the check.
Fig.13-28 Folder Property F i g . 1 3 -29 Folder Options
13 - 15 L2E-EA0237
13.6 Checking Network Connection
Check the network connection in the following procedures. (Operation on the ultrasound
scanner unit)
(1)Start up the main unit.
( 2 ) Select Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing to display “Set UP Filing” dialog. (Refer to Fig.
1 3 -30.)
(3)Click “Network Folder” button to display “Network Folder” dialog. (Refer to Fig. 13-31.)
(4)Double click “Network Computer” and select the connected PC.
(5)Responding to the prompt for user name and password to connect the main unit to the
selected PC, input data in them.
(6)After the input is accepted, the sharing folder is displayed. Select it and click “Registration”
button to set the Sharing Folder.
Upon setting the Sharing Folder, the network connection has now been established.
Fig.13-30 Image Setup Fig.13-31 Network Folder
13 - 16 L2E-EA0237
Section 14 Installation of MO drive unit (EZU-MO1)
14.1 Packing list

(1) MO drive ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(2) 3.5 inch MO disk ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
(3) USB mini cable ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
( 4 ) M３screw ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4
14.2 Mounting MO drive unit
(1) Remove the Top cover. (Refer to Appendix 2.)

(2) Remove the Front cover and the Drive unit.
(3) Remove the MOD blind plate and mount the MO drive.
(4) The USB mini cable is connected to the MO drive and the PC unit.
(5) CNR9 to install in the main unit is connected to the MO drive.
(Connect the CNR9 connector after you remove it because the cover is stuck.)
(6) CN64 and CNR8 are connected to the FD drive.
(7) The Drive unit is installed, and the cover is returned to the cause.
Fig.14-1
14 - 1 L2E-EA0237
14.3 Assigning the drive unit
When the drive unit, EZU-MO1 is to be connected to the drive, it is necessary to assign D
drive for it in basic OS Windows XP of ultrasound scanner system. It is required to
confirm that the assignment for each drive is set as mentioned below correctly.
A drive: FDD (Floppy disk drive: standard equipment)

C drive: HDD (Hard disk drive partition0: standard equipment)
D drive: MOD (MO drive, EZU-MO1: option)
F drive: HDD (hard disk drive partition1: standard equipment)
H drive: CD-R/RW drive: standard equipment)
Procedure 1 for confirming the assignment setting:

(1) Turn on the power of scanner. When ultrasound start up image is displayed, press
Ctrl+Alt+E keys simultaneously. After a while Explorer image is started.
(2) As shown in Fig. 14-2, if D drive is displayed as [Removable Disk], the assignment is
correct.
Fig. 14-2 D drive for Removable Disk

(3) If [Removable Disk] is assigned to either E or G drive, it is necessary to change it to D
drive by observing following procedure.
(4) In the Explore image, double click the file “C:/Eub-us/Tools /Shortcut to diskmgmt” in C
drive with Enter key, and then a dialog [Disk Management] is displayed.
Fig. 14-3 Started Disk Management
14 - 2 L2E-EA0237
(5) Next, move the arrow mark to “Disk 1 Removable” locating at lower part of dialog and
press the UNDO key, and then a menu is opened. After that select “Change Drive Letter
and Paths… “ and click it with ENTER key.
Fig. 14-4 Changed Drive Letter
(6) In the next dialog, select [Change] button and click it with ENTER key.
Fig. 14-5 Select “Change” button
(7) In the next dialog, a message “Assign a following letter of drive” is displayed. So, change
it to “D” drive and press [OK] button.
Fig. 14-6 Do Drive “D” for MO
14 - 3 L2E-EA0237
(8) When the previous dialog returns, press [OK] button.
(9) Press X button at upper right of [Disc management] dialog, then the change of drive is
finished. After that confirm again that D drive is assigned to [Removable Disk] correctly
in Explorer image.
As a next step, set up a condition to prevent the occurrence such a situation that a useless
dialog is automatically displayed when MO is inserted into the drive.
Procedure 2 for confirming the assignment setting:

(10) Double click the file “C:/Eub-us/EUBstyle.reg” with Enter key.
(11) As a dialog “Are you sure you want to add the information ... to registry?” is displayed,
press [Yes] button.
(12) As a dialog “… has been successfully entered into the registry. ” is displayed, press [Yes]
button.
(13) Press Ctrl＋Alt+Del keys simultaneously. In the next press [Shut down] button and
select “Shut down”, then press [OK] button in order to turn off the power of the scanner
system. When you turn on the power of it again, you can start the scanner under the
condition that all the procedures as stated above have been completed from the next
operation and on.
14 - 4 L2E-EA0237
Section 15 Installation of Omni Directional M mode unit (EZU-OD2)

(1) AUTHENTIC DISK ････････････････････････････････････ 1
15.2 Release of option protect
(1) Refer to section17 release option protect, release protect.
15 - 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 16 Installation of Probe hanger unit (EZU-TH4)
(1) Probe hanger unit ･･････････････････････････････････････ 1
16.2 Mounting Probe hanger unit
(1) Remove the Probe hanger knob.
(2) Probe hanger base of Probe hanger unit is installed in the main unit.
(3) Remove the Probe hanger.
Fig.16-1
16 - 1 L2E-EA0237
Section 17 Release of Option protect on payment
Be able to release option protect on payment.

Be able to release plural option protect on the scanner unit.

(1) AUTHENTIC DISK ････････････････････････････････････ 1
17.2 Working of release

(1) Start up the scanner unit.
(2) Set the AUTHENTIC DISK to the scanner unit.
(3) Push“Main Menu” key on keyboard and select menu(“Setup”→”System”” → Entry Opt. ”)
in“Main Menu”
(4) Release option protect automatically and express ｢Confirmation｣on success.
(Refer to Fig 17-1).
If not express ｢Confirmation｣. Make sure of the AUTHENTIC DISK.
Fig.17-1
(5) Put out the AUTHENTIC DISK to the scanner unit.

(6) Click “OK” in ｢Confirmation｣.
(7) Restart the scanner unit automatically.
(8) Make sure movement of each option with the scanner unit.
NOTE: Keep the latest AUTHENTIC DISK. When software is to be reinstalled,

all options are inhibited. To enable options, execute the latest AUTHENTIC DISK again.
17 - 1 L2E-EA0237
Appendix
1. Assmbling PCB fixing plate
2. Assmbling Top cover
Appendix - 1 L2E-EA0237
3. Install of the PCB
·If the PCB Guide is handled, the PCB can be inserted easily.
4. The movement of the option base

The replacement of the position is possible with the option base in top and bottom.
Please move according to a use.
(Standard composition: There is no necessity for movement for installation of the color printer, B/W
printer, and VCR.)
The option base can be moved from the standard position to the top 4cm and the bottom
8cm(4cmx2).
Option base
Appendix - 2 L2E-EA0237
5. About the RGB terminal
·The RGB terminal was set up inside the main unit.
When you use it, please wire a cable, as shown in a figure.
NOTICE: RGB terminals are [R], [G+SYNC], [B] specification. Be careful of the record machine of
[R], [G], [B], [SYNC] for because it can't be connected.
Rear of the scanner unit
In the case of the front to wiring In the case of the rear to wiring
Appendix - 3 72 L2E-EA0237
Three-Dimensional Display Software
EZU-3D4, 3D2S
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0232-1

Copyright Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003. All rights reserved.
Preface
Our service personnel shall install this software. Please hand over this technical guide to our
service personnel.
CONTENTS
Page
Section 1 Installing 3D software ................................................................................................... 1 - 1
1.1 Installing 3D software...................................................................................................... 1 - 1

1.2 Setup Service .................................................................................................................... 1 - 5
1.3 Unprotecting options for pay and confirmation ............................................................. 1 - 9
1.4 Updating 3D software ...................................................................................................... 1 - 10
Section 2 Installation of Three-Dimensional Display Software (EZU-3D2S)

(EZU-3D2S) ............................ 2 - 1
2.1 Necessary tools ................................................................................................................. 2 - 1

2.2 Packing list........................................................................................................................ 2 - 1
2.3 Setting DIP SWITCH of Flock of Bird unit .................................................................... 2 - 3
2.4 Assembling magnetic transmitters stand....................................................................... 2 - 4
2.5 Wiring CRT SYNC cable .................................................................................................. 2 - 4
2.6 Detaching Covers.............................................................................................................. 2 - 5
2.7 Storage of the COM cable................................................................................................. 2 - 6
2.8 Wiring cables..................................................................................................................... 2 - 7
2.9 Installing Flock of Birds unit........................................................................................... 2 - 8
2.10 Installing magnetic sensor............................................................................................... 2 - 9
(1) 1 L2E-EZ0232
Section 1 Installing 3D Software
If this software has been already installed when delivered, skip this work of installation.
If the additional option is only EZU-3D4 or both EZU-3D4 and EZU-3D2S, perform the work from
Paragraph 1.1 to 1.3. If the additional option is only EZU-3D2S, perform the work in Paragraph 1.3,
omitting Paragraph 1.1 ∼ 1.2.
When you update EZU-3D4 and EZU-3D2S, the work in paragraph 1.4 must be performed. Then,
since the data files are saved in F drive, you don’t need to shelter them in case of version-up.
Necessary parts
EZU-3D4 INSTALL CD ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Installing 3D software

(1) Turn on the power to the ultrasound scanner. When booting Windows XP Embedded (OS)
is followed by the software start screen, press the E key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt
key to open the Explorer.
(2) Open CD-RW Drive [H:] of My Computer in the Explorer and execute Setup in it.
Fig. 1-1
1-1 L2E-EZ0232
(3) When the dialog “Welcome to the Install Shield Wizard for L3Di” appears, press the Next
button.
Fig. 1-2
(4) When the dialog “License Agreement” is displayed, press the Yes button.
Fig. 1-3
1-2 L2E-EZ0232
(5) When the dialog “Choose Destination Location” is displayed, confirm that Destination
Folder is “C:\3d\L3Di” and press the Next button. The system starts copying files. Wait
while the system copies files.
Fig. 1-4
(6) As soon as completing copy, the dialog “InstallShield Wizard Complete” is displayed.
Check “No, I will restart computer later.” and press the Finish button.
Fig. 1-5
1-3 L2E-EZ0232
(7) Open CD Drive [H:] of My Computer in the Explorer. If “Tool for 3D” exists, execute it. If it
doesn’t exist, proceed to 1.2.
Fig. 1-6
(8) When The dialog ”Tool for 3D” is appeared, press OK button and wait till the dialog is closed
automatically.
Fig. 1-7
1-4 L2E-EZ0232
1.2 Setup Service
(1) Open “Control Panel” from the Explorer and double click “Component Service” from
the ”Administrators tool”.
Fig. 1-8
(2) When the dialog “Component Services” is displayed, double click “Services(Local)”.
Fig. 1-9
1-5 L2E-EZ0232
(3) Change Status and Startup Type (①) displayed in this dialog. Table 1-1 shows Service (②)
need to change and its Status and Startup Type.
(①)
(②)
Fig. 1-10
Table 1-1 Status and Startup Type of Each Device
Service Status Startup Type

Qos RSVP Started Automatic
Server Started Automatic
WorkStation Started Automatic
1-6 L2E-EZ0232
(4) The following shows how to set Status and Startup Type.
a) Double click Service (②) to be changed.
b) Then the Property dialog displayed.
Service name to be changed
c)
d)
Fig. 1-19
Fig. 1-11
c) Select Startup Type according to Startup Type in Table 1-1 [Status Type of Each Device].
d) Select Service Status according to Status in Table 1-1 [Startup Type of Each Device].
d) Press the OK button.
e) Repeat steps a) ~ d) for all services shown in Table 1-1 [Startup Type of Each Device].
(5) For close the dialog “”Component Services”, Click “×” button on Titlebar of “Component
Services”.( See Fig 1-9)
(6) The eject button of CD drive is pushed and CD is taken out. If CD is not taken out, Right-
click CD-RW Drive [H:] of My Computer in the Explorer, and select the eject command.
(7) Press the Del key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to display the dialog “Windows
Security”.
(8) Press the Shutdown button displayed on the dialog.
1-7 L2E-EZ0232
Windows Security
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-12
(9) The dialog “Shutdown Windows” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press the OK
button.
Fig. 1-13
(10) When monitor's LED put out the light ,the breaker switch OFF (at the side of main unit).
1-8 L2E-EZ0232
1.3 Unprotecting options for pay and confirmation
This work unprotects the EZU-3D4 option and EZU-3D2S option incorporated into main unit.
Parts to be prepared
AUTHENTIC DISK (Accessory EZU-3D4, EZU-3D2S) .......................... １
Unprotecting work
(1) Boot the main unit.
(2) Insert the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(3) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ System Æ Entry Opt. from the Main Menu.
(4) Options are automatically unprotected. If succeeded, the dialog “Confirmation” is
displayed as shown in Fig. 1-14. If not displayed, the AUTHENTIC DISK could not be
the accessory to the main unit. Check the product ID of the system in AUTHENTIC
DISK.
The dialog confirmation
Fig. 1-14
(5) Take out the AUTHENTIC DISK.

(6) Press the “OK” button of the dialog “Confirmation”.
(7) The system is rebooted automatically.
(8) Press the Main Menu key and confirm that “3D” is displayed in black letters on the Setup
Menu of Main Menu.
(9) Turn off the power of main unit.
1-9 L2E-EZ0232
1.4 Updating 3D software
(1) Turn on the power to the ultrasound scanner. When booting Windows XP Embedded (OS)
is followed by the software start screen, press the E key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt
key to open the Explorer.
(2) Insert the EZU-3D4 INSTALL CD into the CD drive.
(3) Open CDRW Drive[H:] of My Computer in the Explorer. Execute “Tool for 3D” in it.
Fig. 1-15
(4) When The dialog ”Tool for 3D” is appeared, press OK button and wait till the dialog is closed
automatically.
Fig. 1-16
(5) The eject button of CD drive is pushed and CD is taken out. If CD is not taken out, Right-
click CD-RW Drive [H:] of My Computer in the Explorer, and select the eject command.
(6) Press the Del key while pressing the Ctrl key and Alt key to display the dialog “Windows
Security”.
1 - 10 L2E-EZ0232
(7) Press the Shutdown button displayed on the dialog.
Windows Security
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-17
(8) The dialog “Shut Down Windows” is displayed. Select “Shutdown” and press the OK
button.
Fig. 1-18
(9) When monitor's LED put out the light ,the breaker switch OFF (at the side of main unit).
1 - 11 L2E-EZ0232
Section 2 Installation of Three-Dimensional Display Unit (EZU-3D2S)
When only 3D software (EZU-3D4) is added, you don’t need to perform the work in this section.
2.1 Necessary tool
(1) Cross recessed screwdriver ････････････････････････････････････････ 1

(2) Slotted-head screwdriver ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 1
2.2 Packing list

(1) Flock of Birds unit ............................................1
Flock of Birds unit
(2) RS232C cable ....................................................1
(3) Magnetic transmitter
(for magnetic transmitter stand).....................1
RS232C cable
(4) Magnetic sensor (for probe)..............................1
(5) Power cable (for 100V∼120V) .........................1
Magnetic transmitter
(6) Power cable (for 220V∼240V) .........................1
(for magnetic
(7) AC adapter ........................................................1 transmitter stand）
(8) CRT SYNC cable...............................................1
(9) Magnetic sensor attachment............................5 Magnetic sensor
(10) Magic tape .........................................................4 (for probe)
(11) Flock of Birds User Disk ..................................2
Power cable
(for 100V∼120V)
Power cable
(for 220V∼240V)
Magnetic sensor attachment

AC adapter
CRT SYNC cable

Magic tape
Flock of Birds
User Disk
(Not used)
2-1 L2E-EZ0232
(12) Magnetic transmitter stand.....................................1set
・Magnetic transmitter stand base.........................1
・Magnetic transmitter stand fixing plate .............1
・Magnetic transmitter stand mounting plate ......1
・Screw (44mm long)................................................3
・Screw (25mm long)................................................2
・Nut .........................................................................3
Magnetic transmitter stand(1set)
・Rubber bumper......................................................2
・Fixing rubber.........................................................2
・Nylon screw ...........................................................4
・Thumb-screw .........................................................2
(13) Cable tie ....................................................................5 Magnetic transmitter stand
(14) Wire tie ......................................................................5
(15) COM cable.................................................................1
(16) SEMS screw ..............................................................1
(17) INSTALLATION AND OPERATION GUIDE ........1 Magnetic transmitter
(18) AUTHENTIC DISK .................................................1 stand fixing plate
(Protection release work is to use DISK
which is surely being packed in this unit.)
Cable tie stand mounting plate
Wire tie Screw

(44mm long)
Thumb-screw Screw
(25mm long)
Nylon screw Nut
COM cable Rubber bumper
Fixing rubber
SEMS screw
Fig 2-1
2-2 L2E-EZ0232
2.3 Setting DIP SWITCH of Flock of Birds unit
Confirm that DIP SWITCH of Flock

DIP SWITH of Birds unit has been set as in the
OFF=up ON=down “When shipped” column.
Table 2-1 DIP SWITCH FUNCTION TABLE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Remarks
on on on off off off off off When shipped
off off off NOT USED
off off on 2400
off on off 4800
off on on 9600
RS232C data transfer rate
on off off 19200
on off on 38400
on on off 57600
on on on 115200
57142(Band:32MHz), RS485 data transfer rate
off off off 57600(Band:40MHz) Host CPU Band may differ from
117647(Band:32MHz), values in the left table.
off off on 113636(Band:40MHz) See INSTALLATION AND
250000(Band:32MHz), OPERATION GUIDE
off on off 250000(Band:40MHz) (Accessories to Three-
Dimensional Display
333333(Band:32MHz), Software (EZU-3D2S)) for
off on on 500000(Band:40MHz) details.
off off off off 0
off off off on 1
FBB address
↓ ↓
(FLY mode)
on on on off 14
on on on on invalid
off off off off 1

TEST number
off off off on 3
（TEST mode）
↓ ↓
on on on on 31
on TEST mode
off FLY mode
2-3 L2E-EZ0232
2.4 Assembling magnetic transmitter stand
(1) As shown in Fig. 2-2, assemble the magnetic transmitter stand.
(See Fig. 2-6 for cable wiring.)
Magnetic transmitter stand mounting plate
Thumb-screw
(For magnetic transmitter stand)
Fixing rubber
Magnetic transmitter stand fixing plate
Nylon screw
Rubber bumper Nut
Screw (25mm long)
Screw (44mm long)
Magnetic transmitter stand base
Fig.2-2
2.5 Wiring CRT SYNC cable

(1) Follow Fig 2-3 to stick the CRT SYNC cable to the monitor.
CRT SYNC cable
Fig.2-3
2-4 L2E-EZ0232
(1) The covers are removed as the Fig.2-4.
Fig.2-4
2-5 L2E-EZ0232
2.7 Storage of the COM cable
(1) The PC unit is pull out, and MAP1, MAP2, and EPI PCB are removed.
(2) The COM cable is stored, and a cable is connected to PCMB. 【 SLOT No. ” F ” 】
(The cable is to pass under MAP1, MAP2, and EPI PCB.
(3) Connect RS232C cable.
(4) MAP1, MAP2, and EPI PCB are stored, and the PC unit is returned to the cause.
EPI PCB
MAP2 PCB
MAP1 PCB
COM cable
RS232C cable
PC unit
PCMB
The connector
Screw position of the
COM cable
Front blind plate
RS232C cable
Fig.2-5
2-6 L2E-EZ0232
2.8 Wiring cables
(1) Wiring the cables as the Fig.2-6.
Rear panel
CN90
Flock of Birds unit
Front view Rear view

POWER
RS-232
SYNC
XMTR
RECEIVER
Front panel
Fig.2-6
2-7 L2E-EZ0232
2.9 Installing Flock of Birds unit
（1） Wind the belt (main unit accessory) around the Flock of Birds unit to fix it.
（2） Stuck the magic tape to AC adapter and the Flock of Birds unit to fix AC adapter.
（3） Install covers in the same way.
Magic tape
AC adapter
Wind the belt

(Main unit accessory)
(For magnetic transmitter stand)
Flock of Birds unit
Fig.2-7
Cautions in laying out each component

・ When laying out components, refer to Chapter 2 System configuration
and installation (2.3 Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit) in the
Instruction Manual of 3D Display Software (EZU-3D4, 3D2S).
2-8 L2E-EZ0232
2.10 Installing magnetic sensor
(1) As shown in Fig.2-8, install the magnetic sensor attachment and magnetic sensor to each
probe.
(2) Use the wire tie (Accessory of the Three-Dimensional Display unit: EZU-3D2S) to fix the cable
of probe and the magnetic sensor.)
NOTE: Confirm that the hole of magnetic sensor attachment is hooked by the index mark.
Probe
Index mark
Probe (EUP-L53) Probe (EUP-C314G, C514)
Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor attachment Magnetic sensor attachment
Probe (EUP-V53W) Probe (EUP-L53S)
Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor

Wire tie
(Accessory of the Three-
Dimensional Display unit: EZU-
3D2S)
Probe (EUP-C524)
Magnetic sensor
Fig.2-8
2-9 21 L2E-EZ0232
WideView Software
Model EZU-WS4
TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Installation of Options ---
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0233-1
CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi Medical

Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or reproduced without the prior
written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation. Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation.
2003. All rights reserved.
NOTE to USER
Installation of this software is carried out by the authorized service engineer.

Please hand this booklet to the engineer.
Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Installation of WideView Software (EZU–
(EZU–WS4) ･････････････ 1-1
1.1 Preparation ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
1.2 Unprotection Procedure ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
Chapter 2 The change method of an option value ･･････････････････････ 2-1
(1) L2E-EZ0233
NOTE to USER
Installation of this software is carried out by the authorized service engineer.

Please hand this booklet to the engineer.
Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Installation of WideView Software (EZU–
(EZU–WS4) ･････････････ 1-1
1.1 Preparation ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
1.2 Unprotection Procedure ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
Chapter 2 The change method of an option value ･･････････････････････ 2-1
(1) L2E-EZ0233
Chapter 1 Installation of Wide View Software (EZU-WS4
(EZU-WS4)
1.1 Preparation
1) Prepare the AUTHENTIC DISK which is able to authenticate the EZU-WS4.
1.2 Unprotection Procedure

The operation procedures for unprotection are shown below.
(1) Boot the system.

(3) Press Main Menu key, click “Setup”, “system” and then “Entry Opt.” sequentially.
(4) The software is automatically unprotected. When the unprotection is successfully completed,
the dialog “Successful unprotection dialog” is displayed as shown in Fig.1-1.
If it is not displayed, check to see if AUTHENTIC DISK is compatible with the system and
make sure of the AUTHENTIC DISK label.
Successful unprotection dialog
Fig.1-1
(5) Take out the AUTHENTIC DISK.

(6) Click “OK” button on “Successful unprotection dialog”.
(7) The system is automatically rebooted.
(8) Select the probe for Wide View Software, linear or convex.
(9) Freeze OFF.
(10) Press OPTION key. The function menu related to WideView mode is displayed as shown in
Fig.1-2.
1-1 L2E-EZ0233
(11) Operate the toggle switch F1 in the function menu (Page 1) to ON (highlighted display) .
Make sure that WideView mode is started and the function menu chagnes as shown in
Fig.1-3.
Fig.1-2 Function menu (WideView mode OFF)
Fig.1-3 Function menu (WideView mode ON)
1-2 L2E-EZ0233
Chapter 2 The change method of an option value
This setup is in the state optimal at the time of factory shipments. I ask you not to change a setup
except for the case of being special.
A setting item is shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 setting item

item details range
Width of paste region Width which actually sticks. 1 ∼ width of an
analysis domain
(pixel)
Threshold of signal The threshold of the signal 0 ∼ 255 (level)
detection luminosity it is considered that
is a noise.
Threshold of signal The threshold of a signal which 0 ∼ 255 (level)
for rotation judges effective depth.
If the [WIDE VIEW] button is pushed in a Service Tools dialog, the dialog of Fig. 2-1 will be
displayed.
A Probe list connectable with equipment in use is displayed on the [Probe] list.
（１）Choose probe from the [Probe] list and change a value with a spin button (or it changes
directly with a keyboard).
（２）Repeat 1. to change a setup to two or more probe.
（３）When returning to a factory setting value, choose probe to return and push the [Default]
button.
（４）If it avoids, the [OK] button will be pushed and a dialog will be closed.
（５）When canceling change, push the [Cancel] button.
Fig. 2-1 WideView dialog
2-1 L2E-EZ0233
DICOM Software
EZU-FC7, EZU-FC7P, EZU-FC7W
TECHNICAL GUIDE
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EZ0236-1
CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi Medical

written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation. Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation.
2003
2003. All rights reserved.
Preface
Our service personnel shall install this software. Please hand over this technical guide to our service
personnel.
Contents
Page
Chapter 1 Option protection release work ....................................................................................... 1 - 1
1.1 Preparation .................................................................................................................. 1 - 1
1.2 Packing list................................................................................................................... 1 - 1
1.3 Release work ................................................................................................................ 1 - 1
Chapter 2 Check work........................................................................................................................
work 2-1
2.1 The display check of EZU-FC7 ................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2 The display check of EZU-FC7P ................................................................................. 2 - 1
2.3 The display check of EZU-FC7W................................................................................ 2 - 2
2.4 Operation check (Common to a DICOM software option) ........................................ 2 - 2
Chapter 4 Setup file of the printer....................................................................................................
printer 3-1
3.1 Modify of the setup file................................................................................................ 3 - 1
3.2 Importing setup files ................................................................................................... 3 - 4
Chapter 5 Error code .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.1 Error code list............................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.2 Glossary........................................................................................................................ 4-15
(1) 1 L2E-EZ0236
Chapter 1 Option protection release work
1.1 Preparation
Protection of not only the DICOM option (EZU-FC7, EZU-FC7P, and EZU-FC7W) but also
two or more options combined with the ultrasound scanner device is released collectively.
Please perform the display check shown in the following table before doing protection release
work. If a display check can be performed, as for the purpose option, protection is released
normally. Please do not do the protection release work of this Chapter, but carry out the check
of Section 2.4 of operation.
Table 2-1
Installation option Display check work
EZU-FC7 Section 2.1 Display Check of EZU-FC7
EZU-FC7P Section 2.2 Display Check of EZU-FC7P
EZU-FC7W Section 2.3 Display Check of EZU-FC7W
1.2 Packing list
(1) AUTHENTIC DISK ･･････････････････････････････････････････････１
1.3 Release work

(1) Turn ON the power supply of the ultrasound scanner device.
(3) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Entry Opt. from the Main Menu.
(4) The disk is automatically unprotected. When it succeeds, the message shown in Fig 1-1 is
displayed. If no dialog appears, check the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(5) Eject the AUTHENTIC DISK.
(6) Click the [OK] button of the message of Fig 1-1.
(7) The system automatically restarts.
Fig 1-1
Option protection release work is an end.

After a restart should do the check work of Chapter 2.
1- 1 2 L2E-EZ0236
Chapter 2 Check work
2.1 The display check of EZU-FC7

Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Image Filing from the Main Menu.
Select “DICOM Server” on the “Set Up Filing” dialog and confirm that the DICOM Set up
dialog (Fig 2-1) is displayed.
Fig. 2-1
2.2 The display check of EZU-FC7P

EZU-FC7P
(1) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Image Filing from the Main Menu.
dialog (Fig. 2-2) is displayed.
(2) Then confirm that “DICOMPrinter(Grayscale)” and “DICOMPrinter(Color)” exist among
options of ServiceList in the DICOM Setup dialog (Fig. 2-2 [A]).
[A]
Fig. 2-2
2 -1 L2E-EZ0236
2.3 The display check of EZU-FC7W
EZU-FC7W
(1) Press the Main Menu key and select Setup Æ Image Filing from the Main Menu.
dialog (Fig. 2-3) is displayed.
(2) Then confirm that “Modality WorkList” and “MPPS” exist among options of ServiceList in
the DICOM Setup dialog (Fig. 2-3[A]).
[A]
Fig. 2-3
2.4 Operation check (Common

(Common to a DICOM software option)
option)
After all the installation procedures are completed, referring to the instruction manual of
DICOM software, make settings related to the DICOM functions, and then make sure the
system can be normally operated.
NOTE: Save the latest AUTHENTIC DISK. When reinstallation of the software is required,
use of all of the option software is prohibited.
To make options usable, reinstall the latest AUTHENTIC DISK.
2 -2 4 L2E-EZ0236
Chapter 3 Setup file of the printer
3.1 Modify of the setup

setup file
In the following case, you need to modify setup file.
- Test print was failed.
- You want to print to non-supported printer.
You follow the procedure, please modify it.
(1) Click the "Detail" button in SetUp Image Print menu displayed by selecting MainMenu →
Setup → ImagePrinter.。
(2) The Configuration Text File shown in Fig 3-1 is displayed. Following Table 3-1, modify the
parts you wish to edit.
Note: When editing, keep the rules given below. If the Setup File is not correctly setup, printing
may be impossible.
"Rules"
(i) Never edit the left-hand-side of " = " (the equal sign).
(ii) Always enter a semicolon (;) at the end of a sentence.
(iii) When editing data on the right-hand-side of " = " (the equal sign), do so referring to the
DICOM printer Conformance Statement.
3 -1 L2E-EZ0236
[PrinterName]
Name = NEW_PRN_V1; The name displayed in the Printer List in the DICOM
Setup menu (refer to Fig. 2-1)
[Setting item]
N_Action = SESSION;
Copies = 1;
Print_Priority = MED; Setup values for DICOM printer output.
Medium_Type = PAPER; Refer to Table 3-1 for setup information.
Destination = PROCESSOR;
Session_Label = ;
Display_Format = STANDARD¥2,3;
Orientation = PORTRAIT;
Size = 8INX10IN;
Config_Information = ;
Magnification = NONE;
Smoothing_Type = ;
Border_Density = WHITE;
Min_Density = ; This is the selection range available in "Setting Item".
Max_Density = ;
Editing of this part is not necessary.
Trim = ;
Timeout = 60;
N_Event_Rep = No;
[Select item]
Max_Copies = 10;
Sel_Print_Priority = {HIGH,MED,LOW};
Sel_Medium_Type = {PAPER,BLUE FILM,CLEAR FILM};
Sel_Destination = {MAGAZINE,PROCESSOR};
Sel_Magnification = {REPLICATE,BILINEAR,CUBIC,NONE};
{ Sel_Size,Sel_Display_Format,Sel_Orientation } =
{{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥1,1,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥1,1,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10I
N,STANDARD¥1,2,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,1,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDA
RD¥2,2,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,2,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥2,3,PO
RTRAIT},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,2,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,3,PORTRAIT},{8
INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,3,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥3,4,PORTRAIT},{8INX10IN,S
TANDARD¥4,3,LANDSCAPE},{8INX10IN,STANDARD¥4,4,LANDSCAPE}}
Fig. 3-1
3 -2 L2E-EZ0236
Table 3-1 Setup File (setting item) details
Name Information Setup Data
N_Action N-ACTION The communication method is set up.
technique Either "SESSION" or "BOX" can be setup, but there are
normally no problems with using "SESSION" as it is.
Copies Number of Films Setup the number of film copies.
Print_Priority Print Priority Setup the print priority order
Order
Medium_Type Film Type Setup the film type.
Destination Film Destination Setup the film destination.
Normally, setup is done in Set Up Image Print menu, so
editing is not necessary.
Session_Label Film Session Setup the Film Session Label
Label
Display_Format Image Output Setup the Image Output Format.
Format Normally, setup is done in the Set Up Image Print menu,
so editing is not necessary.
Orientation Film Orientation Setup the film orientation.
Normally, setup is done in the Set Up Image Print menu,
Size Film Size Setup the film size.
Normally, setup is done in the Set Up Image Print menu,
Config_Informati Configuration Setup the configuration information.
on Information
Magnification Magnification Setup the magnification method.
Method
Smoothing_Type Smoothing Setup the smoothing method.
Method Depending upon the magnification method, it may be
necessary to specify the smoothing processing method.
Please check the printer conformance statement.
Border_Density Border Density Setup the image boundary brightness value.
Min_Density Minimum Density Setup the minimum density brightness value.
Max_Density Maximum Setup the maximum density brightness value.
Density
Trim Trim Setup the state of the trim.
(state, decoration)
Timeout Timeout Time Setup the Print Timeout
N_Event_Req N-Event Req Setup the DICOM communication (N-Event Req
Processing Exec. Processing) execution option.
Option Normally there are no problem if “No” is setup.
3 -3 L2E-EZ0236
3.2 Importing setup files
(1) Insert the floppy disk (FD) containing the Printer Setup file into the drive.
(2) Click the “DICOM Server” button in the menu displayed by selecting Main Menu → Setup
→ Image Filing. The DICOM Setup menu shown in Fig. 3-2 is displayed.
(3) Press [Import] button [A].
[A]
Fig. 3-2
(4) If there is in the device a Setup File for the same printer, and the same version, the
message shown in Fig. 3-3 is displayed. To overwrite the Setup File in the device, click
the [Yes] button, to cancel import of the Setup File, click [No].
Fig. 3-3
3 -4 8 L2E-EZ0236
Chapter 4 Error code
The error code of the following figure message is specified in 4.1 Error code list. Moreover,
explanation of the term used by error code list is specified in 4.2 Glossary.
Error code
Fig 4.1 DICOM error message
4.1 Error code list

(1) At the time of transfer to a DICOM server, FD and MO
Error code Factor
#0101 Although data is received, it cannot take in as image data.
#0102 The data set of a SOP class is not in agreement.
#0103 The exchange of a protocol goes wrong.
#0104 Header data is inconsistency.
#0105 The data set of a SOP class is not in agreement.
#0106 The error occurred in the header file.
#0001 The association has been aborted.
#0002 The association has been closed.
#0003 The remote system rejected the open association request.
#0004 Buffer size was too small to contain the data.
#0005 The size of data is not even number.
#0006 The size of data is odd number. Or there is no data.
#0007 An error is in the information set up in the DICOM Set up dialog.
#0009 A CSPDicom.ini file cannot be opened. Or the contents are unacquirable.
#0011 Abnormalities are in a DICOMDIR file.
#0012 The contents of DICOMDIR are unusual.
#0013 DICODMIR cannot be created.
#0014 The contents of DICOMDIR are unacquirable.
#0015 DICOMDIR cannot be created to media.
#0016 Abnormalities are in a DICOM file.
#0017 A DICOM file cannot be saved to media.
#0018 A DICOM file is unmovable to the folder of DICOMDIR.
#0019 A drive property can’t acquire. (There is no availability of a drive)
#0021 The attribute has no value assigned to it.
#0022 Entity of DICOMDIR cannot be deleted.
#0023 A file cannot be deleted from media.
#0024 A file cannot be opened.
#0025 Data cannot be read from a file.
#0026 A file property can’t acquire.
#0027 It cannot write in a file.
4 - 1 L2E-EZ0236

Error code Factor
#0028 File ID can’t acquire.
#0029 A DICOM file name cannot be created.
#0031 The error is in Image Directory Record information.
#0034 The error is in Patient Directory Record information.
#0035 The error is in Series Directory Record information.
#0036 The error is in Study Directory Record information.
#0039 File Meta information cannot be set as a data set.
#0040 The information on Patient ID (Tag number [0010,0020]), Study Instance
UID (Tag number [0020,000D]) or Series Instance UID (Tag number
[0020,000E]) can’t acquire from a data set.
#0041 Image Entity or Image Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0042 The image pixel module can’t acquire
#0043 A timeout occurred in the middle of receiving a message.
#0044 Value representation of data is wrong.
#0045 AE name is not registered normally.
#0046 A value for this attribute does not contain valid characters for its value
representation.
#0047 The Entity ID value is not a valid entity object ID.
#0048 Entity ID or Record ID is invalid.
#0049 A data set is unusual. Or it is not built normally.
#0050 The DICOM message of an unsuitable format was received.
#0051 UID does not contain the Merge library support SOP class UID.
#0052 The value of a tag is unusual.
#0053 The value is invalid to Value representation.
#0054 The next Entity does not exist.
#0056 The error occurred in the file for DICOM at the time of access.
#0057 The network connect unexpectedly dropped.
#0058 The next Record does not exist.
#0059 A parameter is NULL.
#0060 The attribute's value was set to NULL. Value.
#0062 A parameter is unusual.
#0063 Patient Entity or Patient Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0064 Pixel data can’t acquire.
#0065 Record of DICOMDIR cannot be deleted.
#0067 Series Entity or Series Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0068 Study Entity or Study Record cannot be created to DICOMDIR.
#0069 An unexpected, potentially serious, problem was detected in the operating
environment.
#0070 If the attribute's value is large, it may be stored in a temporary file. If a file
I/O error occurs, this status is returned.
#0071 The Timeout period expired.
#0072 MergeCOM-3 found a corrupted record ID in a directory record offset
attribute while trying to traverse the DICOMDIR object pointed to by
DirID.
#0073 The service related to Message ID has not been successfully negotiated for
this association.
#0075 A numeric Value was larger than could be accommodated by the attribute.
#0077 The remote system could not be connected to at the TCP/IP level. Check
that the remote host name and port number have been configured properly.
#0078 Remote Host Name was not NULL and it was not 1-39 bytes long.
4 - 2 L2E-EZ0236
Error code Factor
#0079 The path value of DICOMDIR is NULL.
#0080 A SOP common module cannot be added.
#0081 An error has occurred while trying to access the MergeCOM-3 data
dictionary. A message describing the error has been written to the
MergeCOM-3 log file.
#0082 An application title with this name has already been registered.
#0083 Application Title must be 1 to 16 bytes long.
#0084 The license number specified in the MergeCOM-3 configuration file was
invalid.
#0085 The library has already been initialized.
#0086 The library has not been properly initialized.
#0087 This error occurs when the DICOM library can not obtain the name of the
data dictionary.
#0088 The error occurred during DICOM library initialization.

#0089 A license number was not specified in the MergeCOM-3 configuration file.
#0090 There is no Merge.ini file.
#0091 The response from a server is not normal.
4 - 3 L2E-EZ0236

(2) At the time of printing
Error code Factor
#0201 The association failed.
#0202 SCP has not corresponded to PRINT_JOB service.
#0203 Acquisition of PRINT_JOB service failed.
#0204 Reservation of an N-GET message domain failed.
#0205 A setup of the SOP class UID (tag number [0000, 0003]) failed.
#0206 A setup of the SOP instance UID (tag number [0000, 1001]) failed.
#0207 Creation of an N-GET tag list failed.
#0208 Transferring of N-GET request failed.
#0209 Release of an N-GET message domain failed.
#0210 N-GET response state code acquisition failed.
#0211 It is in the state in which the N-GET response failed.
#0212 Release of an N-GET response domain failed.
#0215 It is association ID injustice.
#0216 The network connects unexpectedly dropped.
#0221 The error, which cannot be understood, occurred.
#0222 Opening of an N-EVENT-REPORT message domain failed.
#0223 Transferring of an N-EVENT-REPORT response failed.
#0224 Release of an N-EVENT-REPORT response domain failed.
#0226 Opening of an N-EVENT-REPORT message domain failed.
#0227 Transferring of an N-EVENT-REPORT response failed.
#0230 Preparation of an N-CREATE (Film session) domain failed.
#0231 A setup of the Number of Copies (tag number [2000, 0010]) failed.
#0232 A setup of the Print Priority (tag number [2000, 0020]) failed.
#0233 A setup of the Medium Type (tag number [2000, 0030]) failed.
#0234 A setup of the Film Destination (tag number [2000, 0040]) failed.
#0235 A setup of the Film Session Label (tag number [2000, 0050]) failed.
#0236 N-CREATE (Film Session) message transferring failed.
#0237 Acquisition of the Affected SOP class UID failed.
#0238 Release of an N-CREATE (Film Session) domain failed.
#0239 Acquisition of an N-CREATE (Film Session) response failed.
#0240 Processing of N-CREATE (Film Session) failed.
#0241 Restriction of a resource was exceeded.
#0242 It is an invalid object instance.
#0243 An N-CREATE (Film session) response is unusual.
#0244 Acquisition of the Affected SOP instance UID failed.
#0245 Domain release of an N-CREATE (Film Session) response failed.
#0246 Preparation of an N-CREATE (Film Box) domain failed.
#0247 A setup of the Image Display Format (tag number [2010, 0010]) failed.
#0248 Image Display Format (tag number [2010, 0010]) has not been set up.
4 - 4 L2E-EZ0236
Error code Factor
#0249 A setup of the Film Orientation (tag number [2010, 0040]) failed.
#0250 The character sequence of Film Orientation (tag number [2010, 0040]) is
inaccurate.
#0251 A setup of the Film Size ID (tag number [2010, 0050]) failed.
#0252 A setup of the Magnification Type (tag number [2010, 0060]) failed.
#0253 A setup of the Smoothing Type (tag number [2010, 0080]) failed.
#0254 A setup of the Border Density (tag number [2010, 0100]) failed.
#0255 A setup of the Min Density (tag number [2010, 0120]) failed.
#0256 A setup of the Max Density (tag number [2010, 0130]) failed.
#0257 A setup of the Trim (tag number [2010, 0140]) failed.
#0258 A setup of the Configuration Information (tag number [2010, 0150]) failed.
#0259 ITEM reservation of the Referenced Film Session Sequence (tag number
[2010, 0500]) failed.
#0260 A setup of the Referenced Film Session Sequence (tag number [2010,0500])
failed.
#0261 A setup of the Referenced SOP Class UID (tag number [0008,1150]) failed.
#0262 A setup of the Referenced SOP Instance UID (tag number [0008,1155])
failed.
#0263 N-CREATE (Film Box) message transferring failed.
#0264 N-CREATE (Film Box) domain release failed.
#0265 Acquisition of an N-CREATE response (Film Box) failed.
#0266 The information on the set-up tag is inaccurate.
#0267 Processing of N-CREATE (Film Box) failed.
#0268 A SOP instance is copy ending.
#0269 It is an invalid object instance.
#0270 A tag attribute is inaccurate.
#0271 The response of N-CREATE (Film Box) is unusual.
#0272 The response of N-CREATE (Film Session) is unusual.
#0273 Release of a N-CREATE (Film Box) response domain failed.
#0274 Reservation of the N-SET (Image Box) domain of monochrome failed.
#0275 ITEM reservation of a monochrome image failed.
#0276 A setup of the sequence of a monochrome image failed.
#0277 Reservation of the N-SET (Image Box) domain of a color failed.
#0278 ITEM reservation of a related color image failed.
#0279 A setup of the sequence of a color image failed.
#0280 This SOP class has not corresponded.
#0281 Header opening of a print image failed.
#0282 A setup of the X Pixel Aspect Ratio (tag number [0028,0034]) failed.
#0283 A setup of the Y Pixel Aspect Ratio (tag number [0028,0034]) failed.
#0284 It is the reading error of an image file.
#0285 It is the reading error of an image file.
#0286 Acquisition of a DICOM message failed.
#0287 Opening of a print image failed.
#0288 Acquisition of a DICOM message failed.
#0289 A setup of an image position failed.
#0290 A setup of the Request SOP instance UID failed.
#0291 Transferring of an image message failed.
#0292 Release of an N-SET (Image Box) message domain failed.
#0293 Acquisition of an N-SET (Image Box) response failed.
4 - 5 L2E-EZ0236

Error code Factor
#0294 An N-SET (Image Box) attribute value is inaccurate.
#0295 Processing of N-SET (Image Box) failed.
#0296 A class instance is inconsistency.
#0297 An N-SET (Image Box) tag attribute is inaccurate.
#0298 Printer memories are insufficient.
#0299 It is a strange N-SET (Image Box) response.
#0300 Release of an N-SET (Image Box) response domain failed.
#0301 Reservation of an N-ACTION (Film Box) domain failed.
#0303 An N-ACTION (Film Box) type ID setup failed.
#0304 Transferring of an N-ACTION (Film Box) message failed.
#0305 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Box) message domain failed.
#0306 Acquisition of an N-ACTION (Film Box) response failed.
#0307 Processing of N-ACTION (Film Box) failed.
#0308 The SOP instance UID of N-ACTION (Film Box) is inaccurate.
#0309 A theoretical value is inaccurate.
#0311 The film SOP instance UID is inaccurate.
#0312 (Session) A print queue is full.
#0313 (Box)　A print queue is full.
#0314 A image is larger than BOX size.
#0316 It is a strange N-ACTION (Film Box) response.
#0317 Acquisition of the N-ACTION (Film Box) Reference SOP instance UID
failed.
#0318 The addition of PRINT_JOB pending failed.
#0319 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Box) response domain failed.
#0320 Reservation of an N-ACTION (Film Session) domain failed.
#0322 An N-ACTION (Film Session) type ID setup failed.
#0323 Transferring of an N-ACTION (Film Session) message failed.
#0324 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Session) message domain failed.
#0325 Acquisition of an N-ACTION (Film Session) response failed.
#0326 Processing of N-ACTION (Film Session) failed.
#0327 The N-ACTION SOP instance UID is inaccurate.
#0328 A theoretical value is inaccurate.
#0330 The film SOP instance UID is inaccurate.
#0331 (Session) A print queue is full.
#0332 (Box) A print queue is full.
#0333 A image is larger than BOX size.
#0335 It is a strange N-ACTION (Film Session) response.
#0336 Acquisition of the N-ACTION reference SOP instance UID failed.
#0337 The addition of PRINT_JOB pending failed.
#0338 Release of an N-ACTION (Film Session) response domain failed.
#0339 Reservation of an N-DELETE (Film Session) domain failed.
#0341 Transferring of an N-DELETE (Film Session) message failed.
#0342 Domain release of an N-DELETE (Film Session) demand failed.
#0343 Acquisition of an N-DELETE (Film Session) response failed.
4 - 6 L2E-EZ0236

Error code Factor
#0344 Processing of N-ACTION (Film Session) failed.
#0346 It is a strange N-DELETE (Film Session) response.
#0347 Release of an N-DELETE (Film Session) response domain failed.
#0348 Close of an association failed.
4 - 7 L2E-EZ0236

(3) At the time of communication with a Worklist server
Error code Factor
#0402 Modality work list request message opening failed.
#0403 Modality work list ITEM message opening failed.
#0404 A setup of the Specific Character Set （tag number [0008,0005]） failed.
#0405 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence （ tag number
[0040,0100]） failed.
#0406 A setup of the Modality （tag number [0008,0060]） failed.
#0407 A setup of the Scheduled Station AE Title （tag number [0040,0001]） failed.
#0408 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date （ tag number
[0040,0002]）failed.
#0409 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Time （tag number [0040,0003]）
failed.
#0410 A setup of the Scheduled Performing Physician’s Name （ tag number
[0040,0006]） failed.
#0411 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step ID（tag number [0040,0009]）
failed.
#0412 A setup of the Study Instance UID（tag number [0020,000D]） failed.
#0413 A setup of the Requested Contrast Agent （tag number [0032,1070]） failed.
#0414 A setup of the Requesting Physician （tag number [0032,1032]） failed.
#0415 A setup of the Referring Physician’s Name （tag number [0008,0090]）failed.
#0416 A setup of the Patients Birth Date （tag number [0010,0030]）failed.
#0417 A setup of the Patient’s Sex （tag number [0010,0040]）failed.
#0418 A setup of the Requested Procedure ID （tag number [0040,1001]）failed.
#0419 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Description （ tag number
[0040,0007]）failed.
#0420 A setup of the Scheduled Station Name （tag number [0040,0010]）failed.
(Value Multiplicity n)
(Value Multiplicity n+1)
(Value Multiplicity 1)
#0424 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Location （ tag number
[0040,0011]）failed.
#0425 A setup of the Accession Number （tag number [0008,0050]）failed.
#0426 A setup of the Patient’s Name （tag number [0010,0010]）failed.
#0427 A setup of the Patient ID （tag number [0010,0020]）failed.
#0428 A setup of the Requesting Service （tag number [0032,1033]）acquisition
propriety failed.
#0429 A setup of the Requested Procedure Description（tag number [0032,1060]）
acquisition propriety failed.
#0430 A setup of the Reason for the Requested Procedure （ tag number
[0040,1002]）acquisition propriety failed.
#0431 A setup of the Requested Procedure Comments （tag number [0040,1400]）
4 - 8 L2E-EZ0236

Error code Factor
#0432 A setup of the Reason for the Imaging Service Request （tag number
#0433 A setup of the Imaging Service Request Comments （ tag number
#0434 A setup of the Admitting Diagnoses Description （tag number [0008,1080]）
#0435 A setup of the Other Patient IDs （tag number [0010,1000]） acquisition
propriety failed.
#0436 A setup of the Patient’s Size （ tag number [0010,1020] ） acquisition
propriety failed.
#0437 A setup of the Patient’s Weight （tag number [0010,1030]） acquisition
propriety failed.
#0438 A setup of the Ethnic Group （ tag number [0010,2160] ） acquisition
propriety failed.
#0439 A setup of the Additional Patient History （ tag number [0010,21B0] ）
#0440 A setup of the Pregnancy Status （tag number [0010,21C0]）acquisition
propriety failed.
#0441 A setup of the Last Menstrual Date （tag number [0010,21D0]）acquisition
propriety failed.
#0442 A setup of the Patient Comments （tag number [0010,4000]）acquisition
propriety failed.
#0443 A setup of the Names of Intended Recipients of Results （tag number
#0444 C-FIND work list request transferring failed.
#0445 Message domain opening failed.
#0449 The network connects unexpectedly dropped.
#0454 The error, which cannot be understood, occurred.
#0455 Acquisition of Response Status (tag number [0000, 0900]) failed.
#0456 Response message domain opening failed after the reference normal end.
#0457 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence （ tag number
[0040,0100]）failed.
#0458 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date （ tag number
[0040,0002]）failed.
#0459 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Start Time （ tag number
[0040,0003]）failed.
#0460 Acquisition of Modality （tag number [0008,0060]）failed.
#0461 Acquisition of Scheduled Performing Physician’s Name （ tag number
[0040,0006]）failed.
#0462 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0009]）
failed.
4 - 9 L2E-EZ0236

Error code Factor
#0463 Acquisition of Requested Procedure ID （tag number [0040,1001]）failed.
#0464 Acquisition of Study Instance UID （tag number [0020,000D]）failed.
#0465 Acquisition of Patient’s Name （tag number [0010,0010]）failed.
#0466 Acquisition of Patient ID （tag number [0010,0020]）failed.
#0467 Acquisition of Accession Number （tag number [0008,0050]）failed.
#0468 Acquisition of Requesting Physician （tag number [0032,1032]）failed.
#0469 Acquisition of Referring Physician’s Name （tag number [0008,0090]）failed.
#0470 Acquisition of Patient’s Birth Date （tag number [0010,0030]）failed.
#0471 Acquisition of Patient’s Sex （tag number [0010,0040]）failed.
#0472 Acquisition of Scheduled Station Name （tag number [0040,0010]）failed.
(Value Multiplicity =1)
(Value Multiplicity n=1)
(Value Multiplicity n=n+1)
#0476 Acquisition of Scheduled Procedure Step Location （ tag number
[0040,0011]）failed.
#0477 Acquisition of Requested Contrast Agent （tag number [0032,1070]）failed.
#0478 Acquisition of Requesting Service （tag number [0032,1033]）failed.
#0479 Acquisition of Requested Procedure Description （tag number [0032,1060]）
failed.
#0480 Acquisition of Reason for the Requested Procedure （ tag number
[0040,1002]）failed.
#0481 Acquisition of Requested Procedure Comments （tag number [0040,1400]）
failed.
#0482 Acquisition of Reason for the Imaging Service Request （ tag number
[0040,2001]）failed.
#0483 Acquisition of Imaging Service Request Comments （ tag number
[0040,2400]）failed.
#0484 Acquisition of Admitting Diagnoses Description （tag number [0008,1080]）
failed.
#0485 Acquisition of Other Patient IDs （tag number [0010,1000]）failed.
#0486 Acquisition of Patient’s Size （tag number [0010,1020]）failed.
#0487 Acquisition of Patient’s Weight （tag number [0010,1030]）failed.
#0488 Acquisition of Ethnic Group （tag number [0010,2160]）failed.
#0489 Acquisition of Additional Patient History （tag number [0010,21B0]）failed.
#0490 Acquisition of Pregnancy Status （tag number [0010,21C0]）failed.
#0491 Acquisition of Last Menstrual Date （tag number [0010,21D0]）failed.
#0492 Acquisition of Patient Comments （tag number [0010,4000]）failed.
#0493 Acquisition of Names of Intended Recipients of Results （ tag number
[0040,1010]）failed.
#0494 Response message domain release failed. (Usual）
#0495 Response message domain release failed. (Cancellation response reception）
#0496 Since resources are insufficient, it is the refused response.
#0497 The data set is not in agreement.
#0498 It is the response that cannot be processed.
4 - 10 L2E-EZ0236
Error code Factor
#0499 It is the response that cannot be understood.
#0500 Cancellation demand message opening failed.
#0501 Cancellation demand message transferring failed.
#0502 Cancellation demand message release failed.
#0503 Association closing failed.
4 - 11 L2E-EZ0236

(4) At the time of communication with a MPPS server
Error code Factor
#0601 The N-CREATE message open demand failed.
#0602 A setup of the Affected SOP instance UID （tag number [0000,1000]） failed.
#0603 Carried out step attribute ITEM domain opening failed.
#0604 A setup of the Specific Character Set （tag number [0008,0005]） failed.
#0605 A setup of the Scheduled Step Attributes Sequence （ tag number
[0040,0270]） failed.
#0606 A setup of the Study Instance UID （tag number [0020,000D]）failed.
#0607 Study Instance UID （tag number [0020,000D]）has not been set up.
#0608 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0253]）
failed.
#0609 Performed Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0253]）has not been set
up.
#0610 A setup of the Performed Station AE Title （tag number [0040,0241]）
failed.
#0611 Performed Station AE Title （tag number [0040,0241]） has not been set up.
#0612 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Start Date （ tag number
[0040,0244]） failed.
#0613 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Start Time （ tag number
[0040,0245]） failed.
#0614 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Status （tag number [0040,0252]）
failed.
#0615 A setup of the Modality （tag number [0008,0060]） failed.
#0616 Modality （tag number [0008,0060]） has not been set up.
#0617 A setup of the Patient ID （tag number [0010,0020]） failed.
#0618 A setup of the Patient’s Name （tag number [0010,0010]） failed.
#0619 A setup of the Requested Procedure ID （tag number [0040,1001]） failed.
#0620 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step ID （tag number [0040,0009]）
failed.
#0621 A setup of the Accession Number （tag number [0008,0050]） failed.
#0622 A setup of the Requested Procedure Description （tag number [0032,1060]）
failed.
#0623 A setup of the Scheduled Procedure Step Description （ tag number
[0040,0007]） failed.
#0624 A setup of the Patient’s Birth Date （tag number [0010,0030]） failed.
#0625 A setup of the Patient’s Sex （tag number [0010,0040]） failed.
#0626 A setup of the Performed Station Name （tag number [0040,0242]） failed.
#0627 A setup of the Performed Location （tag number [0040,0243]） failed.
#0628 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step Description （ tag number
[0040,0254]） failed.
#0629 A setup of the Performed Procedure Type Description （ tag number
[0040,0255]） failed.
#0630 Study ID （tag number （[0020,0010]） failed.
#0631 A setup of the Placer Order Number / Imaging Service Request （ tag
number [0040,2016]） failed.
#0632 A setup of the Filler Order Number / Imaging Service Request（tag number
[0040,2017]） failed.
4 - 12 L2E-EZ0236
Error code Factor
#0633 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Date （ tag number
[0040,0250]） failed.
#0634 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Time （ tag number
[0040,0251]） failed.
#0635 A setup of the Referenced Study Sequence （ tag number [0008,1110] ）
failed.
#0636 A setup of the Scheduled Action Item Code Sequence （ tag number
[0040,0008]） failed.
#0637 A setup of the Referenced Patient Sequence （tag number [0008,1120]）
failed.
#0638 A setup of the Procedure Code Sequence （tag number [0008,1032]） failed.
#0639 A setup of the Performed Action Item Sequence （tag number [0040,0260]）
failed.
#0640 A setup of the Performed Series Sequence （ tag number [0040,0340] ）
failed.
#0642 Transferring of a N-CREATE message failed.
#0643 Release of a N-CREATE message failed.
#0647 The networks connect unexpectedly dropped.
#0652 The error that cannot be understood occurred.
#0653 Acquisition of Affected SOP Instance UID（tag number [0000,1000]） failed.
#0654 Acquisition of Performed Procedure Step Status（tag number [0040,0252]）
failed.
#0655 Release of a response message domain failed.
#0656 Association closing failed.
#0657 The N-SET message open demand failed.
#0658 A setup of the Requested SOP Instance UID （tag number [0000,1001]）
failed.
#0659 ITEM opening for Performed Series Sequence (tag number [0040, 0340])
failed.
#0660 A setup of the Performed Series Sequence （ tag number [0040,0340] ）
failed.
#0661 A setup of the Performing Physician's Name （tag number [0008,1050]）
failed.
#0662 A setup of the Protocol Name （tag number [0018,1030]） failed.
#0663 A setup of the Operators' Name （tag number [0008,1070]） failed.
#0664 A setup of the Series Instance UID （tag number [0020,000E]） failed.
#0665 A setup of the Series Description （tag number [0008,103E]） failed.
#0666 A setup of the Retrieve AE Title （tag number [0008,0054]） failed.
#0667 Opening of ITEM for Referenced Image Sequence (tag number [0008, 1140])
failed.
4 - 13 L2E-EZ0236

Error code Factor
#0668 A setup of the Referenced Image Sequence （tag number [0008,1140] ）
failed.
#0669 A setup of the Referenced SOP Class UID （tag number [0008,1150]） failed.
#0670 A setup of the Referenced SOP Instance UID （tag number [0008,1155]）
failed.
#0671 A setup of the Referenced Image Sequence （tag number [0008,1140] ）
failed.
#0672 A setup of the Referenced Standalone SOP Instance Sequence （tag number
[0040,0220]） failed.
#0704 Transferring of an N-SET message failed.
#0705 Release of an N-SET message failed.
#0706 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Date （ tag number
[0040,0250]） failed.
#0707 A setup of the Performed Procedure Step End Time （ tag number
[0040,0251]） failed.
4 - 14 L2E-EZ0236

4.2 Glossary
Term Explanation
SOP ‘Service Object Pair’
The group of a service (function) object
SOP class Service of the transfer function (Storage Service) to a server etc.
is pointed out. For details, refer to a Conformance Statement
statement.
SCP ‘Service Class Provider’
It is a server.
SCU ‘Service Class User’
It is a client.
Association The exchange (communication) by DICOM
It is called the start of an association when starting DICOM
communication.
DICOMDIR The directory file for managing a file within media, such as MO.
DICOM ‘Digital Image and Communications in Medicine’
Entity What is used when expressing DICOM data.
AE ‘Application Entity’
Study Entity The entity of study
Series Entity The entity of series
Image Entity The entity of image
Patient Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Patient’s Name[0010,0010],
Patient ID[0010,0020],
Patient’s Birth Date[0010,0030],
Patient’s Sex[0010, 0040],
Patient Comments[0010,4000]
Study Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Study Date[0008,0020],
Study Time[0008,0030],
Study Description[0008, 1030],
Study Instance UID[0020, 000D],
Study ID[0020, 0010],
Accession Number[0008, 0050]
Series Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Modality[0008, 0060],
Series Instance UID[0020, 000E],
Series Number[0020, 0011],
Series Date[0008, 0021],
Series Time[0008, 0031]
Image Directory Record The data set which consists of following tag information
information Image Number[0020,0013],
Image Date[0008,0023],
Image Time[0008,0033]
UID ‘Unique Identifier’
Merge.ini It is the initial-setting file of DICOM in an Eub-us folder.
CSPDicom.ini It is a file in an Eub-us folder. UID of DICOM etc. is registered.
File Meta information The data set which consists of following tag information
Media Storage SOP Class UID[0002,0002],
Media Storage SOP Instance UID[0002,0003],
Transfer Syntax UID[0002,0010],
Implementation Class UID[0002,0012],
Implementation Version Name[0002,0013],
Source Application Entity Title[0002,0016]
4 - 15 L2E-EZ0236
Term Explanation
N-GET Retrieve object instance(s) from a remote AE whose attributes
match a specified set of attributes.
N-EVENT-REPORT Report an event to a remote AE.
N-CREATE Request that a remote AE create a new object instance.
N-SET Request modification of attribute on a remote AE.
N-ACTION Request an action by a remote AE.
C-FIND Match a set of attributes to the attributes of a set of object
instances on a remote AE.
Film session One of the SOP classes of print service
Film Box One of the SOP classes of print service
E
4 - 16
24 L2E-EZ0236
Model EUB-5500
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
For USA
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EA0611-2
Nov.2003 Ver.2
Copyright  Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

• Other product and company names mentioned in this document may be the
trademarks of their respective owners.
Abbreviations
• In this document, the Windows® XP operating system is called Windows XP.

Manufacturer : HITACHI MEDICAL CORPORATION
1-1-14 Uchi-kanda
Chiyoda-ku
Tokyo, Japan
Representative : Hitachi Medical Systems America, Inc.

1959 Summit Commerce Park
Twinsburg, Ohio 44087 USA
Tel.:330.425.1313 800.800.3106
Fax.:330.425.1410
Local Distributor :
(1) Q1E-EA0611
CAUTION
The EUB-5500 Ultrasound Scanner and Probes have been designed to comply
with the -Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic
Output Indices on Diagnostic Equipment- .
This equipment provides the operator a much greater degree of real-time
information than previously available regarding ultrasound exposure to
the patient during an exam.
To make appropriate interpretations of the Real-Time Acoustic Indices

during clinical examinations, before use of this system the operator should
read the following booklet provided with this system:
-MEDICAL ULTRASOUND SAFETY-
To properly monitor and control the Real-Time Acoustic Indices displayed

on the EUB-5500, before use of this system the operator should read the
following sections of the Instruction Manual.
Safety Consideration on Operation

7.5 Precautions against ultrasound output power
4.7.2 Acoustic output indices

5.2.13 Using ALARA in B-mode
5.3.11 Using ALARA in B/M-mode
5.4.14 Using ALARA in B/PW-mode
5.5.8 Using ALARA in CW-mode
5.7.13 Using ALARA in CFM-mode with /M- and /PW-modes
(2) Q1E-EA0611
To safely and correctly use this equipment and to maintain its
performance for a long time, the operator must fully understand safe
operation procedure of the equipment, its performance, function and
maintenance service. Before using the equipment, carefully read
"Precautions in safe operation" and this "Instruction Manual" to fully
understand the described contents.
NOTICE: The contents of this instruction manual are subject to change

without prior notice for improvement of the equipment
performance.
(3) Q1E-EA0611
Safety Consideration on Operation
Observe the following for safe operation of the equipment
1. Authorized personnel for operation of this equipment

This equipment must be used by the authorized personnel such as doctor
and sonographer.
2. Definition of words and symbols
2.1 Types and definition of precautionary notices
Type of precautionary
Meaning (Definition)
notice
DANGER This note indicates any condition or action
which, if not strictly observed, could result
in direct danger such as serious personal
injury or possible death, or serious property
damage such as total loss of equipment or fire.
WARNING This note indicates any condition or action
in indirect danger such as possible death,
serious personal injury or light or
medium-degree personal injury, or serious
property damage such as total loss of
equipment or fire.
CAUTION This note indicates any condition or action
in possible danger such as partial equipment
damage or data loss of computer.
NOTICE This note indicates important precautions
which are not related to danger but are to
be taken against operation, installation and
maintenance.
(4) Q1E-EA0611
2.2 Type and definition of symbol
Protective earth (ground)
Equipotentiality
Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
Off (Power disconnection from the mains)
On (Power connection to the mains)
Dangerous voltage
TYPE B APPLIED PART

Probe
connector
TYPE BF APPLIED PART
ECG
Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART
connector
3. User's responsibility on equipment management

It is the responsibility of the user (hospital or clinic) to manage
use and maintenance of the equipment.
4. Prohibition of remodeling
Do not remodel the equipment without the consent of Hitachi.
If the equipment would be remodeled without the consent, the guarantee
service will not be applied to the equipment.
If any modification is required on the equipment, consult with Hitachi
or our authorized dealer.
(5) Q1E-EA0611
5. Liability limitation
5.1 Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the
equipment cased due to the installation, transfer, modification,
maintenance or repair that has been carried out by the party
other than Hitachi or our authorized dealer.
equipment caused due to trouble of other maker's equipment.
equipment caused due to modification, maintenance or repair
carried out by using repair parts other than the genuine part
specified by Hitachi.
equipment caused as the result that precaution or operation
procedure described in this instruction manual was not observed
by the user.
5.5 Hitachi shall not be liable for any consequential damage or loss
caused due to the diagnostic result or data obtained with this
equipment by any person other than the personnel authorized to
use this equipment.
equipment caused due to use of the equipment in the environmental
conditions such as power requirements or siting requirements
which are not in compliance with the conditions specified in
this instruction manual.
equipment caused due to force major such as fire, earthquake,
flood, lightning or acts of God.
(6) Q1E-EA0611
6. Necessity of periodical maintenance service
6.1 From a viewpoint of the purpose and importance of medical

equipment, it is essential to maintain safety and reliability
of the equipment always in the best condition.
Hitachi has been doing our best to assure the persistent product
quality of the equipment during manufacturing and installation
works so that the equipment can be used by users with the best
conditions for safety and reliability of the equipment. However,
safety and reliability of the equipment after delivered shall
be maintained by the user on his own responsibility.
6.2 Carry on the daily checkup and periodical maintenance service

for the equipment according to the procedures described in
"Maintenance serve" of this Instruction Manual.
6.3 Maintenance service for the equipment of which warranty period

has expired can be carried out by Hitachi or our authorized dealer
under maintenance service contract.
Contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer for this maintenance

service contract.
6.4 When daily checkup and periodical maintenance service were

carried out, keep and retain records of executed date, person
and serviced contents.
(7) Q1E-EA0611
7. Precautions in Operation of Ultrasound Scanner System
Observe the following to protect safety of the patient and operator.
7.1 Precautions in operation
1. Federal law restricts this device to use by or on the order

of a physician.
2. Should any abnormality occur on the equipment, immediately

turn off the power switch, disconnect the power cable and
contact Hitachi's Service Division or our authorized dealer.
3. Do not operate the power switch with hand contaminated with

jelly. If the power switch is contaminated with jelly,
immediately wipe it off.
4. Do not use and connect any recording device other than the
ones specified by Hitachi.
5. Contents in the memory such as hospital name, set parameters

and various measurement data may be erased by expiration of
the built-in battery or temporary power failure. Keep and
retain records of hospital name, set parameters and various
measurement data in the printer or VCR.
6. Carry out the periodical checkup of the dust filter located

on the air inlet window of the power supply unit once a week,
and clean it if dust is found in it.
7. Clean dirt on the covers and panel of the equipment by using

cloth soaked with neutral detergent and wipe it off with dry,
soft cloth. Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
(8) Q1E-EA0611
7.2 Precaution on installation environmental conditions
1. This equipment is not CATEGORY AP/APG EQUIPMENT.

This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use it
in the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas, inflammable
gas or flammable gas.
1. This equipment is not drip-proof or water-proof type. Never

use it at the following place:
! The equipment is exposed to water or other liquid.
! Humidity is excessively high.
! The equipment is exposed to steam.
! The equipment is exposed to saline air.
NOTICE:Probe head ,probe cable and footswitch is drip-
proof and water-proof type by the IP protection.
2. Be sure to install the equipment on the horizontal floor.

If the equipment is placed on the floor inclining more than
10°, it may fall down. Securely lock the stoppers of the
casters at the place where the equipment is operated.
3. In addition to the above places, do not use the equipment

at the following places
! There is much dust or sand dust.
! The equipment is applied with excessive vibration or shock.
! The power line voltage fluctuates abnormally.
! The power line voltage excessively drops while the equipment
being operated under a load.
! The equipment is exposed to a direct sunlight.
4. Do not block the opening for air ventilation located on the

rear, top and side covers of the equipment, or the equipment
failure may be caused.
5. Neither incline the equipment more than 10° nor give an

abnormal shock when moving it. When moving the equipment
weighing more than 200kg, be sure to move it by two persons.
(9) Q1E-EA0611
7.3 Precautions for Electrical Safety
1. This ultrasound scanner has been designed as a class 1

equipment classified according to the type of protection
against electric shock, and Type B/BF equipment classified
according to the degree of protection against electric shock
in accordance with the IEC60601-1 (General Requirements for
safety of Medical Electrical Equipment by International
Electro technical Commission) and UL2601-1.
To prevent electric shock, be sure to directly connect the
power cable of the equipment to the 3-wire power outlet which
has a protective earth terminal (with less than 10W grounding
resistance) of the grounding facility.
2. Do not detach the covers fixed with screws. Detaching the

cover and contacting with electrical component inside may
cause electric shock. For repair and checkup of the inside
of the equipment, be sure to call service from Hitachi or
our authorized dealer.
3. All ECG leads must be removed from patient to use with

high-frequency (HF) surgical equipment.
4. Do not use the ECG function to patient which uses cardiac

pacemaker or other electrical stimulators.
7.4 Precautions in use of probe
1. Do not use the probe of which the head surface is scratched

or the cable cover is damaged. If the probe is used as damaged,
it may cause electric shock.
2. The needle guide line to be displayed on the screen when biopsy

is performed with the probe connected to this equipment is
just a guide for direction of needle puncture. When operating
the biopsy needle, do it as checking the actual position of
the needle on the ultrasound image.
(10) Q1E-EA0611
1. Handle the probes with great care. Be careful neither to
hit the probe to any hard object nor drop it, otherwise trouble
may be caused.
2. As the probe connector is not water-proof type (IP40), do

not apply any liquid or dip it in liquid. If this precaution
is not observed, it may be damaged.
3. Be sure to connect or disconnect the probe under the following

conditions. If it is done under the conditions other than
the specified below, the equipment may malfunction or be failed.
Therefore, strictly observe the procedures described below.
! Turn off the power switch.
! If the equipment is provided with more than two probe
connectors, using the probe selection key select the other
probe connector than the one to which the probe is connected
or disconnected and set FREEZE ON.
4. The probes to which pressurized or depressurized gas

sterilization can be applied are described in the Instruction
Manual of each probe. Sterilize probe according to the method
described in the Instruction Manual.
5. In case of the probes to which pressurized or depressurized

gas sterilization cannot be applied, never put them in the
following atmosphere. If this is not observed, the probe
may be damaged.
! At temperature higher than 40°C
! In the pressurized gas
! In the depressurized gas
! Disinfection or sterilization other than the specified
(11) Q1E-EA0611
7.5 Precautions against ultrasound output power
When the equipment is used for the patient with high susceptibility
such as fetus, pay attention to the following:
! Set the ultrasound output power to the level as low as possible
and adjust sensitivity with the gain control.
! To prevent unnecessary ultrasound output power, try to set FREEZE
to ON whenever depiction of ultrasound image is not necessary.
! Because effect by ultrasound power on the imaging area in the
M, PW, CW and CFM-modes is greater than in the B-mode, try to
use it at the level as minimum as possible.
(12) Q1E-EA0611
7.6 Precautions for Thermal Safety
The EUB-5500 has the method to keep the probe surface temperature
of invasive and endo-cavity probes below 43 °C.
Invasive and endo-cavity probes excluding the trans-esophageal probes
In the normal use, the acoustic output is limited such that the probe
surface temperature will not exceed 43 °C.
Both hardware and software design features have been implemented

to avoid ’run-away’ power conditions with these probes.
If the current of the ultrasound transmit circuit is over a specified

level, a hardware protection circuit in the power supply is activated
to limit the electrical drive signal to the transducer. Therefore,
the acoustic power is reduced to below the safety level even when
an abnormal control signal caused by a system malfunction is applied
to the ultrasound transmit circuit.
Furthermore, the system software is protected against inadvertent

errors. The operating software is stored in the HDD (Hard Disk) and
is protected against the unauthorized user access from desktop. The
HDD is required to operate with the MOD (Magneto-Optical Disk) for
data exchange according to the following sequence.
(1) Format the HDD
(2) Copy the data on the MOD into the HDD with automatic
verification.
If this sequence is not completed, the data is not changed. Therefore,

there is no potential that the software of the system affecting acoustic
output is damaged by accident or user error.
(13) Q1E-EA0611
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Outline of EUB-5500 ·································· 1-1

1.1 General ··············································· 1-1
1.2 Features ·············································· 1-1
1.3 Intended Use ·········································· 1-4
1.4 Environmental conditions ······························ 1-5
1.5 Power Requirements ···································· 1-6
1.6 Installation ·········································· 1-7
1.7 Precautions in handling ······························· 1-9
1.7.1 Handling probes··································· 1-9
1.7.2 Precautions in operation and use·················· 1-9
1.8 Precautions regarding ultrasound output ·············· 1-11
1.9 Label location ······································· 1-12
Chapter 2 Equipment Composition ································ 2-1

2.1 Standard Components ··································· 2-1
2.2 Optional Components ··································· 2-1
Chapter 3 Components and Functions ···························· 3-1

3.1 Component Description ································· 3-1
3.2 Keyboard Panel ········································ 3-2
Chapter 4 Operation Procedures ································ 4-1

4.1 Preparation before Use ································ 4-1
4.1.1 Connecting the probe······························ 4-1
4.1.2 Positioning the viewing monitor··················· 4-2
4.1.3 Check before power ON····························· 4-2
4.2 Starting the Equipment ································ 4-4
4.2.1 Power ON·········································· 4-4
4.2.2 Releasing Freeze·································· 4-5
4.2.3 Adjusting brightness of the monitor··············· 4-5
4.2.4 Selecting a probe and application················· 4-6
4.3 Setting Auto Freeze Function ·························· 4-8
4.4 Patient ··············································· 4-9
4.4.1 Entry of Standard ID (Entry of Standard Menu)···· 4-10
4.4.2 Entry of OB measurement ID (Entry of Obstetric
measurement menu)································ 4-15
4.5 Entering Hospital Name ······························· 4-20
(14) Q1E-EA0611
4.6 Changing Time ········································ 4-20
4.7 Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output ··············· 4-20
4.7.1 Acoustic output level···························· 4-21
4.7.2 Acoustic output indices·························· 4-22
4.7.3 ULTRASOUND POWER Control························· 4-29
4.8 Ending Use ··········································· 4-31
Chapter 5 Operation Modes ····································· 5-1

5.1 Overview ·············································· 5-1
5.1.1 Keyboard operation································ 5-1
5.1.2 TRACKBALL PRIORITY································ 5-2
5.1.3 Function menu operation··························· 5-2
5.1.4 MAIN MENU operation······························· 5-5
5.2 B mode ················································ 5-8
5.2.1 Display of B mode································· 5-8
5.2.2 Gain adjustment··································· 5-8
5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus··················· 5-9
5.2.4 Switching over electronic focus steps············· 5-9
5.2.5 Switching over transmit frequency················ 5-10
5.2.6 Moving display position·························· 5-10
5.2.7 Pan zooming function····························· 5-12
5.2.8 Twin screen display of B mode images············· 5-13
5.2.9 dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Image)············· 5-13
5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu······························· 5-14
5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu······························· 5-19
5.2.12 B MENU of MAIN MENU······························ 5-24
5.2.13 Using ALARA in B-mode···························· 5-31
5.3 M-mode ··············································· 5-32
5.3.1 Displaying B/M-mode image························ 5-32
5.3.2 Adjusting gain (brightness)······················ 5-32
5.3.3 Single screen display of M-mode Image············ 5-33
5.3.4 Moving display position·························· 5-33
5.3.5 Switching electronic focus······················· 5-34
5.3.6 Freeze of M-mode image··························· 5-34
5.3.7 Switching over sweep speed······················· 5-35
5.3.10 MENU of MAIN MENU································ 5-38
(15) Q1E-EA0611
5.3.11 Using ALARA in B/M-mode·························· 5-40
5.4 PW Mode ·············································· 5-42
5.4.1 Display of B/PW-mode····························· 5-42
5.4.3 Adjusting Doppler angle·························· 5-43
5.4.4 Various adjustment functions····················· 5-44
5.4.5 Switching over reference frequencies (REF FREQ)·· 5-44
5.4.6 Moving base line································· 5-44
5.4.7 Switching over velocity range (PRF)·············· 5-45
5.4.8 Adjusting Doppler sound volume··················· 5-45
5.4.9 Oblique function <Exclusive for linear probe>···· 5-45
5.4.10 Switching over sample gate width················· 5-46
5.4.13 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU··························· 5-51
5.4.14 Using ALARA in B/PW-mode························· 5-54
5.5 Steerable CW Mode ···································· 5-57
5.5.1 Display of steerable CW-mode image··············· 5-57
5.5.2 Gain adjustment·································· 5-58
5.5.3 Selection of reference frequency (REF FREQ)······ 5-58
5.5.4 Adjustment functions····························· 5-59
5.5.7 Dop. Menu of Main Menu··························· 5-61
5.5.8 Using ALARA in CW-mode··························· 5-62
5.6 Single Element CW-Mode ······························· 5-64
5.6.1 Displaying single element CW-mode image·········· 5-64
5.6.6 Dop. MENU of MAIN MENU··························· 5-68
5.6.7 Using ALARA in CW-mode··························· 5-68
5.7 CFM Mode ············································· 5-70
5.7.1 Displaying CFM-mode image························ 5-70
5.7.2 Setting COLOR BOX range·························· 5-72
5.7.3 Adjusting gain (Brightness)······················ 5-73
(16) Q1E-EA0611
5.7.5 Reference frequency (REF FREQ)··················· 5-74
5.7.6 Velocity Range (PRF)····························· 5-74
5.7.7 Baseline········································· 5-75
5.7.8 Oblique <Exclusive for linear probes>············ 5-76
5.7.9 Zooming image:ZOOM······························· 5-77
5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU···························· 5-89
5.7.13 Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M and/PW modes······ 5-94
5.8 ECG Function ········································· 5-96
5.8.1 Connecting cords································· 5-96
5.8.2 Displaying physiological signal waveform········· 5-97
5.8.3 ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC)·················· 5-100
5.8.4 ECG MENU of MAIN MENU··························· 5-104
5.9 Needle Guide Line ··································· 5-105
5.10 Omni-Directional M mode ····························· 5-110
5.10.1 General········································· 5-110
5.10.2 Features········································ 5-110
5.10.3 Operating requirements of ODM function·········· 5-110
5.10.4 Real-time ODM mode······························ 5-111
5.10.5 ODM beam line operation························· 5-113
5.10.6 Image quality adjustment function (IMAGE PROCESS
menu)··········································· 5-114
5.10.7 Cine memory ODM mode···························· 5-115
5.10.8 Application parameter setup····················· 5-117
Chapter 6 Character, Annotation and Body Mark ················· 6-1

6.1 Entering Characters ··································· 6-1
6.1.1 Character input menu······························ 6-1
6.1.2 Deleting characters······························· 6-3
6.1.3 Ending entry······································ 6-3
6.2 Entering Characters with Annotation ··················· 6-3
6.2.1 Calling ANNOTATION menu··························· 6-3
6.2.2 ANNOTATION function menu·························· 6-4
6.2.3 Display setting of ANNOTATION menu················ 6-6
6.2.4 Ending ANNOTATION menu···························· 6-6
6.2.5 List of ANNOTATION································ 6-7
(17) Q1E-EA0611
6.2.6 Registration of user defined annotation·········· 6-14
6.3 Entering Body Mark ··································· 6-15
6.3.1 Displaying body mark····························· 6-15
6.3.2 Moving body mark································· 6-16
6.3.3 Deleting body mark······························· 6-16
6.3.4 Moving position of probe mark···················· 6-16
6.3.5 Adjusting angle of probe mark···················· 6-16
6.3.6 Displaying upright position mark················· 6-17
6.4 Preset Operation function ···························· 6-17
6.4.1 The usage of a Preset Operation function········· 6-17
6.4.2 Set up Preset Operation·························· 6-18
6.4.3 Details of Preset Operation Setup Menu··········· 6-21
Chapter 7 Main Menu ··········································· 7-1

7.1 Starting Main Menu ···································· 7-1
7.2 Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode ····················· 7-1
7.3 Display Menu ·········································· 7-2
7.4 Meas.Menu ············································· 7-3
7.5 Image Mem. Menu ······································· 7-3
7.6 Image Data Transfer Menu ······························ 7-4
7.7 Recorder Menu ········································· 7-4
7.8 Physiology Menu ······································· 7-5
7.9 Setup Menu ············································ 7-5
7.10 Disk Menu ············································ 7-16
Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function ································ 8-1

8.1 Switching over APPLICATION ···························· 8-1
8.2 Editing APPLICATION Function ·························· 8-2
8.2.1 Current Condition································· 8-3
8.2.2 Edit Data········································· 8-4
8.2.3 Copy & Paste······································ 8-4
8.2.4 Delete············································ 8-5
8.2.5 Edit Name········································· 8-5
8.2.6 Default application setting······················· 8-5
8.2.7 Ending edit······································· 8-6
8.3 Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter setting menu> ········ 8-7
8.3.1 APPLICATION parameter setting menu················ 8-7
8.3.2 B-Mode Menu······································· 8-8
(18) Q1E-EA0611
8.3.3 M-Mode Menu······································ 8-11
8.3.4 D-Mode Menu······································ 8-12
8.3.5 CFM-Mode Menu···································· 8-15
8.3.6 Display·········································· 8-20
8.3.7 Annotation Menu·································· 8-22
8.3.8 Measurement menu································· 8-23
8.3.9 Body mark········································ 8-26
8.3.10 Others Menu······································ 8-29
Chapter 9 Image memory unit ··································· 9-1

9.1 Image memory ·········································· 9-1
9.2 Image filing function ································· 9-3
9.2.1 Store to Hard Disk function······················· 9-3
9.2.2 Set up filing····································· 9-5
9.2.3 Transfer of Image································ 9-10
9.2.4 Filing daialog··································· 9-12
9.2.5 Transfer········································· 9-18
9.2.6 Retrieve of Images······························· 9-19
9.2.7 Edit of image file: Merged Folder················ 9-27
9.2.8 Batch transferring / printing for every patient·· 9-29
9.2.9 Temporary save at the time of a transferring /
printing error··································· 9-31
9.3 Cine memory mode ····································· 9-33
9.3.1 Record of image·································· 9-33
9.3.2 Memory capacity setting·························· 9-34
9.3.3 Continuous record mode and continuous record of
heart beat automatic detection mode ············· 9-35
9.3.4 Image replay····································· 9-36
Chapter 10 VCR (option) ······································ 10-1

10.1 Remote control of VCR ································ 10-1
10.1.1 Image recording·································· 10-1
10.1.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of VCR
·············································· 10-1
10.2 Measurement on review image ·························· 10-3
10.2.1 Measurement procedure···························· 10-3
10.2.2 Registration of review image mode················ 10-7
10.2.3 Mode adjustment function························ 10-14
10.2.4 Entering the comment···························· 10-14
(19) Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 11 Measuring Functions ································ 11-1
11.1 Outline ·············································· 11-1
11.2 Starting up Measurements ····························· 11-5
11.3 Basic Procedures ····································· 11-6
11.3.1 Functions of Keys································ 11-6
11.3.2 Measurement procedures·························· 11-12
11.4 Contents of Measuring Functions ····················· 11-29
11.4.1 Basic Measurements······························ 11-29
[1] Calip Measurement ······························ 11-29
[2] Trace Measurement ······························ 11-30
[3] Area-E (Area-Ellipse) ·························· 11-32
[4] Volume Measurement ····························· 11-32
[5] SVolume Measurement ···························· 11-33
[6] Velocity Measurement ··························· 11-34
[7] Accel.(Acceleration) Measurement ··············· 11-35
[8] D-Profile ······································ 11-37
[9] Ratio-Dis, Ratio-Area, Ratio-Time, and
Ratio-Velo Measurements ···························· 11-38
[10] HR Measurement ································ 11-40
[11] V Ave.(Velocity Average) Measurement ·········· 11-41
[12] CFM-Velo Measurement ·························· 11-42
[13] PHT Measurement ······························· 11-44
[14] Histogram Measurement ························· 11-46
[15] Time measurement ······························ 11-49
[16] Decel. (Deceleration) measurement ············· 11-50
[17] dP/dt measurement ····························· 11-51
11.4.2 Measuring Cross-Sectional Images················ 11-53
[1] %Steno (Percent Stenosis) Measurement ·········· 11-53
[2] LV/Ao Measurement(B-LV/Ao, M-LV/Ao) ············ 11-55
11.4.3 Schema-Guided M-Mode Measurement················ 11-57
[1] LV (Left Ventricular) Measurement ·············· 11-57
[2] MV (Mitral Valve) Measurement ·················· 11-63
[3] Ao (Aortic Valve) Measurement ·················· 11-64
[4] TV (Tricuspid Valve) Measurement ··············· 11-65
[5] PV (Pulmonary Valve) Measurement ··············· 11-66
11.4.4 Doppler Measurement····························· 11-67
[1] LVOT Measurement ······························· 11-67
(20) Q1E-EA0611
[2] LV inflow Measurement ·························· 11-74
[3] RVOT Measurement ······························· 11-77
[4] RV inflow Measurement ·························· 11-81
[5] VASC1 / VASC2 Measurement ······················ 11-84
[6] AV-Area measurement ···························· 11-89
[7] Qp/Qs Measurement ······························ 11-92
[8] RI, PI Measurement ····························· 11-95
[9] Flow Volume Measurement ························ 11-99
[10] PV flow measurement ·························· 11-103
11.4.5 Left Ventricle Cardiac Function Measurement···· 11-106
[1] Pombo, Gibson, and Teichholz Measurements ····· 11-106
[2] Area-Length Measurement ······················· 11-108
[3] BI-Plane Measurement ·························· 11-111
[4] Simpson Measurement ··························· 11-112
[5] M.Simpson Measurement ························· 11-113
[6] Bullet Measurement ···························· 11-121
[7] MV Regurg. Measurement ························ 11-122
[8] TV Regurg. Measurement ························ 11-124
11.4.6 Obstetric measurement·························· 11-126
11.4.7 Other Measurement······························ 11-163
[1] Angle Measurement ····························· 11-163
[2] Urology measurement ··························· 11-166
[3] Gynecology measurements ······················· 11-169
[4] Follicular Measurement ························ 11-170
[5] CAROTID Measurement ··························· 11-171
[6] LEG A. Measurement ···························· 11-172
[7] ARM A. Measurement ···························· 11-172
11.5 Measurement Setup ·································· 11-173
11.5.1 Configuration of Measurement Setup············· 11-173
11.5.2 Measurement Setup menu························· 11-176
11.5.3 Measurement Edit Menu·························· 11-189
11.5.4 Special menu··································· 11-220
11.5.5 Examples of measurement edition················ 11-226
11.5.6 Measurement Export/Import function············· 11-252
11.6 Measurement Report Function ························ 11-255
11.6.1 Measurement report selection··················· 11-255
11.6.2 Measurement results display window············· 11-256
(21) Q1E-EA0611
11.6.3 Graphic display of obstetric measurement······· 11-264
11.6.4 Input and output of measurement result········· 11-275
11.6.5 Correction of measurement result··············· 11-281
11.7 Measurement on review image from image memory ······ 11-282
11.8 Measurement Tool ··································· 11-283
11.8.1 Outline of measurement tool···················· 11-283
11.8.2 Setting Measurement tool······················· 11-288
Chapter 12 Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices ·· 12-1

12.1 Peripheral equipment ································· 12-1
12.2 Precautions in connection of peripheral devices ······ 12-2
12.3 Peripheral devices possible to use on outside commercial
power supply outlet ·································· 12-2
12.4 Operation of peripheral devices ······················ 12-3
12.5 Connection of Peripheral devices ····················· 12-3
12.6 Connection of PC printer and the HUB for Network function
····················································· 12-5
Chapter 13 Movement ·········································· 13-1

13.1 Movement of equipment ································ 13-1
13.1.1 Preparation before movement······················ 13-1
13.1.2 Precautions in movement·························· 13-1
13.2 Transportation of equipment ·························· 13-4
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Checkup ··························· 14-1

14.1 Check before use ····································· 14-1
14.2 Checkup while using the scanner unit ················· 14-2
14.3 Periodical checkup ··································· 14-3
14.4 Backup of system setting data ························ 14-3
14.5 Periodical test of system safety ····················· 14-3
14.6 Periodical inspection of system performance ·········· 14-4
14.7 Checkup after storage for a long time ················ 14-4
14.8 Cleaning of equipment ································ 14-4
14.9 Functional Checkup ··································· 14-8
14.10 Waste Products ······································· 14-9
Chapter 15 Repair, readjustment and disposal ················· 15-1
Chapter 16 Specifications ···································· 16-1

16.1 Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver ······················ 16-1
16.1.1 Type of Probes··································· 16-1
(22) Q1E-EA0611
16.1.2 Image Examination Modes·························· 16-1
16.1.3 Probe connection································· 16-1
16.1.4 Dynamic Range···································· 16-1
16.1.5 Gain Adjustment·································· 16-2
16.1.6 Focusing········································· 16-2
16.1.7 Acoustic Power Level Control····················· 16-2
16.2 Digital Scan Converter ······························· 16-3
16.2.1 B-mode Image Display····························· 16-3
16.2.2 Field of View···································· 16-3
16.2.3 Image Orientation/Rotation······················· 16-3
16.2.4 M-mode Image Display····························· 16-3
16.2.5 Image Processing································· 16-4
16.2.6 Measurement Functions···························· 16-4
16.2.7 Character Display································ 16-5
16.2.8 Body Marks······································· 16-6
16.2.9 Application······································ 16-6
16.2.10 VCR Control ····································· 16-6
16.2.11 Storage to Hard Disk ···························· 16-7
16.2.12 Storage Devices ································· 16-7
16.3 Doppler ·············································· 16-7
16.4 Color Flow Mapping ··································· 16-9
16.5 Image Filling Software ······························ 16-11
16.6 Cine Memory ········································· 16-11
16.7 Option ·············································· 16-13
16.7.1 ECG Unit EZU-EK25······························· 16-13
16.7.2 Omni-Directional M mode display software EZU-OD2
············································· 16-13
16.7.3 SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1················ 16-14
16.7.4 Network Interface EZU-Pi6······················· 16-14
16.7.5 Steerable CW doppler unit EZU-ST5··············· 16-14
16.7.6 CW unit EZU-CW4 (for pencil CW probe)··········· 16-15
16.7.7 MO Drive unit EZU-MO1··························· 16-15
16.7.8 Disposable ECG electrode adapter EZU-DA1········ 16-15
16.8 Other ··············································· 16-15
16.8.1 Auxiliary AC Outlet····························· 16-15
16.8.2 Power Requirements······························ 16-15
16.8.3 Operating Environment··························· 16-16
(23) Q1E-EA0611
16.8.4 External Dimensions····························· 16-16
16.8.5 Weight·········································· 16-16
Appendix A Message list ······································· A-1
Appendix B SCSI Printer ······································· B-1
Appendix C How to use a log file ······························ C-1
Appendix D Precautions to display on Mac OS ··················· D-1
Appendix E The rate of compression of a file ·················· E-1
Appendix F Starting the Ultrasound Equipment from the System CD

······························································· F-1
Appendix G Formatting CD-R/RW and MO Disks ····················· G-1
Appendix AA Using the PC Printer ····························· AA-1
Index ······················································ Index-1
Note: Please be noted that in some cases there are differences between
displays of ultrasound scanner quoted in this instruction manual
and actual displays. (ex.: "MI", "TIS", "TIB”, "TIC” and so on.)
(24) Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 1 Outline of EUB-5500
1.1 General
Model EUB-5500 is a multi-functional ultrasound scanner in which
Doppler, Color Flow Mapping, etc. are provided and all circuits
related to image quality are fully digitalized.
As not only linear scan type and convex scan type probes, but also
phased array scan type probe can be operated with EUB-5500, it is
possible to use it for any field of application.
Furthermore, cine memory, cardiac measurement, patient report
functions and so on are provided. Since Windows XP is used as a basic
OS, FDD, CD-R/RW and MOD units are incorporated, it is easily
compatible with various kinds of interface including an image filing
function and DICOM 3.0, etc.
1.2 Features
(1) True digital architecture
Beamformer which is decisively concerned to the image quality
can process B/M/DOP/CFM/CFA images in digital and it is
controlled by software.
(2) Quick response
Change-over of modes, imaging conditions setting,
switching-over of probes and applications are performed fast
so that an operator can concentrate his attention on the patient.
(3) Usable for wide field of application
Besides the linear scan type and convex scan type probes the
phased array scan type probe is also usable. So, it is possible
to cover from abdominal and obstetric to cardiovascular fields.
(4) Improved resolution
Together with the vitalization as stated above, because of
2-dimensional beam emission weighting a focusing zone of beam
emission focus is largely improved. As the result of it, even
in the single focus a homogeneous image can be obtained from
near to far field and also an image observation with high frame
rate is achieved.
Due to wide band probes, dynamic focusing in echo receiving
and low cross talk following three features, high spatial
resolution, wide dynamic range and high contrast resolution
are realized.
1-1 25 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Improved color frame rate and image quality
Because of Quadra beam processing system provided as standard
in echo receiving and the latest image processing technology,
the frame rate is improved much more comparing with conventional
system, resulting in color images of high definition and high
resolution.
(6) User definable measuring function
Regarding measuring function users can reduce or add items for
measurement. Also, it is possible to make a new measuring
item(s) making use of basic tool prepared in advance.
(7) Non-interlaced monitor, standard provision
As a RGB non-interlaced monitor is used, it is possible to observe
flickerless images.
(8) Windows XP as OS
Windows XP is adopted as a basic OS so that the scanner system
is compatible with various kinds of interface including DICOM
3.0
(9) Panoramic display function
The panoramic display function is to show a wide ranged panoramic
image up to 60 cm length at maximum by abstracting feature from
the image changing due to scanning probe so that it is possible
to display a very wide image information on a single image.
(10) Omni-Directional M mode (ODM function)
Usually the normal M-mode image is controlled by the beam
direction.
With this function, however, it is possible to display the M-mode
image on an optional line in the tomographic image, so it enables
to perform more accurate left ventricle volume measurement.
(11) Versatile image filing functions – image record
For image filing a digital image recording system which provides
recording without quality distortion is adopted. The image
filing function can save a still image at a hard disk, images
are not erased even if the power is put off. Also CD-R/RW,
MOD and FDD incorporated in the scanner are available as other
recording media.
In addition, not only still images, but also live images from
the cine memory can be recorded to CD-R/RW. It is also compatible
with DICOM 3.0 (option).
1-2 Q1E-EA0611
(12) Image filing function, offering easier handling – image replay
function-
Image retrieval display controls all the driving units. A care
for easy routine operation is duly paid, which enable users
to resort data by patient ID or name and retrieve data by keywords.
(13) Easily operable keyboard
As key arrangement is taken in consideration of frequency of
use, an operation efficiency is improved. Since alphanumeric
keyboard is provided with back-light, it is possible to input
patient ID and name in a dark examination room.
(14) Excellent mobility with four swivel casters
As all the four casters are of swivel type, it is easy to move
in narrow space. Due to reduced friction force to floor it
is easy to move from ward to ward.
1-3 Q1E-EA0611
1.3 Intended Use
This equipment is a compact multifunction ultrasound scanner system
equipped with Doppler and color flow mapping functions. This
equipment can be applied to examinations in a wide clinical fields
(Abdominal, Cardiac, Intra-operative, Fetal, Pediatric, Small Organ,
Peripheral Vessel, Biopsy, Trans-rectal, Trans-vaginal, Neonatal
Cephalic, Adult Cephalic, Gynecology, Urology) in combination with
various kinds of convex, linear and phased array high definition
probes from 2.5MHz to 10MHz. Every types of convex, linear and phased
array high definition probes are developed and designed to display
in B,B/M, or M-mode image. Furthermore usable for Doppler, Color
Doppler and Color Flow Angio methods depending on the used equipment
model. The 3D, DICOM, and Wide View functionalities are also available
as options. Please read the clause of safety Consideration on
Operation before using it. Then, it is possible to connect several
kind of peripherals (e.g. Image printer, VCR). In details, see the
section of Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices.
1-4 Q1E-EA0611
Observe the following environmental conditions for safe and correct
operation of the equipment.
(1) Environmental conditions in operation

! Ambient temperature : +10°C ~ +35°C
! Relative humidity : 30 ~ 85% (subject to no condensation)
! Atmospheric pressure : 700 ~ 1060hPa
(2) Daily storage conditions

! Ambient temperature : -10°C ~ +40°C
! Relative humidity : 10 ~ 90%(subject to no condensation)
(3) Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)

! Ambient temperature : -10°C ~ +60°C
! Relative humidity : 10 ~ 95%(subject to no condensation)
1-5 Q1E-EA0611
1.5 Power Requirements
This equipment esquires the following power supply. Never use the
equipment with the power conditions other than these specifications,
otherwise the equipment may be damaged.
(1) Main voltage : AC120V ± 10% (internally selectable to

100/110/120VAC)
Be sure to use the power supply of which fluctuation against
the rated voltage is within 10%. If the equipment is used with
the voltage other than the specified range, the performance
of the equipment may not be fully obtained.
(2) Mains phase : Single phase
(3) Mains frequency : 50/60Hz
(4) Power supply capacity : More than 1.2kVA
(5) Replacement of fuse
For replacement of fuse, use the supplied fuse according to
the following table. Never use any fuse other than the specified,
otherwise damage to the equipment will result.
Table 1.5.1 List of Usable Fuses
Fuse No. Label name Rating
F1 LINE OUTPUT AC100 ~ 120V T 6.3AL/250V
F2 LINE OUTPUT T 1.6AL/250V
Use the slow-blow type fuse. Do not use fast-blow type fuse.
Remove fuse holder as fig1.5.1,and exchange a fuse when a fuse
blows.
Fig 1.5.1 replacement of fuse
1-6 Q1E-EA0611
1.6 Installation
Use the equipment in the facilities which is equipment to the hospital
or research organ.
To safeguard the patient and operator and to ensure correct
functioning of the equipment, observe the following installation
requirements.
(1) Environmental requirements

Use the equipment within the range of the environmental
conditions specified in Specifications.
This equipment is not protected against explosion-proof. Never

use the equipment in an atmosphere where inflammable or
combustible gas such as explosive gas, toxic gas and oil vapor
is present.
This equipment is not a drip-proof or water-proof type. Avoid

use of the equipment in the following environments, or equipment
failure may be caused.
! Place where the equipment is exposed to direct sunlight.
! Place close to heat generating equipment such as heating
apparatus and humidifier.
! Place where the equipment is exposed to water spray or splash.
! Place here much dust is present.
(2) Power supply facility

Use the equipment within the range of the power requirements
specified in Specifications.
(3) Floor conditions
Be sure to use the equipment on the horizontal, flat floor.
If the equipment is used on the floor inclining more the 10°,
it may fall down.
Also surely lock the stoppers of the casters before operation
of the equipment.
1-7 Q1E-EA0611
(4) Space requirements for operation
The physical dimensions of this equipment is 500(W) × 800(D)
× 1480(H) mm. Keep a space of at least 10cm in the surrounding
area of the equipment.
(5) Space requirements for ventilation
This equipment is equipped with a ventilation fan on the rear
side. Keep a space of more than 10cm from the rear side of the
equipment. Also a vent is located each at the lower part of
the front and rear sides. Be careful not to block the vents.
(6) Protection against electromagnetic disturbance
Strong radiation or electromagnetic wave can cause malfunction
of the equipment or noise on image. Therefore, care should
be taken not to allow those devices to come closer to this
equipment.
(This ultrasound scanner has been designed as Group I, Class
A equipment classified according to the type of electromagnetic
compatibility in accordance with the IEC60601-1-2)
The probes for internal use might not comply with

electromagnetic compatibility requirement when misused for
external applications.
1-8 Q1E-EA0611
1.7 Precautions in handling
1.7.1 Handling probes

(1) Probes can be damaged even by a light impact. Great care
should, therefore, be exercised not to apply any shock
to them, allow them to hit or drop them.
(2) Be sure to turn off the power switch or to select another
probe connector by the probe selection key before
connecting or disconnecting a probe. Connecting or
disconnecting a probe without turning off the power switch
or as selecting the corresponding probe connector can cause
equipment failure or malfunction.
(3) Use all possible care not to scratch the surface of the
probe head (surface of the transducer). When any scratch
on the probe head or damage on the cable cover is found,
do not use the probe. If such probe is used, it may cause
electric shock.
(4) After use of probe, the probe shall be cleaned with the
gauze moistened for disinfection or alcohol. Never use
organic solvent such as thinner for this purpose.
(5) Do not use any probes other than those specified for
intra-operation for the purpose of intra-operation.
(6) The needle guide line displayed on the screen when
performing biopsy by using the probe connected to this
equipment gives only a guide to puncture the needle. For
needle puncturing operation, perform it as assuring the
actual position of the needle on the ultrasound image.
(7) Do not water-soak the probe connecter.
1.7.2 Precautions in operation and use

(1) When any abnormality occurs on the equipment, immediately
turn off the power switch and stop it operation. Then,
contact Hitachi Technical Service Division or our
authorized dealer.
(2) When the equipment is not used for a long time, be sure
to turn off the power switch and put a dust cover on it.
(3) Set the equipment to the FREEZE mode while examination
is not being performed. This will prevent the probe from
being deteriorated.
1-9 Q1E-EA0611
(4) Turning on the power switch of the equipment must securely
be done. Quick repetition of switching on and off may
result in erasing the memorized data such as date and
hospital name or malfunctioning of switches on the
equipment. In such event, turn off the power switch again,
and after more than 10 seconds turn on the power switch
again.
(5) Do not operate the power switch with the fingers stuck
with ultrasound jelly. If the power switch is
contaminated with jelly, immediately wipe it off.
(6) Hospital name, set imaging parameters and data for
measurements have been backed up with the built-in memory,
but expiration of the life of the battery in the equipment
or temporary power failure may cause deletion of the data
in the memory. The entered parameters and data should
be recorded and archived through the printer or VCR so
that they can be reset later.
(7) Never remodel the equipment or probe.
(8) Some of the image display formats described in this
instruction manual are subject to change without prior
notice for improvement of the equipment.
(9) When power break occur in facility, turn off the power
switch and disconnect the power cable. In the result of
it, ID, Patient information, last image and memorized image
will disappear
(10) When you want to press an ejecting button or access of
CD-R/RW drive FD drive and MOD drive, confirm without fail
that an access lamp of drive is put off. After that press
the ejecting button.
If the button is pressed while the access lamp is put on
or blinking, there may be a case that the drive or the
disk or contents in the disk is destroyed.
Moreover, if the drive is selected while the access lamp
is put on or blinking, it may be unable to access.
(11) When the unit is locked up, put the power OFF by pressing
ON/STANDBY switch. If the power can not be OFF even though
ON/STANDBY is pressed, shut down the power by pressing
the breaker switch locating at left side of the unit to
OFF side. After that restart the unit.
1-10 Q1E-EA0611
(12) We shall have no liability for any loss of data saved in
this device, caused by miss operation, accident, system
malfunction and so on. Be sure to check contents of any
important data and make backup copies of them.
(13) Follow the manuals of the printer and other devices about
paper, ink, and other consumables.
1.8 Precautions regarding ultrasound output
Although biological hazard of the ultrasound power used in this
equipment is considered almost negligible because it is small,
observe the following precautions to minimize the effect by the
ultrasound as the fetus in the early stage of gestation specially
has a sensitive susceptibility against physical energies such as
X-rays.
(1) Set the ultrasound output power to the level as low as possible
and adjust the sensitivity by the gain control.
(2) To avoid unnecessary ultrasound output, freeze image while
acquiring image is not needed for diagnosis.
(3) As the effect of ultrasound power on the examination region
becomes higher in M, PW, CW and CFM-modes as compared with B-mode,
try to minimize use of the ultrasound exposure on fetus to the
least level as required.
1-11 Q1E-EA0611
1.9 Label location
DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION label is located as following figure.
Label location
Fig. 1.9.1 Label Location
DANGER POSSIBLE EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT USE IN THE PRESENCE OF

FLAMMABLE GAS.
WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

REPLACE FUSES ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING.
FRONT REAR
CAUTION TO BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY.
FILTERS HAVE TO BE CLEANED FREQUENTLY.
STRONG RADIATION OR ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
! CAN CAUSE MALFUNCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO CATCH YOUR FINGERS THE

CASTERS.
FILTER
PLEASE REFER TO THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL. KB416931A
Fig. 1.9.2 DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION Label
1-12 Q1E-EA0611
Information
DANGER POSSIBLE EXPLOSION HAZARD

IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS :
This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use it in

the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas, inflammable
gas or flammable gas.
WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

REPLACE FUSES ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING :
For replacement of fuse, use the supplied fuse. Never use any
fuse other than the specified, otherwise damage to the equipment
will result. Use the slow-blow type fuse. Do not use fast-blow
type fuse.
CAUTION TO BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED PERSON ONLY :
Do not detach the covers fixed with screws. Detaching the cover
and contacting with electrical component iside may cause
electric shock. For repair and checkup of the inside of the
equipment, be sure to call service from Hitachi or our authorized
dealer.
CAUTION FILTER HAS TO BE CLEANED FREQUENTLY :
Carry out the periodical checkup of the dust filter located

on the air inlet window of the power supply unit once a week,
and clean it if dust is found in it.
CAUTION STRONG RADIATION OR ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE CAN CAUSE

MALFUNCTION OF EQUIPMENT :
Equipment may fail to function normally due to radio wave

generated from apparatus such as portable telephone.
Never use any apparatus such as "portable telephone"

"transceiver" "portable radio" and "radio-controlled toy"
nearby the equipment. Be sure to power down those apparatus.
1-13 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 2 Equipment Composition
2.1 Standard Components

(1) Main unit (integrated on a cart) 1 set
(2) Accessories 1 set
• Probe hanger 1
• Ultrasound jelly 1
• Dust-proof cover 1
• System CD 1
• Hexagonal wrench bar 1
• Spare fuses 1 set
• Cords 1 set
• Instruction manual 1
2.2 Optional Components

(1) Probes
• Phased array probe 4-2MHz EUP-S50
This probe is designed for cardiac and abdominal exams.
• Phased array probe 7-3MHz EUP-S52
This probe is designed for pediatric exams.
• Convex type probe 5-2MHz 40R EUP-C514
This probe is designed for abdominal and fetal exams.
• Convex type probe 3.5MHz 40R EUP-C314G
• Convex type probe 5.0MHz 40R EUP-C524
This probe is designed for neonatal and pedicatric exams.
• Linear type probe 7.5MHz EUP-L53
This probe is designed for small organ and vascular exams.
• Linear type probe 7.5MHz EUP-L53S
2-1 38 Q1E-EA0611
• Linear type probe 13-6MHz EUP-L54M
• Transvaginal probe (Wide view type) 6.5MHz 10R EUP-V53W
This probe is designed for transvaginal and transrectal exams.
• Intracavital probe (Convex/Convex type)
8-4MHz /8-4MHz
EUP-CC531
This probe is designed for transrectalt and transvaginal exams.
• Transrectal probe (7.5MHz Linear/6.5MHz Convex)
EUP-U533
This probe is designed for transrectal exams.
• Puncture probe (Convex type) 3.5MHz 40R EUP-B314
This probe is designed for biopsy exams.
• Puncture probe (Convex type) 5-2MHz 40R EUP-B514
This probe is designed for biopsy exams.
• Intraoperative probe (7.5MHz Linear) EUP-O53T
This probe is designed for intra-operative exams.
• Single Element CW Doppler probe 2.5MHz EUP-TC3
(2) Biomedical waveform display unit EZU-EK25

(3) Disposable ECG electrode adapter EZU-DA1
(4) Omni Directional M mode unit EZU-OD2
(5) Steerable CW Doppler unit EZU-ST5
(6) Single Element CW Doppler unit EZU-CW4
(7) DICOM transfer software EZU-FC7
(8) DICOM Image Printing software EZU-FC7P
(9) DICOM WorkList Software EZU-FC7W
(10) SCSI card interface unit EZU-Pi1
(11) Network Interface EZU-Pi6
(12) 3D Display unit EZU-3D4
(13) 3D Display unit (Magnetic Sensor) EZU-3D2S
(14) Panoramic Display Software EZU-WS4
(15) 15-inch color monitor display unit EZU-MT24-S1
(16) Foot switch (For freeze) EZU-FS1
(Degrees of protection provided by enclosures:IP31)
2-2 Q1E-EA0611
(17) Foot switch (For EZU-3D4, EZU-3D2S, EZU-WS4) EZU-FS2
(Degrees of protection provided by enclosures:IP31)
(18) VCR remote control cable EZU-RO1
(19) Mini-Probe Interface
- Mini-Probe Interface Unit EZU-MS6
- Ultrasonic Probe Connecting Uint (by FUJINON®) SP-711UA
- Translator (by FUJINON®) TL-1A
(20) Mini Probes
- Sonoprobe System PL Series (by FUJINON®)
PL2220-12,15,20
PL1726-12,15,20
PL1926-12,15,20
PL2226-12,15,20
- Front Loding Probe PL26-7.5 Series (by FUJINON®)
PL1726-7.5
PL1926-7.5
PL2226-7.5
PL1726B-7.5
PL1926B-7.5
PL2226B-7.5
(21) MO drive unit EZU-MO1
(22) FG Probe software EZU-OP1
For accessories of equipment, please refer to Technical guide with

Hitachi Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
For combination with optional components, consult with Hitachi Medical

Corporation or its authorized agent.
(23) Probe hanger unit EZU-TH4
2-3 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 3 Components and Functions
3.1 Component Description

When EZU-MO1 that is optional
device is installed, (10)and
(11) exist.
Fig. 3.1-1 General View of EUB-5500
[1] Monitor [7] Keyboard panel [12] FDD

[2] ON/STANDBY switch [8] Caster [13] Access lamp of FDD
[3] Breaker switch [9] Steering handle [14] Eject button of FDD
[4] CD-R/RW [10] MOD
[5] Access lamp of [11] Eject button and [15] Probe connector
CD-R/RW access lamp of [16] ECG connector
MOD
[6] Eject button of [17] OPTION connector
CD-R/RW
3-1 41 Q1E-EA0611
3.2 Keyboard Panel
[40] [39] [38] [37] [36]
[35]
[1]
[34]
[33]
[2] [32]
[3] [31]
[4] [30]
[28]
[5] [51] [29]
[41-48] [27]
[6] [26]
[7] [52] [25]
[8] [50] [54]
[55] [56] [53] [24]
[9]
[10] [23]
[11] [49] [57] [58] [22]
[12]
[21]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17] [18] [19] [20]
Fig. 3.2-1 Keyboard Panel
3-2 Q1E-EA0611
[1] Alpha-numeric keyboard
Enters a comment
The Patient key,Annotation key,Character key and Character clear
key are not included in Alpha-numeric keys.
[2] End
Exam End Exam key
A function to force any images not yet printed to be printed in

the multi image printer output setting. This also functions to
send the End Exam notification in the system incorporated with
the DICOM worklist EZU-FC7W.
GUIDE
[3] Guide key
Displays/Cancels the biopsy guide line.
PROBE
[4] PROBE key
Select a probe and application.
[5] Image filing key

M-WRITE READ S-WRITE
Stores the image being displayed on the screen to the image memory
(Multi-image : M-WRITE key, Single image : S-WRITE key) and Reads
(displays) an image stored in the image memory.
[6] SOUND VOL toggle

SOUND VOL
Switches over speaker volume levels in Doppler mode.
[7] US POWER toggle

US POWER
Switches over ultrasound power levels.
3-3 Q1E-EA0611
[8] Angle encoder toggle switch
When the toggle switch at the right of knob in pressed and angle
encoder is rotated, an incidental angle bar with an angle
registered in APPLICATION also rotated on Doppler line when the
toggle switch at the left of knob is pressed and angle encoder
is rotated, probe mark also rotated.
REPORT
[9] REPORT key
Switches over to patient report function.
[10] MEAS MENU

MEAS MENU key
Displays the measurement name selection menu.
CLEAR
[11] CLEAR key
[Clears] any in functions of the measurement, Main Menu and so

on.
[12] TRACE
TRACE key
Carries out TRACE measurement.
CALIP
[13] CALIP key
Carries out caliper measurement.
[14] REC
REC 2 key
Output image to storage device for setting image record function

of user definition.
3-4 Q1E-EA0611
[15-17] Trackball related keys
UNDO ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
[15]Cancel button (UNDO)

Acts as [Cancel] for functions of the Measurement, Main Menu,
Full Screen Menu and so on.
[16]Trackball
Used for various functions to operate 2-dimentionally.
[17]ENTER Key (Trackball settled button)

Acts as [Set or Enter] for functions of the Measurement, Main
Menu, Full Screen Menu so on.
[18] REC
REC 1 key
Output image to storage device for setting image record function

of user definition.
PRINT
[19] PRINT key
Carries out printing for the scanner selected by user.
FREEZE
[20] FREEZE key
Freezes an image.
L(U) R(D)
[21] L / (U), R / (D) key (Left / Right image selection
key)
Switches over the screen selected in the memory select function.
3-5 Q1E-EA0611
MULTI
[22] SINGLE
MULTI / SINGLE key
Switches over multi/single screen to be selected in the memory

select function.
[23] Focus depth setting toggle switch

FOCUS
Switches over positions of focus of transmit wave.
[24] DEPTH /MAG toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
When running pan zoom switches over display magnification factor

(MAGNIFICATION).
Other cases Switches over display depth (moving display range
up/down)
[25] REF FREQ toggle switch

REF FREQ
Switches over prove Frequency and REF.
[26] V-SCALE (PRF) toggle switch

V-SCALE
(PRF)
Switches over speed range doppler or CFM image
[27] F-STEP toggle switch

F-STEPS
Switches over step of multi-focus.
ZOOM
[28] ZOOM key
Turn ON / OFF pan zoom function.
[29] SAMPLE LENGTH toggle switch

SAMPLE
LENGTH
Adjustment width of sample gate.
3-6 Q1E-EA0611
[30] BASELINE toggle switch
BASELINE
Move baseline to doppler image.
[31] OBLIQUE toggle switch

OBLIQUE
Switches over angle of oblique scan.
[32] SWEEP SPEED toggle switch

SWEEP
SPEED
Switches over sweep speed for doppler or M-mode image.
DEPTH GAIN
[33] DEPTH GAIN slide volume
Switches over the gain for each depth of the B (M)-mode image.
[34] MAIN
MENU MAIN MENU key
Arrange functions not operable in the control panel and function

menus (except MODE DEPENDED MENU)
[35] VCR
ORIG VCR / ORG key
Switches over contents to be displayed on the monitor screen.
[36] Character
Clear CHARACTER CLEAR key
It clears all the characters entered.
[37] Character CHARACTER key
Switches over to character input mode from the character keyboard.
3-7 Q1E-EA0611
[38] Anno-
tation ANNOTATION key
Selects abbreviation related to diagnos is from the list and

displays it on the screen.
[39] Patient Patient key
Input and modify patient information.
FUNCTION
[40]
PREV
NEXT
Function menu selection toggle switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selects any of function menus (F1 ~ F7) displayed at the bottom

of screen.PREV/NEXT is changed function menu.
PHYSIO
[41] PHYSIO key

Select Bio wave display function menu.
[42] OPTION OPTION key

Select the option menu.
[43] 3D key
Select the 3D display function menu.
[44] (No function)
[45] IMAGE
PROCESS IMAGE PROCCESS key
Select the adjustment of image post process function.
[46] MODE
DEPENDED MODE DEPENDED key
Operates any function used especially frequently among various
functions to be operated in the main menu.
[47] USER
USER 1 key
Select user definition menu.
[48] USER
USER 2 key
Select user definition menu.
3-8 Q1E-EA0611
[49] ANGLE key encoder
• When the switch at the center of knob is pressed, an incidental

angle items with an angle registered in toggle selection is
displayed or not.
• If outer circle part of the knob is rotated, the incidental

item also rotates.
[50] M mode selection key and Gain encoder
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the M mode.

• Turning the periphery of knob switches over gain correction
values of the M mode image.
• The periphery of knob can also be used to review the cine
memory image by frame in freeze on.
[51] Doppler mode selection key and encoder
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the doppler

mode.
• Turning the periphery of knob switches over again correction
values of the doppler image.
[52] Color mode selection key and GAIN encoder

CFI CFA
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the color

mode.
values of the color image.
3-9 Q1E-EA0611
[53] B mode selection key and encoder
• Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the B mode.

value of the B mode image.
[54] dTHI key
Select from basic wave image of B, M mode to dTHI image.
CW
[55] CW key
Select the CW mode when doppler mode.
PW
[56] PW key
Select the PW mode when doppler mode.
[57] POINTER key

POINTER
Display or not the arrow mark on image.
[58] TRACK BALL PRIOLITY Toggle switch

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
Manually switches over trackball priority when multiple

functions using the trackball are running.
3-10 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 4 Operation Procedures
4.1 Preparation before Use

4.1.1 Connecting the probe
(1) Connect the probe cable with
the probe connector at the
side panel of main unit. Be
sure to connect it to the
bottom with the cord leading
section at the right side.
Fig. 4.1.1-1 Connecting the Probe
Be sure to turn OFF the

ON/STANDBY switch or select
the other probe before
connecting/disconnecting the
probe connector.
Never connect/disconnect the
probe while selecting the
probe. Doing so will cause
trouble or malfunction of the
equipment.
Also, securely turn the

handle to the "LOCK"
position labeled on the
probe connector.
"LOCK" position "OPEN" position

Fig. 4.1.1-2 Locking connector
4-1 51 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Put the probe cord on the
probe hanger.
Fig. 4.1.1-3 Cord Hanger
4.1.2 Positioning the viewing monitor

Adjust the monitor face to appropriate angle at which the screen
is easily observed.
Fig. 4.1.2-1 Positioning the Monitor
4.1.3 Check before power ON

Check the following before inserting the power plug into the
fixed power outlet.
(1) Checking periodical inspection

Check if periodical inspection and cleaning described in
Chapter 14 Maintenance Check and Cleaning are periodically
carried out.
If specified check interval has elapsed, carry out
periodical check and cleaning first.
When using the equipment again after long storage, carry
out in the same way.
4-2 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Checking the equipotential terminal
When using this equipment with other equipments (for
example, in operating room), connect the equipotential
terminal of this equipment with the equipotential
terminals of other equipments.
Fig. 4.1.3-1 Equipotential terminal
(3) Checking power capacity

Check if the power outlet and power wiring connected with
it have a capacity of 1.2kVA or more
Also, if using this equipment and the other device at the
same time with the same power outlet used together, power
wiring capacity may be exceeded. It is recommended to
connect this equipment with an independent power outlet.
4-3 Q1E-EA0611
4.2 Starting the Equipment
4.2.1 Power ON
After turning ON the breaker
switch at the side of equipment,
turn ON the ON/STANDBY switch at ON/STANDBY
switch
the upper left of control panel.
This turns on the power lamps of Breaker
control panel and TV monitor and switch
starts setup of the equipment.
Fig. 4.2.1-1 Location of Switches
1) ON/OFF of the ON/STANDBY switch

Do not perform ON/OFF operation while the unit is on the
way of starting/ finishing operation. The equipment may
be damaged.
2) When the equipment does not start
When all of the lamps of control panel and TV monitor doe
not light and the fan does not rotate even if turning ON
the ON/STANDBY switch, check the power cord and breaker
switch.
If the power cord is normally connected and the breaker
switch is ON, turn OFF the breaker switch and have a contact
with the service personnel.
3) Breaker switch
Normally use the equipment while setting the switch to
ON ( ).
Do not put it OFF except such emergent cases as the unit
makes fire or smoke, generates stink, or any abnormality
occurs in the unit.
The starting time is about 2 minutes.

(The starting time varies by system setting and
configuration.)
4-4 Q1E-EA0611
4.2.2 Releasing Freeze
If the equipment started normally, it is necessarily in the
B-mode stationary image state (Freeze ON)
When using the equipment, press the key to release Freeze.

FREEZE
4.2.3 Adjusting brightness of the monitor

Use the BRIGHT and CONTRAST knobs at the bottom of TV monitor
to adjust brightness of TV monitor.
Fig. 4.2.3-1 Adjusting Brightness of the Monitor
4-5 Q1E-EA0611
4.2.4 Selecting a probe and application
When a probe key is pressed, a dialogue for switching over
the probe is displayed.
Default application menu

Connected probe menu Application menu
Fig. 4.2.4-1 Probe Selection Menu

In the dialogue three menus are shown.
(1) Connected probe menu
Item numbers from 1 to 3 in the probe menu correspond to
the probe connector numbers from probe 1 to 3 respectively.
Item number 4 functions when a single element probe for
CW mode is connected to that connector.
The probe of which button is in the pressed status is
selected currently.
4-6 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Default application menu
In the scanner it is possible to assign the best suited
application setting to every probe.
In this menu the application setting frequently used is
registered.
(3) Application menu
You can register applications in this equipment for each

probe.
You can register up to 10 user-defined applications.
Font color of each application shows the meaning as
mentioned below.
Blue letters mean that application is assigned to the
default application.
Bold letters mean the application being selected now.
Other letters mean selectable applications.
There are two procedures for switching over the probe.

Procedure 1:
1) Move the cursor to the default application switch of the
probe intended for selection, then click (Enter) key.
→ The application is switched over and the probe is
selected.
Procedure 2:
1) Move the cursor to the item in the probe menu, click (Enter)
key. → The display is changed to show the status of button
pressed.
2) In the next move the cursor to intending application in
the application menu, then click (Enter) key.
→ The application is changed and the probe is selected.
In case only the application is to be changed, perform either

the above procedure 1) or 2) of the procedure 2 directly.
4-7 Q1E-EA0611
4.3 Setting Auto Freeze Function
The auto freeze function automatically
freezes the image when no panel
operation is performed for more than
10 minutes with freeze released.
To prevent the equipment and probe from
degradation, it is ON when started.
Use the equipment with the auto

freeze function set to ON unless
necessary. If using the equipment Fig. 4.3-1 Setting Auto Freeze
for a long time with it OFF or
leaving it while doing nothing,
temperature on the surface of probe
lens increases and it may cause low
temperature burn.
[To set the auto freeze function to OFF]

(1) Press the key to display the main menu.
(2) Select the Setup item.
(3) Set the check box of Auto Freeze item to Off.
[To set the auto freeze function to ON]

! Turn the ON/STANDBY switch to OFF, wait for 10 seconds and turn
the power ON again.
! Or, set the check box of Auto Freeze item above to On.
4-8 Q1E-EA0611
4.4 Patient
When operator press the Patient key, Patient menu dialog is
displayed .In that sitiation, if selecting the NEW PATIENT,
the scanner is going to the following state.
! Initializing of patient information
! Initializing of measurement report data
! Automatic execution of APPLICATION
! Automatic execution of measurement report recording
4-9 Q1E-EA0611
4.4.1 Entry of Standard ID (Entry of Standard Menu)
When Patient key is pressed, a dialogue for entering Patient
Menu is displayed. Following to the operating method shown
on each of below mentioned items from (1) to (17) enter or
change data. When entering or changing all the data is finished,
confirm the contents, then click button.
In case NEW Patient is selected in the entry an automatic
execution of Application and an initialization of patient
information are performed.
When it is needed to change contents of new data or contents
of modification of existing data on the way of the entry, click
button.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5)
(10) (6)
(11) (7)
(12)
(8)
(13)
(9)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
Fig. 4.4.1-1 Patient Menu(Standard Menu)
4-10 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Selection of New data entry or modification of existing
data
Select the entry is either for new patient information
or for modification of existing information.
(2) Selection of Standard Menu entry or OB Menu entry
Select the entry is either for Standard Patient information
(Standard) or for Obstetric Patient information
(Obstetric).
According to this selection items for the entry after that
are to be different.
Fig. 4.4.1-1 shows the entry of Standard Patient
information.
(3) Enter [ID]
Enter patient ID from the keyboard.
Number of characters for entry is about 15 as a standard.
Please do not to use "," or "=" or "." for entry.
(4) Enter [Last Name]
Enter last name of patient from the keyboard.
If the first name of patient is also entered, the total
number of characters for entry is limited to about 26
characters.
(5) Enter [First Name]
Enter first name of patient from the keyboard.
If the last name of patient is also entered, the total
characters.
(6) Select [Sex]
Press "▼" to select "M" (Male) , "F" (Female) or "O" (Other)
from the list displayed.
(7) Enter [Height]
(a) Enter numeric value
Enter body height using numeric of the keyboard.
Number of characters is 3.
4-11 Q1E-EA0611
(b) Select unit
Press "▼" to select "cm" or "in" from the list displayed.
(8) Enter [Weight]
(a) Enter numeric value
Use numeric keys and "." to enter body weight value.
Number of characters is 4.
(b) Select unit
Press "▼" to select "kg", "g" or "lbs" (pound) from the
list displayed.
(9) Display [BSA]
[BSA] value is automatically calculated from [Height] and
[Weight].
Select ON/OFF of "□" (Check box) for display or
non-display.
(10) Enter [Birth Date]
Enter birth date as follows:
(a) Enter [Year](YYYY)
Enter a value (Christian Era) of four digits using
the numeric keys of keyboard.
(b) Enter [Month](MM)
Enter a value of "1" ~ "12" using the numeric keys
of keyboard.
(c) Enter [Day](dd)
Enter a value of "1" ~ "31" using the numeric keys
of keyboard.
(d) Check [Age]
(i) Check value
Age is automatically calculated and displayed in
the order of [Year], [Month] and [Day].
(ii) Correct unit
Press "▼" to select "yr."(year), "mo."(month),
"wk."(week) or "day" from the list displayed.
After selection, age is automatically recalculated
and displayed as (i).
4-12 Q1E-EA0611
(11) Enter [Clinical History]
Enter clinical history from the keyboard.
characters.
(12) Enter [Ordering Physician]
Enter the name of physician from the keyboard.
Maximum number of characters for entry is 15 in numeric
characters. This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(13) Enter [Sonographer]
Enter the name of examination technologist from the
keyboard.
(14) Enter [Purpose of U/S]
Enter purpose of clinical examination from the keyboard.
(15) Entry of keyword
This is to enter Keyword for easy retrieval of Measuring
report or Image filing. This item can have 10 histories.
(Maximum)
(16) Enter ACCESSION# from the keyboard if necessary.
(This can be set when the optionally available Network
Interface EZU-Pi6 and DICOM Transfer Software EZU-FC7 are
incorporated.)
(17) Enter EXAM.TYP(examination type) from the keyboard if
necessary.
incorporated.)
(18) Change setting of [US Power]
Turning "□" (Check box) ON suppresses US power.(Refer to
4.7.3)
4-13 Q1E-EA0611
(19) Mobile function
When getting Patient data from a WorkList Server, regular
connection or using by off-line after saving at a hard
disk is switched.
Interface EZU-Pi6, DICOM Transfer Software EZU-FC7 and
DICOM WorkList Software EZU-FC7W are incorporated.)
(20) Setup properties
Set up initial cursor position and input order.
(a) (b)
Fig. 4.4.1-2 Properties

(a) Select initial cursor position
Select initial cursor and focus position at the time when
a dialogue for entering Patient Menu is displayed.
(b) Select input order
Select patient's ID-Name or Name-ID inputting in turn.
4-14 Q1E-EA0611
4.4.2 Entry of OB measurement ID (Entry of Obstetric measurement
menu)
When Patient key is pressed, a dialogue for entering Patient
Menu is displayed. Following to the operating method shown
on each of below mentioned items from (1) to (17) enter or
change data. When entering or changing all the data is finished,
confirm the contents, then click button.
In case NEW Patient is selected in the entry an automatic
execution of Application and an initialization of patient
information are performed.
When it is needed to change contents of new data or modification
of existing data on the way of the entry, click button.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5)
(6) (15)
(7) (16)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12) (17)
(13)
(14)
(18)
(19)
Fig. 4.4.2-1 Patient Menu(Obsteric Menu)
4-15 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Selection of New data entry or modification of existing
data
Select the entry is either for new patient information
or for modification of existing information.
(2) Selection of Standard Menu entry or OB Menu entry
Select the entry is either for Standard Patient information
(Standard)
or for Obstetric Patient information (Obstetric).
According to this selection items for the entry after that
are to be different.
Figure 4.4.2-1 shows the entry of Obstetric measurement
information.
(3) Enter [ID]
Enter patient ID from the keyboard.
(4) Enter [Last Name]
Enter last name of patient from the keyboard.
If the first name of patient is also entered, the total
characters.
(5) Enter [First Name]
Enter first name of patient from the keyboard.
If the last name of patient is also entered, the total
characters.
(6) Enter [Birth Date]
For entry of birth date and age, refer to the standard
ID dialog (4.4.1 (10)).
(7) Enter [Clinical History]
Enter clinical history from the keyboard.
4-16 Q1E-EA0611
characters.
(8) Enter [Ordering Physician]
Enter the name of physician from the keyboard.
(9) Enter [Sonographer]
Enter the name of examination technologist from the
keyboard.
characters.
This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(10) Enter [Purpose of U/S]

Enter purpose of clinical examination from the keyboard.
(11) Entry of keyword
This is to enter Keyword for easy retrieval of Measuring
report or Image filing.
This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(12) Enter ACCESSION# from the keyboard if necessary.
(This can be set when the optionally available work
incorporated.)
(13) Enter EXAM.TYP(examination type) from the keyboard if
necessary.
incorporated.)
(14) Change setting of [US Power]
Turning "□" (Check box) ON suppresses US power.(Refer
to 4.7.3)
(15) Enter [LMP]
4-17 Q1E-EA0611
Entry of the last menstrual period is shown below:
(a) Enter [Year]
Enter a value of four digits (Christian Era) from the
keyboard.
(b) Enter[Month]
Enter a figure of "1" ~ "12" from the keyboard.
(c) Enter [Day]
Enter a figure of "1" ~ "31" from the keyboard.
(16) Enter [DGA]
(a) Select a method to calculate gestational age
Select a method for calculation from [LMP], [EDC] and
[FIRST DGA].
Difference of calculation methods is shown in the table
below:
Table 4.5.2-1 Selection of Method to Calculate Gestational Age
Today's
LMP EDC FIRST DGA
DGA
Date of the 1st
Date Date of LMP Date of EDC or past —
examination
Gestational
Today's
Week — — age at that
DGA
date
Date of
Method to Date of Date of
examination +
calculate examination examination Week
Gestational
DGA – Date – Date + Week
period – Date
(b) Enter [Date]

For entry of date, refer to the method to enter [LMP].
(c) Enter [Week]
If selecting [FIRST DGA] in selecting the method for
calculation, gestational age may be entered.
(i) Enter [Week]
Enter a value of week using the numeric keys of keyboard.
Maximum number of characters for entry is 2.
(ii)Enter [Day]
Enter a figure of "0" ~ "6" using the numeric keys of
keyboard.
(17) Enter [Obstetric history]
4-18 Q1E-EA0611
A method to input pregnant history is mentioned below.
(a) The number of pregnancies (GRAV)
(b) The number of births (PARA)
(c) The number of abortions / stillbirths (AB)
Input figures from "0" ~ "99" using numeric keys of keyboard.
(18) Mobile function
When getting Patient data from a WorkList Server, regular
connection or using by off-line after saving at a hard disk
is switched.
(This can be set when the optionally available Network Interface
EZU-Pi6, DICOM Transfer Software EZU-FC7 and DICOM WorkList
Software EZU-FC7W are incorporated.)
(19) Setup properties
Set up initial cursor position and input order.
(a) (b)
Fig. 4.5.2-2 Properties

(a) Select initial cursor position
Select initial cursor and focus position at the time when
a dialogue for entering Patient Menu is displayed.
(b) Select input order
Select patient's ID-Name or Name-ID inputting in turn.
4-19 Q1E-EA0611
4.5 Entering Hospital Name
Selecting [Main Menu] → [Setup] →
[Hosp. Name] displays a dialog box for
entering hospital name
Enter the hospital name from the
keyboard.
Number of characters for entry is Fig. 4.5-1 Entering
Hospital Name
about 29 as a standard.
Upon completing all entries and
changes, check contents of entry and
click the button.
If any of entries and changes is to
be canceled, click the
button.
4.6 Changing Time

Selecting [Main Menu] → [Setup] →
[System] → [Date/Time] then submenu
[Set Date/Time] displays a dialog for
entering time.
(Refer to 7.9(2))
Fig. 4.6-1 Changing Time
4.7 Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output

Generally the ultrasound scanner said to be "harmless and
non-invasive"; however, it is not "perfectly harmless" so long as
irradiating ultrasound vibration to human body.
It is strongly recommended to operate the equipment with the US power
as low as possible.
4-20 Q1E-EA0611
4.7.1 Acoustic output level
The ULTRASOUND POWER control allows choice among three
different levels.
The selected output level is indicated on the screen.
l) "PWR : H" : High

2) "PWR : M" : Medium
3) "PWR : L" : Low
Fig. 4.7.1-1 Where the Level Displayed
1) The derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity level

in all settings is less than 720mW/cm2.
2) The Mechanical Index in all settings is less than l.9.
3) The Thermal Index in all settings is less than 6.0.
4-21 Q1E-EA0611
4.7.2 Acoustic output indices
This scanner complies with the "Standard for Real-Time Display of
Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic
Equipment".
When operating in any mode with the FREEZE function disabled (FREEZE
OFF), the screen displays the acoustic output indices relevant to
the probe and operating mode currently active.
As described in this Instruction Manual, minimizing the real-time
displayed index values allows the practice of the ALARA principle:
exposure of the patient to ultrasound energy at a level that is
As Low As Reasonably Achievable.
(1) General description of indices

For a detailed explanation of the clinical significance proper
use of the Real-Time Acoustic Indices displayed on this scanner,
the operator should consult relevant literature and educational
materials available from industry and professional
organizations concerned with medical ultrasound.
To allow the operator to understand how adjustment of the controls
may affect the index displays during an exam, the following
discussion provides a brief overview of the implementation of
the index displays.
In general, each index is described in terms of the following

factors.
- Potential bioeffect of concern: "mechanical" (cavitation or

other non-thermal mechanical effects), or "thermal" (heating
of tissue through absorption of the ultrasound energy);
for all indices, an index value of less than 1.0 is indicates
relatively low risk for harm to the patient when the index
is applied properly.
- Type of operating mode: mechanical effects are generally of

concern during "B-mode only" operation, thermal effects are
of concern during operation of any "non-B-mode" operation;
thermal effects are calculated separately for "non scanned
modes" (M-and PW modes) and "scanned modes" (B- and
CFM-modes ) ;
- Type of and location of tissue of concern: "bone" or "soft

tissue", located either at the tissue "surface" nearest the
probe, or at or near the beam "focus"
- Measured acoustic parameters (ultrasound "power", time

average "intensity", or instantaneous peak "pressure") used
in calculating the index value; in all calculations an
attenuation (or "derating") rate of O.3 dB/cm/MHz is assumed
4-22 Q1E-EA0611
MI: the Mechanical Index
The following discussion provides general background

information regarding the index.
- Potential bioeffect: any possible "mechanical" or non-thermal

mechanisms - although the likelihood of adverse consequences
from these causes is not well understood, such risk may be
highest in the presence of gas-saturated structures such as
lung tissue ;
- Mode type: calculated for "B-mode only" operation;
- Tissue type and location: "soft tissue" at "all locations"

in the scan field;
- Acoustic parameter: maximum negative

(rarefactional) ultrasound, ”pressure" at focus.
TIS:the Soft Tissue Thermal Index
Of interest in the absence of bone either at the tissue surface

or near the beam focus, applications of clinical interest include
general abdominal examination, first-trimester scanning before
fetal bone has ossified, and cardiology.
TIS has the following characteristics.
- Potential bioeffect: "thermal" heating of soft tissue due

to absorption of ultrasound; the TIS value is the ratio of
the current probe power to reference level that would cause
a 1 °
C temperature rise in soft tissue;
- Mode type: relevant for all "non B mode only" modes, in both
"scanned" and "non-scanned" modes.
- Tissue type and locations in scanned modes "soft tissue"

at the "surface" is of concern; in non scanned modes, heating
of soft tissue along the beam axis between the surface and
"focus" is considered.
- Acoustic parameters * : for each scanned mode, the associated

"intensity" at the surface is usually related to surface
tissue heating; for each unscanned mode, the maximum derated
"power" through a 1 cm2 area anywhere along the beam axis
is the basis for estimating tissue heating: unscanned beams
less than lcm2 in area at the surface are assumed to contribute
only to surface heating f and the calculated effects are
combined with those of scanned modes to estimate total
soft-tissue heating at the surface; unscanned beams larger
than 1 cm2 at the surface are assumed to heat tissue only
near the focus: total heating effects at the surface and
focus are compiled separately, and the larger value is
4-23 Q1E-EA0611
reported as TIS.
* The discussion provided here provides a few summary rules

relating TIS to the measured acoustic parameters.
Explanation of the rationale and implementation of all Thermal
Index models is found in Appendix A (Summary of Thermal Index
Formulae) in the “Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal
and mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on diagnostic
Ultrasound Equipment (1998)”, available from the American
Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM).
TIB: the Bone Tissue Thermal Index

The thermal index of concern when bone is near the beam focus,
applications of clinical interest include second- and
third-trimester Doppler (when the beam focus is near fetal bone),
and Neonatal Cephalic Doppler (when the beam focus is near
cranial bone). TIB has the following characteristics.
- Potential bioeffect: “thermal” heating of bone (and indirect

heating of adjacent soft tissue) due to absorption of
ultrasound at the bone surface; the TIB value indicates the
ratio of the current power level from the probe to the
reference power level that would cause a 1ﾟC steady-state
temperature rise in bone located at the beam focus;
- Mode type: calculated for all "non-B-mode only” operation,

in both "scanned" and "non-scanned" modes.
- Tissue type and location: in scanned modes, the model for

soft tissue at the surface is also used to calculate the
maximum possible heating of "bone" at the beam "focus"; for
non-scanned modes, possible heating of bone near the beam
focus is considered directly.
- Acoustic parameters: for scanned modes, the time-average

"intensity" at the probe surface is closely related to
estimated heating effects; for unscanned modes, the maximum
product along the beam axis of both derated “power” and
"intensity" is the basis for calculating possible bone
heating: total heating effects for scanned and unscanned modes
are compiled separately, and the larger value is reported
as TIB.
TIC: the Cranial (Bone) Thermal Index
The Thermal Index of concern when bone is near the tissue surface
and in close proximity to the probe aperture, clinical applications
of interest are specific to those involving transcranial scanning.
The following information is provided regarding the Cranial
Thermal Index in general:
- Potential bioeffect: "thermal" heating of the cranial bone

(with indirect heating of adjacent brain tissue) due to
4-24 Q1E-EA0611
absorption of ultrasound in the cranial bone; TIC is defined
as the ratio of the current probe power level to the reference
power level that would cause a 1ﾟC steady-state temperature
rise in cranial bone located at the probe surface;
- Mode type: calculated for all "non B mode only" operation,

in both "scanned" and "non-scanned" modes.
- Tissue type and location: cranial "bone", located near the

tissue "surface" and near the probe aperture.
- Acoustic parameter: for each active mode, the product of

estimated "power" and "Intensity", at the probe surface, is
the basis for calculating cranial bone heating: the heating
effects of all modes are combined to calculate the TIC.
(2) Relevant acoustic output indices for probes and operating modes.
When operating in any mode with the FREEZE function disabled (FREEZE
OFF), the screen displays the indices relevant to the active probe
and operating mode. The definition of relevant indices is as
follows.
Table.4.7.2-1 Acoustic output indices

for probes and operating modes
Mode-type Allowed
Relevant
Currently Applications for
Indices
Active Probe
B-mode only Any MI
Any mode Include neither

other than Adult Cephalic nor TIS,TIB
B-mode only Neonatal Cephalic
Any mode Include either

other than Adult Cephalic or TIS, TIB, TIC
B-mode only Neonatal Cephalic
(3) Format of acoustic index display in B-mode-only operat ion.

Pressing [B] with the FREEZE key switch off displays the B-mode
image format, including a label for MI, the Mechanical Index.
As is the case for all conditions with this scanner in which the
maximum value of a relevant acoustic for a certain probe is less
than 1.0, the B-mode image display will always show the label
for the Mechanical Index in standard video, with no value is
displayed to indicate the current MI value.
__ _____
B-mode operation under such conditions for certain probes is

considered to be without significant risk due to non-linear
4-25 Q1E-EA0611
acoustic effects. However, in consideration of the general
principle of ALARA, the ULTRASOUND POWER control should generally
be operated in the lowest setting that yields the desired image
quality.
The reverse-video display of the MI label indicates that the probe

in use may in some cases be set to a conrol states where the MI
may exeed 1.0.
MI 1.2
(4) Format of acoustic index display for modes besides B-mode-only,

and with Probes Not Intended for Transcranial Use
When any mode other than B-mode is active, for probes not intended
for transcranial use, the relevant indices are TIS (Soft Tissue)
and TIB (Bone).
The default displayed index is TIS. Another index TIB is selectable
by setting in Main Menu.
For such probes, the most common Thermal Index display is as
follows.
TIS
When the displayed index is shown in standard video, no control
settings for the active probe that will allow the index displayed
to exceed a value of 1.0.
In case of both indices, TIS and TIB, are shown in standard video,
operation in the intended clinical applications is considered
without significant risk due to heating of tissues by ultrasound
energy. No real-time TI values need be monitored and the probe
may be used without concern for minimizing the displayed value
of any TI. However, in consideration of the general principle
of ALARA, the US POWER control should generally be operated in
the lowest setting that yields the desired quality of image.
Certain other probes with this scanner will display the Thermal
Index format of the following type.
TIS 0.8
The reverse video display indicates that the probe in use may
in some cases be set to a control state where the displayed index
may exceed 1.0.
(5) Format of acoustic index display for modes besides B-mode-only,

with probes including transcranial use
Certain probes used with this scanner are intended for clinical
application that may include transcranial examination (such as
Neonatal Cephalic use and Adult Cephalic use).
For these probes, the relevant indices are TIS, TIB and TIC (Cranial
Bone).
4-26 Q1E-EA0611
The default displayed index is TIS. Other indices, TIB or TIC,
are selectable by setting in Main Menu.
(6) Control of acoustic index parameters

For any probe used with this scanner in which all relevant acoustic
indices are displayed in standard video (without an associated
real-time value), operation in the intended clinical applications
of the active probe is considered normally without significant
risk due to heating of tissues by ultrasound energy. No real-time
TI values need be monitored and the probe may be used without
concern for minimizing the displayed value of any TI. However,
in consideration of the general principle of ALARA, the ULTRASOUND
POWER control should generally be operated in the lowest setting
that yields the desired quality of image. For any probe in which
one or more relevant indices are displayed in reverse-video,
then for some control settings with this probe, an index value
may exceed a value of 1.0. For these indices, the real-time values
are displayed to allow monitoring and control. The displayed
values (shown in reverse video along with the corresponding
labels) may take on the following values (where "x" indicates
the actual calculated index value).
Table 4.7.2-2 Display Range of Calculated Value

For TI,
Range of Calculated Value Displayed Value
x < 0.4 < 0.4
0.4 ≦ x < 0.5 0.4
0.5 ≦ x < 0.7 0.6
0.7 ≦ x < 0.9 0.8
0.9 ≦ x < 1.5 1.0
1.5 ≦ x < 2.5 2.0
etc. etc.
For MI,
Range of Calculated Value Displayed Value
x < 0.4 < 0.4
0.4 ≦ x < 0.5 0.4
0.5 ≦ x < 0.7 0.6
0.7 ≦ x < 0.9 0.8
0.9 ≦ x < 1.1 1.0
1.1 ≦ x < 1.3 1.2
1.3 ≦ x < 1.5 1.4
1.5 ≦ x < 1.7 1.6
1.7 ≦ x < 1.9 1.8
In all operating modes with this scanner, direct control of

acoustic exposure is available by using the ULTRASOUND POWER
switch. Changing the output level between the High(H), Medium(M),
and Low(L) levels permits adjustment of the ultrasound transmit
level while leaving all other image parameters unchanged and
is the preferred method of controlling Thermal Index values.
4-27 Q1E-EA0611
Note that for all probe/mode combinations possible with this
scanner.
The values for all relevant acoustic indices are less than 1.0
in the Low(L) ULTRASOUND POWER level.
For description of the indirect effects that certain other control
adjustments may have on displayed index values, consult the
sections of this Instruction Manual that describe operation of
the particular operating modes.
4-28 Q1E-EA0611
4.7.3 ULTRASOUND POWER Control
(1) Procedure to change ultrasound power by toggle

US POWER
switch.
The procedure to change the ultrasound power by the
US POWER
toggle switch differs depending on the specified

diagnostic application.
(a) In case the set diagnostic application is fetal use in

Obstetric Measurement ID input, in the case that the
higher ultrasound power setting is desired, do the
following procedure.
Operate the toggle switch to upward and then the window

US POWER
shown in Fig. 4.7.2-1 is displayed.

Use the trackball to move the cursor to the "Yes" button.
Press "ENTER".
Then, the ultrasound power level may be increased by one stage.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to the "No" button.
Press "ENTER".
The ultrasound power level is kept current stage.
Fig. 4.7.3-1 US Power Message Window
(b) In case the set diagnostic application is not Fetal use.

Operating the US POWER toggle switch immediately changes
over the ultrasound power output level without displaying
the above screen shown in Fig. 4.7.3-1.
4-29 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Default of ULTRASOUND POWER
The scanners to be shipped from the factory are set as
follows :
- The default ULTRASOUND POWER output level for all
applications is "LOW" level.
- The application of the default is "Fetal Use".
NOTICE1): When the unit is restarted after once it was

shutdown, the ultrasound power is returned to the
level set at the time of delivery from the factory.
NOTICE2): Fetal Use on: After inputting patient ID and
pushed OK button, then current power level is changed
Low level of US power value and displaying dialog
of confirmation. Please push OK button.
NOTICE3): Fetal Use off: After inputting patient ID and
pushed OK button, then current power level is setting
US power value.
4-30 Q1E-EA0611
4.8 Ending Use
If pressing the ON/STANDBY Switch at the
front of equipment again, the system
shuts down after executing the system
shut down process.
ON/STANDBY
After confirming the system switch
shuts down, turn off the Breaker
switch
Breaker switch.
Fig. 4.8-1
Position of Power Switch
1) Breaker Switch
Normally use the equipment with this switch ON (|).
Do not press OFF (○) in any case other than an emergency such
that fire, smoke or abnormal smell from the equipment or any
abnormality occurs in the equipment
2) ON/STANDBY Switch
When pressing the ON/STANDBY switch once and then restarting
the system, check if the system shut down process has been
completed and then power ON again.
If turning ON/OFF the switch while starting or shutting down
the system, the system may possibly be damaged.
3) In some cases a system ending action can not be performed as
intended even if you try to shut down the power by pressing
ON/STAND BY switch.
In that case shut off the power by operating a breaker switch.
4-31 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 5 Operation Modes
5.1 Overview
Operation of this equipment can be roughly divided into the
following four sections.
! Keyboard operation Functions to be controlled with switches
on the keyboard panel.
! TRACKBALL PRIORITY Function to switch over the use of
operation trackball.With this, the trackball is
used for various functions.
! Function menu Function to select and control menus
operation displayed at the bottom of monitor
screen.
! MAIN MENU Function to select menus displayed at
operation the left side of monitor screen.Its
major functions are adjustment of entire
system, adjustment items of lower
frequency, selection to allow
professional functions to be displayed.
5.1.1 Keyboard operation

Operates switches on the keyboard.
However, keys and switches listed below will be
described in the other subsections or sections
- TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch (Refer to 5.1.2)
- Function menu key group and function toggle switch
group (Refer to 5.1.3)
- MAIN MENU keys (Refer to 5.1.4)
- Measurement key group: CALIP, TRACE, MEAS MENU, REPORT
and ERASE MENU (Refer to 11.2)
- Image memory keys: READ, S-WRITE and M-WRITE (Refer to
9.2)
- Recording related keys: PRINT, and VCR/ORIG (Refer to
Chapter 10)
- Character input keyboard: PATIENT (Refer to Chapter 4),
ANNOTATION, CHARACTER, CHARACTER CLEAR and Cursors.
(Refer to Chapter 6)
5-1 82 Q1E-EA0611
5.1.2 TRACKBALL PRIORITY
TRACKBALL PRIORITY is a function to switch over
functions that the trackball occupies when multiple
functions are available for the trackball. Clicking the
TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch displayed on the upper
right of screen to the left and right switches over the
functions that the trackball occupies.
The TRACKBALL PRIORITY switches over occupancy by the
trackball on the following functions:
! B (M) image up/down ! Measurement caliper
move
! VCR playback angle
sample point setting
! Image steering ! Probe mark
! Pan zoom ROI setting ! Character input
! M mode beam line ! Image filing function

box cursor
! Doppler mode sample ! Main menu
point ! Measurement menu
! CFM-ROI setting ! Annotation menu etc.
! Image memory playback ! No selection

by frame
! VCR playback by frame
! Image filing function
! Image filing playback box cursor
by frame
Fig. 5.1.2-1 Trackball Priority Marks
5.1.3 Function menu operation

The function menu allows functions used frequently to be
accessed as menu. Contents of menu are displayed at the
bottom of screen, and toggle switches are used to access
to respective function. Also any grayed key such as F3
Biplane key indicates that it is not accessible in the
current setting.
FUNCTION
PREV
NEXT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 5.1.3-1 Correspondence of Menu and Toggle Switch
5-2 Q1E-EA0611
PREV
NEXT
: Scrolls the function menu pages. Clicking the
bottom displays the next page, while clicking
the top displays the previous page.
At the right end of the function menu at the
bottom of screen, marks are displayed to
indicate pages available.
Indicates the previous page is available.
Indicates the next page is available.
Fig.5.1.3-2 Scrolling Symbol
(1) Starting by exclusive key

Selecting the function menu key on the control panel
starts the menu. Also, when the menu is to be removed
from the screen, press that key again.
PHYS IO IMAGE M O DE USER USER

OPTION PROCESS DEPENDED
Fig. 5.1.3-3 Function Menu Key Menu
PHYSIO
: The menu for PHYSIO functions is displayed.
(Refer to 5.8)
OPTION : Displays option functions.
Wide View :
Displays a wide view display function menu
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of the EZU-
WS4.)
: The menu for 3D display function is displayed.

(Refer to the Instruction Manual of the EZU-
3D4/3D2S.)
The following key display any menus corresponding to

each mode when switching over examination modes such as
B-mode, M-mode, etc.
5-3 Q1E-EA0611
IMAGE
PROCESS : Displays the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
Adjust image process functions.
MODE
DEPENDED : Displays the MODE DEPENDED menu.
Select any function frequently used.
The following keys are used to display an entry dialogue

when it is desired to previously enter user defined
functions.
A function can be entered by each key, so that user can
define max. 2 functions.
USER
, USER
: Displays a user defined function menu
dialogue.
(2) Starting by the other exclusive key

PROBE
: Displays a connected probe to select the probe
(Refer to Chapter 4)
: Displays a fine image by receiving a frequency

equivalent to twice the transmitting frequency
(3) Starting by specific key

Starting any specific function displays the function
menu corresponding to the function.
- Character function
- Annotation function
- Measurement function
- VCR playback function
- Image filing continuous image recording function
- Image filing playback function
5-4 Q1E-EA0611
5.1.4 MAIN MENU operation
Menus related to settings and conditions of the
equipment.
If changing setting of these menus, keys to be activated
and function menu to be displayed may be changed.
Press the MAIN

MENU key to display the menu at the left side
of screen.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to any item and
press the ENTER button. The lower level window (Sub-
window) of the relevant item is newly opened.
Fig. 5.1.4-1 Sub-window
i) Item selection 1
Items with "□" at the left in the menu indicates
[currently not selected].
When it is to be selected, move the cursor to "□" and
press the ENTER button.
If selected, it changes to "□" with ("√") entered in
it.
Also the selection is to be canceled, use the same
steps as that for selection to switch to "□" with
nothing in it.
5-5 Q1E-EA0611
ii) Item selection 2
Any item with " ○" indicates

[selecting any one of them].
To select the item, move the
cursor to " ○" and press the
ENTER key.
Also, if newly selecting any
item currently not selected,
the item previously selected
is deselected.
Fig. 5.1.4-2 Date/Time Menu
iii) Non-selectable items
For any item that cannot be selected, "□" or " ○" is

not white but grayed.
iv) ▼ symbol
Any item with "▼" mark at the right indicates that
it has a lower level menu.
Move the cursor to an item with "▼" and press the
ENTER key. The new menu opens overlaid on the
current menu.
v) Input
For any items to which a character string or figure
are to be entered, an input menu opens at the center
of screen to allow characters to be entered.
After entering characters, press the ENTER key to
close the menu.
5-6 Q1E-EA0611
vi) End of MAIN Menu
Press the MAIN

MENU key again to close the menu and return
to the original menu. All menus close.
Or, move the cursor to

the "×" mark at the upper
right corner and press
the ENTER key to close
the menu screen.
Only Setup
If pressing "×" of the closes.
MAIN MENU, all menus are

closed.
Fig. 5.1.4-3 End of MAIN Menu
5-7 Q1E-EA0611
5.2 B mode
5.2.1 Display of B mode
If pressing the button at the center of with Freeze

OFF, a M-mode image is displayed.
The CFM mode is released if pressing the knob center
button when selecting the CFM mode in this state.
Mechanical Index
Hospital name Ultrasound power Right/Left orientation
Patient name Patient ID Date Trackball priority
HITACHI Logo
Frame rate Time
Moving value of in
axial direction
Measurement menu Image display area

and Measurement marker
Result Frame
Gray scale
Body mark
Display area for

Post-process
value
B-mode gain Function menu

PROBE name
Gray Map Depth/MAG
Transmission Persist Application name
wave frequency Reception dynamic filter
B-mode AGC
B-mode enhancement in lateral direction
B-mode enhancement in axial direction
B-mode dynamic range
Fig. 5.2.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B-Mode
5.2.2 Gain adjustment

(1) Adjusting brightness of whole image
Use the periphery of B gain
knob to adjust gain of B-
mode image as a whole. Dark
Turning to the right makes
the whole image brighter, Bright
and turning to the left
makes the whole image darker.
Fig. 5.2.2-1 B GAIN
5-8 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Adjusting sensitivity (brightness) at specific depth
<Common to all modes>
Shallow area
DEPTH GAIN
Use DEPTH GAIN CONTROL to

adjust gain for each depth.
Dark Bright
Sliding to the right makes
an area of specific depth
brighter, and sliding to
the left makes it darker.
Deep area
Fig. 5.2.2-2 DEPTH GAIN

5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus
<Common to all modes> Focus position
The focus point can be switched

over among 8 steps. Click the Shallow
toggle switch upward to make

the focus shallower, while
downward to make it deeper. FOCUS
Deep
Fig. 5.2.3-1 Focus Depth

5.2.4 Switching over electronic focus steps
Selecting the number of focal
zone
The stage of focus may be Increasing

switched over from 1 to 4. number of stages
As the stage of focus increases,

an image focused in a wide
range may be displayed F-STEPS
Decreasing
number of stages
Fig. 5.2.4-1 Selecting the number

of focal zone
5-9 Q1E-EA0611
5.2.5 Switching over transmit frequency
US transmit frequency can be switched in 5 steps. Select
lower frequency side to obtain image of better
penetration (depth sensitivity), while higher frequency
side to obtain images of better distance resolution.
Table 5.2.5-1 Transmit Frequency (B mode)
Probe frequency(Labeled Frequency)
3.5MHz 5.0MHz 6.5MHz 7.5MHz
(4-2) (5-2) (7-3) (8-4) (10-5) (13-6)
T-frequency 4.0 5.0 7.5 7.5 10.0 13.0
UP
REF FREQ
DOWN 2.0 2.5 3.5 5.0 5.0 6.5

NOTICE: All probe do not have 5 step frequncy.
5.2.6 Moving display position

(1) Switching display depth
Clicking the toggle switch upward makes display depth
wider, while clicking down makes it deeper.
NOTICE: Range of display depth varies depending on
the probe. It has been set in a range of min
20mm ~ max 240mm according to use of the
probe.
Larger display depth
DEPTH / MAG
Smaller display depth
Fig. 5.2.6-1 Display Depth
5-10 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Steering an image
Use to select at the upper right of screen

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
and move the trackball to the left and right to move

the image displayed to the left and right in a range
of max display angle of the probe being selected or
in a range of max display width.
And press the UNDO key, the steering position is
returned to the center position.
Fig. 5.2.6-2 Steering Image
(3) Moving FOV (Field Of View) in depth direction
Use to select at the right of screen and move

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
the display start position of B-mode image with the

trackball.
Also, travel is displayed at the upper right of the
image.
And press the UNDO key, the travel is returned to 0mm.
Deep
Track ball
Shallow
Fig. 5.2.6-3 Moving FOV in Depth Direction
5-11 Q1E-EA0611
5.2.7 Pan zooming function
Magnifies any region in the B, B/M, B/PW and B/CW-mode.
This operation differs from that in the CFM-mode.
ZOOM
(1) Pressing ZOOM displays a
rectangular frame indicating a ZOOM
region of interest (ROI) on

the image.
(2) When the trackball is not set

for moving ROI, use the
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
toggle switch to select ZOOM

at the upper right of screen.
Use the trackball to move ROI
to any intended region.
(3) Clicking the toggle DEPTH / MAG

DEPTH / MAG
switch downward enlarges the

ROI, while clicking upward
ENTER
contracts the ROI.
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
(4) Press the ENTER key to display

the region surrounded by ROI
enlarged.
Use the trackball to move ROI
up/down or to the left/right,
ZOOM
or use the toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
to change magnification factor.
(5) Pressing ZOOM key again ends

the Pan Zoom function.
Fig. 5.2.7-1 Black/white Pan Zoom
5-12 Q1E-EA0611
5.2.8 Twin screen display of B mode images
MULTI
Pressing the SINGLE

button Live
MULTI
SINGLE
Live Freeze
switches the screen to B-mode
dual screen display one of
L(U)
which displays real time

image (Live) and the other Live Freeze Freeze Live
displays still image (Freeze). R(D)
L(U) R(D)
At this time, the L(U)
buttons select an image to be Live Live

a real time image. R(D)
MULTI
Pressing the SINGLE

button Fig. 5.2.8-1
again switches the screen to Dual Screen Display
L(U) R(D)
single screen display, and the buttons select
an image to be displayed.
5.2.9 dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Image)
Receives signals in double
frequency against transmit
frequency to display a high
contrast image. dTHI-R: Resolution mode
Especially it is effective
dTHI-G: Generic mode
for a difficult patient.
REF FREQ
To select dTHI mode, press

dTHI-P: Penetration mode
dTHI button . The type
Fig. 5.2.9-1 Advanced dTHI
of dTHI mode is displayed in
the transmission wave frequency display area at the
lower of the screen. (Refer to Fig.5.2.1-1)
You can select dTHI in 3 steps.You can set to select it
automatically when selecting any probe in the
application menu.
(Refer to Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function.)
5-13 Q1E-EA0611
1)This function is effective only for some sort of
probes. When selecting any probe not applicable, dTHI
button is switched off.
2)To select the transmission wave frequency in the

fundamental imaging mode, switch off dTHI button .
5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu

Pressing MODE
DEPENDED switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu. Also, when
selecting B mode, this mode is automatically selected.
(1) FREEZE OFF
1st page
2nd page
(2) FREEZE ON
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.2.10-1 MODE DEPENDED Menu
[FREEZE OFF]
- 1st page -
F3 Biplane display
Simultaneous real time display of dual sections is
realized by using the biplane probe or two probes with the
same name.
Indication of center position

(White arrow)
Longitudinal
Transverse
Fig. 5.2.10-2 Biplane Display
5-14 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Probe requirements
To make this function usable, connect either of the
following probes.
! Biplane probe: Convex type probe EUP-CC531
(Connect this probe to the probe
connectors PROBE 1 and 3 or 2 and 3.)
! Probe with the same model name:
2 probes
(Connect these probes to the probe
connectors PROBE 1 and 3 or 2 and 3.)
(2) Operation
If selecting the probe listed in (1) and clicking the
F3 toggle on the 2nd page with Freeze OFF, the dual
B-mode screen appears and ready for simultaneous real
time display.
If clicking the same toggle again, the simultaneous
real time display ends and the single screen viewed
before selecting the simultaneous real time display
is restored.
Also, if pressing the probe selection menu key during
the simultaneous real time display, it ends and
single screen of the image of the probe corresponding
to the key selected is displayed.
(3) Image display
On the screen, the identification mark of T:
Transverse or L: Longitudinal is displayed.
Also, as shown in Fig. 5.2.10-2, an arrow mark
indicating intersection is displayed on the tomogram.
5-15 Q1E-EA0611
F4 Horizontal reversal of image<Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image to be
revered horizontally.
Horizontal
reversal
Horizontal
reversal
Fig. 5.2.10-3
Horizontal Reversal of Image
F5 Image display angle

In case of the sector and convex
probes, display angle of B-mode
image is switched over in 6 Wider angle
steps.
For the linear probe, display 5
width is switched over in 6

steps. Narrower
angle
Fig. 5.2.10-4
Image Display Angle
F6 Switching line density

Allows number of scan lines of
B-mode image to be switched over. High frame rate
(1) High frame rate mode: 1

Scans in high frame rate. It
is appropriate for viewing a 6
region that moves. Frame rate

is high, but on the other hand,
density of scan lines is kept Low frame rate
low.
Fig. 5.2.10-5
Switching Density of
Scan lines
5-16 Q1E-EA0611
(2) High density mode : 2
Obtains high definition image
with double density of scan
lines. However, frame rate is
kept low.
F7 Dop Cursor display

A Doppler beam is displayed in the B image by checking [□]
Displays Doppler Cursor in the
B image.
If pressing or during
cursor display, M image or

Doppler image of the cursor is
depicted.
Also, when selecting the 7
linear probe, B-mode Oblique

(F4 OBLIQUE of MODE DEPENDED
menu (2nd page)) may be
started, Doppler Cursor can be Doppler sample point
tilted.
Fig. 5.2.10-6 Cursor Display
- 2nd page -
F3 90º rotation of image <Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image to
be rotated by 90º.
• Upward click for left
rotation
3
• Downward click for right

rotation
Fig. 5.2.10-7
90° Rotation of Image
5-17 Q1E-EA0611
F4 Up/down reversal of image <Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image to
be reversed vertically. Vertical
reversal
Vertical
reversal
Fig. 5.2.10-8
Vertical Reversal of Image
F5 Mark move
The body mark can be moved to an optional place by
operating the track ball after selecting a body mark by F5
toggle switch. The body mark can be reset to its original
place by F6 toggle switch
F6 B color function
By utilizing the B-color function,
delicate brightness difference may OFF
be easily recognized.
This turns B-color On/Off.
6
ON
Fig. 5.2.10-9 B-Color

F7 B-color: Selecting colors
In the B-color, color of B/W,
SEPIA, PURPLE, BLUE and RAINBOW
can be selected.
Select each color from "B-color
map selection" (2nd page) of the
function menu in a rotation manner. 7
Color setting can be independently

selected for each of B, M and
Doppler-modes.
Fig. 5.2.10-10
Changing B-Color
5-18 Q1E-EA0611
Color of B-mode is changed in the
B-mode, color of M-mode in M-mode
and color of Doppler-mode in
B/M/PW-mode.
[FREEZE ON]
- 1st page -
F1 REVIEW: Cine memory playback (Displayed only when cine
memory is available)
F2 SPD: Switches over playback speed (Displayed only when
selecting REVIEW)
(Refer to Chapter 9 Image Memory Unit)
F3, ODM: ODM PLAY
F5, F6, F7: Measurement functions assigned in Setup menu.
(Refer to 8.3.8)
- 2nd page -
F3, F4, F5, F6, F7: Same as [FREEZE OFF]
5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu

Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.2.11-1 IMAGE PROCESS Menu
5-19 Q1E-EA0611
- 1st page -
F1 Dynamic range
Controls a tone of image.
It may be switched over in a range of 45dB~80dB in 5dB
step.
45dB: Tone with black/white
clearly separated.
1
80dB: Tone with fine shades of

Fig. 5.2.11-2
gray Dynamic Range
F2 Depth direction enhancement

F3 Horizontal direction enhancement
Selects the grade of image
edge enhancement by combining
depth direction (AXIAL) and 2
horizontal direction (LATERAL).

Each item may be switched over
in 4 steps of 1~4.
1: Edge enhancement Weak
3
4: Edge enhancement Strong

Fig. 5.2.11-3
Depth/Horizontal
Direction Enhancement
5-20 Q1E-EA0611
F4 AGC (Automatic gain control)
Allows an image to be
displayed with its prominent
echo level suppressed for
viewing the region that is apt
to be highly bright. 4
0: AGC OFF
1: AGC level low Fig. 5.2.11-4
Switching AGC
3: AGC level high
F5 Receive dynamic filter

Allows image quality to be
adjusted in 3 seps.
A: High resolution mode
B: Standard mode 5
C: Depth viewing mode

Selected mode is displayed at
the upper center of screen. Fig. 5.2.11-5
Receive Dynamic Filter
F6 Persist
This allows a smooth and soft
image to be obtained.
6
0: PERSIST OFF
1: PERSIST level low
Fig. 5.2.11-6 Persist
7: PERSIST level high
F7 Gray Map
Set an image adjustment. From
among 8 kinds of gray maps
select the map to obtain the 7
image adjustment you like best.
Fig. 5.2.11-7 Gray Map
5-21 Q1E-EA0611
- 2nd page -
F1 Control screen selection
The γ-CURVE menu is provided for
each of B-mode, M-mode, D-mode
and CFM-mode. If the function
menu is not "Control:B", press
to select "B".
1
PREV
NEXT
The γ-CURVE currently set for B-

mode is displayed at the lower
left of screen. γ-curve
Fig. 5.2.11-8
Control Screen Selection
F3 γ-CURVE selection
Allows γ-CURVE to be switched
over.
Also, γ-coefficient (F4) and
Center position (F5) are
displayed depending on the γ-
CURVE selected.
3
Fig. 5.2.11-9
γ-CURVE Selection
5-22 Q1E-EA0611
F4 γ-coefficient
Allows γ-coefficient to be
switched over.
γ=small
It may be changed from 1.0 γ= large
to 4.0 in 0.1 step. 4
It is displayed depending on
the γ-CURVE selected.
γ= large
γ=small
γ=small
γ= large
Fig. 5.2.11-10 γ-coefficient
F5 Center value of S-shape curve

Displayed when the S-shape
curve is selected.
The position of center of S-
shape curve may be switched 5
over in a range of 0~255.
Fig. 5.2.11-11
Position of Center of Curve
F6 Rejection
Adjusts shades of gray to
Output signal
remove lower level echoes.

256 shades
of gray
Switches over in a range of Rejection
0~255. 6
Input signal
Fig. 5.2.11-12 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Output signal
Adjusts shades of gray to

saturate high level echoes
255 shades
to the maximum brightness.

of gray
7
Saturation
Switches over in a range of
1~255.
Input signal
Fig. 5.2.11-13 Saturation
5-23 Q1E-EA0611
5.2.12 B MENU of MAIN MENU
Press the MAIN

MENU key to display
MAIN MENU and select B MENU
if the B-mode has started.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.2.12-1
Starting B MENU
(1) FOCUS
Position : Switches over setting
of focus layout.
Auto : Automatically arranges.
Manual : Use the toggle on

FOCUS
the Keyboard to change

arrangement.
Stand-Off: When using the coupler
for surface probe,
this shifts the focus
point downward for the
coupler.
(Selectable only in
Position-Auto)
Fig. 5.2.12-2
FOCUS MENU
5-24 Q1E-EA0611
(2) View Angle
Switches view angle and view width
of ultrasound image.
NOTICE: The same as F5 ANGLE of

MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-3
View Angle Menu
(3) Scan Dens.

Switches over line density.

MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-4
Scan Dens. Menu
(4) Inv & Rot

Inverts or rotates an ultrasound
image
Invert R/L: Left/Right inversion
Invert U/D: Up/Down inversion
Rotate +90º: Counterclockwise
rotation
Rotate -90º: Clockwise rotation
NOTICE:The same function as F3,F4

of the MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-5
Inv & Rot Menu
5-25 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Dop.Cursor
Checking in □ displays Doppler
Cursor in the B-mode image.

MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.12-6
Scan Dens. Menu
(6) DEPTH GAIN
Display Curve
Fig. 5.2.12-7 Depth Gain Menu
GAIN values : Display values of each DEPTH GAIN.

Display Curve : Displays distribution corresponding
to GAIN value in depth direction at
the right side of screen.
MODE : Fixed) To every selector of Depth
Gain an area of depth is
fixed. Even if a display
depth is changed, the gain
at each depth is not
changed.
5-26 Q1E-EA0611
Variable) To every selector of Depth
Gain a fixed area of depth
is allocated by dividing
equally the entire depth of
image. When the display
depth is changed,
accordingly the gain of
each depth is changed.
(7) Steering Mark

This is the steering mark that is displayed at the
lower right of the window and indicates the relation
between the display on the screen and scan region.
This is displayed only when a probe having a wide
view such as EUP-V53W is connected.
Steering Mark
Fig. 5.2.12-8 Steer.Mark Menu
5-27 Q1E-EA0611
(8) Combine
This is the function to Dual image display
combine two images displayed
on the dual image display
mode to produce an image
combined at the center of the
screen.
Displayed Displayed
image A image B
Unless scan conditions such
as probe type, focus, display
depth, up-down shifted
distance and orientation are
same, Combine function cannot
be selected. Scan two images
with the same parameters. Combined image display
Fig. 5.2.12-9
Cautions in the application
1) When you want to perform measurements like a
distance and so on crossing over the border of two
images, depict and synthesize two images so that
there is no discrepancy between Right side image
and Left side image of ROI at the border line as
shown in Fig. 5.2.12-10.
In synthesizing the image in Combine mode two

images are met visually, so keep in mind that, for
this reason, an error may be caused in the result
of measurement.
L side R side
ROI
Fig. 5.2.12-10
5-28 Q1E-EA0611
2) In order to meet lines of ROI at the border of two
images operate the system under below mentioned
conditions.
! When the system is set to Combine mode, select a
depth display in which there is no gap between two
image. In the case as shown in Fig. 5.2.12-11 it
is impossible to get a correct result of
measurement.
Fig. 5.2.12-11
In Combine mode, select the depth display with

which ineffective display is not produced between
the two images. In the case shown in Fig. 5.2.12-
12, a correct measurement result cannot be obtained.
Ineffective
display area
Fig. 5.2.12-12
5-29 Q1E-EA0611
(9) Biplane
This function can be selected when biplane operation
is enabled.
Checking in □ displays the Biplane display screen.
(Refer to F3 of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page)).
(10) PDC (Patient Dependent Compensation)

Acoustic parameters of fat,
muscle, organs are different
in every examinee. With PDC
function it is possible to
change acoustic parameter
setting of the equipment in
order to obtain optimum
images.
Fig. 5.2.12-13 PDC
(11) Thermal Index

Switch over Thermal Index
display.
TIS : Thermal Index Soft
TIB : Thermal Index Born
TIC : Thermal Index Cranial
Fig. 5.2.12-14
Thermal Index Menu
5-30 Q1E-EA0611
5.2.13 Using ALARA in B-mode
Pressing [B] with the FREEZE key switch off will display
the B-mode image format, including a label for MI, the
Mechanical Index.
(See Section 5.3.1 for the B-mode image format, and
refer to Section 4.7 for a discussion of the possible
bioeffects significance of MI.)
As is the case for all conditions with this scanner in
which the maximum value of a relevant acoustic for a
particular prove is less than 1.0, the B-, mode image
display will always show the label for the Mechanical
Index is standard video, with no value is displayed to
indicate the current MI value.
__MI_____
The reverse-video display of the MI label indicates that
the probe in use may in some cases be set to a control
states where the MI may exceed 1.0.
MI: 1.0
In consideration of the general principle of ALARA, the
US POWER control should generally be operated in the
lowest setting that yields the desired image quality, IN
addition, the time during which the patient is exposed
to ultrasound energy should be minimized by using the
FREEZE control except when actively acquiring image
information (When the FREEZE function is enabled, all
acoustic index information will be removed from the
screen, but will be restored when the FREEZE function is
disabled).
5-31 Q1E-EA0611
5.3 M-mode
5.3.1 Displaying B/M-mode image
Pressing with B Freeze OFF displays B/M-mode.
M image
Fig. 5.3.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B/M mode
Beam line in this mode is displayed in yellow showing

that it is active. When active, the beam line can be
moved left and right with the trackball.
Also, if switching over the symbol at the upper right
corner of screen with to select any one other than
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
, the beam line changes to blue and inactive.
5.3.2 Adjusting gain (brightness)

Dark
Turn the M gain knob to
adjust overall gain of M-mode
image. Also in the B/M-mode,
DEPTH GAIN CONTROL adjusts
gain of both B and M-mode at
the same time. This allows Bright
gain for each depth to be Fig. 5.3.2-1

adjusted as well (See 5.2.2). Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5-32 Q1E-EA0611
5.3.3 Single screen display of M-mode Image
MULTI
If pressing SINGLE
while displaying a B/M-mode image,
single screen display of M-mode image appears.
MULTI
If pressing SINGLE
again, B/M-mode is displayed.
L(U)
Also, if pressing while displaying M-mode single
screen display, B-mode single screen is displayed, and
R(D)
if pressing again, M-mode single screen is
displayed.
Select
MULTI
L(U) SINGLE
R(D)
MULTI
SINGLE
Select
Fig. 5.3.3-1 SINGLE/MULTI
5.3.4 Moving display position

(1) Switching over display depth of M-mode image
Display depth of M-mode image may be switched over.
Larger display depth
DEPTH / MAG
Smaller display depth
Fig. 5.3.4-1 Switching Display Depth of M-mode
5-33 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Moving a view in depth direction
When M-mode image display depth is smaller than that
of B-mode, the position to start display M-mode image
may be moved within the display depth of
B-mode image if selecting on the upper right of
screen with the toggle switch.
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
And press the UNDO key, the travel is returned to 0mm.
Deep
Shallow
Fig. 5.3.4-2 Moving View in Depth Direction of M-mode
5.3.5 Switching electronic focus

Operation is the same as that of the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus
5.3.6 Freeze of M-mode image B-FREEZE ; OFF
If pressing while
Live Live
displaying the B/M-mode
image, the B-mode image
only can be frozen.
B-FREEZE ; ON
Pressing once again

Freeze
returns to real time Live
image.
Fig. 5.3.6-1 Freeze of M-mode Image
5-34 Q1E-EA0611
5.3.7 Switching over sweep speed
Sweep speed (time for the image Fast
to flow from the right edge to
left edge) can be switched over
in 4 steps of 1.25s~10.0s.
SWEEP
If clicking upward, sweep SPEED
becomes, faster (shorter time)

while clicking downward makes Slow
sweep slower (longer time).
Fig. 5.3.7-1
Scan Speed

MODE
Press DEPENDED to switch the function menu at the bottom of
screen to the MODE DEPENDED.
1st page
2nd page
Also when selecting the B/M mode, this Menu is

automatically selected.
(1st page)
F5 Image display angle (Width)
F6 Scan line density

Operation is the same as that of B-mode.
Refer to F5 Display angle (Width) and F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page).
F7 M blank width
A not displayed area (BLANK AREA) may be provided at
the bottom of M-image to allow ECG waveform and so on
to be easily observed. Also, not displayed area can
be adjusted in 8 steps of 0~7.
NOTICE:This function is not displayed when FREEZE.
5-35 Q1E-EA0611
7
Fig. 5.3.8-2 Blank Width
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
Longitudinal division display B-mode image is
displayed in the upper screen, and M-mode image is
displayed in the lower screen.
Lateral division display B-mode image is displayed in
the left screen and M-mode image is displayed in the
right screen.
F5 Mark move
F6 Selecting B color function
F7 B color
Operation of these functions is the same as that of
the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (2nd page).

IMAGE
Pressing PROCESS changes the function menu at the bottom of
screen to the IMAGE STATUS menu.
1st page
2nd page
5-36 Q1E-EA0611
(1st page)
F1 Dynamic range
F2 Enhancement in depth direction
F3 Enhancement in horizontal direction
F4 AGC (Automatic gain control)
Function to adjust image quality of B-image.
Operation is the same as that of the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu.
F5 Dynamic range
F6 Enhancement
F7 Switching over AGC (Automatic gain control)
Functions to adjust image quality of M-image.
Select any step where the image can be most easily viewed.
Contents of the process are the same as those of B-mode.
5 6 7
Fig.5.3.9-2 Adjusting M-mode Image
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting an image subject to control.
Switches over images subject to
control for which various
functions are applied.
1
Fig. 5.3.9-3 Images Subject to Control
5-37 Q1E-EA0611
F3 Switches over γ-CURVE
F4 Switches over γ-coefficient
F5 Center value of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Operation of these functions is the same as that of
the B-mode.
5.3.10 MENU of MAIN MENU

When MAIN MENU is displayed
MAIN
by the MENU key and M-mode has
started, M MENU can be
selected.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.3.10-1 M MENU
(1) M BLANK
Provides not displayed area at
the bottom of M-image. ECG
waveform and so on can be easily
observed.
Refer to 5.3.8 MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.3 10-2

M BLANK Menu
5-38 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Range Ctrl.
By selecting [B + M], the display
depth of both B and M images can
be controlled at the same time.
By selecting [M], the display
depth of the M image only can be
controlled.
(3) Split
Switches split format of B/M display.
Refer to 5.3.8 MODE DEPENDED menu.
U/D:
Up/down
layout
L/R:
Left/right
layout
Fig. 5.3.10-3 Split Menu
5-39 Q1E-EA0611
5.3.11 Using ALARA in B/M-mode
Pressing [B/M] displays the B/M mode image format,
including labels for the Thermal Indices that are
relevant to the probe in use. (See Section 5.4.1 for
the B/M mode image format, and refer to Section 4.7 for
a discussion of the possible bioeffects significance of
Thermal Indices.)
For the probes not intended for tarnscranial use, the
relevant indices are TIS (Soft Tissue) and TIB (Bone).
The default displayed index is TIS. Another index TIB
is selectable by setting in Main Menu.
For such probes, the most common Thermal Index display
is as follows.
TIS___
When the displayed index is shown in standard video, no
control settings for the active probe that will allow
the index displayed to exceed a value of 1.0.
In case of both indices, TIS and TIB, are shown in-
standard video, operation in the intended clinical
applications is considered without significant risk due
to heating of tissues by ultrasound energy. No real-time
TI values need be monitored and the probe may be used
without concern for minimizing the displayed value of
any TI. However, in consideration of the general
principle of ALARA, the US POWER control should
generally be operated in the lowest setting that yields
the desired quality of image.
Certain other probes with this scanner will display the
Thermal Index format of the following type.
TIS 0.8
The reverse video display indicates that the probe in
use may in some cases be set to a control state where
the displayed index may exceed 1.0.
For the probes including transcranial use, the relevant
indices are TIS, TIB and TIC (Cranial Bone such as
Neonatal Cephalic or Adult Cephalic).
5-40 Q1E-EA0611
The default displayed index is TIS. Other indices, TIB
or TIC, are selectable by setting in Main Menu.
As with all operating modes with this scanner, the most
direct control of acoustic exposure is available by
using the US POWER knob. Changing the output level
between the High (H), Middle (M), and Low (L) levels
permits adjustment of the ultrasound transmit level
while leaving all other system settings unchanged.
Within a given US POWER settings, the following controls
have the strongest indirect effect on the TI readings in
B/M operation. (Nevertheless adjustments should be made
to these controls primarily to optimize B mode image and
Doppler signal quality.)
FOCUS Setting of FOCUS changes the FOCUS depth and

transmit aperture of ultrasound, and affects
the value of TIS TIB and TIC.
US POWER Setting of US POWER changes the ultrasound

power level, and affects the TIS, TIB and
TIC.
FR FR (Frame Rate) is changed by changing the

V-RANGE, VIEW ANGLE, DENSITY and DEPTH, and
affects the TIS, TIB and TIC for the scanned
mode (B).
5-41 Q1E-EA0611
5.4 PW Mode
5.4.1 Display of B/PW-mode
If pressing with B Freeze OFF, the B/PW-mode
appears.
flow velocity
in forward direction
(Approaching toward probe)
Doppler
beam
line Velocity marker
Doppler Angle bar PW image

sampling flow velocity
gate in backward direction
(Leaving from probe)
Incident angle
FFT-γ value
Wall filter
Doppler mode gain
Unit
Doppler mode
Doppler frequency (PRF/REF) Sample width
Fig. 5.4.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B/PW-Mode
Beam line in this case is displayed in yellow showing

that it is active. When active, the beam line can be
moved left and right with the trackball.
Also, if switching over the symbol at the upper right
corner of screen with to select anyone other than
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
, the beam line changes to blue and inactive.
NOTICE: Set the Doppler sampling gate to the center of

blood vessel as accurate as possible. If it is set
to the part of high brightness, noises may
contaminate the image.
5-42 Q1E-EA0611
Darker
Turn the Doppler gain knob to
adjust overall gain of PW-mode
image.
Brighter
Fig. 5.4.2-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5.4.3 Adjusting Doppler angle

Counter-
(1) When the center of angle clockwise
key is pushed, an incident
angle bar is displayed on
Doppler line with an angle
registered in Application.
(Refer to Application Clockwise
function, 8.3.4(2))
(1-a) When the angle key
is pushed under a
condition (1), the
incident angle bar
is displayed with
the Angle at
opposite side across
Doppler beam line.
(1-b) When the angle key
is pushed under the
condition (1-a), the
incident angle bar Fig. 5.4.3-1 Doppler Angle
is erased.
(2) If an angle encoder is rotated, the incident angle
bar rotates. So, it is possible to adjust the
incident angle to blood flow direction.
Simultaneous with the change of tilting angle of
incident angle bar a angle display (compensating
angle) shown in right lower position of Doppler
image is also changed. In case the compensating
angle is set to 0°, the indident angle bar is
erased. As shown in the figure the angle is to the
beam line and it is displayed in the range of
0°~90°.
5-43 Q1E-EA0611
As for the flow velocity, it is large without error when
the angle of the angle bar and the beam line becomes 70
degrees or more.
5.4.4 Various adjustment functions

The same as those of the M-mode (Refer to 5.3.3~5.3.7).
! Single screen display of PW-mode image
! Moving display position
! Switching over electronic focus
! Freezing PW-mode image
! Sweep speed
5.4.5 Switching over reference frequencies (REF FREQ)

Depending on probe frequency, two different reference
frequencies (REF) can be selected.
Table 5.4.5-1 Reference Frequencies
Probe frequency
(4-2) (5-2) (7-3) (8-4) (10-5)
Reference
frequency 2.5MHz 3.5MHz 5MHz 7.5MHz
UP
5MHz
REF FREQ
2MHz 2.5MHz 3.5MHz 5MHz
DOWN
NOTICE:EUP-L54M has 10MHz and 6.5MHz.
5.4.6 Moving base line

Shifts Doppler base line(0ms
PW image
level) up and down to allow any
waveform displayed shifted up
and down to be easily viewed.
The initial position of base BASELINE
line can be set in the
application menu.
(See Chapter 8 APPLICATION
Function.)
Fig. 5.4.6-1
Adjusting BASE LINE
5-44 Q1E-EA0611
5.4.7 Switching over velocity range (PRF)
Allows repetitive frequency (PRF)
to be switched over in a range of
High
1~50kHz. However, allowable range
may differ according to the
V-SCALE
position of sample point.
Low
Click the toggle switch upward to
select higher frequency and make
Fig. 5.4.7-1
max detection speed faster. Repetitive
Click the toggle switch downward to Frequency (PRF)
select lower frequency and enlarge
the Doppler image.
Loud
5.4.8 Adjusting Doppler sound volume
Doppler sound may be switched in
SOUND VOL
silence + 15 steps.
Quiet
Fig. 5.4.8-1
SOUND VOLUME
5.4.9 Oblique function <Exclusive for linear probe>
Doppler of the linear probe, which allows blood flow in
oblique direction to be measured.
Clicking upward swings to the right (+ direction), while
clicking downward swings to the left (- direction).
Single click swings 5° at a time and up to 20° to the
left or right.
+
- +
OBLIQUE
Fig. 5.4.9-1 Oblique Function
5-45 Q1E-EA0611
5.4.10 Switching over sample gate width
Allows sample gate width to
be switched over.
Wider
Can be switched in a range
of 0.5mm (min) ~ 5.0mm in
0.5mm step, while up to 15mm SAMPLE
LENGTH
(max) in 1mm step over the
range above.
Narrower
Fig. 5.4.10-1
Sample Gate

MODE
Pressing DEPENDED switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.
1st page
2nd page
Also when selecting the B/PW-mode, this menu is

5-46 Q1E-EA0611
(1st page)
F1 Selecting B-mode
image Refresh mode
In B/PW mode there are
two modes, a
simultaneous rewrite
mode in which B-mode
image and PW-mode image 1
are simultaneously
displayed in real time
and an interval mode in
which B-mode image is
rewritten at a certain
period of time interval. Fig. 5.4.11-2
In addition when PW key B-image Refresh Mode
is pushed, B-mode image
is frozen.
If PW key is pushed
again, the freeze of B-
mode image is released.
Also it is possible to
change the time interval
with DOP Menu of Main
Menu. (Refer to item
5.4.13 in Main Menu.)
F4 Switching over polarity display of Doppler mode image

Allows forward/backward of
Doppler display to be
OFF
reversed.
If not selected, the upper
screen is the side
approaching to the probe,
4
while the lower screen is
the side leaving from the
probe. ON
If selected, the upper
screen is the side leaving
from the probe, while the Fig. 5.4.11-3
lower screen is the side FLOW INVERT
approaching to the probe.
5-47 Q1E-EA0611
F5 Display angle (Width)
F6 Scan line density
Operation is the same as that in the B-mode and M-
mode.
Refer to F5 Display angle (Width) and F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page).
F7 Oblique invert <Exclusive for linear probe>
4 4
Fig. 5.4.11-4 OBLIQUE-FLOW INVERT
Oblique function is effective only when the linear probe

is connected, and selectable only when oblique is
selected (Refer to F4 of this menu (1st page)).
Oblique invert is a function to invert left/right of
Doppler beam tilted. Doppler image is also inverted at
the same time, so flow invert applies.
5-48 Q1E-EA0611
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
The operation method is the same as in M mode.
F5 Moving of Body-mark
F6 Selecting B-color function
F7 B-color
These operations are the same as those in the B-
mode. (Refer to 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu.)

IMAGE
Pressing PROCESS switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F1 Dynamic range
F2 Depth direction enhancement
F3 Horizontal direction enhancement
F4 Switching over AGC (Automatic Gain Control)
A function to adjust image quality for the B-mode
image. Operation is the same as that in the B-mode
(Refer to 5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu).
F5 Switching over wall filter
Removes unnecessary signals
due to wall motion in order to
display blood flow signal only. 5
50Hz ~ 1600Hz in 12 steps.
Fig. 5.4.12-2
Wall Filter
5-49 Q1E-EA0611
F6 Switching over FFT analysis mode
Allows FFT analysis mode
(number of analysis point for
detecting Doppler image) to be
6
switched over.
When LOW-RESO selected:
Doppler image detection Fig. 5.4.12-3
response speed becomes faster FFT Analysis Mode
and Doppler image of better
response may be obtained.
When HI-RESO selected:
Doppler image of high
resolution may be obtained.
F7 Switching over FFT-γ

γ-curve of Doppler image (FFT-
γ) is switched over in 8 steps. 7
Set it where the image looks

best.
Fig. 5.4.12-4
FFT-γ
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting screen subject to B/PW
control
Switches over screens to be
1
controlled to which various
function apply.
Fig. 5.4.12-5
Screens Subject to
Control
F3 Switching over γ-CURVE

F4 Switching over γ-coefficient
F5 Center position of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
5-50 Q1E-EA0611
F7 Saturation Operation of these functions is the
same as those in the B-mode (Refer to
5.2.11 IMAGE PROCESS menu).
5.4.13 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU

DOP. MENU can be selected
when the MAIN MENU is
MAIN
displayed with the MENU key
pressed and the PW-mode is
selected.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.4.13-1
DOP. MENU
(1) B-REFRESH
Rewriting method for B-mode image.
Simult. : This is to rewrite
B-mode image and
Doppler-mode image.
Interval : This is to rewrite
B-mode image at a
certain period of
time interval.
(Interval mode)
Interval : This is one of
interval
[Sync. Off] modes in which ECG
Fig. 5.4.13-2
synchronous function B-REFRESH Menu
is not used. (Refer
to item 5.4.11 in
MODE DEPENDED menu)
Interval : This mode can be used only
5-51 Q1E-EA0611
[Sync. On] when ECG synchronous function is used.
Rewriting interval of B-mode image is
set based on heart beats frequency.
(Refer to item 5.8.3 ECG
synchronization)
(2) DOP.Expand
An expanded Doppler image is displayed by clicking
(" checking") □
(3) Flow Invert
Click □ and "check" it to invert doppler image.
(Refer to F4 of 5.4.11.)
(4) Auto PRF
Click □ and "check" it to start Auto PRF.
This function starts only when B-Refresh is
Interval and B-image is frozen.
PRF is automatically set for fast blood flow
detection according to the depth of Doppler
sampling gate.
(5) Set Cursor

By clicking ("checking") □, a
Doppler image is displayed
together with a Doppler tone
output even if the Doppler cursor
is moving
(Refer to 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED menu)
Fig. 5.4.13-4
Set Cursor Menu
5-52 Q1E-EA0611
(6) Split
Switches over the
spilit format of B/PW
display.
L/R : Arranged left and
right
U/D : Arranged up and
down
(Refer to 5.4.11
MODE DEPENDED menu)
Fig. 5.4.13-5
Split Menu
(7) Scale
Displays a velocity
scale at the center
of Doppler image.
Fig. 5.4.13-6 Scale
(8) Unit
Switches over unit of Doppler image.
! m/s
! cm/s
! kHz
Fig. 5.4.13-7 Unit
5-53 Q1E-EA0611
(9) Oblique Inv.
Same as in F7 Oblique scan inversion in Mode
Depended menu (1st page)
(Refer to 5.4.11 MODE DEPENDED menu)
5.4.14 Using ALARA in B/PW-mode

Pressing [B/PW] displays the B/PW mode image format,
including labels for the Thermal Indices that are
relevant to the probe in use. (See Section 5.5.2 for
the B/PW mode image format, and refer to Section 4.8 for
a discussion of the possible bioeffects significance of
Thermal Indices.)
is as follows.
TIS___
In case of both indices, TIS and TIB, are shown in
TIS 0.8
5-54 Q1E-EA0611
B/PW operation. (Nevertheless adjustments should be
made to these controls primarily to optimize B mode and
Track Ball Setting of Track Ball changes the FOCUS

depth and transmit aperture of ultrasound,
and affects the value of TIS, TIB and TIC.
REF Setting of REF changes the ultrasound

frequency, and effects the TIS, TIB and TIC.
V-RANGE Setting of V-RANGE changes the PRF (Pulse

Repetition Frequency), and affects the TIS,
TIB and TIC.

TIC.

V-RANGE, VIEW ANGLE, DENSITY and DEPTH, and
mode (B).
5-55 Q1E-EA0611
Note: The change of controls, such as Doppler
Sampling Gate width, etc. does not affect
the value of TI. Such control changes should
strictly be limited to optimizing the image
and Doppler signal quality.
5-56 Q1E-EA0611
5.5 Steerable CW Mode
(Optional accessory of Steerable CW Doppler unit Model EZU-ST5
is additionally required.)
5.5.1 Display of steerable CW-mode image
With the steerable CW-mode probe connected, steerable
CW-mode image is displayed by the following operation
procedures.
(1) With Freeze set to OFF, press to set Doppler
mode.
CW
(2) Select Steerable CW-mode by pressing .
(3) Pressing once again freezes B-mode image and
displays CW-mode image.
With Steerable CW-mode selected, every time
is pressed, B-real mode (mode to scan only B-image)

and steerable CW-mode (mode to scan only CW-image)
can be switched over.
B-mode image CW-mode image
flow velocity
Doppler in forward direction
beam (Approaching toward probe)
line
Velocity marker
Doppler Angle bar
sampling CW image
gate
flow velocity
in backward direction
(Leaving from probe)
Incident angle
FFT-γ value
Wall filter
Doppler mode gain
Unit
Doppler mode
Doppler frequency (PRF/REF)

Fig. 5.5.1-1 Basic Screen layout of B/CW-Mode
5-57 Q1E-EA0611
The beam line in this mode is shown in yellow
indicating that it is in active status.
When it is active, the beam line can be moved left
and right by the trackball.
By changing the symbol at the upper right of the

screen by and selecting other display than ,
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
the beam line is displayed in blue and it cannot be
moved.
NOTICE: Set the Doppler sampling gate at the center

of blood vessel as accurately as possible.
Setting it at the region with high brightness
may cause mixing of noise.
5.5.2 Gain adjustment

The operation procedure is same as Darker
that of PW-mode.
(Refer to 5.4.2.) Brighter
5.5.3 Selection of reference frequency (REF FREQ)

With Steerable CW-mode selected, as shown in Table
5.5.3-1, reference frequency (REF) is fixed for each
probe.
Table 5.5.3-1 Reference Frequency

Probe frequency
5.0MHz
(4-2) (7-3)
Reference frequency 2.0MHz 3.5MHz
5-58 Q1E-EA0611
5.5.4 Adjustment functions
The same adjustment functions as those of PW-mode are
available.
! Base line shift (Refer to 5.4.6.)
! Repetition (Refer to 5.4.7. : Selection
frequency (PRF) range of PRF n CW-mode is from 4
to 50kHz.)
! Adjustment of (Refer to 5.4.8.)
Doppler sound
volume
! Sweep speed

MODE
Pressing button substitutes the function menu at the
DEPENDED
bottom of the screen with MODE DEPENDED menu.

1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.5.5-1 MODE DEPENDED Menus
-1st page -
F1 Selects B mode image substitution mode
F4 Selection of polarity display of Doppler-mode image
F5 Display angle (width)
F6 Scan line density Operation procedures are
same as those in PW-mode.
- 2nd page -
F2 Screen division
F6 Selection B-color function
F7 B-color These operation procedures
are same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED menu.)
5-59 Q1E-EA0611
IMAGE
Pressing button substitutes the function menu at the
PROCESS
bottom of the screen with IMAGE PROCESS menu.

1st page
2nd page
-1st page -
F1 Dynamic range
F2 Enhancement in depth direction
F3 Enhancement in horizontal direction
F4 Selection of AGC (Auto Gain correction)
Image quality adjustment
function for B-mode image.
The operation procedures are
same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.11 IMAGE
PROCESS menu.)
F5 Selection of wall filter
F6 Selection of FFT analysis mode
F7 Selection of FFT-γ The operation procedures are
same as those in PW-mode.
-2nd page -
F1 Selection of screen to be controlled
The screen to be controlled
for execution of various
functions are selected.
F3 Selection of γ-Curve
F4 Selection of γ-coefficient
F5 Value at center point of S-Curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation The operation procedures are
same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.11.)
5-60 Q1E-EA0611
5.5.7 Dop. Menu of Main Menu
By displaying Main Menu by
MAIN
MENU key, Dop. Menu can be
selected when Steerable CW-
mode is opened.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.5.7-1 Dop. Menu
For Main Menu for modes other than Doppler-mode, refer

to Paragraph 5.4.13 Dop. Menu of Main Menu.
With Steerable CW-mode selected, the following items in
Dop. Menu are disabled.
! B-Refresh
! Dop. Expand
! Auto PRF
! Set Cursor
! Oblique Inv.
5-61 Q1E-EA0611
is as follows.
TIS___
TIS 0.8
5-62 Q1E-EA0611
CW operation. (Nevertheless adjustments should be made
to these controls primarily to optimize B mode and


TIC.

Sampling Gate width, PRF etc. does not
affect the value of TI. Such control changes
should strictly be limited to optimizing the
image and Doppler signal quality.
5-63 Q1E-EA0611
5.6 Single Element CW-Mode
(Optional accessory of Steerable CW Doppler unit Model EZU-ST5
or Single Element CW Doppler unit Model EZU-CW4 is
additionally required.)
It can not be used the function for USA.
5.6.1 Displaying single element CW-mode image
This function is effected only when connecting the
Continuous Doppler probe EUP-TC3.
Operation of the single element CW-mode is the same as
that of the B/PW-mode except the following four points:
(1) Simultaneous mode is not selectable.
(2) Reference frequency (REF) cannot be switched over.
(3) Selectable range of repetitive frequency (PRF) is
4k~50kHz.
(a) Connecting the probe
Connect EUP-TC3 or any exclusive probe similar
to that with the exclusive receptacle located
at the lower right of main unit.
Receptacle of single element

probe is located here
Fig. 5.6.1-1 Single Element Probe Receptacle
NOTICE:When the single element probe is connected,

there may be cases where it cannot be recognized
by the ultrasound scanner. In such case,
disconnect the single element probe and connect
it again.
5-64 Q1E-EA0611
(b) Starting CW-mode
PROBE
Simply press to start the probe menu and
select TC3 to start the CW-mode.
Fig. 5.6.1-2 Probe Menu
Max. detectable flow speed

in forward direction
CW image
Incident angle
Max. detectable Unit
flow speed Wall filter
backward direction
Doppler mode frequency(PRF REF)

Doppler mode gain
FFT-γ value
Fig. 5.6.1-3 Basic Screen Layout of single element CW Mode
5-65 Q1E-EA0611
Darker
Turn the Doppler gain knob to
adjust overall gain of CW-mode
image. Brighter
Fig. 5.6.2-1
Gain (Brightness)
Adjustment

These are the same as those in PW-mode.
! Moving Base line (Refer to 5.4.6).
! Repetitive frequency (PRF) (Refer to 5.4.7).
! Adjusting of Doppler sound volume (Refer to 5.4.8).
! Sweep speed.

Pressing MODE
DEPENDED switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.
1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F4 Switching over Doppler mode polarity display
Operation of these functions is
the same as that in PW-mode.
(2nd page)
F6 Selecting B-color function
F7 B-color Operation of these functions is
the same as that in the B mode.
5-66 Q1E-EA0611
Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.6.5-1 IMAGE PROCESS menu
(1st page)
F5 Switching over the wall filter
F6 Switching over FFT analysis mode
F7 Switching over FFT-γ Operation of these functions
is the same as that in the
PW mode.
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting image subject to control
Switches images subject to
control to which various
functions apply.
F3 Switching over γ-CURVE
F4 Switching over γ-Coefficient
F5 Center position of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation Operation of these functions
is the same as that in the B
mode.
5-67 Q1E-EA0611
5.6.6 Dop. MENU of MAIN MENU
Dop. MENU may be selected when the MAIN MENU is
displayed with the MAIN
MENU key pressed and the CW mode runs.
This function is the same as that of the PW mode. Refer

to 5.4.13.
In Single Element CW mode, the following functions in
Dop. MENU are disabled.
! B-Refresh ! Set Cursor
! Dop. Expand ! Split
! Auto PRF ! Oblique Inv.

is as follows.
TIS___
5-68 Q1E-EA0611
TIS 0.8
CW operation. (Nevertheless adjustments should be made
to these controls primarily to optimize B mode and


TIC.

Sampling Gate width, PRF etc. does not
affect the value of TI. Such control changes
should strictly be limited to optimizing the
image and Doppler signal quality.
5-69 Q1E-EA0611
5.7 CFM Mode
Mainly displays blood flow information by color display.
This equipment is provided with two types of CFM-mode of CFI
(Color Flow Image) indicating flow velocity and CFA (Color Flow
Angio) showing blood flow power.
5.7.1 Displaying CFM-mode image
(1) CFI image
Pressing with B Freeze OFF displays the

CFI CFA
B/CFM-mode.
B-mode color MAX. detective flow

velocity in positive direction
Color scale
B-mode color MAX. detective flow
velocity in negative direction
Smoothing CFM ROI

Packet size
Motion archfact
Suppression level
CFM filter
Persistence
CFM gain Velocity variance
CFM mode frequency (PRF/REF)
Fig. 5.7.1-1 Basic Screen layout of CFM mode
When starting the equipment, CFI is displayed. By
pressing , CFI is switched to CFA.

CFI CFA
5-70 Q1E-EA0611
(2) CFA image
In CFA, subject for display changes to the power of
Doppler signal.
Color map is changed and flow velocity is removed.
Fig. 5.7.1-2 CFA Image

(3) Using together with the other mode
Both CFI and CFA may be simultaneously displayed
together with M image and PW image.
M CM
MAX. detective
flow velocity on
M-mode image
Fig. 5.7.1-3 Fig. 5.7.1-4

CFI-M Basic Screen Layout CFI-PW Basic Screen Layout
5-71 Q1E-EA0611
5.7.2 Setting COLOR BOX range
Adjusts the size and position of COLOR BOX (Region Of
Interest) for displaying the CFM image.
(1) Switching over trackball priority
Use the toggle

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
switch to turn the

trackball
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
priority display
to .
Fig. 5.7.2-1
Switching Trackball
Priority
(2) Moving position
Moving the trackball
moves the COLOR BOX
frame.
For the sector or
convex type, moving
upward narrows width
and moving downward
widens it.
Fig. 5.7.2-2
Moving COLOR BOX
Position
5-72 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Setting range
Pressing the ENTER key
displays "●" at the
ENTER
lower right of COLOR
COLOR
BOX. POSI / SIZE
This "●" indicates the

position of trackball.
Moving the trackball
widens (narrows) the
COLOR BOX frame
left/right and up/down.
If the color box range

is determined, press the
ENTER key again. "●"
disappears and returns ENTER
to the state of (1) COLOR

POSI / SIZE
Moving position.
Fig. 5.7.2-3 Setting
COLOR BOX Range
(4) Ending setting
Move the toggle to switch the trackball

TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
priority to that other than .
5.7.3 Adjusting gain (Brightness) Darker
Turn the CFM gain knob to adjust

the overall gain of CFM-mode image. Brighter
CFI CFA
Fig. 5.7.3-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5-73 Q1E-EA0611
The same as those of each mode.
! Adjusting gain (Refer to 5.2.2, 5.3.2 and 5.4.2)
! Moving display position (Refer to 5.2.6)
! Switching over electronic focus (Refer to 5.2.3)
! Switching over screen display (Refer to 5.3.3)
! Switching over PRF (Refer to 5.4.7)
5.7.5 Reference frequency (REF FREQ)

According to frequency of the probe, two types of
different reference frequency (REF) can be selected.
Table 5.7.5-1 Reference Frequencies
Probe frequency
(4-2) (5-2) (7-3) (8-4) (10-5)
Reference
frequency 2.5MHz 3.5MH 5.0MHz 7.5MHz
UP
5.0MHz
REF FREQ
DOWN
NOTICE:EUP-L54M has 10MHz and 6.5MHz.
5.7.6 Velocity Range (PRF)

Switches over PRF. <Common to CFI and CFA>
For CFM-PW, PRF of both modes is
switched over. Up
If clicking the toggle switch upward,
high frequency is selected and the max V-SCALE
(PRF)
detection velocity becomes larger. Down
If clicking the toggle switch downward, Fig. 5.7.6–1

low frequency is selected and Doppler Velocity Range
image is enlarged.
5-74 Q1E-EA0611
5.7.7 Baseline
(1) CFM
BASELINE BASELINE
Allows detection
velocity range to be
switched over by
increasing/decreasing
Baseline of color
scale.
Fig. 5.7.7-1 Baseline

(CFM)
(2) CFM-D
Operation of these
functions is basically
the same as that in the
CFM (CFM-B) and CFM-M-
modes.
Since the PW image
varies due to BASELINE
increase/decrease of the
color scale, PW waveform
that should be at the
upper part of screen may Fig. 5.7.7-2 Baseline
happen to be at the (CFM-D)
lower part of screen
(Aliasing).
5-75 Q1E-EA0611
5.7.8 Oblique <Exclusive for linear probes>
(1) CFM
Allows the deep region to be widely examined by
tilting COLOR BOX to the left and right.
OBLIQUE -θ° 0° +θ°
Fig. 5.7.8-1 CFM Oblique

(2) CFM-M
CFM COLOR BOX is tilted.
At this time, Flow Invert may be effected
CFM ROI
M Beam Line
Fig. 5.7.8-2 Oblique

(3) CFM-D
CFM COLOR BOX is tilted as well as Doppler beam
line (D Beam Line).
This function may also be operated with "Left
arrow" and "Right arrow" keys of the alphanumeric
keyboard.
θ° PW
OBLIQUE
CFM ROI
D Beam Line
Fig. 5.7.8-3 Oblique Function
5-76 Q1E-EA0611
5.7.9 Zooming image:ZOOM
ZOOM of CFM-mode differs from
that of the other mode.
ZOOM
The rectangular frame which
indicates the ROI is not
displayed.
ZOOM
Pressing zooms the image
and
Symbol appears at the upper
right
corner of screen.
DEPTH / MAG
Clicking the toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
downward
raises screen magnification
ratio, while clicking upward
lowers it.
Move the trackball to move the

image to view any region to be
observed.
If moving to the right, the
screen moves to the right.
ZOOM
Press again to end ZOOM. ZOOM
Fig. 5.7.9-1
ZOOM of CFM

Pressing MODE
DEPENDED switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.
(1) CFM-B mode
1st page
2nd page
5-77 Q1E-EA0611
Also, when selecting the CFM-B mode, this menu is
(1st page)
F2 CFM Preference
Green
CFM image and B mode image are line
displayed overlaid on the same

screen. This function
2
switches display preference of
two mode in 16 steps. BW image
Current CFM Preference setting

is displayed in a green line Green
line
on the gray scale at the left 2
side of screen. CFM image
For the gray scale exceeding

the position of green line in
Green line
COLOR BOX range (within the
broken line on the screen) the
B image is displayed, while
Fig. 5.7.10-2
the color image is displayed CFM Preference
for the part below the green
line.
As CFM Preference No is
smaller, the B image is
brighter, and as No is larger,
CFM becomes brighter.
NOTICE: This function may also be switched over in the MAIN

MENU. If the setting is "ATUO", it cannot be
switched over (Refer to 5.7.12 MAIN MENU).
F3 Color map
Switches variation of color scale.
(I) CFI: When selecting CARDIAC region
When selecting CARDIAC in the 3
APPLICATION menu, operate as follows;
Fig. 5.7.10-3
Color Map
5-78 Q1E-EA0611
(a) Velocity - Velocity variance (Color Map 1 to 4)
The direction of blood and velocity is
displayed in brightness of red and blue, and
add in brightness of green, light blue and
yellow in the place of velocity variance.
Red, Yellow:
Blood flow in the normal direction
Red is small velocity variance.
Yellow is large velocity variance.
Blue, Green:
Blood flow in the reverse direction
Blue is small velocity variance.
Green is large velocity variance.
Blue, Light blue:
Light blue is large velocity variance.
(b) Velocity (Color Map 5 to 7)
The direction of blood and difference of
velocity is displayed in contrast of variation.
Red, Yellow:
Red is lately velocity.
Yellow (or white) is fast velocity.
Blue, Light blue:
Blue is lately velocity.
Light blue (or white) is fast velocity.
(c) Velocity variance (Color Map 8)
The size of and velocity variance is displayed
in brightness of yellow.
Yellow: Part of confused blood flow
Brightness: Size of velocity variance
5-79 Q1E-EA0611
(II) CFI: When selecting other region
When selecting CFI except in
CARDIAC;
(a) Velocity (Color Map 1 to 7)

Red, Yellow:
Red is lately velocity.
Yellow (or white) is fast velocity.
Blue, Light blue:
Blue is lately velocity.
Light blue (or white) is fast velocity.
(b) Velocity - Velocity variance (Color Map 8)
The direction of blood and velocity is
displayed in brightness of red and blue, and
add in brightness of green and yellow in the
place of velocity variance.
Red, Yellow:
Red is small velocity variance.
Yellow is large velocity variance.
Blue, Green:
Green is large velocity variance.
(III) CFA: When selecting CFA;

Color flow angio;
Displays power information of blood flow for
using brightness and variation of contrast
5-80 Q1E-EA0611
F4 Flow Invert (For CFM)
Inverts color map.
Fig. 5.7.10-4
Flow Invert (For CFM)
F5 Dop. Cursor
Display/Non-display of beam : Non-display
for Doppler measurement is of Beam
selected.
5
(Refer to 5.2.12 (5).) : Display of

Beam
F6 Scan line density Operation is the same as

that in the B-mode and M-
mode.
Refer to F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED menu (1st page)
F7 Oblique invert <Exclusive for linear probes>
The oblique function is effected only when connecting
the linear probe, and this function is available only
when selecting the oblique function (Refer to F4 of Main
Menu (2nd page)).
As well as 5.4.9 (Oblique Inver of Doppler), switched as
shown below in CFM. Color scale is inverted upside down,
so velocity display is not changed as it is different
from Doppler.
5-81 Q1E-EA0611
7
Color scale is
inverted
4 4
Fig. 5.7.10-5 Oblique-Flow Inver (CFM)
(2nd page)
F1 Peak Hold
F2 Switching over CFM refresh interval (Only for PEAK
HOLD operation)
Displays an image which part of high brightness
remains by stopping refresh in CFM COLOR BOX for
specified time (interval).
If starting PEAK HOLD, F2 toggle becomes refresh
interval selection allowing it to be switched over
1 ~ 8 sec and eternity (no refresh). Also, when
starting SYNC, it is refreshed by heartbeat. (Refer
to PEAK HOLD of 5.7.12 MAIN MENU).
(SYNC ON)
2 2
Fig. 5.7.10-6 PEAK HOLD
5-82 Q1E-EA0611
F2 Fixed-B
Displays B image as it was
designated in B-mode
regardless of width of CFM
image.
Frame rate is lowered as the
2
screen is widened, but the

image can be viewed as a
whole.
Fig. 5.7.10-7 Fixed -B
F3 Biplane Refer to B Biplane of 5.2.10 MODE DEPENDED

menu (1st page).
F4 Lateral inversion of image
(F4 and F5 keys can be operated in the same way
as in B mode.)
F6 CFI/CFA selection
F7 Dual CFM
Depict two CFM images and use two types of color
scale to compare them.
Switch over the color scale in the MAIN MENU (Refer
to 5.7.12).
5-83 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 5.7.10-8 Dual CFM
(2) CFM/M mode

page1
page2
Also when selecting the CFM/M-mode, this mode is

selected.
(1st page)
F1 Selecting B mode refresh mode
The CFM-M-mode includes the
simultaneous mode in which CFM
image (B-CFM) and M image are
displayed, and the mode that
normally depicts a CFM image
1
only.
Further pressing the M mode
switch activates B freeze
allowing these modes to be
switched over.
Fig. 5.7.10-10 B-image
Refresh Mode(CFM-M)
5-84 Q1E-EA0611
F3 Switching over color map
Refer to 5.7.10 (1)
CFM (B-CFM)-mode (1st page)
F4 Flow Invert Refer to 5.7.10 (1)
CFM (B-CFM)-mode (1st page)
F6 Switching over line density
Refer to 5.2.10
MODE DEPENDED mode (1st page)
F7 M blank width Refer to 5.3.8
MODE DEPENDED mode (1st page)
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
(3) CFM/(M/)D mode

page1
page2
Fig. 5.7.10-11 MODE DEPENDED Mode
(1st page)
The same as those of CFM/(M/)D-mode and CFM-M-mode.
F1 Simult
The CFM-D mode includes the
simultaneous mode in which CFM
image (B-CFM) and a D image is
displayed, and the mode that
normally depicts a CFM image
1
only.
Further pressing the PW mode
switch activates B freeze
allowing these modes to be
Fig. 5.7.10-12 B Image
switched over.
Refresh Mode (CFM-D)
5-85 Q1E-EA0611
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
F6 CFI/CFA selection

Pressing IMAGE
PROCESS switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
(1) CFM-B/CFM-M
page1
page2
Fig. 5.7.11-1 IMAGE PROCESS Menu (CFM-B/CFM-M)
F1 CFM filter
Switches over the color
filter for CFM in 3 steps of
L, M and H. 1
Fig. 5.7.11-2
CFM Filter
F2 Function to remove body motion

Reduces an effect from body
motion and improves color 2
display performance. Effect of

removing body motion can be
switched over in 4 steps Fig. 5.7.11-3
according to intensity of body A. SUPPRESS
motion. It becomes larger in
the order of 0-1-2-3.
5-86 Q1E-EA0611
F3 Switching Packet size
Every time selecting "PACKET",
it is switched over in 3 steps 3
of L, M and S.
Fig. 5.7.11-4 Packet
Varies frame rate in CFM-mode.
L : Frame rate decreases but a CFM image of higher
quality is obtained.
M : Usually set this level for use.
S : Frame rate increases allowing a better real
time CFM image to be obtained but image quality
becomes a little bit worse.
F4 Switching over CFM interpolation level

Applies the interpolation
process to CFM image to display
CFM images of better
4
continuity. Interpolation
level is divided into 3 levels.
Fig. 5.7.11-5 Smooth

F5 Switching over persistence
Applies the correlation process
to CFM image to display CFM
images of better continuity. 5
Correlation level is divided

into 8 levels of 0~7.
Fig. 5.7.11-6
Persistence
F6 Switching over velocity variance

Allows the grade of displaying
velocity variance to be 6
selected in 8 steps of 1~8.
Fig. 5.7.11-7
Velocity Variance
5-87 Q1E-EA0611
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting screen subject to control
Switches over the screen CFM-B
subject to control to which
various functions apply. CFM dual screen
! In the CFM-B-mode, the

screen subject to control
may be switched over the
whole B image or inside
COLOR BOX of CFM image. 1
! In the dual CFM screen

mode, the whole B image CFM-PW
and left and right CFM
images are switched over
individually. CFM-M screen
! If adding screens as CFM-

PW-mode and CFM-M-PW-mode
and so on, screens that
can be switched Fig. 5.7.11-8
automatically increase. Screen Subject to Control
F2 Selecting Velocity Tagging

Allows any specific level
of color scale to be
extracted for obtaining a
CFM image.
Also, F3~F5 can not be
selected unless selecting
F2.
Fig. 5.7.11-9
Velocity Tagging
F3 Switching over lower limit

F4 Switching over upper limit
Switches the upper and lower limits of tagging.
5-88 Q1E-EA0611
F5 Moving tagging width in parallel
Allows entire range of tagging to be moved up/down.
Setting of F3~F5 moves if moving the CFM zero
level.
F6 Rejection
Sets a region rejected equally above and below the
CFM base line.
5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU

CFM MENU can be selected when
displaying the MAIN MENU with
the MAIN
MENU key pressed and CFM
mode has started.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.7.12-1 CFM MENU
(1) Scan Density (CFM)

Switches over scan density of
the CFM image in 4 steps.
Fig. 5.7.12-2
Scan Density
5-89 Q1E-EA0611
(2) B-Refresh
Switches over the screen mode
of CFM.
By clicking ("checking”)
□,both B and Doppler images
are refreshed at the same
time.
Fig. 5.7.12-3
B-Refresh
(3) Flow Invert

Click □ and "check" it to invert direction of
Doppler detection (Refer to 5.4.11).
(4) Color Map

Switches over Color Map.
(Selectable items are
automatically switched over
according to the mode.)
Fig. 5.7.12-4
Color Map
5-90 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Dual CFM
Click □ and "check" it to
start Dual CFM .
Also this allows Color Map of
left and right CFM images to
be set independently.
Move the cursor to " " and
click it to display a list of
Map that can be currently
selected.
Fig. 5.7.12-5 Dual CFM
(6) Fixed-B
Click □ for "Checking", then B-mode image is
displayed with the width as designated in B mode
setting regardless the width of CFM image.
(7) COLOR ROI

Switches over the shape of
COLOR ROI
Fig. 5.7.12-6
COLOR ROI
(8) Peak Hold
Stops refreshing the image
for predetermined time and
leaves spots of high
brightness.
Temporal refresh
(In Sync Off):ECG OFF
5-91 Q1E-EA0611
! 1s ~ 8s: Refreshes the image
every predetermined time.
! ∞: No refresh.
Heartbeat refresh
(In Sync On):ECG ON
! 1 beat ~ 8 beat:
Refreshes every beat.
! ∞: No refresh.
Fig. 5.7.12-7
Peak Hold
(9) CFM Pref.

Switches over display
reference of B image and CFM
image.
If selecting Auto mode, this
operation is disabled on the
function menu.
Fig. 5.7.12-8
CFM Pref.
(10) Marker
Click □ and "check" it to display the COLOR ROI
frame of CFM image.
Fig. 5.7.12-9 Marker
5-92 Q1E-EA0611
(11) Color cale
Click □ for "checking" then COLOR SCALE display.
(12) Unit
Switches the unit system of Doppler image (Refer to
5.4.13).
5-93 Q1E-EA0611
5.7.13 Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M and/PW modes
In each of the CFM-B/M, CFM-B/PW, and CFM-B/M/PW modes
of operation, including labels for the Thermal Indices
that are relevant to the probe in use. (See Section
5.7.1 for the CFM mode image format, and refer to
Section 4.7 for a discussion of the possible bioeffects
significance of Thermal Indices.)
is as follows.
TIS___
TIS 0.8
5-94 Q1E-EA0611
CFM operation. (Nevertheless adjustments should be made
to these controls primarily to optimize B-mode and CFM
image quality.)
FOCUS Setting of FOCUS changes the FOCUS depth and

transmit aperture of ultrasound, and affects
the value of TIS, TIB and TIC.
REF Setting of REF changes the ultrasound

frequency, and effects the TIS, TIB, TIC.

TIC.

V-RANGE, VIEW ANGLE, DENSITY, DEPTH, the
width of CFM ROI and PACKET SIZE, and
mode (B).
Note: The change of controls, such as CFM Gain

setting, etc. does not affect the value of
TI. Such control changes should strictly be
limited to optimizing the image and Doppler
signal quality.
5-95 Q1E-EA0611
5.8 ECG Function
(Optional accessory of Biomedical waveform display unit Model
EZU-EK25 is additionally required.)
5.8.1 Connecting cords
(1) Connecting with main unit
Securely connect the ECG cord on the side of
keyboard support frame located at the right side of
main unit.
ECG connector
ECG connector is the defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART.

Don’t contact the electrode of TYPE BF APPLIED PART to earth
(ground).
Fig. 5.8.1-1 Connector Layout
(2) Attaching the ECG cord to human body

*1) Before attach the ECG cord to human body, check
the each function of ECG referring to section
5.8.4.
*2) When using the defibrillator,don’t touch the
patient.
After checking if the ECG induction cord is
connected with the main unit, apply jelly for
ECG clip to the electrode inside the clip and
use the second induction (see the figure to the
left) to mount it on the patient.
Each electrode terminal is discriminated with
the color of the terminal at the end of the ECG
induction cord. Attach a provided clip to the
terminal and clip the terminal to the specified
section.
5-96 Q1E-EA0611
Red (R) - Right hand
Black (F) - Right foot
Green (LF) - Left foot
Fig. 5.8.1-2 Attaching ECG Cable
5.8.2 Displaying physiological signal waveform

PHYSIO
Pressing key displays the selectable option menu
(Base menu). (Fig. 5.8.2-1)
(1st page)
(2nd page)
Fig. 5.8.2-1 Physio Menu
The optional function Base menu can be restored by F7

Function button on Page 2.
It is also possible to make the default setting on the
application menu so that Physio menu (Fig. 8.3.10(2)) is
directly displayed by
PHYSIO
pressing key. (Refer to Fig. 5.8.2-1.)
By selecting F5 ECG on page 1 of Physio menu, the

related function can be selected.
(1) Waveform display (F5 of 1st page)
5-97 Q1E-EA0611
If turning the toggle switch of function menu
5
(1st page) ON (highlighted), physiological signal

waveform appears on the screen in green.
ECG WAVE FORM
Fig. 5.8.2-2 Starting ECG
In displaying the ECG waveform, if the system

recognizes ECG waveform, auto measurement of
heartbeat is displayed at the upper right.
When recording mode of ECG sync or image memory is
the continuous recording heartbeat auto detection
mode, R-wave on the ECG waveform needs to be
recognized.
When the R-wave is recognized, the trigger mark at
the right side of screen flickers.
Fig. 5.8.2-3 Trigger Mark and Beat Display
5-98 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Adjusting position of waveform (POSITION: Adjusting
height)
Allows the toggle switch

7
of function menu (1st page)

to adjust vertical position
of waveform display. 7
Fig. 5.8.2-4
Adjusting Display Position
(3) Switching over sweep speed

Refer to 5.3.7 Switching
over sweep speed.
SWEEP
SPEED
Fig. 5.8.2-5
Switching over Scan Speed
(4) Adjusting amplitude of waveform (GAIN)
Allows the toggle

6
switch of function menu

(1st page) to adjust
amplitude of waveform
in a range of 0 ~ 30.
Fig. 5.8.2-6
Adjusting Amplitude of
Waveform
5-99 Q1E-EA0611
5.8.3 ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC)
Applying ECG SYNC while ECG is activated, B-mode image
is refreshed in a timing of any phase from the R-wave
and Freeze image is displayed switched intermittently.
With the R-wave as a starting point, Freeze image is
rewritten after a predetermined time (Delay Time). This
allows any beat related region to be easily observed at
a specific phase.
(1) Single synchronization

This function starts only either one of two SYNC
functions.
It rewrites the image at any time within a
heartbeat and displays it.When you start Single
Synchronization, the SYNC-bar appears over the ECG
waveform. This bar indicates when the sync image is
re-written.
Delay Time R-wave

Trigger
Mark
SYNC image SYNC-bar
R-wave
Fig. 5.8.3-1 ECG SYNC Basic Screen Layout
5-100 Q1E-EA0611
Clicking the toggle switch of
1
function menu (1st page)

1
starts SYNC1, highlights the menu
and allows the B image to be
switched intermittently.
Also, delay time display is added
to the upper right corner.
It shows that the image is
rewritten after this delay time
from the R-wave.
Also the toggle switch (1st

3
page) starts SYNC2.

Function is completely the same as 3
that of SYNC1.
Fig.5.8.3-2
SYNC Switch
(2) Delay time setting
and of the function

2 4
menu
(1st page) switch over
delay time settings of
SYNC1 and SYNC2
respectively.
Either of these shows
delay-time from the R
point.
(This function is common 2 4
to dual sync.)
Fig. 5.8.3-3
Delay Time
5-101 Q1E-EA0611
In dual sync, when two ECG synchronizations are
occurred during one image scan, a message as shown
in the left picture is displayed. In that case
change the delay time.
Fig.5.8.3-4 Confirmation
(3) Dual synchronization (Dual SYNC)

Dual SYNC obtains SYNC images at two timing points
utilizing two SYNC systems. If starting dual SYNC,
two vertical lines appear on ECG waveform. These
show rewrite timing of SYNC image and are
recognized by temporal positions.
R(D)
T1/T2 T1/T2
SYNC1 SYNC2
T1 T1
T2 T2
L(U)
Fig. 5.8.3-5 Dual SYNC
5-102 Q1E-EA0611
If ECG waveform has started, pressing the toggle
2
switch
(2nd page) starts Dual SYNC.
Image display mode at that time depends on the
screen currently selected (L, R).
As for R-wave delay time, set delay time by using
the and toggle keys (1st page). If pressing
2 4
the toggle (2nd page) again, Dual SYNC is

2
terminated.
(4) Using together with the other mode

B-mode single SYNC may be used together with any
other mode.
Sync timing is displayed as a vertical bright line
on the PW or M-mode image.
Setting of B/M and B/D is the same as that of B-
mode; however, Dual SYNC is not available.
Sync Timing
Line
SYNC-B
M Image
ECG wave
Fig. 5.8.3-6 ECG in B/M Image
5-103 Q1E-EA0611
5.8.4 ECG MENU of MAIN MENU
Press MAIN
MENU to display the
MAIN MENU then select the
Physiology menu.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.8.4-1 MAIN MENU
(1) Setting ECG

Switches over 2-step setting of
L/H of HPF (DC variation filter)
for ECG.
Fig. 5.8.4-2
Setting ECG
5-104 Q1E-EA0611
5.9 Needle Guide Line
GUIDE
Pressing displays the needle guide line in a dot line.
Guide Line
Fig. 5.9-1 Guide Line for Convex Probe
1) Displaying the needle guideline needs probes to be

registered individually.
Order the installation agent for registration of needle
guideline.
2) While displaying the needle guideline, pan zoom and moving
view are not effected.
3) Displaying the guideline gives a guide of direction.
Be sure to perform biopsy operation while confirming the
actual position of needle on the ultrasound image.
4) Refer to the instruction manual of each probe for
attaching the needle and support bracket to the probe.
5-105 Q1E-EA0611
The needle guideline differs depending on the probe used.
Display data needs to be registered in advance.
GUIDE
If selecting the probe already registered, the key
lights half indicating that the guideline may be
displayed.
Also, the probe which needle angle can be switched over
and the adapter for probe are available.
In such case, turn the periphery of knob to switch
over angle.
NOTICE: In case you want to display a biopsy needle guide

line, perform it as much as possible under a
single image display mode.
5-106 Q1E-EA0611
-POST SCRIPT-
In case of using EUP-U533 with Brachystepper manufactured by

Barzell-Whitemore Maroon Bells, Inc., EUB-5500 can show the
following needle guide template grid display when biopsy guide
line is registered, the convex array of the EUP-U533 is
activated, and "GUIDE" key is pressed.
- The needle guide template is a 13×13 grid (shown in Figure

1) with needle slots displayed at 5-mm intervals in the
vertical and horizontal axis.
- Coordinate values labeled from A to G (the center is D)
are displayed at the top of the template with a pitch of
1mm.
- No readjustment of the grid is necessary if the image is
inverted top/bottom, or right/left.
- The template display can be adjusted in 1-mm increments in
the vertical direction and 1-degree increments in the
lateral (rotational) direction.
This function is meant for use only as a guide. Hitachi

Medical Corporation makes no claim, not accepts liability
for, products manufactured by other companies used in
conjunction with EUB-5500.
5-107 Q1E-EA0611
1) There are several needle gauge sizes used for the
brachytherapy procedure. The different needle gauges have
different diameters. In order to accommodate the
different needle diameters the stepper/needle guide
template hardware may have template needle guide slot
diameters larger than the needle slot represented by the
software. This results in "needle play" in the stepper
template and may cause an alignment problem with the
needle guide template software display in the range of 1
to 1.2 mm. To avoid this potential problem use needles
with diameter of 1 to 1.2-mm. Do not use needles outside
of this range.
2) Before performing a brachytherapy procedure, the needle
guide template grid software display, the EUP-U533 and the
stepper/needle guide template hardware must be calibrated
by the following procedure:
- Mount the transducer (EUP-U533) on the stepper/template
- Activate the convex array of the transducer and press the
GUIDE key.
- Place the transducer in a tank of saline and insert a
needle through one of the needle guide template needle
slots.
- The puncture needle reference point and the software
reference point should be aligned within a tolerance of
±1-mm.
To perform this calibration, please contact with Hitachi
Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
5-108 Q1E-EA0611
Confirmed model of the brachytherapy products:
Company : Barzell-Whitmore Maroon Bells, Inc.
1121 Lewis Ave., Sarasota, FL 34237 USA
Phone: 941-955-7700 Fax: 941-955-7735
E-mail: lewis1121@aol.com
Products : Refer to the following list

PRODUCT
TYPE PRODUCT NAME
NUMBER
Brachystand® 6 Ultra (for Table-mount or floor-based
1000 procedures)
(Includes floor fixation stand)
Brachystand® 6 Ultra-S (for Table-mount procedures
® 1000S only)
BRACHYSTAND
(Includes set-up and storage stand only)
(STABILIZERS)
Brachystand® 4 Compact (for Table-mount procedures
1100 only)
(Includes set-up and storage stand only)
Micro-TouchTM Brachystand® (for Table-mount procedures
6200
only)
BRACHYSTEPPER® 5800 Brachystepper® - For Hitachi
NEEDLE GRIDS 1454 Template Grid - 18 gauge (Generic – fits Hitachi)
2200 Dust Cover for Brachystand®
Brachyclamp® Kit for Brachystand® 6 Ultra – for OR table
3600 with Rails (Includes a right clamp, left clamp and clamp
ACCESSORIES rack)
Brachyclamp® Kit for Brachystand® 4 Compact – for OR
3700 table with Rails (Includes a right clamp, left clamp and
clamp rack)
Brachystand® 6 Ultra Bundle – Includes Brachystand® 6
Ultra – 1000S Model (for Table-mount procedures only),
1000SB
Brachystepper® of choice (except P/N 8500), template
grid, and Brachyclamp® Kit.
Brachystand® 6 Ultra Bundle – Includes Brachystand® 6
BRACHYBUNDLE OFFER Ultra (1000 Model for Table-mount or floor-mount
1000B
for HITACHI procedures), Brachystepper® of choice (except P/N 8500),
template grid and Brachyclamp® Kit.
Micro-TouchTM Brachystand® Bundle – Includes Micro-Touch
Brachystand® (6200 Model) (for Table-mount procedures
6200B
only), Brachystepper® of choice (except P/N 8500) and
needle template grid.
BRACHYWARE USER ORDERING GUIDE
The Brachystand® 6 Ultra (Product 1000) can be used either in a fully table mounted
configuration, or in a combination of a floor-based and table-mounted set-up. The
Brachystand® 4 Compact (Product 1100) includes a set-up, storage, and transportation
stand and, as such, can only be used for fully table-mounted procedures. The Micro-
TouchTM is also for table-mounted procedures.
Do not use the other products except as stated above.
5-109 Q1E-EA0611
5.10 Omni-Directional M mode
(Optional accessory Model EZU-OD2 is additionally required.)
5.10.1 General
By combining optional unit EZU-OD2 with the ultrasonic
equipment, <ODM (Omni-Directional M mode) function> can
be utilized to display an M mode image on an any axis of
a B image.
5.10.2 Features
(1) Real-time ODM mode
ODM image is produced from the B image
scanned in real time.
(2) Cine memory ODM mode
After freezing the image, ODM image is
produced by reading the B images from the
cine memory.
5.10.3 Operating requirements of ODM function

The following setting and requirements are required for
starting the ODM function
In order to operate the ODM function, it is necessary to
satisfy the conditions as follows.
(1) Correspondence to option
Optional unit EZU-OD2 shall be combined.
(2) Probe selection
The following probe shall be selected.
Phased array probe
EUP-C514, EUP-L53S,EUP-L54M,EUP-C524,EUP-C516
(3) Other requirements
<Setting in real-time ODM mode>
! B/M simultaneous mode shall be selected
! CFM mode shall not be selected
! ECG SYNC mode shall not be selected.
5-110 Q1E-EA0611
<Setting in cine memory ODM mode>
! B mode shall be selected
! CFM mode shall not be selected
! Cine review can be done
! Scan line density shall be "1".
! Single focus
! Image memory shall not be B:B Split mode
! ECG SYNC mode shall not be selected.
5.10.4 Real-time ODM mode

ODM image is produced from the B image scanned
in real time.
(1) Start
Real-time ODM mode can be started by the following
procedure.
(a) Select B/M mode by pressing .
(b) Display the function menu (Fig.5.10.4.1) by

pressing .
MODE
DEPENDED
Fig. 5.10.4.1 Function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu)
OFF
(c) Real-time ODM mode is selected
by turning on the toggle switch
F3 of the function menu (page
1) to ON (highlighted display). 3
ON
The scan line density becomes "1" automatically in

real-time ODM mode.
In case of using EUP-L54M or EUP-L53S with
selecting View Angle 1, the maximum PRF is 6.0kHz.
In case of any other probes with selecting View
Angle 1, the maximum PRF is 3.5kHz.
5-111 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Display of ODM mode
The screen display changes as shown in Fig.5.10.4.2
in ODM mode.
ODM beam line :
ODM beam line (Beam line tips are displayed by
an arrow, while the beam line center is
displayed by a circle) is displayed.
Image quality adjusting parameter:
Image quality parameter is displayed as ODM
γvalue/ODM enhanced value/-.
(Example If display is 1/3/-, ODM γvalue is 1
and ODM enhanced value is 3)
ODM image
C C'
Beam Center
ODM Beam Line

ODMγ / ODM-Enhance/ -
Fig. 5.10.4.2 Display of ODM mode
The center (C) of the beam line is set to the

center (C’) of the ODM image.
5-112 Q1E-EA0611
5.10.5 ODM beam line operation
The operation method of the ODM beam line is shown below.
(1) Beam line angle selection
By turning , the ODM beam line angle is
switched. (The ODM beam line rotates around the

beam line center as a reference.)
The beam line rotation can be operated over a range
from -90° to +90° as shown in Fig.5.10.5.1 The
angle is switched sequentially in the order of 45°
→ 90° → -45° → 0° → 45° by pushing .
90° -90°
Rotatory range
45° -45°
0°
Fig. 5.10.5.1 Rotatory range of beam line.
If the track ball priority display is at the
upper right of the screen, set to the sample
mark side to make sure that the track ball priority

display has been switched to , and then, operate
key
5-113 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Beam line move
The beam line can be moved by the track ball.
This function can be operated only when the track

ball priority display is at the upper right of
the screen In other cases, switch the track ball
priority display to by the track ball priority
toggle switch before operating the track ball.
5.10.6 Image quality adjustment function (IMAGE PROCESS menu)

By pressing IMAGE
PROCESS in ODM mode, the function menu for
adjusting the image quality (Fig.5.10.8.1) is displayed
(The image quality adjustment menu for ODM is displayed
in F5 and F6 of the function menu)
Fig.5.10.8.1 Function menu (IMAGE PROCESS menu)
F5 ODM-γswitching
An ODM image gamma curve is
switched in 5 steps Select a
gamma curve where the image 5
quality can be monitored most

easily.
F6 ODM enhancement switching

The image edge enhancement
degree is switched in 4 steps.
4: Edge enhancement Strong 6
～
1: Edge enhancement Weak
5-114 Q1E-EA0611
5.10.7 Cine memory ODM mode
After freezing the image, ODM image is produced
by reading the B images from the cine memory.
(1) Start
The cine memory ODM mode can be started by the
following procedure.
(a) Select B mode by pressing
(b) Freeze the B image by pressing FREEZE
to be able
to review the cine memory

(c) Display the function menu (Fig.5.10.9.1) by
pressing .
MODE
DEPENDED
(d) The cine memory ODM mode is selected by turning

on toggle switch F3 of function menu (page 1)
to ON(highlighted display).
Fig.5.10.9.1 Function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu)
5-115 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Display of ODM mode
Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.4 (2).
(3) ODM beam line operation
Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.5
(4) Image quality adjustment function
By pressing IMAGE
PROCESS during ODM image review, the
function menu for adjusting the image quality
(Fig.5.10.9.3) is displayed. (The image quality
adjustment menu for ODM is displayed in F5 and F6
of the function menu)
Fig.5.10.9.2 Function menu (IMAGE PROCESS Menu)
F5 ODM-γswitching
F6 ODM enhancement switching
Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.6
5-116 Q1E-EA0611
5.10.8 Application parameter setup
This function is provided to edit various application
parameters for ODM mode.
(1) Application parameter setup menu
For editing various parameters in ODM mode, display
"Edit Application" of application menu by pressing
Main menu → Setup → Application → "Edit Data"
button, and then, select "ODM Menu" of "M Menu" of
"Item View" (For details of the application
function, refer to Chapter 8)
(2) ODM menu
Initial mode Sets whether ODM mode is selected or

not when pressing M mode key first
after application switching (M mode
/ ODM mode)
Image Process
Enhancement Enhancement value for ODM image
ODM-γ Gamma value for ODM image.
Initial Gain Initial gain for ODM mode
Fundamental Normal use
dTHI dTHI use
ODM Mark Display Selects the display of ODM mark
5-117 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 6 Character, Annotation and Body Mark
6.1 Entering Characters

Displays characters entered from the keyboard on the ultrasound image.
Pressing the Character key switches
over the function menu to the menu

for entering characters and a yellow
cursor line is displayed on the
screen.
A comment may be entered from the
position of cursor to the right.
Also, if the trackball priority on
the upper right of screen is ,
Fig. 6.1-1
Entering Characters the cursor may be moved with the
trackball or arrow keys
.
Characters may be entered from the

alphanumeric keyboard.
Press the Shift key and character
keys to enter small characters and
symbols.
Also it is possible to enter an arrow
mark by pressing Ctrl key, Alt key
and a character key simultaneously.
6.1.1 Character input menu
Fig. 6.1.1-1 Character Input Menu

F1 SIZE
Pressing the toggle switch

1
1
switches the size of characters to be

entered in 4 steps.
Fig. 6.1.1-2 Character Size
6-1 199 Q1E-EA0611

F2, F3 FONT
Pressing the toggle switch

2 3
switches over the font of characters

to be entered in 4 types.
Fig. 6.1.1-3 Character Fonts

F4 Correcting characters
Pressing the toggle switch to

4
switch over Overwrite and Insert

characters to be entered.
• (Insert)
After entering [ABCDE], move the
cursor behind [B] and enter [cde] to
change to [ABcdeCDE].
• (Overwrite)
Fig. 6.1.1-4 After entering [ABCDE], move the
Correcting Characters cursor behind [B] and enter [cde] to
change to [ABcde].
F5 Moving character string

Place the cursor at the tail of
character string or in the middle of
character string and press the [ENTER]
key to put a yellow frame onto the
character string (F5 of the function
menu changes to white characters).
In this state, the character string may
be moved within the screen. Use the
trackball or arrow keys to move the
string.
Fig. 6.1.1-5
Moving Character String If pressing the [ENTER] key again after
moving the string, the frame disappears
and F5 of the menu changes to gray
characters.
6-2 Q1E-EA0611
F6 Home position
By pressing toggle switch, the present cursor position is stored

6
into memory so that the cursor line is displayed from the position
when the character input mode was selected next.
NOTICE: When "HOME POSI" is selected in the function menu, the frame
is set to the selected condition momentarily.
6.1.2 Deleting characters

(1) Deleting characters
Select a character string as well as moving a character string
and press the Del key.
(2) Clearing all characters being displayed
Pressing Character
Clear
all clears the character string being displayed.
6.1.3 Ending entry

Character input function ends when one of below mentioned operation
is selected.
! When Character key is off.
! When current function is changed to another function menu.
! When the mode except CFM is changed.
! When Patient key is pushed.
! When the function is changed to VCR.
6.2 Entering Characters with Annotation
6.2.1 Calling ANNOTATION menu

Pressing Anno－
tation displays the character
cursor and ANNOTATION menu on the
screen.
The menu includes menus to designate
the position to display ANNOTATION by
region and type, and arrow mark menu.
Use the trackball or arrow keys to move
the cursor to any place where
ANNOTATION is to be located.
Selecting ANNOTATION page
Select "Prev. Page" or "Next Page" and
press [ENTER] key to change the menu
displayed. Select any ANNOTATION to
Fig. 6.2.1-1 ANNOTATION Cursor be called.
6-3 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Entering ANNOTATION
Use the [ENTER] key to select
ANNOTATION highlighted in the menu,
it is displayed on the screen with
a frame.
In this state, use the trackball
to move ANNOTATION to any location.
Fig. 6.2.1-2 Input & Move
(2) Fixing ANNOTATION

Press the [ENTER] key again at the
location desired. It turns to white
and the frame disappears.
Then the icon on the upper right
of screen changes from
to .
Fig. 6.2.1-3 ANNOTATION Fixed
(3) Arrow symbol

May be selected as well as the other ANNOTATION.
6.2.2 ANNOTATION function menu

Selecting the ANNOTATION mode displays the function menu as shown
below:
1st page
If selecting F1 SORT
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 6.2.2-1 Function Menu
6-4 Q1E-EA0611
F1 SORT: Sorting MAIN MENU (F2~F4)
Menu layout of default setting is in the order of alphabet. This
may be changed over to SORT by layout or clinical region.
Fig. 6.2.2-2 SORT
(2nd page)
F1 Character size
F2, F3 Character font
F4 Correcting characters
The same as those of the character mode
(See 6.1.1).
F7 Arrow menu
Switches over display/not display of
the ARROW menu.
7
Fig. 6.2.2-3 Arrow Menu
6-5 Q1E-EA0611
6.2.3 Display setting of ANNOTATION menu
Set display of the ANNOTATION menu by application in the Application
menu of Setup menu of Main Menu.
If starting the Application menu in Setup Menu, a list of Application
is displayed.
Double click the name of Application selected or click EDIT DATA
at the right side to edit setting of the Application selected.
If opening the ANNOTATION menu, default of the ANNOTATION entry
menu may be switched over to alphabetical order or purposeful order,
and display of the Arrow menu may be switched over.
END
Fig. 6.2.3-1 Display Setting
6.2.4 Ending ANNOTATION menu

Press the Anno－
tation key again or click the × mark at the upper right
corner of sub-window to clear all windows being displayed.
6-6 Q1E-EA0611
6.2.5 List of ANNOTATION
ANNOTATION registered to each diagnostic region differs by
APPLICATION. Fixed registrations are 232 items.
Table 6.2.5-1 ANNOTATION LIST-1

Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Abdominal Location LIVER Liver
RHV Right Hepatic Vein
MHV Middle Hepatic Vein
LHV Left Hepatic Vein
PV Portal Vein
IVC Inferior Vera Cava
Ao Aorta
GB Gallbladder
CBD Common File Duct
BD Bile Duct
SMA Superior Mesenteric Artery
SMV Superior Mesenteric Vein
CA Celiac Artery
PANCREAS Pancreas
MPD Main Pancreatic Duct
SPLEEN Spleen
SPA Splenic Artery
SPV Splenic Vein
KIDNEY Kidney
BLADDER Bladder
PROSTATE Prostate
UTERUS Uterus
STOMACH Stomach
Clinical CYST Cyst
MASS Mass
TUMOR Tumor
META Metastasis
HCC Hepatocellular Carcinoma
FATTY Fatty
ABSCESS Abscess
ASCITES Ascites
POLYP Polyp
SHADOW Acoustic Shadow
STONE Stone
Common R- Right-
L- Left-
SITTING Sitting
[Note 1] ( ) shows a name to be displayed in a menu.
6-7 Q1E-EA0611
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Cardiac Location LA Left Atrium
LV Left Ventricle
IVS Interventricular Septum
LVPW Posterior Wall of Left Ventricle
RA Right Atrium
RV Right Ventricle
MV Mitral Valve
AML Anterior Mitral Leaflet
PML Posterior Mitral Leaflet
AV Aortic Valve
Ao Aorta
AAo Ascending Aorta
DAo Descending Aorta
ARCH Aortic Arch
RCA Right Coronary Artery
LCA Left Coronary Artery
LMT Left Main Truck Coronary Artery
LAD Left Anterior Descending
LCX Left Circumflex
PA Pulmonary Artery
PV Pulmonary Valve
TV Tricuspid Valve
LVOT Left Ventricular Outflow Tract
LVIT Left Ventricular Inflow Tract
RVOT Right Ventricular Outflow Tract
RVIT Right Ventricular Inflow Tract
NCC Non-Coronary Cusp
LCC Left Coronary Cusp
RCC Right Coronary Cusp
LAA Left Atrial Appendage
SVC Superior Vena Cava
IVC Inferior Vena Cava
6-8 Q1E-EA0611
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Cardiac Clinical EFFUSION Effusion
VEC Vegetation
SAM Systolic Anterior Motion
THROMBUS Thrombus
MYXOMA Myxoma
VSD Ventricular Septal Defect
ASD Atrial Septal Defect
PDA Patent Ductus Arteriosus
HYPO Hypo
AKINESIS Akinesis
ANEURYSM Aneurysm
ENTRY Entry
REENTRY Reentry
TL True Lumen
FL False Lumen
IF Intimal Flap
TUMOR Tumor
Stress REST Rest
EXERCISE Exercise
L-DOSE Low Dose
H-DOSE High Dose
PEAK Peak Dose
POST Post Dose
RECOVERY Recovery
Common DIASTOLE Diastole
SYSTOLE Systole
TRANS Transverse
LONGI Longitudinal
AWAY Away
TOWARD Toward
PRE-OPE Pre Operation
POST-OPE Post Operation
6-9 Q1E-EA0611
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Vascular Location RCCA Right Common Carotid Artery
LCCA Left Common Carotid Artery
ICA Internal Carotid Artery
ECA External Carotid Artery
BIF Bifurcation
RCCV Right Common Carotid Vein
LCCV Left Common Carotid Vein
ICV Internal Carotid Vein
ECV External Carotid Vein
JUG-V Jugular Vein
VERT-A Vertebra Artery
S-TH-A Superior Thyroid Artery
I-TH-A Inferior Thyroid Artery
SUBCL-A Subclavian Artery
SUBCL-V Subclavian Vein
AX-A Axillery Artery
AX-V Axillery Vein
BRACH-A Brachial Artery
BRACH-V Brachial Vein
CEPH-V Cephalic Vein
BAS-V Basilic Vein
RAD-A Radial Artery
UL-A Ulner Artery
DIGITAL Digital
FEMORAL Femoral
CFA Common Femoral Artery
CFV Common Femoral Vein
GSV Greater Saphenous Vein
POP-A Popliteal Artery
POP-V Popliteal Vein
PER-A Peroneal Artery
PER-V Peroneal Vein
ATA Anterior Tibial Artery
ATV Anterior Tibial Vein
PTA Posterior Tibial Artery
PTV Posterior Tibial Vein
Clinical PLAQUE Plaque
ATHEROMA Atheroma
THROMBUS Thrombus
6-10 Q1E-EA0611
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Vascular Common R- Right-
L- Left-
ARTERY Artery
VEIN Vein
SUPERIOR Superior
INFERIOR Inferior
ANTERIOR Anterior
POSTERIOR Posterior
COMMON Common
INTERNAL Internal
EXTERNAL External
DISTAL Distal
DIASTOLE Diastole
SYSTOLE Systole
Ob/Gyn Location UTERUS Uterus
DOUGLAS Douglas
OVARY Ovary
FOLLICLE Follicle
GS Gestational Sac
YOLK-SAC Yolk Sac
FETUS Fetus
PLACENTA Placenta
BLADDER Bladder
UM-ARTERY Umbilical Artery
UM-VEIN Umbilical Vein
UT-ARTERY Uterine Artery
SPINE Spine
STOMACH Stomach
KIDNEY Kidney
CORD Umbilical Cord
Clinical CYST Cyst
TUMOR Tumor
MYOMA Myoma
CHOCOLATE Chocolate Cyst
DERMOID Dermoid
IUD Intrauterine Device
MOLE Mole
ECTOPIC Ectopic Pregnancy
IUGR Intrauterine Growth Retardation
TWINA Twin A
TWINB Twin B
Common R- Right-
L- Left-
ANTERIOR Anterior
POSTERIOR Posterior
CERVIX Cervix
FUNDUS Fundus
6-11 Q1E-EA0611
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Urology Location PROSTATE Prostate
DUCT Duct
SV Seminal Vesicle
EJ-DUCT Ejaculation Duct
TESTIS TESTIS
SCROTUM Scrotum
PENIS penis
URETHRA Urethra
BLADDER Bladder
PB Public Bone
Clinical PC Prostatic Cancer
BPH Benign Prostate Hypertrophy
TUMOR Tumor
MASS Mass
CYST Cyst
AMYLOID Amyloid
Common R- Right-
L- Left-
ANTERIOR Anterior
POSTERIOR Posterior
SAG Sagittal
TRANS Transverse
POST-OPE Post Operation
6-12 Q1E-EA0611
Region Category
Term Formal name
[Note 1] [Note 1]
Breast Location MAMMA Mammary Gland
COOPER Suspensory Of Cooper
SKIN Skin
FAT Fat
RIB Rib
NIPPLE Nipple
LN Lymph Node
DUCT Duct
PM Pectoral Muscle
Clinical TUMOR Tumor
MASS mass
CYST Cyst
MASTOPATHY Mastopahy
FA Fibroadenoma
PAPILLOMA Papolloma
LYMPHOMA Lymphoma
LIPOMA Lipoma
Common R- Right
L- Left
POST-OPE Post operation
Thyroid Location THYROID Thyroid
TRACHEA Trachea
THYROID-A Thyroid Artery
THYROID-V Thyroid Vein
RCCA Right Common Carotid Artery
LCCA Left Common Carotid Artery
ICV Internal Carotid Artery
ESOPHAGUS Esophagus
Clinical TUMOR Tumor
MASS Mass
CYST Cyst
BASEDOW Basedow disease
HASHIMOTO Hashimoto disease
GOITER Goiter
AMYLOID Amyloid Goiter
Common R- Right
L- Left
SUPERIOR Superior
MIDDLE Middle
INFERIOR Inferior
LOBE Lobe
6-13 Q1E-EA0611
6.2.6 Registration of user defined annotation
User defined annotation may be registered up to 20 words for 8
diagnostic regions (Max 160 items per preset).
(1) Starting registration menu
Press MAIN
MENU key to select "ANNOTATION"
in the SET UP submenu of MAIN MENU.
Fig. 6.2.6-1 Setup

(2) Selecting diagnostic region
When the User Def menu is displayed,
select diagnostic region of
ANNOTATION at the upper most field.
If clicking with the cursor, the
window of diagnostic region list is
extended downward. Click the name
of region to be designated to
display it in the field.
(3) Designating registration frame
Designate to which frame it is to
be registered. If not specified,
it is registered to the frame
highlighted in blue.
(4) Entering ANNOTATION
Enter any character string from the
Fig. 6.2.6-2 User Def.
alphanumeric keyboard.
(5) Registering ANNOTATION
Click the Register button to
register ANNOTATION.
6-14 Q1E-EA0611
(6) Example display
If the user registers, they are
displayed on the ANNOTATION menu as
follows:
! Listed in the alphabetical order:
Described in the alphabetical
order.
! Listed in the layout or clinical
order:
User Def page is added.
Fig. 6.2.6-3 User Def.
6.3 Entering Body Mark
6.3.1 Displaying body mark

(1) Initial display
Any body mark to be displayed by default when starting the
ultrasound scanner may be set in APPLICATION. Refer to Chapter
8 for details.
(2) Selecting a body mark with
displays 4 types of mark registered in APPLICATION every
time pressed.
Fig. 6.3-1 Order of Display
6-15 Q1E-EA0611
6.3.2 Moving body mark
When pressing the MODE
DEPENDEDkey and
selecting the "Move B.Mrk" in the second
page of function menu, use the trackball
to move the body mark to any location.
Fig. 6.3.2 Moving Body Mark
6.3.3 Deleting body mark
The body mark is deleted by pressing several times.
6.3.4 Moving position of probe mark
When selecting in the trackball

priority, use the trackball to move the
probe mark to any location.
Fig. 6.3.4-1 Moving Probe Mark
6.3.5 Adjusting angle of probe mark
Use to adjust angle of the probe
mark in the body mark.
And when selecting in the

trackball priority, it is possible to
adjust angle of the probe mark by moving
a trackball, pushing the ENTER key.
Fig. 6.3.5-1 Rotating Probe Mark
NOTICE: It is not displayed in the
body mark for heart.
6-16 Q1E-EA0611
6.3.6 Displaying upright position mark
UP Pressing while a body mark being
displayed, the characters "UP" is
displayed on the upper left of the body
mark.
Pressing again clears the upright
position mark.
Fig. 6.3.6-1 Upright Position Mark
6.4 Preset Operation function

Preset Operation function is a function to register comments and
body marks up to 32 steps at maximum and to use them by switching
over the display using a toggle switch of function menu.
6.4.1 The usage of a Preset Operation function

To utilize the Preset Operation function an advanced setting up
is necessary.
For further details refer to 6.4.2 Set up Preset Operation function.
Here in we explain you about the start of Preset Operation function
on an assumption that it is assigned to F1 (Function menu 1) of
USER
.
[How to use]
(1) Press USER

.
(2) Click down . The body mark and comments registered in the
step 1 are displayed.

When you want to change the display position of comment, use
a home position function of comment. For further details refer
to [6.1.1 Character input menu].
When you want to change the body mark display position, change
the initial display position of body mark with a set up menu
of application. For further details refer to [8.3.9 Body mark].
(3) When you want to move to next step, click down again .
6-17 Q1E-EA0611
To previous step
To next step
Fig 6.4.1-1 The change of a step
(4) In case is clicked down again in the final step, the step
returns to the step 1.
6.4.2 Set up Preset Operation

In order to utilize Preset Operation function 3 setting-ups as
mentioned below are required.
! Registration of step
! Setting up the start of Preset Operation
! Selection of Operation
(1) Registration of step

Registration of step is carried out with Preset Operation Setup
Menu. Select [Preset Ope.] in Main Menu/Setup and start the
Preset Operation Setup Menu.
[Registration procedure]
(a) Enter an operation name into [Name].
(b) When you register the body mark, select Region and select the
body mark you intend to register.
(c) In case you want to change the position of probe mark on the
body mark, use [Move] and [Rotate] buttons.
(d) When you want to register the comment, enter it into [Comment]
column.
(e) Click [Register] button.
(f) For registering as many steps as you want repeat procedures

(b) ~ (e). It is possible to register up to 32 steps.
(g) When you want to register different operations, click a blank

column below the registered name in the operation list and repeat
procedure (a) ~ (f). It is possible to register 8 items.
(h) When the registration of step is finished, confirm the content
of registered step and click [OK] button.
6-18 Q1E-EA0611
Fig 6.4.2-1 Set up Preset Operation dialog
(2) Setting up the start of Preset Operation

The start of Preset Operation can be assigned to function menu
of USER
or USER
. Here we explain you about the method to assign
it to F1 (function menu 1) of USER
.
[Assignment]
(a) Select [User Keys...] in Main Menu/Setup to start User Function
Menu Setup dialog.
(b) Select [Other] in [Category].
(c) Select [Preset Ope.] in [Function].
(d) Click the position of User1/Freeze Off/F1* in assignment and

click [Assign] button.
(e) Click the position of User1/Freeze On/F1* in assignment and

click [Assign] button.
(f) Confirm the content of registration and click [OK] button.
6-19 Q1E-EA0611
Fig 6.4.2-2 User Function Menu Setup dialog
NOTICE *: Assign it to any position according to your intending
way of use.
(3) Selection of operation

It is possible to set up Preset Operation according to
Applications.
[Setting up]
(a) Select [Application...] in Main Menu/Setup to start Application
menu. After that select an Application and click [Edit Data]
button. For further details refer to [8.2 Editing APPLICATION
Function].
(b) Select [Others] from items list.
(c) Select a menu sheet from [Other Menu 3].
(d) In [Select] of Preset Operation select a preset operation meeting

to your intending application.
(e) When you want to display the step number while the preset
operation function is being used, enter a check mark in [No
Display].
(f) Select [Prev. Command Menu] to return to the application command
menu, then click [Save] to save contents of setting so that
the application command menu is finished.
6-20 Q1E-EA0611
(g) Refer to [8.1 Switching over APPLICATION] and execute the set
application. After that you can use the set preset operation.
Fig 6.4.2-3 Edit Application dialog
6.4.3 Details of Preset Operation Setup Menu

If you select [Preset Ope.] in Main Menu/Setup, Setup Preset
Operation Menu is started.
(1)Operation list
(2) Registration contents
Body mark list
(3) Registration Item
Fig 6.4.3-1 Set up Preset Operation dialog
6-21 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Operation List
Operation list ： Registered Preset Operation is displayed as

a list. It is possible to register 8 items
at maximum.
Duplicate ： It is for duplicating Operations.
Delete ： It is for deleting Operations.
(2) Registration contents
Name ： It is for entering the name of Operation.

Body mark list ： It is for displaying registered body marks
as a list. It is possible to register up to
32 steps at maximum.
Comment ： It is for displaying comments step by step.
Insert ： It is for inserting the body mark of Mark Off
to selected steps.
Delete ： It is for deleting selected steps.
Comment list ： It is for displaying all comments of 32 steps.
Fig 6.4.3-2 Comment list dialog

(3) Registration Item
Region ： It is a list of body mark classified by body

regions. The body mark meeting to selected
body region to be examined is displayed.
6-22 Q1E-EA0611
Move ： It is for setting up to which part a probe
mark should be placed in the body mark. When
the button is clicked, it is possible to move
the probe mark using the trackball. After it
is moved, press [ENTER] key.
Rotate ： It is for setting up to which direction the

probe mark should be placed. When the button
is clicked, it is possible to rotate the probe
mark using the trackball. After it is rotated,
press [ENTER] key.
Comment ： It is for entering comments to display in the

step. When you click , you can select
[Character Clear]. When [Character Clear] is
selected, the comment entered in previous step
is deleted.
Fig 6.4.3-3 Select Character Clear

Register : It is for registering the set body mark and
comment.
6-23 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 7 Main Menu
The main menu allows any function having no exclusive key on the main
unit panel to be set and consists of multiple menus.
Items settable on the menu varies according to conditions of mode
and freeze.
Items displayed in gray on the menu can not be set under the current
condition of the equipment.
This section describes functions other than US related menus described
in Section 5 and contents related to mainly system setting and display
function.
7.1 Starting Main Menu
Press the MAIN

MENU key to display the menu at the left side of screen.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to any item and press the ENTER
button to newly open the lower level window (Sub-window) of the relevant
item. (Refer to 5.1.4)
Fig.7.1-1 Sub-menu
7.2 Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode
Refer to each ultrasound mode.
! B Menu : 5.2.12
! M Menu : 5.3.10
! Dop. Menu : 5.4.13
! CFM Menu : 5.7.12
! Physiology Menu : 5.8.4
7-1 222 Q1E-EA0611

7.3 Display Menu
Switches over settings of image display
related items.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 7.3-1 Display Menu

(1) B-Color (2) Gray Invert
Allows basic Inverts
colors to be set black/white of an
for each mode. image.
Also, items not
settable in the
mode at that time
are displayed in
gray (Refer to F7
of 5.2.10 MODE
DEPENDED (2nd
page)).
Fig. 7.3-2 B-Color Fig. 7.3-3 Gray Invert
(3) Background level

Switches over
bright-ness of
the background of
B image.
Fig. 7.3-4 Background level
7-2 Q1E-EA0611
7.4 Meas.Menu
Allows measurement functions to be selected.
Also, these functions are those to be selected after
Freeze; therefore, they cannot be selected when Freeze
Off.
Refer to the instruction manual of measurement for
details.
Fig. 7.4.1 Measurement Menu
7.5 Image Mem. Menu

A menu related (1) B:B_Split
to the cine memory. Normally records with
capacity of the cine memory as
for one screen. If checking
this box, the screen is split
into two parts and they are
recorded at the same time.
Fig.7.5-1 Image Memory Menu
(2) Frame No. (3) Review

Displays the frame number of Switches over the
cine memory by checkingthis auto playback
box. on/off and
playback speed.
Fig.7.5-2 Review
7-3 Q1E-EA0611
7.6 Image Data Transfer Menu
Transfer address of an image and format are switched.
Refer to 9.2.2 and 9.2.3 for the setting method of an item.
Note: When it is a setup which cannot choose the input column,
it changes to a gray display.
Fig. 7.6-1 Image Filing dialog

7.7 Recorder Menu
(1) VCR
A menu to Switches over video
switches over signal to S-VHS or
recording VHS.
methods.
Fig.7.7-2 Switching VCR
(2) Printer
Switches over print
waiting time.
Set it according to
Fig.7.7-1 Recorder Menu the printer.
Fig.7.7-3 Switching over Printer
7-4 Q1E-EA0611
7.8 Physiology Menu
(See 5.8.4 Main Menu.)
7.9 Setup Menu

A menu for various system setups
Fig.7.9-1 Setup Menu
(1) Application Menu

(See Section 8 Application.)
During image transferring, it becomes a gray and cannot choose.
(2) System Menu

A menu for system setups of the ultrasound
scanner
Fig.7.9-2 System Menu
7-5 Q1E-EA0611
(2-1) Date/Time
Set Date/Time
Sets Date, Time and Time zone
Date Format
Selects Date Format
Fig.7.9-3 Date/Time Menu

Date
! Year: Enter Year from the keyboard
or change it with "▲" or "▼"
on the screen.
! Month: Press "▼" to display a
window. Use the trackball to
specify month.
! Day: Use the trackball to move the
cursor to any appropriate day.
Time
Use the cursor to specify each item of
Fig.7.9-4 Date/Time "Hour", "Minute", "Second" and "AM/PM"
to highlight it and increment or
decrement with "▲" or "▼".
7-6 Q1E-EA0611
Time zone
Click the Time zone tag with the cursor
for time zone setting.
After setting, use the cursor to click
the OK button, or Cancel button if
previous setting is acceptable.
NOTICE: Internet Time cannot be used.
Fig.7.9-5 Time Zone

(2-2) Hosp. Name (See 4.6 Entering hospital name.)
(2-3) Char. Clear (See Chapter 6.)
(2-4) Key Click
Sets ON/OFF of the buzzer that beeps by pressing the keyboard
switches.
(2-5) Logo Mark
Changes display/non display of
"HITACHI" logo.
Fig.7.9-6 Logo Mark

Note: You cannot change what appears in the logotype.
(2-6) Soft. Option

Unprotect the software option.
＜CAUTION＞
Do not use this function if the system is started with the
System CD in an emergency.
7-7 Q1E-EA0611
(2-7) Foot SW
The pedal of the twin foot switch marked as USER (hereafter
referred to as the USER pedal) can be used to do "Print"(record
to a printing device), "Capture Start Stop"(start/stop 3D image
capture and wide view image capture ) or "Probe Select"(change
between probe 1 and probe 2).
＜CAUTION＞
Now, This function can be used, when option EZU-3D4/3D2S
and EZU-WS4 is purchased.
And EZU-FS2 is needed for this function.
Fig.7.9-7 Foot SW
a) Print/Capture Start Stop

The USER pedal is assigned to "Print" function. But, in 3D mode,
it is assigned to Start/Stop 3D and Wide View image capture.
When option EZU-3D4/3D2S and EZU-WS4 is not purchased, this is
grayed out.
b) Probe Select/Capture Start Stop

The USER pedal is assigned to "Probe Select" function. But, in
3D mode, it is assigned to Start/Stop 3D and Wide View image
capture. When option EZU-3D4/3D2S and EZU-WS4 is not purchased,
this is grayed out.
c) Only "Capture Start Stop"

The USER pedal is always assigned to "Capture Start Stop" function.
Except for 3D and Wide View mode, it is disabled. When option
EZU-3D4/3D2S and EZU-WS4 is not purchased, this is grayed out.
7-8 Q1E-EA0611
d) Only "Print"
The USER pedal is always assigned to "Print" function.
e) Only "Probe Select"

The USER pedal is always assigned to "Probe Select" function.
If you click the OK button, the change is saved. Clicking the Cancel
button restores the original setting.
(2-8) ScreenSaver
Screen saver function can be set.
a) Setting screen saver function
Fig.7.9-8 ScreenSaver
! Active: Changes over ON/OFF of the screen saver function.

Checking it OFF makes the screen saver function OFF
and disables time setting until starting the screen
saver and the Preview button for selection.
! Wait (minutes):
Enter time until starting the screen saver (1~60
minutes) from the keyboard, or use the ▲ and ▼ buttons
on the screen to select time.
! Preview: Starts the screen saver immediately. To end the screen
saver, press the UNDO key.
! OK: Saves contents edited on the ScreenSaver dialog.
! Cancel: Ends the screen saver without saving contents edited.
7-9 Q1E-EA0611
b) Starting screen saver
To start the screen saver, set Active on the Screen Saver dialog
to ON. Then set time until starting the screen saver and use
the OK button to save contents edited. The screen saver starts
when no panel operation is performed within the set time after
pressing the Freeze button. Also, pressing the Preview button
starts the screen saver.
c) When starting screen saver
When the screen saver starts, the UNDO key only is lit and enabled.
Other panel operations are disabled.
d) Ending screen saver
When the screen saver starts, pressing the UNDO key ends it and
returns to the screen before starting the screen saver.
(2-9) Software option
The list of optional software installed in the system is
displayed.
Contents of the list of optional software:
! Type : Type of optional software
! Content : Name of optional software
! Software Version : Software version
Fig. 7.9-9 Software Option List
7-10 Q1E-EA0611
(2-10) Trackball Sensitivity
It is possible to set up a trackball sensitivity to every trackball
priority.
Fig. 7.9-10 Trackball Sensitivity

The trackball sensitivity can be entered as a speed of trackball(1
~ 7) from keyboard for every trackball priority or it can be
changed using “ ” “ ” marks in the image.
! [OK] button :It is for recording contents edited by the
Trackball Sensitivity adjusting dialog.
! [Cancel] button :No recording is done.
The trackball priority which trackball sensitivity adjustment
is allowed is as shown below.
M mode beam line
Doppler mode beam line
CFM-ROI
Measurement caliper
Probe Mark
(3) Measurement Menu (See Section 11.)
(4) Annotation Menu(See Section 6.)
7-11 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Print / REC Key Menu (6) US Power Menu
Output Ultrasound power can be switched
signal can be over in three levels.
switched
over
according to L:Low
the printer M:Middle
being H:High
connected. (See 4.8.2)
Fig.7.9-11 Print REC Key Fig.7.9-12 US Power Menu

Menu
(7) Image Filing Menu(See Section 9.2.)

(8) Peripherals Menu
Set connection with the network and so on.
For the dialog box shown in Fig. 7.9.14, set

each item as shown in Table 7.9-1. Ask your
network administrator for these values before
performing these settings.
After you specify values, click the OK button,
the restart message dialog box appears as shown
in Fig. 7.9-15.
In this dialog box, click Yes to restart the
system.
Network… : Set network connection.

(Available if the optional Network
interface EZU-Pi6 is installed.)
Printer (SCSI) : Set connection with
the SCSI printer.
(Available if the optional SCSI
interface unit EZU-Pi1 is installed.)
Fig.7.9-13 Peripherals Menu
7-12 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 7.9-14 Network dialog
Table 7.9-1
Item Description
Computer Name Specify the name of the ultrasound equipment.
You will need to change the ultrasound equipment
name for each case in which a name is duplicated.
Work Group Change the work group name of the network
environment for the ultrasound equipment.
IP Address If you want to acquire an IP address from the
(and its DHCP server, select "Obtain an IP address from
specification method) a DHCP server".
IP Address Ask your network administrator for these values.
(in dotted-decimal
notation)
Subnet Mask Ask your network administrator for these values.
Default Gateway Ask your network administrator as needed for
these values.
WINS address Ask your network administrator as needed for
these values.
＜CAUTION＞
If "Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server" has been selected
in "IP Address (and its specification method)", when the
ultrasound equipment starts, it accesses the DHCP server
to acquire an IP address.
Before starting the ultrasound equipment, start the DHCP
server so that the server can be accessed.
If the ultrasound equipment cannot access the DHCP server,
startup of the equipment may fail.
7-13 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 7.9-15 Restart message
Response check: Conduct a check on response from the destination

PC.
When you click the Response check button, the Check
Network Response window shown in Fig. 7.9-16
appears.
Specify the IP address of the destination PC, and
click the check button.
If connection succeeds, the Response Check
Succeeded message shown in Fig. 7.9-17 appears.
If connection fails, the Response Check Failed
message shown in Fig. 7.9-18 appears. If this
message appears, check and correct the network
connection and conduct a response check again.
Fig. 7.9-16 Check Network Response window
Fig. 7.9-17 Response Check Succeeded message
Fig. 7.9-18 Response Check Failed message
7-14 Q1E-EA0611
(9) Backup data Menu
Use for system data management.

Copy : Saves current settings to the CD-RW
disk.
Install : Loads the backup data if saved in the
CD-RW disk.
CAUTION
Any data saved by this function will
be helpful for troubleshooting. Make
Fig.7.9-19 Backup Data Menu backup copies at least once a month and
keep them for later use.
NOTICE:
! During data backup, a title bar may appear in the
ultrasound-image display area or image refreshing may
temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena occurs, wait
until the data copy or installation terminates.
! Do not save backup data to CD-R.
(10) Auto Freeze (See 4.3 Setting Automatic Freeze function.)
(11) Image Print Menu
Set any format for multi image printer output.
(See Appendix AA)
7-15 Q1E-EA0611
(12) User keys
USER USER
Two kinds of function menus ( 1 , 2 ) can be defined freely.
The definable menu is only one item in USER1 and USER2. It can
be set independently of each other in freeze off mode and freeze
on mode. The first, select the function, and then execute by
pressing Assign button.
Incase of un-selectable function, Assign button is ghost display.
Entry method
The function can be entered by
pressing Assign button after
selecting a desired assignment
position to be defined, and then, a
desired sort and function to be
entered. The set condition is stored
into memory by pressing OK button.
After setting ,settled function menu
Fig. 7.9-20 User defined
function menu is displayed by pressing the
USER
USER
1 2 .
Also the entered function can be
reset by Delete or Delete All button.
(13) Preset Ope. （See 6.4 Preset Operation function）
7.10 Disk Menu

Disk Menu is used for starting various kinds of function
of memory disk connected to the main unit.
Fig. 7.10-1 Disk Menu
(1) MO Eject(Available if the optionally MO Driver unit EZU-MO1 is

loading.)
With this function it is possible to remove the MO in MO drive.
7-16 Q1E-EA0611
(2) CD Eject
With this function it is possible to remove the CD-R/RW in CD drive.
It takes some time to eject the disk.
When you eject a CD-R disk, the following menu is displayed.
Fig. 7.10-2 Drag-to-Disc Eject Option

• Make this disc readable on any CD or DVD drive.
Select this when you want to read this disk with a CD-ROM
or DVD-ROM drive connected to a PC with no Drag-to-Disc
installed.
If you check the box marked ‘Make this disk readable on any
CD or DVD drive, the parts of ghost become usable.
Click ‘Advanced’, then the Advanced Eject Settings dialog
is displayed.
Choose one of the following options.
UDF : This option allows the ejected disk to be readable
only on Windows systems.
Ejecting a disk with this option is quicker than with
the ISO option.
ISO : This option allows the ejected disk to be readable
on any kind of computer systems.
Ejecting a disc takes longer time than with UDF option.
Please do not select both of the above-mentioned options
together on the same disc.
Fig. 7.10-3 Drag-to-Disc Advanced Eject Option
7-17 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE:
The dialog box shown below may be displayed onscreen when
the computer begins to read the CD-R.
Fig. 7.10-4 Roxio Setup Wizard
Click the [Yes] button to install the UDF Reader. Installing

this program will enable the computer to read the CD-R.
• Protect disc so that it cannot be written to again.
Select this to close the disk as a read-only disk. If you
select this setting, the disk no longer accepts any writing.
When you eject a CD-RW disk, the following message is displayed.
Fig. 7.10-5 Drag-to-Disc Preparation
CAUTION
• Never uncheck the "Always show this dialog when ejecting a disc"
checkbox. Once you uncheck this checkbox, you must consult our
service engineer in order to restore the checkbox setting.
• When you eject a CD, a dialog is displayed(Fig. 7.10-2
Drag-to-Disc Eject Option). If it overlaps with other operations,
the dialog may not be displayed. Press the [Tab] key while pressing
the [Alt] key and select the mark of the following
right-hand side to appear the dialog.
NOTICE:
To eject a CD, be sure to use a menu, not the Eject button
on the CD drive. If you use the Eject button to eject a CD,
the CD may become non-rewritable.
7-18 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Disk View
This is to display files in the
memory disk.
a) When a disk name is clicked,
contents in sub level are
displayed.
b) If a folder is selected, data
in the folder are displayed.
Fig. 7.10-6 Disk View
(4) FD Format
This is for formatting a floppy disk.
! Enter the name of floppy disk
into Volume Label.
! Press Start button.
Fig. 7.10-7 FD Format
7-19 Q1E-EA0611
(5) MO Format (available only when the EZU-MO1 MO drive unit is
installed)
Formats the MO disk.
(See Appendix G. Formatting CD-R/RW and MO Disks.)
This is displayed only when the EZU-MO1 MO drive unit is installed.
(6) CD Format
Formats the CD-R/RW.
(See Appendix G. Formatting CD-R/RW and MO Disks.)
NOTICE: When you use commercially available CD-R/RW or MO disks

to record images and other data, be sure to use the ones
formatted for Windows. Format the CD-R/RW or the MO disk,
following the instruction in Appendix G. Formatting CD-R/RW
and MO Disks.
NOTICE: During access to a CD-R/RW or MO drive, a title bar may
appear in the ultrasound-image display area or image
refreshing may temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena
occurs, wait until the access terminates.
(7) Status
The image preservation situation in a hard disk, CD, MO, etc. is
displayed.
Moreover, the image number of sheets saved temporarily at the hard
disk is displayed on image printers such as PC printer and a DICOM
printer.
Availability (Images) displays how many numbers the still image
of a color can save about by the present format.
NOTICE:
・ When the format of images compressed such as JPEG (Lossy)
and TIFF (Pack Bitz) is chosen, the size of a picture is
decided after compression. Therefore, it is before and after
transfer and size may not change.
・ Information is not updated when CD, MO, etc. are replaced
with status dialog displayed.
Once, please close status dialog and open again.
When media are not contained in the drive, it is not displayed

on disk status.
"Status" can be assigned to USER1 key and USER2 key.
7-20 Q1E-EA0611
In User defined function menu, please choose "Other" by Category,
choose "Status" by Function, and assign. Please refer to "7.9 Setup
menu" about the User defined function menu.
Fig. 7.10-8 Status
7-21 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function
APPLICATION is a function to register initial state of the equipment

in advance for easy use. Max 10 kinds of initial states may be registered.
PROBE
Use the key to select it.
8.1 Switching over APPLICATION

PROBE
First of all, press the key to display the Select Probe with
Application menu.
Fig. 8.1-1 Select Probe with Application
Even when starting for the first time, basic APPLICATION (see above)
has been already registered. When the diagnostic region is to be
changed, Click a corresponding item in the application selection
column.
8-1 243 Q1E-EA0611

8.2 Editing APPLICATION Function
APPLICATION functions may be edited, added and deleted in accordance
with diagnostic uses.
MAIN
MENU
Fig.8.2-1 APPLICATION Menu
Use the MAIN

MENU key to open the main menu and select APPLICATION of the
Set menu. APPLICATION Menu opens.
By selecting a probe to be edited from Probe menu ,the present entry

application is displayed in Application View.
For various operations, use the cursor to click the switch at the
right side. Some functions open its window or directly runs.
8-2 Q1E-EA0611
8.2.1 Current Condition
APPLICATION is made based on the
current conditions of equipment.
It is possible to overwrite on
existing APPLICATION or to make
a new APPLICATION. In case of
overwriting on the existing
APPLICATION a message for
confirmation as shown in left
figure is displayed.
Max. 10 application items can be
newly added every probe.
Fig.8.2.1-1 Current Condition

<CAUTION>
When you overwrite between the applications of the different
diagnostic purpose, the following messages may be displayed and
you may be unable to overwrite.
In this case, please overwrite between the applications of the

same diagnostic purpose.
Fig.8.2.1-2 Overwrite Error Message
8-3 Q1E-EA0611
8.2.2 Edit Data
Allows each mode and each item to be set in details (Refer to 8.3).
8.2.3 Copy & Paste

Allows already set items to be copied. By editing each APPLICATION
copied, more flexible APPLICATION may be used.
<CAUTION>
Cannot be performed paste between different probes.
(1) Copying items

Move the cursor to any item to
be copied (Ex: Adult Abdomen),
and click the Copy button in
the screen.
Contents is copied and
temporally stored in the
memory in equipment.
(Until the item to be copied
is selected, Paste cannot be
selected).
Fig.8.2.3-1 Copy
8-4 Q1E-EA0611
Select a copy destination by
clicking [ ] mark in
Application View.
Then click Paste button.
Copied item is registered in
Application View.
As for item name, similar name
is automatically attached to
avoid duplication with the
item to be copied.
Fig.8.2.3-2 Paste
8.2.4 Delete
It is possible to delete APPLICATION data newly made or the group.
APPLICATION data registered at the delivery time from factory can
not be deleted.
Move the cursor to the target for deletion and click the Delete
button, then the deletion is conducted.
8.2.5 Edit Name

Move the cursor to any name to be edited and click the Edit Name
button. The name frame opens and characters are highlighted.
At this time, use the alphanumeric keys to edit the name.
8.2.6 Default application setting

Select APPLICATION to be executed when the power ON. Click Set
default Application button after selecting an application name
from Application View. The selected application name is displayed
blue.
8-5 Q1E-EA0611
8.2.7 Ending edit
(1) Save
Saves contents edited.
(2) Close
Ends (returns to the Setup menu) without recording.
Click the NO button in following dialog.
Fig 8.2.7-1 Confirmation dialog
8-6 Q1E-EA0611
8.3 Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter setting menu>
Selecting "Edit Data" in the Application menu allows parameters to
be set in detail by diagnostic area or diagnostic region.
8.3.1 APPLICATION parameter setting menu
Fig. 8.3.1-1 Edit Application (Example: B Menu)
Current: (At the left bottom of screen) Name of Probe and

Application being edited
Item View: (At the left side of screen) Switches over items
that can be edited.
Move the cursor with the trackball to highlight
the item name, and then press the Enter key.
Sheet change: Some items may be divided into several sheets.

Click any tag at the top of sheet to switch over
the sheet.
End of setting: Click the Prev. Command Menu button (at the right
bottom of screen) to return to the Command Menu
screen.
8-7 Q1E-EA0611
8.3.2 B-Mode Menu
(1) B Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.2-1 B Menu 1

Display Depth Size
Initial Display depth of B-mode in the probe
frequency
Frequency Initial frequency setting and dTHI mode selection
(Reso./Gene./Pene.)
View Angle View angle of B-mode image in the probe (6 steps
of 1 ~ 6)
Vertical Shift Initial value of vertical display position on the
B-mode image (-20 ~ 190mm)
Focus
Position Method to control focus setting of the B-mode image
Step Number of steps for focus region (1 ~ 4)
Execute Stand-Off
Designates focus depth correction with the
observation coupler mounted to the linear probe
for body surface organ
Initial Focal Zone
Initial focus region in each probe (F1 ~ F8)
Initial Mode Initial setting when selecting the dTHI
compatible probe.
8-8 Q1E-EA0611
(2) B Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.2-2 B Menu 2

Scan Line Density
Initial setting of Scan line Density of B-mode
image.
IMAGE PROCESS
Dynamic Range Dynamic range for B-mode image
Enhance Axial Setting of image enhancement in axial
direction for B-mode (1~ 4)
Enhance Lateral
Setting of image enhancement in lateral
direction for B-mode (1 ~ 4)
AGC (Auto Gain Control)
Grade of reducing high brightness echo level
(0 ~ 3)
Persistence
Grade of frame interpolation in mode image
(0 ~ 7)
Receiving Filter
Selection of image quality control function
(A ~ C)
Gray Map Selects the gray map for B mode image
Patient Depended Compensation
Function to adjust parameters due to
difference by patients. (1 ~ 7)
Region Diagnostic region for IMAGE PROCESS
8-9 Q1E-EA0611
(3) B Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.2-3 B Menu 3
Initial Gain Initial gain for B-mode

Fundamental Normal use
dTHI offset dTHI use (Fundamental gain + dTHI offset )
Scan Orientation
Normal Orientation of B-mode image in the normal probe
BIPLANE-T Orientation of B-mode image in transaxial plane of
the biplane probe
BIPLANE-L Orientation of B-mode image in transaxial plane of
the biplane probe
Depth Gain Control
MODE Control method (Fixed/Variable) on the DEPTH GAIN
CONTROL bar
Display Curve
Selects display of graphic curve for setting DGC
on the screen
Steering Mark Display
Selects display of steering mark showing scan range
when setting the normal display in the wide view
display probe.
8-10 Q1E-EA0611
Combine Mode
Selects execution of image connecting function to
intentionally obtain wide view with gap between
images eliminated in the B image dual screen display.
ECG Sync Delay Time
Setting to recognize SYNC1 and SYNC2 by
intentionally providing ECG delay time.
Initial Display Number of screen initially displayed in the
B-mode image
Thermal Index Setting thermal index Displaying.
8.3.3 M-Mode Menu

(1) M Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.3-1 M Menu

Image Split Switches over display layout of B/M image.
L/R: Left/right layout, U/D: Up/down layout
Depth Range Control
Switches over display depth of M-mode image
Simultaneous: B+M, Independent: M
Sweep Speed Screen sweep speed in the M-mode image and D-mode
image
Image Process
Dynamic Range
Dynamic range for M-mode image
Enhance Setting of enhancement for M-mode image
AGC Grade of reduction of high brightness echo level
8-11 Q1E-EA0611
Initial Gain Initial gain for M-mode
dTHI offset dTHI use (Fundamental gain(M) + dTHI offset )
M Blanking Setting of display width of M-mode image in the
vertical direction
(2) ODM Menu
(Refer to 5.10)
8.3.4 D-Mode Menu

(1) D Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.4-1 D Menu 1

Image Split Switches over display layout B/D image.
L/R: Left/Right layout
U/D: Up/Down layout
Doppler Mode Initial setting of PW or CW mode when pressing
the Doppler Mode Selection key
REF Reference frequency to detect PW or CW Doppler
in each probe
PRF Control
Auto PRF Sets repetitive frequency in the PW Doppler mode
(Auto/manual)
Initial Doppler pulse repetitive frequency in the PW/CW
Doppler image or max detection frequency in the
PW/CW Doppler mode image
Sample Length Width (detection area) of Doppler sample points
8-12 Q1E-EA0611
Initial Gain Initial gain value for D-mode (PW/CW)
B-Refresh B-mode image refresh
mode(Simultaneous/Interval)
(2) D Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.4-2 D Menu 2

Image Process
Wall Filter (PW)
Initial setting for PW-mode of low pass filter
frequency to remove unnecessary Doppler
components due to wall motion and so on
Wall Filter (CW)
Initial setting for CW-mode of low pass filter
frequency to remove unnecessary Doppler
components due to wall motion and so on
ANALYSIS Number of FFT analysis point in D-mode image
(Hi-Resolution/Hi-Response)
FFT-γ Dynamic range for D-mode
Doppler Expand
Displays D-mode image expanded in PW-mode
Simultaneous scan
Interval Time ECG On Refresh time in PW-mode B image refresh
scan mode when displaying ECG waveform
ECG Off Refresh time in PW-mode B image refresh
scan mode when not displaying ECG
waveform
Flow Invert Inverts waveform display in D-mode image
8-13 Q1E-EA0611
Angle Bar
Angle Angle to Doppler Line of the angle correction bar
in the Doppler mode (just after switchover)
Display Designates on/off of displaying the angle
correction bar in the Doppler mode (Just after
switch over)
Oblique Scan Angle
Sets oblique scan angle of D-mode image in the
linear probe.
Scale Designates displaying a (flow) marker in D-mode
image
(3) D Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.4-3 D Menu 3

Unit Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display.
Angle On Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display when
displaying the angle correction bar in D-mode
image display from m/s and cm/s.
Angle Off Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display when
not displaying the angle correction bar in D-mode
image display from m/s and cm/s.
Setting Cursor Selects output of Doppler sound while moving
Doppler sample point.
Base Line Position
Sets position to display the base line when
selecting Doppler mode.
8-14 Q1E-EA0611
CFM ROI Moves CFM ROI following the Doppler sample point
in CFM mode.
8.3.5 CFM-Mode Menu

(1) CFM-Mode Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.5-1 CFM Menu 1
Color Map
Region Designates color map combination by diagnostic
region (Cardiac/Others) in CFM-mode image.
Cardiac Mode Selects to start which of CFI or CFA when starting
color map setting in Cardiac (when Cardiac is
selected in Region).
Others Mode Selects which of CFI and CFA is to be started when
starting color map setting other than Cardiac (when
selecting Others in Region item).
Color Scale Selects display of color scale in CFM-mode image
display.
Dual CFM (CFI/CFA)
A function to display dual screen simultaneous CFM
mode display.
Allows color map to be designated individually for
each L/R screen.
8-15 Q1E-EA0611
(2) CFM-Mode Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.5-2 CFM-Mode Menu 2
REF Reference frequency in the CFI/CFA mode

PRF Repetitive frequency of Doppler pulse in CFI/CFA
separate mode image
Priority
Frame Rate Priority is given to CFM frame rate
Sensitivity Priority is given to CFM sensitivity.
Restricts PRF of CFM not to exceed PRF set in Max.
Operating PRF when CFM B image scan.
With this, CFM sensitivity can be kept unchanged
even if shifting ROI up/down.
Scan Line Density
Scan line density of CFI/CFA separate mode image.
Color ROI
Marker Switches over display/non-display of frame
showing a range for CFM-mode image display
Shape Switches over shapes of display frame (CFM ROI)
showing a range for CFM-mode image display.
Box Sector trapezoid for Convex and Sector, and
rectangle for Linear.
Standard Sector from arc center for Convex and Sector, and
rectangle touching body surface for Linear
8-16 Q1E-EA0611
(3) CFM-Mode Menu 3
Color Box
Fixed-B A function to acquire more precise CFM image by
making display angle of B/W image the same width
as that of CFM region.
Width Initial range of color display in CFM image display
(angle and width)
Height Initial range of color display in CFM image display
(Height)
Initial Gain
Initial gain value for CFM-mode (CFI/CFA)
8-17 Q1E-EA0611
(4) CFM-Mode Menu 4
Image Process Allows image details to be adjusted separately for

CFI and CFA
CFM Filter Level of low cut filter to remove frequency
components unnecessary for viewing in CFM-mode
image
Packet Size Minimum unit size to detect color information in
CFM-mode image
A. Suppress. Grade of removing body motion in CFM-mode image
display
Smoothing Designates smoothing process level in CFM-mode
image display
Persistence Designates persistence (Color SCC) process level
in CFM-mode image display
Variance Grade (emphasis) of velocity variance when
displaying CFM-mode image with the color map as
velocity-velocity variance or variance
Dynamic Range Dynamic Range for CFA-mode image
8-18 Q1E-EA0611
(5) CFM-Mode Menu 5
B-Refresh Sets refresh scan mode of B-mode image in dual screen

simultaneous display of CFM-mode image and M-mode
image or Doppler mode.
Preference Sets CFI and CFA individually.
Mode Designates method of preference to display color
display image or B/W display image (Auto/Manual)
Level Brightness level of B/W display image to be a reference
threshold when giving preference to display color
display image in executing PRIORITY function in the
CFM-mode.
Peak Hold
Interval Time
ECG On Time to add color display component in the peak hold
function when displays ECG waveform in the CFM-mode.
ECG Off Time to add color display component in the peak hold
function when displays no ECG waveform in the CFM-mode.
CFM key Sets CFM-mode key behavior on CFM-mode.
CFI/CFA CFM-mode (CFI/CFA) is changed alternately.
CFM off CFM-mode is off.
8-19 Q1E-EA0611
8.3.6 Display
(1)Display Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.6-1 Display Menu 1
Color Rejection
Lower limit to reject velocity in color display
velocity of CFM image
B Color
Execute Selects execution of pseudo color against B/W image
B Mode γ table map for pseudo color against B-mode image
M Mode γ table map for pseudo color against M-mode image
D Mode γ table map for pseudo color against D-mode image
Gray Invert
B Mode Selects polarity of screen display of B-mode image
MD Mode Selects polarity of screen display of M and D-mode
image
Background Level
Switches over brightness of background of B-mode
image.
8-20 Q1E-EA0611
(2)Display Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.6-2 Display Menu 2
B Post Processing
Curve Shape of the correction curve in γ correction of
displayed image
γ γ coefficient in γ correction of displayed image
Sat. Upper limit of brightness to be saturated in γ
correction of displayed image
Rej. Lower limit of brightness to be rejected in γ correction
of displayed image
Cent. Level of inflection point in γ correction of the S-shape
curve
M/D Post Processing
Curve Shape of the correction curve in γ correction of
displayed image
γ γ coefficient in γ correction of displayed image
Sat. Upper limit of brightness to be saturated in γ
correction of displayed image
Rej. Lower limit of brightness to be rejected in γ correction
of displayed image
Cent. Level of inflection point in γ correction of the S-shape
curve
γ-Curve
Display On
Designates to display γ–curve on the image.
8-21 Q1E-EA0611
8.3.7 Annotation Menu
Fig. 8.3.7-1 Annotation Menu 1
Region Designates a terminology set by diagnostic field

to be used in the annotation function
Ordering Order to display terminology in the initial
terminology screen when starting the annotation
menu.
Alphabetical
Order of alphabet: Arranges terms in the spelled
order.
Purposeful Order of contents: Arranges terms in the order of
contents such as region or clinical terms in
respective diagnostic area.
Arrow Menu Selects displaying the arrow menu.
8-22 Q1E-EA0611
8.3.8 Measurement menu
Set the measurement menu starting from the MEAS MENU

key.
(1) Measurement Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.8-1 Measurement Menu 1
Region Designates a set of measurement functions to be

displayed when pressing the Measurement menu key.
Keep Locus In Freeze-Off
Designates to automatically clear measurement
result being displayed at Freeze OFF.
Continue Calip, Trace in Freeze-Off
Designates to continue Calip, Trace measurement
at Freeze OFF
8-23 Q1E-EA0611
Allows measurement functions used frequently to be assigned to
the function keys (F5 ~ F7) of the Mode Depended menu.
Region Not effective on this page but on the 1st page

B Mode/M Mode/ D Mode
Indicates items to be displayed with the function
menu of each mode.
Measurement Lists names of measurement equation
When contents of setting are to be changed, select any name of

measurement equation after selecting (clicking ○) the function
key to be changed.
Upon changing the contents of setting, the function key selection
proceeds to the next item.
8-24 Q1E-EA0611
Initial Location of Result Menu

Sets location for measurement results.
Result Frame Lines
Switches over longitudinal length (number of lines) of
display area. If the display area at the bottom of screen
is switched over, number of lines corresponding to it
is displayed.
Fig. 8.3.8-4
Setting of Result
Frame Lines
8-25 Q1E-EA0611
Move Pressing the Move key turns inside the display frame
blue showing that the moving mode is effective.
Move the mouse to move the measurement display area.
If pressing ENTER key again, it is restored where it
moved.
Fig. 8.3.8-5 Moving Result Area
8.3.9 Body mark
Sets the Body mark being switched by button
(1) Body Mark menu 1
Fig. 8.3.9-1 Body Mark Menu 1
8-26 Q1E-EA0611
Body Mark Region
Menu of Body Mark to be selected by region. Select
to highlight any of them for displaying the mark
corresponding to the Body Mark menu to the right.
Body Mark Menu
Displays marks registered for a diagnostic region.
These may be displayed and selected in the Body Mark
menu of function menu.
If there are more body
marks, clicking the
triangles at the lower
right corner to scroll
pages, next body marks
are displayed.
Fig. 8.3.9-2Next Page
Rotation Press the center of button to display Body
Mark in the order of Rotation
Set Probe Mark Sets the Probe Mark (arrow mark) on Body Mark
to be displayed for each Rotation. The mark
selected with a black dot in Rotation is
displayed.
Move Sets where the Probe Mark is to be located.

Click the button and use the trackball to move
it. As soon as pressing ENTER key after
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
setting, display is changed and selection moves

to the next mark.
Rotate Sets in which direction the Probe Mark is to
be rotated. Click Rotate button and use the
trackball to rotate it. As soon as pressing
COLOR
ENTER
key after setting, display is changed
POSI/SIZE
and selection moves to the next mark.

Initial Switches over setting of the Body Mark when
starting the system or changing Application.
Display On Displays the Body Mark when starting the scanner
(not displayed if not selected).
8-27 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Body Mark Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.9-3 Initial Location of Body mark
Initial Location of Body Mark

Sets location to display the Body Mark.
B Sets location to display the Body Mark in the B-mode
image 1 screen.
B/B-L Sets location to display the Body Mark at the L screen
side in the B-mode image 2 screen.
B/B-R Sets location to display the Body Mark at the R side
screen in the B-mode image 2 screen.
B/MD Sets location to display the Body Mark in the
simultaneous dual screen display of B-mode image
and M(D)-mode image.
8-28 Q1E-EA0611
8.3.10 Others Menu
(1) Others Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.10-1 Others Menu 1
Cine Memory
Memory Allocation
Designates recording mode of the cine memory
function.
B Mode
B:B-Split Sets cine memories left/right
independent in the B image dual screen display
Frame no. Display

Displays frame No. at the right side of screen.
8-29 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Others Menu 2
(This menu is displayed when EZU-EK25 is installed.)
Physiology
Sweep Speed Sets sweep speed of various physiological signal
waveforms.
ECG
Display Displays ECG waveform.
Position Vertical position to display waveform
L/R: Left/Right layout
U/D: Up/Down layout
Gain Amplitude of waveform
HPF Designates level of the High Pass Filter (DC variance
filter) in the ECG waveform display function
8-30 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Others Menu 3
New Patient
Execute Application
Designates whether to execute calling the
Application set item when New Patient key ON
or not
Save Measurement Result Automatically
This sets whether the measurement result is
saved or not with New Patient key pressed.
Trackball Priority
Track ball priority for Real time, Freeze (B/W)
and Freeze (CFM) is set respectively.
Realtime Freeze OFF
Freeze (B/W) Freeze ON with B/W-mode
Freeze (CFM) Freeze ON with CFM-mode
V.SHIFT Sets it to the function for moving an image

vertically
Steering Sets it to the function for steering an image
Probe Mark Sets it to the function for moving a probe mark.
Cine Sets it to the function for playing back of image
memory
No Select Sets it to the no selection
8-31 Q1E-EA0611
Function Menu Selects the initial display menu of function
menu.
Select Menu Selects the initial display menu of function
menu.
OFF Displays no function menu.
Mode Depended Mode depended menu
Image Process Image Process menu
Physio The menu for ECG functions is displayed.
3D The menu for 3D function is displayed.
(only when the EZU-3D4/3D2S is installed).
Option Displays the menu for optional functions (only
when the EZU-WS4 is installed).
User1 The function key that user define.
User2 The function key that user define.
Assign Option Key
Select the functions to be assigned to the
Function Menu displayed when the Options key
is pressed (only when the EZU-WS4 is installed).
Base The menu (base menu) for selection of option
is displayed.
Wide View Displays the Wide View function menu
If the option that is not allowed to use is selected by Assign

Option key, the Base menu is displayed.
Speaker Sets functions of the Speaker

Volume Initial setting of Speaker Volume
Preset Operation
Preset Operation is set up.
Select Preset Operation to be used is chosen.
No. Display It is a setup of whether to display a step number.
8-32 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 9 Image memory unit
9.1 Image memory
As a large capacity image memory unit is incorporated in the scanner,

it is possible to store and replay easily image information acquired
during the examination without distortion of image quality.
(1) Cine-memory function

This is for storing live images and it is possible to store images
of designated mode.
• Continuous record mode
With this mode live images can be recorded continuously without
any gap. In the time of replay it is possible to replay all the
recorded images in continuous loop (speed variable), in forward
or reverse frame by frame.
• Automatic heart beat detection mode (ECG on).
ECG wave is recorded together with live images.
In replaying time the continuous loop between the first R-wave
and the last wave is replayed. So, it is possible to observe
replay images with good continuity between both ends of loop.
In addition forward feed or reverse feed of every frame is allowed
so that all the recorded images can be displayed.
• M (D) image record mode
M-mode image and D-mode image can record.
(2) Image filing function

• Store to Hard Disk function
It is possible to store images being displayed on the monitor as
BMP (bit map) images up to 300 images. Retrieve of stored images
is easy so that this is best suited for a temporal record during
the examination. This mode can be used in B/M, B/D, 1 image of
M-mode and D-mode, and 2 display images (one freeze image or two
live images).
• Image Transfer function

Images are converted into single image in BMP, TIFF and JPEG, or
live images of AVI format, and those can be transferred in CD-R/RW,
Floppy Disk Drive or MO Drive(option). It is also possible to convert
and transfer the image stored at the hard disk.
9-1 275 Q1E-EA0611

• Filing function
This function is to retrieve and manage image and it functions to
read stored images freely and to delete unnecessary images and
replace them with new ones.
NOTICE:
To insert a CD, press the eject button to open the tray, and place
the disk on the tray.
<CAUTION>
You cannot delete or overwrite image data recorded to CD-R. As
such, you should use CD-RW whenever possible, and only use CD-R
when you want to write a batch of image data in one sitting.
<CAUTION>
1. In the time of image retrieve, do not remove the probe being
selected from the probe connector. If it is removed, there
may be a case that scanner unit may function erroneously.
2. Do not eject the media while CD-R/RW, MO or FD is transferring
image data, in addition to the device malfunctioning, the
media may become corrupted, and therefore unusable.
3. Hitachi cannot be held responsible for any data loss due to
an accident, malfunction, or erroneous operation, so be sure
to backup any important data.
4. To eject a CD, be sure to use a menu, not the Eject button
on the CD drive. If you use the Eject button to eject a CD,
the CD may become non-rewritable.
NOTICE:
You can use MO only when the EZU-MO1 MO drive unit is installed
9-2 Q1E-EA0611
9.2 Image filing function
9.2.1 Store to Hard Disk function

(1) Record of image
When is pressed, an ultrasound image at that moment is recorded

S-WRITE
in the Hard Disk.
NOTICE:
• Max. 300 images can be stored in the Hard Disk.
• The recorded data do not include "Main menu", "Annotation menu",
and etc., but do only ultrasound image and a small part of the
dialogs. The recordable dialogs are "Patient Menu dialog",
"Measurement Report", "Graph for Fetal Age".
• The patient information for the recorded dialog of the
measurement("Measurement Report" and "Graph for Fetal Age") is
the current patient information.
• Memory is hold even if the power is put off.
While image is being recorded, mark is displayed at upper right
position in the display.
<CAUTION>
When attempting to record images exceeding 300, the following
message appears and the images cannot be stored in the Hard
Disk. Delete files in the Hard Disk or transfer them to the
other media.
Fig. 9.2-1 Hard Disk full message

The following message is displayed, when ID or name of Patient
is not inputted and being stored. Please choose [Yes], when
you store then. Please choose [No], when you store after
inputting ID or Name.
Fig. 9.2-2 No patient name message
NOTICE: You cannot transmit freeze images when Freeze OFF.
9-3 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Filing dialog
When is pressed during freeze ON, Filing dialog for retrieving

READ
recorded images is displayed.
Selected (blue frame)
Fig. 9.2-3 Filing dialog

NOTICE: If the amount of recorded data is large, a title bar may
appear in the ultrasound-image display area or image
refreshing may temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena
occurs, wait until the data loading terminates.
(a) Selection of image
In the center of Filing dialog reduced images (thumbnail) of
recorded images are displayed. In case there are more than 10
images, operate "▲""▼" at right side or a cursor (scroll bar)
to switch images.
When the image to be replayed is clicked, it is surrounded by
blue frame.
Next, if another thumbnail is clicked, the selected thumbnail
is surrounded with blue frame. If click it again, the blue frame
is erased and the selection is released.
If Select all button at lower left is clicked, all images are
selected.
(b) Image retrieve

When the Retrieve button is clicked, only the selected images
are displayed (refer to 9.2.6).
9-4 Q1E-EA0611
9.2.2 Set up filing
The address of the image transferring by the S-WRITE key or the M-WRITE
key, a file format, etc. are set up.
Image Filing in Main Menu/Set up is chosen and "Set up Filing" dialog
is started.
Fig. 9.2-4 Set Up Filing dialog

(1) S-Write assignment(Single Image Transfer)
With key the address of image record is set.

S-WRITE
a) Hard Disk
Images are recorded in the incorporated Hard Disk.
b) External Device
This is to set up a recording format of single image and address
of recording drive.
• File format: When "▼" is clicked, a selection window is opened
and it is possible to convert data into BMP, TIFF, JPEG. In
TIFF format the compressing method are selectable among None
(no-compression) and Pack Bitz.
NOTICE1 Files saved in JPEG format can only be displayed on the
same model as the equipment that saved the files.
NOTICE2 Saving images in JPEG format will result in some
degradation of image quality. Keep this in mind, and use this
format as long as the loss in quality does not affect your
diagnosis.
9-5 Q1E-EA0611
• Address (Destination): With this it is possible to record single
images to CD-R/RW, Floppy Disk Drive and MO Drive.
Only a selectable drive unit is displayed in the window.
(2) M-WRITE assignment(Multi Image transfer)

This is to set up a recording format of live images and address
of recording device.
• Mode: When "▼" is clicked, a selection window is opened and
it is possible to select a mode among F-Fout, R-Rout and All.
F-F out set up is effective only in the cine memory mode and
R-R out set up is effective only in the ECG mode.
F-F out ···· Function to transfer frame: This is to record
a series of continued frames selected in
discretion as one file.
R-R out ···· Function to transfer heart beat: This is to
record a series of frames in R-wave time phase
selected in discretion as one file.
All ········ Function to transfer all of cine memory: This
is to record all the cine image as one file.
Items tool and Number can not be selected.
• Tool: This is to change over the start – end setting of live
image.
Auto······· Frames selected in next item, number, are
automatically recorded.
Manual····· Designate starting and ending points for
transferring images in the cine memory.
• Number:
In F-F out · This is to record as same numbers of frame as
images selected.
(All/10/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100)
In R-R out · This is to record as same numbers of images as
heart beats selected.
(All/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10)
• File Format: When "▼" is clicked, a selection window is opened
and it is possible to convert data into AVI,
AVI(Compression).
NOTICE1: Files recorded in AVI format (compressed using
Microsoft Video 1 compression) can only be played on the same
model as the equipment that recorded the files.
9-6 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE2: Recording files in AVI format (compressed using
Microsoft Video 1 compression) will result in some degradation
of image quality. Keep this in mind, and use this format as
long as the loss in quality does not affect your diagnosis.
• Address (designation of recording device): Only the drive which
can be selected is displayed in the window.
(3) Details of filing

If a [Details of filing] button is clicked, Set Up details of filing
will open. Here, a setup about filing other than Set Up Filing dialog
is possible.
Fig 9.2-5 Set Up details of filing

a) Timing of Transfer
It switches whether it transferring or printing for image printer
for every image, or it transferring or printing for every patient.
- Every image(film) It is transferring for every image.
It prints by the image printer for
every film.
- Every patinet
It transferring or printing for
every patient.
The image data will not be
transferred until you perform one
of following operations;
- Pressing the END Exam key
- Clicking the New Patient button
by Patient Menu
NOTICE:
When using a CD, always select a transfer method for Every patient.
9-7 Q1E-EA0611
When you transferring or printing an image for every patient,
please refer to 9.2.8.
When you have selected a transfer method for Every patient, make
sure to perform one of the following operations after the
examination finishes;
- Clicking the New Patient button by Patient Menu
The image data will not be transferred until you perform one of
these operations.
b) Color select for filing Image
Color set up at the time of image output is changed.
- B/W Image For B-mode, M-mode and Doppler-mode
image
- Color Image For image in color mode, and B-color
mode.
Images can be recorded either by B/W mode or Color mode.
c) Slide show
Time for automatic change of image display is set in retrieving
time of image file.
(4) Network Folder

• When Network Folder button is clicked, Network Folder dialog
window is opened. (This can be set when the optionally
available Network Interface EZU-Pi6 is loading.)
Choose the folder of a transferring place and click the Register
button.
Then, a click of the OK button displays the folder name
registered into Address of Filing Setup Dialog.
When you delete the registered folder, click the Delete button.
When you cancel the changed contents, click Cancel button.
9-8 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 9.2-6 Network Folder dialog
(5) DICOM
• DICOM Server: When DICOM Server button is clicked, DICOM server
set up Dialog is opened.
(This can be set when the optionally available
Network Interface EZU-Pi6 and DICOM Transfer
Software EZU-FC7 are loading.)
• Modality WorkList: Clicking Modality WorkList button opens
the DICOM Modality
WorkList Setup menu. (This can be set in the
system loading with the DICOM WorkList EZU-FC7W
in addition to the option to set up the above
DICOM Server.)
• Details of DICOM: When Details of DICOM button clicked, Set
Up details of DICOM dialog is opened.
(This can be set when the optionally available
Network Interface EZU-Pi6 and DICOM Transfer
software EZU-FC7 are loading.)
(6) Set up Log file
This is a set up menu for Log File which records the history of
image transfer.
It works to set up, edit and delete the Log File. If Log information
is not selected, the display of this menu can not be opened.
See Appendix-G for details.
9-9 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 9.2-7 Log File set up menu
9.2.3 Transfer of Image

(1) Single Image Transfer
Set up the Transferring place of the S-WRITE key with reference to
9.2.2 Set up Filing. When the S-WRITE key is pressed, a display image
is transferred to the set-up place.
(2) Multi Image Transfer

Set up the Transferring place of the M-WRITE key with reference to
9.2.2 Set up Filing. When the M-WRITE key is pressed, Multi Image
Transfer starts.
<CAUTION>
High load is applied to CPU during AVI creation. When this state
continues, keep in mind that time may be overdue. In addition, the
delay of this time is automatically corrected, when equipment is
rebooted.
NOTICE:
• If the transfer destination is a network folder, and you attempt
transfer immediately after the device is started, a transfer
error may occur. In this case, wait two minutes, and perform
transfer again.
• If no transfer destination is selected, or the transfer
destination and file format do not match, the S-WRITE key and
the M-WRITE key will be disabled. In this case, check the settings
for the transfer destination and file format.
9-10 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Change temporarily address of transferring
Image Filing just below Main Menu can change temporarily address
of transferring. This address is held until it turns off system or
Setup Filing menu performs a re-setup. Refer to 9.2.2 Set up Filing
for the change method of an item.
In the Image Filing dialog, when you click the [OK] button, the transfer
destination will change momentarily, and the changes will be reflected
by the S-WRITE key and the M-WRITE key.
For more information on performing changes, see 9.2.2 Set up filing.
Fig. 9.2-8 Image Filing dialog

<CAUTION>
The following message is displayed, when ID or name of Patient is
not inputted and being stored. Please choose [Yes], when you store
then. Please choose [No], when you store after inputting ID or Name.
Fig. 9.2-9 No patient name message
<CAUTION>
To eject a CD or MO, be sure to use a menu.
refer to 7.10 Disk Menu
9-11 Q1E-EA0611
9.2.4 Filing daialog
When is pressed during freeze ON, Filing dialog for retrieving
READ
recorded images is displayed.
<CAUTION>
! If the READ key is puressed for the first time after a power supply
injection when a setup of the S-WRITE key is a network folder,
connection may go wrong. This phenomenon occurs by the performance
of PC of a connection place, and setup. Once, Close a filing dialig
and press the READ key again.
NOTICE • If there are many images to be displayed, it may take some
time to display their thumbnails.
• If there are many images to be displayed, a title bar may appear
in the ultrasound-image display area or image refreshing may
temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena occurs, wait
until the data loading terminates.
• The image of a format which dose not correspond by ultrasound
device does not display by thumbnail.
Fig. 9.2-10 Filing dialog
(1) Drive
This switches the read drive of the
image. When "▼" button is clicked, a
sub-window is opened to show the drive
from which images can be read at
present.
Fig. 9.2-11 Drive
9-12 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE:
While you are loading, transferring, or deleting a large amount
of image data, if you change the image loading destination,
a title bar may appear in the ultrasound-image display area
or image refreshing may temporarily stop.
Wait until the processing terminates. The normal status will
be recovered when the processing terminates.
(2) Search
This is to retrieve recorded image by a patient information
or date.
Result of the search displays only the image the character
sequence of a keyword and whose character sequence for reference
correspond from a head. When you search the character sequence
in the middle of for reference, please put "*" into a keyword.
(The example of search)
Keyword Result of search
OKA OKADA, OKAYAMA
*OKA* OKADA, OKAYAMA, YAMAOKA
This search narrows down. When you research from the beginning,
click the Show all button.
a) Item
It is possible to switch the search item.
When "▼" button is clicked, a
sub-window is opened to display the
item which can be selected at present.
ID, Name: Search by the patient ID,Name
Date(YYYYMMDD): Search by
Fig. 9.2-12 Search Item Date(YYYYMMDD)
Date(Today): Search by Date(Today)
Keyword: Search by Keyword
Application: Search by Application
All: Search by the patient ID and Name
and so on.
b) Keyword
Input the name and ID etc. for search from the keyboard.
When these are input, characters of Search button is clearly
displayed which shows the search is in an active status.
9-13 Q1E-EA0611
When the Search button is clicked, the search in the designated
drive is started. Corresponding search data are displayed on
right side of dialog and at same time Thumbnails are also
displayed. When there are no corresponding data, a message
as shown below is displayed. (Fig.9.2-14). Try to search again.
Fig. 9.2-14 Search no

match message
Fig. 9.2-13 Search of Images

(3) Show all
All thumbnails of recorded images can be displayed, but at first
10 images only are to be displayed. In case images more than
10 are recorded, renew thumbnails using the cursor at right side.
(4) Browse on Net

This can be operated when the optionally available Network
Interface EZU-Pi6 is loading. When an image file on the network
is temporarily to be retrieved, click this button to select the
display folder.
(5) Select all/Select clear

This is to select all thumbnails being displayed (including other
ones not displayed than 10 images displayed) and to release the
selection of selected thumbnails.
(6) Retrieve
Images data of selected thumbnails are retrieved.
When tow or more images are selected at the same time, the display
is different according to the selected number.
2~4 images selected: 4-image display
5~9 images selected: 9-image display
More than 10 images selected: 16-image display
9-14 Q1E-EA0611
(7) Merge
This is to copy selected thumbnails image to Merge Folder.
If it is necessary in editing image data, hold the data temporarily
in Merge Folder.
(8) Transfer
This is to transfer image data to another disk. Refer to 9.2.5
Transfer F7.
(9) Log Info

This function is used for recording information regarding devices
for data transfer as a Log file.
After the Log Info. button is clicked, by operating according
to the messages, Fig.9.2-15 Log search menu is displayed.
See Appendix-G for details.
Fig.9.2-15 Log search menu
(a) Drive
This switches the read drive of the Log file.
(b) Search
This is to search Log information by patient name and so
on.
(b-1) Item
This is to change the search item.
(b-2) Keyword
This is to input the Keyword for search from the keyboard.
When the Search button is clicked after inputting the Keyword,
the search in the designated drive is started.
9-15 Q1E-EA0611
(c) Show all Log file
This is to display all Log information.
(10) Delete
Images of selected thumbnails can be deleted.
If the Delete button is clicked after clicking the Select All
button, it can all delete.
If using CD-R, you will not be able to delete the image data.
(11) Modify ID
Modify ID and Name of Patient.
[The procedure of modification]

- Choose Patient to modification by ID and Name list.
- Click the Modify ID button.
- Make modification of ID or name on ID Modify ID dialog.
- Click the Update button.
Fig.9.2-16 Modify ID dialog
(12) Image print

The selected image is printed to PC printer or a DICOM printer.
In order to print to PC printer, refer to "Appendix AA Using
the PC Printer".
DICOM Printing Software EZU-FC7P of an option is required in
order to print to a DICOM printer.
(13) Status
The situation of the availability of a selection drive is
displayed.
The following information is displayed.
- Availability (Images)
- Free space
- The total capacity of the selected images
Availability (Images) displays how many numbers the still image

of a color can save about by the present format.
9-16 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE:
When the format of images compressed such as JPEG (Lossy)
and TIFF (Pack Bitz) is chosen, the size of a picture is
decided after compression. Therefore, it is before and after
transfer and size may not change.
Free space
Availability (Images)
The total capacity of the selected images
Fig9.2-18 Status
(14) Close
Filing dialog is closed and returns to the original display.
9-17 Q1E-EA0611
9.2.5 Transfer
When the Transfer button of Filing dialog is clicked, Transfer
dialog can start and can transfer the selected image to other
drives. The image chosen when the OK button was clicked is
transferred to a designated drive.
Fig.9.2-17 Transfer dialog
Drive: This switches the transferring drive of the image.

When "▼" is clicked, recording devices to which
images can be transferred are displayed.
File Convert:
With this function it is possible to transfer data
by converting them into other formats than BMP and
AVI. For that click "□" , then below mentioned
converting formats column is displayed.
From BMP to: TIFF format or JPEG format is selectable other
than BMP format. In case of TIFF format 2 kinds
of data compressing methods, NON
(no-compression) or Pack Bitz are selectable.
From AVI to: AVI [No compression] and AVI (Compression)
[Microsoft Video 1 system] can be chosen.
Browse on Net: This can be operated when the optionally
available Network Interface EZU-Pi6 is loading.
When an image is temporarily to be transferred
to the network server, the destination to be
transferred can be set by selecting this button.
9-18 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE:
• If the total size of the selected graphics files is large,
it may take some time to transfer them. For example, if the
total size is 580 MB, it may take about 30 minutes to transfer
the files.
• Do not press the ON/STANDBY switch while images are being
transferred. If you do it, the images will not be recorded.
• During transfer, a title bar may appear in the ultrasound-image
display area or image refreshing may temporarily stop. Wait
until the transfer terminates. The normal status will be
recovered when the transfer terminates.
• Do not press the Eject button of CD-R/RW drive or MO drive
while images are being transferred. If you do it, transferring
the images may be impossible.
9.2.6 Retrieve of Images

If thumbnail images are selected in Filing dialog and click
[Retrieve] button, it will be in an image retrieve state.
If a thumbnail picture is chosen by Filing dialog and the [Retrieve]

button is clicked, it will be in a Retrieve state.
(To return to Filing dialog, select F4 Home menu of Function menu
(page 1)).
In case a single image is selected and in case multi images are
selected at the same time, the display style and function menu
display are different respectively.
Single image selected: 1-image display
2~4 images selected : 4-image display
5~9 images selected : 9-image display
Selected of 10 or more images: 16-image display.
9-19 Q1E-EA0611
1-image 4-image
9-image 16-image
Fig. 9.2-18 Multi-image display
NOTICE: The display position of the function menu may differ from
another model. Therefore, when the image stored by another
model on storage media is displayed, two ▼ may be displayed
near the function menu.
(1) Function menu

(Page 1)
a) 4~16-image display
b) 1-image display
(Page 2)
a) F1 Slide Show off selection
b) F1 Slide Show on selection
Fig. 9.2-19 Function menu
9-20 Q1E-EA0611
(a) Review
Select F1 in Page 1 of a function menu
This is started only when live image file is selected. Live

file is reviewed.
When the review of live images suspended, it is possible to
select the track ball priority of mark. Then it is possible
to retrieve images either in feed-frame-forward or –backward

mode by operating the track ball right- or leftward, or by
key operation.
Select F2(speed) in page 2 of a function menu to change Review

speed.
NOTICE: In the case frame rate is high in review of images,

some error in review speed may be caused due
to CPU power.
The error of review speed may also be caused
by live image of 200 or more frames in color
image and 600 or more frame in B/W image.
(b) To Mulit/To Single(Selection in display image mode)
Multi image display can be changed to single image display.

When multi images are selected and retrieved, select one image
with yellow frame, after that by pushing the toggle switch,

2
the display turns to a single image display.

In the single image display in multi images selection mode
mark is displayed at upper right position of display,

then the single image displayed can be changed to another
one by operating the track ball right-or-leftward.
(c) Page shift

9-21 Q1E-EA0611
In single image display in case of
multi images selection it is
1step Backward 1step Forward
possible to change the image for
3 3 display to another one by
operating F3. When the toggle
switch is up, the frame is reversed.
When it is down, the frame is
1step Backward 1step Forward forwarded and it is renewed to next
image. Also, it is possible to
reverse or renew the image by the
trackball or , on the
1step Backward 1step Forward alphanumeric keyboard.
Furthermore, images that could not
Fig 9.2-20 Page Shift displayed in the time of multi
image display can be displayed
with this Page shift.
(d) Home menu
This is to return to Filing dialog.
(e) Division
4~16-image display : Select F5 in Page 1 of a function menu
1- image display : Select F5 in Page 2 of a function menu
A live image is divided into multiple freeze images and

displayed.
Division becomes effective only when live image is chosen.
Fig. 9.2-21 Division display of live image
9-22 Q1E-EA0611
(f) Images
4~16-image display: Select F6 in Page 1 of a function menu
16 image displays, 9 image displays, and 4 image displays

are switched.
6 6
Fig. 9.2-22 Select of display
(g) Transfer
4~16-image display : Select F7 in Page 1 of a function menu
This is to transfer images selected with a yellow frame in

the case of 4~16-image display to recording device outside
of the Hard Disk (ref. to 9.2.5 Transfer).
This is to transfer selected image in the case of 1-image
display to recording device outside of the Hard Disk.
NOTICE: When the image of an AVI format is chosen here,

File Convert function cannot be used.
When you change a file and you copy a image, please
copy on a Filing dialog.
(h) Slide show(Automatic changing function of image display)

In single image display in multi image selection mode, a display

images can be changed to another one at intervals of fixed
time.
Select F2(update) in page 2 of a function menu to change update
time.
9-23 Q1E-EA0611
(i) Select start/Select end
1-image display : Select F3/F4 in Page 2 of a function menu
It is the function to review only

the required portion of live
image.
Display live image as single image

display. By operating the
trackball the frame can be
switched in order to search the
3 4
necessary one.
1
Click the first frame (Start
frame)of necessary frames with

3
Fig. 9.2-23 toggle.

Select Start/Select End
Click the last frames (End frame)
of necessary frames with

4
toggle.
With F1 (Review) in page 1 in function menu only the designated

section is repeatedly replayed.
NOTICE:
• Either Start or End can be selected first for setting order.
• It is impossible to select the setting such that Start frame comes
after the End frame.
• It is also impossible to select the same frame as Start and End
image.
(2) Measurement with retrieved images
In a single image display mode it is possible to perform various

kinds of measurement.
(a) Measuring method
Performing the measurement
[1] Start the measurement as done in the case of routine examination.
9-24 Q1E-EA0611
CAUTION
Under some conditions setups as mentioned below are required or
there are items as mentioned below can not be implemented.
1) Mode registration of images for retrieve (Mode Adj.)
Under below mentioned cases menu as shown in item 10.2.2 is
displayed at starting time of measurement by which it may be
required to register the mode of retrieved images. Regarding
the registration method refer to 10.2.2.
• A case where images written with other scanners are to be
retrieved.
• A case where images written by a deleted measurement region
is to be retrieved.
• A case where images saved in EUB-6000 is to be retrieved.
2) Measurements unable to perform on retrieved images
It is impossible to perform following measurements: D-Profile,
CFM-Velo and Histogram
3) Exceptional items which are unable to perform the calculation.
･ In VASC1 and VASC2 measurements it is impossible to calculate
items of %W (%WINDOWS) and Sys-W(SYSTOLIC WINDOWS).
･ Auto-trace of Doppler waveform in Doppler measurement cannot
be executed.
･ The PISA measurement in MV and TV measurement is impossible
to calculate.
[2] In performing the measurement on Doppler images set 0m/s line

and Doppler incident angle as required. Regarding the setting
method refer to 10.2.1(5)(6).
(b) Mode registration of images for retrieve

Regarding the registration method refer to 10.2.2.
NOTICE: Entered mode information is cleared in below mentioned

cases.
• A case where the image displayed is to be changed.
• A case where the mode is switched from a single image display
to multi image display.
(c) Automatic reading of a measurement result
At the time of image retrieve, the measurement result saved by the
same examination is automatic, and can be read.
(i) Automatic reading of a measurement result

At the time of image retrieve, if a REPORT key is pressed, the
measurement result saved by the same examination can be read.
(ii) The addition of a measurement result
9-25 Q1E-EA0611
When measurement is started on a retrieve image, the measurement
before saving a measurement result can be continued and measured.
Then, if a REPORT key is pressed, it will be added and will
display.
When you save the added measurement result, please click "Save"
button in a Measurement Report dialog.
The function of (i) and (ii) is looked for from the save point
which set up the measurement result which is in agreement with
ID, a name, and examination date.
Refer to "11.5.4 Special menu" for a setup of the save point
of a measurement result.
When ID or a name is corrected, it is automatic and it becomes
impossible to read a measurement result.
(3) Other functions
(a) Re-write function for retrieve image

Measurement is made on the retrieved image and graphic data such
as comments are input, and then to transfer the image with graphic
data to CD-R/RW or others, press [S-WRITE] key for a single image
display.
However, because the image is transferred to the preset address
(for setting procedures refer to 9.2.2), if the transferring
destination is to be temporarily changed, change it by selecting
Main Menu → Image Filing… (refer to 9.2.3).
(b) Simultaneous review function of two or more live images

In the case two or more live images are reviewed by Retrieved function,
double click on the same image to select all imaged in image selection
operation (with all images selected, all images are displayed in
a blue frame). And then, by selecting [Review] on the Function
menu, two or more live images are simultaneously reviewed.
NOTICE: Under some conditions a live image review may be delayed.

The review speed of live image may become slow depending
on conditions.
In this case, please Review after copying live image to a
merge folder.
9-26 Q1E-EA0611
(c) Modify patient information
When image is retrieved on one screen, the input of LMP etc. is
possible at Patient Menu which presses and displays the PATIENT
key.
The contents changed by Patient Menu update to the file of a retrieve
image.
<CAUTION>
ID or Name is changed, it is not in agreement with other images and
a measurement result.
9.2.7 Edit of image file: Merged Folder
There is an item "Merged Folder" among the selection tree of Drive

in Filing window. This is a recording area to retreat temporarily
image data for editing.
Fig. 9.2-24 Merged Folder
(1) Data record

In order to record data in the Merged Folder select the image
in the Filing dialog and click [Merge] button.
(2) Data delete

Select the image in the Filing dialog and click [Delete] button.
9-27 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Example of data edit
There is a case that a series of image of a patient was recorded
in CD-R/RW or MO in the past and other images of the same patient
have been obtained and recorded in the Hard Disk in this month.
If necessary, such image data can be recorded in total in CD-R/RW
or MO exclusive for that patient.
In this case all the data are once transferred to the Merged
Folder. After that total data of that patient are recorded in
a single or multiple CD-R/RW or MO.
CD1 or MO1
Hard Disk
・・
Patient
・
CDn or MOn
Merged Folder
CD or MO
Fig. 9.2-25 Example of Editing Data
(4) Ending display

Merged Folder can be closed by clicking Close button, but if
there left data, even a single image, in the Folder, a window
for confirmation as shown below is displayed.
Fig. 9.2-26 Confirmation message of image file delete
In case you want to leave data in the Folder, click No button.

If you want to delete data in the Folder, click Yes button.
NOTICE: If ON/STAND BY switch is put off while displaying a

retrieval image out of image file, an error massage may
be displayed.
After a while the dialogue is automatically closed and
the power is shut off normally.
9-28 Q1E-EA0611
9.2.8 Batch transferring / printing for every patient
Images can be transferred or printed for every patient.
(1) Set up
Image Filing in Main Menu / Set up is chosen and “Set up Filing”
dialog is started. Please click the [Details of filing] button
of this dialog. Set Up details of filing dialog starts.
Please choose "Every patient" in Timing of Transfer.

In this case, the image will not be transferred until you perform
one of these operations;
- Clicking the New Patient button by Patient Menu
Fig 9.2-27 Set Up details of filing

(2) Transferring / Printing
If S-Write key and M-Write key is pressed during Examination,
the image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
Even if it chooses "Every patient", when assignment of S-Write
key is a hard disk, it is saved directly at a hard disk.
Moreover, when Image Printer is set up in the Print/REC Key
Assignment dialog, if Print key is pushed during examination,
an image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk, mark is

displayed on the screen upper right.
When there is an image temporarily saved in the hard disk, an

mark is displayed on the screen upper right.
If assignment of the S-Write key is except a hard disk and the
S-Write key will be pushed at the time of retrieve when "Every
patient" is chosen, image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
9-29 Q1E-EA0611
When either of the following is operated, the image saved in
the hard disk temporarily is transferred or printed to an image
printer.
- [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
- Pressing the End Exam key. But, when VCR playback screen or
3D software is displayed, it is impossible to output forcedly
images to PC printer by the End Exam key.
- Starting the ultrasound system (Any of images saved when
previously using the system remain not printed).
NOTICE: When the [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu,

since a CPU power is used for printing, even if it inputs
a character on ID information screen, it may not be
reflected immediately.
After an Examination end should press End Exam key, and
should print an image.
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain,
a message shown in Fig.9.2-28 appears when starting the system.
Click the [Yes] button. If transfer or print is to be canceled,
select the [No] button for the message.
Fig 9.2-28 Forced Output Message
<CAUTION>
If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted and they
cannot be transferred and outputted to the printer any more.
NOTICE:
- The message of Fig 9.2-28 is displayed when the [OK] button
is clicked by Set Up Filing dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents
of a setting, it is transferred on the setting conditions
before change.
- The End Exam key cannot be pressed at the time of retrieve.
9-30 Q1E-EA0611
9.2.9 Temporary save at the time of a transferring / printing error
When an error occurs at the time of transferring and printing for

PC printer, the message of Fig.9.2-29 is displayed and an image
is saved temporarily to a hard disk.
Fig 9.2-29 Saved temporarily message
An image is temporarily saved at a hard disk until it clicks the

[New Patient] button by Patient Menu, or it presses END Exam key,
even when "Every image (film)" is chosen by Timing of Transfer
of Set Up details of filing dialog.
Please press an END Exam key after solving the problem of
transferring / printing.
NOTICE: There is a limit in the domain saved temporarily in

a hard disk. If the message of Fig. 9.2-29 is displayed,
please interrupt transferring/printing and solve the
problem of an error of transferring/printing. In the
case of transferring/printing without solving the
plroblem of an error of transferring/printing, when
the domain saved temporarily in a hard disk remains
and it is set to 500MB, the message of Fig.9.2-30 is
displayed.
Moreover, when the domain saved temporarily in a hard
disk is lost, the message of Fig. 9.2-31 is displayed
and transmission/printing becomes impossible.
Fig 9.2-30 Limit capacity of Hard disk message
9-31 Q1E-EA0611
Fig 9.2-31 No availability of a hard disk message
NOTICE: When a transferring error occurs during option

starting, an error message is not displayed on the
front but will be stopped by the screen of ultrasound
equipment.
In this case, please carry out the following operations
according to an option, and escape from an error
message with the [OK] button.
3D Display Software (EZU-3D4, EZU-3D2S)

:Press ENTER key.
Press the Enter key of an alpha-numeric keyboard.
WideView Software (EZU-WS4)

:Press Alt key.
9-32 Q1E-EA0611
9.3 Cine memory mode
9.3.1 Record of image
(l) Recording into Cine memory

Images displayed on the monitor are always recorded in Cine memory
without a special designation. In case imaging conditions like
display depth and display angle are changed, information in the
memory are once cleared off and restarts the recording under
changed conditions. Therefore, contents of record are always
image information under the same conditions. When FREEZE key
is put ON, the record is interrupted.
(2) Image quantity in recording
Image quantity to be recorded in the memory is different according
to the display angle (display width).
When the display angle becomes narrower, the quantity of record
increases.
Also when different probe is used, the quantity of record is
different.
Image memory area

Display angle: Wide
Display angle: Narrow
Fig. 9.3.1-1 Difference in recording quantity
9-33 Q1E-EA0611
9.3.2 Memory capacity setting
According to the purpose, you can switch the cine memory division ratio
in equipment.
(1) No memory split mode

You can record one B mode image
continuously for a long time.
According to the purpose, you can
switch the cine memory division ratio
in equipment.
(2) B:B_Split
You can record two independent B mode
images in divided cine memory.
L Freeze R Freeze
To select no memory split mode, don’t
check "B:B_Split" in Main Menu.
To select B:B_split mode, check
"B:B_Split" in Main Menu
Fig.9.3.2-1 B:B_Split
When a picture is recorded on the conditions from which the

following differs at the time of B:B-Split mode, it becomes
impossible to review the cine memory image of the direction
which is not chosen.
- When the sweep speeds of ECG differ.
The images recorded on the cine memory is cleared when it switches

to the following modes
- When it switches to Dual CFM mode.
- When it switches to the B/* mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.).
9-34 Q1E-EA0611
9.3.3 Continuous record mode and continuous record of heart beat
automatic detection mode
Continuous replay mode : In case of regular image record (ECG wave

not displayed) it is possible to replay
continuously all the frame in the Cine
memory with continuous record mode.
Continuous replay and hear beat automatic detection mode:

In case ECG wave is displayed in the image,
the replay mode is automatically changed
to Continuous reply and heart beat
detection mode.
In this case the first and the last R-wave
time phase frame are automatically
detected so that well continued images
between R-waves can be replayed.
NOTICE: Even if ECG wave is displayed, there may be a case that

R wave on ECG wave is not recognized by the scanner. In
that case the mode is changed to the continuous record
mode. For the correct recognition of the R wave adjust
the shape of ECG wave and so on.
9-35 Q1E-EA0611
9.3.4 Image replay
At the time FREEZE
is pushed, the mode enters to the image replay
mode. In the replay time, it is possible to control the display

of recorded image as mentioned below.
(1) Continuous loop replay
When "Review" is selected by toggle switch, images in the cine

1
memory are displayed repeatedly.

At this time, if it is in the continuous replay mode, all the images
in the memory are replayed in loop, and if it is in the continuous
replay of heart beat automatic detection mode, only images in which
the first R wave and the last R wave are connected are replayed
in loop.
Replay speed can be changed with
"SPEED (SPD)" by selecting 2
toggle switch. Also, the replay

2 speed is displayed at lower right
corner of the image.
Replay speed
Fig. 9.3.4-1 Replay speed
When toggle switch is pushed again, the continuous replay of loop

1
is interrupted.
(2) Replay by feeding the frame forward or backward

In a normal freezing condition (no continuous loop replay selected),
the recorded image can be advanced or reversed one frame by one
frame by operating the trackball left or right, or , keys.
In case the image with ECG wave display is recorded (continuous

record of heart beat automatic detection mode), a time phase bar
showing the time phase at recording time is displayed on the ECG
wave. It can be a reference for image observation.
9-36 Q1E-EA0611
The caution of relationship between Image and time phase bar on
ECG.
Hitachi ultrasound scanner display the time phase bar on ECG to

identify the time phase of image from cine memory.
The each time phase bar is displayed at each imaging start
time.(Refer to Fig.9.3.4-2)
And general ultrasound scanner system needs "1/Frame rate (sec)"
to acquire a ultrasound image.
Therefore time phase of image No.1 is area which is indicate as
heavy line.
Also set the sweeping speed of ECG waveform as fast as possible.

If the speed is too slow, there may be a case that a positional
accuracy of time phase bar of cine memory can not be kept.
Fig. 9.3.4-2
(3) Display of image number

When the image replay speed is "0" speed (Freeze condition), the
number of image is displayed. The number is fit in the order of
record of B-mode image into the image memory. When the recording
is finished, the last image is fit with the largest number. It
can be a reference for image observation. Image number display/no
display is set either by Main Menu or Application.
9-37 Q1E-EA0611
(4) Review the image by frame with the Gain encoder
You can turn the Gain encoder to replay by feeding frames forward
or backward.
9-38 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 10 VCR (option)
10.1 Remote control of VCR
When connected to a VCR (EZU-VR7), you can use the keyboard panel
of this equipment to perform recording functionality. (Note that
you will need the EZU-RO1 VCR remote control cable.)
You will also be able to perform the stop, pause, review, rewind,
and fast-forward operations.
10.1.1 Image recording
Pressing REC
or REC
key starts image recording.*1)
Pressing REC
or REC
key again pauses image recording.*1)
Every time this key is pressed, starting and pausing image

recording are alternately selected.
When the pause status of image recording remains more than the
specified period, the image recording status is automatically
canceled.
To forcibly cancel the image recording status, press the stop
key on the VCR unit.
By pressing REC
or REC
key, the data necessary for
playback measurement on image reviewed from VCR are recorded

together with the image on tape.*1)
If the VCR is controlled for image recording on the control
panel of the VCR, these data are not recorded on tape.
Be sure to control the image recording operation from the
keyboard panel of the scanner.
NOTICE: When a remote control cable is not used, perform the
recording operation at VCR side.
*1) Assignment of REC

or REC
keys can be changed by
Print/REC key setting menu.
10.1.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of VCR
Using VCR
ORIG key located at the left center of the main keyboard,
VCR-mode or ORIG-mode can be selected.
10-1 313 Q1E-EA0611

When ORIG-mode is selected, the key light green and ultrasound
image is displayed.
(1) VCR REVIEW mode
By pressing VCR
ORIG in ORIG-mode, VCR REVIEW mode is selected and
the key lights orange.

In this VCR-mode, the toggle switches for the following
FUNCTION menu can be used to remotely control VCR.
STOP REWIND・ REVIEW FORWAD・ PAUSE

REWIND FORWAD
SEARCH SEARCH
PRIV
NEXT
Brightness Contrast HUE Saturation Horizontal Position Vertical Position Reset
(0~255） (0~127) (0~255) （0~127） (-5~5) (-10~0)
Fig.10.1.2-1 FUNCTION menu for VCR REVIEW mode
(2) ORIG-mode: Normal image display
By pressing VCR
ORIG key after the operation of (1) VCR
REVIEW mode, operation mode returns to the mode to display

normal ultrasound image. The key lights green.
10-2 Q1E-EA0611
CAUTION
• During pause or review at slow speed, body mark and
physiological signal, if displayed, may appear interrupted,
however, this is not a sign of equipment malfunction.
• Color recording in CFM mode only. In other mode, limited

to B/W recording because to keep the resolution of the image.
• When display of VCR review image is paused by remote control
from the operation panel of the scanner unit, some response
delay until the image comes to still display may be produced.
• REC status and REC-PAUSE status may not agree each other
between display on the screen and VCR panel. Therefore,
confirm the VCR operation status referring to the status
on the VCR panel.
• There may be cases where the image being displayed on the
monitor is distorted when the scanner unit is set to VCR
Replay mode with the VCR not set to Replay mode, but it is
not a trouble.
• The ENDEXAM Key does not work during VCR playback.
10.2 Measurement on review image
Various measurements can be carried out on review image from VCR.
NOTICE: Note that measurement may not be carried out depending on

type of VCR.
10.2.1 Measurement procedure

(1) Review of VCR image
Pressing VCR
ORIG key sets VCR REVIEW mode.
(2) Image freeze
By pressing "►" of the toggle switch, VCR image can be

3
reviewed.
Using "▌▐" of the toggle switch or the remote controller
5
of the VCR, freeze the image to be measured.

(3) Selection of NEW PATIENT.
Even if VCR REVIEW mode is selected by using VCR

ORIG key, measured
data such as report function are saved.
10-3 Q1E-EA0611
When patient ID to be measured is changed on VCR image, press
Patient key to clear the measurement data.
(4) Execution of measurement
(a) Carry out measurements in the same procedures as those in

usual examination.
NOTICE: When a remote control cable is not used, perform the

recording operation at VCR side.
CAUTION
1) In the following cases, a menu as shown in Fig. 10.2.2-1
is displayed on the right of the screen when the
measurement function is started and registration of
VCR REVIEW image display mode is required.
For registration procedure, refer to Paragraph 10.2.2
Registration of VCR review image mode.
• No data for Measurements has been written on image
• Data codes cannot be read due to the reasons such
as unstable image or noise in image.
2) D-Profile, CFM-Velo and Histgram measurements cannot
be executed.
3) %W (%WINDOW) and Sys-W (SYSTOLIC WINDOW) among the
measurement items in Vasc1 and Vasc2 measurements
cannot be calculated.
･ Auto-trace of Doppler waveform in Doppler
measurement cannot be executed.
4) When you want to replay images stored in VCR for
performing any measurement without using a remote
control cable, set the base line and angle of Doppler
image without fail after starting the measurement.
(b) When measurement is made on Doppler-mode image, set a base

line and Doppler incident angle following the procedures
(5) and (6).
(c) Carry out measurement in the same procedure as that for

usual examination.
10-4 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Adjustment of baseline (only for Doppler-mode)
Doppler-mode When the measurement function is
image
started on the Doppler-mode image
SHIFT LINE
screen, a base line is displayed on the
Doppler-mode image. Operating the
BASELINE control, overlap the
displayed base line on the base line
Base line in VCR
of the Doppler waveform in the review
replay image image by using .
BASELINE
Base line displayed on

VCR replay image.
Fig.10.2.1-1 Setting base line
(6) Adjustment of Doppler entry angle

(only for Doppler-mode)
In measurement on Doppler-mode image,

Doppler sampling point if Doppler entry angle has not been set
on the review image or information data
have not been written in the image, the
Doppler entry angle is recognized as
+ 0°.
If setting Doppler entry angle is

necessary, do it following the next
Caliper " + " steps.
Fig.10.2.1-2 Adjustment
of Doppler entry angle
[In B/PW and B/CW-mode display]
(a) Start the measurement function.
(b) Turning displays a message "Set angle bar in the flow
direction ", and the "+" mark appears on the B-mode image.
Operating the trackball, move the "+" mark to the center
of the Doppler sampling point and press ENTER key.
10-5 Q1E-EA0611
(c) Then, a message "Set angle bar in the flow
Beam Line Alignment Bar direction" is displayed and a bar for setting
a beam line is displayed. Operating the
ANGLE ROTATION control, set the beam line
setting bar in the direction of the Doppler
beam line and press ENTER key.
(d) Finally, "Set angle bar in the flow

Fig.10.2.1-3 direction" message is displayed and the
Operating the ANGLE entry angle measurement bar is displayed.
ROTATION control Operating the ANGLE ROTATION control, set
the entry angle measurement bar in the blood
flow direction.
[In PW, M/PW and CW-mode display]

Calibration Angle (a) Start the measurement function.
Readout
(b) Turning displays "θ: 0°" on the right
bottom of the screen.

Operating the ANGLE ROTATION control, set
the displayed θ value to the θ value of the
θ : 0° VCR review image.
θ : 30°
Incidence Angle for

Reproduced Image
Fig.10.2.1-4
Operating the ANGLE
ROTATION control
10-6 Q1E-EA0611
10.2.2 Registration of review image mode
If information data in the review image cannot be accurately
recognized when the measurement function is started, the mode
must be registered before starting the measurement. According
to the menu displayed on the center of the screen, enter each
mode data. Finally, click the OK button.
MAIN
MENU
Fig.10.2.2-1 Mode Adjust
NOTICE: The entered mode data is cleared when the following

operation is done:
In case the VCR is connected:
• When PAUSE status is switched off.
10-7 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Entry of display mode (Mode)
In case of setting Mode, click "▼"
in Mode item and select a correct
Mode from displayed menu, then push
ENTER key.
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.2.2-2 Mode setting
(2) Entry of Split type(Split)

In case of setting Image splitting
method, click "▼" in Split item and
select a correct splitting method,
Fig.10.2.2-3
then push ENTER key. (Selectable
Split setting COLOR
POSI/SIZE
in B/M, B/PW or B/CW mode)
(3)Entry of sweep speed (Sweep Speed)

In case of setting Sweep speed,
click "▼" in Sweep Speed item and
select a correct Sweep Speed, then
push ENTER key. (Refer to Table

COLOR
Fig.10.2.2-4 POSI/SIZE
Sweep Speed 10.1)

(Selectable in M, PW, CW, B/M, B/PW
or B/CW mode)
10-8 Q1E-EA0611
Table 10.1 VCR Review Image and Sweep Speed
Example of VCR review image Sweep

Speed
10-9 Q1E-EA0611
(4) Entry of repetitive frequency (PRF)
In case of setting PRF, click "▼"
in PRF item and select a correct
PRF,
then push ENTER key.

COLOR
POSI/SIZE
(Selectable
in PW, CW, B/PW or B/CW mode)
Fig.10.2.2-5 PRF setting
(5) Entry REF

In case of setting REF, click "▼"
in REF item and select a correct REF,
then push ENTER key. (Selectable

COLOR
POSI/SIZE
in
PW, CW, B/PW or B/CW mode)
Fig.10.2.2-6
REF setting
(6) Entry of Doppler-image display polarity (POLARITY)

In case of setting Polarity of
Doppler, click "▼" in Polarity item
and select a correct Polarity, then
Fig.10.2.2-7
Polarity setting push ENTER key. (Selectable in
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
PW, CW, B/PW or B/CW mode)
Direction of POSITIVE or NEGATIVE can be known from the sign

of the maximum detectable flow velocity display shown at
the left edge of the VCR review Doppler-image.
When the upper end is + and the lower end is -, the polarity
is POSITIVE, while the opposite polarity is NEGATIVE.
10-10 Q1E-EA0611
(7) Entry of unit of flow velocity (UNIT)
In case of setting DopplerUnit,
click "▼" in Doppler Unit item and
select a correct Unit,
Fig.10.2.2-8 then push ENTER key.

COLOR
Doppler Unit setting POSI/SIZE
(Selectable in
PW, CW or B/PW mode)
NOTICE: In case the adjustment of Doppler entry angle

has been made, "kHz" is not displayed on the
menu.
(8) Entry of Doppler-image display mode (DOP. EXPAND)

In case of setting Doppler Expand,
click "▼" in doppler Expand item and
select a correct method, then push
ENTER key. (Selectable in
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.2.2-9 PW, CW or B/PW mode)

Doppler Expand
setting
(9) Combine
Fig.10.2.2-10
Combine setting
10-11 Q1E-EA0611
(10) Entry of Annotation Region
In replay mode of VCR, Character and Annotation can be input

similar to the usual examination. For detail refer to
Paragraph 6.1 and 6.2.
Clicking the "▼" of the Annotation
Region index, Opened sub-window.
Read the display region of image,
and select the region to read the
display.
Then, press ENTER .

COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.2.2-11
Annotation Region setting
(11) Entry of Measurement Region

Clicking the "▼" of the Measurement
Region index, Opened sub-window.
Read the display region of image,
Fig.10.2.2-12 and select the region to read the
Measurement Region display.
setting Then, press ENTER .
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
10-12 Q1E-EA0611
(12) Entry of display depth (RANGE)
When letters of "Adjust" on the

button (for Range R/U or Range
L/D )are written clearly , input
the depth range of the VCR image
in the following procedures.
1 Click Adjust button on the Mode

Adjust window by operating the
trackball, and Ruler window are
opened.
2 Input the base length between two

points. Bring the yellow cursor
to the first point, and press
ENTER key. And once again the
same action to the second point.
(In this example, two points are
Fig.10.2.2-13 Setting RANGE-1
based on the scale of right side
on VCR image).
3 The index of the bottom of the

Ruler window changes to white
(able to input number). In this
case, the distance between two
points are 100mm. Bring it to the
second point and input "100"
(distance value of two points)to
the index.
4 Press Register button, return to

Mode adjust window, and
displayed the distance below the
Adjust button.
Fig.10.2.2-14 Setting RANGE-2
10-13 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE:
When using the ruler, the ruler may not be displayed on the
side of scale. In this case, move the ruler to a more convenient
location.
When the Measurement Menu or Main Menu is displayed while
an image is recorded, the scale may inadvertently be hidden.
To perform measurements using the ruler, hide the Measurement
and other menus before recording.
Before launching the Mode Adjust Menu from the Main Menu,
move the Main Menu to make sure that you can see the scale.
10.2.3 Mode adjustment function

Greatest attention has been paid to recognition of information
data and not to make incorrect recognition by applying the special
calculation. However, there may be a case that the scanner unit
takes in erroneous information data due to incidental noise
or deterioration of the tape quality. The MODE ADJUST is the
function to correct such case.
Press MAIN
MENU key to display MAIN MENU, and operating the trackball
move the cursor to "MODE ADJ.". Then, press ENTER key.
The menu for registration of display mode is displayed at the

right side of the VCR review image.
Enter the VCR review image information in accordance with "10.2.2

Registration of review image mode".
10.2.4 Entering the comment
In VCR playback mode , entering the comment is available.
(Refer to 6.1)
10-14 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 11 Measuring Functions
11.1 Outline
Table 11.1-1 Summarizes the measuring functions of this system.
Table 11.1-1 Measuring Functions of this equipment (1/4)
Display
Category Type USE Meaning
Mode
Basic ALL Measuring distance between two points.
B
Measure- APPLICATION
ments
ALL Measuring depth difference between two
CALIP M
APPLICATION points, time, and velocity (slope).
ALL Measuring flow velocity at caliper cursor.

D
APPLICATION
ALL Measuring areas and circumferential lengths

B
APPLICATION by tracing.
ALL Measuring the area and circumferential length

TRACE M APPLICATION of a circle with the distance between two
points as its diameter.
ALL Measuring mean flow velocity by tracing

D
APPLICATION Doppler waveforms.
ALL Measuring areas and circumferential lengths

Area-E B
APPLICATION by means of ellipse approximation.
Measuring volumes by area-length method,

ALL
Volume B,M ellipse approximation method, and biplane
APPLICATION
method.
Only ABDOMINAL Measuring by adding microvolume sliced

SVolume B evenly.
AND OTHERS
Velocity Measuring flow velocity and pressure gradient.

D Only CARDIAC
(Velo.)
Acceleration ALL Measuring flow acceleration.

D
(Accel.) APPLICATION
Measuring the instantaneous mean flow

ALL velocity, %-WINDOW, etc. of a Doppler
D-Profile D
APPLICATION waveform at a user-selected point along the
time axis.
11-1 327 Q1E-EA0611

Table 11.1-1 Continued (2/4)
Display
Mode
Basic ALL Calculating distance ratio.
Ratio-Dis B,M
Measure- APPLICATION
ments
ALL Calculating area ratio.
Ratio-Area B
APPLICATION
ALL Calculating time ratio.

Ratio-Time M,D
APPLICATION
ALL Calculating velocity ratio.

Ratio-Velo. D
APPLICATION
ALL Calculating average flow velocity.

V Ave. D
APPLICATION
CFM-B, ALL Measuring CFM Flow velocity.

CFM-Velo.
M APPLICATION
PHT D Only CARDIAC Measuring pressure half-time (PHT).
ALL Measuring heart rate.

HR M,D
APPLICATION
Only Histogram measurements.

Histogram B ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Time M,D Only CARDIAC Time interval measurement
Decel. D Only CARDIAC Measurement of blood flow deceleration
Only CARDIAC Measurement of change of pressure

dP/dt D
difference over time
Cross-sect Only VASCULAR Calculating %STENOSIS from area ratio.

ional %Steno *3 B
Image (Max – Min) / Max × 100[%]
Measure-
B(M)-LV/Ao B, M Only CARDIAC Cross-sectional Image Measurement
ments
M-Mode LV M Only CARDIAC Measuring left ventricle in M-mode.

Schemas
LV-Gibson *3 M Only CARDIAC Measuring left ventricle by GIBSON
LV-Pombo *3 M Only CARDIAC Measuring left ventricle by POMBO
MV M Only CARDIAC Measuring mitral valve in M-mode.
Ao M Only CARDIAC Measuring aortic valve in M-mode.
PV M Only CARDIAC Measuring pulmonary valve in M-mode.
TV M Only CARDIAC Measuring tricuspid valve in M-mode.
11-2 Q1E-EA0611
Display
Mode
Doppler Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of left ventricular outflow
LVOT D+B
Measure- tract.
ments
Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of left ventricular inflow
LV inflow D+B
tract.
Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of right ventricular outflow

RVOT D+B
tract.
Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of right ventricular inflow

RV inflow D+B
tract.
Only Measuring vascular Doppler.

Vasc1 *3 D+B ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Only Measuring vascular Doppler.

Vasc2 *3 D+B ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
AV-Area D+B Only CARDIAC Measurement of area of aortic valve port
Qp/Qs D+B Only CARDIAC Pulmonary flow / Systemic flow
Only VASCULAR, Measuring vascular Doppler

RI,PI D ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Only VASCULAR, Measuring vascular Doppler

Flow Volume D+B ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
PV flow *3 D Only CARDIAC Measuring Doppler of Pulmonary Vain
Left B(M)-EF B,M Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by TEICHHOLZ's rule.

Ventri-cula
r Cardiac B(M)-EF Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by GIBSON's rule.
B,M
Function Gibson *3
Measure-
B(M)-EF Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by POMBO's rule.
ments B,M
Pombo *3
Area-Length *3 B Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by area-length method.
Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by biplane ellipse

BI-Plane *3 B
approximation method.
Simpson *3 B Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by SIMPSON's rule.
Only CARDIAC Measuring volume by bullet approximation

Bullet *3 B
method.
Only CARDIAC Volume measurement by dual cross section

M.Simpson B
cylindrical approximation
MV Regurg D+ CFM-B Only CARDIAC Regurgitant volume of mitral valve
TV Regurg D+ CFM-B Only CARDIAC Regurgitant volume of tricuspid valve
11-3 Q1E-EA0611
Display
Mode
Obstetric Only Obstetrical Measurement Package

Measure- OB-STD B,M,D ABDOMINAL (Standard)
ments AND OTHERS
Only Obstetrical Measurement Package

OB-Todai *3 B,M,D ABDOMINAL (Todai)
AND OTHERS

OB-OsakaU *3 B,M,D ABDOMINAL (OsakaU)
AND OTHERS

OB-JSUM B,M,D ABDOMINAL (Plan of Japan’s standard)
AND OTHERS
OTHERS Only Angle measurements
Angle B ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Only Volume measurement, etc. such as bladder

Urology B ABDOMINAL and prostate
AND OTHERS
Only Volume measuerment, etc. such as uterus or

Gynecology B,D ABDOMINAL ovary.
AND OTHERS
Only Volume measuerment, etc. such as follicular.

Follicular B,D ABDOMINAL
AND OTHERS
Only VASCULAR Measuring a level of blood vessel stenosis.

L(R)-Carotid B,D
Only VASCULAR Measuring the blood flow velocity.

L(R)-Leg A. D
Only VASCULAR Measuring the blood flow velocity.

L(R)-Arm A. D
NOTICE:1)All measurements, except CALIP measurement, can be

conducted only when the FREEZE function is switched on.
2)The items possible to calculate are limited in accordance

with inspection mode and application.
3)*3; this measurement can not be used in the factory shipment.

In case of need, by using [Additional Settings] of
measurement export/import function, import or replace the
measurement. Refer to item 11.5.6 Measurement
Export/Import function.
11-4 Q1E-EA0611
11.2 Starting up Measurements
CALIP TRACE
[1] , Key
(1) These keys are exclusively used for starting up the following
two basic measurements in the current display mode:
CALIP
: Starts up the CALIP measurement only.
TRACE
: Starts up the TRACE measurement only.
[2] MEAS MENU

.
1 Key
This key is used to select the types of measurements other

than the above two, as follows:
MEAS MENU
.
(1) Press 1 , displaying the first page of the measurement menu
in the left-hand area of the screen.
Measurement
Menu
Cursor
Fig.11.2-1 Measurement Menu
The menu will show only the names of the measurements that
can be executed in the current image presentation mode.
Move the cursor to the name of the measurement you wish
to initiate.
If the current page of the menu does not show the name of
the desired measurement, select "OTHERS" by placing the cursor
on it and pressing. The next page (e.g. MEAS. (2/2)) of the
menu will show up with another list of measurement names.
(2) Press ENTER key, this will execute the measurement selected
at step (1).
11-5 Q1E-EA0611
11.3 Basic Procedures
11.3.1 Functions of Keys
(1)Operation Panel
The basic functions of the operating controls to be used in

measurement execution are as follows:
Track Ball: Moves the caliper cursors,
etc. on the image

display.
UNDO ENTER ENTER Key: Determines the measuring

COLOR
POSI／SIZE points.
UNDO Key: Returns the measurement
status to the preceding
status.
Fig11.3.1-1 Trackball,Enter Key,and Undo Key
CLEAR
·························· Ends the current measurement and clears
the measurement display.
11-6 Q1E-EA0611
(2)Function Menu
Function Menu in Measurement mode

Menu for each Measurement:F2 ~ F3 Mesurement Function Keys:F5 ~ F7
(1st Page)
(2nd page)
Fig11.3.1-2 Function Menu in Measurement mode
(1st Page)
F1 Scroll
Scroll the hiden Menu in

Measurement Result Frame up and
down.
Text Lines
Not selectable if the whole of each
1 menu are displayed.
Measurement Result Frame
Fig. 11.3.1-3 Scroll
F2 ~ F3 Menu for each Measurement
Some Measurements have EXTRA MENU (Others not).
F5 ~ F7 Measurement Function Keys
Start the preset measurement function refer to 8.3.8 (2) in
Chapter8 Application.
11-7 Q1E-EA0611
(2nd page)
F1 Move Box
Move MRF(Measurement Result

Frame) to the other place in
Monitor when MRF is displayed
above the interesting area of US
image.
MRF(Measurment Result Frame)
Pressing toggle switch,

Fig.11.3.1-4 Move color of MRF are changed yellow,
and move by trackball.
For every application it is
possible to move the position of
MRF set just after that application
was selected.
NOTICE: This function is
effective in dual
displaying mode.
F2 Resize
Pressing toggle switch,

color of MRF are changed yellow,
and moving the bottom line up and
down by trackball.
For every application it is

possible to resize the size of MRF
set just after that application
was selected.
NOTICE: This function is
Fig.11.3.1-5 Resize
effective in dual
displaying mode.
F3 User Default
This function is displayed only after selecting F1 Move Box

or F2 Resize.
Pressing toggle switch, this move MRF to the default

position and resize MRF to the default size
11-8 Q1E-EA0611
• At the starting time of Move: MRF is returned to the original
position which was registered for the current application.
• At the starting time of Resize: MRF is returned to the original
size which was registered for the current application.
This function is effective in dual displaying mode.
NOTICE: This function is effective in dual displaying mode.
F5 Hide Loci
Measured trace is not displayed. In this case MRF is displayed.
Pressing toggle switch once more, they are displayed again.
Fig.11.3.1-6 Hide Loci
F6 Meas. Save
Measurement result is saved in the external memory medium.

(Refer to Item 11.6.4.)
Not measurement result currently displayed on the screen but
the results which are preset to display on a report screen
are saved.
In case that storage capacity of drive for saving is
insufficiency or in case that media isn't inserted and so on,
error message will be shown.
In that case, please change media and press toggle switch,
again. 6
11-9 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Measurement-results display frame
The measurement-results display frame is a transparent frame
for displaying the measurement results of a specific item.
! Automatic execution mode
Upon start of measurement, the target item is enclosed in

a white frame, and the measurements for the item are displayed
from the top. After all the measurements are displayed in
the automatic execution mode, the measurement-results
display frame is placed in the manual execution mode
(described below).
Item being measured

(enclosed in a white frame)
Fig.11.3.1-7 Automatic execution mode
! Manual execution mode

After all items are measured in the automatic execution mode
or if the UNDO key UNDO
is pressed during measurement in the
automatic execution mode, the measurement-results display

frame is placed in the manual execution mode. In the manual
execution mode, the selected measurement items are enclosed
in a yellow frame. You can select the desired items by using
the trackball to move the frame up and down. After you select
the items you want to measure, you can measure them by pressing
the ENTER key ENTER
.
COLOR
POSI／SIZE
11-10 Q1E-EA0611
Selected measurement
item (enclosed in a
yellow frame)
The frame can be move up or
down with the trackball.
Automatic execution mode
Fig.11.3.1-8 Manual execution mode
In the manual execution mode, you can press the [Del] key
to delete the last measurement results for the selected
measurement item.
[Del] key is
pressed.
Fig.11.3.1-9 Deleting the results of a measurement item
! Shortcut key
When the measurement item name is followed by an alphabetic
character enclosed in parentheses, you can measure the item
by directly pressing the alphabetic key. This is a shortcut
key. You can use a shortcut key to measure an item without
moving the frame and pressing the ENTER key ENTER
.
COLOR
POSI／SIZE
11-11 Q1E-EA0611
Measurement item
name: AC
Shortcut key: A
You can measure the AC item

by pressing the A key of the
keyboard.
Fig.11.3.1-10 Measurement by using a shortcut key
You can use the measurement setup menu to select whether

to enable shortcut keys for measurement items. For details,
refer to (2) Sub tab in 11.5.3.2 Measurement Item Edition
area in 11.5.3 Measurement Edit Menu.
11.3.2 Measurement procedures
The measuring functions of this system consist of the following

combinations of basic measurements:
[1] Distance (B-mode method)

Distance (M-mode method)
[2] Area (Distance method)

Area (Trace method)
Area (Ellipse method)
Area (Rectangle method)
[3] Volume (Area-length method)

Volume (Ellipse method)
Volume (Biplane method)
[4] SVolume (SVolume method)
[5] Instantaneous Flow Velocity (Caliper method)

Instantaneous Flow Velocity (Bar method)
[6] Trace (MANUAL trace method)

Trace (AUTO trace method)
Trace (PLOT trace method)
11-12 Q1E-EA0611
[1] Distance
[1-1] B-Mode Method
To measure the distance (D) between two caliper cursor

locations on a B-mode image display, proceed as follows:
Fig. 11.3.2-1 Measuring Distance Using B-Mode Method
1 Using the track ball, move the

caliper cursor to the starting
point of measurement.
2 Press ENTER key. The first caliper

cursor will be fixed, and another Measured value is
shown also during
cursor (second caliper cursor) cursor movement.
will be displayed just on it. By
D
turning the track ball, move the
second cursor to the ending point
Fixed
of measurement.
Second caliper
To correct the starting point, cursor
press UNDO key. This will allow Fig. 11.3.2-2

you to return to step 1 . Cursor Movememt
3 Press ENTER key. This will complete the distance

measurement, and display the measured value.
11-13 Q1E-EA0611
[1-2] M-Mode Method
The B-mode method described above can also be used to measure

the depth difference (D), time difference (T), and speed (S)
between two caliper cursor locations on an M-mode image.
Fig. 11.3.2-3 Measuring Distance Using M-Mode Method
[2] Area
[2-1] Distance Method
The distance method calculates the area (A) and

circumference (C) of a circularly-shaped region of interest
by measuring the diameter (distance) of the region. Fig.
11.3.2-4 illustrates this measurement concept.
A=π× D 2
A C = πD
D (Distance)
Fig. 11.3.2-4 Measuring Area Using Distance Method
11-14 Q1E-EA0611
To measure the diameter (distance), proceed as follows:
1 Using the track ball and ENTER

key, place the first caliper on the
starting point of measurement and the
second caliper on the ending point of
measurement, thereby determining the
diameter (distance) of the area.
Fig. 11.3.2-5
Calip Diameter
2 The diameter will be shown in a solid line, and the area

(A) and circumference (C) will be automatically
calculated.
3 The values of "A" and "C" will be displayed, thus completing

the area measurement using the distance method.
[2-2] Trace Method
The trace method measures the area (A) and circumferential

length (C) of the region under examination in the following
manner.
Fig. 11.3.2-6 Measuring Area Using Trace Method
1 Using the track ball, move the caliper

cursor to the starting point of
measure-ment.
11-15 Q1E-EA0611
2 Press ENTER key. The cursor will be
fixed at the starting point. A second
cursor will appear just on it, which
can be moved by turning the track ball.
Trace the examination area by moving
the second cursor along its
circumference. To move " "
backward, press UNDO key repeated-ly.
3 Press ENTER key. This will form the

Trace
trace (locus) into a loop, thus
completing the area and
circumferential length
measurements. Fig. 11.3.2-7
Cursor Tracing
[2-3] Ellipse Method
The ellipse method will measure the area (A) and

circumferential length (C) of the region under examination
by approximating that region to an ellipse.
DS (short-axis diameter)
A= π 2 ×DL×DS
4
2 2
A C=π DL +DS
2
DL (long-axis diameter)
Fig. 11.3.2-8 Measuring Area Using Ellipse Method
1 Move the first cariper to starting

point of measurement by trackball.
2 Press the ENTER key to fix the first

cariper.
The second cariper and circle are

displayed.
And then ,move the second cariper

setting to the ellips. Fig. 11.3.2-9 (1/2)
Ellipse Method
11-16 Q1E-EA0611
Pressing the UNDO key replace the
first cariper.
3 In this method ,trackball has 3

functions such as (a),(b),and (c)
Every pressing the UNDO key,
the function of trackball rotate

such as (a)-(b)-(C)-(a).
(a) Moving the 1st cariper mark
By moving the 1st cariper

mark,operator can adjust the
ellips size. In this method,long
axis-short axis ratio is
constant.
(b) Moving the 2nd cariper mark
By moving the 2nd cariper

mark,operator can adjust the
ellips size. In this method,long
axis-short axis ratio is
constant.
(c) Changing the ellips size.
Rotating the track ball will

cause the circle to become
elliptic, expanding or
contracting in the short axis
direction.
Fig. 11.3.2-9 (2/2)

Ellipse Method
4 Press ENTER key. The ellipse will be shown in a solid

line. This completes the area and circumferential
measurements by the ellipse method.
11-17 Q1E-EA0611
[2-4] Rectangle Method
The rectangle method calculates the area (A) and

circumference (C) by approximating the area of interest
to a rectangle.
D1
A D2 A=D1×D2
C=2× (D1+D2)
Fig. 11.3.2-10 Measuring Area Using Rectangle Method
11-18 Q1E-EA0611
To measure the area, proceed as follows:
1 Using the track ball, move the first

caliper to the starting point of
measurement.
2 Press ENTER key, fixing the caliper

there. A second caliper will then
appear on the first one. Turning the
track ball will move the second
caliper, forming a rectangle with the
first caliper position (fixed at step
1 ) and second caliper position
(currently moving) as one pair of
opposed corners.
Adjust the shape and size of the

rectangle so that it fits the area
to be measured.
Fig. 11.3.2-11
If you wish to change the starting Rectangle Method
point, press UNDO key, returning to
step 1 .
3 Press ENTER key. This will show the

rectangle in a solid line, and allow
the system to calculate the area (A)
and circumference (C). The values of
"A" and "C" will be displayed, thus
completing the area measurement using
the rectangle method.
11-19 Q1E-EA0611
[3] Volume
[3-1] Area-Length Method
The area-length method calculates an approximate volume (V)

of the region under examination by measuring the area (A)
and long axis (L) of that region.
2
8A
V=
3πL
Axis of revolution
Fig. 11.3.2-12 Measuring Volume Using Area-Length Method
1 Using the track ball and ENTER key,

measure the area of the region as in
the trace measurement.
Upon completion of tracing, a caliper

cursor will be displayed at the starting
point of the trace (locus).
2 Measure the long axis (L: distance) of

the region traced. The volume will
then be calculated and displayed. This
completes the measurement.
Fig. 11.3.2-13
Area-Length
Method
11-20 Q1E-EA0611
[3-2] Ellipse Method
The ellipse method calculates an approximate volume of the

region under examination by measuring the area and long axis
using the formula described in "AREA-LENGTH Method," but the
area is to be measured by the ellipse method.
Follow the instructions given under "Ellipse Method" in "[2]

Area".
[3-3] Biplane Method
The biplane method calculates an approximate volume of the

region under examination by measuring the short and long axes
(D1, D2, and D3, crossing each other at right angles in Fig.
11-3-2-14) of that region. This method will provide greater
accuracy than the area-length or ellipse method described
earlier.
V= π ×D1× D2 × D3
6
Fig. 11.3.2-14 Measuring Volume Using Biplane Method
1 Using the track ball and ENTER key, D2 being

measured
measure D1, D2, and D3 (in this
sequence) of the target region.
While performing the measurement,
you can tem-porarily switch the
FREEZE function off and show a more
suitable image. Fig. 11.3.2-15
2 Upon completion of the D3 Biplane Method
measurement, the volume will be
calculated and displayed. This
completes the measure-ment.
11-21 Q1E-EA0611
[4] SVolume Measurement
The SVolume method calculates an approximate volume (V) of

the region under examination by measuring the microvolume
sliced evenly. The microvolume is calculated using the
sectional area of the space sliced and slice width. The
sectional area is calculated using the same measuring
procedure that is described for the area measurement (trace
method) in paragraph 11.3.2
N : Slice number (Max:15) (Max)

N = 1, 2, 3, 4,······, 15
AREA (Slice section of N=4)

Target of
measurement
Slice section (N=4)

5 mm
Fig. 11.3.2-16 Measuring Volume using SVolume method
N-1
Volume = Σ (0.5 × ( (AREA k+1 + AREA k) / 2) )

k=1
1) Measure the area of any slice section by using trackball

and ENTER key.
2) Changed the slice section by toggle switch .

2
3) Repeat 1) and 2) and measure the volume. Number of slice

section is Max. 15.
NOTICE: Add volume in every measurement for the slice section, if

skipped slice section, it become the same value before
measured.
11-22 Q1E-EA0611
[5] Instantaneous Flow Velocity
Selecting Units of Flow Velocity Measurements
Flow velocity values (including instantaneous flow velocities)

measured can be expressed in both meters/ second (m/s) and
centimeters/second (cm/s). However, the flow velocity
measured under the following measurement categories can be
expressed in kHz as well as in m/s and cm/s.
• CALIP Measurement
The desired unit (m/s, cm/s, or kHz) can be selected on the

DOP-MENU or on CFM MENU, both accessible through the MAIN MENU.
The unit of the maximum detectable velocity value will also
be changed in accordance with the unit thus selected.
Table 11.3.2-1 lists the minimum increment (resolution) of

each unit that can be displayed.
Table 11.3.2-1
Minimum Display Increments for Units of

Values Measured in Flow Velocity
Measurements
Minimum Display
Unit Increment
Display in Terms m/s 0.01

of Velocity (V)
cm/s 0.1
Display in Terms kHz 0.01

of Frequency (F)
NOTICE: In CW mode, it can not be selected unit of kHz.
11-23 Q1E-EA0611
[5-1] Caliper Method
The caliper method measures flow velocity (V) and pressure

gradient (∆P) on a Doppler-mode image by the use of the caliper
cursor.
(Pressure Gradient)
∆P=4V2(mmHg) ········ Modified Bernoulli Theorem
*1)
± *.**m/s
*.**mmHg
*1) : In SI Unit mmHg is expressed as kPa.

1kPa = 7.5mmHg.
Fig. 11.3.2-17 Measuring Instantaneous Flow Velocity

Using Caliper Method
1 By operating the track ball, place the

caliper cursor on the point to be
measured.
Fig. 11.3.2-18 Placing Caliper
2 Press ENTER key. The cursor will then

be fixed, and the measured results will
be displayed.
11-24 Q1E-EA0611
[6] Trace (Ratio-Area, Doppler measurement)
It can be selected 3 method Auto, Manual and Plot by toggle switch

in function menu F3.
NOTICE: It can not be used the function by measurement TRACE key.
[6-1] Manual Trace Method
The manual trace method measures mean flow velocities (Vm),

etc. by manually tracing a Doppler waveform with the track
ball.
1 Using the track ball, move the caliper

cursor to the starting point of
measurement.
2 Press ENTER key. A straight line

will be drawn perpendicularly to the
0 m/s line from the cursor position.
3 Move the caliper cursor along the flow

waveform. The trace will be shown
in a solid line. To move the cursor
backward, repeatedly press UNDO key.
4 Press ENTER key when tracing is

completed. A straight line will be
drawn perpendicularly to the 0 m/s
line from the cursor position, and
the measured results will be
displayed. Fig. 11.3.2-19
Manual Trace Method
11-25 Q1E-EA0611
[6-2] Auto Trace Method
The AUTO TRACE Method automatically traces the Doppler

waveform between two points specified by the user. Using
this method will facilitate the measurement of mean flow
velocity, pressure gradient, acceleration time, etc.
Trace can be calculated in the following three methods.
1 PEAK method
This is a method to trace the

µ
PEAK point (PEAK) less by -18dB
MODE than the flow velocity point
(MODE) with the maximum
power.
Brightness
2 MODE method

µ flow velocity point (MODE)
MODE with the maximum power.
Brightness
3 MEAN method

µ
peak mean flow velocity.
Peak mean flow velocity =
∫ v(f) • P(f) d(f)

=
∫ P(f) d(f)
Brightness
Fig. 11.3.2-20 Auto Trace Method
Select a trace calculation method on the measurement setup

for each measurement
11-26 Q1E-EA0611
1 By turning the track ball, move
the caliper to the desired
starting point of tracing, as
in the example at right.
2 Press ENTER key. This will

cause a dotted line to be
displayed vertically just
above or below the 0 m/s line.
This line indicates the point
in time at which you wish to
start the tracing.

the vertical line to the point
in time at which you wish to
end the tracing. If you wish
to change the starting point,
press UNDO key at this
step.
Fig. 11.3.2-21
Auto Trace-1
4 Press ENTER key. This will

fix the ending point, and
initiate the AUTO TRACE
function across the distance
from the starting point to the
ending point.
And this will display the
results of measurement based
on the tracing.
5 When the auto-trace

measurement is finished, a
window as shown in Fig.
11.3.2-23 is displayed.
Fig. 11.3.2-22
Auto Trace-2
11-27 Q1E-EA0611
The trace and measured value
are proper, select Yes
button.
Fig. 11.3.2-23
If the trace and measured value are improper, select Auto ,
Manual or Plot button.
• With "Auto" selected : The trace result and each measured
value are cleared and Auto trace is started again.
• With "Manual" selected : The trace result and each measured
value are cleared and Manual trace is started again.
• With "Plot" selected : The trace result and each measured
value are cleared and Plot trace is started again.
NOTICE: Large noise amplitudes can cause the waveform to
be traced incorrectly. To avoid this problem, the
Doppler gain level (PW/CW) must beadjusted properly
before activating the AUTO TRACE Method.
[6-3] Plot trace method
Using the trackball and ENTER key, mean flow velocity (Vm)
and others are measured by applying linear approximation to
the Doppler waveform.
1 Operating the trackball, move the

caliper mark to the start point of
measurement.
2 Pressing ENTER key draw a vertical

line from the caliper mark to the
0 m/s line.
3 Turning the trackball, move the

caliper mark to the return point
for linear approximation to be
applied to the Doppler waveform.
The straight line to be
approximated is displayed with
solid line. Fig. 11.3.2-24
Plot Trace Method-(1/2)
11-28 Q1E-EA0611
4 Pressing ENTER key fixes the
caliper mark and the next straight
line can be displayed.
To cancel the fixed point, press
UNDO key.
5 When tracing is completed by

repeating the steps 3 and 4,
double click ENTER key, or press
toggle switch for End Trace.

3
A vertical line is drawn from the

caliper mark to the 0m/s line and
the measurement ends after display
of the measurement result.
Fig. 11.3.2-24
Plot Trace Method-(2/2)
11.4 Contents of Measuring Functions
11.4.1 Basic Measurements
[1] Calip Measurement
The following measurements will be performed in accordance

with the position of the calipers.
Table 11.4.1-1 CALIP Measurement
Caliper
Symbol Meaning Unit Method Comments
Position
On B-mode D Distance between 2 mm Distance Up to eight distance

measurements can
image points (B-mode method) be performed
simultaneously (e.g.
D1 through D8)
On M-mode D Depth difference mm
image between 2 points Distance
T Time difference between s (M-mode method)
2 points
S Velocity (slope) between mm/s
2 points
11-29 Q1E-EA0611
On V Velocity of frequency at m/s Instantaneous Up to eight distance
or measurements can
Doppler-mode caliper velocity be performed
cm/s
image or (Caliper method) simultaneously (e.g.
D1 through D8)
kHz
PG Pressure Gradient at mmHg Measurable only on

Cardiac Region
Caliper
T Time interval between 2 ms Time interval

points between 2 points
Velocity and Time can be switched by toggle switch when

3
the caliper mark is on the Doppler image.
Measurement Procedure
Start up the measurement by Selecting CALIP key or other method

(refer to paragraph 11.2(1)), and perform the desired
measurement using the appropriate instructions described
earlier.
[2] Trace Measurement
The following measurements will be taken in accordance with

the position of the calipers.
11-30 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.1-2 AREA Measurement
Caliper
Position
On B-mode C Circumference, and cm Area Up to four points

2
image A area of: cm (Trace method) can be measured
simultaneously.
traced region
On M-mode D Diameter, circumference, mm Distance

image C and area of: cm (M-mode)
2
A cm
circle drawn with distance
between two points as
diameter
On Vm Mean velocity, time m/s Trace

Doppler-mode T difference,and integral of or (Manual Trace
image velocity of: cm/s Method)
traced Doppler image s

TV m
Measurement procedure
TRACE
Start up the measurement by Selecting key, and perform
the desired measurement using the appropriate instructions
described earlier.
11-31 Q1E-EA0611
[3] Area-E (Area-Ellipse)
Produce an ellipse by establishing the long and short axes,

and then measure the area and circumferential length. Use
the same measuring procedure that is described for the area
measurement (ellipse method) in paragraph 11.3.2. Start up
the desired measurement through the menus.
[4] Volume Measurement
Table 11-4-1-3 lists the measurements classified under the

"Volume Measurement" category which will be performed on a
B- mode image. Three volume calculation methods can be
selected as in the table, and can be registered by presetting
the measuring functions.
Table 11.4.1-3 VOLUME Measurement
Method Symb Meaning Unit Measuring Comment

ol Method s
Area-length L Area measurement by mm Volume

2
method A tracing method, cm (Area-length Method)
(B-mode only) V mL
Long-axis (revolution
axis) measurement
Ellipse method L Long-axis (revolution mm Volume

2
(B-mode only) A axis) measurement, cm (Ellipse Method)
V mL
Area measurement by
ellipse approximation
Biplane method D1 Measurement of 3 mm Volume

(B- and M-modes) D2 diameters in 2 planes mm (Biplane Method)
D3 crossing each other at mm
V 90° mL
11-32 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure
Start up the desired measurement through the menus, and carry

out the various measurements using the applicable methods.
At the starting time of Volume measurement it is possible

to change over above mentioned three kinds of equation by
operating the function key, F2.
Abbreviated display corresponding to each measurement method
on the function menu is as mentioned below.
Area length method : Area-Len

Ellipse method : Ellipse
Biplane method : Bi-Plane
[5] SVolume Measurement
In the SVolume measurement the circumference length (C) and

sectional spare (A) are measured with a probe by shifting
it by every 5mm and tracing the contour of prostate in order
to calculate the volume at every measuring point.
Table 11.4.1-4 SVOLUME Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Comments
Step Slice width of prostate. mm

Volume Volume of prostate. mL
Area N N:Serial numbers of prostate slices. Max N = 15.
C Circumference length of sectional spare. mm
2
A Sectional spare sliced. cm
11-33 Q1E-EA0611
[6] Velocity Measurement
The flow velocity (V) and pressure gradient (4V2) or frequency

(F) at user-specified points on a Doppler-mode image will
be measured using one of the following two methods. These
methods can be registered and recalled by means of the
measurement presetting function.
Table 11.4.1-5 Velocity Measurement
Method Meaning Measuring Method Comments

(paragraph 11.3.2)
Caliper method Using caliper, specify the desired measuring Instantaneous

points on a Doppler image. Velocity
(Caliper Method)
(UNIT="m/s")
+V1
+V1
Measuring procedure
Start up the desired measurement through the menus, and carry

out the various measurements using the applicable methods.
11-34 Q1E-EA0611
[7] Accel.(Acceleration) Measurement
The acceleration and deceleration of blood flow will be

computed by measuring velocities at three points on a Doppler
image as in Fig. 11.4.1-1.
Fig. 11.4.1-1 Measuring Points in Accel. Measurement
Table 11.4.1-6 Accel. Measurement
V1 Caliper-1 Velocity m/s or

cm/s
V2 Caliper-2 Velocity m/s or

cm/s
V3 Caliper-3 Velocity m/s or Displayed only when measuring V3

cm/s
AcT Time: 1 → 2 ms
2
Acc Acceleration: 1 → 2 m/s or
2
cm/s
DcT Time: 2 → 3 ms Displayed only when measuring V2

2
Dcc Deceleration: 2 → 3 m/s or Displayed only when measuring V3
2
cm/s
*1): In SI Unit cm/s2 is expressed as m/s2. 1m/s2 = 100cm/s2
11-35 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the Accel. measurement

(via the procedure described in see
paragraph 11.2.(2)). Using the
track ball, move the caliper cursor
to the point that you wish to
specify as "V1"
2 Press ENTER key. The cursor will

be fixed on point "V1," and another
cursor (second cursor) will show
up just on it. By turning the track
ball, move the second cursor to the
point specified as "V2."

be fixed on point "V2," and another
cursor (third cursor) will show up
just on it. If you do not wish to
measure the deceleration, press
UNDO key at this step, completing
the measure-ment. The measured Fig. 11.4.1-2
result (acceleration) will then be ACCELERATION
displayed.
If you wish to measure the
deceleration, establish another
point as "V3" by moving the third
cursor with the track ball.
4 Press ENTER key. The result

(decel-eration) will be displayed.
This completes the ACCELERATION
measurement.
11-36 Q1E-EA0611
[8] D-Profile
Table 11.4.1-7 lists the measurements to be performed under

the "D-Profile" category.
Table 11.4.1-7 D-PROFILE Measurement
MEAN Instantaneous mean velocity m/s or

cm/s
MODE Flow velocity at point of m/s or

maximum spectrum power cm/s
PEAK Instantaneous maximum flow m/s or Point 18 dB down from

velocity cm/s MODE
%WINDOW Index of flow pattern width % Width between points 12 dB

down from MODE
FL
%WINDOW= ×100
FU
Measure bar
Fig. 11.4.1-3 Concept of D-Profile Measurement
NOTICE: This measuring function is not available in VCR

playback mode.
11-37 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the D-Profile measurement

in the appropriate manner described
in paragraph 11.2.(2) A vertical
measure bar that represents the time
axis will show up on a Doppler image.
2 Using the track ball, move the measure

bar to the point where you wish to Fig. 11.4.1-4
calculate the above values. D-Profile
3 Press ENTER key. The measured results

will be displayed. This completes the
D-Profile measurement.
[9] Ratio-Dis, Ratio-Area, Ratio-Time, and Ratio-Velo

Measurements
Table 11.4.1-7 lists the ratio calculations for distance,

area, time, and velocity.
Ratio calculation can be selected from the following three

methods.
1 First measurement result × 100 (%)

Second measurement result
2 Second measurement result

× 100 (%)
First measurement result
4 Smaller value in measurement result

× 100 (%)
Larger value in measurement result
Above mentioned three kinds of equation can be changed over

with a function key F2 during the measuring mode.
11-38 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.1-8 RATIO Measurements
Name Symbol Meaning Unit Method Comments
RATIO-DIS D1 Calculation of ratio of mm Distance

distance between one (B- or M-mode
D2
pair of points to distance method)
R between another pair of %
points on B-mode image,
or
Calculation of ratio of
depth between one pair of
points to depth between
another pair of points on
M-mode image.
R: D1/D2 or D2/D1 or
Min/Max
2
RATIO-AREA A1 Calculation of ratio of 2 cm Area (Trace or ellipse Presettable
A2 areas on B-mode image method)
R R: A1/A2 or A2/A1 or %
Min/Max
RATIO-TIME T1 Calculation of ratio of 2 s Distance (M-mode

T2 time-differences on method)
M-mode or D-mode image
R %
R: T1/T2 or T2/T1 or
Min/Max
RATIO-VELO V1 Calculation of ratio of m/s Instantaneous flow

V2 velocities or frequencies at velocity (Caliper
2 points on D-mode image cm/s method)
R R: V1/V2 or V2/V1 or %
Min/Max
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the desired measurement in the appropriate manner.
2 Measure two values for ratio calculation for the

measurement selected. It is possible to temporarily
unfreeze the screen and obtain a more suitable image for
measurement.
3 When the two values have been measured, the ratio will
be calculated and displayed.
11-39 Q1E-EA0611
[10] HR Measurement
The heart rate per minute will be obtained by measuring the

R-wave-to-R-wave interval (R-R interval) on an M- or
Doppler-mode image. The number of heartbeats that are used
to calculate the average heart rate can be preset from a range
of 1 to 9 using the measurement setup menu.
(Refer to 11.5.3.3(b))
Table 11.4.1-9 HR Measurement
T Caliper-to-caliper time s bpm: beat per minutes
RR T/BEAT ms
HR 60 × 1000/RR bpm
(*BEAT) HR across R-to-R interval ---- Heart beats in HR

measurement set by the
measurement setup menu
are displayed.
*: 1 ~ 9
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement in the

appropriate manner.

caliper cursor on an M-mode or
Doppler-mode image to the starting
point of measurement.

then be fixed at that point, with
another caliper shown just on it.
By turning the track ball further,
bring the second cursor to the
ending point of measurement.
4 Press ENTER key. The second cursor

will be fixed there, and the
measured results will be displayed.
This completes the HR measurement.
Fig. 11.4.1-5
HR Measurement
11-40 Q1E-EA0611
[11] V Ave.(Velocity Average) Measurement
Table 11.4.1-10 lists the items to be measured under this

measurement category.
The purpose of this measurement is to calculate the average

of velocity values (V) or frequency values (F) measured at
up to nine user-specified points on a Doppler-mode image.
Table 11.4.1-10 V Ave. Measurement
AV Average flow velocity or frequency m/s or

cm/s
N Number of V or F measurements --
performed
V1 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 1 m/s or Instantaneous V2 through

V2 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 2 cm/s flow velocity V9 will be
V3 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 3 measurement displayed only
V4 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 4 (caliper method) during
V5 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 5 measurement.
V6 Flow velocity (frequency) at caliper 6
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement through the menus.
2 Using the track ball and ENTER key, place the calipers
at desired points on the Doppler image, and measure the
velocity at each of those points.
The average velocity (AV value) will be displayed each

time a point of measurement has been established.
If you wish to perform measurements on another Doppler

image, switch off the FREEZE function, and display the
desired image.
CLEAR
3 Upon ending measurement on all the points, press Key.
This will complete the V Ave. measurement.
11-41 Q1E-EA0611
[12] CFM-Velo Measurement
CFM-Velo Measurement refers to the calculation the CFM flow

velocity (V) and CFM frequency (F) at up to eight user-specified
points on the B-mode or M-mode image of a CFM image.

Table 11.4.1-11 CFM-Velo Measurement
F CFM frequency kHz Can be measured at up to 8

user-specified points.
V CFM velocity m/s or

cm/s
Ang Amount of Incidence Angle ° Adjustable on B-mode image

Adjustment only.
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement

CFM-Velo
through the menu.

caliper to a desired point of
measurement.
Fig. 11.4.1-6
CFM-Velo
11-42 Q1E-EA0611
3 Press ENTER key.
CFM Velo
This will cause the system to:
• display the measured V and F

values, and enable the next run
of measurement to be made on
another point in the case of
Incidence
measurement on the M-mode image, Angle
Adjustment
Bar
or
Fig. 11.4.1-7
• display an incidence angle
CFM-Velo-2
adjustment bar on the caliper
position in the case of
measurement on the B-mode image.
Turn the ANGLE control so that
the angle adjustment bar aligns
with the flow direction at the
caliper position, and press
ENTER key. The measured V and F
values will be displayed, and
next run of measure-ment can then
be made at another point.
4 The same measurement can be

performed at up to eight different
points on the same image by
repeating steps 2 and 3 .
5 Upon completion of measurement on

all the desired points, press CLEAR
Key, thus completing the CFM-Velo
Measurement.
11-43 Q1E-EA0611
[13] PHT Measurement
PHT Measurement refers to the calculation of pressure half

time (PHT), mitral valvular orifice area (MVA), etc. by
measuring, on a Doppler waveform, the flow velocity at the
Vp
caliper positions (VP and ) shown in Fig. 11.4.1-8.
√2

Fig. 11.4.1-8 Specifying Measuring Points in PHT

Measurement PHT Measurement
Table 11.4.1-12 PHT Measurement
VP Peak flow velocity m/s or

cm/s
PGp Peak pressure gardient mmHg*1)
DT Deceleration Time ms
2
Dcc Deceleration m/s Vp/DT
PHT Pressure half time ms
2
MVA Mitral Valvular orifice area cm 220/PHT
presettable.
*1): In SI Unit mmHg is expressed as kPa. 1kPa = 7.5mmHg.
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement through

the menus (see paragraph
11.2.(2)).
11-44 Q1E-EA0611
2 Using the track ball, move the PHT
caliper to the point where the
velocity reaches its peak (i.e. the
point that corresponds to "Vp" in
Fig. 11.4.1-8).
3 By pressing ENTER key, the caliper

PHT
marks on the Vp and Base line are
connected with a broken lines.
Operating the trackball, move the
broken line to set it along the the
falling Doppler waveform.
4 Press ENTER key. This will display

PHT
the measured results, and complete
the PHT measurement. The
horizontal line will be turned off
but the two calipers will remain
on the Doppler image.
5 Upon completion of measurement on

CLEAR
Fig. 11.4.1-9
all the desired points, press
PHT Measurement
key, thus completing the PHT
Measurement.
11-45 Q1E-EA0611
[14] Histogram Measurement
Starting up the Histogram Measurement will display a histogram

of brightness levels (graphical representation of frequency
distribution of echo intensity) within a user-specified
region of interest on a B-mode image, as in the example shown
in Fig. 11-4-1-10. Table 11-4-1-13 lists the items to be
measured or calculated under this measurement category.
Frequency of
Occurrence
100 200
0
Brightness Level
Fig. 11.4.1-10 Histogram of Brightness Level

Distribution-Example
Table 11.4.1-13 Histogram Measurement
C Circumference of specified mm Any of the following: Desired measurement method

region of interest • Trace Method is presettable.
2 • Ellipse Method
A Area of specified region of cm
• Rectangle Method
interest
These values will be 255
N Total number of brightness level -- automatically N = ∑ n di
data calculated using the i=0
formulas listed in the 255
MD Mean brightness level -- "Comments" column MD = ∑ di • n di
when the area is i =0
specified by one of
SD Standard deviation -- the above methods. 1 255 2
SD = ∑ n di • di 2 −MD
N i= 0
MODE Brightness level with highest -- di (on condition ndi = max)
frequency of occurrence
%MODE=max (ndi)/N×100
%MODE ××. ×% Highest frequency % max (ndi)/N×100

of occurrence
Desired vertical axis scaling
mode (COMMON or
INDEPENDENCE) is
presettable (when displaying
0 100 200 two histograms from two runs of
Histogram measurement).
NOTICE: di:brightness level ndi:number of data at di brightness level
11-46 Q1E-EA0611
Selecting Vertical Axis Scaling Modes
When the HISTOGRAM Measurement is started up, two runs of

area (A) and circumference (C) measurement can be performed
and the results of both runs can be displayed at a time in
two histograms.
When displaying those two histograms, you can select the

following two scaling modes (vertical axis calibration
modes):
• INDEPENDENCE Scaling Mode

In this mode, the vertical scale calibration of one histogram
is independent of the vertical scale calibration of the
other histogram, as in example (a) in Fig. 11.4.1-11.
The INDEPENDENCE Scaling Mode is suitable for comparison

of the brightness distribution patterns in two different
organs.
• COMMON Scaling Mode

In this mode, the common calibration is used for the vertical
scales of both histograms, as in example (b) in Fig.
11.4.1-11.
The COMMON Scaling Mode is suitable for comparison of the

brightness distribution patterns at two locations of an
organ.
The scaling modes are selectable on a preset entry menu.
NOTICE: The scaling mode is factory-preset to the INDEPENDENCE

mode when the equipment is first delivered.
Meantime the change of scaling set is conducted by

the measurement setup menu. For further details refer
to "(c)property for Histogram tool" in "11.5.3.3 Link
Setup".
a b a a
(a) INDEPENDENCE Scaling Mode (b) COMMON Scaling Mode

Fig. 11.4.1-11 Vertical Axis Scaling Modes of Histograms
11-47 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the HISTOGRAM measurement HISTO

through the menus (see 11.2(2)).
2 Measure the area of a region of

interest by the method selected
(Manual Trace Method, Ellipse
Method, or Rectangle Method).
3 Upon completion of measurement,

the brightness level data will be
HISTO
automatically tallied up. The
results of the calculations listed
in Table 11.4.1-13 will then be
displayed together with a
histogram.
4 If you wish to measure another area,

repeat step 2 . HISTO
In addition, when you wish to

designate the same shape of area
as measured shape of area in step
2 , move the caliper mark to the
begining point of measurement at
the state of the mark not being HISTO
fixed and select "Copy Area" of
toggle switch.
3
Only when in dual B-mode

presentation operation, you can
change over the FREEZE function Fig. 11.4.1-12
another image for measurement. HISTOGRAM
Measurement
NOTICE : When it was canceled the image at the next measurement
by freeze off, it can not be copied the diagram.
5. When the last figure is traced, a message as shown below
is displayed.
11-48 Q1E-EA0611
If Yes button is selected, it is possible to confirm detailed
histogram data.
If No button is selected, the measurement is finished.
NOTICE: For the tracing conducted by histogram it is possible
to select one time or two times by the measurement
setup menu. For further details refer to "(c)property
for Histogram tool" in "11.5.3.3 Link Setup".
[15] Time measurement

Time intervals at up to 8 points on D-mode image can be measured.
Table 11.4.1.14 Time measurement
Code Description Unit Remarks
T1 Time interval of caliper 1 ms 9 points at maximum

T2 Time interval of caliper 2 ms can be measured.
T3 Time interval of caliper 3 ms
Measuring method
1. Start the measurement program by using
Time
the menu or other method (Refer to
11.2.).
2. Operating the trackball, move the
caliper mark displayed on M-mode or
Doppler-mode image to the start point
of measurement.
3. Pressing ENTER key defines the start
point of measurement and another
Time
caliper mark is displayed on that
point. Operating the trackball, move
the caliper mark to the end point of
measurement.
4. Pressing ENTER key defines the end
point of measurement. If number of
Fig. 11.4.1-13
measuring points is less than the
Time Measurement
maximum allowable measuring points,
the next measurement caliper is
displayed. Pressing key closes
CLEAR
the measurement program.
11-49 Q1E-EA0611
[16] Decel. (Deceleration) measurement
As shown in Fig. 11.4.1-14, by measuring flow velocities at

2 points on Doppler waveform, deceleration of blood flow is
measured.
Fig. 11.4.1-14 Measuring points in Decel. Measurement.

Table 11.4.1-15 Accel Measurement

V1 Flow velocity at caliper 1 m/s or cm/s
V2 Flow velocity at caliper 2 m/s or cm/s
DcT Time from 1 to 2 m/s or cm/s
2 *1)
Dcc Deceleration from 1 to 2 m/s
or
2
cm/s
*1) Because cm/s2 is not SI unit, convert value to the one in m/s2
1m/s2 = 100cm/s2
Measuring method
1. Start the "Decel". measurement program Decel.

by using the menu or other method (Refer
to 11.2.).
Operating the trackball, move the caliper
mark displayed on Doppler-mode image to
the point corresponding to "V1".
2. Pressing ENTER key defines the "V1" point

Decel.
and a next caliper mark is displayed on
that point. Operating the trackball,
move the caliper mark to the point
corresponding to "V2".
3. Pressing ENTER key defines "V2" point.

Fig. 11.4.1-15
4. Pressing ENTER key displays the Decel. Measurement
measurement result and closed the
measurement program.
11-50 Q1E-EA0611
[17] dP/dt measurement
Amount of change in pressure of pressure gradient over time

between two points corresponding to the specified velocities
on Doppler image is measured.
PG 2 − PG1 (PG1=4V12 , PG2=4V22)

dP / dt =
t 2 − t1
t1 t2
0
V1
V2
Fig. 11.4.1-16 dP/dt Measurement

V1 Flow velocity at caliper 1 m/s or cm/s Default: V1=1.0m/s
V2 Flow velocity at caliper 2 m/s or cm/s Default: V2=3.0m/s
PG1 Pressure gradient at caliper 1 mmHg PG1 = 4*V1*V1
PG2 Pressure gradient at caliper 2 mmHg PG2 = 4*V2*V2
t1 Time phase at caliper 1
t2 Time phase at caliper 2
dt Time from 1 to 2 ms dt = t2-t1
dP/dt dP/dt value mmHg/s dP/dt = (PG2-PG1)/dt
Set values V1 andV2 in advance by Measurement setup. Using

property of dP/dt link tool in Measurement setup, set the values.
For details, refer to 11.5.3.3 Link Setup.
If the registered values V1 andV2 are not in the range of velocity
scale in the current Doppler mode, this measurement is not
displayed on Measurement menu.
11-51 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring method
dP/dt
1. Start dP/dt measurement program by
using the menu or other method (refer
v1
V1
to 11.2(2)).
Then, a horizontal line and caliper
are displayed at the point
corresponding to the velocity V1.
2. Operating the trackball and ENTER key,

move the caliper leftward or rightward,
and define the first point. Then, a
horizontal line is displayed at the
point corresponding to the velocity .
V2, and the caliper for the second point
can be operated.
3. Operating the trackball and ENTER key, dP/dt
move the caliper leftward or

rightward.
Vv2
2
4. Pressing ENTER key displays the dP/dt
measurement result and closes the

measurement program.
Fig. 11.4.1-17
dP/dt Measurement
11-52 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.2 Measuring Cross-Sectional Images
[1] %Steno (Percent Stenosis) Measurement
Refer to Fig. 11-4-2-1. The percent stenosis (%Steno) of

a blood vessel can be calculated by measuring the
cross-sectional area (A1) of a normal part and the
cross-sectional area (A2) of a stenosed part.
Max(A1,A2) – Min(A1,A2)
%Steno = ×100 [%]
Max(A1,A2)
Flow
Fig. 11.4.2-1 Concept of %Steno Measurement
Three methods are available for measuring the cross-sectional

area:
• Distance method: Measures the diameter (D) of the vessel,

and computes the area from D.
• Trace method: Measures the area by tracing the vessel.
• Ellipse method: Measures the area by approximating the

vessel to an ellipse.
11-53 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.2-1 %STENO Measurement
Method Symbol Meaning Unit Method
Distance method D1 Diameter of vessel mm Distance (B- or

M-mode method)
D2 Diameter of stenosed part mm
%STENO Stenosis of vessel % Calculation will be

executed using the
above equation.
2
Trace or ellipse A1 Area of normal part of cm Area (Trace or ellipse
method vessel wall method)
2
A2 Area of stenosed part of cm
vessel wall
%STENO Stenosis of vessel % Calculation will be

executed using the
above equation.
Measuring procedure
Start up the %Steno measurement in the appropriate manner

described in paragraph 11.2 and 11.3, and carry out the various
measurements using the applicable methods as per Table
11.4.2-1.
11-54 Q1E-EA0611
[2] LV/Ao Measurement(B-LV/Ao, M-LV/Ao)
In the captioned measurement there are two kinds according

to the mode of examination, viz. B-LV/Ao and M-LV/Ao.
Table 11-4-2-2 lists the measurements that will be carried

out by using a long axis cross-sectional image in both diastole
and systole.
Table 11.4.2-2 L.Axis Measurement
Symbol
Meaning Unit Method Comments
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Aod Aos Aortic diameter mm
IVSd IVSs Intraventricular septal mm

thickness
Distance
LVPWd LVPWs Left ventricle posterior wall mm Presettable
(B- or M-mode method)
thickness
LVEdD LVEsD Left ventricular diameter mm
LADd LADs Left atrial diameter mm
LVEdV LVEsV Left Ventricle Volume mL Pombo, Gibson, Presettable

Teichholz
Measuring procedure
Each of the LONG AXIS DIASTOLE and LONG AXIS SYSTOLE

measurements will be completed by measuring the above listed
items. The following procedure applies to the Systole
measurement. The Diastole measurement can also be performed
in the same manner.
1 Start up the Long-Axis (Systole)

measurement in the appropriate
manner described in paragraph
11.2(2).
11-55 Q1E-EA0611
2 Measurement of every item is
Cursor L-AXIS(S)
conducted one by one.
By selecting UNDO key, move the Aos
mm
cursor to the name of the
IVSs
measurement you wish to perform on mm
LVPWs
the currently showing image.
mm
LVEsD
mm
LADs:
3 Using the track ball and ENTER key ,
mm
carry out the measurement
selected at step 2 . Fig. 11.4.2-2
SKIP
4 Select other measurement items and

perform their measurements in the same
way as at steps 2 and 3.
If you wish to remeasure a particular item, just bring

the cursor to the name of that item at step 2 .
The measurement can be repeated as many times as you wish.
It is also possible to unfreeze the screen temporarily
and show a more suitable image for measurement.
5 When you have finished the execution of all measurement

items, press UNDO key, thereby completing the LONG AXIS
(SYSTOLE) measurement.
For Diastole and Systole measurements in B-LV/Ao and M-LV/Ao

groups, the method for calculating Left Ventricle Volume can
be changed.
The selections are Pombo, Gibson and Teichholz. Please refer
to "11.4.3 (1) LV (Left Ventricular) Measurement" for the
details of how to set the calculating method.
Against the measurement item of "LVEdV" in Diastole

measurement or "LVEsV" in Systole measurement, please set
any of the followings for the equation.
"Pombo" ; Pombo method

"Gibson" ; Gibson method
"Teichholz" ; Teichholz method
11-56 Q1E-EA0611
In LV/Ao measurement, in addition to the above items, the following
items are also displayed in Measurement report.
Table 11.4.2-3
Code Description Unit Measurement method Remarks

SV Stroke Volume mL LVEdV-LVEsV
2
SI Stroke Index mL/m SV/BSA (NOTICE 1)
CO Cardiac Output L/min HR*SV
L/(min·m )
2
CI Cardiac Index CO/BSA (NOTICE 1)
EF Ejection Fraction % SV/LVEdV
FS Fractional Shortening % (LVEdD-LVEsD)/LVEdD
HR Heart Rate bpm Auto detection by ECG
NOTICE1:This is calculated only in the case body surface area has

been registered on ID Registration menu.
11.4.3 Schema-Guided M-Mode Measurement
The schema-guided M-mode measurement consists of the types of

the measurements that are to be performed by plotting caliper
cursors on an M-mode image as instructed by a schema to be shown
on the screen. The following five measurements are carried out
in this manner.
[1] LV (Left Ventricular) Measurement
For calculating the volume of LV (LVEdV or LVEsV) there are

three types of measurement, namely LV-Pombo, LV-Gibson and
LV-Teichholz. Each measurement has its own equation, viz.
Pombo’s equation, Gibson’s equation and Teichholz’s equation.
Select any of them for the calculation.
Table 11-4-3-1 lists the measurement items classified under

the "LV Measurement" category.
M-mode beam line
RVDd
Ao
Fig. 11.4.3-1 Schema for LV Measurement
11-57 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.3-1 LV Measurement

LVEdD Left ventricle end-diastole diameter mm
LVEsD Left ventricle end-systole diameter mm
LVPWd Left ventricle posterior wall end-diastole mm
diameter
LVPWs Left ventricle posterior wall end-systole mm Presettable
diameter HR can be set only
RVDd Right ventricle diastole diameter mm manually during VCR
playback.
IVSd Intraventricular septum end-systole mm
thickness
IVSs Intraventricular septum end-systole mm
thickness
HR Heat rate bpm
LVEdV Left ventricle end-diastole volume mL Presettable
LVEsV Left ventricle end-systole volume mL with
POMBO’s
SV Stroke volume mL LVEdV-LVEsV GISON’s, or
CO Cardiac output L/min HRxSV TEICHHOLZ’s
rule
EF Ejection fraction % SV/LVEdV
FS Fractional shortening % (LVEdD-LVEsD)
LVEdD
L/(min·m )
2
CI Cardiac Index CO/BSA Be displayed on
2
Report when
SI Stroke Index mL/m SV/BSA height and
weight are
registered in
patient ID menu.
LVMass-d Left ventricular mass in diastole g 1.04*((LVEdD/10+IVSd/10+LVPWd/

10)^3-(LVEdD/10)^3)-13.6
NOTICE)
LVMass-s Left ventricular mass in systeole g 1.04*((LVEsD/10+IVSs/10+LVPWs/

10)^3-(LVEsD/10)^3)-13.6
NOTICE)
NOTICE: It is not displayed to measurement menu of factory setting.
For using, double click the item of measurement setup menu and
selecting on of the line of sub tab result and report. Refer
to item 11.5.3.
Measuring procedure
1 Start up the measurement in the
appropriate manner as described
in paragraph 11.2. A schema, such
as the one at right, will appear.
11-58 Q1E-EA0611
the dotted line, shown in the
center of the M-mode image, to the
position that corresponds to line
"A" on the chema, and move the
caliper on the dotted line to the
position that corresponds to
position "C" on the schema.
3 Press ENTER key. The caliper

cursor will be fixed at that
position, and another plotting
point "D" will appear in the schema.
With the track ball, bring that
caliper to the position
corresponding to "D," and press
ENTER key. Similarly, continue
Fig. 11.4.3-2
potting by placing the calipers
Schema for LV
and dotted lines on the positions
measurement
as indicated in the schema.
4 When the final point, which corresponds to point "L" in

the schema, has been set, and the results of the LV
measurement, calculated using the equation preset, will
be displayed.
5 To reset the point set just before during plotting, press
UNDO key.
To skip a point indicated by the schema, select "SKIP"
by pressing toggle switch.

3
NOTICE: Alphabetic characters such as C point and D point are

not displayed on the scheme, but they are displayed
with yellow point.
Selection of left ventricle volume and HR calculation method
Calculation method of left ventricle volume in LV measurement is available

in 3 methods of Pombo, Gibson and Teichholz. Also, calculation method
of HR (heat rate) is available in 2 methods of Manual mode to calculate
by plotting 2 time phases and Auto method to automatically obtain it
by ECG. Selection method of those modes is shown below.
11-59 Q1E-EA0611
Select Measure in Setup on Main Menu to start Measurement Setup menu.
Fig. 11.4.3-2-1 Measurement Setup Menu
(1) Changing left ventricle volume calculation method
LV-Gibson and LV-Pombo measurement can not be used in the factory

shipment. In case of need, by using [Additional Settings] of
measurement export/import function, import or replace the
measurement. Refer to item 11.5.6 Measurement Export/Import
function.
(2)Selection of HR calculation method
The following 2 methods are available in calculation of HR.
Manual mode : By plotting any 2 time phases, Heart Rate is

calculated.
Auto mode : Heat Rate is automatically calculated from ECG

waveform.
11-60 Q1E-EA0611
To select either of them, select the measurement item "HR" in the
currently used LV Measurement (one of LV, LV-Gibson, LV-Pombo) in
Measurement Setup menu.
Fig. 11.4.3-2-2 Selection of HR Item
Pressing Edit button opens Edit menu of LV Measurement.
Fig. 11.4.3-2-3 Setting HR Calculation Method
Rewrite "Equation" box where calculation equation of the measurement

item HR is input with "ManualHR" for Manual mode or "AutoHR" for
Auto mode.
11-61 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.4.3.2-4 Setting (HR) in Manual Mode
Fig. 11.4.3.2-5 Setting (HR) in Auto Mode
Upon rewriting Equation, press Register button to register the

change.
11-62 Q1E-EA0611
[2] MV (Mitral Valve) Measurement
M-mode beam line
Ao
Fig. 11-4-3-3 Schema for MV Measurement

the "MV Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-2
CE E-wave amplitude (E-Amp.) mm

DE DE difference mm
CA A-wave amplitude (A-Amp.) mm
DEslope MV DE slope (DE-SLOPE) mm/s Presettable
EFslope MV diastolic descent rate (DDR) mm/s
A/E Ratio of A-wave/E-wave amplitude ----
EPSS E-point ventricular septum mm
distance
Measuring procedure
Perform the measurement in the same way as in the LV

measurement.
11-63 Q1E-EA0611
[3] Ao (Aortic Valve) Measurement
RVOTD M-mode beam line
AVSc
AOD Ao
AVSo
LAD
PEP ET
Fig. 11.4.3-4 Schema for Ao Measurement
Table 11.4.3-3 lists the measurement items classified under

the "Ao Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-3 Ao Measurement
AoD Aortic diameter in diastole mm

AVcusp Aortic valve systole (early phase) mm
open
AVcusp Aortic valve systole (last phase) mm
close
LAD Left atrial diameter (systole) mm Presettable
RVOTD Right ventricular outflow tract diameter mm
(systole)
LA/Ao Ratio of LAD/Ao ----
PEP Pre-Ejection Period ms
ET Ejection Time ms
Measuring procedure
Perform the measurements in the same way as in the LV

measurement.
11-64 Q1E-EA0611
[4] TV (Tricuspid Valve) Measurement
M-mode beam line
Fig. 11.4.3-5 Schema for TV Measurement

the "TV Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-4 TV Measurement
CE E-wave amplitude (E-Amp.) mm

DE DE difference mm
CA A-wave amplitude (A-Amp.) mm
Presettable
DEslope TV DE slope (DE-SLOPE) mm/s
EFslope TV diastolic descent rate (DDR) mm/s
A/E Ratio of A-wave/E-wave amplitude ----
Measuring procedure

measurement.
11-65 Q1E-EA0611
[5] PV (Pulmonary Valve) Measurement
M-mode beam line
Fig. 11.4.3-6 Schema for PV Measurement
Table 11.4.3-5 lists the measurement items classified under

the "PV Measurement" category.
Table 11.4.3-5 PV Measurement
Awave A-wave amplitude mm

Presettable
EFslope EF slope mm/s
Measuring procedure

measurement.
11-66 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.4 Doppler Measurement
The Doppler measurement for outflow and inflow can be carried out
by tracing the Doppler waveform at the left ventricle outflow tract
and measuring peak velocity at the specified region, R-R interval,
blood flow cross-sectional area, etc.
The following eight measurements are available for the Doppler
measurement.
[1] LVOT Measurement
The Doppler measurement at the left ventricle outflow tract is
carried out by tracing the Doppler waveform or measuring a peak
flow velocity at the left ventricle outflow tract, and tracing
the Doppler waveform or measuring a peak flow velocity at the aortic
valve, a diameter of the left ventricle outflow tract and R-R
interval.
11-67 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-1 LVOT Measurement (1/2)
Code Unit Measurement Method Remarks
Vp m/s or cm/s LVOT peak velocity Trace (TRACE) *1)
Any of manual trace, auto trace, plot
PGp mmHg *2) LVOT peak pressure difference *1’)
trace according to measurement
Vm m/s or cm/s LVOT mean velocity setup. *1)
PGm mmHg *2) LVOT mean pressure difference Auto trace calculation *1’)
Any of PEAK, MEAN and MODE
AT ms LVOT acceleration time
according to measurement setup.
ET ms LVOT ejection time
AT/ET -- Ratio of AT to ET at LVOT
TVI m LVOT velocity integral *1’)
PEP ms Pre-Ejection Period
PEP/ET -- PEP/ET Ratio
11-68
Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-1 LVOT Measurements (2/2)
Code Unit Measurement Method Remarks
CSA cm2 LVOT cross-sectional area Area
Any of DISTANCE, TRACE and
ELLIPSE method according to
measurement setup.
HR bpm Heart rate (See P.11-64)
SV mL STROKE VOLUME To be calculated from the measured TVI × CSA *1’)
result above.
CO L/min Cardiac Output SV × HR *1’)
*1) : Velocity value is corrected by the correction formula set for TRACE in the measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculated using the velocity value obtained by correction *1).
*2) : In SI unit, kPa is used instead of mmHg. 1kPa = 7.5mmHg.
11-69
NOTICE: 1) Refer to Item 11.5.2 for measurement setup.

2) To edit LVOT in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select "LVOT", then
press "Edit" button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the "Link" button on this menu
starts the link setup menu to change tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot) and so on.
3) To set Doppler tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot), see Item 11.5.3.3 Link setup. Select "LV"
in the Name field of Link Selection if setting for TRACE. Also, pressing the "Property" button on
this menu can change trace calculation method (Peak, Mean, or Mode) and so on.
Q1E-EA0611
The equipment shipped from the factory has been set for calculation
of aortic valve orifice area. If measurement is carried out for
calculation of cardiac output (such as SV and CO), perform
measurement setup referring to Table 11.4.4-2.
Table 11.4.4-2 Recommended LVOT Measurement Setup

Measurement Setup
For aortic orifice area calculation
Category Item For cardiac
Using mean Using peak output calculation
velocity velocity
Tracing TRACE AUTO AUTO AUTO
method
Auto trace TRACE PEAK PEAK PEAK
calculation
method
Velocity TRACE V’=1.00V+000.0cm/s V’=1.00V+000.0cm/s V’=1.00V+000.0cm/s
correction
formula
Measureme Vp ON ON ON
nt results PGp OFF OFF OFF
frame
display Vm ON OFF ON
PGm OFF OFF OFF
AT OFF OFF ON
ET OFF OFF ON
AT/ET OFF OFF ON
TVI OFF OFF ON
CSA ON ON ON
HR OFF OFF ON
SV OFF OFF ON
CO OFF OFF ON
NOTICE: 1) For measurement setup, see Item 11.5.2
2) For setting auto trace calculation method and velocity correction
equation, see 11.5.3.3 Link Setup]
3) For setting measurement result frame display, see "11.5.3.2 Sub
tab".
11-70 Q1E-EA0611
ET
AT
LVOT Doppler waveform measurement
2
CSD
CSA measurement CSA= π
2
Fig. 11.4.4-1 Concept of LVOT Measurement
11-71 Q1E-EA0611
Velocity value correction function
This measurement allows the following corrective calculation to
be added to velocity obtained by tracing Doppler waveform (manual
trace, auto trace, plot trace) and displayed as measurement results.
V’ = C1 × V + C2
Where,
V :Velocity value obtained by tracing
C1 :Correction constant 1 (multiplication factor)
(Allowable range: 0 ~ 9.99)
C2 :Correction constant 2 (addition and subtraction factor)
[Unit: cm/s]
(Allowable range: –999.9 ~ 999.9)
V’ : Velocity value after correction
Use the measurement setup menu to set the correction calculation
formula (See "11.5.3.3 Link Setup".).
Excluding the case where the correction formula gives no correction
as shown below, the correction formula is displayed at the right
bottom of the Doppler wave display after measurement by Doppler
trace.
[Formula for no correction]
V’ = 1.00V + 0.0
LVOT
Correction formula
V'=0.57V+0
Fig. 11.4.4-2 Correction Formula
NOTICE: Sign of correction constant 2:C2 in the corrective formula is

automatically switched for addition or subtraction according to
the sign of the flow velocity V at tracing.
For example, when the correction formula is expressed as
V’ = 1.08 – 0.9, correction is calculated as follows:
For V 0, V’ = 1.08 – 0.9
For V < 0, V’ = 1.08V – (–0.9)
11-72 Q1E-EA0611
FR:
1. Use menu and so on to start Cursor ; YELLOW
LVOT
measurement (See Item 11.2).
TRACE:
2. Press the UNDO key to move the Vp: m/s
cursor to any item that may be Vm: m/s
measured on the display screen. Measure- AT: ms
ment ET: ms
Press the ENTER key. The item items AT/ET:
designated by the cursor is TVI: m
2
selected. (If the UNDO key is CSA: cm
not used, each item is HR: bpm
(Beat=1)
automatically executed in SV: mL
turn.) CO: L/min
3. Use the trackball and ENTER key
to carry out measurement on the Fig. 11.4.4-3 Selecting
item thus selected. Actually Items
follow measurement method shown
in Table 11.4.4-1. Also refer
to basic procedures in Item
11.3.
4. Carry out measurements for each item as well as in Item 2 and
3 above. If there is any item to be retried, move the cursor
to the item in Item 2 above. Measurement may be retried any
times. (However, only up to five measurements can be verified
on the measurement report.)
In the mean time, freeze may be released to retry acquiring
an image for display.
5. When measurement of all items are completed, the measurement
ends. Press CLEAR to terminate the measurement.
In LVOT measurement, Vp, Vm and AT can be measured again. After

measurement is made once, manually select measurement item.
11-73 Q1E-EA0611
Traced line produced by trace
measurement
R-wave just before

traced line
ECG waveform
Fig. 11.4.4-4 Tracing and R-R Interval Measurement
Heart Rate (HR) Measurement Procedure

Selecting HR Measurement displays the caliper mark on the screen.
Use the trackball and ENTER key to plot the R-wave just before
the traced line with the caliper mark, and then plot the next
R-wave.
For the other measurements, follow the methods shown in Table
11.4.4-1. Also refer to basic operations in Item 11.3.
[2] LV inflow Measurement

The Doppler measurement at the left ventricle inflow tract carries
out tracing the Doppler waveform to determine a peak flow velocity,
LV inflow cross-sectional area, R-R interval and isovolumic
relaxation time.
11-74 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-3 LV inflow Measurement (1/2)
Code Unit Measurement Method (See Item 11.3) Remarks
VE m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point E Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGE mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point E
VA m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point A Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGA mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point A
A/E -- VA/VE ratio To be calculated from VE and VA VA/VE
E/A -- VE/VA ratio VE/VA
AT ms Acceleration time Time
ET ms Inflow time
AT/ET -- Acceleration//Ejection time ratio
2
Acc m/s Acceleration VE/AT
11-75
PHT ms Pressure half time PHT

Vp m/s Peak flow velocity
DT ms Deceleration time 3.41×PHT
2
Dcc m/s Deceleration Vp/DT
Vm m/s Mean velocity TRACE *1)
PGm mmHg Mean pressure difference To be made according to the mode *1')
selected in Measurement Setup menu
TVI m Velocity Integral *1')
from Manual trace mode, Auto trace
mode and Plot trace mode.
Auto Trace calculation mode
To be made according to the setting in
Measurement Setup menu from PEAK,
MEAN and MODE.
IVRT ms Isovolume relaxation time Time
Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-3 LV inflow Measurement (2/2)
2
MVA cm Mitral valve area To be calculated from the above result 220/PHT
*1) : Velocity value is corrected by the correction equation set for TRACE in Measurement Setup.
*1’) : Calculation is made from the subtraction value obtained by *1).
*2) : mmHg is displayed in kpa in SI unit. 1kpa = 7.5mmHg
NOTICE: 1) For setting procedures of Measurement Setup, refer to 11.5.2

2) To edit LV Inflow measurement in Setup menu, start Measurement Setup menu, select "LV Inflow"
measurement, and press "Edit" button to open Measurement Edit menu. Pressing "Link" but ton on
this menu opens Link Setup menu to select Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot).
3) To set Doppler Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot), refer to "11.5.3.3 Link Setup". To set Doppler
Trace on this Link Setup menu, select "DTR" in Name box of Link Selection, and then set Doppler
Trace. Pressing "Property" button on this menu allows Trace Calculation method (Peak, Mean or Mode)
11-76
to be changed.
Q1E-EA0611
Electrocardiogram LV inflow Doppler waveform measurement
CSA measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-5 Concept of LV inflow Measurement
Referring to the LVOT measurement procedure, carry out the
measurement.

This measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
to velocity value obtained by tracing the Doppler waveform.
Refer to the velocity value correction function for the LVOT
measurement for details.
[3] RVOT Measurement

Doppler measurement of the right ventricle outflow tract includes
manual tracing of right ventricle outflow tract Doppler waveform,
and measurement of the pulmonary valve (PV) peak velocity, diameter
of right ventricle outflow tract and R-R interval.
11-77 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-4 RVOT Measurement
Code Unit Measurement Method (See Item 11.3.) Remarks
Vp m/s or cm/s RVOT peak velocity *1)
PGp mmHg *2) RVOT pressure difference Trace (TRACE) *1’)
Any of manual trace, auto trace or
Vm m/s or cm/s RVOT mean velocity *1)
plot trace method according to
PGm mmHg *2) RVOT mean pressure difference measurement setup. *1’)
AT ms Acceleration time Auto trace calculation method
Any of PEAK, MEAN, and MODE
ET ms Ejection time
according to measurement setup.
AT/ET – Ratio of AT to ET
PEP ms RVOT ejection time
PEP/ET – Ratio of PEP to ET
11-78
TVI m RVOT velocity integral *1’)

2
CSA cm RVOT cross-sectional area Area
Any of distance, trace, and ellipse
method according to measurement
setup.
HR bpm Heart rate Refer to (1) LVOT measurement. NOTICE 1)
SV mL Stroke Volume To be calculated from the TVI × CSA *1’)
CO L/min Cardiac Output measurement results above. SV × HR *1’)
*1) : Velocity value is corrected by the correction formula set for TRACE in the measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculation is carried out from the velocity value obtained by the correction *1).
Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE: 1) In the RVOT measurement, "PEP" and "HR" are not displayed in the results display frame when shipped
from the factory. However, if setting display ON in the measurement setup, R-R interval will be
measured as soon as Doppler trace is completed. Note that the order of R-R interval measurement
differs from the other Doppler measurement. If R-R interval only is to be measured again after measuring
R-R interval by Doppler trace when "HR" has been set to display ON, select "HR" in the results display
frame and perform measurement again.
2) For measurement setup, see Item 11.5.2
3) To edit RVOT in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select "RVOT", and then
press the "Edit" button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the "Link" button on this menu
allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto, Manual, and Plot) and so on.
4) To set Doppler tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot) and so on, refer to "11.5.3.3 Link Setup".
When setting for TRACE in this link setup menu, do so after selecting "RV" in the Name field of Link
Selection. Also, pressing the "Property" button on this menu allows trace calculation method (Peak,
Mean, or Mode) and so on to be changed.
11-79
Q1E-EA0611
RVOT Doppler waveform measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-6 Concept of RVOT Measurement

RVOT measurement allows the correction calculation to be applied
For procedures of RVOT measurement in detail, refer to those
of LVOT measurement.
11-80 Q1E-EA611
[4] RV inflow Measurement
Right ventricle inflow tract Doppler measurement includes tracing
of Doppler waveform, and measurement of peak velocity, right
ventricle inflow tract cross-sectional area and R-R interval.
11-81 Q1E-EA611
Table 11.4.4-5 RV inflow Measurement (1/2)
VE m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point E Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGE mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point E
VA m/s or cm/s Flow velocity at point A Instantaneous velocity (Caliper method)
PGA mmHg *2) Pressure gradient at point A
A/E -- VA/VE ratio To be calculated from VE and VA VA/VE
E/A -- VE/VA ratio VE/VA
AT ms Acceleration time Time
ET ms Inflow time
AT/ET -- Acceleration//Ejection time ratio
2
Acc m/s Acceleration VE/AT
11-82
PHT ms Pressure half time PHT

Vp m/s Peak flow velocity
DT ms Deceleration time 3.41×PHT
2
Dcc m/s Deceleration Vp/DT
Vm m/s or cm/s Mean velocity TRACE *1)
PGm mmHg *2) Mean pressure difference To be made according to the mode *1')
selected in Measurement Setup menu
TVI m Velocity Integral *1')
from Manual trace mode, Auto trace
mode and Plot trace mode.
To be made according to the setting in
Measurement Setup menu from PEAK,
MEAN and MODE.
Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-5 RV inflow Measurement (2/2)
2
TVA cm Tricuspid valve area To be calculated from the above result 220/PHT
*1) : Velocity value is corrected by the correction equation set for TRACE in Measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculation is made from the subtraction value obtained by *1).
*2) : mmHg is displayed in kpa in SI unit. 1kpa = 7.5mmHg
NOTICE: 1) For setting procedures of Measurement Setup, refer to 11.5.2

2) To edit RV Inflow measurement in Setup menu, start Measurement Setup menu, select "RV Inflow"
measurement, and press "Edit" button to open Measurement Edit menu. Pressing "Link" but ton on
this menu opens Link Setup menu to select Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot).
3) To set Doppler Trace method (Auto, Manual or Plot), refer to "11.5.3.3 Link Setup". To set Doppler
Trace on this Link Setup menu, select "DTR" in Name box of Link Selection, and then set Doppler
Trace. Pressing "Property" button on this menu allows Trace Calculation method (Peak, Mean or Mode)
11-83
to be changed.
Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.4.4-7 Concept of RV inflow Measurement

RV inflow measurement allows correction calculation to be applied
For procedure of RV inflow measurement in detail, refer to those
of LVOT measurement.
[5] VASC1 / VASC2 Measurement

The vascular Doppler measurement is carried out by tracing of the
vascular Doppler waveform, and measurement of vascular diameter
and R-R interval.
Two measurements of VASC1 and VASC2 are available. The VASC1 and
VASC2 are the same measurement to be used for examination of different
examination regions since presetting and report display can be
made independently for each measurement. Measurement code can be
preset as user-defined.
11-84 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-6 VASC1 and VASC2 Measurement (1/2)
Vp m/s or*2) Peak velocity TRACE method *1)
PGp m/s or cm/s Peak pressure difference Any of manual trace, auto *1’)
Vd m/s or cm/s Velocity in end diastole trace or plot trace according *1)
to measurement setup
Vm m/s or cm/s Mean velocity *1)
PGm mmHg *2) Mean pressure difference Auto trace calculation method
AT ms Acceleration time Any of PEAK, MEAN and *1’)
ET ms Ejection time MODE according to
AT/ET – Ratio of AT to ET measurement setup.
Acc m/s2 Acceleration *1’)
PI – PULSATILITY INDEX *1’)
RI – RESISTANCE INDEX *1’)
%W % %WINDOW at peak
SYSW % SYSTOLIC WINDOW at peak
11-85
TVI m VELOCITY INTEGRAL Vm•ET *1’)

2
CSA cm Cross-sectional area Area
Any of DISTANCE, TRACE
and ELLIPSE method
according to measurement
setup.
HR bpm Heart rate Refer to (1) LVOT
measurement.
Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-6 VASC1 and VASC2 Measurement (2/2)
SV mL STROKE VOLUME To be calculated from the TVI × CSA *1’)
measurement results above.
FV L/min FLOW VOLUME SV × HR *1’)
SV × 60/ET *1’)
*1) : Velocity value is corrected by the correction formula set for TRACE in measurement setup.
*1’) : Calculation is carried out from the deceleration value obtained by the correction of *1).

2) To edit Vasc1 and Vasc2 in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select "Vasc1"
or "Vasc2" measurement, and then press the "Edit" button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing
11-86
the "Link" button on this menu allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto,
Manual, or Plot).
When setting for Doppler TRACE in this link setup menu, do so after selecting "DTR" in the Name
field of Link Selection. Also, pressing the "Property" button on this menu allows trace calculation
method (Peak, Mean, or Mode) and so on to be changed.
Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.4.4-8 Concept of Vasc Measurement
PULSATILITY INDEX (PI) and RESISTANCE INDEX (RI) are calculated

by the following equations:
VP − VD
PI = × 100
Vm
VP − VD
RI = × 100
Vp
Where,
VP : Peak velocity
VD : Velocity in end diastole (minimum velocity)
Vm : Mean velocity over traced distance
%-WINDOW is calculated from the following equation with brightness
pattern at VP phase:
VL
%W = × 100
VU
SYSTOLIC WINDOW is calculated by the

following equation with brightness
pattern in the range of 100ms from the
VP phase.
∑ VL
SYSW = × 100
∑ VU
NOTICE: When the measurement is carried out

on the playback image from the
VCR, %-WINDOW and SYSTOLIC WINDOW
cannot be calculated. Fig. 11.4.4-9 Concept of
%-WINDOW
11-87 Q1E-EA0611
Vasc measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
1. Turn the angle control knob to
set the incident angle
measurement bar to the point
in the vessel to be measured.
2. Follow the same procedure as
Incident angle
that of the LVOT measurement measurement
to carry out the measurement. bar
Fig. 11.4.4-10 Incident Angle

Measurement Bar
Modification of Vd
If the value of Vd is not correct when Doppler wave is traced,
it can manually be re-measured by selecting ‘Vd’ measurement
item in Measurement Result Frame. (Vd; End-Diastole Velocity)
NOTICE: It can be changed calculation for Flow Volume by toggle

switch .
2
FV by HR : Calculated for using HR value.
SV x HR / 1000 (l/min)
FV by ET : Calculated for using ET value.
SV x (60 / ET) (l/min)
11-88 Q1E-EA0611
[6] AV-Area measurement
By tracing LVOT Doppler waveform and AV Doppler waveform, aortic
valve area is measured.
ET ETA
AT
Measurement of LVOT Doppler waveform Measurement of AV Doppler waveform

Vp by using
AVA= ×CSA peak
VpA
velocity
Vm
by using
2 AVA= ×CSA mean
VmA velocity
CSD
CSA= π
2 by using
TVI integral of
CSA measurement AVA= ×CSA
TVIA velocity･
time
Vm VmA
where, TVI= TVIA=
ET ETA
Fig. 11.4.4-11 Concept of AV-Area Measurement
Measurement method
Referring to the measurement method of LVOT, make the measurement.
Using the F2 function key, calculation method (by Peak, by Mean
or by TVI) of aortic valve area can be changed.
In this measurement, correction calculation can be applied to
the velocity value obtained by trace. For details, refer to
velocity value correction function.
11-89 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-7 AV-Area Measurement (1/2)
LVOT-V m/s or cm/s Left ventricle outflow tract peak velocity Left ventricle outflow tract trace *1)
p To be made according to the mode
LVOT-V m/s or cm/s Left ventricle outflow tract mean velocity selected in Measurement Setup *1)
m menu from Manual trace mode,
Auto trace mode and Plot trace
LVOT-E ms Left ventricle outflow tract acceleration mode. *1')
T ms time
-- Left ventricle outflow tract ejection time To be made according to the
Left ventricle outflow tract setting in Measurement Setup
acceleration/ejection time ratio menu from PEAK, MEAN and
LVOT-T m Left ventricle outflow tract VELOCITY MODE. *1')
VI INTEGRAL
LVOT-C cm2 Left ventricle outflow tract cross section Area
11-90
SA area To be calculated according to the

setting in Measurement Setup
menu from Distance method,
Trace method and Ellipse
method.
AV-Vp m/s or cm/s Aortic valve peak velocity Aortic valve tract trace *2)
AV-Vm m/s or cm/s Aortic valve mean velocity To be made according to the *2)
mode selected in Measurement
AV-ET ms Aortic valve ejection time Setup menu from Manual trace *2')
AV-TVI m Aortic valve tract VELOCITY INTEGRAL mode, Auto trace mode and Plot *2')
trace mode.
To be made according to the
setting in Measurement Setup
menu from PEAK, MEAN and
Q1E-EA0611
MODE.
Table 11.4.4-7 AV-Area Measurement (2/2)
2
AV-Are cm Aortic value area *1') *2')
a
*1) Velocity value is corrected by the correction equation set for LVOT in Measurement Setup.
*1') Calculation is made from the velocity value obtained by *1).
*2) Velocity value is corrected by the correction equation set for AV in Measurement Setup.
*2') Calculation is made from the velocity value obtained by *2).
*3) mmHg is displayed in kpa in SI unit. 1kpa = 7.5mmHg
11-91
Q1E-EA0611
[7] Qp/Qs Measurement
It is possible to obtain the specific pulmonary flow/systemic flow
by measuring Doppler waveform of left ventricular outflow tract
and right ventricular outflow tract and also the cross sectional
areas of left ventricular outflow tract and right ventricular
outflow tract.
11-92 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-8 Qp/Qs Measurement
cm2 Cross Sectional Area of left Area Values at delivery time
LVOT-CSA ventricular outflow tract from our factory are by
RVOT-CSA cm2 Cross Sectional Area of right Measured either by Distance Distance method.
ventricular outflow tract or Trace or Ellipse method.
It depends on the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
LVOT-TVI m left ventricular outflow tract TIME TRACE Values at delivery time
VELOCITY INTEGRAL Measured either by Manual from our factory are by
RVOT-TVI m right ventricular outflow tract trace or Auto-trace or Plot manual trace method.
TIME VELOCITY INTEGRAL trace method. It depends
on the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
11-93
Auto-trace method
Measured either by PEAK or
MEAN or MODE depending
upon the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
LVOT-SV mL STROKE VOLUME Calculated based on results (LVOT-TVI×100)×
of above said LVOT-CSA
RVOT-SV mL STROKE VOLUME measurements. (RVOT-TVI×100)×
RVOT-CSA
Qp/Qs ---- pulmonary flow/systemic flow RVOT-SV / LVOT-SV
Q1E-EA0611
Lines traced by Trace
Measruement
LVOT-TIV
LVOT Doppler waveform measurement
2
CSD
LVOT-CSA= π
2
LVOT-CSA Measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-12 Pattern image of Qs Measurement
Lines traced by Trace

Measurement
RVOT-TIV
2
CSD
RVOT-CSA=π
2
RVOT Doppler waveform RVOT-CSA Measurement
Fig. 11.4.4-13 Pattern image of Qp Measurement
Referring to the LVOT measurement procedure, carry out the
measurement.

This measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
11-94 Q1E-EA0611
[8] RI, PI Measurement
vascular Doppler waveform.
11-95 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-9 RI, PI Measurement
Vd m/s or cm/s Velocity in end diastole Any of manual trace, auto *1)
trace or plot trace according
PI – PULSATILITY INDEX *1’)
Auto trace calculation method
RI – RESISTANCE INDEX Any of PEAK, MEAN and *1’)
MODE according to
measurement setup.

11-96
2) To edit RI, PI in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select "RI, PI" measurement,
and then press the "Edit" button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the "Link" button
on this menu allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot).
Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.4.4-14 Concept of RI, PI Measurement

VP − VD
PI = × 100
Vm
VP − VD
RI = × 100
Vp
Where,
VP : Peak velocity
RI, PI measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
1. Turn the angle control knob
to set the incident angle
Incident angle
2. Follow the same procedure as measurement
that of the LVOT measurement bar
to carry out the measurement.
Measurement Bar
11-97 Q1E-EA0611
Modification of Vd
11-98 Q1E-EA0611
[9] Flow Volume Measurement
vascular Doppler waveform, and measurement of vascular diameter
and R-R interval.
11-99 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-10 Flow Volume Measurement
Vd m/s or cm/s Velocity in end diastole Any of manual trace, auto *1)
trace or plot trace according
ET ms Ejection time Auto trace calculation method
PI – PULSATILITY INDEX Any of PEAK, MEAN and *1’)
RI – RESISTANCE INDEX MODE according to *1’)
measurement setup.
TVI m VELOCITY INTEGRAL Vm•ET *1’)
2
CSA cm Cross-sectional area Area
Any of DISTANCE, TRACE
and ELLIPSE method
11-100
setup.
HR bpm Heart rate Refer to (1) LVOT
measurement.
SV mL STROKE VOLUME To be calculated from the TVI × CSA *1’)
FV L/min FLOW VOLUME measurement results above. SV × HR *1’)
SV × 60/ET *1’)
2) To edit Flow Volume in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select Flow Volume
measurement, and then press the "Edit" button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the
"Link" button on this menu allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto,
Manual, or Plot).
Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.4.4-16 Concept of Flow Volume Measurement

VP − VD
PI = × 100
Vm
VP − VD
RI = × 100
Vp
Where,
VP : Peak velocity

Flow Volume measurement allows corrective calculation to be
applied to velocity value obtained by tracing the Doppler
waveform. Refer to the velocity value correction function for
the LVOT measurement for details.
1. Turn the angle control knob
to set the incident angle
2. Follow the same procedure as
Incident angle
that of the LVOT measurement measurement
to carry out the measurement. bar

Measurement Bar
11-101 Q1E-EA0611
Modification of Vd
NOTICE: It can be changed calculation for Flow Volume by toggle

switch .
2
FV by HR : Calculated for using HR value.
SV x HR / 1000 (l/min)
FV by ET : Calculated for using ET value.
SV x (60 / ET) (l/min)
11-102 Q1E-EA0611
[10] PV flow measurement
The Pulmonic Vein Doppler measurement is carried out by tracing
of the Doppler waveform.
11-103 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.4-11 PV flow Measurement
SVp m/s or cm/s S-wave peak velocity TRACE method Any of manual *1
STVI m or cm S-wave TVI trace, auto trace or plot trace *1'
DVp m/s or cm/s D-wave peak velocity *1
setup
DTVI m or cm D-wave TVI *1'
Auto trace calculation method
AVp m/s or cm/s A-wave peak velocity Any of PEAK, MEAN and *1
ATVI m or cm A-wave TVI MODE according to *1'
measurement setup.
A dur ms or s A-wave duration *1'
MV A dur ms or s MV A-wave duration time interval
SVp/DVp --- SVp/DVp ratio To be calculated from the SVp/DVp
SF % Systoric Function To be calculated from the STVI/(STVI+DTVI)×100
11-104
PVA-MVA dur ms or s difference during PV A-wave and MV To be calculated from the (A dur)-(MV A dur)
A-wave measurement results above.
*1.) : Calculation is carried out from the deceleration value obtained by the correction of *1).

2) To edit PV flow in the measurement setup, start the measurement setup menu and select PV flow measurement,
and then press the "Edit" button to start the measurement edit menu. Pressing the "Link" button
on this menu allows the link setup menu to start for changing tracing method (Auto, Manual, or Plot).
Q1E-EA0611
S Doppler beam line
SVp
D
DVp
STVI DTVI
ATVI
AVp
A
A dur
Fig. 11.4.4-18 Concept of PV Flow Measurement

Vasc measurement allows corrective calculation to be applied
11-105 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.5 Left Ventricle Cardiac Function Measurement
By measurement of length and area at end-systole and end-diastole,

volume of left ventricle is obtained and left ventricle function
is measured.
The following ten functions are available in the left ventricle
function measurements.
[1] Pombo, Gibson, and Teichholz Measurements
By measuring a inter diameter of left ventricle and using

one of Pombo, Gibson and Teichholz formulas. a volume of left
ventricle is obtained for left ventricle function
measurement.
For the measurement, there are six measurements depending on

the mode and method as follows:
B-EF ; Measurement by Teichholz on B mode

B-EF Gibson ; Measurement by Gibson on B mode
B-EF Pombo ; Measurement by Pombo on B mode
M-EF ; Measurement by Teichholz on M mode
M-EF Gibson ; Measurement by Gibson on M mode
M-EF Pombo ; Measurement by Pombo on M mode
Though B-EF and M-EF are displayed on measurement menu, the

others are not displayed as default. To use the other
measurements, the display setting for measurement property
needs to be set as On. Please refer to "11.4.3 [1] LV (Left
Ventricular) Measurement"
Table 11.4.5-1 Pombo, Gibson & Teichholz Measurements (1/2)

Measurement method
Abbr. Description Unit Remarks
(Refer to 11.3 )
Left ventricle diameter at Distance (B-mode or
LVEdD mm
end-diastole M-mode method)
Left ventricle diameter at
LVEsD mm
end-systole
Left ventricle volume at Calculated using
LVEdV mL
end-diastole equations
Left ventricle volume at
LVEsV mL
end-systole
SV Stroke Volume mL Calculated from above LVEdV - LVEsV
results
CO Cardiac output L/min HR × SV
EF Ejection fraction % SV / LVEdV
Left ventricle fraction of (LVEdD - LVEsD) /
FS systole %
LVEdD
11-106 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.5-1 Pombo, Gibson & Teichholz Measurements (2/2)
Measurement method
Abbr. Description Unit Remarks
(Refer to 11.3 )
HR Heart Rate bpm Heart Rate by ECG
L/(min·m )
2
2
Report when height
SI Stroke Index mL/m SV/BSA and weight are
registered in patient
ID menu.
Measurement method
<For routine examination>
1 Start up the measurement program by using the menu or other

method. (Refer to Paragraph 11.2.)
2 Using the trackball and ENTER keys, measure each distance

of LVEdD and LVEsD.
By turning off FREEZE mode, an image to be displayed can
be reacquired.
3 From the two measured values, the calculated result is
displayed and the measurement is completed.
<during Examination of VCR Playback Image>
1 Start up the measurement in the appropriate manner as

described in paragraph 11.2.
HR value displayed
2 The message "ENTER HEART RATE"
will appear in the screen B-Pombo HR: 60
center as the example at right.

If the HR value (heart rate
value) is displayed on the
upper right corner, enter that
value using numeric keys.
If the number of pulses is not
Fig.11.4.5-1 Entering
displayed on the playback
Hart Rate
image, carry out the step 3,
as it is.
3 Press ENTER key.
4 Carry out the same procedures as steps 2 and 3 in ordinary

inspection.
11-107 Q1E-EA0611
[2] Area-Length Measurement
Measure the cross-sectional area (A) and length (L) of the

left ventricle in the long axis plane, and then calculate
the left ventricular volume from "A" and "L" using the
following equation.
V= 8 A2
×
3π L
Fig. 11.4.5-2 Concept of Area-Length Measurement
Table 11.4.5-2 AREA-LENGTH Measurement
Measurement Method
(see paragraph 11.3)
Left ventricle end-diastole 2 Area (Trace method)

LVAd cm
cross-sectional area
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance (B- or M-mode

LVLd mm
length method)
Left ventricle end-systole 2 Area (Trace method)

LVAs cm
cross-sectional area
Left ventricle end-systole Distance (B- or M-mode

LVLs mm
length method)
Left ventricle end-diastole Calculated from above

LVEdV mL
volume results
Left ventricle end-systole

LVEsV mL
volume
SV Stroke volume mL LVEdV - LVEsV
CO Cardiac output L/min HR×SV
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG
L/(min·m )
2
2
Report when
SI Stroke Index mL/m SV/BSA height and weight
are registered in
patient ID menu.
11-108 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure
<during Examination of Normal Image>
1 Start up the Doppler measurement Cursor

in the appropriate manner
Measurement of every item is

conducted one by one.
2 Press UNDO key to select the item

measurement. Moving the cursor
to the name of the measurement you Fig. 11.4.5-3
wish to perform, and press ENTER Area Length menu
key to end the procedure 2.
Using the track ball and ENTER key ,

execute the selected measurement.
3 Similarly, perform the rest of the

measurement items as in steps 1 and
2. If you wish to remeasure a
particular item, return to step 2
and bring the cursor to the name of
that item.
You can repeat the same measurement as often as you wish.
4 Finishing the execution of all measurement items will

complete the area-length measurement.
Press ENTER key.
11-109 Q1E-EA0611
<during Examination of VCR Playback Image>
1 Start up the measurement in the appropriate manner as

HR value displayed
2 The message "ENTER HEART RATE"
will appear in the screen Area Length HR: 60
center as in the example at

right. If the HR value (heart
rate value) is displayed on the
upper right corner, enter that
value using numeric keys. In
case of the heart rate is not Fig. 11.4.5-4
displayed on the playback Entering Heart Rate
image, take the procedure 3 as
it is.
3 Press ENTER key.
4 Execute the measurement same as ordinary examination.
NOTICE: It can be changed method of area measurement by using

toggle switch . (Trace/Area-length/Elipse)
3
11-110 Q1E-EA0611
[3] BI-Plane Measurement
Measure the lengths of the three axes that cross each other
at right angles, and calculate the volume by approximating
the left ventricle to a revolving ellipse.
V= π × LVL × LVD1 × LVD2

6
Fig. 11.4.5-5 Concept of BI-Plane Measurement
Table 11.4.5-3 BI-Plane Measurement
Measurement Method
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance
LVLd mm
long axis length (B- or M--mode method)
Left ventricle end-diastole
LVD1d mm
diameter-1
Left ventricle end-diastole
LVD2d mm
diameter-2
Left ventricle end-systole long
LVLs mm
axis length
LVD1s mm
diameter-1
LVD2s mm
diameter-2
LVEdV mL
volume results
LVEsV mL
volume
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG
L/(min·m )
2
2
Report when
are registered in
patient ID menu.
Measuring procedure
Perform the measurement in the same manner as in the

Area-Length Measurement.
11-111 Q1E-EA0611
[4] Simpson Measurement
Measure the left ventricle long axis length, mitral valve

short axis area, and papillary muscle short axis area, and
obtain the left ventricular volume by using the following
equation. L + AM+AP × L
V=AM × + 1 AP × L
3 2 3 3 3
where:
L : Long axis length
AM : Short axis area at mitral valve
AP : Short axis area at papillary
muscle
Fig. 11.4.5-6 Concept of Simpson Measurement
Table 11.4.5-4 Simpson Measurement
Measurement Method
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance (B- or M-mode
LVLd mm
long axis length method)
Short-axis left ventricle area Area (Trace method)
2
LVAMd at mitral valve level in cm
end-diastole
2
LVAPd at papillary muscle level in cm
end-diastole
Left ventricle end-systole long Distance (B- or M-mode
LVLs mm
axis length method)
2
LVAMs at mitral valve level in cm
end-systole
2
LVAPs at papillary muscle level in cm
end-systole
LVEdV mL
volume results
LVEsV mL
volume
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG SV / LVEdV
L/(min·m )
2
2
Report when
are registered in
patient ID menu.
11-112 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure

[5] M.Simpson Measurement
By measuring 2 channels of left ventricle long-axis area and

4 channels of left ventricle long-axis area, and by calculating
the left ventricle volume by using the following equation,
the left ventricle cardiac functions are measured.
n
π L
V=
4
Σ (ai · bi ·
i=1 n
)
where,
ai
bi
L: Left ventricle long-axis length
L
ai, bi:Short-axis length (slice diameter) of
each cross-section perpendicular to the
long-axis of the left ventricle contour
divided into n-planes
n: Number of slices perpendicular to the long
axis of the left ventricle

(n=20)
Fig. 11.4.5-7 Concept of M.Simpson Measurement
11-113 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.5-5 M.Simpson Measurement
Symbol Measurement Method

Meaning Unit (see paragraph 11.3) Comments
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance (B- or M-mode LVEdV is

LVLd mm
long-axis length method) calculated.
Left ventricle end-diastole 4-ch 2 Refer to the next page.
LVAd 4ch cm
display area
Left ventricle end-diastole 2-ch 2
LVAd 2ch cm
display area
Left ventricle end-systole Distance (B-mode method) LVEsV is
LVLs mm
long-axis length (Refer to Clause 11.3.) calculated.
Left ventricle end-systole 4-ch 2 Refer to the next page.
LVAs 4ch cm
display area
Left ventricle end-systole 2-ch 2
LVAs 2ch cm
display area
LVEdV mL
volume result
LVEsV mL
volume
SV Stroke Volume mL LVEdV - LVEsV
CO Cardiac output L/min HR x SV

Heart rate Heart rate from ECG
HR bpm
waveform
Number of slice Data registered by preset /
(SLICE:=*) slice
FunctionMenu is displayed.
L/(min·m )
2
2
Report when
are registered in
patient ID menu.
References : Schiller, N.B., et.al. :

Quantitation of LV by 2D echo.
Journal of the American Society of Echocardiography Volume 2
Number 5 September-October 1989
11-114 Q1E-EA0611
Measuring procedure
1 Start the measurement program on the

menu, etc.
(Refer to Clause 11.2.)
2 For playback image from the VCR, input

heart rate value by referring to the
procedure of Area-Length measure-
-ment.
3 Press UNDO key to select the item

measurement. Moving the cursor to
the item name to be measured you wish
to perform, and press ENTER key to
end the procedure 3.
The left ventricle long-axis length

(LVLd and LVLs) are automatically
calculated in the measurement of the
left ventricle area (LVAd 4ch, LVAd
Fig.11.4.5-8
2ch, LVAs 4ch and LVAs 2ch),
Select item in
accordingly select the measurement of
M.Simpson
the left ventricle length only when
the measurement is to be retried.
4 The measurement of the region selected by the cursor is

carried out.
Measurement procedure for left ventricle area (LVLd 4ch,
LVLd 2ch, LVLs 4ch and LVLs 2ch)
The left ventricle area is measured by tracing the left

ventricle cross-section with the trackball and ENTER key.
In case initial slice numbers are set by Measurement Setup,

refer to "11.5.3.3 Link Setup".
When the tracing is completed, the long-axis length is

automatically calculated from the trace.
Carry out the tracing in either of the following procedures.
11-115 Q1E-EA0611
[The method to approximate the mitral valve to a straight
line]
i) Move the caliper mark to the an

i)
edge of the mitral valve.
LVL
ii) Pressing ENTER key fixes the Mitral valve

start point where the start mark
"•" is displayed. ii)-1
iii) Move the caliper mark along the

cross-sectional left ventricle
contour up to another edge of the ii)-2
mitral valve.
•
iv) Press ENTER key, then
a) The caliper mark and the start iii)

mark "•" are connected with a
straight line.
b) The longest distance from the

center position of the straight
iv)-a
line to the point on the trace line
is considered as the long-axis
length and is displayed with a
broken line.
iv)-b,c
c) The trace line is divided equally

into n-slices perpendicularly to
the long-axis and the division Fig.11.4.5-9
lines are displayed with solid Auto –tracing for
line.(n:slice number) M. Simpson
11-116 Q1E-EA0611
vi) Confirm the slice
Bellow window is displayed.
Fig.11.4.5-10 Comfirm window
a) Click Yes button, when the long-axis line and the

slicing are appropriate. The monitor change to the
next step.
b) To refer to the data of slice diameters, click

Data Disp button. Clicking ”Data Disp” first time
displays the slice diameter data of the scross-section
in end-diastole and pressing the same key second time
displays the slice diameter data of the scross-section
in end-systole.
After closing the window, please confirm again.
11-117 Q1E-EA0611
c) To correct the long-axis obtained
automatically in the step iV),
click No button. Then, the caliper
EXAM:
mark at the apex cordis side (end Wrong case
point of distance measurement) can
be moved.-(1)
Pressing UNDO key makes the caliper

mark at the mitral valve side (start
point of distance measurement)
c)-(1)
movable. Following the procedure
for the ordinary distance measure-
-ment, reset the long-axis length
by using the trackball and ENTER
key.-(2)
c)-(2)
Thus, when measurements of the left

ventricle area, long-axis length, slice
Fig.11.4.5-11
diameter and left ventricle
Correcting
area at the same time phase are completed
Long-axis length
for both 4ch display and 2ch display,
the left ventricle volume is calculated.
NOTICE: For the long-axis length in calculation of the left

ventricle volume and shown in the the display area of
measurement result, either the larger value of the
long-axis obtained in the step iV (in the cross-section
trace at the same time phase) or the value measured by
selecting the left ventricle long-axis length (LVLd or
LVLs) with UNDO key and Trackball are obtained.
11-118 Q1E-EA0611
[Method to trace whole left ventricle]
LVL
i) Move the caliper mark to the tip

Tip of mitral valve
of the mitral valve.
ii) Pressing ENTER key fixes the start i)

point where the start mark "•" is
displayed.
iii) Move the caliper mark along the

cross-sectional contour of the
left ventricle. ii)
iv) When the caliper reaches the start

mark "•", the tracing is completed, •
and the longest distance from the
start mark "•" to the point on the
trace line is considered as the iii)
long-axis length and it is
displayed with a broken line.
Then, as done for [the method to

approximate the mitral valve to a
straight line], the trace line is iv)
sliced and the left ventricle volume
is calculated.
Correction of the long-axis length

Fig.11.4.5-12
which is automatically obtained in
Tracing whole left
step iv-c) can also carried.
ventricle
i) out in the same procedure as that
for [the method to approximate the
mitral valve to a straight line].
11-119 Q1E-EA0611
5 Carry out measurements of each item in the same procedures
as the steps iii) and iV).
To retry the measurement of any item, move the cursor to
the item to be retried in the step iii), thus measurement
can be retried any times.
6 When measurements of all the items are completed, the

measurement ends. Press CLEAR key.
11-120 Q1E-EA0611
[6] Bullet Measurement
Measure the left ventricle long axis length and mitral valve
short axis area, and calculate the volume (V) by approximating
the left ventricle to a bullet, as follows:
V= 5 × AM × L
6
where:
L : Long axis length
AM : Short axis area at mitral

valve
Fig. 11.4.5-13 Concept of Bullet Measurement
Table 11.4.5-6 Bullet Measurement
Measurement Method
Symbol Meaning Unit (see paragraph 11.3) Comments
Left ventricle end-diastole Distance

LVLd mm
long axis length (B- or M-mode method)
2
LVAMd at mitral valve level in cm
end-diastole
Left ventricle end-systole long Distance (B- or M-mode
LVLs mm
axis length method)
2
LVAMs at mitral valve level in cm
end-systole
LVEdV mL
volume results
LVEsV mL
volume
CO Cardiac output L/min HR×SV
HR Heart rate bpm Heart rate by ECG SV / LVEdV
L/(min·m )
2
2 Report when
SI Stroke Index mL/m SV/BSA
height and weight
are registered in
patient ID menu.
Measuring procedure

11-121 Q1E-EA0611
[7] MV Regurg. Measurement
Instantaneous regurgitating flow rate, effective regurgitant

orifice and regurgitant volume of mitral valve(MV) are
calculated based on Doppler waveform trace of mitral
regurgitation or its peak velocity and PISA measurement.
PISA(proximal isovelocity surface area):
mitral regurgitation jet due to color Doppler goes flows to

mitral regurgitant orifice, by which convergent blood flow
is generated which is sucked into the orifice. In the case
of Fig. 11.4.5.14, Regurgitant signal in blue color is
accelerated as it approaches to the regurgitant orifice which
causes a folding phenomenon (Aliasing)nd the color turns to
red or yellow. A boundary of this hemispheric folding area
is called PISA.
Adjust the aliasing velocity so that the radius of PISA is

to be 5 ~ 10mm., then start the measurement after you can
observe clearly the reverse of color in color Doppler baseline.
Regarding the shift of base line refer to 5.7.7 Baseline.
LV
Lines traced
byTrace PISA-R
measurement
MR-TVI MR
PISA
LA
MR-Vp
Fig. 11.4.5-14 Pattern image of MV Regur. Measurement
11-122 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.5-7 MV Regurg Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Measurement Method Comments
PISA-R PISA radius mm Distance(B-mode method)
PISA PISA area cm2 Calculated based on the 2π × (PISA-R / 10)2

above
Alias Vel. Aliasing velocity m/s *2)
Vp Peak velocity of mitral m/s TRACE Values at delivery time

regurgitation from our factory are by
Measured either by Manual manual trace method. *1)
trace or Auto-trace or Plot
TVI TIME VELOCITY m trace method. It depends Values at delivery time
INTEGRAL on the setting at from our factory are by
Measurement Set-up. manual trace method *1')
Auto-trace method
Measured either by PEAK

or MEAN or MODE
depending upon the setting
at Measurement Set-up.
Flow Rate Instantaneous mL/s Calculated by the above. PISA×(Alias Vel. / 100)
regurgitating flow rate ec
ERO Effective regurgitant cm2 Flow Rate / (Vp×100)

orifice
Regurg Vol. Regurgitating volume mL ERO×TVI
NOTICE *1') : Calculation is carried out from the velocity value obtained
by the correction *1).
NOTICE *2 ) : In case of the direction of regurgitation is going away from

probe, maximum detective velocity of reverse direction in CFM
is automatically set. In case of the direction of regurgitation
is near to probe, change aliasing velocity + from - by using
function menu No.3 "Aliasing V." which is showed during you
are measuring PISA-R.(This menu isn't showed when the absolute
value of maximum detective velocity of reverse/order direction
is equal.)
Measuring method
Perform the measurement referring to

[Routine examination] in Area-Length measurement
11-123 Q1E-EA0611
[8] TV Regurg. Measurement
Instantaneous regurgitating flow rate, effective regurgitant

orifice and regurgitant volume of tricuspid valve(TV) are
calculated based on Doppler waveform trace of tricuspid
regurgitation or its peak velocity and PISA measurement.
As for PISA measurement refer to "11.4.5 [7] MV Regurg．

Measurement".
RV PISA-R
Lines traced by
Trace
Measurement
TR-TVI RA
TV
PISA
TR-Vp
Fig. 11.4.5-15 Pattern image of TV Regurg. Measurement
11-124 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.5-8 TV Regur. Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Measurement Method Comments
PISA-R PISA radius mm Length(B-mode method)

PISA PISA area cm2 Calculated by the above. 2π × (PISA-R / 10)2
Alias Vel. Aliasing velocity m/s *2)
Vp Peak velocity of m/s TRACE

Values at delivery from our
tricuspid regurgitation Measured either by factory is by manual trace
Manual trace or method. *1)
Auto-trace or Plot trace
TVI TIME VELOCITY m Values at delivery from our
method. It depends on
INTEGRAL the setting at factory is by manual trace
Measurement Set-up. method. *1')
Auto-trace method
Measured either by
PEAK or MEAN or
MODE depending upon
the setting at
Measurement Set-up.
Flow Rate Instantaneous mL/se Calculated by the above. PISA×(Alias Vel. / 100)
regurgitating flow rate c
ERO Effective regurgitant cm2 Flow Rate / (Vp×100)
orifice
Regurg Vol. Regurgitating volume mL ERO×TVI
NOTICE *1'): Calculation is carried out from the velocity value obtained
by the correction *1).
NOTICE *2 ) : In case of the direction of regurgitation is going away from

probe, maximum detective velocity of reverse direction in CFM
is automatically set. In case of the direction of regurgitation
is near to probe, change aliasing velocity + from - by using
function menu No.3 "Aliasing V." which is showed during you
are measuring PISA-R.(This menu isn't showed when the absolute
value of maximum detective velocity of reverse/order direction
is equal.)
Measuring method
Perform the measurement referring to [Routine

examination] in Area-Length measurement
11-125 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.6 Obstetric measurement
11.4.6.1 Outline of function
The obstetric measurement includes the following functions.
(1) Various measurement functions
(a) Measurement of fetal body dimensions such as BPD and FL

-- Distance, circumference (trace and oval) and area (trace
and oval)
(b) Measurement of fetal heartbeat
(c) Measurement of blood flow
(d) Measurement and calculation of AFI (amniotic fluid index)
(2) Various calculation functions
(a) Calculation of fetal weight from measured body dimensions

(b) Calculation of ratio values such as BPD/FL from measured
body dimensions
(3) Gestational age estimation function

Gestational age can be estimated from various measurement values,
calculated values and estimation table.
(4) Fetal growth diagnostic function

Fetal growth condition can be evaluated from various measurement
values, calculated values and evaluation table. The evaluation
value can be quantitatively displayed with percentile or
standard deviation.
(5) Reporting function

Various measurement values and calculated values can be
displayed in a table report.
Alternative description of examination findings and comments
can also be entered.
(6) Graph display function

Gestational age estimation table, growth evaluation table and
calculation results can be displayed in graph.
(7) Twin measurement function

Measurement of twin can be simultaneously performed.
11-126 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.6.2 Outline of operation
Typical operation procedures in obstetric measurement are

shown below.
(1) Operation procedures of gestational age diagnosis

(a) Input patient data such as ID.
ID input (b) Start the Obstetric Measurement
program.
The Obstetric Measurement menu is
Starting obstetric displayed at the left side of the
measurement program screen.
(c) Displaying an acquired image,
select the measurements such as
Display of ultrasound image
BPD from the Obstetric Measure-
and measurement
-ment menu and make measurements.
(d) The gestational age and expected
Estimation of gestational age date of confinement are
and date of confinement automatically calculated from the
data of various measurements and
displayed. From these data,
Report display of obstetric perform comparative evaluation
measurement results and estimate gestational age.
(e) The measurement results can be
displayed as obstetric
measurement report.
11-127 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Operation procedures of fetal growth diagnosis
(a) Input patient data such as ID.
ID input and DGA input
Together with the patient data,
input the expected date of
confinement of fetus by using the
DGA Input function, thereby
gestational age DGA at examination
date is calculated.
In addition to expected date of
confinement, DGA can also be
calculated from the gestational
age by the past examination.
(b) Start the Obstetric Measurement
Starting obstetric
program.
measurement program
The Obstetric Measurement menu is
displayed at the left side of the
screen.
In the case DGA was not input at
the time of ID entry, DGA can also
be input after starting the
Obstetric Measurement program.
Display of ultrasound image
and measurement (c) Displaying an acquired image,
select the measurements such as BPD
from the Obstetric Measurement
menu and make measurements.
(d) SD (standard deviation) and % value
Estimation of gestational weeks by DGA for each measurement are
and date of confinement
automatically calculated and
displayed in the measurement
result display area, thereby
growth evaluation can be
periodically performed.
The results can also be displayed
in graph for visual check.
Report display of obstetric (e) The measurement results can be

measurement results displayed as obstetric
measurement report.
11-128 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.6.3 Preset measurement items and report display items
Three measurement groups have been registered in the
Obstetric Measurement function and any of them can be used
for the intended examination.
OB-STD (general)
Various measurement items are provided and the
AIUM-compliant report description items are also included.
Weight can also be displayed in lbs. It is necessary to
register evaluation tables, fetal weight estimation
equation, etc. prior to starting the program.
OB-Todai(Tokyo University method-compliant)
Measurement variables and evaluation tables based on the

report "Creation of standard values in ultrasound
measurement" by Norio Shinotsuka, et al, Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics; Vol 23; No. 12; 877-888; 1996 have been
registered, which can be used without modification.
OB-OsakaU (Osaka University method-compliant)
Measurement variables and evaluation tables based on the

report "Diagnosis of fetal growth" by Mineo Aoki, et al,
Obstetrics and Gynecology Therapy; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
have been registered, which can be used without
modification.
For details of settings in each group, refer to Table

11.4.6.3-1 ~ Table 11.4.6.3-8.
OB-STD measurement can be used only in the factory shipment.

In case of need OB-Todai or OB-Osaka U or OB-JSUM, by using
[Additional Settings] of measurement export/import
function, replace from OB-STD to OB-Todai or OB-Osaka U or
OB-JSUM. Refer to item 11.5.6 Measurement Export/Import
function.
Any of the settings in each measurement group can be changed
as required, and addition and deletion of measurement item,
modification of calculation equation, edition of evaluation
table are also possible. Furthermore a new measurement
group can be created. For operation procedures for
modification and group creation, refer to "11.5.2
Measurement Setup menu".
11-129 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-1 Measurement Items List (OB-STD) (1/2)
Measurement Measurement Measurement Calculation
Unit Remarks
name item mode equation
Fetal Para. GS Distance (B-mode) mm -
CRL Distance (B-mode) mm -
LV Distance (B-mode) mm -
BPD Distance (B-mode) mm -
OFD Distance (B-mode) mm -
HC Circumference mm - Ellipse
(B-mode
LVW Distance (B-mode) mm -
HW Distance (B-mode) mm -
TCD Distance (B-mode) mm -
BD Distance (B-mode) mm -
IOD Distance (B-mode) mm -
OD Distance (B-mode) mm -
APTD Distance (B-mode) mm -
TTD Distance (B-mode) mm -
AC Circumference mm - Ellipse
(B-mode)
2
FTA Area (B-mode) cm - Ellipse
HL Distance (B-mode) mm -
ULNA Distance (B-mode) mm -
RAD Distance (B-mode) mm -
FL Distance (B-mode) mm -
TIB Distance (B-mode) mm -
FIB Distance (B-mode) mm -
EFBW1 Calculation g No registration at factory
EFBW1_1 Calculation lbs No registration at factory lbs unit
bs
EFBW2 Calculation g No registration at factory
EFBW2_1 Calculation lbs No registration at factory lbs unit
bs
EFBWT Calculation g No registration at factory for twin
CI Calculation - BPD/OFD*100
HC/AC Calculation - HC/AC
FL/AC Calculation - FL/AC
FL/BPD Calculation - FL/BPD
LVW/HW Calculation - LVW/HW
APTD×TTD
2
Calculation cm APTD * TTD * 0.01
11-130 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-1 Measurement Items List (OB-STD) (2/2)
Unit Remarks
AFFI Q1 Distance (B-mode) mm -
Q2 Distance (B-mode) mm -
AFI Calculation mm Q1+Q2+Q3+Q4
Umbil.A. Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
Vd Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
Vm Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or
manual
S/D Calculation - Vs/Vd waveform
RI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)/Vs trace
PI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)Vm
R-Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
L-Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
Desc A. Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
MCA Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
Card.Activ. T Time (D-mode) ms -
RR Time (D-mode) ms - T/BEAT
HR Calculation bpm - 60×1000/HR
11-131 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-2 Measurement Items List (OB-Todai)
Unit Remarks
Fetal Para. BPD Distance mm -
FL Distance mm -
APTD Distance mm -
TTD Distance mm
APTD×TTD
2
Calculation cm APTD * TTD *
0.01
EFBW Calculation g (1.07*BPD^3+
3.42*APTD*
TTD*FL)*0.001
manual
Uterine Vs Flow velocity (D-mode) cm/s
manual
manual
manual
11-132 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-3 Measurement Items List (OB-JSUM)
Unit Remarks
Fetal Para. CRL Distance mm -
BPD Distance mm -
FL Distance mm -
EFBW Calculation g (1.07*BPD^3+
0.3*AC^2*FL)*
0.001
manual
UmA_RI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)/Vs trace
UmA_PI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)Vm
manual
Utr_RI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)/Vs trace
Utr_PI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)Vm
manual
Desc_RI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)/Vs trace
Desc_PI Calculation - (Vs-Vd)Vm
manual
11-133 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-4 Measurement Items List (OB-OsakaU)
Unit Remarks
Fetal Para. CRL Distance mm -
BPD Distance mm -
FL Distance mm -
HL Distance mm -
2
FTA B-Area cm Ellipse
EFBW Calculation g 6.3+1.25647*
(BPD/10)^3+
0.350665*FTA*F
L
manual
manual
manual
manual
Card.Activ. T Time (D-mode) S -
RR Time (D-mode) 1ms - T/BEAT
11-134 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-5 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-STD)
Measurement Entry
Item Content Remarks
name method
Card. Activ. Fetal Rhythm Fetal heartbeat Selection REG : Normal
rhythm IRR : Arrythmia
NONE : None
Biophysical Score Biophysical score Score selection Based on Manning method
dialog
Gest.Status Plac Loc[H] Placenta position Selection ANT : Anterior
(Horiz. direction) POST : Posterior
RIGHT : Right
LEFT : Left
Plac Loc[V] Placenta position Selection FUND : Fundus
(Vert. direction) MID : Middle
LOW : Lower
PREVIA: Placenta previa
(uterus opening)
Plac Grade Placenta glading Selection Evaluation of morphological
change in placenta in 4
levels from grade 0 to 3
NML : Normal
Amniotic Fl.V. Amniotic fluid Selection POLY : Polyhydramnios
volume OLIG : Oligoamnios
Fetus/Number of fetus in
Fetal Number Number of fetus Selection uterus (0: Stillbirth)
CEPH : Cephalad
BRC : Breech
TRV : Transverse
OBL : Oblique
VAR : ______(Normal)
Fetal Ana. Head Fetal head Selection Yes/No/NA
Ventricles Vertebra Selection Yes/No/NA
Cerebellum Cerebellum Selection Yes/No/NA
Nuchal Fold NUCHAL FOLD Selection Yes/No/NA
Face Face Selection Yes/No/NA
Nostrils Nasal foramen Selection Yes/No/NA
Lips Lip Selection Yes/No/NA
Spine Spinal column Selection Yes/No/NA
4 Cham Heart 4 Cardiac chambers Selection Yes/No/NA
Chest Chest Selection Yes/No/NA
Stomach Stomach Selection Yes/No/NA
Cord Insertion Umbilical cord Selection Yes/No/NA
3 Vessel Cord 3 umbilical vessel Selection Yes/No/NA
depiction Selection Yes/No/NA
Bowel Intestinal tract Selection Yes/No/NA
Kidneys Kidney Selection Yes/No/NA
Bladder Fetal bladder Selection Yes/No/NA
Maternal Cervix Uterine cervix Selection Yes/No/NA
Fundus Uterine fundus Selection Yes/No/NA
Adnexal Ovary & others Selection Yes/No/NA
11-135 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.3-6 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-Todai)
Measurement Entry
name method
NONE : None
Table 11.4.6.3-7 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-OsakaU)

Measurement Entry
name method
NONE : None
Table 11.4.6.3-8 Measurement Items List for Report (OB-JSUM)

Measurement Entry
name method
NONE : None
11.4.6.4 Operation
Measurement operation is same as that of other measurement
functions. Pressing Meas. Menu button and others, display
the Measurement menu to start the Measurement program. For
Report and Graph Display functions, refer to "11.6
Measurement Report function".
11.4.6.5 Input to DGA

By manually inputting the known data such as expected date
of confinement (EDC) on DGA Input dialog, diagnosed
gestational age (DGA) of the fetus at examination date is
calculated.
(1) Pressing F2 key displays the following DGA Input dialog.
Fig. 11.4.6.5-1 DGA Input Dialog
11-136 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Select an item in Defined by area.
LMP : Last menstrual period
EDC : Expected date of confinement
First DGA : Gestational age diagnosed by physician at the
first or previous examination date
Today’s DGA : Today’s DGA
(3) Input Date and Week.
Table 11.4.6.5-1 Input Data and Week

Defined by Date Week DGA calculation equation
LMP Last menstrual --- Examination date - Date
period
*1
EDC Expected date of --- Gestational age -
confinement (Date - Examination date)
FIRST DGA First or previous DGA at first or previous Examination date -
examination date examination date Date + Week
Today’s DGA --- Today’s DGA Week
*1)Gestational age can be changed by property for OB measurement.

Refer to "11.5.2.2 Measurement type".
(4) Finally press OK button to define the input. To cancel the input,
press Cancel button.
11-137 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.6.6 Major abbreviations
Table 11.4.6.6 Major abbreviations

Abbreviation Full spelling
LMP Last Menstrual Period
DGA Diagnosed Gestational Age
EDC Expected Date of Confinement
GS Gestational Sac
CRL Crown Rum Length
LV Length of Vertebrae
BPD Biparietal Diameter
OFD Occipital Frontal Diameter
HC Head Circumference
LVW Lateral Ventricular Width
HW Hemispheric Width
TCD Transverse Cerebellar Diameter
BD Binocular Distance
IOD Inter Orbital Distance
OD Ocular Diameter
APTD Antero Posterior Diameter of fetal Trunk
TTD Transverse Diameter of fetal Trunk
AC Abdominal Circumference
FTA Fetal Trunk cross-sectional Area
HL Humerus Length
FL Femur Length
ULNA ULNA length
RAD RADius length
TIB TIBia length
FIB FIBula length
CI Cephalic Index (BPD/OFD)
EFBW Estimated Fetal Body Weight
AFI Amniotic Fluid Index
SD Standard Deviation
UMBIL A Umbilical Artery
UTERINE Uterine Artery
DESC.A Descending Artery
MCA Middle Cerebral Artery
S/D Systole/Diastole flow ratio
PI Pulsatility Index
RI Resistance Index
11-138 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.6.7 Setting obstetric measurement display items
Obstetric measurement display items can be set on the
property setting screen for obstetric measurement as shown
in "11.5.2.2 Measurement type". Each item shown below has
a different recommended value for each of "OB-Todai",
"OB-OsakaU",”OB-JSUM” and "OB-STD". Set each item
according to the obstetric measurement method to be used.
Table 11.4.6.7 Obstetric measurement display items

OB Measurement setting value (recommended)
Setting item
OB-Todai OB-OsakaU OB-JSUM OB-STD
GA and EDC by U/S ON OFF ON ON
GA and EDC by LMP ON ON ON ON
GA and EDC without AC ON OFF ON ON
GA and EDC by DGA ON ON ON ON
EDC based on each item ON ON ON ON
Ranking based on GA by U/S OFF OFF OFF ON
11-139 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.6.8 Stored table data and fetal weight calculation equation
The equipment stores estimated gestational age table data,
fetal growth evaluation table data, ratio range table data,
AFI table data, fetal weight table data and fetal weight
calculation equation. Before using any of these data, refer
to the reference documents.
11-140 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-1 Obstetric Table Data (1/8) for USA
1. BPD 2. BPD 3. BPD 4. HC
HAD84 ; Age table HAD84 ; Growth table SABB78 ; Age table HAD84 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ.
Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm
Variation ; +/- 2SD Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; +/- 2SD
(+/- 1.64SD)
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 16.0 12w2d 8d 1: 12w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0 1: 28.0 14w0d 7d 1: 60.0 12w2d 8d
2: 18.0 12w5d 8d 2: 13w0d 18.0 21.0 24.0 2: 32.0 15w0d 7d 2: 65.0 12w4d 8d
3: 20.0 13w1d 8d 3: 14w0d 22.0 25.0 28.0 3: 36.0 16w0d 7d 3: 70.0 12w5d 8d
4: 22.0 13w4d 8d 4: 15w0d 26.0 29.0 32.0 4: 39.0 17w0d 10d 4: 75.0 13w0d 8d
5: 24.0 14w0d 8d 5: 16w0d 29.0 32.0 35.0 5: 42.0 18w0d 10d 5: 80.0 13w2d 8d
6: 26.0 14w3d 8d 6: 17w0d 33.0 36.0 39.0 6: 45.0 19w0d 10d 6: 85.0 13w4d 8d
7: 28.0 15w0d 8d 7: 18w0d 36.0 39.0 42.0 7: 48.0 20w0d 10d 7: 90.0 14w0d 8d
8: 30.0 15w3d 8d 8: 19w0d 40.0 43.0 46.0 8: 51.0 21w0d 10d 8: 95.0 14w2d 8d
9: 32.0 16w0d 8d 9: 20w0d 43.0 46.0 49.0 9: 54.0 22w0d 10d 9: 100.0 14w4d 8d
10: 34.0 16w3d 8d 10: 21w0d 47.0 50.0 53.0 10: 58.0 23w0d 10d 10: 105.0 15w0d 8d
11: 36.0 17w0d 8d 11: 22w0d 50.0 53.0 56.0 11: 61.0 24w0d 10d 11: 110.0 15w2d 8d
12: 38.0 17w4d 8d 12: 23w0d 53.0 56.0 59.0 12: 64.0 25w0d 10d 12: 115.0 15w4d 8d
13: 40.0 18w0d 11d 13: 24w0d 56.0 59.0 62.0 13: 67.0 26w0d 10d 13: 120.0 16w0d 8d
14: 42.0 18w4d 11d 14: 25w0d 59.0 62.0 65.0 14: 70.0 27w0d 14d 14: 125.0 16w2d 8d
15: 44.0 19w2d 11d 15: 26w0d 62.0 65.0 68.0 15: 72.0 28w0d 14d 15: 130.0 16w4d 8d
16: 46.0 19w6d 11d 16: 27w0d 65.0 68.0 71.0 16: 75.0 29w0d 21d 16: 135.0 17w0d 8d
17: 48.0 20w3d 11d 17: 28w0d 68.0 71.0 74.0 17: 78.0 30w0d 21d 17: 140.0 17w2d 8d
18: 50.0 21w0d 11d 18: 29w0d 70.0 73.0 76.0 18: 80.0 31w0d 21d 18: 145.0 17w4d 8d
19: 52.0 21w5d 11d 19: 30w0d 73.0 76.0 79.0 19: 82.0 32w0d 21d 19: 150.0 18w0d 10d
20: 54.0 22w2d 11d 20: 31w0d 75.0 78.0 81.0 20: 85.0 33w0d 21d 20: 155.0 18w2d 10d
21: 56.0 23w0d 11d 21: 32w0d 78.0 81.0 84.0 21: 87.0 34w0d 21d 21: 160.0 18w5d 10d
22: 58.0 23w5d 11d 22: 33w0d 80.0 83.0 86.0 22: 88.0 35w0d 21d 22: 165.0 19w1d 10d
23: 60.0 24w3d 15d 23: 34w0d 82.0 85.0 88.0 23: 90.0 36w0d 21d 23: 170.0 19w4d 10d
24: 62.0 25w1d 15d 24: 35w0d 84.0 87.0 90.0 24: 92.0 37w0d 21d 24: 175.0 20w0d 10d
25: 64.0 25w6d 15d 25: 36w0d 86.0 89.0 92.0 25: 93.0 38w0d 21d 25: 180.0 20w2d 10d
26: 66.0 26w4d 15d 26: 37w0d 87.0 90.0 93.0 26: 94.0 39w0d 21d 26: 185.0 20w5d 10d
27: 68.0 27w2d 15d 27: 38w0d 89.0 92.0 95.0 27: 95.0 40w0d 21d 27: 190.0 21w2d 10d
28: 70.0 28w0d 15d 28: 39w0d 90.0 93.0 96.0 28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 195.0 21w4d 10d
29: 72.0 28w6d 15d 29: 40w0d 91.0 94.0 97.0 29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 200.0 22w1d 10d
30: 74.0 29w4d 15d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 205.0 22w4d 10d
31: 76.0 30w3d 21d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 210.0 23w0d 10d
32: 78.0 31w2d 21d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 215.0 23w4d 10d
33: 80.0 32w0d 21d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 220.0 24w0d 14d
34: 82.0 33w0d 21d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 225.0 24w3d 14d
35: 84.0 33w5d 21d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 230.0 25w0d 14d
36: 86.0 34w4d 21d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 235.0 25w3d 14d
37: 88.0 35w4d 21d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 240.0 26w0d 14d
38: 90.0 36w3d 22d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 245.0 26w4d 14d
39: 92.0 37w2d 22d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 250.0 27w0d 14d
40: 94.0 38w2d 22d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 255.0 27w4d 14d
41: 96.0 39w1d 22d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 260.0 28w2d 14d
42: 98.0 40w1d 22d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 265.0 28w6d 14d
43: 100.0 41w0d 22d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 270.0 29w2d 14d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 275.0 30w0d 21d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 280.0 30w4d 21d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 285.0 31w2d 21d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 290.0 31w6d 21d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 295.0 32w4d 21d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 300.0 33w2d 21d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 305.0 33w6d 21d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 310.0 34w4d 21d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 315.0 35w2d 21d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 320.0 36w0d 18d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 325.0 36w5d 18d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 330.0 37w4d 18d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 335.0 38w2d 18d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 340.0 39w0d 18d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 345.0 39w6d 18d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 350.0 40w4d 18d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 355.0 41w4d 18d
Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 1 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 2 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 3 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-4 No. 4
11-141 Q1E-EA0611
5. HC 6. AC 7. AC 8. FL
HAD84 ; Growth table HAD84 ; Age table HAD84 ; Growth table HAD84 ; Growth table
Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 2SD Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 12w0d 58.0 68.0 78.0 1: 60.0 12w5d 11d 1: 12w0d 32.6 46.0 59.4 1: 12w0d 4.0 7.0 10.0
2: 13w0d 72.0 82.0 92.0 2: 70.0 13w4d 11d 2: 13w0d 46.6 60.0 73.4 2: 13w0d 8.0 11.0 14.0
3: 14w0d 87.0 97.0 107.0 3: 80.0 14w2d 11d 3: 14w0d 59.6 73.0 86.4 3: 14w0d 11.0 14.0 17.0
4: 15w0d 100.0 110.0 120.0 4: 90.0 15w1d 11d 4: 15w0d 72.6 86.0 99.4 4: 15w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0
5: 16w0d 114.0 124.0 134.0 5: 100.0 16w0d 11d 5: 16w0d 85.6 99.0 112.4 5: 16w0d 17.0 20.0 23.0
6: 17w0d 128.0 138.0 148.0 6: 110.0 16w6d 11d 6: 17w0d 98.6 112.0 125.4 6: 17w0d 21.0 24.0 27.0
7: 18w0d 141.0 151.0 161.0 7: 120.0 17w4d 11d 7: 18w0d 111.6 125.0 138.4 7: 18w0d 24.0 27.0 30.0
8: 19w0d 154.0 164.0 174.0 8: 130.0 18w3d 14d 8: 19w0d 123.6 137.0 150.4 8: 19w0d 27.0 30.0 33.0
9: 20w0d 167.0 177.0 187.0 9: 140.0 19w2d 14d 9: 20w0d 136.6 150.0 163.4 9: 20w0d 30.0 33.0 36.0
10: 21w0d 179.0 189.0 199.0 10: 150.0 20w1d 14d 10: 21w0d 148.6 162.0 175.4 10: 21w0d 32.0 35.0 38.0
11: 22w0d 191.0 201.0 211.0 11: 160.0 21w0d 14d 11: 22w0d 160.6 174.0 187.4 11: 22w0d 35.0 38.0 41.0
12: 23w0d 203.0 213.0 223.0 12: 170.0 22w0d 14d 12: 23w0d 171.6 185.0 198.4 12: 23w0d 38.0 41.0 44.0
13: 24w0d 214.0 224.0 234.0 13: 180.0 22w6d 14d 13: 24w0d 183.6 197.0 210.4 13: 24w0d 41.0 44.0 47.0
14: 25w0d 225.0 235.0 245.0 14: 190.0 23w4d 14d 14: 25w0d 194.6 208.0 221.4 14: 25w0d 43.0 46.0 49.0
15: 26w0d 236.0 246.0 256.0 15: 200.0 24w4d 15d 15: 26w0d 205.6 219.0 232.4 15: 26w0d 46.0 49.0 52.0
16: 27w0d 246.0 256.0 266.0 16: 210.0 25w3d 15d 16: 27w0d 216.6 230.0 243.4 16: 27w0d 48.0 51.0 54.0
17: 28w0d 256.0 266.0 276.0 17: 220.0 26w2d 15d 17: 28w0d 226.6 240.0 253.4 17: 28w0d 51.0 54.0 57.0
18: 29w0d 265.0 275.0 285.0 18: 230.0 27w2d 15d 18: 29w0d 237.6 251.0 264.4 18: 29w0d 53.0 56.0 59.0
19: 30w0d 274.0 284.0 294.0 19: 240.0 28w2d 15d 19: 30w0d 247.6 261.0 274.4 19: 30w0d 55.0 58.0 61.0
20: 31w0d 283.0 293.0 303.0 20: 250.0 29w1d 15d 20: 31w0d 257.6 271.0 284.4 20: 31w0d 57.0 60.0 63.0
21: 32w0d 291.0 301.0 311.0 21: 260.0 30w1d 21d 21: 32w0d 267.6 281.0 294.4 21: 32w0d 59.0 62.0 65.0
22: 33w0d 298.0 308.0 318.0 22: 270.0 31w0d 21d 22: 33w0d 277.6 291.0 304.4 22: 33w0d 61.0 64.0 67.0
23: 34w0d 305.0 315.0 325.0 23: 280.0 32w0d 21d 23: 34w0d 286.6 300.0 313.4 23: 34w0d 63.0 66.0 69.0
24: 35w0d 312.0 322.0 332.0 24: 290.0 33w0d 21d 24: 35w0d 295.6 309.0 322.4 24: 35w0d 65.0 68.0 71.0
25: 36w0d 318.0 328.0 338.0 25: 300.0 34w0d 21d 25: 36w0d 304.6 318.0 331.4 25: 36w0d 67.0 70.0 73.0
26: 37w0d 323.0 333.0 343.0 26: 310.0 34w6d 21d 26: 37w0d 313.6 327.0 340.4 26: 37w0d 69.0 72.0 75.0
27: 38w0d 328.0 338.0 348.0 27: 320.0 35w6d 21d 27: 38w0d 322.6 336.0 349.4 27: 38w0d 71.0 74.0 77.0
28: 39w0d 332.0 342.0 352.0 28: 330.0 36w6d 21d 28: 39w0d 330.6 344.0 357.4 28: 39w0d 72.0 75.0 78.0
29: 40w0d 336.0 346.0 356.0 29: 340.0 37w6d 21d 29: 40w0d 339.6 353.0 366.4 29: 40w0d 74.0 77.0 80.0
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 350.0 38w6d 21d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 360.0 39w6d 21d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 370.0 40w6d 21d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 380.0 42w0d 21d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-142 Q1E-EA0611
9. FL 10. FL 11. FL 12. CRL
HAD82 ; Age table JEAN84 ; Age table JEAN83 ; Growth table ROB75 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance
Variation ; +/- 2SD Variation ; 90% confidence Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation;95% confidence
interval interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 10.0 12w6d 9d 1: 10.0 12w4d 16d 1: 12w0d 4.0 8.0 13.0 1: 5.5 6w2d 4d
2: 12.0 13w3d 9d 2: 12.0 13w2d 16d 2: 13w0d 6.0 11.0 16.0 2: 6.1 6w3d 4d
3: 14.0 13w6d 9d 3: 14.0 13w6d 15d 3: 14w0d 9.0 14.0 18.0 3: 6.8 6w4d 4d
4: 16.0 14w4d 9d 4: 16.0 14w4d 16d 4: 15w0d 12.0 17.0 21.0 4: 7.5 6w5d 4d
5: 18.0 15w1d 9d 5: 18.0 15w0d 16d 5: 16w0d 15.0 20.0 24.0 5: 8.1 6w6d 4d
6: 20.0 15w5d 9d 6: 20.0 15w6d 15d 6: 17w0d 18.0 23.0 27.0 6: 8.9 7w0d 4d
7: 22.0 16w2d 9d 7: 22.0 16w4d 16d 7: 18w0d 21.0 25.0 30.0 7: 9.6 7w1d 4d
8: 24.0 16w6d 9d 8: 24.0 17w2d 16d 8: 19w0d 24.0 28.0 33.0 8: 10.4 7w2d 4d
9: 26.0 17w4d 9d 9: 26.0 18w0d 14d 9: 20w0d 26.0 31.0 36.0 9: 11.2 7w3d 4d
10: 28.0 18w1d 9d 10: 28.0 18w4d 15d 10: 21w0d 29.0 34.0 38.0 10: 12.0 7w4d 4d
11: 30.0 18w6d 9d 11: 30.0 19w2d 15d 11: 22w0d 32.0 36.0 41.0 11: 12.9 7w5d 4d
12: 32.0 19w4d 9d 12: 32.0 20w0d 15d 12: 23w0d 35.0 39.0 44.0 12: 13.8 7w6d 4d
13: 34.0 20w2d 9d 13: 34.0 20w6d 15d 13: 24w0d 37.0 42.0 46.0 13: 14.7 8w0d 4d
14: 36.0 21w0d 9d 14: 36.0 21w4d 16d 14: 25w0d 40.0 44.0 49.0 14: 15.7 8w1d 4d
15: 38.0 21w6d 9d 15: 38.0 22w2d 15d 15: 26w0d 42.0 47.0 51.0 15: 16.6 8w2d 4d
16: 40.0 22w4d 9d 16: 40.0 23w0d 15d 16: 27w0d 45.0 49.0 54.0 16: 17.6 8w3d 4d
17: 42.0 23w2d 22d 17: 42.0 23w6d 15d 17: 28w0d 47.0 52.0 56.0 17: 18.7 8w4d 4d
18: 44.0 24w1d 22d 18: 44.0 24w4d 15d 18: 29w0d 50.0 54.0 59.0 18: 19.7 8w5d 4d
19: 46.0 24w6d 22d 19: 46.0 25w2d 15d 19: 30w0d 52.0 56.0 61.0 19: 20.8 8w6d 4d
20: 48.0 25w5d 22d 20: 48.0 26w0d 16d 20: 31w0d 54.0 59.0 63.0 20: 21.9 9w0d 4d
21: 50.0 26w4d 22d 21: 50.0 27w0d 14d 21: 32w0d 56.0 61.0 65.0 21: 23.1 9w1d 4d
22: 52.0 27w3d 22d 22: 52.0 27w6d 14d 22: 33w0d 58.0 63.0 67.0 22: 24.2 9w2d 4d
23: 54.0 28w1d 22d 23: 54.0 28w4d 16d 23: 34w0d 60.0 65.0 69.0 23: 25.4 9w3d 4d
24: 56.0 29w1d 22d 24: 56.0 29w4d 14d 24: 35w0d 62.0 67.0 71.0 24: 26.7 9w4d 4d
25: 58.0 30w0d 22d 25: 58.0 30w2d 16d 25: 36w0d 64.0 68.0 73.0 25: 27.9 9w5d 4d
26: 60.0 30w6d 22d 26: 60.0 31w0d 15d 26: 37w0d 65.0 70.0 74.0 26: 29.2 9w6d 4d
27: 62.0 31w6d 22d 27: 62.0 32w0d 14d 27: 38w0d 67.0 71.0 76.0 27: 30.5 10w0d 4d
28: 64.0 32w6d 22d 28: 64.0 32w6d 15d 28: 39w0d 68.0 73.0 77.0 28: 31.8 10w1d 4d
29: 66.0 33w6d 22d 29: 66.0 33w4d 15d 29: 40w0d 70.0 74.0 79.0 29: 33.2 10w2d 4d
30: 68.0 34w5d 22d 30: 68.0 34w4d 16d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 34.6 10w3d 4d
31: 70.0 35w5d 22d 31: 70.0 35w4d 14d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 36.0 10w4d 4d
32: 72.0 36w5d 22d 32: 72.0 36w2d 15d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 37.4 10w5d 4d
33: 74.0 37w5d 22d 33: 74.0 37w2d 16d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 38.9 10w6d 4d
34: 76.0 38w6d 22d 34: 76.0 38w0d 16d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 40.4 11w0d 4d
35: 78.0 39w6d 22d 35: 78.0 39w0d 15d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 41.9 11w1d 4d
36: 79.0 40w3d 22d 36: 80.0 40w0d 14d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 43.5 11w2d 4d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 45.1 11w3d 4d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 46.7 11w4d 4d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 48.3 11w5d 4d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 50.0 11w6d 4d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 51.7 12w0d 4d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 53.4 12w1d 4d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 55.2 12w2d 4d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 57.0 12w3d 4d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 58.8 12w4d 4d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 60.6 12w5d 4d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 62.5 12w6d 4d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 64.3 13w0d 4d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 66.3 13w1d 4d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 68.2 13w2d 4d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 70.2 13w3d 4d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 72.2 13w4d 4d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 74.2 13w5d 4d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 76.3 13w6d 4d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 78.3 14w0d 4d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-143 Q1E-EA0611
13. GS 14. HL 15. BD 16. FIB
HEL69 ; Age table JEAN84 ; Age table MAY82 ; Growth table JEAN83 ; Growth table
Variation ; None Variation; 90% confidence Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 5%,50%,95%
interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 10.0 5w0d 0d 1: 10.0 12w4d 18d 1: 12w0d 11.0 16.0 20.0 1: 14w0d 6.0 12.0 19.0
2: 11.0 5w1d 0d 2: 11.0 12w6d 18d 2: 13w0d 14.0 18.0 23.0 2: 15w0d 9.0 15.0 21.0
3: 12.0 5w2d 0d 3: 12.0 13w0d 19d 3: 14w0d 16.0 20.0 25.0 3: 16w0d 13.0 18.0 23.0
4: 13.0 5w3d 0d 4: 13.0 13w4d 17d 4: 15w0d 18.0 23.0 27.0 4: 17w0d 13.0 21.0 28.0
5: 14.0 5w4d 0d 5: 14.0 13w6d 18d 5: 16w0d 20.0 25.0 29.0 5: 18w0d 15.0 23.0 31.0
6: 15.0 5w5d 0d 6: 15.0 14w0d 19d 6: 17w0d 22.0 27.0 31.0 6: 19w0d 19.0 26.0 33.0
7: 16.0 5w6d 0d 7: 16.0 14w4d 18d 7: 18w0d 24.0 29.0 33.0 7: 20w0d 21.0 28.0 36.0
8: 17.0 6w0d 0d 8: 17.0 14w6d 18d 8: 20w0d 28.0 33.0 37.0 8: 21w0d 24.0 31.0 37.0
9: 18.0 6w1d 0d 9: 18.0 15w0d 20d 9: 21w0d 30.0 35.0 39.0 9: 22w0d 27.0 33.0 39.0
10: 19.0 6w2d 0d 10: 19.0 15w4d 18d 10: 22w0d 32.0 36.0 41.0 10: 23w0d 28.0 35.0 42.0
11: 20.0 6w3d 0d 11: 20.0 15w6d 19d 11: 23w0d 34.0 38.0 43.0 11: 24w0d 29.0 37.0 45.0
12: 21.0 6w4d 0d 12: 21.0 16w2d 19d 12: 24w0d 35.0 40.0 44.0 12: 25w0d 34.0 40.0 45.0
13: 22.0 6w5d 0d 13: 22.0 16w4d 18d 13: 25w0d 37.0 42.0 46.0 13: 26w0d 36.0 42.0 47.0
14: 23.0 6w6d 0d 14: 23.0 17w0d 19d 14: 26w0d 39.0 43.0 47.0 14: 27w0d 37.0 44.0 50.0
15: 24.0 7w0d 0d 15: 24.0 17w2d 18d 15: 27w0d 40.0 45.0 49.0 15: 28w0d 38.0 45.0 53.0
16: 25.0 7w1d 0d 16: 25.0 17w6d 18d 16: 28w0d 42.0 46.0 51.0 16: 29w0d 41.0 47.0 54.0
17: 26.0 7w2d 0d 17: 26.0 18w0d 20d 17: 29w0d 43.0 48.0 52.0 17: 30w0d 43.0 49.0 56.0
18: 27.0 7w3d 0d 18: 27.0 18w4d 19d 18: 30w0d 45.0 49.0 53.0 18: 31w0d 42.0 51.0 59.0
19: 28.0 7w4d 0d 19: 28.0 19w0d 20d 19: 31w0d 46.0 50.0 55.0 19: 32w0d 42.0 52.0 63.0
20: 29.0 7w5d 0d 20: 29.0 19w2d 18d 20: 32w0d 47.0 52.0 56.0 20: 33w0d 46.0 54.0 62.0
21: 30.0 7w6d 0d 21: 30.0 19w6d 18d 21: 33w0d 49.0 53.0 57.0 21: 34w0d 46.0 55.0 65.0
22: 31.0 8w0d 0d 22: 31.0 20w2d 18d 22: 34w0d 50.0 54.0 58.0 22: 35w0d 51.0 57.0 62.0
23: 32.0 8w1d 0d 23: 32.0 20w4d 20d 23: 35w0d 51.0 55.0 60.0 23: 36w0d 54.0 58.0 63.0
24: 33.0 8w2d 0d 24: 33.0 21w0d 19d 24: 36w0d 52.0 56.0 61.0 24: 37w0d 54.0 59.0 65.0
25: 34.0 8w3d 0d 25: 34.0 21w4d 18d 25: 37w0d 53.0 57.0 62.0 25: 38w0d 56.0 61.0 65.0
26: 35.0 8w4d 0d 26: 35.0 22w0d 20d 26: 38w0d 54.0 58.0 63.0 26: 39w0d 56.0 62.0 67.0
27: 36.0 8w5d 0d 27: 36.0 22w4d 17d 27: 39w0d 55.0 59.0 64.0 27: 40w0d 59.0 63.0 67.0
28: 37.0 8w6d 0d 28: 37.0 22w6d 19d 28: 40w0d 56.0 60.0 64.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
29: 38.0 9w0d 0d 29: 38.0 23w2d 18d 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
30: 39.0 9w1d 0d 30: 39.0 23w6d 18d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 40.0 9w2d 0d 31: 40.0 24w2d 19d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 41.0 9w3d 0d 32: 41.0 24w6d 18d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 42.0 9w4d 0d 33: 42.0 25w2d 18d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 43.0 9w5d 0d 34: 43.0 25w4d 20d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 44.0 9w6d 0d 35: 44.0 26w0d 20d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 45.0 10w0d 0d 36: 45.0 26w4d 20d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 46.0 10w1d 0d 37: 46.0 27w0d 20d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 47.0 10w2d 0d 38: 47.0 27w4d 20d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 48.0 10w3d 0d 39: 48.0 28w0d 20d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 49.0 10w4d 0d 40: 49.0 28w6d 18d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 50.0 10w5d 0d 41: 50.0 29w2d 18d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 51.0 10w6d 0d 42: 51.0 29w6d 18d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 52.0 11w0d 0d 43: 52.0 30w2d 19d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 53.0 11w1d 0d 44: 53.0 30w6d 18d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 54.0 11w2d 0d 45: 54.0 31w2d 18d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 55.0 11w3d 0d 46: 55.0 32w0d 18d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 56.0 11w4d 0d 47: 56.0 32w4d 18d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 57.0 11w5d 0d 48: 57.0 33w0d 19d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 58.0 11w6d 0d 49: 58.0 33w4d 19d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 59.0 12w0d 0d 50: 59.0 34w0d 19d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 60.0 12w1d 0d 51: 60.0 34w6d 18d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 61.0 35w2d 19d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 62.0 35w6d 19d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 63.0 36w4d 18d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 64.0 37w0d 19d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 65.0 37w4d 20d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 66.0 38w2d 19d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 67.0 38w6d 19d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 68.0 39w4d 18d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 69.0 40w0d 19d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-144 Q1E-EA0611
17. HW 18. IOD 19. LVW 20. OD
PRE86 ; Growth table MAY82 ; Growth table PRE86 ; Growth table MAY82 ; Growth table
Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; 5%,50%,95%
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 15w0d 12.0 15.0 18.0 1: 12w0d 4.0 8.0 11.0 1: 15w0d 6.0 8.0 10.0 1: 12w0d 2.0 4.0 6.0
2: 16w0d 13.0 15.0 17.0 2: 13w0d 5.0 8.0 11.0 2: 16w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 2: 13w0d 3.0 5.0 6.0
3: 17w0d 14.0 15.0 16.0 3: 14w0d 6.0 9.0 12.0 3: 17w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 3: 14w0d 4.0 5.0 7.0
4: 18w0d 17.0 18.0 19.0 4: 15w0d 6.0 10.0 13.0 4: 18w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 4: 15w0d 4.0 6.0 8.0
5: 19w0d 19.0 20.0 21.0 5: 16w0d 7.0 10.0 13.0 5: 19w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 5: 16w0d 5.0 7.0 9.0
6: 20w0d 17.0 19.0 20.0 6: 17w0d 8.0 11.0 14.0 6: 20w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 6: 17w0d 6.0 8.0 10.0
7: 21w0d 20.0 21.0 22.0 7: 18w0d 8.0 11.0 15.0 7: 21w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 7: 18w0d 7.0 9.0 10.0
8: 22w0d 21.0 23.0 25.0 8: 19w0d 9.0 12.0 15.0 8: 22w0d 7.0 9.0 11.0 8: 19w0d 8.0 9.0 11.0
9: 23w0d 22.0 24.0 26.0 9: 20w0d 10.0 13.0 16.0 9: 23w0d 7.0 8.0 9.0 9: 20w0d 8.0 10.0 12.0
10: 24w0d 23.0 25.0 27.0 10: 21w0d 10.0 13.0 16.0 10: 24w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 10: 21w0d 9.0 11.0 13.0
11: 25w0d 25.0 28.0 31.0 11: 22w0d 11.0 14.0 17.0 11: 25w0d 8.0 9.0 10.0 11: 22w0d 10.0 11.0 13.0
12: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 12: 23w0d 11.0 14.0 17.0 12: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 12: 23w0d 10.0 12.0 14.0
13: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 13: 24w0d 12.0 15.0 18.0 13: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 13: 24w0d 11.0 13.0 15.0
14: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 14: 25w0d 12.0 15.0 19.0 14: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 14: 25w0d 12.0 13.0 15.0
15: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 15: 26w0d 13.0 16.0 19.0 15: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 15: 26w0d 12.0 14.0 16.0
16: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 16: 27w0d 13.0 16.0 19.0 16: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 16: 27w0d 13.0 15.0 16.0
17: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 17: 28w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0 17: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 17: 28w0d 13.0 15.0 17.0
18: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 18: 29w0d 14.0 17.0 20.0 18: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 18: 29w0d 14.0 16.0 17.0
19: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 19: 30w0d 15.0 18.0 21.0 19: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 19: 30w0d 14.0 16.0 18.0
20: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 20: 31w0d 15.0 18.0 21.0 20: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 20: 31w0d 15.0 17.0 18.0
21: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 21: 32w0d 15.0 19.0 22.0 21: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 21: 32w0d 15.0 17.0 19.0
22: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 22: 33w0d 16.0 19.0 22.0 22: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 22: 33w0d 16.0 17.0 19.0
23: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 23: 34w0d 16.0 19.0 22.0 23: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 23: 34w0d 16.0 18.0 20.0
24: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 24: 35w0d 16.0 20.0 23.0 24: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 24: 35w0d 16.0 18.0 20.0
25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 36w0d 17.0 20.0 23.0 25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 36w0d 17.0 19.0 20.0
26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 37w0d 17.0 20.0 23.0 26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 37w0d 17.0 19.0 21.0
27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 38w0d 17.0 21.0 24.0 27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 38w0d 17.0 19.0 21.0
28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 39w0d 18.0 21.0 24.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 39w0d 18.0 20.0 21.0
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 40w0d 18.0 21.0 24.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 40w0d 18.0 20.0 22.0
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-145 Q1E-EA0611
21. RAD 22. TCD 23. TIB 24 ULNA
JEAN83 ; Growth table GOLD87 ; Growth table JEAN83 ; Growth table JEAN83 ; Growth table
Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 10%,50%,90% Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 5%,50%,95%
1: 13w0d 6.0 10.0 14.0 1: 15w0d 10.0 14.0 16.0 1: 14w0d 7.0 12.0 17.0 1: 13w0d 5.0 10.0 15.0
2: 14w0d 8.0 13.0 17.0 2: 16w0d 14.0 16.0 17.0 2: 15w0d 9.0 15.0 20.0 2: 14w0d 8.0 13.0 18.0
3: 15w0d 11.0 15.0 20.0 3: 17w0d 16.0 17.0 18.0 3: 16w0d 12.0 17.0 22.0 3: 15w0d 11.0 16.0 21.0
4: 16w0d 13.0 18.0 22.0 4: 18w0d 17.0 18.0 19.0 4: 17w0d 15.0 20.0 25.0 4: 16w0d 13.0 18.0 23.0
5: 17w0d 14.0 20.0 26.0 5: 19w0d 18.0 19.0 22.0 5: 18w0d 17.0 22.0 27.0 5: 17w0d 16.0 21.0 26.0
6: 18w0d 15.0 22.0 29.0 6: 20w0d 18.0 20.0 22.0 6: 19w0d 20.0 25.0 30.0 6: 18w0d 19.0 24.0 29.0
7: 19w0d 20.0 24.0 29.0 7: 21w0d 19.0 22.0 24.0 7: 20w0d 22.0 27.0 33.0 7: 19w0d 21.0 26.0 31.0
8: 20w0d 22.0 27.0 32.0 8: 22w0d 21.0 23.0 24.0 8: 21w0d 25.0 30.0 35.0 8: 20w0d 24.0 29.0 34.0
9: 21w0d 24.0 29.0 33.0 9: 23w0d 22.0 24.0 26.0 9: 22w0d 27.0 32.0 38.0 9: 21w0d 26.0 31.0 36.0
10: 22w0d 27.0 31.0 34.0 10: 24w0d 22.0 25.0 28.0 10: 23w0d 30.0 35.0 40.0 10: 22w0d 28.0 33.0 38.0
11: 23w0d 26.0 32.0 39.0 11: 25w0d 23.0 28.0 29.0 11: 24w0d 32.0 37.0 42.0 11: 23w0d 31.0 36.0 41.0
12: 24w0d 26.0 34.0 42.0 12: 26w0d 25.0 29.0 32.0 12: 25w0d 34.0 40.0 45.0 12: 24w0d 33.0 38.0 43.0
13: 25w0d 31.0 36.0 41.0 13: 27w0d 26.0 30.0 32.0 13: 26w0d 37.0 42.0 47.0 13: 25w0d 35.0 40.0 45.0
14: 26w0d 32.0 37.0 43.0 14: 28w0d 27.0 31.0 34.0 14: 27w0d 39.0 44.0 49.0 14: 26w0d 37.0 42.0 47.0
15: 27w0d 33.0 39.0 45.0 15: 29w0d 29.0 34.0 38.0 15: 28w0d 41.0 46.0 51.0 15: 27w0d 39.0 44.0 49.0
16: 28w0d 33.0 40.0 48.0 16: 30w0d 31.0 35.0 40.0 16: 29w0d 43.0 48.0 53.0 16: 28w0d 41.0 46.0 51.0
17: 29w0d 36.0 42.0 47.0 17: 31w0d 32.0 38.0 43.0 17: 30w0d 45.0 50.0 55.0 17: 29w0d 43.0 48.0 53.0
18: 30w0d 36.0 43.0 49.0 18: 32w0d 33.0 38.0 42.0 18: 31w0d 47.0 52.0 57.0 18: 30w0d 44.0 49.0 54.0
19: 31w0d 38.0 44.0 50.0 19: 33w0d 32.0 40.0 44.0 19: 32w0d 48.0 54.0 59.0 19: 31w0d 46.0 51.0 56.0
20: 32w0d 37.0 45.0 53.0 20: 34w0d 33.0 40.0 44.0 20: 33w0d 50.0 55.0 60.0 20: 32w0d 48.0 53.0 58.0
21: 33w0d 41.0 46.0 51.0 21: 35w0d 31.0 41.0 47.0 21: 34w0d 52.0 57.0 62.0 21: 33w0d 49.0 54.0 59.0
22: 34w0d 40.0 47.0 53.0 22: 36w0d 36.0 43.0 55.0 22: 35w0d 53.0 58.0 64.0 22: 34w0d 51.0 56.0 61.0
23: 35w0d 41.0 48.0 54.0 23: 37w0d 37.0 45.0 55.0 23: 36w0d 55.0 60.0 65.0 23: 35w0d 52.0 57.0 62.0
24: 36w0d 39.0 48.0 57.0 24: 38w0d 40.0 49.0 55.0 24: 37w0d 56.0 61.0 67.0 24: 36w0d 53.0 58.0 63.0
25: 37w0d 45.0 49.0 53.0 25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 38w0d 58.0 63.0 68.0 25: 37w0d 55.0 60.0 65.0
26: 38w0d 45.0 49.0 54.0 26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 39w0d 59.0 64.0 69.0 26: 38w0d 56.0 61.0 66.0
27: 39w0d 45.0 50.0 54.0 27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 40w0d 61.0 66.0 71.0 27: 39w0d 57.0 62.0 67.0
28: 40w0d 46.0 50.0 55.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 40w0d 58.0 63.0 68.0
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-146 Q1E-EA0611
25. CI(BPD/OFD) 26. FL/AC 27. FL/BPD 28. HC/AC
HAD81 ; Ratio table HAD85 ; Ratio table HOHL81 ; Ratio table CAMP77 ; Ratio table
Calculation type ; ratio Calculation type ; ratio Calculation type ; ratio Calculation type ; ratio
Data unit ; None Data unit ; None Data unit ; None Data unit ; None
Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table
1: 14w0d 70.0 78.0 86.0 1: 21w0d 0.2 0.22 0.24 1: 23w0d 0.70 0.78 0.86 1: 13w0d 1.15 1.23 1.31
2: 40w0d 70.0 78.0 86.0 2: 42w0d 0.2 0.22 0.24 2: 40w0d 0.73 0.81 0.89 2: 14w0d 1.15 1.23 1.31
3: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 3: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 3: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 3: 16w0d 1.05 1.22 1.39
4: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 4: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 4: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 4: 18w0d 1.07 1.18 1.29
5: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 5: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 5: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 5: 20w0d 1.10 1.18 1.26
6: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 6: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 6: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 6: 22w0d 1.05 1.15 1.25
7: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 7: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 7: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 7: 24w0d 1.05 1.13 1.21
8: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 8: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 8: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 8: 26w0d 1.04 1.13 1.22
9: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 9: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 9: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 9: 28w0d 1.04 1.13 1.22
10: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 10: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 10: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 10: 30w0d 0.99 1.10 1.21
11: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 11: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 11: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 11: 32w0d 0.97 1.07 1.17
12: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 12: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 12: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 12: 34w0d 0.97 1.04 1.11
13: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 13: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 13: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 13: 36w0d 0.93 1.02 1.11
14: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 14: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 14: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 14: 38w0d 0.91 0.98 1.05
15: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 15: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 15: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 15: 40w0d 0.88 0.97 1.06
16: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 16: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 16: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 16: 42w0d 0.92 0.96 1.00
17: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 17: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 17: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 17: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
18: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 18: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 18: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 18: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
19: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 19: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 19: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 19: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
20: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 20: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 20: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 20: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
21: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 21: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 21: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 21: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
22: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 22: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 22: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 22: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
23: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 23: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 23: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 23: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
24: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 24: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 24: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 24: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
25: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
26: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
27: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00
11-147 Q1E-EA0611
29. LVW/HW 30. Amniotic Fluid Index 31. Estimated Fetal Body Weight 32. Estimated Fetal Body Weight
PRE86 ; Ratio table MOORE90 ; AFI table BRE76 ; EFBW table YARK87 ; EFBW table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; weight Calculation type ; weight
Data unit ; None Data unit ; None Data unit ; g Data unit ; g
Variation ; +/- 2.00SD table Variation ; 5%,50%,95% Variation ; 10%,50%,90% Variation ; 10%,50%,90%
1: 15w0d 0.38 0.56 0.74 1: 16w0d 79.0 121.0 185.0 1: 23w0d 370 550 990 1: 16w0d 132 154 189
2: 16w0d 0.46 0.57 0.68 2: 17w0d 83.0 127.0 194.0 2: 24w0d 420 640 1080 2: 17w0d 173 215 239
3: 17w0d 0.49 0.58 0.67 3: 18w0d 87.0 133.0 202.0 3: 25w0d 490 740 1180 3: 18w0d 214 276 289
4: 18w0d 0.41 0.51 0.61 4: 19w0d 90.0 137.0 207.0 4: 26w0d 570 860 1320 4: 19w0d 223 300 333
5: 19w0d 0.41 0.49 0.57 5: 20w0d 93.0 141.0 212.0 5: 27w0d 660 990 1470 5: 20w0d 232 324 378
6: 20w0d 0.38 0.46 0.54 6: 21w0d 95.0 143.0 214.0 6: 28w0d 770 1150 1660 6: 21w0d 275 432 482
7: 21w0d 0.31 0.42 0.53 7: 22w0d 97.0 145.0 216.0 7: 29w0d 890 1310 1890 7: 22w0d 319 540 586
8: 22w0d 0.29 0.40 0.51 8: 23w0d 98.0 146.0 218.0 8: 30w0d 1030 1460 2100 8: 23w0d 347 598 684
9: 23w0d 0.26 0.34 0.42 9: 24w0d 98.0 147.0 219.0 9: 31w0d 1180 1630 2290 9: 24w0d 376 656 783
10: 24w0d 0.27 0.35 0.43 10: 25w0d 97.0 147.0 221.0 10: 32w0d 1310 1810 2500 10: 25w0d 549 793 916
11: 25w0d 0.29 0.33 0.37 11: 26w0d 97.0 147.0 223.0 11: 33w0d 1480 2010 2690 11: 26w0d 722 931 1049
12: 26w0d 0.24 0.30 0.36 12: 27w0d 95.0 146.0 226.0 12: 34w0d 1670 2220 2880 12: 27w0d 755 1087 1193
13: 27w0d 0.23 0.28 0.34 13: 28w0d 94.0 146.0 228.0 13: 35w0d 1870 2430 3090 13: 28w0d 789 1244 1337
14: 28w0d 0.18 0.31 0.45 14: 29w0d 92.0 145.0 231.0 14: 36w0d 2190 2650 3290 14: 29w0d 900 1395 1509
15: 29w0d 0.22 0.29 0.37 15: 30w0d 90.0 145.0 234.0 15: 37w0d 2310 2870 3470 15: 30w0d 1011 1546 1682
16: 30w0d 0.26 0.30 0.34 16: 31w0d 88.0 144.0 238.0 16: 38w0d 2510 3030 3610 16: 31w0d 1198 1693 1875
17: 31w0d 0.23 0.29 0.36 17: 32w0d 86.0 144.0 242.0 17: 39w0d 2680 3170 3750 17: 32w0d 1385 1840 2068
18: 32w0d 0.26 0.31 0.36 18: 33w0d 83.0 143.0 245.0 18: 40w0d 2750 3280 3870 18: 33w0d 1491 2032 2334
19: 33w0d 0.25 0.31 0.37 19: 34w0d 81.0 142.0 248.0 19: 41w0d 2800 3360 3980 19: 34w0d 1597 2224 2601
20: 34w0d 0.23 0.28 0.33 20: 35w0d 79.0 140.0 249.0 20: 42w0d 2830 3410 4060 20: 35w0d 1703 2472 2716
21: 35w0d 0.26 0.29 0.31 21: 36w0d 77.0 138.0 249.0 21: 43w0d 2840 3420 4100 21: 36w0d 1809 2631 2832
22: 36w0d 0.23 0.28 0.34 22: 37w0d 75.0 135.0 244.0 22: 44w0d 2790 3390 4110 22: 37w0d 2239 2824 3035
23: 37w0d 0.24 0.29 0.34 23: 38w0d 73.0 132.0 239.0 23: 0w0d 0 0 0 23: 38w0d 2669 3017 3239
24: 38w0d 0.22 0.28 0.33 24: 39w0d 72.0 127.0 226.0 24: 0w0d 0 0 0 24: 0w0d 0 0 0
25: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 25: 40w0d 71.0 123.0 214.0 25: 0w0d 0 0 0 25: 0w0d 0 0 0
26: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 26: 41w0d 70.0 116.0 194.0 26: 0w0d 0 0 0 26: 0w0d 0 0 0
27: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 27: 42w0d 69.0 110.0 175.0 27: 0w0d 0 0 0 27: 0w0d 0 0 0
28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 0w0d 0 0 0 28: 0w0d 0 0 0
29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 0w0d 0 0 0 29: 0w0d 0 0 0
30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 0w0d 0 0 0 30: 0w0d 0 0 0
31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 0w0d 0 0 0 31: 0w0d 0 0 0
32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 0w0d 0 0 0 32: 0w0d 0 0 0
33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 0w0d 0 0 0 33: 0w0d 0 0 0
34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 0w0d 0 0 0 34: 0w0d 0 0 0
35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 0w0d 0 0 0 35: 0w0d 0 0 0
36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 0w0d 0 0 0 36: 0w0d 0 0 0
37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 0w0d 0 0 0 37: 0w0d 0 0 0
38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 0w0d 0 0 0 38: 0w0d 0 0 0
39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 0w0d 0 0 0 39: 0w0d 0 0 0
40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 0w0d 0 0 0 40: 0w0d 0 0 0
41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 0w0d 0 0 0 41: 0w0d 0 0 0
42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 0w0d 0 0 0 42: 0w0d 0 0 0
43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0w0d 0 0 0 43: 0w0d 0 0 0
44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0w0d 0 0 0 44: 0w0d 0 0 0
45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0w0d 0 0 0 45: 0w0d 0 0 0
46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0w0d 0 0 0 46: 0w0d 0 0 0
47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0w0d 0 0 0 47: 0w0d 0 0 0
48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0w0d 0 0 0 48: 0w0d 0 0 0
49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0w0d 0 0 0 49: 0w0d 0 0 0
50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0 0 0 50: 0w0d 0 0 0
51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0 0 0 51: 0w0d 0 0 0
52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0 0 0 52: 0w0d 0 0 0
53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0 0 0 53: 0w0d 0 0 0
54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0 0 0 54: 0w0d 0 0 0
55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0 0 0 55: 0w0d 0 0 0
56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0 0 0 56: 0w0d 0 0 0
57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0 0 0 57: 0w0d 0 0 0
58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0
59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0
60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0
11-148 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-2 Obstetric Table Data (1/2) for Europe
33. BPD 34. OFD 35. CRL 36. FL
HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ.
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 20.0 11w2d 5d 1: 34.0 13w4d 8d 1: 6.0 6w0d 6d 1: 11.0 13w3d 7d
2: 22.0 12w0d 6d 2: 36.0 14w0d 8d 2: 7.0 6w1d 7d 2: 12.0 13w6d 7d
3: 26.0 12w6d 6d 3: 38.0 14w3d 8d 3: 8.0 6w3d 6d 3: 15.0 14w3d 7d
4: 29.0 13w2d 7d 4: 40.0 15w0d 8d 4: 9.0 6w5d 7d 4: 16.0 14w6d 9d
5: 31.0 13w6d 8d 5: 42.0 15w4d 8d 5: 10.0 6w6d 7d 5: 18.0 15w3d 7d
6: 32.0 14w1d 8d 6: 44.0 16w0d 8d 6: 11.0 7w1d 6d 6: 20.0 15w6d 8d
7: 34.0 14w6d 9d 7: 46.0 16w4d 8d 7: 12.0 7w2d 7d 7: 21.0 16w3d 8d
8: 35.0 15w1d 8d 8: 48.0 17w0d 8d 8: 13.0 7w3d 7d 8: 23.0 16w6d 8d
9: 37.0 15w6d 8d 9: 50.0 17w4d 9d 9: 15.0 7w6d 7d 9: 25.0 17w3d 8d
10: 38.0 16w1d 9d 10: 52.0 18w2d 9d 10: 16.0 8w1d 7d 10: 26.0 17w6d 8d
11: 40.0 16w6d 8d 11: 54.0 18w4d 9d 11: 17.0 8w2d 7d 11: 27.0 18w3d 9d
12: 41.0 17w1d 9d 12: 56.0 19w2d 9d 12: 18.0 8w3d 7d 12: 28.0 18w6d 9d
13: 43.0 17w5d 9d 13: 58.0 19w6d 9d 13: 20.0 8w5d 7d 13: 30.0 19w3d 9d
14: 44.0 18w0d 9d 14: 60.0 20w0d 10d 14: 22.0 9w0d 8d 14: 31.0 19w6d 9d
15: 46.0 18w5d 9d 15: 62.0 20w4d 10d 15: 24.0 9w2d 8d 15: 33.0 20w3d 9d
16: 47.0 19w0d 10d 16: 64.0 21w0d 10d 16: 26.0 9w4d 8d 16: 34.0 20w6d 9d
17: 49.0 19w4d 10d 17: 66.0 21w3d 10d 17: 28.0 9w6d 8d 17: 36.0 21w3d 10d
18: 51.0 20w2d 10d 18: 68.0 21w6d 10d 18: 30.0 10w1d 8d 18: 38.0 21w6d 10d
19: 53.0 20w6d 11d 19: 70.0 22w3d 10d 19: 32.0 10w2d 8d 19: 39.0 22w3d 10d
20: 54.0 21w3d 10d 20: 72.0 22w6d 12d 20: 34.0 10w4d 8d 20: 40.0 22w6d 10d
21: 56.0 21w6d 9d 21: 74.0 23w2d 12d 21: 36.0 10w5d 8d 21: 42.0 23w3d 11d
22: 57.0 22w1d 9d 22: 76.0 23w6d 12d 22: 38.0 11w0d 8d 22: 43.0 23w6d 11d
23: 59.0 22w6d 10d 23: 78.0 24w0d 14d 23: 40.0 11w1d 8d 23: 44.0 24w3d 11d
24: 60.0 23w1d 9d 24: 80.0 24w4d 14d 24: 42.0 11w2d 8d 24: 45.0 24w6d 11d
25: 62.0 23w6d 10d 25: 82.0 25w0d 14d 25: 44.0 11w3d 8d 25: 47.0 25w3d 12d
26: 63.0 24w1d 9d 26: 84.0 25w4d 14d 26: 46.0 11w5d 8d 26: 48.0 25w6d 12d
27: 65.0 24w6d 10d 27: 86.0 26w0d 14d 27: 48.0 11w6d 9d 27: 49.0 26w3d 13d
28: 66.0 25w0d 11d 28: 88.0 26w6d 14d 28: 50.0 12w0d 9d 28: 50.0 26w6d 13d
29: 68.0 25w5d 10d 29: 90.0 27w2d 16d 29: 52.0 12w1d 9d 29: 51.0 27w3d 14d
30: 69.0 26w0d 10d 30: 92.0 27w6d 16d 30: 54.0 12w2d 9d 30: 52.0 27w6d 14d
31: 71.0 26w4d 12d 31: 94.0 28w4d 18d 31: 56.0 12w3d 9d 31: 53.0 28w3d 15d
32: 72.0 27w0d 11d 32: 96.0 29w2d 18d 32: 58.0 12w4d 9d 32: 54.0 28w6d 15d
33: 74.0 27w5d 12d 33: 98.0 29w6d 20d 33: 60.0 12w5d 9d 33: 56.0 29w3d 15d
34: 75.0 28w0d 12d 34: 100.0 30w4d 20d 34: 63.0 12w6d 10d 34: 57.0 29w6d 15d
35: 77.0 28w5d 13d 35: 102.0 31w2d 22d 35: 66.0 13w1d 10d 35: 58.0 30w3d 15d
36: 78.0 29w1d 15d 36: 104.0 32w0d 22d 36: 70.0 13w2d 10d 36: 59.0 30w6d 15d
37: 79.0 29w4d 16d 37: 106.0 33w0d 20d 37: 73.0 13w4d 10d 37: 60.0 31w3d 16d
38: 81.0 30w2d 15d 38: 108.0 34w0d 20d 38: 76.0 13w5d 10d 38: 61.0 31w6d 16d
39: 82.0 30w6d 15d 39: 110.0 35w0d 20d 39: 80.0 14w0d 11d 39: 62.0 32w3d 17d
40: 83.0 31w1d 17d 40: 112.0 36w3d 20d 40: 83.0 14w1d 11d 40: 63.0 32w6d 17d
41: 84.0 31w5d 17d 41: 114.0 38w0d 20d 41: 86.0 14w3d 12d 41: 65.0 33w3d 17d
42: 85.0 32w1d 16d 42: 115.0 39w0d 20d 42: 90.0 14w5d 12d 42: 66.0 33w6d 17d
43: 86.0 32w4d 17d 43: 116.0 40w0d 20d 43: 93.0 15w0d 12d 43: 67.0 34w3d 18d
44: 87.0 33w1d 20d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 96.0 15w2d 12d 44: 68.0 34w6d 18d
45: 88.0 33w4d 19d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 100.0 15w4d 12d 45: 69.0 35w3d 18d
46: 89.0 34w1d 19d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 103.0 15w6d 13d 46: 70.0 35w6d 18d
47: 90.0 34w4d 19d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 106.0 16w1d 13d 47: 71.0 36w3d 19d
48: 91.0 35w0d 23d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 110.0 16w3d 14d 48: 72.0 37w6d 19d
49: 92.0 35w5d 24d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 113.0 16w6d 14d 49: 73.0 38w3d 20d
50: 93.0 36w4d 21d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 116.0 17w1d 14d 50: 74.0 38w6d 20d
51: 94.0 37w2d 19d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 120.0 17w3d 14d 51: 75.0 39w2d 20d
52: 95.0 38w2d 18d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 123.0 17w6d 14d 52: 76.0 39w6d 20d
53: 97.0 38w6d 20d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 126.0 18w1d 15d 53: 77.0 40w3d 20d
54: 98.0 39w1d 19d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 130.0 18w5d 15d 54: 78.0 40w6d 20d
55: 99.0 39w2d 18d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 133.0 19w0d 15d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 100.0 39w3d 19d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 136.0 19w3d 16d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 102.0 39w5d 19d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 140.0 19w6d 16d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 105.0 40w1d 14d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 143.0 20w2d 16d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 146.0 20w5d 16d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 150.0 21w2d 16d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-149 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-2 Obstetric Table Data (2/2) for Europe
37. HC 38. TTD
HANS85 ; Age table HANS85 ; Age table
Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Data unit ; mm Data unit ; mm
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation; 90% confidence interval
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 110.0 14w0d 7d 1: 27.0 14w3d 8d
2: 120.0 15w0d 8d 2: 28.0 14w6d 8d
3: 130.0 15w6d 8d 3: 30.0 15w3d 8d
4: 140.0 16w6d 9d 4: 32.0 15w6d 8d
5: 150.0 17w3d 9d 5: 34.0 16w3d 9d
6: 160.0 18w3d 9d 6: 35.0 16w6d 9d
7: 170.0 19w3d 10d 7: 37.0 17w3d 9d
8: 180.0 20w0d 10d 8: 38.0 17w6d 9d
9: 190.0 20w6d 10d 9: 40.0 18w3d 10d
10: 200.0 21w3d 10d 10: 42.0 18w6d 10d
11: 210.0 22w3d 10d 11: 43.0 19w3d 10d
12: 220.0 23w0d 10d 12: 45.0 19w6d 10d
13: 230.0 23w6d 10d 13: 46.0 20w3d 11d
14: 240.0 24w6d 10d 14: 48.0 20w6d 11d
15: 250.0 25w6d 12d 15: 50.0 21w3d 11d
16: 260.0 26w3d 12d 16: 51.0 21w6d 11d
17: 270.0 27w3d 12d 17: 53.0 22w3d 12d
18: 280.0 28w3d 16d 18: 54.0 22w6d 12d
19: 290.0 29w3d 16d 19: 56.0 23w3d 13d
20: 300.0 30w3d 20d 20: 58.0 23w6d 13d
21: 310.0 31w4d 20d 21: 59.0 24w3d 14d
22: 320.0 32w6d 20d 22: 61.0 24w6d 14d
23: 330.0 33w3d 24d 23: 63.0 25w3d 14d
24: 340.0 36w3d 24d 24: 64.0 25w6d 14d
25: 350.0 40w0d 24d 25: 65.0 26w3d 15d
26: 0.0 0w0d 0d 26: 67.0 26w6d 15d
27: 0.0 0w0d 0d 27: 68.0 27w3d 17d
28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 70.0 27w6d 17d
29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 71.0 28w3d 18d
30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 72.0 28w6d 18d
31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 74.0 29w3d 19d
32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 75.0 29w6d 19d
33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 77.0 30w3d 20d
34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 78.0 30w6d 20d
35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 80.0 31w3d 22d
36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 81.0 31w6d 22d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 83.0 32w3d 23d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 84.0 32w6d 23d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 86.0 33w3d 24d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 87.0 33w6d 24d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 88.0 34w3d 25d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 90.0 34w6d 25d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 91.0 35w3d 25d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 93.0 35w6d 25d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 94.0 36w3d 26d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 95.0 36w6d 26d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 97.0 37w3d 26d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 98.0 37w6d 26d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 99.0 38w3d 27d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 100.0 38w6d 27d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 101.0 39w2d 27d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 103.0 39w6d 27d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 104.0 40w3d 27d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 105.0 40w6d 27d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-5 No. 37 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-5 No. 38
11-150 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-3 Obstetric Table Data (1/7) for Japan
39. BPD 40. BPD 41. BPD 42. BPD
TODAI96 ; Age table TODAI96; Growth table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U. ; Growth table
Variation; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table
No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 13.0 10w1d 4d 1: 10w3d 10.5 14.3 18.1 1: 13.3 10w0d 0d 1: 10w0d 11.4 13.3 15.2
2: 15.0 10w5d 4d 2: 11w3d 13.7 17.6 21.5 2: 15.5 10w4d 0d 2: 10w4d 13.6 15.5 17.4
3: 17.0 11w2d 4d 3: 12w3d 17.0 21.0 25.0 3: 17.7 11w1d 0d 3: 11w1d 15.7 17.7 19.7
4: 19.0 11w6d 4d 4: 13w3d 20.4 24.4 28.5 4: 19.9 11w5d 0d 4: 11w5d 17.8 19.9 22.0
5: 21.0 12w3d 4d 5: 14w3d 23.7 27.8 32.0 5: 22.0 12w2d 0d 5: 12w2d 19.9 22.0 24.1
6: 23.0 13w1d 5d 6: 15w3d 27.0 31.2 35.5 6: 24.1 12w6d 0d 6: 12w6d 21.9 24.1 26.3
7: 25.0 13w5d 5d 7: 16w3d 30.3 34.6 39.0 7: 26.2 13w3d 0d 7: 13w3d 24.0 26.2 28.4
8: 27.0 14w2d 5d 8: 17w3d 33.5 38.0 42.4 8: 28.2 14w0d 0d 8: 14w0d 25.9 28.2 30.5
9: 29.0 14w6d 5d 9: 18w3d 36.8 41.3 45.8 9: 30.3 14w4d 0d 9: 14w4d 27.9 30.3 32.7
10: 31.0 15w3d 5d 10: 19w3d 40.0 44.6 49.2 10: 32.3 15w1d 0d 10: 15w1d 29.9 32.3 34.7
11: 33.0 16w0d 5d 11: 20w3d 43.2 47.9 52.6 11: 34.2 15w5d 0d 11: 15w5d 31.7 34.2 36.7
12: 35.0 16w4d 5d 12: 21w3d 46.3 51.1 55.9 12: 36.2 16w2d 0d 12: 16w2d 33.7 36.2 38.7
13: 37.0 17w1d 6d 13: 22w3d 49.3 54.2 59.1 13: 38.1 16w6d 0d 13: 16w6d 35.5 38.1 40.7
14: 39.0 17w6d 6d 14: 23w3d 52.3 57.3 62.3 14: 40.1 17w3d 0d 14: 17w3d 37.5 40.1 42.7
15: 41.0 18w3d 6d 15: 24w3d 55.2 60.3 65.3 15: 42.0 18w0d 0d 15: 18w0d 39.3 42.0 44.7
16: 43.0 19w0d 6d 16: 25w3d 58.0 63.2 68.4 16: 43.9 18w4d 0d 16: 18w4d 41.2 43.9 46.6
17: 45.0 19w4d 6d 17: 26w3d 60.8 66.0 71.3 17: 45.7 19w1d 0d 17: 19w1d 42.9 45.7 48.5
18: 47.0 20w2d 7d 18: 27w3d 63.4 68.7 74.1 18: 47.6 19w5d 0d 18: 19w5d 44.8 47.6 50.4
19: 49.0 20w6d 7d 19: 28w3d 65.9 71.4 76.8 19: 49.4 20w2d 0d 19: 20w2d 46.5 49.4 52.3
20: 51.0 21w3d 7d 20: 29w3d 68.3 73.9 79.4 20: 51.2 20w6d 0d 20: 20w6d 48.3 51.2 54.1
21: 53.0 22w1d 8d 21: 30w3d 70.6 76.3 81.9 21: 53.0 21w3d 0d 21: 21w3d 50.0 53.0 56.0
22: 55.0 22w5d 8d 22: 31w3d 72.8 78.5 84.2 22: 54.8 22w0d 0d 22: 22w0d 51.8 54.8 57.8
23: 57.0 23w3d 8d 23: 32w3d 74.8 80.6 86.5 23: 56.6 22w4d 0d 23: 22w4d 53.5 56.6 59.7
24: 59.0 24w1d 8d 24: 33w3d 76.7 82.6 88.5 24: 58.3 23w1d 0d 24: 23w1d 55.2 58.3 61.4
25: 61.0 24w5d 9d 25: 34w3d 78.5 84.5 90.4 25: 60.0 23w5d 0d 25: 23w5d 56.9 60.0 63.1
26: 63.0 25w3d 9d 26: 35w3d 80.1 86.1 92.2 26: 61.7 24w2d 0d 26: 24w2d 58.5 61.7 64.9
27: 65.0 26w1d 9d 27: 36w3d 81.5 87.6 93.8 27: 63.4 24w6d 0d 27: 24w6d 60.2 63.4 66.6
28: 67.0 26w6d 10d 28: 37w3d 82.7 89.0 95.2 28: 65.1 25w3d 0d 28: 25w3d 61.8 65.1 68.4
29: 69.0 27w4d 10d 29: 38w3d 83.8 90.1 96.5 29: 66.7 26w0d 0d 29: 26w0d 63.4 66.7 70.0
30: 71.0 28w3d 10d 30: 39w3d 84.6 91.1 97.5 30: 68.4 26w4d 0d 30: 26w4d 65.1 68.4 71.7
31: 73.0 29w1d 11d 31: 40w3d 85.3 91.8 98.4 31: 69.9 27w1d 0d 31: 27w1d 66.5 69.9 73.3
32: 75.0 30w0d 11d 32: 41w3d 85.8 92.4 99.0 32: 71.5 27w5d 0d 32: 27w5d 68.1 71.5 74.9
33: 77.0 30w6d 12d 33: 42w3d 86.0 92.8 99.5 33: 73.0 28w2d 0d 33: 28w2d 69.6 73.0 76.4
34: 79.0 31w5d 12d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 74.5 28w6d 0d 34: 28w6d 71.0 74.5 78.0
35: 81.0 32w5d 12d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 76.0 29w3d 0d 35: 29w3d 72.5 76.0 79.5
36: 83.0 33w5d 13d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 77.4 30w0d 0d 36: 30w0d 73.9 77.4 80.9
37: 85.0 34w6d 13d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 78.8 30w4d 0d 37: 30w4d 75.2 78.8 82.4
38: 87.0 36w0d 14d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 80.2 31w1d 0d 38: 31w1d 76.6 80.2 83.8
39: 89.0 37w4d 14d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 81.5 31w5d 0d 39: 31w5d 77.9 81.5 85.1
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 82.7 32w2d 0d 40: 32w2d 79.1 82.7 86.3
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 84.0 32w6d 0d 41: 32w6d 80.3 84.0 87.7
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 85.1 33w3d 0d 42: 33w3d 81.4 85.1 88.8
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 86.2 34w0d 0d 43: 34w0d 82.5 86.2 89.9
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 87.3 34w4d 0d 44: 34w4d 83.6 87.3 91.0
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 88.3 35w1d 0d 45: 35w1d 84.5 88.3 92.1
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 89.2 35w5d 0d 46: 35w5d 85.4 89.2 93.0
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 90.0 36w2d 0d 47: 36w2d 86.2 90.0 93.8
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 90.8 36w6d 0d 48: 36w6d 87.0 90.8 94.6
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 91.5 37w3d 0d 49: 37w3d 87.7 91.5 95.3
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 92.1 38w0d 0d 50: 38w0d 88.3 92.1 95.9
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 92.7 38w4d 0d 51: 38w4d 88.8 92.7 96.6
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 93.1 39w1d 0d 52: 39w1d 89.2 93.1 97.0
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 93.5 39w5d 0d 53: 39w5d 89.6 93.5 97.4
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 93.6 40w0d 0d 54: 40w0d 89.7 93.6 97.5
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0
11-151 Q1E-EA0611
43. BPD 44. AC 45. AC 46. FL
H1 ; Age table TODAI96; Growth table TODAI96; Age table TODAI96 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; +/- 1.00SD table
1: 20.0 11w4d 6d 1: 16w3d 93.0 109.0 125.0 1: 100.0 15w3d 8d 1: 20.0 16w1d 6d
2: 22.0 12w2d 6d 2: 17w3d 103.0 120.0 136.0 2: 105.0 16w0d 8d 2: 22.0 16w6d 6d
3: 24.0 13w0d 6d 3: 18w3d 112.0 130.0 147.0 3: 110.0 16w4d 8d 3: 24.0 17w3d 7d
4: 26.0 13w5d 7d 4: 19w3d 122.0 140.0 158.0 4: 115.0 17w0d 8d 4: 26.0 18w1d 7d
5: 28.0 14w3d 7d 5: 20w3d 131.0 151.0 169.0 5: 120.0 17w4d 9d 5: 28.0 18w6d 7d
6: 30.0 15w0d 7d 6: 21w3d 140.0 161.0 180.0 6: 125.0 18w0d 9d 6: 30.0 19w4d 8d
7: 32.0 15w5d 8d 7: 22w3d 150.0 171.0 191.0 7: 130.0 18w4d 9d 7: 32.0 20w2d 8d
8: 34.0 16w2d 8d 8: 23w3d 159.0 181.0 202.0 8: 135.0 19w0d 9d 8: 34.0 21w1d 8d
9: 36.0 16w6d 8d 9: 24w3d 168.0 191.0 212.0 9: 140.0 19w4d 9d 9: 36.0 21w6d 8d
10: 38.0 17w4d 9d 10: 25w3d 177.0 201.0 223.0 10: 145.0 20w0d 9d 10: 38.0 22w5d 9d
11: 40.0 18w1d 9d 11: 26w3d 186.0 210.0 233.0 11: 150.0 20w3d 10d 11: 40.0 23w3d 9d
12: 42.0 18w5d 10d 12: 27w3d 195.0 220.0 244.0 12: 155.0 21w0d 10d 12: 42.0 24w3d 9d
13: 44.0 19w2d 10d 13: 28w3d 203.0 229.0 254.0 13: 160.0 21w3d 10d 13: 44.0 25w3d 9d
14: 46.0 19w6d 10d 14: 29w3d 211.0 238.0 264.0 14: 165.0 22w0d 10d 14: 46.0 26w2d 10d
15: 48.0 20w3d 11d 15: 30w3d 220.0 247.0 273.0 15: 170.0 22w3d 10d 15: 48.0 27w2d 10d
16: 50.0 21w1d 11d 16: 31w3d 228.0 256.0 283.0 16: 175.0 22w6d 10d 16: 50.0 28w2d 10d
17: 52.0 21w5d 11d 17: 32w3d 235.0 265.0 292.0 17: 180.0 23w3d 11d 17: 52.0 29w2d 11d
18: 54.0 22w2d 12d 18: 33w3d 243.0 273.0 301.0 18: 185.0 23w6d 11d 18: 54.0 30w2d 11d
19: 56.0 22w6d 12d 19: 34w3d 250.0 281.0 310.0 19: 190.0 24w3d 11d 19: 56.0 31w2d 11d
20: 58.0 23w4d 12d 20: 35w3d 257.0 289.0 319.0 20: 195.0 24w6d 11d 20: 58.0 32w3d 11d
21: 60.0 24w1d 13d 21: 36w3d 264.0 297.0 327.0 21: 200.0 25w3d 11d 21: 60.0 33w3d 12d
22: 62.0 24w6d 13d 22: 37w3d 270.0 304.0 335.0 22: 205.0 25w6d 11d 22: 62.0 34w4d 12d
23: 64.0 25w4d 14d 23: 38w3d 276.0 311.0 343.0 23: 210.0 26w3d 12d 23: 64.0 35w5d 12d
24: 66.0 26w2d 14d 24: 39w3d 282.0 318.0 350.0 24: 215.0 27w0d 12d 24: 66.0 37w0d 12d
25: 68.0 27w0d 14d 25: 40w3d 288.0 324.0 357.0 25: 220.0 27w3d 12d 25: 68.0 38w1d 13d
26: 70.0 27w5d 15d 26: 41w3d 293.0 330.0 364.0 26: 225.0 28w0d 12d 26: 70.0 39w3d 13d
27: 72.0 28w4d 15d 27: 42w3d 297.0 336.0 370.0 27: 230.0 28w4d 12d 27: 0.0 0w0d 0d
28: 74.0 29w2d 15d 28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 235.0 29w0d 12d 28: 0.0 0w0d 0d
29: 76.0 30w1d 16d 29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 240.0 29w4d 13d 29: 0.0 0w0d 0d
30: 78.0 31w0d 16d 30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 245.0 30w1d 13d 30: 0.0 0w0d 0d
31: 80.0 32w0d 16d 31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 250.0 30w5d 13d 31: 0.0 0w0d 0d
32: 82.0 32w6d 17d 32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 255.0 31w2d 13d 32: 0.0 0w0d 0d
33: 84.0 33w6d 17d 33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 260.0 31w6d 13d 33: 0.0 0w0d 0d
34: 86.0 34w6d 17d 34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 265.0 32w3d 13d 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d
35: 88.0 36w0d 18d 35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 270.0 33w1d 13d 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d
36: 90.0 37w1d 18d 36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 275.0 33w5d 14d 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 280.0 34w2d 14d 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 285.0 35w0d 14d 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 290.0 35w4d 14d 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 295.0 36w2d 14d 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 300.0 36w6d 14d 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 305.0 37w5d 14d 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 310.0 38w2d 15d 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 315.0 39w0d 15d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 320.0 39w6d 15d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 325.0 40w4d 15d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 330.0 41w2d 15d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-152 Q1E-EA0611
47. FL 48. FL 49. FL 50. FL
TODAI96; Growth table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U.; Growth table H1 ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; circ. Calculation type ; distance
Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; 90% confidence interval
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. MEAS. GA ERR
1: 16w3d 17.1 21.4 25.8 1: 9.4 13w0d 0d 1: 13w0d 7.3 9.4 11.5 1: 20.0 16w6d 8d
2: 17w3d 19.6 24.0 28.4 2: 11.2 13w4d 0d 2: 13w4d 9.1 11.2 13.3 2: 21.0 17w1d 8d
3: 18w3d 22.1 26.5 31.0 3: 13.0 14w1d 0d 3: 14w1d 10.8 13.0 15.2 3: 22.0 17w3d 8d
4: 19w3d 24.6 29.1 33.6 4: 14.8 14w5d 0d 4: 14w5d 12.6 14.8 17.0 4: 23.0 17w5d 9d
5: 20w3d 27.1 31.6 36.2 5: 16.6 15w2d 0d 5: 15w2d 14.4 16.6 18.8 5: 24.0 18w0d 9d
6: 21w3d 29.5 34.1 38.8 6: 18.3 15w6d 0d 6: 15w6d 16.1 18.3 20.5 6: 25.0 18w3d 9d
7: 22w3d 31.9 36.6 41.3 7: 20.1 16w3d 0d 7: 16w3d 17.8 20.1 22.4 7: 26.0 18w5d 9d
8: 23w3d 34.3 39.1 43.8 8: 21.8 17w0d 0d 8: 17w0d 19.5 21.8 24.1 8: 27.0 19w0d 10d
9: 24w3d 36.7 41.5 46.3 9: 23.4 17w4d 0d 9: 17w4d 21.1 23.4 25.7 9: 28.0 19w3d 10d
10: 25w3d 39.0 43.9 48.7 10: 25.1 18w1d 0d 10: 18w1d 22.8 25.1 27.4 10: 29.0 19w5d 10d
11: 26w3d 41.3 46.2 51.1 11: 26.7 18w5d 0d 11: 18w5d 24.4 26.7 29.0 11: 30.0 20w0d 10d
12: 27w3d 43.5 48.4 53.4 12: 28.3 19w2d 0d 12: 19w2d 25.9 28.3 30.7 12: 31.0 20w3d 10d
13: 28w3d 45.6 50.6 55.7 13: 29.9 19w6d 0d 13: 19w6d 27.5 29.9 32.3 13: 32.0 20w5d 11d
14: 29w3d 47.7 52.8 57.9 14: 31.5 20w3d 0d 14: 20w3d 29.1 31.5 33.9 14: 33.0 21w1d 11d
15: 30w3d 49.7 54.8 60.0 15: 33.0 21w0d 0d 15: 21w0d 30.6 33.0 35.4 15: 34.0 21w3d 11d
16: 31w3d 51.6 56.8 62.0 16: 34.6 21w4d 0d 16: 21w4d 32.1 34.6 37.1 16: 35.0 21w6d 11d
17: 32w3d 53.5 58.7 64.0 17: 36.1 22w1d 0d 17: 22w1d 33.6 36.1 38.6 17: 36.0 22w2d 11d
18: 33w3d 55.2 60.5 65.8 18: 37.5 22w5d 0d 18: 22w5d 35.0 37.5 40.0 18: 37.0 22w4d 11d
19: 34w3d 56.9 62.2 67.6 19: 39.0 23w2d 0d 19: 23w2d 36.5 39.0 41.5 19: 38.0 23w0d 12d
20: 35w3d 58.4 63.8 69.2 20: 40.4 23w6d 0d 20: 23w6d 37.9 40.4 42.9 20: 39.0 23w3d 12d
21: 36w3d 59.9 65.3 70.8 21: 41.8 24w3d 0d 21: 24w3d 39.2 41.8 44.4 21: 40.0 23w6d 12d
22: 37w3d 61.2 66.7 72.2 22: 43.2 25w0d 0d 22: 25w0d 40.6 43.2 45.8 22: 41.0 24w2d 12d
23: 38w3d 62.4 68.0 73.6 23: 44.5 25w4d 0d 23: 25w4d 41.9 44.5 47.1 23: 42.0 24w5d 13d
24: 39w3d 63.5 69.1 74.7 24: 45.9 26w1d 0d 24: 26w1d 43.3 45.9 48.5 24: 43.0 25w0d 13d
25: 40w3d 64.4 70.1 75.8 25: 47.2 26w5d 0d 25: 26w5d 44.5 47.2 49.9 25: 44.0 25w3d 13d
26: 41w3d 65.3 71.0 76.7 26: 48.5 27w2d 0d 26: 27w2d 45.8 48.5 51.2 26: 45.0 25w6d 13d
27: 42w3d 65.9 71.7 77.5 27: 49.7 27w6d 0d 27: 27w6d 47.0 49.7 52.4 27: 46.0 26w3d 14d
28: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 28: 51.0 28w3d 0d 28: 28w3d 48.3 51.0 53.7 28: 47.0 26w6d 14d
29: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 29: 52.2 29w0d 0d 29: 29w0d 49.5 52.2 54.9 29: 48.0 27w2d 14d
30: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 30: 53.4 29w4d 0d 30: 29w4d 50.6 53.4 56.2 30: 49.0 27w5d 14d
31: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 31: 54.6 30w1d 0d 31: 30w1d 51.8 54.6 57.4 31: 50.0 28w1d 14d
32: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 32: 55.7 30w5d 0d 32: 30w5d 52.9 55.7 58.5 32: 51.0 28w5d 15d
33: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 33: 56.9 31w2d 0d 33: 31w2d 54.1 56.9 59.7 33: 52.0 29w1d 15d
34: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 34: 58.0 31w6d 0d 34: 31w6d 55.1 58.0 60.9 34: 53.0 29w4d 15d
35: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 35: 59.0 32w3d 0d 35: 32w3d 56.1 59.0 61.9 35: 54.0 30w1d 15d
36: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 36: 60.1 33w0d 0d 36: 33w0d 57.2 60.1 63.0 36: 55.0 30w4d 16d
37: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 37: 61.1 33w4d 0d 37: 33w4d 58.2 61.1 64.0 37: 56.0 31w1d 16d
38: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 38: 62.1 34w1d 0d 38: 34w1d 59.2 62.1 65.0 38: 57.0 31w4d 16d
39: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 39: 63.1 34w5d 0d 39: 34w5d 60.1 63.1 66.1 39: 58.0 32w1d 16d
40: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 40: 64.1 35w2d 0d 40: 35w2d 61.1 64.1 67.1 40: 59.0 32w4d 16d
41: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 41: 65.0 35w6d 0d 41: 35w6d 62.0 65.0 68.0 41: 60.0 33w1d 17d
42: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 42: 66.0 36w3d 0d 42: 36w3d 63.0 66.0 69.0 42: 61.0 33w4d 17d
43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 66.9 37w0d 0d 43: 37w0d 63.8 66.9 70.0 43: 62.0 34w1d 17d
44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 67.7 37w4d 0d 44: 37w4d 64.6 67.7 70.8 44: 63.0 34w5d 17d
45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 68.6 38w1d 0d 45: 38w1d 65.5 68.6 71.7 45: 64.0 35w2d 17d
46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 69.4 38w5d 0d 46: 38w5d 66.3 69.4 72.5 46: 65.0 35w5d 17d
47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 70.2 39w2d 0d 47: 39w2d 67.1 70.2 73.3 47: 66.0 36w2d 18d
48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 71.0 39w6d 0d 48: 39w6d 67.8 71.0 74.2 48: 67.0 36w6d 18d
49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 71.2 40w0d 0d 49: 40w0d 68.0 71.2 74.4 49: 68.0 37w3d 18d
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 69.0 38w0d 18d
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 70.0 38w4d 18d
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-153 Q1E-EA0611
51. CRL 52. CRL 53. CRL 54. GS
TODAI ; Age table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U.; Growth table TODAI ; Age table
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation; 90% confidence interval
1: 15.0 8w0d 7d 1: 8.7 7w0d 0d 1: 7w0d 7.1 8.7 10.3 1: 10.0 4w0d 7d
2: 19.0 9w0d 7d 2: 9.1 7w1d 0d 2: 7w1d 7.4 9.1 10.8 2: 16.0 5w0d 8d
3: 27.0 10w0d 7d 3: 9.6 7w2d 0d 3: 7w2d 7.7 9.6 11.5 3: 22.0 6w0d 11d
4: 36.0 11w0d 7d 4: 10.2 7w3d 0d 4: 7w3d 8.2 10.2 12.2 4: 27.0 7w0d 12d
5: 46.0 12w0d 7d 5: 10.8 7w4d 0d 5: 7w4d 8.6 10.8 13.0 5: 34.0 8w0d 13d
6: 57.0 13w0d 7d 6: 11.5 7w5d 0d 6: 7w5d 9.2 11.5 13.8 6: 41.0 9w0d 14d
7: 72.0 14w0d 8d 7: 12.2 7w6d 0d 7: 7w6d 9.7 12.2 14.7 7: 48.0 10w0d 15d
8: 0.0 0w0d 0d 8: 13.0 8w0d 0d 8: 8w0d 10.4 13.0 15.6 8: 57.0 11w0d 16d
9: 0.0 0w0d 0d 9: 13.9 8w1d 0d 9: 8w1d 11.1 13.9 16.7 9: 0.0 0w0d 0d
10: 0.0 0w0d 0d 10: 14.9 8w2d 0d 10: 8w2d 12.0 14.9 17.8 10: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11: 0.0 0w0d 0d 11: 15.9 8w3d 0d 11: 8w3d 12.8 15.9 19.0 11: 0.0 0w0d 0d
12: 0.0 0w0d 0d 12: 16.9 8w4d 0d 12: 8w4d 13.7 16.9 20.1 12: 0.0 0w0d 0d
13: 0.0 0w0d 0d 13: 18.0 8w5d 0d 13: 8w5d 14.6 18.0 21.4 13: 0.0 0w0d 0d
14: 0.0 0w0d 0d 14: 19.2 8w6d 0d 14: 8w6d 15.7 19.2 22.7 14: 0.0 0w0d 0d
15: 0.0 0w0d 0d 15: 20.4 9w0d 0d 15: 9w0d 16.7 20.4 24.1 15: 0.0 0w0d 0d
16: 0.0 0w0d 0d 16: 21.6 9w1d 0d 16: 9w1d 17.8 21.6 25.4 16: 0.0 0w0d 0d
17: 0.0 0w0d 0d 17: 22.9 9w2d 0d 17: 9w2d 18.9 22.9 26.9 17: 0.0 0w0d 0d
18: 0.0 0w0d 0d 18: 24.3 9w3d 0d 18: 9w3d 20.2 24.3 28.4 18: 0.0 0w0d 0d
19: 0.0 0w0d 0d 19: 25.7 9w4d 0d 19: 9w4d 21.4 25.7 30.0 19: 0.0 0w0d 0d
20: 0.0 0w0d 0d 20: 27.1 9w5d 0d 20: 9w5d 22.6 27.1 31.6 20: 0.0 0w0d 0d
21: 0.0 0w0d 0d 21: 28.5 9w6d 0d 21: 9w6d 23.9 28.5 33.1 21: 0.0 0w0d 0d
22: 0.0 0w0d 0d 22: 30.0 10w0d 0d 22: 10w0d 25.2 30.0 34.8 22: 0.0 0w0d 0d
23: 0.0 0w0d 0d 23: 31.5 10w1d 0d 23: 10w1d 26.6 31.5 36.4 23: 0.0 0w0d 0d
24: 0.0 0w0d 0d 24: 33.1 10w2d 0d 24: 10w2d 28.0 33.1 38.2 24: 0.0 0w0d 0d
25: 0.0 0w0d 0d 25: 34.7 10w3d 0d 25: 10w3d 29.5 34.7 39.9 25: 0.0 0w0d 0d
26: 0.0 0w0d 0d 26: 36.3 10w4d 0d 26: 10w4d 30.9 36.3 41.7 26: 0.0 0w0d 0d
27: 0.0 0w0d 0d 27: 37.9 10w5d 0d 27: 10w5d 32.4 37.9 43.4 27: 0.0 0w0d 0d
28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 39.5 10w6d 0d 28: 10w6d 33.8 39.5 45.2 28: 0.0 0w0d 0d
29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 41.2 11w0d 0d 29: 11w0d 35.4 41.2 47.0 29: 0.0 0w0d 0d
30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 42.8 11w1d 0d 30: 11w1d 36.8 42.8 48.8 30: 0.0 0w0d 0d
31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 44.5 11w2d 0d 31: 11w2d 38.4 44.5 50.6 31: 0.0 0w0d 0d
32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 46.2 11w3d 0d 32: 11w3d 39.9 46.2 52.5 32: 0.0 0w0d 0d
33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 47.9 11w4d 0d 33: 11w4d 41.5 47.9 54.3 33: 0.0 0w0d 0d
34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 49.6 11w5d 0d 34: 11w5d 43.0 49.6 56.2 34: 0.0 0w0d 0d
35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 51.3 11w6d 0d 35: 11w6d 44.6 51.3 58.0 35: 0.0 0w0d 0d
36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 53.0 12w0d 0d 36: 12w0d 46.1 53.0 59.9 36: 0.0 0w0d 0d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 54.8 12w1d 0d 37: 12w1d 47.8 54.8 61.8 37: 0.0 0w0d 0d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 56.5 12w2d 0d 38: 12w2d 49.3 56.5 63.7 38: 0.0 0w0d 0d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 58.2 12w3d 0d 39: 12w3d 50.9 58.2 65.5 39: 0.0 0w0d 0d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 59.9 12w4d 0d 40: 12w4d 52.4 59.9 67.4 40: 0.0 0w0d 0d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 61.6 12w5d 0d 41: 12w5d 54.0 61.6 69.2 41: 0.0 0w0d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 63.2 12w6d 0d 42: 12w6d 55.4 63.2 71.0 42: 0.0 0w0d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 43: 0.0 0w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 44: 0.0 0w0d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 45: 0.0 0w0d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 46: 0.0 0w0d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 47: 0.0 0w0d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 48: 0.0 0w0d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 49: 0.0 0w0d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-154 Q1E-EA0611
55. LV 56. FTA 57. FTA 58. HL
TODAI ; Age table OSAKA U. ; Age table OSAKA U.; Growth table OSAKA U. ; Age table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; distance
Data unit ; mm Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; mm
Variation; 90% confidence interval Variation ; None Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; None
1: 37.0 21w0d 7d 1: 5.60 14w0d 0d 1: 14w0d 4.40 5.60 6.80 1: 10.1 13w0d 0d
2: 40.0 22w0d 9d 2: 6.50 14w4d 0d 2: 14w4d 5.20 6.50 7.80 2: 11.8 13w4d 0d
3: 44.0 23w0d 11d 3: 7.60 15w1d 0d 3: 15w1d 6.20 7.60 9.00 3: 13.5 14w1d 0d
4: 47.0 24w0d 12d 4: 8.70 15w5d 0d 4: 15w5d 7.20 8.70 10.20 4: 15.1 14w5d 0d
5: 50.0 25w0d 14d 5: 9.80 16w2d 0d 5: 16w2d 8.20 9.80 11.40 5: 16.7 15w2d 0d
6: 54.0 26w0d 17d 6: 11.00 16w6d 0d 6: 16w6d 9.20 11.00 12.80 6: 18.3 15w6d 0d
7: 57.0 27w0d 19d 7: 12.20 17w3d 0d 7: 17w3d 10.30 12.20 14.10 7: 19.9 16w3d 0d
8: 59.0 28w0d 21d 8: 13.50 18w0d 0d 8: 18w0d 11.50 13.50 15.50 8: 21.5 17w0d 0d
9: 62.0 29w0d 24d 9: 14.80 18w4d 0d 9: 18w4d 12.60 14.80 17.00 9: 23.0 17w4d 0d
10: 64.0 30w0d 25d 10: 16.20 19w1d 0d 10: 19w1d 13.90 16.20 18.50 10: 24.5 18w1d 0d
11: 67.0 31w0d 28d 11: 17.60 19w5d 0d 11: 19w5d 15.10 17.60 20.10 11: 25.9 18w5d 0d
12: 69.0 32w0d 31d 12: 19.10 20w2d 0d 12: 20w2d 16.50 19.10 21.70 12: 27.4 19w2d 0d
13: 71.0 33w0d 34d 13: 20.60 20w6d 0d 13: 20w6d 17.80 20.60 23.40 13: 28.8 19w6d 0d
14: 73.0 34w0d 35d 14: 22.20 21w3d 0d 14: 21w3d 19.30 22.20 25.10 14: 30.2 20w3d 0d
15: 75.0 35w0d 38d 15: 23.80 22w0d 0d 15: 22w0d 20.70 23.80 26.90 15: 31.5 21w0d 0d
16: 77.0 36w0d 40d 16: 25.50 22w4d 0d 16: 22w4d 22.20 25.50 28.80 16: 32.9 21w4d 0d
17: 78.0 37w0d 42d 17: 27.20 23w1d 0d 17: 23w1d 23.80 27.20 30.60 17: 34.2 22w1d 0d
18: 79.0 38w0d 44d 18: 29.00 23w5d 0d 18: 23w5d 25.40 29.00 32.60 18: 35.4 22w5d 0d
19: 80.0 39w0d 46d 19: 30.80 24w2d 0d 19: 24w2d 27.00 30.80 34.60 19: 36.7 23w2d 0d
20: 81.0 40w0d 48d 20: 32.60 24w6d 0d 20: 24w6d 28.60 32.60 36.60 20: 37.9 23w6d 0d
21: 0.0 0w0d 0d 21: 34.50 25w3d 0d 21: 25w3d 30.30 34.50 38.70 21: 39.1 24w3d 0d
22: 0.0 0w0d 0d 22: 36.50 26w0d 0d 22: 26w0d 32.10 36.50 40.90 22: 40.3 25w0d 0d
23: 0.0 0w0d 0d 23: 38.40 26w4d 0d 23: 26w4d 33.80 38.40 43.00 23: 41.4 25w4d 0d
24: 0.0 0w0d 0d 24: 40.40 27w1d 0d 24: 27w1d 35.60 40.40 45.20 24: 42.6 26w1d 0d
25: 0.0 0w0d 0d 25: 42.40 27w5d 0d 25: 27w5d 37.40 42.40 47.40 25: 43.7 26w5d 0d
26: 0.0 0w0d 0d 26: 44.50 28w2d 0d 26: 28w2d 39.30 44.50 49.70 26: 44.7 27w2d 0d
27: 0.0 0w0d 0d 27: 46.60 28w6d 0d 27: 28w6d 41.20 46.60 52.00 27: 45.8 27w6d 0d
28: 0.0 0w0d 0d 28: 48.70 29w3d 0d 28: 29w3d 43.10 48.70 54.30 28: 46.8 28w3d 0d
29: 0.0 0w0d 0d 29: 50.80 30w0d 0d 29: 30w0d 45.00 50.80 56.60 29: 47.8 29w0d 0d
30: 0.0 0w0d 0d 30: 52.90 30w4d 0d 30: 30w4d 46.80 52.90 59.00 30: 48.7 29w4d 0d
31: 0.0 0w0d 0d 31: 55.00 31w1d 0d 31: 31w1d 48.70 55.00 61.30 31: 49.7 30w1d 0d
32: 0.0 0w0d 0d 32: 57.20 31w5d 0d 32: 31w5d 50.70 57.20 63.70 32: 50.6 30w5d 0d
33: 0.0 0w0d 0d 33: 59.40 32w2d 0d 33: 32w2d 52.60 59.40 66.20 33: 51.5 31w2d 0d
34: 0.0 0w0d 0d 34: 61.50 32w6d 0d 34: 32w6d 54.50 61.50 68.50 34: 52.3 31w6d 0d
35: 0.0 0w0d 0d 35: 63.70 33w3d 0d 35: 33w3d 56.40 63.70 71.00 35: 53.1 32w3d 0d
36: 0.0 0w0d 0d 36: 65.80 34w0d 0d 36: 34w0d 58.30 65.80 73.30 36: 53.9 33w0d 0d
37: 0.0 0w0d 0d 37: 67.90 34w4d 0d 37: 34w4d 60.10 67.90 75.70 37: 54.7 33w4d 0d
38: 0.0 0w0d 0d 38: 70.10 35w1d 0d 38: 35w1d 62.10 70.10 78.10 38: 55.5 34w1d 0d
39: 0.0 0w0d 0d 39: 72.20 35w5d 0d 39: 35w5d 63.90 72.20 80.50 39: 56.2 34w5d 0d
40: 0.0 0w0d 0d 40: 74.20 36w2d 0d 40: 36w2d 65.60 74.20 82.80 40: 56.9 35w2d 0d
41: 0.0 0w0d 0d 41: 76.20 36w6d 0d 41: 36w6d 67.40 76.20 85.00 41: 57.6 35w6d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 78.20 37w3d 0d 42: 37w3d 69.10 78.20 87.30 42: 58.2 36w3d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 80.20 38w0d 0d 43: 38w0d 70.80 80.20 89.60 43: 58.8 37w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 82.10 38w4d 0d 44: 38w4d 72.40 82.10 91.80 44: 59.4 37w4d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 83.90 39w1d 0d 45: 39w1d 73.90 83.90 93.90 45: 60.0 38w1d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 85.70 39w5d 0d 46: 39w5d 75.40 85.70 96.00 46: 60.5 38w5d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 86.60 40w0d 0d 47: 40w0d 76.20 86.60 97.00 47: 61.0 39w2d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0.00 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 61.5 39w6d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0.00 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 61.6 40w0d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0.00 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 0.0 0w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0.00 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 0.0 0w0d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0.00 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 0.0 0w0d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0.00 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 0.0 0w0d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0.00 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 0.0 0w0d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0.00 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 0.0 0w0d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0.00 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 0.0 0w0d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0.00 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.00 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.00 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.00 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-155 Q1E-EA0611
59. HL 60. Estimated Fetal Body Weight 61. Estimated Fetal Body Weight
OSAKA U.; Growth table TODAI96 ; EFBW table OSAKA U. ; EFBW table
Calculation type ; distance Calculation type ; weight Calculation type ; weight
Data unit ; mm Data unit ;g Data unit ; g
Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table
No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX. No. GA MIN. MEAN MAX.
1: 13w0d 8.1 10.1 12.1 1: 18w3d 158 216 274 1: 16w0d 108 137 166
2: 13w4d 9.8 11.8 13.8 2: 19w3d 204 279 355 2: 16w3d 124 153 182
3: 14w1d 11.4 13.5 15.6 3: 20w3d 256 349 442 3: 16w6d 140 170 200
4: 14w5d 13.0 15.1 17.2 4: 21w3d 314 427 539 4: 17w2d 156 188 220
5: 15w2d 14.6 16.7 18.8 5: 22w3d 381 513 645 5: 17w5d 175 209 243
6: 15w6d 16.2 18.3 20.4 6: 23w3d 456 609 761 6: 18w1d 195 231 267
7: 16w3d 17.8 19.9 22.0 7: 24w3d 541 714 888 7: 18w4d 215 254 293
8: 17w0d 19.3 21.5 23.7 8: 25w3d 634 830 1026 8: 19w0d 238 280 322
9: 17w4d 20.8 23.0 25.2 9: 26w3d 737 956 1175 9: 19w3d 263 308 353
10: 18w1d 22.3 24.5 26.7 10: 27w3d 849 1092 1334 10: 19w6d 288 337 386
11: 18w5d 23.7 25.9 28.1 11: 28w3d 970 1237 1504 11: 20w2d 315 368 421
12: 19w2d 25.2 27.4 29.6 12: 29w3d 1099 1391 1683 12: 20w5d 344 401 458
13: 19w6d 26.5 28.8 31.1 13: 30w3d 1234 1552 1870 13: 21w1d 375 436 497
14: 20w3d 27.9 30.2 32.5 14: 31w3d 1375 1720 2064 14: 21w4d 408 474 540
15: 21w0d 29.2 31.5 33.8 15: 32w3d 1520 1892 2265 15: 22w0d 442 513 584
16: 21w4d 30.6 32.9 35.2 16: 33w3d 1667 2068 2469 16: 22w3d 477 553 629
17: 22w1d 31.9 34.2 36.5 17: 34w3d 1814 2244 2675 17: 22w6d 515 596 677
18: 22w5d 33.1 35.4 37.7 18: 35w3d 1960 2420 2880 18: 23w2d 554 641 728
19: 23w2d 34.3 36.7 39.1 19: 36w3d 2102 2592 3083 19: 23w5d 596 688 780
20: 23w6d 35.5 37.9 40.3 20: 37w3d 2236 2758 3280 20: 24w1d 638 736 834
21: 24w3d 36.7 39.1 41.5 21: 38w3d 2360 2915 3469 21: 24w4d 683 787 891
22: 25w0d 37.9 40.3 42.7 22: 39w3d 2471 3059 3647 22: 25w0d 729 839 949
23: 25w4d 39.0 41.4 43.8 23: 40w3d 2565 3187 3809 23: 25w3d 777 893 1009
24: 26w1d 40.1 42.6 45.1 24: 41w3d 2639 3296 3952 24: 25w6d 826 949 1072
25: 26w5d 41.2 43.7 46.2 25: 0w0d 0 0 0 25: 26w2d 878 1007 1136
26: 27w2d 42.2 44.7 47.0 26: 0w0d 0 0 0 26: 26w5d 931 1066 1201
27: 27w6d 43.3 45.8 48.3 27: 0w0d 0 0 0 27: 27w1d 985 1127 1269
28: 28w3d 44.3 46.8 49.3 28: 0w0d 0 0 0 28: 27w4d 1040 1189 1338
29: 29w0d 45.2 47.8 50.4 29: 0w0d 0 0 0 29: 28w0d 1098 1253 1408
30: 29w4d 46.1 48.7 51.3 30: 0w0d 0 0 0 30: 28w3d 1156 1318 1480
31: 30w1d 47.1 49.7 52.3 31: 0w0d 0 0 0 31: 28w6d 1216 1385 1554
32: 30w5d 48.0 50.6 53.2 32: 0w0d 0 0 0 32: 29w2d 1277 1453 1629
33: 31w2d 48.9 51.5 54.1 33: 0w0d 0 0 0 33: 29w5d 1339 1522 1705
34: 31w6d 49.7 52.3 54.9 34: 0w0d 0 0 0 34: 30w1d 1402 1592 1782
35: 32w3d 50.4 53.1 55.8 35: 0w0d 0 0 0 35: 30w4d 1466 1663 1860
36: 33w0d 51.2 53.9 56.6 36: 0w0d 0 0 0 36: 31w0d 1531 1735 1939
37: 33w4d 52.0 54.7 57.4 37: 0w0d 0 0 0 37: 31w3d 1596 1808 2020
38: 34w1d 52.8 55.5 58.2 38: 0w0d 0 0 0 38: 31w6d 1662 1881 2100
39: 34w5d 53.5 56.2 58.9 39: 0w0d 0 0 0 39: 32w2d 1728 1955 2182
40: 35w2d 54.1 56.9 59.7 40: 0w0d 0 0 0 40: 32w5d 1795 2029 2263
41: 35w6d 54.8 57.6 60.4 41: 0w0d 0 0 0 41: 33w1d 1862 2104 2346
42: 36w3d 55.4 58.2 61.0 42: 0w0d 0 0 0 42: 33w4d 1929 2179 2429
43: 37w0d 56.0 58.8 61.6 43: 0w0d 0 0 0 43: 34w0d 1997 2254 2511
44: 37w4d 56.6 59.4 62.2 44: 0w0d 0 0 0 44: 34w3d 2064 2329 2594
45: 38w1d 57.1 60.0 62.9 45: 0w0d 0 0 0 45: 34w6d 2129 2403 2677
46: 38w5d 57.6 60.5 63.4 46: 0w0d 0 0 0 46: 35w2d 2196 2478 2760
47: 39w2d 58.1 61.0 63.9 47: 0w0d 0 0 0 47: 35w5d 2261 2551 2841
48: 39w6d 58.6 61.5 64.4 48: 0w0d 0 0 0 48: 36w1d 2325 2624 2923
49: 40w0d 58.7 61.6 64.5 49: 0w0d 0 0 0 49: 36w4d 2388 2696 3004
50: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 50: 0w0d 0 0 0 50: 37w0d 2450 2767 3084
51: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 51: 0w0d 0 0 0 51: 37w3d 2511 2837 3163
52: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 52: 0w0d 0 0 0 52: 37w6d 2571 2906 3241
53: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 53: 0w0d 0 0 0 53: 38w2d 2628 2973 3318
54: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 54: 0w0d 0 0 0 54: 38w5d 2683 3038 3393
55: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 55: 0w0d 0 0 0 55: 39w1d 2736 3101 3466
56: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 56: 0w0d 0 0 0 56: 39w4d 2786 3162 3538
57: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 57: 0w0d 0 0 0 57: 40w0d 2833 3220 3607
58: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0 58: 0w0d 0 0 0
59: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0 59: 0w0d 0 0 0
60: 0w0d 0.0 0.0 0.0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0 60: 0w0d 0 0 0
Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-6 No. 59 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-6 No. 62 Reference: Table 11.4.6.8-6 No. 63
11-156 Q1E-EA0611
62. APTDxTTD 63. APTDxTTD 64. EFBW 65. EFBW
TODAI96 ; Age table TODAI96. ; Growth table TODAI96 ; Age table OSAKA U.; Age table
Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; area Calculation type ; Weight Calculation type ; Weight
Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; cm2 Data unit ; g Data unit ; g
Variation; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; +/- 1.64SD table Variation ; +/- 1.00SD table Variation ; none
1: 10 16w1d 8d 1: 16w3d 7.0 11.2 15.5 1: 250 19w3d 7d 1: 137 16w0d 0d
2: 12 17w0d 8d 2: 17w3d 8.7 13.3 18.0 2: 300 19w6d 7d 2: 153 16w3d 0d
3: 14 17w6d 8d 3: 18w3d 10.5 15.6 20.7 3: 350 20w4d 7d 3: 170 16w6d 0d
4: 16 18w4d 8d 4: 19w3d 12.5 18.1 23.6 4: 400 21w2d 7d 4: 188 17w2d 0d
5: 18 19w3d 8d 5: 20w3d 14.7 20.8 26.8 5: 450 21w5d 7d 5: 209 17w5d 0d
6: 20 20w1d 8d 6: 21w3d 17.1 23.6 30.2 6: 500 22w2d 7d 6: 231 18w1d 0d
7: 22 20w6d 9d 7: 22w3d 19.6 26.7 33.8 7: 550 22w6d 7d 7: 254 18w4d 0d
8: 24 21w4d 9d 8: 23w3d 22.2 29.9 37.5 8: 600 23w2d 7d 8: 280 19w0d 0d
9: 26 22w2d 9d 9: 24w3d 25.0 33.2 41.5 9: 650 23w6d 7d 9: 308 19w3d 0d
10: 28 22w6d 9d 10: 25w3d 27.9 36.7 45.6 10: 700 24w2d 7d 10: 337 19w6d 0d
11: 30 23w4d 9d 11: 26w3d 30.9 40.3 49.8 11: 750 24w5d 7d 11: 368 20w2d 0d
12: 32 24w1d 10d 12: 27w3d 33.9 44.1 54.2 12: 800 25w2d 8d 12: 401 20w5d 0d
13: 34 24w5d 10d 13: 28w3d 37.1 47.9 58.7 13: 850 25w5d 8d 13: 436 21w1d 0d
14: 36 25w3d 10d 14: 29w3d 40.3 51.8 63.3 14: 900 26w1d 8d 14: 474 21w4d 0d
15: 38 25w6d 10d 15: 30w3d 43.5 55.7 68.0 15: 950 26w4d 8d 15: 513 22w0d 0d
16: 40 26w3d 11d 16: 31w3d 46.8 59.7 72.7 16: 1000 26w6d 8d 16: 553 22w3d 0d
17: 42 27w0d 11d 17: 32w3d 50.0 63.8 77.6 17: 1050 27w2d 8d 17: 596 22w6d 0d
18: 44 27w3d 11d 18: 33w3d 53.3 67.8 82.4 18: 1100 27w5d 8d 18: 641 23w2d 0d
19: 46 28w0d 12d 19: 34w3d 56.6 71.9 87.3 19: 1150 27w6d 9d 19: 688 23w5d 0d
20: 48 28w4d 12d 20: 35w3d 59.7 75.9 92.2 20: 1200 28w3d 9d 20: 736 24w1d 0d
21: 50 29w0d 12d 21: 36w3d 62.8 79.9 97.0 21: 1250 28w5d 9d 21: 787 24w4d 0d
22: 52 29w3d 13d 22: 37w3d 65.9 83.9 101.9 22: 1300 29w1d 9d 22: 839 25w0d 0d
23: 54 30w0d 13d 23: 38w3d 68.8 87.7 106.7 23: 1350 29w3d 9d 23: 893 25w3d 0d
24: 56 30w3d 13d 24: 39w3d 71.6 91.5 111.4 24: 1400 29w5d 9d 24: 949 25w6d 0d
25: 58 31w0d 14d 25: 40w3d 74.3 95.1 116.0 25: 1450 29w6d 10d 25: 1007 26w2d 0d
26: 60 31w3d 14d 26: 41w3d 76.8 98.6 120.5 26: 1500 30w2d 10d 26: 1066 26w5d 0d
27: 62 31w6d 14d 27: 42w3d 79.1 102.0 124.8 27: 1550 30w5d 10d 27: 1127 27w1d 0d
28: 64 32w3d 15d 28: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 28: 1600 31w0d 10d 28: 1189 27w4d 0d
29: 66 32w6d 15d 29: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 29: 1650 31w2d 10d 29: 1253 28w0d 0d
30: 68 33w3d 15d 30: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 30: 1700 31w4d 11d 30: 1318 28w3d 0d
31: 70 33w6d 16d 31: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 31: 1750 31w6d 11d 31: 1385 28w6d 0d
32: 72 34w2d 16d 32: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 32: 1800 32w1d 11d 32: 1453 29w2d 0d
33: 74 34w6d 17d 33: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 33: 1850 32w3d 11d 33: 1522 29w5d 0d
34: 76 35w3d 17d 34: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 34: 1900 32w5d 12d 34: 1592 30w1d 0d
35: 78 35w6d 17d 35: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 35: 1950 33w0d 12d 35: 1663 30w4d 0d
36: 80 36w3d 18d 36: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 36: 2000 33w1d 12d 36: 1735 31w0d 0d
37: 82 37w0d 18d 37: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 37: 2050 33w3d 12d 37: 1808 31w3d 0d
38: 84 37w4d 18d 38: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 38: 2100 33w5d 13d 38: 1881 31w6d 0d
39: 86 38w1d 18d 39: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 39: 2150 34w0d 13d 39: 1955 32w2d 0d
40: 88 38w5d 19d 40: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 40: 2200 34w2d 13d 40: 2029 32w5d 0d
41: 90 39w2d 19d 41: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 41: 2250 34w4d 13d 41: 2104 33w1d 0d
42: 0.0 0w0d 0d 42: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 42: 2300 34w6d 14d 42: 2179 33w4d 0d
43: 0.0 0w0d 0d 43: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 43: 2350 35w1d 14d 43: 2254 34w0d 0d
44: 0.0 0w0d 0d 44: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 44: 2400 35w3d 14d 44: 2329 34w3d 0d
45: 0.0 0w0d 0d 45: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 45: 2450 35w5d 14d 45: 2403 34w6d 0d
46: 0.0 0w0d 0d 46: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 46: 2500 36w0d 15d 46: 2478 35w2d 0d
47: 0.0 0w0d 0d 47: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 47: 2550 36w2d 15d 47: 2551 35w5d 0d
48: 0.0 0w0d 0d 48: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 48: 2600 36w4d 15d 48: 2624 36w1d 0d
49: 0.0 0w0d 0d 49: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 49: 2650 36w6d 16d 49: 2696 36w4d 0d
50: 0.0 0w0d 0d 50: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 50: 2700 37w2d 16d 50: 2767 37w0d 0d
51: 0.0 0w0d 0d 51: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 51: 2750 37w4d 16d 51: 2837 37w3d 0d
52: 0.0 0w0d 0d 52: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 52: 2800 37w6d 17d 52: 2906 37w6d 0d
53: 0.0 0w0d 0d 53: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 53: 2850 38w1d 17d 53: 2973 38w2d 0d
54: 0.0 0w0d 0d 54: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 54: 2900 38w4d 17d 54: 3038 38w5d 0d
55: 0.0 0w0d 0d 55: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 55: 2950 38w6d 18d 55: 3101 39w1d 0d
56: 0.0 0w0d 0d 56: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 56: 3000 39w2d 18d 56: 3162 39w4d 0d
57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 57: 0.0 0w0d 0d 57: 3220 40w0d 0d
58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d 58: 0.0 0w0d 0d
59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d 59: 0.0 0w0d 0d
60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0w0d 0.00 0.00 0.00 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d 60: 0.0 0w0d 0d
11-157 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-4 List of References related to Obstetric Table Data (1/2) for USA
Measurement Table Valid Range Reference
1. BPD HAD84 12w2d to 41w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al.: Estimating Fetal Age: Computer
Age table - Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth Parameters.
Radiology. 152:499,1984
2. BPD HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal Age:
Growth table Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
Parameters. Radiology.152:499,1984
3. BPD SABB78 14w0d to 40w0d Sabbagha, R E., et.al. : Standardization of Sonar
Age table Cephalometry and Gestational Age. Obstet. Gynecol. 52 :
402, 1978.
4. HC HAD84 12w2d to 41w4d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
Age table Age:Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
5. HC HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
Growth table Age:Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
6. AC HAD84 12w5d to 42w0d Hadlock,F.P,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
Age table Age:Computer-Assisted Analysis of Multiple Fetal Growth
7. AC HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
8. FL HAD84 12w0d to 40w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Estimating Fetal
9. FL HAD82 12w6d to 40w3d Hadlock,F.P,et.al. : Fetal Femur length as a predictor of
Age table Menstrual Age. Sonographically Measured.
Am. J. Roentgenology 138 : 875, May 1982.
10. FL JEAN84 12w4d to 40w0d Jeantry,P.,et.al. : Estimation of gestational age from
Age table measurements of fetal long bones. J Ultrasound
Med.3:75-79,1984
11. FL JEAN83 12w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
Growth table McGraw-Hill,1983
12. CRL ROB75 6w2d to 14w0d Robinson,H.P.,et.al. : A Critical Evaluation of Sonar
Age table "Crown-Rump Length" Measurements.
Br.J.Obstet.Gynecol.82:702,1975
13. GS HEL69 5w6d to 12w1d Hellman,LM,et.al. : Growth and development of the human
Age table fetus prior to the 20th week of gestation.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.103:784-800,1969
14. HL JEAN84 12w4d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
Age table McGraw-Hill,1983
15. BD MAY82 12w0d to 40w0d Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new parameter for
Growth table prenatal diagnosis and dating.
16. FIB JEAN83 14w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
17. HW PRE86 15w0d to 25w0d Pretorius,DH,et.al. : Fetal lateral ventricular ratio
Growth table determined during the second trimester.
J Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986#
18. IOD MAY82 12w0d to 40w0d Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new parameter for
Growth table prenatal diagnosis and dating.
19. LVW PRE86 15w0d to 25w0d Pretorius,DH,et.al. : Fetal lateral ventricular ratio
Growth table determined during the second trimester.
J Ultrasound Med.5:121-124,1986
11-158 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-4 List of References related to Obstetric Table Data (2/2) for USA
20. OD MAY82 12w0d to 40w0d Mayden,K.L.,et.al. : Orbital diameters:A new parameter for
Growth table prenatal diagnosis and dating. Am J
Obstet Gynecol.144:289-297,1982
21. RAD JEAN83 13w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
22. TCD GOLD87 15w0d to 38w0d Goldstein et al. : Am J of Obstet Gynecol, May, 1987.
Growth table
23. TIB JEAN83 14w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
24. ULNA JEAN83 13w0d to 40w0d Jeanty,et.al. : Obstetrical Ultrasound New York,
Growth Table McGraw-Hill,1983
25. CI HAD81 14w0d to 40w0d Brenner,WE,et.al. : A standard of fetal growth for the
(BPD / OFD) United States of America.
Ratio table Am J Obstet Gynecol.126:555,1976
26. FL / AC HAD85 21w0d to 42w0d Hadlock,F.P.,et.al. : Use of the Femur Length / Abdominal
Ratio table Circumference Ratio in Detecting the Macrosomic Fetus.
Radiology 154:503-505,1985
27. FL / BPD HOHL81 23w0d to 40w0d Hohler,C.W,et.al. : Comparison of Fetal Femur Length and
Ratio table Biparietal Diameter in Late Pregnancy.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.141:759,1981
28. HC / AC CAMP77 13w0d to 42w0d Campbell,S. : Ultrasound Measurement of the Fetal Head
Ratio table to Abdomen Circumference Ratio in the Assessment of
Growth Retardation.
Br.J.Obstet.Gynecol.84:165,1977
29. LVW/HW PRE86 15w0d to 38w0d -Pretorius,DH,et.al. : Fetal lateral ventricular ratio
Ratio table determined during the second trimester.J Ultrasound
Med.5:121-124,1986
-Johnson ML, et al. Evaluation of fetal intracranical
anatomy by static and realtime ultrasound. J Clin
Ultrasound. 1980;8:311-318
30. AFI table MOORE 16w0d to 42w0d Moore : Am J Obstet Gynecol.May,1990
90
31. EFBW table BRE76 23w0d to 44w0d Brenner,WE,et.al. : A standard of fetal growth for the
United States of America.
Am J Obstet Gynecol.126:555,1976
32. EFBW table YARK87 16w0d to 38w0d Yarkoni,S. : Obstet Gynecol.69:636-639,1987
Table 11.4.6.8-5 List of References related to Obstetric Table Data for Europe
33. BPD HANS85 11w2d to 40w1d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
Age table and Gynecology Springer-Verlag 1985
34. OFD HANS85 13w4d to 40w0d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
35. CRL HANS85 6w0d to 21w2d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
36. FL HANS85 13w3d to 40w6d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
37. HC HANS85 14w0d to 40w0d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
38. TTD HANS85 14w3d to 40w6d Manfred Hansmann : Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics
11-159 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-6 List of References related to Obstetric table data
for Japan(1/2)
39. BPD TODAI96 10w1d to 37w4d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
Age table ultrasound measurement, Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
40. BPD TODAI96 10w0d to 42w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
Growth table ultrasound measurement, Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
41. BPD OSAKA U. 10w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
Age table and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
42. BPD OSAKA U. 10w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
Growth table and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
43. BPD H1 11w4d to 37w1d Committee for ME Problems, Japan OB/GY Society, 1989
Age table
44. AC TODAI96 16w0d to 42w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
45. AC TODAI96 15w3d to 41w2d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
46. FL TODAI96 16w1d to 39w3d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
47. FL TODAI96 16w0d to 42w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
48. FL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
49. FL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
50. FL H1 16w6d to 38w4d Committee for ME Problems, Japan OB/GY Society, 1989
Age table
51. CRL TODAI 8w0d to 14w0d Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control by
Age table comprehensive analysis of fetal data; Journal of Japan
OB/GY Society, Vol. 38, No. 8, 1209 - 1217, 1986
52. CRL OSAKA U. 7w0d to 12w6d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
53. CRL OSAKA U. 7w0d to 12w6d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
54. GS TODAI 4w0d to 11w0d Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control by
55. LV TODAI 21w0d to 40w0d Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control by
56. FTA OSAKA U. 14w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
57. FTA OSAKA U. 14w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
58. HL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
11-160 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-6 List of References related to Obstetric table data
for Japan(1/2)
59. HL OSAKA U. 13w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
60. APTD None Reserve Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control
Age table by comprehensive analysis of fetal data; Journal of
Japan OB/GY Society, Vol. 38, No. 8, 1209 - 1217, 1986
61. TTD None Reserve Takashi Okai, et al: Approach to new perinatal control
Age table by comprehensive analysis of fetal data; Journal of
Japan OB/GY Society, Vol. 38, No. 8, 1209 - 1217, 1986
62.EFBW table TODAI96 18w0d to 41w0d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
ultrasound measurement, Jpn J Med Ultrasonics Vol. 23
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
63. EFBW table OSAKA U. 16w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
and Gynecology Treatment; Vol. 47, No. 5, 1983/11
64. APTDxTTD TODAI96 16w1d to 39w2d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
65. APTDxTTD TODAI96 16w3d to 42w3d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
66. EFBW TODAI96 19w3d to 39w2d Norio Shinotsuka, et al: Creation of reference data in
No. 12 ; 877-888, 1996
67. EFBW OSAKA U. 16w0d to 40w0d Mineo Aoki, et al: Diagnosis of fetal growth, Obstetrics
11-161 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.4.6.8-7 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (HAD85)
Equation Name HAD85
Equation
WT = 10^(1.335+(0.316*BPD+0.457*AC+1.623*FL-0.0034*AC*FL)/100)
Reference Hadlock F.P.,et.al.: Estimation of Fetal Weight with the Use of Head, Body, and Femur
Measurements-A Prospective Study: Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol. 151:333-337, 1985.
Table 11.4.6.8-8 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (SHEP82)

Equation Name SHEP82
Equation
WT = 10^(1.2508+0.0166*BPD+0.0046*AC-0.02646*AC*BPD/1000
Reference Shepard M.J.,et.al.:

An Evaluation of Two Equations for Predicting Fetal Weight by Ultrasound. Am. J.
Obstet.Gynecol. 142:47,1982.
Table 11.4.6.8-9 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (HANS76)

Equation Name HANS76
Equation
WT = -105.775*BPD+64.914*TTD+0.930707*BPD^2-0.20562*TTD^2+515.263
Reference Hansmann,M.et.al.:Ultrasound Diagnosis in Obstetrics and gynecology.
Springer-Verlag,1987.
Table 11.4.6.8-10 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (MERZ88)

Equation Name MERZ88
Equation WT = -3200.405+15.7072*AC+0.159039*BPD^2
Reference Merz,E. et. al:Intrauterine Gewichtsschatzung miitels Ultrachall. Ultrachall 9, 15-24, 1988
NOTICE This equation cannot be used for the gestational age up to 25 weeks
because of out of application range.
Table 11.4.6.8-11 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (TODAI)

Equation Name TODAI
Equation WT = (1.07*BPD^3+3.42*APTD*TTD*FL)*0.001
Reference Norio Shinozuka, et. al.:
Tokyo University, Japan :Chouonpa taiji keisoku ni okeru kijyun-chi no sakusei Jpn J Med
Ultrasonics Vol.23 No.12 (1996)
Table 11.4.6.8-12 Fetal Weight Calculation Equation (OSAKA U.)

Equation Name OSAKA U.
Equation WT = 6.3+1.25647*(BPD/10)^3+0.350665*FTA*FL
Reference Mineo Aoki, et. al. :
Osaka University, Japan :Taiji hatuiku-no shindan, Sanfujin-ka chiryou, Vol.47, No.5,1983 /
11
11-162 Q1E-EA0611
11.4.7 Other Measurement
[1] Angle Measurement
As an indication for diagnosis of neonatal hip joint dislocations,

measure bony roof angle (α) and cartilage roof angle (β). ‘α’,
‘β’ is displayed as ‘Alpha’, ‘Beta’ in MRF (Measurement Result
Frame).
Table 11.4.7-1 Quantities Measured in Angle Measurement
Symbol Meaning Unit Comment
Alpha 1 (AB, CD)

(α) Bony roof angle ° α = 180° -COS-
I AB I・I CD I
Beta (AB, EF)

1
(β) Cartilage roof angle ° β = COS－
I AB I・I EF I
A
1 Line sequment 1: Basic line (vector AB)
E Line sequment 2: Acetabular roof line (vector CD)

D
3
Line sequment 3: Inclination line (vector EF)
β α 2 C [Reference]
F Dr.R.Graf
*1: Classification of hip joint dysplasia by means of
sonography
Arch Orthop Trauma Surg (1984) 102: 248-255
*2: The diagnosis of congenital hip-point dislocation
B by the ultrasonic compound treatment
Arch Orthop Trauma Surg 97: 117-133
Fig. 11.4.7-1 Concept of Angle Measurement
11-163 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Display a cross-sectional image of the hip joint in B-mode,

and switch the FREEZE function on.
(2) Start up the measurement as per the procedure described in

paragraph 11.2.
(3) Move the caliper to starting point

ANGLE
"A", and press ENTER key.
This will fix the position of "A".
(4) By rotating the trackball, move the

+ mark to the end point "B" of line
segment 1.
If UNDO key is pressed at this time,
ANGLE
the end point "B" is fixed and the other
end point "A" can be moved to finely
adjust the angle of line segment.
Afer completion of line segment
1
setting, press ENTER key to fix the
line segment.
Near the beginning point (end point ANGLE
"A"), 1 is displayed.
(5) Set the line segment 2 (end points "C"

and "D") by the same procedures of (3)
1 2
and (4). By the line segments 1 and
2 a bony roof (α) is calculated and
displayed. ANGLE
(6) Set the line segment 3 (end points "E"

and "F") by the same procedures of (3)
3
and (4). By the line segments 1 and
1 2
3, a cartilage roof angle is
calculated and displayed. The
Fig. 11.4.7-2
measurement is terminated.
Procedure of Angle
Measurement
11-164 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE: The Angle Measurement function is designed to be used primarily
for the diagnosis of neonatal hip-joint dislocations.
1) Angles α and β are not related on the directions of vectors

of line segments 1, 2 and 3. Angles α and β are calculated based
on the following rules.
Bony roof angle α: The angle of 90 degrees or less among the angles which a
line segment 1 and a line segment 2 make.
2
C D
A 1 α A 1 α
B B
2
C
Cartilage roof angle β: The angle which adjoins α on both sides of a line
segment 1 among the angles which a line segment 1
and a line segment 3 make. (βis error when a line
segment 3 is put into angle α.)
F E
2 3 2 C
C
α 1 α
1 A
A B
β B β
D D
3 E F
Fig.11.4.7-3 Examples:directions of vectors
2) It is displayed the line number 1 to 3 near the line of start

(small + mark), but alphabet A to F are not displayed in the
figure.
3) It can be changed moving side of vector start/end before fixed

both side of line by using UNDO key.
4) After measured and start angle measurement, it was cleared before

has measured result of value.
11-165 Q1E-EA0611
[2] Urology measurement
This is the measurement function to estimate amount of
hypertrophy, antigen density, etc. from measurement of volume
of bladder, prostate, etc. Any calculation equation can be freely
created according to its purpose and application.
Table 11.4.7-2 Measurement Items for Urology

Application Abbreviation Unit Measurement method and Calculation equation
Predicted bladder BD1 mm Volume predicted by measurement of 3 diameters
volume BD2 mm (biplane method) from orthogonally crossing two
BD3 mm images.
Bladder vol. cc BD1
BD2
Urinary bladder
BD3
BLVOL = BD1 × BD2 × BD2 × 0.000523

Predicted whole grand D1 mm Volume predicted by measurement of 3 diameters
prostate D2 mm (biplane method) from median sagittal image and
D3 mm median transverse image of prostate
WG Vol. cc
IS FS
D1
(Top-bott
U om
VM CZ
ED PZ
SV D2
(Anterior-posterior
Median sagittal image (sagittal view)
FS
U TZ
IS
ED CZ
PZ
D3 (Transverse diameter)
Median transverse image (transverse view)
WGVOL = D1×D2×D3×0.000523
IS Interureteric Space
U Urethra
VM Verumontanum
ED Ejaculatory Duct
SV Seminal Vesicle
FS Fibromuscular Stroma
TZ Prostate (Transitional Zone)
CZ Prostate (Central Zone)
PZ Prostate (Peripheral Zone)
11-166 Q1E-EA0611
Application Abbreviation Unit Measurement method and Calculation equation
Predicted Transitional DA mm Volume predicted by measurement of 3 diameters
Zone Prostate Volume DB mm (biplane method) from median sagittal image and
DC mm median transverse image of transitional zone of
TZ Vol. cc prostate
DA FS
TZ
SV
PZ
DB (Top-bottom diameter)
Median sagittal view (sagittal view)
FS
U
IS TZ
VM
ED CZ
PZ
Median transverse view (transverse view)

TZVOL = DA×DB×DC×0.000523
Predicted PSA level by D1 mm Predicted PSA level obtained from prostate whole
whole grand volume D2 mm volume
PSA: Prostate D3 mm
Specific Antigen Pred. PSA ng PREDPSA = D1×D2×D3×0.000523×0.12
Ng: nomogram Prostate whole Gradient coefficient
gland volume by clinical
experiences
NOTICE: Gradient coefficient 0.12 by clinical

experiences is taken from the references
on the next page.
Predicted PSA level by DA mm Predicted PSA level obtained from prostate gland
transitional zone DB mm transition zone volume
volume DC mm
TZ PSA ng TZPSA = DA×DB×DC×0.000084
Gradient coefficient by
transitional zone prostate volume
and clinical experiences
Predicted prostate SPSA ng/ml Predicted antigen density for prostate volume by
specific antigen density D1 mm input of prostate specific antigen value
D2 mm (SPSA: Serium PSA)
D3 mm PSADENS = SPSA/(D1×D2×D3×0.000523)
PSA Dens. - Prostate whole gland volume
Input the variable SPSA (Serium PSA) in report.
11-167 Q1E-EA0611
References for urology measurements
1. Griffiths, et al., Measuring Bladder Volume and Residual Urine; The

Journal of UROLOGY, Vol. 136, 808-812, 1986
2. Fred Lee, M.D., et al., Predicted Prostate Specific Antigen Results

Using Transrectal Ultrasound Gland Volume; CANCER Supplement, Vol.
70, No. 1, July 1992.
3. Peter J, Littrup, M.D., et al., Determination of Prostate Volume

with Transrectal US for Cancer Screening; Radiology, Vol. 179, 49-53,
1991.
4. Mitchell C. Benson, et al., Prostate Specific Antigen Density: A

means of Distinguishing Benign Prostatic Hypertrophy and Prostate
Cancer; The Journal of UROLOGY, Vol. 147, 815-816, March 1992.
Mitchell C. Benson, et al., The Use of Prostate Specific Antigen Density

to Enhance the Predictive Value of Intermediate Levels of Serum Prostate
Specific Antigen;
The Journal of UROLOGY, Vol. 147, 817-821, March 1992.
11-168 Q1E-EA0611
[3] Gynecology measurements
Measurements of uterus and ovary are made. Volume of the
interested region can also be calculated from the measurement
results of 3 diameters of Length, A-P length and Width.
Furthermore, blood flow measurement function is provided.
Table 11.4.7.3-1 Gynecology Measurement Items

Measurement Measurement Measurement Unit Calculation equation Remarks
name item mode
Uterus Uterus L Distance mm
Uterus AP Distance mm
Uterus W Distance mm
Endomet. T Distance mm Endometrium
thickness
Cervic L Distance mm Cervix length
L-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
V Calculation ml (SPI/6)*(L*0.1)*(AP*0.1)*(W*0.1)
R-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
Uterine Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
Vd Velocity (D-mode) cm/s waveform trace
Vm Velocity (D-mode) cm/s
S/D Calculation -- Vs/Vd
RI Calculation -- (Vs-Vd)/Vs
PI Calculation -- (Vs-Vd)/Vm
L-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
R-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
Table 11.4.7.3-2 Gynecology Report Items

Measurement Item Description Writing mode Remarks
name
Cul-de-sac Fluid Cul-de-sac Fluid Selection Yes/No/NA
Amount Cul-de-sac Amount Selection NA/MILDMODE/SEVERE
11-169 Q1E-EA0611
[4] Follicular Measurement
Measurements of follicle are mainly made. A volume (V) of the
interested region can be calculated from the measurement results
of Length, A-P length and Width. It is also provided with blood
flow measurement function.
Table 11.4.7-4 Follicular Measurement Items

Measurement Measurement Measurement Unit Calculation equation Remarks
name item mode
L-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
R-Ovary L Distance mm
AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
L-Follicul. L Distance mm
(1 ~ 5) AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
R-Follicul. L Distance mm
(1 ~ 5) AP Distance mm
W Distance mm
Uterus Vs Distance mm
Vd Distance mm
Vm Distance mm
S/D Distance mm
RI Distance mm
PI Distance mm
Uterine AP Distance mm Auto or manual
W Distance mm waveform trace
L-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
R-Ovary-D Vs Velocity (D-mode) cm/s Auto or manual
11-170 Q1E-EA0611
[5] CAROTID Measurement
In the carotid measurement a level of blood vessel stenosis
(%D-STENO or %A-STENO) is measured from the diameters (D1, D2)
or the sectional space (A1, A2) of the blood vessel seemed normal
or abnormal at every part of measurement, and also the blood
flow velocity (Vs, Vd) using measuring caliper and the mean blood
flow velocity (Vm) in a tracing period using Doppler wave tracing
method are measured at every part of measurement. As a Doppler
wave tracing method one of three methods, AUTO, PLOT or MANUAL,
is selectable.
Table 11.4.7-5 Carotid Measurement
Parts to measure Items to measure Unit Measuring method Comments

CCA D1 mm Distance(B-mode)
BIF. D2 mm Distance(B-mode)
ICA PROX %D-STENO % Calculation1
ICA MID
2
ICA DIST A1 cm Trace
2
ICA(RATIO) A2 cm Trace
ECA %A-STENO % Calculation2
VERT.
Vs cm/s Velocity
Vd cm/s Velocity
Vm cm/s Velocity
RI (Vs - Vd) / Vs
PI (Vs - Vd) / Vm
NOTICE: Calculation1:((Max(D1,D2)-Min(D1,D2))/Max(D1,D2))×100[%]
Calculation2:((Max(A1,A2)-Min(A1,A2))/Max(A1,A2))×100[%]
Abbreviation
CCA:Common Carotid Artery
BIF.:Bifurcation
ICA PROX:Internal Carotid Artery(Proximal)
ICA MID:Internal Carotid Artery(Middle)
ICA DIST:Internal Carotid Artery(Distal)
ICA(RATIO):Internal Carotid Artery(For ratio)
ECA:External Carotid Artery
VERT.:Vertebral Artery
11-171 Q1E-EA0611
[6] LEG A. Measurement
In the leg artery measurement, as same with the case of carotid
measurement, the blood flow velocity (Vs, Vd) and the mean blood
flow velocity (Vm) in the tracing period of Doppler wave at every
part of measurement are measured.
Table 11.4.7-6 Leg Artery Measurement

A.AORTA Vs cm/s Velocity
CIA Vd cm/s Velocity
CFA Vm cm/s Velocity
PFA RI (Vs-Vd) / Vs
SFA PI (Vs-Vd) / Vm
POP.A.
PTA
PERON.A.
ATA
DPA
Abbreviation
A.AORTA:Abdominal Aorta CIA:Common Iliac Artery
CFA:Common Femoral Artery PFA:Profunda femoral Artery
SFA:Superficial Femoral Artery POP.A.:Popliteal Artery
PTA:Posterior Tibial Artery PERON.A.:Peroneal Artery
ATA:Anterior Tibial Artery DPA:Dorsalis Pedis Artery
[7] ARM A. Measurement

In the arm artery measurement, as same with the case of carotid
measurement, the blood flow velocity (Vs, Vd) and the mean blood
flow velocity (Vm) in tracing period of Doppler wave at every
part of measurement are measured.
Table 11.4.7-7 Arm Artery Measurement

SUBCL.A. Vs cm/s Velocity
AX.A. Vd cm/s Velocity
BRACH.A. Vm cm/s Velocity
RAD.A. RI (Vs-Vd) / Vs
UL.A. PI (Vs-Vd) / Vm
Abbreviation
SUBCL.A.:Subclavian Artery AX.A.:Axillary Artery
BRACH.A.:Brachial Artery RAD.A.:Radial Artery
UL.A.:Ulnar Artery
11-172 Q1E-EA0611
11.5 Measurement Setup
Measurement method and measurement items can be set for execution

of measurement. Because this function does not requires
complicated setting procedures, measurement method optimum for
each measurement can be set according to the shape of the interested
region and physician's preference. Furthermore, complicated
operations such as setting of sampling points in spite of the item
that does not require measurement result can be eliminated.
11.5.1 Configuration of Measurement Setup
The Measurement Setup function includes the following 3 menus.
(1) Measurement Setup menu (Refer to 11.5.2.)

This is the menu to be started first in the Measurement Setup
program. The hierarchy of all the measurements is shown in tree
structure. Using this menu, creation of new measurement, copy
and deletion can be executed.
(2) Measurement Edition menu (Refer to 11.5.3.1 and 11.5.3.2.)

Details of measurement items included in the desired measurement
are set.
(3) Link Setup menu (Refer to 11.5.3.3.)

The Link Tool is set up.
The terms necessary to explain the hierarchy in the Measurement

Setup menu are shown on the next page.
11-173 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.5.1-1 Setting Items on Measurement Setup Menu
Symbol displayed on Item
Description
Setup Menu name
Region This represents a diagnostic region for measurement.
Three kinds of regions, "Abdo&Others", "Cardiac" and "Vascular"
are incorporated in the scanner system shipped from the factory.
Kinds of executable measurements are different for each
diagnostic region. Designate one measurement region for each
application (refer to 8.3.8).
After starting the measurement program, the measurement for
the region designated by the application being used is displayed
on the menu.
Group This is a folder in which multiple measurements or groups can
be kept. The group in the group is called sub-group.
Sub-group can hold only measurements in it. Group is
displayed on the Measurement menu. Display of measurement
report is altered by group unit shown just under the
Measurement menu.
Measurement This represents Measurement, and corresponds to "Ratio-Dis",
"LVOT", etc. Measurement can hold Item Group or
Measurement Item in it. Measurement is displayed in the title
area of the Measurement menu and measurement result display
area.
Item Group This is a folder in which multiple measurement items can be
held. This can be created only for Hierarchy measurement type
(refer to 11.5.2.2). When the Measurement program is started,
measurement items in the measurement result display area can
be changed at one time by the function key within the range
included in this Item Group. This is used when the ratio
calculation equation for "Ratio-Dis" measurement is changed by
the function key.
Measurement This is an item to be actually measured. It corresponds to "D1"
Item and "D2" in the "Ratio-Dis" measurement.
A measurement value for the measurement item can be
obtained by using the Measurement Tool (refer to 11.8), and it is
displayed in the measurement result display area.
The relation between setting procedures on Setup menu, Measurement menu

and measurement result display area is shown on the next page.
11-174 Q1E-EA0611
Group name "OB-STD" Measurement name "Fetal Para."
Measurement
Setup menu
Selection Selection Measurement
Item name
"GS",
"CRL",
：
：
：
Measurement name
Group name Measurement name "Fetal Para."
"OB-STD" "Fetal Para."
11-175
Measurement
Item name
Measurement menu Selection Selection "GS",
and Measurement
Result display area "CRL",
：
：
：
Measurement Result
Measurement menu display area
Measurement Submenu
Fig. 11.5.1-1 Setting on Measurement Setup Menu and Operation after Program Start
Q1E-EA0611
11.5.2 Measurement Setup menu
11.5.2.1 Starting Measurement Setup menu
MAIN
After opening the Main menu by pressing MENU
key, select
[Setup] menu. Then, selecting [Measure] displays
[Measurement Setup] menu shown in Fig. 11.5.2.1-1.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 11.5.2.1-1 Starting Measurement Setup Menu
In the area at the left of the Measurement Setup menu where the hierarchy
is shown, by double clicking Region, Group, Measurement iron or name,
or clicking Node ("+" or "-" mark), its item can be opened or closed.
(Because nothing is included in Measurement item, it is neither opened
nor closed.)
Clicking node
Double clicking icon
Double clicking name
Fig. 11.5.2.1-2 Open and Close Operation of Menu
11-176 Q1E-EA0611
Selecting Region, Group or Measurement in the area at the left of the
Measurement Setup menu where a hierarchy is shown displays its contents
in the right area.
Regions
Measurements
Regions
Items
Measurements
Fig. 11.5.2.1-3 Measurement Setup Menu Display
11-177 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.2.2 Measurement Type
The group just under the Region is called Root Group. The
measurement just under the Region is also called Root
Measurement. Root Group and Root Measurement are unit to
alter display on Measurement report. In Measurement report
display, the following 3 formats are available. (For
details, refer to "11.6 Measurement Report function".)
• Standard format
This is the most simple format to display measurement
name, measurement item names and its measurement results.
• Obstetric Measurement format

This displays various data such as gestational age and
estimated date of confinement necessary for obstetric
measurement report.
• LR Display format
This displays measurement results of the same regions
as compared in the left and right sides such as peripheral
vessel measurement (carotid).
Accordingly, when newly creating Root Group and Root

Measurement, it is necessary to designate which format is
used.
Adding the format in which items to be displayed in the

measurement result display area can be changed to the above
3 formats, these 4 formats are called [Measurement Type].
The Measurement Types are defined with the following 4 types.
< Measurement Types >
• Standard
Measurement report is displayed in the standard format.
• Obstetric
Measurement report is displayed in the obstetric
measurement format.
11-178 Q1E-EA0611
• LR-Meas.
Measurement report is displayed in the LR display format.
The Measurement created in LR-Meas. type is automatically
affixed with "L-" or "R-" to the top of the Measurement
name and each of them is executed as separate measurement.
• Hierarchy
This type allows measurement items displayed in the
Measurement Result Display area to be changed by using
a function key. For this purpose, "Item Group" must be
created. "Item Group" can be created only for measurement
in the Hierarchy Measurement type.
Measurement type is designated on the following dialog menu

when Root Group or Root Measurement is newly created.
Selection of
Measurement
Type
Fig. 11.5.2.2-1 Selection of Measurement Type
Note that Measurement Type cannot be changed after it is

once set up. If it is erroneously set up, delete it and
then create it again. "Property" shown at the right to
Measurement Type shown in Fig. 11.5.2.2-1 is called Root
property, with which settings special to the selected
measurement type can be made. The following settings are
included in Root Property.
11-179 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.5.2.2-1 Setting of Root Property
Kind of item Measurement Settings of Root Property
type
Root Group Standard "Display" and "Open In Menu"
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-2.)
Obstetric Settings for Obstetric Measurement
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-4.)
LR-Meas. "Display" and "Open In Menu"
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-2.)
Root Measurement Standard Same as Measurement Property
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-5.)
Obstetric Settings for Obstetric Measurement
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-4.)
LR-Meas. Same as Measurement Property
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-5.)
Hierarchy Same as Measurement Property
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-5.)
"Open In Menu" shown in the above table is set up on the following dialog.
Fig. 11.5.2.2-2 Setting Display and Open In Menu
By setting "Display" in OFF position, the selected group or measurement

will not be displayed in Measurement menu.
"Open In Menu" is set to OFF in default. Setting "Open In Menu" to ON

does not display the group name in the Measurement Result Display area,
instead the contents of that group are displayed in the area where the
group is to be displayed.
11-180 Q1E-EA0611
Display in Measurement Menu
Region called "Example"
Root Group (just under Region)

Contents of
Group are
displayed.
Open In Menu setting in
"Group"
Setting Measurement
Setup
Set to OFF Set to ON
Fig. 11.5.2.2-3 Open In Menu Setting and Measurement Menu Display
11-181 Q1E-EA0611
Property for Obstetric Measurement is set on the following dialog menu.
Fig. 11.5.2.2-4 Property for Obstetric Measurement
Details of setting items are shown on the next page.
11-182 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.5.2.2-2 Property Setting Items for Obstetric Measurement
Category Setting item Description
Menu Display Display Setting Settings for display on Measurement menu
are made. (Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-2.)
By setting this in Off position, the selected
group or measurement will not be displayed
in Measurement menu.
Open in Menu Open In Menu is set.
(Refer to Fig. 11.5.2.2-1.)
Note: This cannot be set in Root
Measurement.
Settings Gestational Period Gestational period is set. It is set to 40
weeks in default.
Deviation in Graph In growth evaluation by standard deviation
(SD), how many times of the standard
deviation the safety region to be displayed in
graph is set is designated.
Display GA and EDC by U/S Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on U/S are
displayed or not in the Measurement Result
Display area or report is set.
GA and EDC by LMP Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on LMP
are displayed or not in the Measurement
Result Display area or report is set.
GA and EDC w/o AC Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on U/S are
calculated from the data excluding the
measurement variable "AC" (abdominal
circumference) and are displayed or not in
the Measurement Result Display area or
report is set.
GA and EDC by DGA Whether gestational age (GA) and estimated
date of confinement (EDC) based on DGA
are displayed or not in the Measurement
Result Display area or report is set.
EDC based on each parameters Whether estimated date of confinement is
calculated from the measurement result for
each of fetal measurement variables such as
BPD (Biparietal diameter) and FL (Femur
length) and is displayed or not in the
Measurement Result Display area or report is
set.
Ranking based on GA by U/S Whether Rank value is displayed or not with
DGA set by [GA by U/S] is set.
11-183 Q1E-EA0611
Property can be set not only to Root Measurement but also to [Measurement].
Fig. 11.5.2.2-5 Measurement Property
Display Options: on/off

[on] : Settings are displayed on Measurement menu. (In
case the window mode allowing execution of its
measurement is different from the current window
mode, it is not displayed.)
[off] : Settings are not displayed on Measurement menu.
Schema Display Options: on/off
[on] : Schema is displayed on Measurement menu.
[off] : Schema is not displayed on Measurement menu.
Measurement Max Times Options: 1/2/3/4/5
How many times each measurement item included in
Measurement can be made is set. With "1" set,
"Measurement No. Display" is automatically set to
"Off" and its operation is disabled.
Measured No. Display Options: on/off
[on] : Number of measurements is displayed at the left of
the measurement item in the Measurement Result
Display area.
Number of measurements means how many times its
measurement item was measured.
[off] : Number of measurements is not displayed.
11-184 Q1E-EA0611
Measurement continues in freeze off Options: on/off
[on] : Measurement is not stopped even if FREEZE OFF is
selected.
[off] : Measurement is stopped if FREEZE OFF is selected.
In this case, Auto RF Hide is disabled.
Auto RF Hide Options: on/off
[on] : By selecting FREEZE OFF during measurement in dual
screen mode, the measurement result display frame
is automatically hidden.
By selecting FREEZE ON, it is displayed again.
[off] : Even if FREEZE OFF is selected during measurement
in dual screen mode, the measurement result display
frame is not hidden.
Report Display Options: on/off
[on] : Whether measurement result is displayed or not in
report. Number of measurements for the measurement
result depends on the setting for "Measurement Max
Times".
[off] : Measurement result is not displayed in report. In
this case, setting of "Measured No. Display" is
disabled in the Measurement Edit menu.
Number of Measurements is also automatically set
to "1" and operation of "Measurement Max Times" is
disabled.
Automatic Execution Options: on/off
[on] : When measurement is invoked, the measurement item
is executed in automatic mode.
[off] : When measurement is executed, the measurement item
is manually selected by user.
11-185 Q1E-EA0611
Mode Restriction Options: on/off
[on] : Settings are displayed on Measurement menu with
restriction to the specified window mode. Setting
this in "on" enables the "Mode" button located next
to the check box. Pressing this button opens the
menu to set the window mode allowing execution of
that measurement. There are 3 check boxes of B,
M and D. Place a check mark in the box to allow
the desired measurement (set it in on). For example,
placing a check mark only in M displays the
measurement on Measurement menu only when M-mode
appears on the window.
[off] : The setting to display only the specified window
mode on Measurement menu is not used.
In the case of Hierarchy type measurement, in addition to the above

items, following 3 items, "Change Group Function Label", "Open In Menu"
and "Default Selection of Item Group" are added.
Fig. 11.5.2.2-5-1 Measurement Property
11-186 Q1E-EA0611
Change Group Function Label
Label to be displayed on function key is input by
A/N keys.
(Display of measurement items in the item group can
be simultaneously changed by the function key.)
Open In Menu Options: on/off
[on] : When item group is displayed in the measurement
result display area, both the name of the item group
and measurement item names in it are displayed.
[off] : When item group is displayed in the measurement
result display area, only the measurement items in
the item group are displayed.
Default Selection of Item Group
Item group that is to be first selected when starting
the measurement program is selected.
11.5.2.3 Functions of [Measurement Setup] menu
Copy Group, Measurement, etc. clicked on menu are copied.
Paste Copied item is pasted on menu. However, if the

Measurement Types of the copy source and copy
destination are different each other (refer to
11.5.2.2), the item cannot be pasted. In the case
the item is the one cut from the copy source in this
case, paste it again to the original place.
Cut Measurement and any of others on menu are cut.
Rename Name of Measurement and any of others are renamed.
Delete Measurement and any of others are deleted from menu.
Edit Contents of Measurement and Measurement Item are

edited. (Refer to 11.5.3.)
New Region A Region is newly created.
New Group A Group is newly created.
New Meas. A Measurement is newly created.
New Item A Measurement Item is newly created.
New Item Grp. An Item Group is newly created.
11-187 Q1E-EA0611
Separator This is used when a separation line is inserted
between Measurement Names in Measurement Menu
display and a space is put in between Measurement
Items to be displayed in the Measurement Result
Display area.
Property Data special to the selected Group and Measurement

are set.
Special OB table data is input and output, and setting of

measurement data output is made.
Export/Import Measurement items are exported to and imported from

the external memory medium.
OK After all settings are correctly completed, this

"OK" button is clicked.
Cancel Pressing this button cancels all the changes made

to Measurement and Items and closed the window.
11-188 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.3 Measurement Edit Menu
Selecting Measurement or Measurement Item on the Measurement Setup

menu described before and pressing Edit button start the
Measurement Edit menu.
Measurement name (Measurement name under edition is displayed.)
Measurement
Item Edition
area
Measurement
Items list
Fig. 11.5.3-1 Appearance of Measurement Edit Menu
[Measurement Item Edit area] shown in the above Fig. is grouped into
4 tabs of "Main", "Sub", "Tool" and "Tool2".
11-189 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.3.1 Basic operation
The basic operation procedures (new addition, deletion and
edition) to be done on the Measurement Edit menu are shown
below.
< Procedures for new addition >
Press NEW button.
Various settings of measurement items are made.

• Selection of Measurement Tool (Main tab)
• Setting display unit (Main tab)
• Setting parameters related to display (Sub tab)
• Setting Tool property (Tool and Tool2 tabs)
Press Register button.

(Completion of registration of
one measurement item)
Fig. 11.5.3.1-1 Procedures for New Addition of Measurement Item
NOTICE The contents to be set in [Various settings of measurement items]

depend on the selected Measurement Tool. For details refer to
"11.8 Measurement Tool".
11-190 Q1E-EA0611
< Procedures for deletion >
Measurement item can be deleted on the Measurement Setup menu, but
the deletion procedures on the Measurement Edition menu are shown
below.
Select the Measurement Item to be deleted from Measurement Items list.
Press Delete button.
Fig. 11.5.3.1-2 Procedures for Deletion of Measurement Item
Pressing Delete button displays the deletion confirmation dialog.

Selecting "Yes" completes the deletion. Selecting "No" cancels the
deletion.
< Procedures for edition >
Select the measurement item to be edited in the Measurement Items list.
Settings of Measurement Item are changed.

• Selection of Measurement Tool (Main tab)
• Setting display unit (Main tab)
• Setting parameters related to display (Sub tab)
• Setting Tool property (Tool and Tool2 tabs)
Press Register button.

(Completion of registration of
one measurement item)
Fig. 11.5.3.1-3 Procedures for Edition of Measurement Item
11-191 Q1E-EA0611
If any operation other than deletion was executed for the measurement
item, be sure to press Register button to compete the registration.
Trying selection of other measurement item in the Measurement Items
list without doing this operation will display the following dialog.
Fig. 11.5.3.1-4 Confirmation Dialog for Change of Measurement Item
Pressing OK button cancels all the editions made for the measurement
item before change and a new measurement item is selected. Pressing
Cancel button discontinues the change of the measurement item and returns
to the Edition window again.
11-192 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.3.2 Measurement Item Edition area
The Measurement Item Edition area is composed of 4 tabs
of "Main", "Sub", "Tool" and "Tool2". Functions of the tabs
are described below.
"Main" tab : Basic parameters necessary for executing the

measurement item are set. Measurement tools
and display unit are set.
"Sub" tab : Parameters related to display (such as
whether the settings are to be displayed in
Measurement Result Display area and report)
are set.
"Tool" tab : This is a measurement tool (single tool), and
it is set when setting the parameters special
to that tool is required.
"Tool2" tab : The function is same as that of "Tool" tab.
Details of each tab are described below.

(1) Main tab
Setting items on the Main tab differ depending on its Measurement
Type of the measurement being edited (refer to 11.5.2.2). Setting
items of Standard type and Hierarchy type are same, but Obstetric
type and LR-Meas. type include more setting items in addition to
those of Standard type. The appearance of the tab for each
measurement type is shown below.
Fig. 11.5.3.2-1 Main Tab (Standard Type and Hierarchy Type)
11-193 Q1E-EA0611
The area different from that of
Standard type
Fig. 11.5.3.2-2 Main Tab (Obstetric Type)
The area different from

that of Standard type
Fig. 11.5.3.2-3 Main Tab (LR-Meas. Type)
11-194 Q1E-EA0611
Details of setting items are described below.
< Setting items common to all measurement types >
Name Name of measurement item is edited. Selecting a measurement

item from Measurement Items list displays its name and
characters can now be input from the alphanumeric keyboard.
Input a name that is different from others in the measurement.
If name of this item is changed and the measurement item
is used in the calculation equation, the name in the equation
is automatically changed, thereby it is not necessary to
change the name in the calculation equation.
Tool A measurement tool is selected. By executing the selected

measurement tool, measurement result for the measurement
item can be obtained.
For details of measurement tool, refer to "11.8 Measurement
Tool".
Unit This is a display unit of measured value. Since flow

velocity value of Doppler image varies according to display
unit of Doppler scale, the velocity unit set here is effective
for the calculation equation.
Method A method usable in the specified measurement tool (single

tool) is selected. When the selected measurement tool does
not require setting of method, the operation is disabled.
Equation This can be set when "Calculation" tool is selected as

measurement tool.
It is also possible to use variables in calculation equation
that are not registered. However, the name of the
measurement item corresponding to that calculation equation
is displayed as "<Invalid Calc>" in the measurement items
list until registration of all the variables to be used
in the calculation equation is completed. In this status,
any item in the calculation equation is not displayed in
either of the Measurement Result Display area and report.
After all the variables to be used in the calculation equation
are registered, select the items in the equation again and
press "Register" button, and verify that the measurement
item in the equation has been changed from "<Invalid Calc>"
to the original name of the measurement.
11-195 Q1E-EA0611
The Equation should be registered according to the followings.
Table 11.5.3.2-1 The specification of equation
Item Contents
equation User can enter up to about 200 letters for an equation (Since the maximum
length of equation is defined with the fixed width and the width of each letter is
different depending on the character, the length is not exactly 200.
operator Four rules of arithmetic (+ - * /), Power ( ^ ), bracket ()
constant a numerical value (should directly be input),
"SPI" : the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter
variable Measurement Item, "BSA" : Body Surface Area
function max(), min(), abs(), ChkNonNeg()
The details of function are shown below.

Table 11.5.3.2-2 The details of function
function example Contents
max() max(a, b, c) This function returns the maximum value of all
variables in the brackets. In the brackets, the total
number of variables and constants must be at least
2. For the left example, the function returns the
maximum value of all measurement items (variables)
a, b and c.
min () min(d1, d2) This function returns the minimum value of all
variables in the brackets. In the brackets, the total
number of variables and constants must be at least
2. For the left example, the function returns the
minimum value of all measurement items(variables)
d1 and d2.
abs() abs(Velo) This function returns the absolute value of the a
variable in brackets. In the brackets, only one
variable should be entered. For the left example, this
function returns the absolute value of the
measurement item "Velo".
ChkNonNeg() ChkNonNeg(d) This function returns the value by the following rule;
-If the value in the brackets is 0 or larger, the function
returns the value directly.
-If the value in the brackets is negative, the function
returns "Error".
11-196 Q1E-EA0611
The initial value item can be set against a measurement by using a "(=X)" next
to the measurement item(variable). Note that the ‘X’ here means a numerical value.
Example : D(=0)
In this case, the measurement item ‘D’ is initialized by 0 before the value is
actually measured. Therefore, a calculation of "A+D" gets the calculated value
normally after the both value of ‘A’ and ‘D’ are measured, but in the case above,
since the ‘D’ is initialized by 0, the value "A+D" is calculated right after the
value ‘A’ is measured.
Input Functions and constants usable in calculation equation can

be selected and input. With this function, the operator
can input any of the usable functions and constants without
remembering them.
Select Any of the calculations equations provided in the scanner

system can be selected and input. In the calculation
equations are included those such as fetal weight estimation
equation in the obstetric measurement.
According to the name of the measurement item, whether it

can be selected or not is defined. The input calculation
equation can be edited even if it is the equation preset
in the system.
Check Pressing this button allow the registered calculation

equation to be checked if it is correct or not. If it is
correct, the message "Equation is Valid" is displayed. If
it is not correct, the dialog indicating the incorrect point
is displayed. Pressing "Register" button in this status
displays the item of the equation as "<Invalid Calc>" in
the Measurement Items list.
Use When Measurement Tool is used by substitution method, input

the item to substitute. For example, in the case the item
of B-Distance tool is used as substitution method, input
the name of measurement item for the 2 points to be measured
by Point tool. To input it, set the Check box at the left
of "Use" to On to make the input area at the right side
ready for operation, and then set it.
Register The measurement item being edited is registered.
11-197 Q1E-EA0611
< Setting items only for Obstetric type >
Twin Mode Any one from the following 4 options is selected for
measurement item for Obstetric Measurement being edited.
• Only Single Measurement is enabled only in Single mode.

Measurement cannot be made with Twin mode
selected.
• Only Twins Measurement is enabled only in Twin mode.

Measurement cannot be made with Single mode
selected.
• Dual Measurement is enabled both in Single mode

and Twin mode.
• Common This is set as measurement item for mother.

Accordingly, the same results are
maintained in either of Twin-A and Twin-B
modes even if it is used in Twin mode.
OB Table
FA A table to estimate gestational age can be selected. The

contents to be selected differ according to parameters and
item unit of Obstetric Measurement being edited. In the
case a variable in Obstetric Measurement is BPD (Biparietal
Diameter), "HAD84", "TODAI96" or "OSAKA U." can be selected
as gestational age table. With "(No Table)" selected, the
table for estimation of gestational age is considered not
to be used and gestational age is not displayed even if
the selected fetal parameter is measured. By pressing
"Edit" button with "New Table" selected, a new table with
a specific name can be created.
User-defined tables up to 5 tables can be created for each
measurement item. If any measurement item name or
measurement tool is changed after a gestational age table
is selected by the user, the gestational age table is
automatically changed to "(No Table)".
Edit Pressing this button displays the Table Edit dialog for
the selected gestational age table. If "Edit" is pressed
with "New Table" selected, a table for estimation of
gestational age is set ready for new creation.
11-198 Q1E-EA0611
FG A table for evaluation of fetal growth is selected. Contents
to be selected differ according to obstetric measurement
parameters and items being selected. In the case a variable
in Obstetric Measurement is BPD (Biparietal Diameter),
"HAD84", "TODAI96" or "OSAKA U." can be selected as fetal
growth table. Each table has unit. The table with the same
unit as that of the currently selected item is displayed
as option.
When "(No Table)" is selected, fetal growth data is not
displayed with the selected fetal parameters. Pressing
"Edit" button with "New Table" selected allows a new table
with a specific name to be created.
User-defined tables up to 5 tables can be created for each
measurement item. If any measurement item name or
measurement tool is changed after a fetal growth table is
selected by the user, the fetal growth table is automatically
changed to "(No Table)".
Edit Pressing this button displays the Table Edit dialog for
the selected fetal growth table. If "Edit" is pressed with
"New Table" selected, a table for fetal growth evaluation
is set ready for new creation.
Delete Tables
The user-created table for Obstetric Measurement is deleted.
Pressing this button opens the Deletion dialog.
< Setting items only for LR-Mea. type >

L/R With L/R Check box set to ON, measurement items are displayed
in the measurement result display area at both the L-side
and R-side. In this case, left item and right item have
different measurement value respectively. With L/R Check
box set to OFF, this measurement is handled as common item,
and the same value is displayed in both the left and right
display areas. To declare the measurement as L/R
measurement, usually set this Check box to ON.
11-199 Q1E-EA0611
(Common key and display in Edit window)
List of Measurement Items
Measurement items included in the measurement being edited
are displayed.
New A measurement item is newly created. The measurement item

edit area is initialized and set ready for editing. Pressing
this button while "Sub tab" or "Tool tab" being displayed
automatically selects "Main tab" to be displayed.
Delete Pressing this button deletes the item selected in the

Measurement Items list.
Link The Link Setting dialog is opened.
OK Pressing this "OK" button registers all the contents edited

for the measurement item and closed the dialog.
Cancel Pressing this "Cancel" button closes the dialog without

registering all the contents edited for the measurement
item.
(2) Sub tab
Fig. 11.5.3.2-4 Sub Tab
11-200 Q1E-EA0611
Report name This is a name of the measurement item to be displayed on
Measurement report. A name longer than the one displayed
in the Measurement Result Display area can be set.
Result Frame
On Selecting "On" displays the measurement item on the
Measurement Result Display area.
Off Selecting "Off" does not display the measurement item on
the Measurement Result Display area.
Appear The measurement item is displayed on the measurement frame
when the item is measured. Until that time, it is not
displayed in the Measurement Result Display area.
Report This sets whether measurement result is to be displayed

or not on the Measurement report.
Item Name This sets whether the measurement item name is to be displayed
near the delineated trace immediately after the measurement
is made.
Short Cut This sets whether the short cut function to start the
measurement item by one touch operation is to be used or
not. Setting this to On sets the alphanumeric keys to
measurement items for short cut key of measurement and
displays them in the Measurement Result Display area.
Alphabet for short cut is automatically set.
By executing a measurement, an alphabet for the short cut
is displayed in ( ) after the measurement item name.
Pressing an alphabet during measurement executes the
measurement item. This is mainly used for obstetric
measurement.
11-201 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Tool tab
A property of the measurement item depending on measurement tool
(single tool) is set. This can be set if the selected measurement
tool is the one that can set property.
A/N Input
Default for Check A/N

Max No. of characters
(Number)
Free Format
Delete
No. of Decimals
Default Sign
Fig. 11.5.3.2-5 Tool Tab
Selection Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on

Main tab, this is enabled. In the case other than this,
this is disabled.
Default for check

Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on
Main tab and Method is set to "Check", this is enabled.
Setting this to On displays this with a check mark when
the measurement report is first opened.
Selection items
Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on
Main tab and Method is set to "List", this is enabled. This
displays options.
Item Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on

Main tab and Method is set to "List", this is enabled. Items
to be displayed as options in report are input.
Enter Only when "Selection" is selected as measurement tool on

Main tab and Method is set to "List", this is enabled. To
register the character string input by "Item" in "Selection
Items", press this Enter button.
11-202 Q1E-EA0611
Delete By selecting the item displayed in "Selection Items" and
pressing "Delete" button, the selected character string
is deleted.
Default This is pressed to set the any desired options as selected

in default when Measurement Report is opened. By selecting
any desired character string in "Selection Items" and
pressing Default button, the selected character string is
set as default selection.
A/N input Format of character string to be input by A/N Input tool

is set.
Max No. of characters

Only when "A/N Input" tool is selected as measurement too
in Main tab and Method is set to "character", this is enabled.
Maximum number of characters in a string to be input can
be set.
Number Format of figure to be input by A/N Input tool is set.
Free format
Only when "A/N Input" tool is selected as measurement tool
in Main tab and Method is set to "Number", this is enabled.
When this check box is set to ON, format of figure that
can be input is not particularly set.
Sign With this check box set to ON, figure with sign can be input.
No. of Decimals
Number of decimal places of figure is set. Any of 1, 1 and
2 is selected. The value set by user is displayed with the
set decimal places. For example, when a value "2" is input
by user and 1 is set as number of decimal place, the input
value is displayed as "2.0".
11-203 Q1E-EA0611
(4) Tool2 tab
A property of the measurement item depending on measurement tool
(single tool) is set. This can be set if the selected measurement
tool is the one that can set property.
Extended Measurement
Fig. 11.5.3.2-6 Tool2 Tab

Calculation
When "Calculation" tool is selected in Main tab as
measurement tool, this can be set. Number of decimal places
(any one of 0, 1, 2 and 3) of calculated result is set.
End Of Title
When "Title" tool is selected in Main tab as measurement
tool, this can be set. Setting this to On causes the cursor
not to move from that item in Measurement Result Display
area. This is used to close measurement of all the
measurement items by the item in Title tool.
Extended Measurement
When "Title" tool is selected in Main tab as measurement
tool and the measurement tool of the execution designated
by Title tool corresponds to the specific application, this
can be set. This is a very special setting. It can be set
currently only in the case the measurement to be executed
is in "D-Trace" Link tool andmeasurement items corresponds
to "HR" attribute. Title Tool "R-R" is an example of this
case. In this case, the first measurement simultaneously
11-204 Q1E-EA0611
provides a result by measurement of the item "RV-TRACE"
of other Title tool, but "R-R" can be manually selected
and only the measurement between R-R can be made again.
Register
Registered contents of setting.
11.5.3.3 Link Setup

To obtain a result by executing calculation or measurement,
one measurement item uses one measurement tool.
(Example)
To use the measurement item "D1" as distance measurement,
"Distance" is selected as a measurement tool. However, in
case of LVOT measurement (left ventricle outlet tract
Doppler measurement), values of multiple measurement items
included in LVOT measurement can be simultaneously obtained
usually through one Doppler waveform trace. To
simultaneously obtain such multiple results by one
measurement, [Link Tool] is used. For details of Link Tool,
refer to "11.8 Measurement Tool". Setup procedures of Link
Tool are described below.
Pressing "Link" button in Measurement Edit menu opens the

following Link Setup menu
Fig. 11.5.3.3-1 Link Setup Menu
11-205 Q1E-EA0611
Setup items in the menu are described below.
Measurement Name of measurement being edited is displayed.
Link Selection
Name Link name is selected and set.

Tool Link tool is selected.
Method Method of the selected link tool is set. In the case any
link that does not require any method is selected, this
cannot be set.
Link Name Display

This sets whether the link name is displayed near the measured
trace or not when a measurement is executed by the link
tool.
Property Settings specific to the link tool are made.
Linked Items
The measurement items linked to the link object being
selected are displayed.
Change Attribute
Attribute of the item selected in "Linked Items" box is
changed.
Link The measurement item selected in "Unlinked Items" box is

linked to the link object being selected in "Name" box.
Unlink The measurement item displayed in "Linked Items" box is

unlinked and moved to "Unlinked Items" box.
Unlinked items
Measurement items available to be linked to the link object
being selected are displayed.
New Link A link is newly created.
Delete Link
The existing link is deleted and linkage to all the
measurement items linked to that link is unlinked.
11-206 Q1E-EA0611
By pressing Link button and by pressing Change Attribute button, the
following Ling Attribute Setting menu is displayed.
Fig. 11.5.3.3-2 Link Attribute Setting Menu
Attribute Attribute of Link tool is set.
Figure Options: on/off

[on] : With Point tool used, the figure is displayed
together when that point is displayed on the window.
(It is used with Schema in M-mode.)
[off] : With Point tool used, the figure is not displayed
when that point is displayed on the window.
In the option box are displayed the selectable figure names.

It can be operated only with "Display" set in on.
Unit Unit of measurement item is set. Options vary depending

on the attribute of the currently selected Link tool.
Label To display label next to each plot point in measurement,

its label is input by A/N keys.
11-207 Q1E-EA0611
Link Property of Link Tool is described below.
This is a property to be set when Link Tool is used. This has data to
be set specially depending on Link Tool. This menu can be set for the
selected link. This menu is opened by pressing Property button on Link
Setup menu.
By pressing OK button for all properties enable, the property enables
the set contents and close the menu. Pressing Cancel button disables
the settings and close the menu.
(a) Property for D-Trace Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-3 D-Trace Tool Property
Auto Trace With Method set to Auto, this can be set. In other cases,
this is disabled. Any one of "Peak", "Mean" and "Mode" is
selected.
Velocity Correction
A coefficient of flow velocity correction equation is set.
C1 This is composed of an integer part with one digit and decimal

part with two digits. Default value is "1.00". If the
decimal part is "00", input of decimal point and the decimal
part can be omitted.
11-208 Q1E-EA0611
C2 This is composed of an integer part with 3 digits and decimal
part of one digit. If the decimal part is "0", input of
decimal point and the decimal part can be omitted. In the
case any sign is not set, it is regarded as "+".
dP/dt The parameters should be set for calculating dP/dt value.
V1 Set the first Velocity
V2 Set the second Velocity
Unit Set the unit of velocity for V1 and V2 above. m/s or cm/s
can be selected.
(b) Property for HR Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-4 HR Tool Property
Beat Number of beats for heart rate measurement is set. It means

number of heartbeats during the specified time interval.
A value from 1 to 9 can be input.
11-209 Q1E-EA0611
(c) Property for Histogram Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-5 Histogram Tool Property
Number of Area
Number of area to be measured by Histogram tool is set.
Number of area is 1 or 2.
Scaling of Graph
This is enabled only when "2" is selected for the above
[Number of Area]. With Number of Area set to 2, two
histograms can be displayed together on the same screen
after measurement, and scale of the ordinate of histogram
in this case can be selected. Selecting [Independent]
select the independent scaling, while selecting [Common]
selects the common scaling.
For the independent scaling and common scaling, refer to
"11.4.1 [14] Histogram measurement".
11-210 Q1E-EA0611
(d) Property for Biplane Simpson Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-6 Biplane Simpson Tool Property
Slice Number of slices to be measured by Biplane Simpson tool

is set.
A value in a range from 1 to 99 can be input.
(e) Property for Angle Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-7 Angle Tool Property
Line Number
With this check box checked, a line number is displayed
during execution of Angle tool. If this is not checked,
line number is not displayed.
11-211 Q1E-EA0611
(f) Property for dP/dt Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-8 dP/dt Tool Property
V1 Velocity at the first point in dP/dt measurement is set.
V2 Velocity at the second point in dP/dt measurement is set.
Unit Unit of velocity at the first and second points in dP/dt

measurement is set.
(g) Property for PISA Tool
Fig. 11.5.3.3-9 Property for PISA Tool
Alias.Velo Direction
Option : Negative/Positive
[Negative] : Alias denotes the maximum velocity in the
backward direction.
[Positive] : Alias denotes the maximum velocity in the
forward direction.
11-212 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.3.4 Edition of Obstetric table
Edition procedures of the table for estimation of gestational age (FA

table) and the table for fetal growth evaluation (FG table) that are
used in Obstetric measurements are described below. To make edition
of Obstetric table, measurement item (BPD, AC, etc.) for obstetric
measurement that is to be edited on Measurement Edition menu must first
be selected. For edition of Obstetric table for Todai method BPD, start
the Setup Menu in the following procedures.
Fig. 11.5.3.4-1 Selection of Item for Obstetric Measurement
Select OB-Today/Fetal Para/BPD in Abdo&Others region on Measurement

Setup menu, and pressing Edit button opens the Edit menu for Fetal Para
measurement.
Fig. 11.5.3.4-2 Measurement Edition Menu
11-213 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Creation of new Obstetric table
To create a new Obstetric table, for the selected measurement item,
select "New Table" in the table selection box of FA or FG table
to be newly created in OB table box of Measurement Edition menu,
and then press Edit button.
Fig. 11.5.3.4-3 Edition of Obstetric Table
Then, Obstetric Table Edition menu is opened. Two kinds of Edition

menu are available according to the type of FA table (for estimation
of gestational age) and FG table (for evaluation of fetal growth).
11-214 Q1E-EA0611
Box to input Obstetric table name
Area to input data
Fig. 11.5.3.4-4 Edition Menu of Obstetric Table for Gestational

Age Estimation
Procedures to input table data are described below.
• Input name of Obstetric table in "Table Name" box.
• Input a measurement value in "Value" area and also input number of

weeks corresponding to the input value.
• Upon completing input of a data, pressing Register button registers

the input data and it is displayed in the data display area on the
menu.
• After inputting all data and by pressing Save button, the table is
stored in the memory.
Pressing Cancel button clears the edited data and closes the Table
Edit menu.
• Selecting any data to be deleted and pressing Delete button deletes

the selected data.
11-215 Q1E-EA0611
Box to imput Obstetric table name
Area to input data

Check box to select
Normal distribution
Area to display data
Fig. 11.5.3.4-5 Edition Menu of Obstetric Table for Fetal Growth

Evaluation
Procedures to input table data are described below.
• Input name of Obstetric table in "Table Name" box.
• Select either SD or % in Rank box. In the case SD is selected, input

±SD value of Table data. In the case % is selected, input the maximum %
value and the minimum % value of Table data.
'Normal dist' check box display if % in Rock is selected. The table
is assumed as normal distribution and exact %ile Value is calculated
if the check box is ON.
• Input a measurement value in "Value" area and also input number of

weeks corresponding to the input value.
• Input gestational weeks and days in Data Input box.
• Input the minimum, average and maximum values of measurement results

corresponding to the input gestational weeks and days.
• Upon completing input of a data, press Register button. The input

data is registered and it is displayed in the data display area on
the menu.
• After inputting all data and by pressing Save button, the table is
stored in the memory. Pressing Cancel button clears the edited data
and closes the Table Edit menu.
11-216 Q1E-EA0611
• Selecting any data to be deleted and pressing Delete button deletes
the selected data.
• Pressing Next Page button moves to the next page.
Don’t check a Normal dist. check box if it is not certain that

the table is carrying out the normal distribution. The correct
result will not be obtained if this function is used on the table
which has not carried out a normal distribution.
(2) Edit of Obstetric table
The procedures to edit the current Obstetric table are described

below.
In the same procedures as those for creation of new table, select
the table to be edited on FA or FG table in OB Table list in Measurement
Edit menu, and press Edit button to start Table Edit menu.
Fig. 11.5.3.4-6 Edition of Current Obstetric Table
By selecting the table data to be edited, the selected table data

is displayed in Data Input area.
11-217 Q1E-EA0611
Selected table data are displayed.
Selected
table data
Fig. 11.5.3.4-7 Selection of Desired Data
By changing the value in Data Input box for the selected data and pressing
Register button, data is replaced with the new data.
Other operation procedures are shown below.
• To input a data, select the box where no data is input, and then input
data in Data Input box and press Register button. Pressing Register
button inserts the data in the appropriate position in table data.
• Pressing "Save" button stores the table data, but if it is not the
table created by user, table data must be input under different name.
In such case, the following message is displayed.
Fig. 11.5.3.4-8 Message requesting Change of Obstetric Table Name
Input a name in EDIT box in this message and press OK button. Then,
the name is registered as user-defined Obstetric table. To change and
11-218 Q1E-EA0611
register a part of the tables incorporated in the system at the factor
before shipment, follow the above procedures.
Edition of Obstetric table for fetal growth evaluation can also be made
in the same procedures as those for gestational age estimation table.
(3) Deletion of Obstetric table
The procedures to delete Obstetric table are described below. The

Obstetric tables incorporated in the system at the factor before
shipment cannot be deleted. Only the Obstetric table created by
the user can be deleted. Pressing Delete button in OB Table region
on Measurement Edit menu lists up all the user-defined Obstetric
tables registered in the currently selected Obstetric Measurement
item.
Fig. 11.5.3.4-9 Obstetric Table Deletion Menu
Select the table to be deleted on this menu, and press Delete Table
button. The selected table is deleted. Then, pressing OK button
completes deletion, while pressing Cancel button cancels deletion
of the table.
11-219 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.4 Special menu
Pressing Special button on the Measurement Setup menu displays

Special menu.
11.5.4.1 Import and Export of OB table

Selecting OB Table tag on Special menu display the following
menu.
On this menu, OB table can be exported to and imported from
the external memory medium.
Fig. 11.5.4.1-1 Import and Export Menu of OB Table
Import : Import menu of OB table is displayed.
Export : Export menu of OB table is displayed.
Gestation Period : Setting 40w0d in default.
11-220 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.4.2 Import menu of OB table
OB table can be imported from the external memory medium
on this menu.
Fig. 11.5.4.2-1 Import Menu of OB Table
Meas. Item List of measurement items on the OB table saved in

the external memory media is displayed.
Fetal Age Table List of Fetal Age Table corresponding to the item
selected by Meas. Item. is displayed.
Fetal Growth Table

List of Fetal Growth Table corresponding to the item
Import from The memory medium from which OB table is imported

is selected.
Import The selected OB table is imported.
Close The menu is closed.
11-221 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.4.3 Export menu of OB table
OB table can be exported to the external memory medium on
this menu.
Fig. 11.5.4.3-1 Export Menu of OB Table
Meas. Item List of measurement items on the OB table saved in

the scanner unit is displayed.
Fetal Age Table List of Fetal Age Table corresponding to the item
Fetal Growth Table

List of Fetal Growth Table corresponding to the item
Export to The memory medium to which OB table is exported is

selected.
Export The selected OB table is exported.
Close The menu is closed.
11-222 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.4.4 Measurement result filing setup
The memory medium in which the default of measurement result
is saved can be set on this menu.
Fig. 11.5.4.4-1 Measurement Result Filing Setup Menu
Drive The memory drive to which measurement result is filed

is selected.
Browse on Net Network drive is designated as the memory drive.
File Format It specify a form that saves file.
You can select Unicode or ASCII.
In reading both the forms can be read in the same

way.
Show guidelines in M and D modes
Selecting check box, guidelines display is possible

in M and D modes measurement.
11-223 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.4.5 Unique ID menu
Although the measured result can be saved to a memory medium, unique

ID can be named and managed so that it can take out the result for
other purpose easily.
Fig 11.5.4.5-1 Unique ID menu
Item Name : A measurement name is specified(For example : BPD and

so on). Besides, regulation registered is that unique
ID of fixation is set. Output data of Measurement is that
following unique ID is attached. Out put of measurement
data is refer to "11.6.4 Input and output of measurement
result".
11-224 Q1E-EA0611
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ID
Region SubGroup GroupItem Attribute

Group Measurement Item
Resion Possible range 00 – 31
: System reserved 00 – 15
User defined possible range 16 – 31
Groupe Possible range 001 – 999
: System reserved 001 –499
(Besides, 000 is unusable as using root)
Sub Group Possible range 00 – 99
: System reserved 00 –49
Measurement Possible range 00 – 99
Group Item Possible range 00 – 99
Item Possible range 00 – 99
Attribute Possible range 00 – 99
: 00 – 19 1 screen measurement or 2 screen L side.
20 – 39 Twins' embryo A side or 2 screen R side.
40 – 59 Twins' embryo B side
Perform ID Swap : Checking "ON", following item is
displayed ID can be exchange or change.
List of all child ID’s : Selecting same class measurement, unique
ID can be exchange.
Swap ID’s : Pressing this botton, unique ID selected
above can be exchange.
Catalogue : Output text file including unique ID.
11-225 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.5 Examples of measurement edition
11.5.5.1 Display or non-display of measurement item

The procedures to set either display or non-display of
measurement item that is most frequently used in Measurement
Setup is shown below.
(Example)
Setting is made so that a measurement item "Acc"
(Acceleration) in Vasc Measurement is not displayed in
Measurement Result Display area.
• Select "Vasc1" measurement from "Vasc" region in Measurement Setup

menu and press Edit button.
(1) Select Vasc1.
(2) Press "Edit" button.
Then, Measurement Edit menu is displayed.
11-226 Q1E-EA0611
• Select "Sub" tab in Measurement Edit menu.
Select "Sub" tab.
Then, Measurement Edition menu turns to display of "Sub" tab.
• Select "Acc" in Measurement Items list.
The selected measurement item is highlighted with blue and white.
11-227 Q1E-EA0611
• Set "Result Frame" in "Display" group in "Sub" table to "Off".
• Press Register button.
Pressing Register button registers all the settings made for the
measurement item "Acc".
11-228 Q1E-EA0611
• Press OK button.
Pressing OK button makes the settings made for "Vasc1" measurement

effective and closes Measurement Edit menu.
• Press OK button again in Measurement Setup menu.
Pressing OK button makes all the settings effective and closes

Even if "Vasc1" measurement is executed thereafter, "Acc" measurement

items are not displayed in Measurement Result Display area.
11-229 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.5.2 Change of display order in Measurement menu and Result
Display area
Display order of measurement and measurement items can be
changed on Measurement menu and Measurement Result Display
area.
As an example, the procedures to move "OB-STD" shown in
"Abdo&Others" region to the top in the menu are shown below.
• Select "Abdo&Others" region in Measurement Setup menu. Then,

measurements and measurement groups registered in "Abdo&Others"
region are displayed in the detailed display area at the right side.
Measurements and
measurement groups
registered in
Abdo&Others region.
• Select "OB-STD" in the detailed display area at the right side.
OB-STD Group Obstetric
11-230 Q1E-EA0611
• Pressing and holding down ENTER key, move the cursor upward by operating
the trackball.
OB-STD Group Obstetric Move the cursor

upward by the
trackball.
• After moving the cursor to the top position and release ENTER key.
Operating the trackball,
move the cursor to the
top position and release
ENTER button.
11-231 Q1E-EA0611
• Upon completion of the relocation, display order in the left display
area is also automatically changed.
"OB-STD" has
Tree display position moved to the top
is also changed.
Since this setting is completed, "OB-STD" is displayed at the top in

Measurement Menu when an application to use "Abdo&Others" measurement
region is selected. To change display order of measurement item, select
the desired measurement in the left display area, and change the display
order in the detailed display area in the same procedure.
11-232 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.5.3 New creation of measurement (by using Single Tool)
The procedures to newly create a measurement by using Single
Tool (for Single Tool, refer to "11.8 Measurement Tool").
As an example, two distances are measured and "Ratio-Dis"
measurement to calculate a ratio between them is created
in "Abdo&Others" region.
• Select "Abdo&Others" region in Measurement Setup menu and press

New Meas button.
"Abdo&Others" region being selected
• The dialog to set measurement name is displayed. Give "Ratio-Dis"

as measurement name, and select "Standard" as measurement type.
After setting them, press OK button to close the dialog.
11-233 Q1E-EA0611
• With the measurement just selected on Measurement Setup menu, press
Edit button.
Measurement
"Ratio-Dist"
immediately after
newly created
• Measurement Edit menu is opened and items are now ready to be setup.
11-234 Q1E-EA0611
• Set Measurement Name to "D1", Tool to "B-Distance" and Unit to no
selection, and then press Register button.
Set items for Measurement Item "D1".
• The set items for Measurement Item "D1" have now been completed. Press
New button.
Registration of Measurement Item "D1" has now been completed.
11-235 Q1E-EA0611
• The window is now ready to register a new measurement item.
• Make registration for Measurement Item "D2" in the same procedures

as that for "D1", and press New button.
11-236 Q1E-EA0611
• The window is now ready to register a new measurement item.
• Set the measurement item "D1/D2" as follows (unit is not set), and
press Register button.
11-237 Q1E-EA0611
• Registration of the measurement item "D1/D2" has now been completed.
Press OK button to close Measurement Edit menu.
• Press OK button to close Measurement Setup menu.
The procedures to create a new measurement have now been completed.

Executing this "Radio-Dis" measurement results in as shown below.
11-238 Q1E-EA0611
Created
Measurement
Measurement Result Display area

(after Measurement executed)
Measurement menu
(with Measurement selected)
11-239 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.5.4 New creation of measurement (by using Link Tool)
The procedures to newly create a measurement by using Link
Tool as measurement tool are shown below. As an example,
a measurement "Doppler" to measure only Vpeak (max. flow
velocity value), Vmean (mean flow velocity value) and PGp
(pressure range for Vpeak) by applying Doppler Auto Trace
by (MODE method) is newly created.
• Select "Cardiac" region in Measurement Setup menu, and press New Meas
button.
• The dialog to set measurement name is displayed. Set "Doppler" in

Measurement Name and "Standard" in Measurement Type, and then press
OK button to close the dialog.
11-240 Q1E-EA0611
• With "Doppler" measurement selected, press EDIT button.
• Measurement Edit menu is opened and measurement items are ready to

be set.
11-241 Q1E-EA0611
• Set "Vpeak" in Measurement Name and "<Link Only>" in Single Tool,
and then press New button.
• Set "Vmean" in Measurement name and "<Link Only>" in Single Tool,

and then press Link button.
11-242 Q1E-EA0611
• Link Setup dialog is opened.
• Set "DTR" in Link Name. (Any name can be input for link name if it
is unique in the measurement.)
11-243 Q1E-EA0611
• Select "D-Trace" for Link Tool.
Select "D-Trace" tool.
• Select "Auto" as trace method.

Select "Auto" as Link Method.
11-244 Q1E-EA0611
• Select the measurement item "Vpeak" in "Unlinked Items" box, and press
Link button.
• The dialog to set link attribute is displayed.
11-245 Q1E-EA0611
• The measurement item "Vpeak" is set as the attribute "Peak Velo."
(max. flow velocity) of Doppler trace. Set "m/s" for Unit. Upon
completion of the setting procedures, press OK button to close this
dialog.
Because the measurement item "Vmean"

is used as name of mean velocity over
time, the attribute "Mean Velo." Of
D-Trace Link tool is designated.
Set "m/s" as unit of velocity value.
m/s
• The attribute of the measurement item "Vpeak" has now been set, and
it has moved to "Linked Items" box.
Measurement item "Vpeak" has

been set to the attribute "Peak
Velo." for max. flow velocity
value in D-Trace Link Tool.
11-246 Q1E-EA0611
• Select the measurement item "Vmean" in "Unlinked Items" box, and press
"Link" button.
• The dialog to set link of the measurement item "Vmean".
11-247 Q1E-EA0611
• Set the measurement item "Vmean" as the attribute "Mean Velo." (time
average flow velocity) in Doppler Trace Link Tool.
Because the measurement item

"Vmean" is used as name of mean
velocity over time, the attribute "Mean
Velo." Of D-Trace Link tool is
designated.
Set "m/s" as unit of velocity value.
• The Link Setup dialog is opened again, and press "Property" button.
All the settings specific to D-Trace tool are made on this dialog.
The measurement item "Vmean" has

been set to the attribute "Mean Velo."
for time average flow velocity value in
D-Trace Link Tool.
11-248 Q1E-EA0611
• Select PEAK method for Doppler Auto Trace, and set a velocity correction
value to make V' = 1.2*V. After setting, press OK button.
Select "Mode".
Set a velocity correction

coefficient to make V' = 1.2*V.
• Press OK button on Link Setup dialog.
11-249 Q1E-EA0611
• Measurement Edit menu is opened again. Press New button to newly
add the measurement item.
• Register the measurement item "PGp" (peak flow velocity pressure range)
in Single Tool "Calculation". After registration, press OK button
to close Measurement Edit menu.
Set items as shown below and press
"Register" button.
11-250 Q1E-EA0611
• Press OK button to close Measurement Setup menu.
Through the above procedures, the measurement "Doppler" to use "D-Trace"

link tool has been newly created.
By executing this measurement, Doppler Auto Trace is performed by PEAK

method, and after velocity correction the measurement results are stored
in "Vpeak", "Vmean" and "PGp" respectively.
11-251 Q1E-EA0611
11.5.6 Measurement Export/Import function
By using Measurement Export/Import function, measurement item

can be saved in the external memory medium or read from the external
memory medium.
11.5.6.1 Opening Measurement Import/Export window

Pressing Import/Export button at the bottom of the
Measurement Setup menu displays the Measurement
Import/Export window.
11.5.6.2 Details of window
Fig. 11.5.6.2-1 Measurement Setup Window

System Measurement items set in the system are displayed.
Media The memory medium for Import/Export is selected. The

following five media can be selected.
Addition Settings
! CD-R/RW
! Factory default
! MO disk(EZU-MO1 Option)
! Floppy disk
! Additional settings
Meantime, for saving or reading data into or out of a
floppy disk it takes a long time. According to data volume
it needs from several minutes to about 30 minutes. For
this reason we recommend you to use CD-R/RW or MO disk.
11-252 Q1E-EA0611
Read Measurement items are read from the memory medium.
(Reading the measurement items may take some time.)
In case that reading isn't carried out though pressing
the Read button , press its button again.
Replace To storage media of right side replace from selecting

item of the equipment in left side.
Read From The name of the memory media from whom data are read and
the read measurement items are displayed.
Export The items selected by the scanner unit (left side) are
exported to the memory medium (right side).
Import The items selected by the memory medium (right side) are
imported to the scanner unit (left side).
New Region A new Region is created in the selected side.
Rename The name of the selected item is renamed.
Delete The selected item is deleted.
Save to Media
The edited result is saved in the memory medium. Until
this button is pressed, the edited result is not saved
in the memory medium.
Close This dialog is closed.

< CAUTION >
The exported data by EUB-6000 system are not read. Also
the exported data by this system are not read by EUB-6000
system.
11.5.6.3 Export of measurement

By selecting the items to be saved in the memory medium
from System in the left side of the window and pressing
Export button, the items are exported to the memory medium.
If Region is selected in this case, the whole Region is
exported. If Measurement Group is selected, the whole Group
is exported. If a single Measurement is selected, the single
measurement is exported.
The data to be exported, if it is a large data volume, may
not be storable in the floppy disk. It is, therefore,
recommended to save the data in the MO disk.
11-253 Q1E-EA0611
And if expected data becomes bigger size, then it often
takes time for processing of exporting.
We recommend that its process to be carry out after that
you select only necessary item.
< CAUTION >
The exported data are not saved in the memory medium until
the Save to Media button is pressed. To save the data,
be sure to press the Save to Media button.
11.5.6.4 Import of measurement

By selecting the items to be imported to the scanner unit
from Read From in the right side of the window and pressing
Import button, the items are imported to the scanner unit.
If Region is selected in this case, the whole Region is
imported.
If Measurement Group is selected, the whole Group is imported.
If a single Measurement is selected, the single measurement
is imported.
< CAUTION >

The exported data are not saved in the scanner unit until
the OK button is pressed on the Measurement Setup window.
To save the data in the scanner unit, be sure to press
the OK button on the Measurement Setup window.
11.5.6.5 Replacement of measurement

By selecting the items to the scanner unit and pushed
[Replace], it can be replaced the items of the scanner. For
example, selecting OB-STD in the left side and selecting
OB-Todai of [Additional Settings], and pushed [Replace],
it can be replaced from OB-STD to OB-Today.
< CAUTION >
1) Replace data is not stored until pushed OK button of
Measurement Setup. In case of stored result of replaced,
it is necessary to push OK button of Measurement Setup.
2) It can not be stored filing data of report and measurement
value on VCR mode and Wide View mode.
11-254 Q1E-EA0611
11.6 Measurement Report Function
Measurement report function allows the measurement results and

related comments to be displayed on the screen and to be output
to the black and white video printer. The contents of the report
can also be stored in the external memory device.
11.6.1 Measurement report selection
REPORT
Pressing key after measurement is made displays
"Measurement report" window.
(1) Measurement repert window
Measurement name
Fig. 11.6.1-1 Measurement Report
Print all report to

PC Printer : Report of all measurements is output to the
printer of the personal computer.
B/W Printer : Report of all measurements is output to the
black-white video printer.
NOTICE: PC-Printer means the printer which is connected to the

parallel port of the computer. Therefore, It is different
from SCSI-Printer. When "PC Printer" button is pressed,
the following menu appears that enables user to select
PC-Printer.
11-255 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.6.1-2 PC Printer Select Dialog
By selecting PC-Printer in "Printer Name" combo box and pressing

OK button, the printing process is performed. If Cancel button
is pressed, the printing process is cancelled.
Data Saving Save : The measurement results are stored

in the external memory device (FD or
MO). (Refer to 11.6.4.)
Filing : The various operations of "read",
"copy", "move" and "delete" can be
done for the saved measurement
results. (Refer to 11.6.4.)
Display The display window of the selected measurement
results is displayed.(Refer to
11.6.2.)
11.6.2 Measurement results display window
Three different window layouts are available according to the

measurement mode of the selected measurement (refer to 11.5.2.2).
The Hierarchy format report display is same as that of the Standard
format.
11-256 Q1E-EA0611
(1) Standard format
The measurement items and resultant data for general measurement
are displayed.
Fig. 11.6.2-1 Measurement Items and Resultant Data
The items displayed on the report window are shown below.
Table 11.6.2-1 Display Items in Report for General Measurement

Display item Description Remarks
Patient ID Patient ID
Patient Name Patient name
Birth date Birth date of patient
Sex Sex M or F or O
Age Patient age Age of patient
Weight Weight
Height Height
BSA Body surface area
Item Measurement item
Value Measurement result
NOTICE: Date and time are displayed at the upper right of the report window.
The functions of the controls are described below.

Comment
Comments are input fully in the entry box from the alphanumeric
keyboard.
11-257 Q1E-EA0611
Prev. page/Next page
This function can be operated when measurement results cannot
be covered by one page. Pressing "Next Page" goes to a next
page. Pressing "Prev. Page" goes back to a previous page.
Print to
PC Printer The measurement results are output to PC
printer.
B/W Printer The measurement results are output to black and
white printer.
Close
The measurement result display window is closed.
NOTICE: For the details of PC-Printer, please refer to "11.6.1(1)

Measurement repert window".
(2) For LR-Meas

The following is the report format for comparative study of
left and right measurement results such as carotid measurement.
Fig. 11.6.2-2 Report Format for LR-Meas
The display items on the report window are described below.
11-258 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.6.2-1 Display Items on LR-Meas Format Report
Sex Sex M or F or O
Age Patient age Age of patient
Weight Weight
Height Height
BSA Body surface area
Item Measurement item
Left Measurement result in left side
Right Measurement result in right side
Common Measurement result of item common
to right and left sides
NOTICE: Date and time are displayed at the upper right of the report window.
The functions of the controls are described below.

Comment
Comments are input fully in the entry box from the alphanumeric
keyboard.
Prev. page/Next page

This function can be operated when measurement results cannot
be covered by one page. Pressing "Next Page" goes to a next
page. Pressing "Prev. Page" goes back to a previous page.
Print to
PC Printer The measurement results are output to PC
printer.
B/W Printer The measurement results are output to black and
white printer.
Close
The measurement result display window is closed.

Measurement report window".
11-259 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Obstetric format
Obstetric measurement results are displayed in this report
format. In addition to measurement values, data such as
gestational age and estimated date of confinement are also
displayed.
Fig. 11.6.2-3 Obstetric Measurement Report Window
11-260 Q1E-EA0611
The display items on the report window are described below.
Table 11.6.2-2 Display Items on Obstetric Measurement Format Report

Age Patient age Age of patient (pregnant woman)
GA by U/S Gestational age by ultrasound Average value of all the estimated
values of gestational age obtained
by US examination
GA by LMP Gestational age by LMP Gestational age obtained by LMP
(=Date of examination - LMP)
DGA Gestational age diagnosed by
physician
GA w/o A/C Gestational age by ultrasound
without A/C
LMP Last menstrual period
Clinical Hx Clinical history
Purpose of U/S Purpose of examination
G Gravidity Max. 2 characters
P Number of parturition Max. 2 characters
AB Number of abortion Max. 2 characters
Item column Measurement item name
Value column Display of measurement value
GA column Gestational age by selected Gestational age calculated by
measurement items average value of measured values
of each measurement item such as
BPD and FL.
EDC column Estimated date of confinement by Estimated date of confinement
selected measurement items calculated by gestational age
obtained by "GA column" of
selected measurement items
FA Table Table name for estimation of
gestational age
Rank Rank value
FG Table Table name for evaluation of fetal
growth
Physician Physician's name
Sonographer Sonographer's name
11-261 Q1E-EA0611
Functions of the controls are described below.
Age Graph
By selecting the measurement item for which table for
gestational age is set and pressing this button, gestational
age table and measured values in graph are displayed. (Refer
to 11.6.3.1.)
Growth Graph
By selecting the measurement item for which table for growth
evaluation is set and pressing this button, fetal growth table
and measurement values in graph are displayed. (Refer to
11.6.3.2.)
Comment, Prev. Page, Next Page, PC Printer, B/W Printer, Close

Functions of these controls are same as those of Standard format.
In the case obstetric measurement is made in Twins mode, "Twins"

controls shown below are displayed on Report display window.
Selection of
Twins Mode
Fig. 11.6.2-4 Selection of Twins Mode
Selecting "A" on this control displays the measurement result

of Twin-A, while selecting "B" displays the measurement result
of Twin-B.
11-262 Q1E-EA0611
Other controls in the area to display measurement results are
shown below.
Icon for Biophysical Score
Selection control
Fig. 11.6.2-5 Special Control
Details of the above 2 controls are described below.
Icon for Biophysical Score:

Clicking the icon for Biophysical Score in Obstetric
Measurement Report shown in Fig. 11.6.2-5 displays the dialog
box to calculate Biophysical Score.
Fig. 11.6.2-6 Calculation of Biophysical Score
By selecting an evaluation value of each item in the dialog

from 2, 0 and NA and clicking on Close, Biophysical Score is
calculated. Each evaluation item takes 2 points or 0 point,
accordingly if all the evaluation items take 2 points, the
11-263 Q1E-EA0611
maximum Score will be 10 points. NA is calculated as 0 point.
In display of Score results, in case one item at lease is NA,
the result is displayed in ( ).
Selection control:
Moving the cursor by operating the trackball up and down, select
a chart item to be input and click on "▼" to display Selection
control and to select it.
11.6.3 Graphic display of obstetric measurement
Clicking on "Age Graph" or "Growth Graph" on the report window

for obstetric measurement shown in 11.6.2 displays a graph
corresponding to the clicked button.
11.6.3.1 Estimated Fetal Age graph
Fig. 11.6.3.1-1 Age Graph and Growth Graph
Display items on graph display window for estimated fetal

age are displayed.
The items shown below are same as those of the Report display
window for obstetric measurement. Refer to Table 11.6.2-2.
Patient ID, Patient Name, Birth Date, Age, G, P, AB, LMP,

GA by LMP, DGA
11-264 Q1E-EA0611
The items other than the above are shown in the next table.
Table 11.6.3.1-1 Display Items on Graph for Estimation of

Gestational Age
Item Item of measurement variable Name of measurement variable as object of
graph to be displayed
Table Table for estimation of
gestational age
Ave. Average value of Average value for the same measurement item
measurement data
GA Estimated gestational age Gestational age estimated from average value
of measurement data
EDC Estimated date of Estimated date of confinement calculated from
confinement by estimated estimated gestational age
gestational age
GA by U/S Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time.
GA w/o AC Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
without AC age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time excluding AC.
Print
All : When outputting the contents of the graph display
to PC printer, all the variables for obstetric
measurement from which gestational age is
estimated are printed.
Selected : When outputting the contents of the graph display

to PC printer, only the currently displayed graphs
of the variables for obstetric measurement are
printed.
To
PC-Printer : Displayed 1 or 8 data in graph are printed
through PC printer
B/W Printer : Displayed data in graph are printed through B/W

video printer.
11-265 Q1E-EA0611
Close
Gestational age estimation graph is closed.

Measurement Window".
In Twins mode, the selection control "Twins" is displayed on window.
Twins selection control
Fig. 11.6.3.1-2 Selection of Twins (in Twin-A mode)
Twins
A Twin-A graph is displayed.
B Twin-B graph is displayed.
A+B Both Twin-A and Twin-B graphs are displayed.
11-266 Q1E-EA0611
Display of the mode other than Twin-A is shown below.
Fig. 11.6.3.1-3 Graph Display of Twins Mode (Twin-B)
Fig. 11.6.3.1-4 Graph Display of Twins Mode (Twin-A and Twin-B)
11-267 Q1E-EA0611
Next, graph display for estimation of gestational age is described below.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
Fig. 11.6.3.2-5 Graph Display for Estimation of Gestational Age
Table 11.6.3.2-2 Description of Fig. 11.6.3.2-5

No. Description Remarks
(1) Fetal growth curve Deviation data of registered gestational age data are
(Deviation) plotted in graph.
(2) Fetal growth curve Standard value data of registered gestational age
(Standard value) data are plotted in graph.
(3) Gestational age bar by U/S Vertical line positioned at the coordinate of
gestational age estimated by U/S.
(4) Plotted measurement data Plotted data (DGA and average value of
measurement data) put on graph that are obtained
on examination dates.
Single mode is represented with '+'. In Twins
mode, '+' represents Twin-A and '×' represents
Twin-B.
11-268 Q1E-EA0611
11.6.3.2 Fetal Growth evaluation graph
Fig. 11.6.3.2-1 Fetal Growth Evaluation Graph
Display items of fetal growth graph are displayed.
The items shown below are same as those of Report Display

window for obstetric measurement. Refer to Table 11.6.2-2.
Patient ID, Patient Name, Birth Date, Age, G, P, AB, LMP,

GA by LMP and DGA
The items other than the above are shown in the following
table.
11-269 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.6.3.2-1 Display Items on Fetal Growth Evaluation Graph
Item Item of measurement variable Name of measurement variable as object of
graph to be displayed
The item for which measurement has already
made is displayed. It can be selected from
options.
Table Table for estimation of
gestational age
Ave. Average value of Average value for the same measurement item
measurement data
Rank Rank value
GA Estimated gestational age Gestational age estimated from average value
of measurement data
EDC Estimated date of Estimated date of confinement calculated from
confinement by estimated estimated gestational age
gestational age
GA by U/S Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time.
GA w/o AC Gestational age by U/S Average value of all the estimated gestational
without AC age values obtained by U/S examinations
made this time excluding AC.
Print
All : When outputting the contents of the graph display
to PC printer, all the variables for obstetric
measurement from which gestational age is
estimated are printed.
Selected : When outputting the contents of the graph display

to PC printer, only the currently displayed graphs
of the variables for obstetric measurement are
printed.
To
PC-Printer : Displayed data in graph are printed through PC
printer.
B/W Printer : Displayed data in graph are printed through B/W

video printer.
11-270 Q1E-EA0611
Close : Gestational age estimation graph is closed.

Measurement report window".
In Twins-mode, the selection control "Twins" is displayed on the

window.
Twins selection control
Fig. 11.6.3.2-2 Selection of Twins (in Twin-A mode)
Twins
A Twin-A graph is displayed.
B Twin-B graph is displayed.
A+B Both Twin-A and Twin-B graphs are displayed.
11-271 Q1E-EA0611
The window to be displayed when modes other than Twin-A are selected
is shown below.
Fig. 11.6.3.2-3 Twins mode (Twin-B) Graph Display
Fig. 11.6.3.2-4 Twins mode (Twin-A and Twin-B) Graph Display
11-272 Q1E-EA0611
Next, graph display for estimation of gestational age is described below.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
Fig. 11.6.3.1-5 Graph Display for Estimation of Gestational Age
Table 11.6.3.1-2 Description of Fig. 11.6.3.1-5

No. Description Remarks
(1) Fetal growth curve Deviation data of registered gestational age data are
(Deviation) plotted in graph.
(2) Fetal growth curve Standard value data of registered gestational age
(Standard value) data are plotted in graph.
(3) Plotted measured value Plotted data (DGA and average value of
measurement data) put on graph that are obtained
on examination dates.
Single mode is represented with '+'. In Twins
mode, '+' represents Twin-A and '×' represents
Twin-B.
(4) Deviation of fetal growth Deviation in fetal growth graph is displayed.
curve It is displayed in SD or % depending on table
setting.
11-273 Q1E-EA0611
11.6.3.3 Plotting past measurement results
If any past measurement results are stored in the memory medium,

those past measurement data which is memorized to media selected
by the saving function of measurement result can be displayed
in graph by setting the History check box at the lower right to
ON.
By placing the mouse cursor on a plot, the data of that plot is
displayed.
This process isn't active, in case that DGA isn't inputted.
When this process is active, only graph which is selected can
be printed.
Fig. 11.6.3.3-1 Example of Plotted Past Measurement Data
< CAUTION >

The past measurement data are plotted as per the current
patient ID. If the patient ID is not correct, the data for
the other patient might be plotted.
Be sure that the patient ID is certainly entered and is
correct.
11-274 Q1E-EA0611
11.6.4 Input and output of measurement result
The Measurement report window allows you to input and output

any measurement results.
Fig. 11.6.4-1 Input and output of measurement result
11.6.4.1 Saving measurement result
By clicking on "Save" button on Measurement Selection window,

the measurement result can be saved in the external memory device.
Save Data is saved in external memory device (FD or CD-R/RW or

MO)(Also possible hard disk or the other system on the
network.).
The following Confirmation dialog is displayed. Upon
confirmation of the content in the dialog, press OK button.
Pressing Cancel button does not save the data.
By changing the drive in which the data is saved, the memory
media can be designated.
11-275 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.6.4.1-1 Confirmation Dialog
When patient ID or patient name has not been input, the

following message is displayed.
Fig. 11.6.4.1-2 Save Unable Message
Clicking on OK button closes the message dialog. Input

patient name or patient ID and then try to save the measurement
result.
<CAUTION>
! Because Patient ID or Patient Name is essential to retrieve data,
be sure to input them.
! You can use MO disk when the EZU-MO1 MO drive unit is installed.
! If the measurement results are saved to CD-R, you will not be able
to delete or overwrite them.
The memory media in which the default is saved can be set.

Refer to "11.5.4.4 Measurement Result Filing Setup".
It is also possible to set the system so that the automatic
saving operation is made by pressing New Patient key. Refer
to "Save Measurement Result Automatically" in "8.3.10 Other
menu".
<CAUTION>
! Result of stored measurement for using the scanner, it can not
be read for using EUB-6000. Do not read other scanner data as
occurred serious error of system.
! If the current storage folder is a network folder, the machine
connection may fail when you press the Read key for the first
time after the machine is turned on. (The occurrence of this symptom
depends on the performance and settings of the target PC.) If
such a symptom occurs, select a network folder again.
11-276 Q1E-EA0611
11.6.4.2 Measurement Result Filing function
Pressing Filing button displays the Measurement Result Filing

window. On this window, filing of the measurement result can be
operated. Through this operation, the measurement data can be
transferred to other memory medium and the measurement results
distributed to more than one memory medium can be merged into
one memory medium. The past measurement result can also read onto
the Report window.
11.6.4.2.1 Details of window
Fig. 11.6.4.2.1-1 Measurement Result Filing Window

Drive The memory medium to be operated for the measurement
results is selected. The following options are
available.
! CD-R/RW
! Floppy disk
! MO(EZU-MO1 Option)
! Hard disk
! Merged Folder (This folder is a temporary memory
medium to do the merging operation of the large
volume of the measurement results.)
Browse on Net
Network folder is designated as the media for
operation.
List of Patient
List of patients is displayed.
Patient name Patient name
11-277 Q1E-EA0611
Date List of date of saved data
Search Patient list is retrieved. This is to retrieve

recorded measurement result file by a patient
information or date. This search narrows down.
When you research from the beginning, click the Show
all button.
a) Item
It is possible to switch the search item. When "

▼" button is clicked, a sub-window is opened to
display the item which can be selected at present.
ID, Name: Search by the patient ID,Name
Date(YYYYMMDD): Search by Date(YYYYMMDD)
Date(Today): Search by Date(Today)
Keyword: Search by Keyword
All: Search by the patient ID and Name
and so on.
b) Keyword
Input the name and ID etc. for search from the

keyboard.
When these are input, characters of Search button

is clearly displayed which shows the search is in
an active status.
When the Search button is clicked, the search in

the designated drive is started.
Select all All items are selected.
Select clear All the selected items are deselected.

Read The measurement result is read. The result can be
displayed on the Report window.
Copy The measurement result is copied on the other memory

medium.
Move The measurement result is transferred to the other

memory medium.
Delete The measurement result is deleted.

If the measurement results are saved to CD-R, you
will not be able to delete or overwrite them.
11-278 Q1E-EA0611
11.6.4.2.2 Selection of Network folder
To select the network drive as operation file, press Browse

on Net button.
The Network Folder Selection dialog is displayed. Select a
folder on the network.
Fig. 11.6.4.2.2-1 Network Folder Selection Window
OK The selected folder is set as operation folder.
Clear Network The selected network folder is deselected.
Cancel The operation is canceled.
11.6.4.2.3 Copy/Move operation
Selecting the patient name or date of the measurement for

operation and pressing Copy or Move button display the dialog
to select the medium to which the data is copied or moved. Select
the medium to which the data is copied or moved and press OK
button. The copy or move operation is executed.
Pressing Cancel button cancels the operation.
11-279 Q1E-EA0611
Fig. 11.6.4.2.3-1 Designated Dialog to copy
< CAUTION >

1) The operation of "Copy" and "Move" is carried out for
the all measurement data of the patient. Even if the each
measurement data is selected, all data of its patient
are copied or moved.
2) It can not be use the data to different other equipment
for example EUB-6000. The data is not compatible both
other equipment.
11-280 Q1E-EA0611
11.6.5 Correction of measurement result
By selecting a measurement item and clicking on ENTER key, the

measurement value is changed.
Fig. 11.6.5-1 Selection of Measurement Item
Selecting the measurement item to be corrected on Measurement

Result Display window and clicking on the item display the dialog
to correct measurement data at the center of the window. The
item shaded in black represents the selected item.
Moving the cursor, input a space or erase the data and input
a new data. Then, click on OK button to register the new data.
Fig. 11.6.5-2 Edit Result Set Dialog
11-281 Q1E-EA0611
11.7 Measurement on review image from image memory
While measurement being executed, images stored in the cine memory

or multi-memory can be reviewed.
This function enables to carry out measurement on plural reviewed
images, allowing routine examinations to be performed efficiently.
By selecting at the upper right of the screen by TRACKBALL

, review
PRIORITY
operation of images from the image memory is set to be ready. By
selecting , measurements can be performed.
selection
Measurement
(measurement suspension) Image memory
operation
review / operation
such as distance, area
image scrolling
cardiac function
Measurement selection forward and backward
measurements
(Measurement restart)
Fig.11.7-1 Measurement on review image
NOTICE:Measurement cannot be restarted while images are

continuously being reviewed.
Regarding the measurement with images replayed from VCR,
refer to "10.2 Measurement on review image".
11-282 Q1E-EA0611
11.8 Measurement Tool
11.8.1 Outline of measurement tool
The measurement method described in 11.3.2 is Measurement Edit

menu (refer to 11.5.3), and it is set specifically with the item
named Measurement Tool.
The Measurement Tool includes, in addition to "B-Distance" tool
to measure distance and "B-Area" tool to measure area, the ones
that are used only in measurement report such as "Selection"
tool that allows selection of one out of available options.
Measurement Tool includes the following two tools.

(1) Single Tool
This is a tool to obtain only one result from measurement.

(e.g. Tool to measure distance or area.)
Tools exclusive to report such as Selection tool are also included

in Single Tool.
(2) Link Tool
This is a tool to obtain two or more results simultaneously

from measurement.
(e.g. Tool to obtain multiple results such as max. flow velocity
and mean velocity.)
List of measurement tools are shown on the next page.
11-283 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.8.1-1 Single Tool (1/2)
No. Tool name Description Unit Remarks
1 B-Distance A distance between 2 points on B-image is mm, cm
measured.
2 M-Distance A depth difference between 2 points on mm, cm
M-image is measured.
3 Circumference A circumference of a shape traced on mm, cm
B-image is obtained.
Either Manual or Ellipse is selected as
Method. Manual represents manual tracing
and Ellipse represents tracing by ellipse
method.
2
4 B-Area An area of a shape traced on B-image. cm
Any one of Manual, Ellipse and Diameter is
selected as Method. Manual and Ellipse are
same as those of "Circumference" tool.
Diameter is the method to obtain an area of
the circle with a diameter of distance between
two points.
2
5 M-Area A distance is measured on M-image and an cm
area of the circle with a diameter of that
distance is obtained.
6 Velocity A velocity at the point selected on D-image is cm/s, m/s, Display unit in
obtained. kHz measurement result
is displayed
corresponding to
the unit of D-image.
7 Time Interval A time difference between two points selected ms, s
on D-image or M-image is obtained.
8 M-Slope A slope (velocity) between two points on mm/s,
M-image is obtained. cm/s
2
9 D-Slope A slope (acceleration) between two points on cm/s ,
2
D-image is obtained. m/s
10 A/N Input Alphanumeric characters can be input in None
measurement report. Either A/N or Number
is selected as Method.
With A/N selected, alphanumeric characters
can be input, while with Number selected,
only numeric characters can be input. In
case of Number, input format can be set in
"A/N Input" box in "Tool" tab on Measurement
Edit menu.
11-284 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.8.1-1 Continued (2/2)
No. Tool name Description Unit Remarks
11 Selection This allows options to be used in None
measurement report.
Either Check or List can be selected as
Method. "Check" allows ON/OFF to be
selected with check mark for that item, which
"List" allows one of options to be selected.
12 Number Number of already measured items is set in None
the designated measurement items.
13 <Link Only> Item is defined as specific to Link Tool. None
14 <Title> This is Measurement Result Display area and None
Title is used.
15 Calculation Calculation is performed by using Any unit
measurement results. A calculation equation
is input in "Substitution" area.
16 BPScore Biophysical Score is input in Obstetric None
Measurement report.
17 BPSlongAxis A long axis is set in Biplane Simpson mm, cm
measurement.
18 BPSVolume Left ventricle volume is obtained in Biplane ml
Simpson measurement.
19 3DVolume A volume is calculated in SVolume ml
measurement.
20 unit conversion A value is converted from grams (g) to pounds (lbs, oz). A calculation eguation is
input "substitution" area.
NOTICE: Unit is the one that can be set for the corresponding tool in
11-285 Q1E-EA0611
Link tools are shown below. Link attribute of the link tool and
selectable unit for each link tool are also shown below.
Table 11.8.1-2 Link Tools (1/2)
No. Tool name Description Remarks
1 B-Trace By tracing an object on B-mode image, the followings are Select either
measured. Manual or Ellipse
(1) "Long Dist." : Elliptic long axis length (in mm or cm) as Method.
(2) "Short Dist.": Elliptic short axis length (in mm or cm)
(3) "Circ.": Circumference (in mm or cm)
2
(4) "Area" : Area (in cm )
NOTICE: "Long Dist." And "Short Dist." can be measured
only when "Ellipse" method is selected.
2 D-Trace By tracing waveform on D-mode image, the followings are
measured.
(1) "Peak Velo.": Peak flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "Mean Velo.": Mean flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "Min. Velo.": Min. flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(4) "End-Dias. Velo.": Min. flow velocity at end-diastole
(in cm/s or m/s)
(5) "Accel.Time": Acceleration time (in ms or s)
(6) "Ejection Time": Ejection time (ms or s)
(7) "Decel. Time": Deceleration time (in ms or s)
2 2
(8) "Acceleration": Acceleration (in cm/s or m/s )
(9) "PHT": Pressure half-time (in ms or s)
(10) "%WINDOW": %Window value (in %)
(11) "SYS-W": Systolic Window value (in %)
(12) "dP/dt": dP/dt value (in mmHg/s)
(13) "TVI": Time Velocity Integral (in m)
(14) "HR": Hear rate (in bpm)
3 HR By setting two points on M-mode image or D-mode image,
the followings are measured.
(1) Time: Measurement time (in ms or s)
(2) R-R: One heartbeat period (in ms or s)
(3) Heat Rate: Heart rate (in bpm)
4 PHT The followings are measured from Doppler waveform on
D-mode image.
(1) "Peak Velo.": Peak flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "PHT": Pressure half-time (in ms or s)
5 CFM-Velocity The followings are measured when color is displayed on
B-mode image or M-mode image.
(1) "Freq.": Frequency (in kHz)
(2) "Velo.": Flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "Angle": Incident angle correction value (in º)
11-286 Q1E-EA0611
Table 11.8.1-2 Continued (2/2)
No. Tool name Description Remarks

6 D-Profile The followings are measured by setting any desired time
phase on Doppler waveform on D-mode image.
(1) "MEAN": Instantaneous mean flow velocity
(in cm/s or m/s)
(2) "MIDE": Most powerful flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "PEAK": Instantaneous max. flow velocity
(in cm/s or m/s)
(4) "%WINDOW": %Window value (in %)
7 Histogram By setting a region on B-mode image, histogram of the region Either one or 2
is measured. regions can be
(1) "Circ": Circumference of the set region (in mm or cm) selected.
(2) "Area": Area of the set region (in cm )
2 Two link attributes
such as "Circ1"
(3) "Number": Total number of data
and "Circ2" are
(4) "Mean": Mean brightness
also available.
(5) "SD": Standard deviation
(6) "MODE": Max. frequency brightness
(7) "%MODE": Max. frequency (in %)
8 Angle By delineating 3 line segments on B-mode image, two angles
formed by one line segment and other two line segments are
measured.
(1) "Alpha": Acetabular angle (in degree)
(2) "Beta": Caltilagnous acetabular angle (in degree)
9 Biplane Axis length and area of left ventricle volume section traced on
Simpson B-mode image are measured.
2
(1) "LVA": Left ventricle area (in cm )
(2) "LVL": Left ventricle long axis length (in mm or cm)
10 dP/dt Flow velocity and time necessary to measure dP/dt on
D-mode image are measured.
st
(1) "V1": 1 flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
nd
(2) "V2": 2 flow velocity (in cm/s or m/s)
(3) "T1": Time phase of V1
(4) "T2": Time phase of V2
11 PISA PISA radius and alias. velocity necessary to make PISA
measurement on CFM image are measured.
(1) "Radius" : PISA radius (cm or mm)
(2) "Alias. Velo" : Aliasing velocity (cm/s or m/s)
11-287 Q1E-EA0611
11.8.2 Setting Measurement tool
11.8.2.1 Setting Single tool

Single tool is set on Measurement Edit tool. For details
of Measurement Edit menu, refer to 11.5.3.
(1) Selection of Single tool

Single tool can be selected in "Tool" box in Measurement Edit
menu.
For the case where Link tool is used, select "<Linl Only>" here.
(2) Selection of Method

As shown in Table 11.8.1-1, there are cases where Method can
be set depending on the selected tool.
(Example: As delineating method with B-Area Tool selected, any

one of Manual, Ellipse and Diameter is set.)
Set Method in "Method" box at the right side of "Tool" box.

In the case of tool where setting of Method is not necessary,
this "Method" box is disabled.
Enabled operation Disabled operation
(3) Setting Calculation tool

With "Calculation" selected as Measurement Tool, "Equation"
box in Measurement Edit menu is enabled. Input an equation in
the character input box just under the title "Equation".
Input an equation.
11-288 Q1E-EA0611
Display unit for measurement result can be not only selected
but also directly input in Calculation tool.
Any desired unit can be input.
Number of decimal places can also be set for the calculation

result obtained by the equation. Any one of 0, 1, 2 and 3 can
be selected for number of decimal places.
To set this, select "Tool2" tab in Measurement Edit menu.
Select Tool2 tab.
Select number of decimal places.
(4) Setting Selection tool

Selection tool is the one to allow check mark and options to
be used in Measurement report.
Method : "List"
Options
An example to allow setting of Yes/No/NA options for the

item "Ventricles" in Measurement report.
Method : "Check"
Check mark
An example to allow check mark to be set for the

item"Tia" in Measurement report.
11-289 Q1E-EA0611
To set Selection tool, first select either "Check" or "List"
in Method menu, and then open "Tool" tab in Measurement Edit
menu to set Selection tool.
Tool tab
With "List" selected as Method, input an option in "Item" and

press "Enter" button to register it in "Selection Items". To
set any item to be selected as default when Measurement report
is opened, click on the option in "Selection Items" box and
then press "Default" button at the right side. To delete it
from "Selection Items", press "Delete" button.
With "Check" selected as Method, the check box "Default for

Check" is enabled. By checking this, the Check mark is displayed
as opened when Measurement report is first opened.
(5) Setting A/N Input tool

By using A/N Input tool, alphanumeric or numeric characters
can be input in any item in Measurement report.
Alphanumeric or numeric
characters can be input.
An example to allow comments to be input in the item

"Reason for Exam".
11-290 Q1E-EA0611
To set A/N Input tool, select "A/N" (Alphanumeric) or "Number"
in Manual mode, and then select "Tool" tab to set format of
input character.
Set max. allowable number

of characters.
With A/N selected as Method With Number selected as Method
With A/N selected as Method, set max. allowable number of

characters.
With Number selected as Method, set either "Free Format" or
"Sign" and number of decimal places (0, 1 or 2).
(6) Setting Title tool

Title tool functions as short cut to execute an measurement
item. It is used in Doppler measurement, and by putting multiple
items together it can also be opened as an item with one name
(usable for one measurement item).
As an example in Doppler measurement, by defining an
easy-to-understand name such as "LV-TRACE" or "AV-TRACE" in
LVOT measurement by Title tool, and by selecting that item,
D-Trace Link tool for each Doppler waveform is opened.
In setting Title tool, the object to be actually executed is

set when that item is selected. The following two items can
be set as object to be executed.
(a) Link name in Link tool
(b) Measurement Item name in Single tool
11-291 Q1E-EA0611
With Link name set, its Link tool is opened. With Measurement
Item name set, the Single tool set for that measurement item
is opened.
The object to be executed for Title tool is set in "Substitution"

box in Measurement Edit menu.
An example to set Link name
The above is an example in actual LVOT measurement. Measurement

Item name is "LV-TRACE" and this is Title tool, therefore "LV"
that is a name of link to trace LV waveform is set here. By
setting in such way, selecting "LV-TRACE" as Title tool when
measurement is executed opens Link tool to perform Doppler
tracing.
(a) End of Title

This is used to set the cursor not to move downward from the
title for which measurement is automatically executed. In
the case there are multiple measurement items to use Title
tool and all the measurement items can be executed with items
of their Titles, it is not necessary to move the cursor to
any items other than the Title. In such case, by setting
"End of Title" item located at the bottom of multiple Title
tools to ON, the cursor does not move downward from the set
item.
11-292 Q1E-EA0611
11.8.2.2 Setting Link tool
To set Link tool, it is necessary to define the measurement
item to be linked as "<Link only>" in Single tool.
(1) New creation of link

Link tool is set in Link Setup dialog to be opened by pressing
"Link" button in Measurement Edit menu (refer to 11.5.3). In
the case any link is not defined at all for the measurement
being edited, this Link Setup dialog is ready to newly create
a link when it is opened. In the case some links have been already
defined by the measurement, any of the existing links is displayed
as selected. In such case, press "New Link" button to reset
the dialog to the one for new setup.
Fig. 11.8.2.2-1 Link Setup Dialog
1 To set Link tool, input Name (Link name). Input the Name from
the alphanumeric keyboard. In the case any other link has
been set in the same measurement, do not input the same name.
2 Setting a Link name allows Tool box to be operated. Set a
link tool from options in this box. If the selected link tool
has Method (refer to Table 11.8.1-2), the selection box of
Method is also enabled for operation.
11-293 Q1E-EA0611
3 To display the link name nearby the trace made for the object
by using Link tool, set "Link Name Display" check box to ON.
4 Some of the selected link tools can be set for Property. To
set Property, press "Property" button. For details of
Property in Link tool, refer to "11.5.3.3 Link Setup".
5 Link a measurement item to the newly created link. The
measurement item defined as <Link Only> in Single tool is
displayed as follows in "Unlinked Items! Box.
6 Select any desired measurement item in "Unlinked Items" and
press "Link" button.
7 Then, Link Attribute Setup dialog is opened.
8 Select link attribute in Attribute box. Link attribute

indicates what variable the selected measurement item is
corresponded to in Link tool. (e.g..:"Peak Velo." is the
attribute representing max. flow velocity in D-Trace tool.)
Accordingly, options displayed in Attribute box in Link
Attribute Setup dialog vary according to the link tool being
edited.
11-294 Q1E-EA0611
9 Only in the case the link tool being edited is Point tool,
the check box and figure options in Figure box are enabled
for operation. Whether the figure is displayed or not at the
lower left of the screen during measurement is set in Display
Check box, and select a figure displayed in the options box
thereunder. The figure that can be selected here is for M-mode
schema measurement, and those schemas are incorporated at
the factory before shipment, therefore user cannot create
new schema additionally.
10 Display unit of the item of which link attribute was set is

set in Unit box. Selectable units are defined according to
the tool being edited and its link attribute.
11 Only when the link tool being edited is Point tool and Link
Name Display in Link Setup dialog is set to ON, Label box
is enabled for operation. To display characters at the desired
point where measurement is executed by Point tool, input the
name to be displayed in this Edit box.
12 Press OK button to close Link Attribute Setup dialog.
Then, the link setting of one measurement item has been completed,
and the measurement item is moved to Linked Items box.
Measurement item for

which link setting has
Link attribute name
been completed.
The above procedures are a series of operation to link a

measurement item to any desired link object. For concrete
example, refer to "11.5.5.3 New creation of measurement".
11-295 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Change in link setting
To change any of registered link settings, follow the next
procedures.
1 Select the link name in Link Setup dialog of which setting

is to be changed.
Registered link name
2 Change setting of the selected link. Change any tool and set
property as required.
Link can be removed by selecting the measurement item in Linked

Items box and pressing Unlink button.
11-296 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 12 Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices
This section describes recording equipment and their connection method

with the ultrasound scanner system.
12.1 Peripheral equipment
To use this equipment more effectively, use of the peripheral
devices listed in the Table 12.1.1 are recommended. Of the device
listed in the Table 12.1.1, one each of the black-and-white
printer, color printer, and S-VHS VCR can be connected to the
scanner system. Furhter, contact Hitachi or our authorized
dealer about latest recommendable perpheral devices list.
Table 12.1-1 Peripheral Devices
Manufacturer’s model, type
Peripheral device Manufacturer
NTSC (EIA)* PAL (CCIR)**
SONY UP-895MD UP-895CE

Black & white
printer P90U P90E
MITSUBISHI
- P91E
UP-1800MD UP-1800EPM
- UP-2800P/UP-2850P
SONY
- UP-2900MD/UP-2950MD
UP-21MD
Color printer
CP700U CP700E
MITSUBISHI - CP900E
CP770DW with SB770(SCSI IF)
Polaroid (UK) Ltd. - TX1300SE
SONY SVO-9500MD SVO-9500MDP
S-VHS VCR PANASONIC AG-MD835 AG-MD835E
MITSUBISHI HS-MD3000U HS-MD3000E
Digital VCR SONY - DSR-20MDP
* for the scaner unit of NTSC (EIA) TV display system
** for the scaner unit of PAL (CCIR) TV display system
NOTICE:
! These devices meet IEC60601-1 compliance.
! To use CP-770DW, EZU-Pi1 is required.
＜WARNING＞
1) Other than the devices listed in Table 12.1-1 are not Allowed
to use.
2) Use peripheral devices as fixed with the scanner unit.Using
the peripheral devices without fixing with the scanner unit
may cause dropping the peripheral device due to vibration
or inclination of the mobile cart during carrying around
the system.
For fixing method of the peripheral device, contact Hitachi
12-1 623 Q1E-EA0611

12.2 Precautions in connection of peripheral devices
To supply the power to each peripheral device, use the 4 power supply
outlets in the secondary side located on the lower front of the mobile
cart for safety of the composition system and centralization of the
power ON/OFF.
The power capacity of the power supply outlets in the secondary side
of this equipment excluding the power supply outlet for the TV monitor
is 4OOVA. (About connectable peripheral devices, see 12.1.)
<CAUTION>
If peripheral devices of which total power requirements is more
than 4OOVA are connected, the fuse in the primary side of the
scanner unit may be blown out, the breaker in the power supply
unit may be actuated or it may cause equipment trouble.
12.3 Peripheral devices possible to use on outside commercial power

supply outlet
Peripheral devices listed in Table 12.3-1 are possible to use in
combination with the ultrasound diagnostic apparatus by connecting
with commercial power supply outlet. These devices have been
certified with IEC60601-1 requirements.
Table 12.3-1 Peripheral devices to use on outside commercial

power supply
Peripheral devices Manufacturer Manufacturer’s model, type
Computer Acer Computer GmbH AcerPower 8000MD
Computer Acer Computer GmbH AcerPower 4100MD
NOTICE:Hitachi will not have any responsibility for their

application software and adverse incidence which would
be caused by using them.
＜WARNING＞
Other than the devices listed in Table 12.3-1 are not allowed
to use.
12-2 Q1E-EA0611
12.4 Operation of peripheral devices
For detailed operation of each peripheral device, refer to the
instruction manual of the device supplied from its manufacturer.
12.5 Connection of Peripheral devices

Peripheral devices are connected to the terminal as shown below. Cable
connections must be made while the power switch is turned off. For
connection of the peripheral device, contact Hitachi or Our authorized
dealer.
Fig. 12.5-1 Option Connector Panel
NOTICE: Only connect IEC 60601-1 Complied units or specified units

by Hitachi here.
Option connector panel:
1 Printer Out
VIDEO signal output terminal for VIDEO Printer
2 B/W Printer Remote
Remote terminal for B/W VIDEO Printer
3 Color Printer Remote
Remote terminal for color VIDEO Printer
4 FOOT SW
Foot switch terminal
12-3 Q1E-EA0611
5 Fujinon probe interface unit
Terminal for fujinon probe interface unit
6 VCR CONT
Control signal terminal for VCR
The control cable for operation of VCR on the operation
Panel is connected.
7 C-VIDEO IN
Composite video signal input terminal for VHS VCR
8 C-VIDEO OUT
Composite video signal output terminal for VHS VCR
9 Y/C IN
Video signal input terminal for S-VHS VCR
10 Y/C OUT
Video signal output terminal for S-VHS VCR
11 DOP OUT R
Audio signal output terminal for VCR(Reverse Side)
12 DOP OUT F
Audio signal output terminal for VCR(Forward Side)
13 DOP IN R
Audio signal input terminal for VCR(Reverse Side)
14 DOP IN F
Audio signal input terminal for VCR(Forward Side)
12-4 Q1E-EA0611
12.6 Connection of PC printer and the HUB for Network function
(1) Setting place of PC printer and the HUB
When connecting PC printer or the HUB with EUB-5500, these
equipments must be placed out side of the Patient Environment
to avoid an electrical shock. Regarding the Patient
Environment, IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for medical
electrical systems describes for the area which is shown in
Fig. 12.6-1.
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 12.6-1 Patient Environment
Table 12.6-1 Peripheral Devices
Peripheral device Manufacturer Manufacturer’s model, type
PC Printer EPSON Stylus Color / Photo series
12-5 Q1E-EA0611
＜CAUTION＞
Make sure to use PC printer and the HUB which complies with
IEC Publication 60950 Standard (Safety of information
processing equipment including the equipment for office use)
or IEC Publication 60601-1 Standard (Safety of medical
electrical equipment).
＜WARNING＞
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place PC printer
and the HUB to be connected with EUB-5500 within the area of
the Patient Environment.
12-6 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 13 Movement
13.1 Movement of equipment

To safely transport the equipment, observe the following
precautions.
13.1.1 Preparation before movement

Disconnect all the cables of the peripheral devices which
are not built in the scanner unit.
(1) Make sure that any obstacle is not in the pathway for
movement. If any obstacle is present, remove it before
movement. Dismount the peripheral devices connected to
but not fixed on the scanner unit, and transport it
separately from the scanner unit.
(2) Turn off the power switch of the scanner unit and wind
up the power cable on the cable holder located on the
rear panel of the scanner unit.
(3) Hang the probe cable on the probe hanger so that the cable
cannot be ridden over or caught with the casters. Put
the probe not connected to the probe connector in the
probe case and carry it separately from the ultrasound
scanner unit.
13.1.2 Precautions in movement

(1) Before moving the equipment, make sure that all stoppers
of the casters are unlocked. Step on "Lock off pedal"
of each caster, the wheel lock is Released. If "STOP"
pedal (right side) is licked up, the wheel lock is Released.
Smooth movement is impossible even if any of the casters
is locked.
If "Green pedal" (left side) is stepped down, "Swivel Lock"
is locked. The direction of the caster become straight,
the caster is fixed to straight forward for smooth
transportation. The figure of Fig13.1.2-1 shows "Swivel
lock is On". For "Swivel Lock", lock the caster of
"right-back" only.
13-1 629 Q1E-EA0611

Lock Off Pedal
Wheel Lock
Swivel Lock
(Green Pedal)
Fig 13.1.2-1 Lock Caster off
(2) When moving the equipment, be sure to hold the handle

attached to the rear part of the scanner unit. Moving
the equipment by holding the other part of the equipment
may apply an abnormal force to the equipment, resulting
in damage of parts.
Handle Bar
Fig 13.1.2-2 Handle Bar
13-2 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Do not bump the equipment against hard object or do not
give it any excessive vibration.
(4) Do not incline the equipment more than 10 degree from the
horizontal level.
(5) When transporting the equipment on the slope, move it by
more than two persons. When moving it on the slope, a
larger force than the actual weight of the equipment is
required as compared with movement on the flat floor.
Be careful not have your foot be caught by the caster
when transporting the equipment by more than two persons.
(6) When moving over uneven floor such as elevator door guide
or the place where a fire door is installed, great care
should be exercised not to subject the equipment to shock
or vibrations.
(7) Be sure to securely lock the wheel locks of the casters
after the equipment has been positioned at the desired
place.
13-3 Q1E-EA0611
13.2 Transportation of equipment
When moving the equipment on truck, special attention must be given
to the transportation in addition to the precautions described in
Paragraph 13.1 Movement of equipment. Be sure to contact Hitachi
or our authorized dealer before transportation. Please note that
responsibility for transportation shall rest on the party who carries
out the transportation.
13-4 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Checkup
When using this equipment, carry out the checkup before use,
maintenance after use, periodical checkup arid cleaning as follows.
14.1 Check before use
Daily Weekly Monthly Other
Check up the following before turning on the power switch.

(1) Check to see if the power cable covet is damaged or worn out.
If the cable is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
(2) Check to see if the probe cable cover is damaged or worn out,
and also if the contact surface of the probe is scratched or
damaged. If it is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
(3) Make sure that cable connections of peripheral devices such

as VCR and printer are correctly made as follows.
- If any device other than the one specified by Hitachi is
connected or not.
- If the power supply to the peripheral device is connected
from the auxiliary power output from the scanner unit or not.
- If the total power requirements of all the connected peripheral
devices are within the allowable power capacity of the
auxiliary power output from the scanner unit or not.
- If any abnormality is found, contact Hitachi Service Dept.
(4) Check to see if the ECG cable cover is damaged or worn off,
if the cable is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
14-1 633 Q1E-EA0611

14.2 Checkup while using the scanner unit
Check up the following after turning on the power switch.

(1) Check to see if any abnormal sound or smell is generated or
not. If any abnormality is found, immediately turn off the power
and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet. Then,
contact Hitachi Service Dept. or our authorized dealer.
(2) Make sure that date and time are correctly displayed on the
upper right of the monitor. If date and time are not correct,
the backup battery for time display in the scanner unit may
have been expired. In such case, contact Hitachi Service Dept.
or our authorized dealer. The replaced old battery should be
disposed according to the local government rule.
14-2 Q1E-EA0611
14.3 Periodical checkup
Carry out the following checkup every month.

- If any abnormality is found on the probe connector and connector
or not.
- If any abnormality is found on the power cable and other cables
or not.
- If any abnormality is found on the control panel and keyboard
or not.
- If the stopper for the cart caster functions normally or not.
If any abnormality is found or it malfunctions, stop operation of

the equipment, turn off the power and disconnect the power cable
from the power outlet, then contact Hitachi Service Dept. or our
authorized dealer.
For the detail periodical checkup, consult with Hitachi service Dept.
14.4 Backup of system setting data

Should the hard disk incorporated on this system be damaged, the

registered application data will be lost. Backing up the system
setting data at least once a month is suggested.
[Refer to 7.9(9) Backup data Menu.]
14.5 Periodical test of system safety

The system shall be subjected to the periodical inspection for safety

of the system at least once a year. The details of the required
inspection will be provided as requested. Contact Hitachi Technical
Service office or our authorized representative.
14-3 Q1E-EA0611
14.6 Periodical inspection of system performance
The system should be subjected to the periodical inspection with

regard to its performance at least once a year. The details of the
required inspection will be provided as requested. Contact Hitachi
Technical Service office or our authorized representative.
14.7 Checkup after storage for a long time

When the scanner unit which have not been used for a long time is
going to be used, make sure that the equipment can be operated
normally and safely.
14.8 Cleaning of equipment
(1) Cleaning of probe

- After use of the equipment, completely wipe off jelly on the

probe with tissue paper or soft cloth. If the probe would
be left with jelly on it, it will cause color change or
deterioration of the probe function.
- Do not use hard paper or cloth to wipe the probe, otherwise
the acoustic lens on the surface of the probe may be scraped,
causing electric shock.
- Keep probe in the probe holder or case for careful storage.
Be careful not to give any shock to the probe or drop it.
- After use of the probe, it must be disinfected. For disinfection
and sterilization of the probe, read the instructions supplied
with each probe.
(2) Cleaning of operation panel

- After use of the equipment, turn off the power switch and
completely wipe off jelly stuck on the surface of the operation
panel. If it is left as stuck, it will cause color change
or deterioration of the panel.
14-4 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Cleaning of system cabinet
- Before cleaning the system cabinet, turn off the power switch
and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
- Clean the cabinet with the cloth moistened with neutral
detergent and then wipe it with dry cloth.
NOTICE: Never use organic solvent such as thinner.

Take care not to dispose the equipment directly
to liquid such as detergent. When cleaning the
equipment, be careful not to slop liquid inside
the equipment, over the probe connector or the
operation panel.
(4) Cleaning of monitor

- Clean the monitor after turning off the power switch.

- Clean the surface of the monitor with the supplied cloth.
Wipe off the sticky dirt with glass cleaner and soft cloth.
Clean the top and side covers of the monitor with cloth
moistened with neutral detergent and then wipe them with dry
cloth.
NOTICE: Never use organic solvent such as thinner.

Take care not to dispose the equipment directly
to liquid such as detergent.
Do not use glass cleaner of hydrocarbon compound.
If this kind of the cleaner is used for a long
period, the reflection preventive shield on the
monitor surface will be damaged.
(5) Cleaning of VCR

- Clean the VCR after turning off the power switch.

- Clean the surface of the VCR with dry, soft cloth. Do not
use wet cloth or detergent, otherwise water or detergent may
leak into the VCR, causing trouble.
- Clean the record and playback heads using the specified cleaning
kit according to the instruction manual of the manufacturer.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the VCR.
14-5 Q1E-EA0611
(6) Cleaning of video printer
- Clean the video printer after turning off the power switch.
- Clean the surface of the video printer with dry, soft cloth.
- Clean the printer head by flowing the cleaning sheet specified
by the printer manufacturer on the printer head. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of the video printer.
(7) Cleaning of filter in power supply unit

- Clean the air cleaning filter at the air inlet window of the
power supply unit located at the bottom of the scanner unit
once a month. If the air filter gets clogged, the circuit
breaker may be actuated or the power supply unit may be damaged.
- Use the vacuum cleaner to suck the dust on the filter or wash
neutral detergent or water. In case of washing the filter,
dry it sufficiently before attachment.
Be sure to detach or attach the filter or to clean the filter

after turning off the power switch.
Do not turn on the power switch without mounting the filter,

otherwise dust in the room or cotton dust may cone in the power
supply unit, causing fire trouble.
When washing the filter, do not use acid or alkaline detergent

and thinner which may damage the filter material.
Never attach the filter as far as moisture being left on the

filter.
The damp filter may possibly cause the damage of the system.
Also, do not being the filter close to fire or heat source
for drying.
14-6 Q1E-EA0611
Filters in the Power Supply Unit
Fig.14.5 Location of Filters

(8) Cleaning of the trackball
- Before you clean the trackball, turn off the unit and unplug
the power cable from the outlet.
- Do not use wet cloth or detergent. If it gets into the trackball
unit, it may cause damage.
- You can clean the track ball by turning the ring around the
ball to remove the ring, ball holder, and ball from the
trackball unit.
If the ball does not roll smoothly because of dust inside the
trackball, use dry, soft cloth to remove the dust.
grip
ball holder ring
Fig.14.6 Cleaning of the trackball
14-7 Q1E-EA0611
14.9 Functional Checkup
The table below shows basic function check list. Carry out the check
as occasion requires. If the function is incorrect, the apparatus
may possibly be defective. In such case, contact Hitachi Service
Dept. or our authorized dealer.
Table.14.6-1 Functional Checkup-1

No. Item Content Remark
By using FREEZE key Image
1 FREEZE check freezing and its release are
possible.
When applying Acoustic Jerry
onto the probe and contacting
with tissue mimicking thing
2 Image check
such as a phantom, tomographic
image can be displayed on the
monitor.
Gain adjustment of B mode image Refer to
Gain control 5.2.2 for
3 is possible by using B gain
check detailed
controller (knob). operation.
Depth gain adjustment of B mode Refer to
Depth Gain image is possible by using Depth 5.2.2 for
4
controlcheck Gain controller (slide type detailed
volume controller). operation.
Changeover of image depth is Refer to
Depth
5 possible by using DEPTH/MAG 5.2.2 for
changeovercheck
key. details.
By using M mode key, the mode Refer to
6 M mode check becomes M mode and scroll image 5.3.1 for
can be displayed. details.
Beam line can be moved with by Refer to

7 M mode check 5.3.1 for
using the track ball. details.
Gain adjustment of M mode image Refer to
M Gain control
8 is possible by using M gain 5.3.2 for
check
controller (knob). details.
By using PW key, PW mode is Refer to
9 PW mode check established and scroll image 5.4.1 for
can be displayed. details.
Beam line and Doppler sampling Refer to
10 PW mode check gate can be moved by using the 5.4.1 for
track ball. details.
14-8 Q1E-EA0611
Table.14.6-2 Functional Checkup-2
No. Item Content Remark
Gain adjustment of PW mode image Refer to
11 PW Gain control
is possible by using PW gain 5.4.2 for
check
controller (knob). details.
By using Color key, Color Refer to
12 Color Doppler Doppler mode can be established 5.7.1 and
modecheck and gain adjustment is possible 5.7.3 for
by gain controller (knob). detailed.
Display region and display size Refer to

13 Color Doppler
can be changed by using the track 5.7.2 for
modecheck
ball. details.
Refer to
Connected Color Printer, B/W each
14 Peripherals
Printer, VCR etc. correctly Instruction
devices check
function. Manual for
the device.
14.10 Waste Products
Risks associated with the disposal of waste products,residuals,etc:

In case plastic case or cover become obsolete and unless,it can
beprocessed and wasted as a general plastic material,for that you
are requested to strictly observe local regulations and laws.
14-9 Q1E-EA0611
Chapter 15 Repair, readjustment and disposal
(1) Whenever repair or adjustment is required, contact Hitachi or

our authorized dealer.
NOTICE: that the responsibility for repair and adjustment shall

rest on the party who carried out the repair or
readjustment.
(2) Service call

If any abnormality occurs on the equipment, immediately turn
off the power switch, and contact Hitachi or our authorized
dealer for assistance, giving him information on the trouble
as much as you can. Our service engineer will call on you for
the soonest troubleshooting.
(3) Disposal
About the disposal of the equipment and accessories at the end
of their useful lives, contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer.
15-1 642 Q1E-EA0611

Chapter 16 Specifications
16.1 Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver

16.1.1 Type of Probes
(1) Convex Type Probes: 2.5 ~ 9 MHz
(2) Linear Type Probes: 5.0 ~ 13 MHz
(3) Sector Type Probe: 2.0 ~ 7.5 MHz
16.1.2 Image Examination Modes

(1) Standard Configuration: B, B/B, B/M, M
B/PW, PW, CW
CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-B,
CFM-B/CFM-M,
CFM-M, CFM-B/PW,
B/CW, CFM-B/CW
(2) With Biplane Probe: Realtime B/B
(realtime biplane)
(3) Harmonic Image Available(dTHI mode)
16.1.3 Probe connection
(1) The number of Probes is simultaneously possible to
connect: 3
(2) The switching method of Probes:
Probe Oriented
Application Menu
(Change with menu)
16.1.4 Dynamic Range

Selectable from 45 to 80dB range in 5 dB step
16-1 643 Q1E-EA0611

16.1.5 Gain Adjustment
(1) Depth Gain Controls: 8 points, 0 ~ 30dB
(2) B-Mode Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(3) M-Mode Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(4) CFM Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(5) PW Gain Adjustment: 60dB
(6) AGC (Auto Gain Control) Function:
3 steps and off are
selectable for B-mode
and M-mode images.
16.1.6 Focusing
(1) Transmitting Focus: 8-step electronic
focusing
(2) Receiving Focus: Continuous dynamic
focusing with variable
aperture control
16.1.7 Acoustic Power Level Control

3 levels are slectable
16-2 Q1E-EA0611
16.2 Digital Scan Converter
16.2.1 B-mode Image Display

Single image and dual images
TV synchronized display method
16.2.2 Field of View

(1) Image Depth Range: 2 ~ 24cm (Depend on
Probes)
(2) View Angle or Width: 6 values are selectable
Maximum 200° in
EUP-V53W
Fujinon probe has 360°
display only.
(3) Steering of View Angle: Adjustable
(4) Pan/Zoom Function: Up to 8 times
16.2.3 Image Orientation/Rotation

(1) Orientation: Up/down inversion In
B-mode and
Forward/reverse
inversion in PW mode
Right/left inversion
in B-mode
(2) Rotation: 90º step in B-mode image
16.2.4 M-mode Image Display

(1) Display Method: Survey
(2) Sweep Speed: 1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10
s/screen
16-3 Q1E-EA0611
16.2.5 Image Processing
(1) Digital Axial Enhancement: 4 levels are selectable
(2) Digital lateral Enhancement: 4 levels are selectable
(3) Scan Correlation: 8 steps are selectable
(4) Post-Processing for Gray shades:
γ-correction,
rejection, and
saturation
(5) Black/White inversion: Possible
16.2.6 Measurement Functions

(1) Measurements in B-mode: Distance, Area,
Circumference
(Distance method,
Trace method, Ellipse
method, and Rectangle
method), Volume
(Area-length method,
Ellipse method, and
Biplane method), Area
ratio, Distance ratio,
Histogram, Cardiac
Function (SV: Stroke
Volume, CO:Cardiac
Output, EF:Ejection
Fraction),
BPD(Biparietal
Diameter) FA(Fetal
Age), EFBW(Estimated
Fetal Body Weight),
Obstetric Report,
Angle
16-4 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Measurement in M-mode: Distance, Time,
Velocity, Distance
ratio, Time ratio,
HR(Heart Rate),
Schema-Guided(LV:Left
Ventricular,
MV:Mitral Valve,
AO(Aortic Valve,
PV:Pulmonary Valve,
TV:Tricuspid Valve),
Cardiac Function
16.2.7 Character Display

(1) Comments: 45 characters × 24 lines
（In case of entering
numeric ,46characters
× 13lines（at Font size
is 4））
Quadruple size
characters can be
displayed.
Characters Style
(Regular/Bold/Italic/
Bold-italic)
(2) ID Name: Regular 15 characters
(3) Patient Name: Regular
28(26)characters
(4) Hospital Name: Regular 29 characters
(5) Automatically Displayed Items: Data and time (year,
month, day, hour,
minute, and second),
Operating frequency of
the probes, Gain
settings, Acoustic
power level,
Post-processing,
Dynamic range(DYN),
Enhancement (ENH),
Delay times from R-wave,
Heart rate, Values of
each measuremnts,
Doppler function
16-5 Q1E-EA0611
display, Transmitting
focus point
indications, View of
depths display
(6) Annotation: 232 annotations
(abreviated medical
terms) are
preregistered.
Up to 20 user-defined
terms can be registered
in each application
16.2.8 Body Marks

(1) Cardiac Region: 10 types
(2) Abdominal Region: 10 types
(3) Vacular Region: 9 types
(4) Obstetric/Gynecology Region: 22 types
(5) Urology Region: 10 types
(6) Thyroid/Breast Region: 6 types
(7) Other regions: 8 types
16.2.9 Application
Function: Up to 27 sets of
operating parameters
can be registered
(Including the 10
personal settings by
every probe)
16.2.10 VCR Control

VCR operations can be
remote- controlled
from control panel of
scanner with
recommended VCR.
(Control cable is
optionally available)
16-6 Q1E-EA0611
16.2.11 Storage to Hard Disk
(1) Frame Storage Capacity: 300
(2) Multi display: 1, 4, 9, 16
16.2.12 Storage Devices

(1) Floppy Disk: 3.5in 1.44 MB
(2) CD-R/RW: 650MB,700MB
(3) MO: 3.5in 640 MB
16.3 Doppler
(1) Display Modes: B/D, D
(2) FFT Analysis Mode: Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT)
Selectable from
followings
- High-response mode
- High-resolution mode
(3) Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRF):
1k, 1.5k, 2k, 2.5k, 3k,
3.5k, 4k, 4.5k, 5k, 6k,
8k, 10k, 12k, 16k, and
20k (Hz)
(4) Reference Frequencies (REF): Depend on the probes
(5) Wall filter: 50, 100, 150, 200, 300,
400, 500, 600, 800, 1000,
1200, and 1600 Hz
(6) Baseline Shifting: Available
(7) Depth Range: 1 ~ 24 cm
(8) Sampling Gate Lengths: Selectable in 0.5 mm
steps from 0.5 to 5.0 mm
range and in 1 mm steps
from 5.0 mm to 15.0 mm
range
16-7 Q1E-EA0611
(9) Measuring Functions: Velocity
Acceleration
Systolic window
%-window
Pressure gradient
Flow volume
Time-mean velocity
Ratio of time
Ratio of velocity
Mean velocity
Pressure half-time
Heart rate
Velocity integral
Pulsatility
index/Resistance
index
• These measurements are available in Freeze.
(10) Acoustic Input and Output: 2 channel speakers
built-in
(Forward/backward
Doppler sound can be
separated);
VCR input/output
terminals
(Forward/backward
Doppler sound can be
separated)
(11) Maximum Detectable Velocity: PW:±3.56 m/s
(2.0MHz 20kHz)
CW:±8.91 m/s
(2.0MHz 50kHz)
(12) B/D Simultaneous realtime display mode: Maximum
PRF 12 kHz
(13) Display Method: Servey
(14) Sweep Speed: 1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10
s/screen
(15) Angle adjustment: Possible
(16) FFT-γ Values: 8 steps are selectable
16-8 Q1E-EA0611
16.4 Color Flow Mapping
(1) Display Mode: CFM-B, CFM-M,
CFM-B/CFM-M, CFM-B/D
(2) CFM-B Mode
(a) Image Depth Range: Display depth of CFM
image can shift
continuously in the B/W
image field
(b) Color View Angle or Width: Display Angle or width
of CFM image can shift
continuously in the B/W
image field
(c) CFM ROI Settings: Color Box/Sector modes
selectable
(d) Oblique scan: Probe frequency
7.5, 13-6MHz linear
probe
0, ±10, ±15, ±20
(3) CFM-M Mode
(a) Display Method: Survey
(b) Sweep Speed: 1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10
s/screen
(4) Color Presentation Modes
(a) Velocity/Velocity Variance Mode:
Velocity is displayed
at different levels
of red and blue
brightness, while
velocity variance is
emphasized by adding
different levels of
green brightness.
(b) Velocity Mode: Direction and velocity
of flow are displayed in
red and blue families
with shades of colors.
16-9 Q1E-EA0611
(c) Intensity Mode: Toward-flow is
displayed in red, while
the away-flow in blue,
and reflection
intensity is displayed
with different levels
of brightness.
(d) Color Flow Angiography (CFM) Mode:
Reflection intensity
is displayed with
different levels of
brightness.
CFA mode has no velocity
information.
(e) Directional CFA Mode: Indicate the direction
of flow with CFA
(f) Velocity Variance Mode: Extent of velocity
variance is
displayed with
different levels of
yellow brightness.
(g) Color Map: Color display is
silectable after
frozen
(5) Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRF): 120, 250, 350, 400, 500,
650, 800, 1k, 2k, 2.5k,
3k, 3.5k, 4k, 4.5k, 5k,
6k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k
and 20k (Hz)
(6) Persistence: 8 steps are selectable
(7) Motion Artifact Suppressing Function: 3 steps and off are
selectable
(8) Density: 4 steps are selectable
(9) Preference 17 steps are selectable
16-10 Q1E-EA0611
(10) Peak Hold Mode: CFM images are over
lapped real-timely for
selected refresh time.
Refresh time; 4 steps
and infinite are
selectable
(11) Enhanced Velocity (Velocity tagging) Display:
Available
(12) CFM Filter: 3 steps are selectable
(13) Packet Size: 3 steps are selectable
16.5 Image Filling Software

(1) Image Transfer Method: Digital
(2) Transferring Image: Live/Freeze Image
(3) Live Image Transfer Method: Frame to Frame
(F-F)/R-R/All
(4) Image Format: BMP, TIF, Jpeg*, AVI,
AVI(Compression) *
(5) TIFF Compress: None, Pack Bits (LZW
method is not supported
because need Unisys Ltd
License)
(6) AVI Compress: Microsoft Video 1
Note : Jpeg and AVI compressed files can not be Previewed by

other equipment for Ex. EUB-6000
16.6 Cine Memory
(1) Frame Storage Capacity: Maximum
aprox.4000 frames
(10R,14°,Black/White)
(2) Recording mode: Continuous recording
mode
(Cine memory, Long
M-mode, B/M·D split
record mode, B/B split
record mode)
16-11 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Play-Back Mode: Continuous/Single
play-back Image frame
searching by trackball
forward/backward
frame scrolling
variable play back
speed
(4) Long M-Mode: Continuous play-back
Forward/backward
searching with
trackball
(5) Play-back Cine mode ±1/1, ±1/2,
±1/4, ±1/8, 0, Long
M-mode 1.25, 2.5 s
16-12 Q1E-EA0611
16.7 Option
16.7.1 ECG Unit EZU-EK25
(1) Signal Display: ECG
(2) Display Method: Survey
(3) ECG Synchronization: 2 points of timing can
be set independently.
Timing for
synchronization is
displayed in the from of
a vertical line
superimposed on an ECG
waveform.
(4) M-mode Image Partial Blanking: 3 steps and off are
selectable
(5) Accessories ECG cord
(CP-103US) 1pcs
ECG clamps
(TE-43A,43B) 3pcs
16.7.2 Omni-Directional M mode display software EZU-OD2

(1) Probe Components (Displaying enable):
Phased Array probe
EUP-C514, EUP-C524
EUP-C516, EUP-L53S
EUP-L54M
(2) Display Mode

Real-time ODM mode: B(Real)/ODM
Cine ODM mode: B(Cine)/ODM

Real time display time
available:
Approximately 10s
Preview speed is 1:1
only
Long ODM mode: Record time: Max. 217s
16-13 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Setting
Number of ODM Beam Line 1 beam line
Angle Rotation: 0 ~ 359° : 1° Step
Center Position Moving: Step 1 pixel
Sweep Method: Survey
Sweep Speed: 4 steps
(1.25,2.5,5,10s/screen)
Scan Density 1(fixed)
View Angle 6 steps
(4) Image process
ODM-γ 5 steps
ODM Enhance 4 steps
(5) Measurement Enable M mode
(6) Other
Not use DOP and CFM mode at the same time.
And use not ECG SYNC mode.
16.7.3 SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1

(1) General
This unit print the image to SCSI printer.
(2) Specification
! Fast SCSI-2
! Transfer Speed 10MB/s
16.7.4 Network Interface EZU-Pi6
(1) General
This unit make connecting the Ultrasound Scanner
to Network.
(2) Specification
! LAN interface 10Base-T/
100Base-Tx(IEEE802.3)
16.7.5 Steerable CW doppler unit EZU-ST5

(including the pencil CW function)
! Display mode CW, B/CW (In Steerable CW mode only ),
CFM-B/CW (In Steerable CW mode only)
16-14 Q1E-EA0611
! Analisys method FFT method
! PRF 4k,4.5k,5k,6k,8k,10k,12k,
16k,20k,25k,35k,50k (Hz) 12 Steps
! Reference frequency Depend on probe
! Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
800, 1000,1200, 1600 (Hz) 12 steps
! Base line shift Available
! Display method Survey
! Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
! Angle correction Possible
! FFT-γ 8 steps
16.7.6 CW unit EZU-CW4 (for pencil CW probe)

! Display mode CW
! Analysys method FFT method
! PRF 4k,4.5k,5k,6k,8k,10k,12k,
16k,20k,25k,35k,50kHz 12 steps
! Reference frequency 2.5MHz
! Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
800, 1000, 1200, 1600Hz 12 steps
! Base line shift Possible
! Display method Survey
! Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
! Angle correction Possible
! FFT-γ 8 steps
16.7.7 MO Drive unit EZU-MO1

(1) This unit allow to storage the ultrasound image to MO.
(2) Maximum storage capacity : 640MB
16.7.8 Disposable ECG electrode adapter EZU-DA1
16.8 Other
16.8.1 Auxiliary AC Outlet
120 VA (For monitor
EZU-MT24-S1)
400 VA
16.8.2 Power Requirements

(1) Voltage: 120 VAC ± 10%
(2) Frequency: 50/60 Hz
(3) Consumption: 1.2kVA or less (include
400 VA for AC outlet)
16-15 Q1E-EA0611
16.8.3 Operating Environment
(1) Temperature: 10 to 35°C
(2) Relative humidity: 30 to 85% RH (No dew
condensation)
(3) Atmospheric Pressur: 700 to 1060hPa
16.8.4 External Dimensions

(W) 500 × (D) 800 × (H)
1480 mm
16.8.5 Weight
Approx. 130kg (in
standard
configuration)
16-16 Q1E-EA0611
Unit : mm
Fig. 16.1 Body dimension
16-17 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix A Message list
(1) Messages in normal operation

Failure A case where system ID
occurred: (Hard serial number)
can not be recognized
correctly.
Remedy: Possible failure in
hardware. Call our
service engineer.
Failure A case where a selected

occurred: probe is not connected
to the scanner.
Remedy: Reconnect the
selected probe firmly
and click OK button.
Failure A case where the probe

occurred: displayed as real time
biplane is removed.
Remedy: Reconnect the probe
firmly and click OK
button.
Failure When a probe of wide

occurred: field of view is used,
there is a case that
current display field
exceeds beyond the
image display are due
to switch over to
right-left reverse of
display
A-1 660 Q1E-EA0611

Remedy: If there is a
difficulty in image
observation, readjust
the display position.
Meantime, the
dialogue is
automatically erased.
Failure A case where a set

occurred: rejection speed
exceeds the maximum
detection speed.
Remedy: In case there is a
difficulty in image
observation, readjust
the rejection speed.
Meantime, the
dialogue is
automatically erased.
Failure A case where the

occurred: application name you
want to give with
Application Menu
exists already.
Remedy: It is impossible to
give the name in
duplication. Click
OK button and give a
different name.
Failure A case where it is urged

occurred: to adjust baseline for
measurement in play
back mode.
Remedy: Adjust the baseline.
A-2 Q1E-EA0611
(2) Messages when ECG function is used.
Failure When double
occurred: synchronization is
being performed in ECG
synchronous mode,
there is a case that
this message is
displayed, if the
delay time interval is
shorter than a scan
time for one frame.
Remedy: Readjust the delay
time of SYNC 1 and SYNC
2.
(3) The message used by the Back up function

Failure When media are not
occurred: inserted in the drive
Remedy: Please insert in a

drive the media which
can back up.
Failure A case where there is

occurred: no space in media.
Remedy: Please insert in a
drive the media which
can back up.
A-3 Q1E-EA0611
Failure A case where back up
occurred: data is to be
installed.
Remedy: In case the current
set up data can be
lost, select Yes. If
No is selected, the
installing work is
suspended.
Failure In case back up data

occurred: for installation and
the version of scanner
is different. And the
installation work is
suspended.
Remedy: Click OK button and
prepare back up data
which match with the
same version of
scanner.
Failure In case back up data

occurred: for installation are
not found in selected
drive.
Remedy: OK button and prepare
media in which back up
data are stored.
A-4 Q1E-EA0611
(4) The message used by the Image filing function
Failure A case where a value
occurred: except from 1 to 233
is input.

input an integral
value from 1 to 233.
Failure A case where a value

occurred: except from 0 to 255
is not input.
input an integral
value from 0 to 255.
Failure Even though Log

occurred: Information check
box is set ON in Image
Filing set up menu,
Log File is not
created by Set up of
Log File.
create Log File by Set
of Log File.

occurred: no Log File in Merge
Folder.
Remedy: Request to create Log
File. If Yes not
clicked, Log File is
created. If No is
clicked, merging
process is
suspended.
A-5 Q1E-EA0611
occurred: no space in media for
merging in the
merging process.
Remedy: Insert new media and
click OK. When
Cancel is clicked,
the merging process
is suspended.
Failure A case where Log

occurred: Information in HDD is
full and the merging
process of Log
Information is
automatically
started, but the
process is suspended
on a way.
Remedy: Click OK button.

occurred: no Log File in Merge
File in merge
processing of Log
Information.
terminate the
merging process of
Log Information.
Failure A case of failure in

occurred: connecting to
Network.
Remedy: Confirm the status of
connection to
Network.
A-6 Q1E-EA0611
Failure A case where you want
occurred: to delete Image File
and Log File.
Remedy: If YES is click, the
deletion is
executed. If NO is
clicked, the
deletion is
suspended.
Failure A case where the size

occurred: of transferred file
exceeds an empty
space in media when
images are
transferred to media
(like CD, FD, etc.)
Remedy: After click OK button
exchange media or
delete the file in
media.
Failure A case where media is

occurred: not in the drive or it
is in Read out only
mode when images are
transferred to media
(like CD, FD, etc.)
confirm whether
media is in the drive
or it is in Read out
only mode or not.
A-7 Q1E-EA0611
occurred: a failure except
above said two
failures in image
transferring time.
confirm found out
failure. If the
message is again
displayed although
there is no failure,
call our service
engineer.
Failure A case where matching

occurred: ID and Name can not be
found although ID and
Name are searched in
Image File operating
menu.
input again ID and
Name in order to start
the research.
Failure When number of images

occurred: stored in the Hard
Disk reaches 300.
Remedy: Since Save cannot do
an image file at the
time of the next Save,
it is warning.
Delete files in the
Hard Disk or transfer
them to any medium.
A-8 Q1E-EA0611
Failure When images more than
occurred: 300 are stored in the
Hard Disk
Remedy: The images can not be
stored in the Hard
Disk. Delete files
in the Hard Disk or
transfer them to any
medium.

occurred: an Image File
including images of
invalid size is in
selected drive in
replaying time of
Image File.
confirm the Image
File.
Failure In Retrieve mode,

occurred: there is a case where
Live image transfer.
Remedy: If Yes is clicked,
single image file is
transferred. If No is
clicked, the transfer
is suspended.
A-9 Q1E-EA0611
Failure A case where a drive
occurred: selection is not
ready in reading time
of Image File.
Remedy: Insert media into the
drive to be selected
and click Yes.
If No is clicked, the
reading in process
from the drive is
suspended.
Failure A case where empty

occurred: space in Merge Folder
is smaller than the
size of Image File to
be transferred to
Merge Folder.
delete or transfer
files in Merge
Folder.
Failure When ending a Filing

occurred: dialog and the image
remains in Merge
Folder.
Remedy: If Yes is clicked,
Image File in Merge
Folder is deleted.
If No is clicked, it
is left as it is in
Merge Folder.
A-10 Q1E-EA0611
Failure A case where it is
occurred: impossible to
transfer as the size
of transfer file is
too big.

confirm the transfer
file size.
For your reference:
NTSC, B/W: Able to transfer
up to 1659 frames
NTSC, Color: Able to transfer
up to 568 frames
PAL, B/W: Able to transfer
up to 1089 frames
PAL, Color: Able to transfer
up to 363 frames
Failure A case where Log

occurred: Information stored
temporally in HDD is
to be merged.
Remedy: Click Yes button. If
No is clicked, Log
Information in HDD is
not merged.
A-11 Q1E-EA0611
Failure After freeze off, a
occurred: case where you press
Freeze key at once to
execute multi image
transfer.
Remedy: Please click OK
button. When
condition is not
freezing, you press
Freeze key after a few
minutes. And you
execute multi image
transfer.
Failure When there is no

occurred: availability in MO
and a floppy disk.
Remedy: Click [OK] button.
Although the same
message displays
several times, please
click the [OK] button
again. Please move
some files in MO or a
floppy disk to the
hard disk of a
personal computer.
Failure When PATIENT key is

occurred: pressed into retrieve
of image.
Remedy: Click [OK] button.
When you correct
Patient information,
be careful not to
change ID and Name.
A-12 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix B SCSI Printer
If the SCSI printer and SCSI interface function (available as option

EZU-Pi1) that are recommended by Hitachi are connected to the
ultrasound scanner, ultrasound image can be printed out by using
the SCSI printer. Image can be simply printed out by operating
Print key similarly to the operation for the conventional video
printer.
1. Connectable SCSI printer

To utilize this function, the following SCSI printers shown in Table
1 are recommended.
Table 1 Recommended SCSI Printers

Manufacturer Model Print time
Mitsubishi CP770D About 30sec.
(Printing Mode : Standard)
2. Precautions in connection
(1) SCSI Interface function (option model EZU-Pi1) is required.
(2) To connect the printer , SCSI ID of the printer must be set.
• With the CP770D connected, set SCSI ID to "5".
In the case any other SCSI device has already been connected,
make sure that the SCSI ID is not duplicated. In case it
is duplicated, change the ID of the SCSI device to different
ID not in use.
NOTICE: Turn the power OFF before connecting the SCSI printer with
the ultrasound scanner.
3. Setting SCSI printer

By connecting the SCSI Interface function (option EZU-Pi1),the SCSI
printer can be designated to the output destination of Printer Key,
thereby the SCSI printer to be used for output can be selected and
image quality can be adjusted.
B-1 672 Q1E-EA0611

3.1 Setting Print Key
Set the output destination of Print Key to the SCSI printer. By
this setting, image can be printed out through the SCSI printer.
(1) Press Main Menu key.
(2) Select [Setup] → [Print Key] on the displayed Main Menu to display
Print Key menu.
(3) Select Printer (SCSI) on Print Key menu.
These are displayed

by installing EZU-Pi1.
Fig. 1 Setting Print Key
<CAUTION>
When printing images using a print key, REC1 key or REC2 key at
the time of retrieve, it is printed depending on the mode before
retrieving. When you print a color image, please set B/W Mode of
'Color select for filing Image' in a Set Up Filing dialog to 'Full
Color Image'. Or please make it CFM mode before retrieving.
B-2 Q1E-EA0611
3.2 Selection of SCSI printer and adjustment of image quality
It is necessary to select the SCSI printer and designate the printer
for image output.
(1) Press Main Menu key.
(2) Select [Setup] → [Peripherals] → [Printer(SCSI)] on the
displayed Main Menu.
Fig. 2 Selection of Printer (SCSI)
(3) Printer (SCSI) dialog is displayed. (This is displayed by

installing the EZU-Pi1.)
(4) Press List box of Select Printer.
(5) Connectable SCSI printers are displayed. Select the connected
SCSI printer from the list.
B-3 Q1E-EA0611
(6) After selection, press "OK" button.
Fig. 3 Selection of Connected SCSI Printer
B-4 Q1E-EA0611
3.3 Adjustment of image quality
By selecting TAB on Printer (SCSI) dialog, image quality can be
adjusted for each printer.
3.3.1 Image quality adjustment for CP770D

(1) Select TAB [MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)] displayed on Printer
(SCSI) dialog. Image adjustment parameters for CP770D
are displayed.
(2) Selecting each of these parameters, its value can be
changed by operating numeric keys or the spin control
button displayed at the right of the displayed parameter.
Selection of TAB
Fig. 4 Image Quality Adjustment for CP770D
1) Red, Green, Blue

Each level of RGB can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
2) Contrast
Contrast level can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
B-5 Q1E-EA0611
3) Brightness
Brightness level can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
4) Printing Mode:
Image quality of printed image can be selected from
the following three modes.
Standard : Default setting. Image can be printed
at high speed.
Fine : Better quality image can be printed as
compared with Standard.
Super Fine : Better quality image can be printed as
compared with Fine.
Selecting higher image quality mode requires longer
printing time. Select a printing mode according to
the required application.
(3) Pressing Reset button resets the settings to those set
at the factory before shipment.
(4) Pressing Cancel button cancels the change before pressing
"OK" button.
(5) After all the changes are completed, press "OK" button
to save the changed values.
<CAUTION>
When printing images using a print key, REC1 key or REC2 key at
the time of retrieve, it is printed depending on the mode before
retrieving. When you print a color image, please set 'Color select
for filing Image' of 'B/W Mode in a Set Up Filing dialog to 'Full
Color Image'. Or please make it CFM mode before retrieving.
B-6 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix C How to use a log file
The internal hard disk can temporarily store up to 10,000 file

transfer information logs (log information).
However, the user cannot refer directly to log information stored
on the hard disk (NOTICE 1).
For this reason, log information should be stored as a log file
on an external medium, such as a CD-R/RW disk and a magneto-optical
disk (MO).
The Log Search screen receives log information from a log file and
displays search results.
Log information and image data must be stored on separate CD-R/RW
or MO’s.
NOTICE 1: To prevent loss of log files due to the breakage or

failure of the internal hard disk, log files are not
stored on the internal hard disk.
1. Log file setup procedure

A log file cannot be used until the user sets it up.
Use this procedure to create a log file.
2. Procedure for using a log file

To display a log file on the screen, the log information temporarily
stored on the hard disk must be merged into a log file.
Use this procedure to merge log information into a log file.
3. Automatic log file merging procedure
When a specific number of logs are stored on the hard disk, they
must be merged into a log file.
A message appears prompting the user to merge the log information,
and the user performs the merging. Use this procedure to merge
log information into a log file.
NOTICE 2: To enable the disk search function using a log file,

a volume label must be assigned to each FD, CD-R/RW
and MO storing the image data.
The Log Search screen displays the volume label of the

medium (FD or CD-R/RW or MO) that stores the intended
image data.
C-1 678 Q1E-EA0611

The following pages describe the above-mentioned
operation procedures in detail.
1. Log file setup procedure

(1) From Main Menu, choose Set Up and then Image filing to display
the Set Up Filing menu.
(2) In the Set Up Filing menu, select the Log Information check
box and click the "Set Up Log File" button.
(The screen shown in Fig. 2 appears.)
To the screen shown in Fig.2
Fig.1 “Log Information” in the Set Up Filing dialog
(3) In "Storage Drive and Make Log file," select the drive where
you want to create the log file.(NOTICE 1)
(4) Click on the "Make" button. (The screen shown in Fig. 3
appears.)
NOTICE 1: The hard disk cannot be selected. The hard disk is used
only to store log information temporarily.
To the screen shown

in Fig. 3
Fig. 2 Set up Log file screen
C-2 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Create a log file according to the messages shown below. When
creating the log file, do not use the same medium (FD, CD-R/RW,
MO, etc.) used to store the image data.
(6) When you see the message "Succeeded!!!", the log file has been
created.
Cancels log file creation. (NOTICE 1)

When the drive is
Automatic log file creation
This message stays on screen for several seconds.
End (The display returns the screen shown in Fig. 2.)
Fig. 3 Log file creation procedure
NOTICE 1: Even though log file creation procedure has been

cancelled, the message "Log file is not created"
appears when the user exits the Set Up Filing menu
if the Set up Log file check box is checked.
C-3 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE 2:
! When no storage medium is inserted in the drive.
! When the storage medium is read-only.
2. Procedure for using a log file

(1) Click on the "Read" key.
(2) Click on the "Log Info." button on the image file operation
menu.
(3) Select "Yes" in the message box shown in Fig. 4.(Notice 1)
(The screen shown in Fig. 5 appears.)
(4) The Log Search screen appears once the procedure described
in Fig. 5 has been completed.
NOTICE 1: Selecting "Yes" merges the log information temporarily

stored on the hard disk into the log file created by the
user (see 1. Log file setup procedure), enabling the user
to search log information.
When "No" is selected, log information can be searched

without merging.
To the screen shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 4 Log file merge confirmation message
(5) Merge the log information stored on the hard disk according
to the messages shown below.
C-4 Q1E-EA0611
(6) When you see the message "Succeeded!!!", the log file has been
merged.
- The Log Search screen appears when "Log Info." is selected
on the image file operation menu.
- After automatic merging (see Fig. 6), the display returns
to the screen before automatic merging.
When the drive is

not ready (Notice 1) When there is no log file
Normal
Automatic log file creation

End
Normal
Merging
When the storage media has no

more available memory
This message stays on

screen for several seconds.
Automatic log file creation End
Fig. 5 Log file merging procedure
NOTICE 1:
! When no storage medium is inserted in the drive.
! When the storage medium is read-only.
C-5 Q1E-EA0611
3. Automatic log file merging procedure
(1) When the number of logs temporarily stored on the hard disk
reaches 9,000, the display goes to the screen shown in Fig.
5.
(2) The automatic merging procedure is completed after the merging
procedure shown in Fig. 5.
Number of logs on hard disk: 10,000
Hard disk
Log 1
(NOTICE) If the number of logs exceeds 10,000,

they will be deleted from log 1.
Log 9,000
When the "Write" key is clicked on or "OK" is selected in the Transfer dialog box after the number of logs
stored on the hard disk has reached 9,000.
To the screen shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 6 Automatic log file merging procedure
C-6 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix D Precautions to display on Mac OS
1. Formatting MO disk and CD-R/RW

Even to display image file on Mac OS, use either of the following
MO disks or CD-R/RW.
! Commercially available MO disk or CD-R/RW (formatted for Windows)
! MO disk formatted with the Ultrasound scanner (Main menu → Disk
→ MO Format)
! CD-R/RW formatted with the Ultrasound scanner (Main menu → Disk
→ CD Format)
NOTICE: The MO disk and CD-R/RW formatted on Mac OS cannot be used
for the Ultrasound scanner.
2. Necessary software
To display images in MO disk or CD-R/RW, a mount software is necessary.
2.1 Mac OS standard mount software

Possibility of displaying the mount software incorporated in Mac
OS as standard is described in the following table. Any mount
software is not incorporated in versions older than Mac OS7.5.1.
as standard.
CD-R/RW
Software Possibility of display

Applicable OS version
name 650MB 700MB
supported
by OS
· MacOS10.1 and later ○ ○
MO
Software Possibility of display

Applicable OS version
name 128MB 230MB 540MB 640MB
PC
Exchange
MacOS7.5.1 and later
version untilMacOS8.5 ○ ○ ○
(NOTICE 1)
×
(NOTICE 2)
File
Exchange
MacOS8.5
version
and later
○ ○ ○ ×
(NOTICE 2)
(NOTICE 1)
D-1 684 Q1E-EA0611

NOTICE 1: The MO drive usable for 540MB is necessary.
Although it could be seen displaying images in 540MB
MO disk at the factory, it might not be possible according
to the information of the MO disk manufacturer. It is,
therefore, recommended to use the 230 MO disk when using
this mount software.
NOTICE 2: The mount software cannot be displayed even with the

640 MB MO drive.
2.2 Other mount software (MO)

Display by using the following mount software has been confirmed.
Software Applicable OS Possibility of display

name version 128MB 230MB 540MB 640MB
B' s
screw3.1.5
MacOS8.5.1 ○ ○ ○
(NOTICE 1)
×
(NOTICE 2)
B' s
control1.3
MacOS7.5.5 ○ ○ ○
(NOTICE 1)
×
(NOTICE 2)
NOTICE 1: The MO drive usable for 540BM is necessary.
NOTICE 2: The mount software cannot be displayed even with the

640 MB MO drive
3. Image display software

Any image, if it is created on the display software compatible with
the formats such as BMP, TIF (without compression), TIF (Pack Biz),
JPEG and AVI, can be displayed.
Example:
! PhotoShop (BMP, TIF, TIF(Pack Biz), JPEG)
! Graphic Converter ((BMP, TIF, TIF(Pack Biz), JPEG)
D-2 Q1E-EA0611
4. Precautions
- There may be cases where display is not possible depending on
combination of MacOS version, format of MO or CD-R/RW, MO drive
or CD drive and mount software.
Be sure to display the test image from the Ultrasound scanner
to the MO disk or CD-R/RW and make sure that the MO disk or CD-R/RW
can display it on Mac OS.
- In the case that the MO or CD-R/RW is unprotected and the images
are displayed into the MO disk or CD-R/RW on MacOS, several files
are automatically created on the MO disk or CD-R/RW. (Even if
images are thereafter written by the Ultrasound scanner, any
problem will occur.)
D-3 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix E The rate of compression of a file
The standard of compression at the time of specifying the compression
method of a file is shown below.
The value shown here is a standard to the last. The rate of compression
at the time of actually compressing a file changes with files.
Format The Image Note
compression Color Image B/W Image
method
TIFF Pack Bitz It It - Loss-less
compresses compresses compression
to about to about
60%. 60%.
JPEG Baseline It It - Baseline is the
compresses compresses standard JPEG
to about to about compression method.
10%. 15%. - Lossy compression
AVI Microsoft It It - Microsoft Video 1 is
(Compression) Video 1 compresses compresses one of the AVI
to about to about compression
25%. 20%. methods.
- Lossy compression
E-1 687 Q1E-EA0611

Appendix F Starting the Ultrasound Equipment from the System CD
If the Ultrasound scanner cannot start because of a hard disk failure

(for example, caused by a crash or a general degradation), you can
use the System CD, which comes with the Ultrasound equipment, to
start it. This appendix describes how to start the Ultrasound
equipment from the System CD.
<CAUTION>
1 When the Ultrasound equipment has been started from the System
CD, do not perform the following operations:
- Functionality of transmitting images to a CD or saving
measurement reports
- Ejecting the CD
2 If the equipment is started from the System CD when the hard
disk in the equipment is damaged, you cannot use the
functionality of transmitting images or saving measurement
reports to save them to the hard disk. Select a medium other
than the hard disk.
NOTICE:1)If you have replaced the faulty hard disk with a new one
received from a factory, all the user preferences are
factory-set values.
2)We recommend that you back up your user preferences

periodically. To back up your user preferences, from the
"Main Menu", choose "Setup" and then "Back Up Data". After
replacing the hard disk, you can use this backup to restore
your previous user preferences.
Procedure for starting the Ultrasound equipment from the System CD
1. Make sure that you have the following storage medium that came with
the Ultrasound equipment.
! System CD (CD)
This CD includes a hard-disk recovery tool. You can start the
Ultrasound equipment from this CD if the equipment cannot be
started from its hard disk.
<CAUTION>
Note that only one System CD comes with an Ultrasound equipment
and the System CD can be used only for the equipment that it
came with. If you use the System CD of another equipment, the
copy protection will prevent you from using the System CD
normally.
F-1 688 Q1E-EA0611

2. Insert the System CD into the CD drive of the Ultrasound equipment.
3. Turn on the equipment.
4. The initial window appears and the Ultrasound equipment starts.
<CAUTION>
! When the ultrasound equipment is started from the System
CD, use of the optional software is protected.
You cannot use optional software.
! When the ultrasound equipment is started from the System
CD, the functionality for filing images into a CD-R/RW cannot
be used.
If you attempt to perform settings by choosing Main Menu,
Set Up, and then Image Filing, an error indication appears.
F-2 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix G Formatting CD-R/RW and MO Disks
1. CD-R/RW disks
Many kinds of CD-ROM media are available in the market and they
can be categorized by their basic functionality into two types:
• Write-once disk (CD-R)
• Re-writable disk (CD-RW)
You can write to both of these media. The CD-R disk does not allow
you to delete and overwrite existing data and the CD-RW disk allows
you to delete and overwrite existing data many times.
• If the disk is to be used in another PC, ensure that the disk
contains only the ultrasound image data.
• Make sure to create a backup copy of the disk. To make a backup
copy, transfer the data on the disk to another medium on a separate
PC, or copy the data into the merge folder on this equipment
and then store the data in another medium. (For details on how
to copy data into the merge folder, refer to "9.2.4 Filing dialog".)
2. Determining the disk to use

Although you can add and delete files on both the CD-R and CD-RW
disks like hard disks, select the type of disk according to your
purpose.
Generally, we recommend the use of CD-RW disks. (However, to read
the data on another PC, the PC must support CD-RW disks.)
• You can delete and re-write data many times on CD-RW disks.
Use CD-RW disks for normal uses (except storage).
• You can neither delete nor overwrite data on CD-R disks. Use
CD-R disks for data storage. Once you eject the CD-R from the
drive, you will no longer be able to write to it.
• If you want to store image data repeatedly, you should use CD-RW
disks.
3. Manually formatting a blank disk
If you use a (blank) disk for the first time, you must format it
beforehand. The following subsections show how to format a blank
disk.
(a) Manually formatting a blank CD-R (write-once) disk
G-1 690 Q1E-EA0611

1) Insert a blank CD-R (write-once) disk into a CD-R/RW drive.
To insert a disk, press the eject button to open the tray,
and place the disk on the tray.
2) Press the MENU

MAIN
key. Next, from the Main Menu, choose "Disk"
and then "CD Format" to display the Format Options dialog
box.
Fig. G-1 Format Options dialog box (for CD-R)

3) In this dialog box, set the following options:
• Volume Label: Specify the name of the disk. The
name can have up to 11 characters
except the following symbols:
¥ / : ; * ? " < > | + = . , [ ]
If something is already displayed
as the volume name, that name will
be used. You can change it as
required.
• Enable compression
on this disk Do not select this check box. If you
use compression, you may be unable
to read the data.
4) In the Format Options dialog box, click the OK button. A
message appears, indicating that the disk is being formatted.
In a few minutes, formatting of the disk completes.
G-2 Q1E-EA0611
(b) Manually formatting a blank CD-RW (re-writable) disk
1) Insert a blank CD-RW (re-writable) disk into a CD-R/RW drive.
To insert a disk, press the eject button to open the tray,
and place the disk on the tray.
2) Press the MENU

MAIN
key. Next, from the Main Menu, choose "Disk"
and then "CD Format" to display the Format Options dialog
box.
Fig. G-2 Format Options dialog box (for CD-RW)

3) In this dialog box, set the following options:
• Volume Label: Specify the name of the disk. The
name can have up to 11 characters
except the following symbols:
¥ / : ; * ? " < > | + = . , [ ]
If something is already displayed
as the volume name, that name will
be used. You can change it as
required.
• Enable compression Do not select this check box. If you
on this disk use compression, you may be unable
to read the data.
G-3 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE: If you insert a compressed disk into a CD-R/RW drive of
a computer that does not contain CD writing software, the UDF
reader installation window automatically appears.
By clicking the [Yes] button and then installing the UDF reader,
the medium can be loaded.
• Format types for ReWritable Disks
Select either of the following formatting methods.
Select “Full Format” when using a non-formatted disk.
Quick Format: This formatting method quickly formats the
disk. Normally, you can format one disk
in a few minutes. This formatting method
has the following advantages:
• The disk becomes available quickly.
• You do not need to verify the physical
status of the disk.
NOTICE: Do not select “Quick Format” when using a non-formatted
disk.
Full Format: This formatting method needs time more
then Quick Format method. (It may require
up to 90 minutes.)
You can see the time that is needed for
formatting in dialog box.
This formatting method has the following
advantages:
• CD-ROM and DVD-ROM drives connected to
Windows computers can read the disks
formatted by this method.
This method is recommended if you read the
image data disks through another Windows
PC.
NOTICE: Disks formatted using “Full Format” may not be read on
some computers using Windows 95 or 98.
G-4 Q1E-EA0611
4) In the Format Options dialog box, click the OK button. A
dialog box that displays the formatting time appears, until
formatting of this disk completes.
Click the [Yes] button to start formatting.
(c) Ejecting the disk

After the disk is formatted, eject the disk from the drive.
When you eject a CD-RW disk formatted by the quick formatting
method, the following message appears.
NOTICE:
! When you reformat a CD that has already been formatted, the
disk will automatically be ejected after the CD is reformatted.
! When you attempt to eject the CD-R (write-once) disk, the system
processes the disk so that it can be read by any CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive. Therefore, it takes some time to eject the disk.
NOTICE:
! Do not turn off the equipment while a disk is being formatted.
If you do it, you may be unable to use the disk.
! Do not eject the disk by pressing the eject button on the CD
drive.
G-5 Q1E-EA0611
4. MO disks
(a) Procedure for formatting MO disk
Use the following procedure to
format an MO disk:
1) Press the MENU
MAIN
key . Next, from
Main Menu, choose "Disk" and
then "MO Format".
The MO Disk Formatter window
appears.
NOTICE: You can use MO disk when
the EZU-MO1 MO drive unit is
installed.
Fig. G-3
MO Disk Formatter window
2) In the Format window, make sure that the following settings
have been specified.
Capacity: The capacity of the MO disk you
inserted
File system: FAT *
Allocation unit size: Default allocation size
Volume label: Any character string (such as MO1)
Quick Format: Not selected
NOTICE: *Be careful not to select FAT32.
3) Click the Start button to start formatting the disk.
4) After the formatting completes, click the Close button to
close the Format window.
(b) Ejecting the disk
Press the MENU

MAIN
key. Next, from Main Menu, choose "Disk" and
then "MO Eject".
G-6 Q1E-EA0611
Appendix AA Using the PC Printer
1. Preparatory Work
Connect the PC printer with the system and install the driver of
printer to be connected into the system.
Ask our service personnel for installing the driver.
2. Setting the PC Printer
(1) Select Main Menu → Setup → Image Print to display the Set
Up Image Print dialog (see Fig. 1).
(2) Select PC Printer from (a).
(3) Follow Table 1 to select values for <1> through <5>.
(4) Please click a (b)[properties] button, when a detailed setup
is required. The setting dialog according to the printer driver
is displayed.
(5) After selection, check values selected and click the OK
button.
(a)
<1> (b)
<2> <4>
<3> <5>
Fig. 1 Set Up Image Print Dialog
AA-1 696 Q1E-EA0611

Table 1 Printer Settings
No. Title Description
<1> Select Printer Select the name of target printer.
<2> Film Size Select paper size.
Select the layout of images.
You can select from following
formats;
· 1x1 Landscape
<3> Image Display Format
· 1x2 Portrait
· 2x2 Landscape
· 2x3 Portrait
· 3x3 Landscape
<4> Number of Copies Select number of copies.
<5> Paper Source Select paper source.
NOTICE: If nothing can be selected, the printer driver may not

be normally installed.
Ask out service personnel for installation.
AA-2 Q1E-EA0611
3. Print
3.1 Print by the Print key
It is possible to print images to PC printer by the PRINT key.
(1) Allocating the PRINT key
To print images by using the PRINT key, select Image Printer
from the dialog shown in Fig. 2 to be displayed by selecting
Main Menu → Setup → Print/REC.
Select Image Printer.
Fig. 2 Setting Print Key
(2) Print
(a) When Freeze Off, display any image to be printed and press
the FREEZE key. Or, after pressing the FREEZE key, reproduce
any image to be printed in the cine mode for selection.
(b) Press the PRINT key. This saves the image temporarily in
the hard disk.
At that time, the number of present image which is saved
is displayed. When saved images are two and Image numbers
to be printed out in one paper is six, a dialog
is displayed.
(c) Repeat Step (a) and (b) for images to be printed out onto
a sheet of paper.
(d) Print will start automatically when number of saved images
reaches a specified value.
At a time of printing out a print mark is displayed in
the screen.
AA-3 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE:
! When 3D software is displayed, a dialog which is
shown in saving images for PC printer output and a print
mark which is shown in printing out are not displayed.
! When 3D software is displayed, images being displayed
for PC printer output are all printed out.
AA-4 Q1E-EA0611
(3) Forced output
If any of the following operations takes place, saved images
are outputted to the printer.
! [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
! Pressing the End Exam key. But, when VCR playback screen
or 3D software is displayed, it is impossible to output
forcedly images to PC printer by the End Exam key.
! Starting the ultrasound system (Any of images saved when
previously using the system remain not printed).
(i) [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
When using the Print key to output images to the printer,
data of the same patient only is outputted to the same
paper. Therefore, if clicking the [New Patient] button
when the patient is changed, images print.
(ii) Pressing the End Exam key

To force saved images to be printed, press the End Exam
key
AA-5 Q1E-EA0611
(iii)Starting the system
If turning off the system power when any of saved images
remain, a message shown in Fig. 3 appears when starting
the system. Click the [Yes] button. If print is to be
canceled, select the [No] button for the message.
NOTICE: If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted

and they cannot be outputted to the printer any more.
Fig. 3 Forced Output MessageNOTICE:

! If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted
and they cannot be outputted to the printer any more.
! The message of Fig.3 is displayed when the [OK] button
is clicked by Set Up Image print dialog, with temporary
image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents
of a setting, it is printed on the setting conditions before
change.
(iv) Batch printing for every patient

Images can be printed for every patient.
For Details, please refer to 9.2.8 Batch transferring /
printing for every patient.
AA-6 Q1E-EA0611
3.2 Print from the Filing dialog
(1) Press the Read key to display the Filing dialog (see Fig. 4).
(2) Select any images to be printed.
(3) Click the [Image Print] button (Fig. 4 (a)).
(4) Image Print dialog(Fig.5) is displayed.
(5) When you change the contents of a setting, refer to " Section
2 Setting the PC Printer".
(6) Check the contents of a setting and click the [OK] button.
(7) The images printed in order of the selected images is arranged,
print starts.
(a)
Fig. 4 Filing dialog
Fig. 5 Image Print dialog
AA-7 Q1E-EA0611
NOTICE 1:Images in AVI format and DICOM format cannot be printed.
When any images in AVI format or DICOM format have been
selected, a message appears as shown in Fig. 6.
Click the [OK] button to continue output to the printer,
or the [Cancel] button to stop output to the printer.
Fig. 6 Print Confirmation Message
NOTICE 2:If the Image Print button is used to output images to

the printer when there are images saved with the PRINT
key, a message appears as shown in Fig. 3. Select the
[Yes] button to output images saved with the PRINT key
as well or the [No] button to delete them.
If selecting the [No] button, however, saved images are
deleted and they cannot be outputted to the printer any
more.
4. Cautions
(1) When no paper remains or no ink remains, refer to the instruction
manual of printer.
(2) According to the printer connected a dialog box indicating
"Printing" may appear on the ultrasound screen. If it disturbs
image viewing, press the Tab key while pressing the Alt key.
The dialog box indicating "Printing" is canceled.
(3) Setting place of the printer
When connecting the printer with Ultrasound scanner, the
printer must be placed out side of the Patient Environment
to avoid an electrical shock. Regarding the Patient Environment,
IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for a medical electrical
system describes for the area which is shown in Fig. 6.
(4) When you print to PC printer on a network, please install the
driver of a printer in ultrasound equipment and set it up to
print direct. Printing via a network server which installed
the driver in the network server cannot be performed.
AA-8 Q1E-EA0611
(5) Please do not click the [Speed & Progress] button of the utility
tab in the setting dialog of an EPSON driver.
(6) When printing images using a print key, REC1 key or REC2 key
at the time of retrieve, it is printed depending on the mode
before retrieving. When you print a color image, please set
'Color select for filing Image' of 'B/W Mode in a Set Up Filing
dialog to 'Full Color Image'. Or please make it CFM mode before
retrieving.
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 6 Patient Environment
Make sure to use the printer which complies with IEC Publication
60950 Standard (Safety of information processing equipment
including the equipment for office use) or IEC Publication
60601-1 Standard (Safety of medical electrical equipment).
AA-9 Q1E-EA0611
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place the printer
to be connected with EUB-5500 within the area of the Patient
Environment.
AA-10 Q1E-EA0611
Index
AV-Area measurement...... 11-89

A
Accel.(Acceleration) B
Measurement ............ 11-35
B MENU of MAIN MENU....... 5-24
Acoustic output indices... 4-22 B mode..................... 5-8
Acoustic output level..... 4-21 Backup of system setting data
Acoustic Power Level Control ........................ 14-3
........................ 16-2
Baseline.................. 5-75
Adjusting angle of probe mark Basic Measurements....... 11-29
........................ 6-16
Basic Procedures.......... 11-6
Adjusting brightness of the
monitor .................. 4-5 Batch printing............ 9-29
Adjusting Doppler angle... 5-43 Batch transferring........ 9-29
Adjusting Doppler sound volume B-color
........................ 5-45 ...... 5-36, 5-49, 5-59, 5-66
Adjusting gain (brightness) B-color: Selecting colors
...... 5-32, 5-43, 5-66, 5-73 ........................ 5-18
Adjustment functions...... 5-59 BIO Unit EZU-EK25........ 16-13
Advanced dTHI (dynamic Tissue Biplane................... 5-83
Harmonic Image) ......... 5-13 Biplane display........... 5-14
AGC (Automatic gain control) BI-Plane Measurement.... 11-111
.................. 5-21, 5-37
B-mode Image Display...... 16-3
ANNOTATION function menu... 6-4
B-Mode Menu................ 8-8
Annotation Menu........... 8-22
Body mark................. 8-26
Ao (Aortic Valve) Measurement
....................... 11-64 Body Marks................ 16-6
Application............... 16-6 Bullet Measurement...... 11-121
APPLICATION Function....... 8-1
C
APPLICATION parameter setting
menu ..................... 8-7 Calip Measurement........ 11-29
Application parameter setup Calling ANNOTATION menu.... 6-3
....................... 5-117 Center position of S-shape curve
Area..................... 11-14 .................. 5-50, 5-67
Area-E (Area-Ellipse).... 11-32 Center value of S-shape curve
.................. 5-23, 5-38
Area-Length Measurement
...................... 11-108 CFM filter................ 5-86
Arrow menu................. 6-5 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU..... 5-89
Auxiliary AC Outlet...... 16-15 CFM Mode.................. 5-70
Index-1 706 Q1E-EA0611

CFM Preference............ 5-78 Control screen selection.. 5-22
CFM-Mode Menu............. 8-15 Controls Affecting the Acoustic
Output .................. 4-20
CFM-Velo Measurement..... 11-42
Copy & Paste............... 8-4
Changing Time............. 4-20
Correcting characters
Character Display......... 16-5
.................... 6-2, 6-5
Character font............. 6-5
Correction of measurement result
Character input menu....... 6-1 ...................... 11-281
Character size............. 6-5 Current Condition.......... 8-3
Character, Annotation and Body CW unit EZU-CW4 (for pencil CW
Mark ..................... 6-1 probe) ................. 16-15
Check before power ON...... 4-2 CW unit EZU-MO1.......... 16-15
Check before use.......... 14-1
D
Checkup after storage for a long
time .................... 14-4 Decel. (Deceleration)
measurement ............ 11-50
Checkup while using the scanner
unit .................... 14-2 Default application setting
Cine Memory.............. 16-11 ......................... 8-5
Delete..................... 8-5
Cine memory mode.......... 9-33
Deleting body mark........ 6-16
Cine memory ODM mode..... 5-115
Deleting characters........ 6-3
Cleaning of equipment..... 14-4
Color Flow Mapping........ 16-9 Depth direction enhancement
.................. 5-20, 5-49
color function............ 5-18
Details of Preset Operation Setup
Color map................. 5-78 Menu .................... 6-21
Component Description...... 3-1 Digital Scan Converter.... 16-3
Components and Functions... 3-1 Disk Menu................. 7-16
Configuration of Measurement Display................... 8-20
Setup ................. 11-173
Display angle (width)
Connecting cords.......... 5-96 .................. 5-48, 5-59
Connecting the probe....... 4-1 Display Menu............... 7-2
Connection of PC printer and the Display of B mode.......... 5-8
HUB for Network function
........................ 12-5 Display of B/PW-mode...... 5-42
Display of steerable CW-mode image
Connection of Peripheral devices
........................ 12-3 ........................ 5-57
Display setting of ANNOTATION menu
Contents of Measuring Functions
......................... 6-6
....................... 11-29
Displaying B/M-mode image
Continuous record mode and
........................ 5-32
continuous record of heart beat
automatic detection mode Displaying body mark...... 6-15
........................ 9-35
Index-2 Q1E-EA0611
Displaying physiological signal Enhancement in horizontal
waveform ................ 5-97 direction ......... 5-37, 5-60
Displaying single element CW-mode Entering Body Mark........ 6-15
image ................... 5-64 Entering Characters........ 6-1
Displaying upright position mark Entering Characters with
........................ 6-17 Annotation ............... 6-3
Distance................. 11-13 Entering Hospital Name.... 4-20
D-Mode Menu............... 8-12 Entering the comment..... 10-14
Dop Cursor display........ 5-17 Entry of OB measurement ID (Entry
Dop. Cursor............... 5-81 of Obstetric measurement menu)
........................ 4-15
Dop. Menu of Main Menu
............ 5-51, 5-61, 5-68 Entry of Standard ID (Entry of
Standard Menu) .......... 4-10
Doppler................... 16-7
Environmental conditions... 1-5
Doppler Measurement...... 11-67
Equipment Composition...... 2-1
dP/dt measurement........ 11-51
Examples of measurement edition
D-Profile................ 11-37
...................... 11-226
Dual CFM.................. 5-83
Extenal Dimensions....... 16-16
Dynamic range
5-20, 5-37, 5-49, 5-60, 16-1 F
Features............ 1-1, 5-110
E
ECG Function.............. 5-96 Field of View............. 16-3
Filing daialog............ 9-12
ECG MENU of MAIN MENU.... 5-104
ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC) Fixed-B................... 5-83
....................... 5-100 Flow Invert............... 5-85
Edit Data.................. 8-4 Flow Invert (For CFM)..... 5-81
Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter Flow Volume Measurement.. 11-99
setting menu> ............ 8-7 Focusing.................. 16-2
Edit Name.................. 8-5 FONT....................... 6-2
Edit of image file: Merged Folder Formatting CD-R/RW and MO Disks
........................ 9-27 ......................... G-1
Editing APPLICATION Function Freeze of M-mode image.... 5-34
......................... 8-2
Function menu operation.... 5-2
Ending ANNOTATION menu..... 6-6
Function to remove body motion
Ending edit................ 8-6
........................ 5-86
Ending entry............... 6-3 Functional Checkup........ 14-8
Ending Use................ 4-31 Functions of Keys......... 11-6
Enhancement............... 5-37
Enhancement in depth direction
.................. 5-37, 5-60
Index-3 Q1E-EA0611
G Image quality adjustment function
(IMAGE PROCESS menu) ... 5-114
Gain adjustment
............. 5-8, 5-58, 16-2 Image recording........... 10-1
γ-coefficient ............. 5-23 Image replay.............. 9-36
γ-CURVE selection ... 5-22, 5-60 Input and output of measurement
result ................ 11-275
General............. 1-1, 5-110
Installation............... 1-7
Gibson Measurements..... 11-106
Instantaneous Flow Velocity
Graphic display of obstetric ....................... 11-23
measurement ........... 11-264
Intended Use............... 1-4
Gray Map.................. 5-21
K
H
Keyboard operation......... 5-1
Handling probes............ 1-9
Keyboard Panel............. 3-2
Hide Loci................. 11-9
Histogram Measurement.... 11-46 L
Home position.............. 6-3 Label location............ 1-12
Horizontal direction enhancement Lateral inversion of image
........................ 5-49 ........................ 5-83
Horizontal reversal of image Left Ventricle Cardiac Function
........................ 5-16 Measurement ........... 11-106
How to use a log file...... C-1 List of ANNOTATION......... 6-7
HR Measurement........... 11-40 LV (Left Ventricular) Measurement
....................... 11-57
I LV inflow Measurement.... 11-74
Image display angle....... 5-16 LV/Ao Measurement(B-LV/Ao,
Image display angle (Width) M-LV/Ao) ............... 11-55
........................ 5-35 LVOT Measurement......... 11-67
Image Examination Modes... 16-1
Image filing function...... 9-3 M
Image Filling Software... 16-11 M blank width....... 5-35, 5-85
Image Mem. Menu............ 7-3 M.Simpson Measurement... 11-113
Image memory............... 9-1 Main Menu.................. 7-1
Image memory unit.......... 9-1 Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode
......................... 7-1
Image Orientation/Rotation
........................ 16-3 MAIN MENU operation........ 5-5
IMAGE PROCESS menu Maintenance and Checkup... 14-1
5-19, 5-36, 5-49, 5-60, 5-67, Mark move........... 5-18, 5-36
5-86
Meas. Save................ 11-9
Image Processing.......... 16-4
Meas.Menu.................. 7-3
Measurement Edit Menu... 11-189
Index-4 Q1E-EA0611
Measurement Export/Import Moving display position
function .............. 11-252 .................. 5-10, 5-33
Measurement Functions..... 16-4 Moving of Body-mark
5-49, 5-59, 5-83, 5-85, 5-86
Measurement functions assigned in
Setup menu .............. 5-19 Moving position of probe mark
........................ 6-16
Measurement menu.......... 8-23
Moving tagging width in parallel
Measurement on review image
........................ 5-89
........................ 10-3
MV (Mitral Valve) Measurement
Measurement on review image from
....................... 11-63
image memory .......... 11-282
MV Regurg. Measurement.. 11-122
................. 10-3, 11-12
N
Measurement Report Function
...................... 11-255 Needle Guide Line........ 5-105
Measurement report selection Network Interface EZU-Pi6 16-14
...................... 11-255
Measurement results display O
window ................ 11-256 Oblique................... 5-76
Measurement Setup....... 11-173 Oblique function.......... 5-45
Measurement Setup menu.. 11-176 Oblique invert............ 5-81
Measurement Tool........ 11-283 Obstetric measurement... 11-126
Measuring Cross-Sectional Images ODM....................... 5-19
....................... 11-53
ODM beam line operation.. 5-113
Measuring Functions....... 11-1
ODM enhancement switching
Memory capacity setting... 9-34 ................ 5-114, 5-116
MENU of MAIN MENU......... 5-38 ODM-γswitching .... 5-114, 5-116
Message list............... A-1 Omni-Directional M mode.. 5-110
M-mode.................... 5-32 Omni-Directional M mode display
M-mode Image Display...... 16-3 software EZU-OD2 ....... 16-13
M-Mode Menu............... 8-11 Operating requirements of ODM
function ............... 5-110
Mode adjustment function. 10-14
Operation Modes............ 5-1
MODE DEPENDED menu
5-14, 5-35, 5-46, 5-59, 5-66, Operation of peripheral devices
5-77 ........................ 12-3
Move Box.................. 11-8 Operation Procedures....... 4-1
Movement.................. 13-1 Operationg Environment... 16-16
Movement of equipment..... 13-1 Option................... 16-13
Moving base line.......... 5-44 Optional Components........ 2-1
Moving body mark.......... 6-16 Other.................... 16-15
Moving character string.... 6-2 Other Measurement....... 11-163
Index-5 Q1E-EA0611
Others Menu............... 8-29 Precautions to display on Mac OS
......................... D-1
Outline................... 11-1
Outline of EUB-5500........ 1-1 Preparation before movement
........................ 13-1
Outline of measurement tool
Preparation before Use..... 4-1
...................... 11-283
Preset Operation function. 6-17
Overview................... 5-1
Probe connection.......... 16-1
P PV (Pulmonary Valve) Measurement
Pan zooming function...... 5-12 ....................... 11-66
Patient.................... 4-9 PV flow measurement..... 11-103
Peak Hold................. 5-82 PW Mode................... 5-42
Percent Stenosis Measurement

Q
....................... 11-53
Qp Measurement........... 11-92
Periodical checkup........ 14-3
Qs Measurement........... 11-92
Periodical inspection of system
performance ............. 14-4
R
Periodical test of system safety
........................ 14-3 Ratio-Area Measurements.. 11-38
Peripheral devices possible to use Ratio-Dis Measurements... 11-38
on outside commercial power Ratio-Time Measurements.. 11-38
supply outlet ........... 12-2
Ratio-Velo Measurements.. 11-38
Peripheral equipment...... 12-1
Real-time ODM mode....... 5-111
Persist................... 5-21
Receive dynamic filter.... 5-21
PHT Measurement.......... 11-44
Record of image........... 9-33
Physiology Menu............ 7-5
Recorder Menu.............. 7-4
PI Measurement........... 11-95
Reference frequency (REF FREQ)
Pombo Measurements...... 11-106 ........................ 5-74
Positioning the viewing monitor Registration of review image mode
......................... 4-2 ........................ 10-7
Power ON................... 4-4 Registration of user defined
Power Requirements.. 1-6, 16-15 annotation .............. 6-14
Precaution in Combination with Rejection
Peripheral Devices ...... 12-1 5-23, 5-38, 5-50, 5-60, 5-67,
5-89
Precautions in connection of
peripheral devices ...... 12-2 Releasing Freeze........... 4-5
Precautions in handling.... 1-9 Remote control of VCR..... 10-1
Precautions in movement... 13-1 Repair, readjustment and disposal
........................ 15-1
Precautions in operation and use
......................... 1-9 Resize.................... 11-8
Precautions regarding ultrasound Retrieve of Images........ 9-19
output .................. 1-11
Index-6 Q1E-EA0611
REVIEW.................... 5-19 Selection of screen to be
controlled .............. 5-60
RI Measurement........... 11-95
Selection of VCR/EXT mode and
rotation of image......... 5-17
remote control of VCR ... 10-1
RV inflow Measurement.... 11-81
Selection of wall filter.. 5-60
RVOT Measurement......... 11-77
Selection of γ-coefficient
........................ 5-60
S
Selects B mode image substitution
Saturation mode .................... 5-59
5-23, 5-38, 5-51, 5-60, 5-67
Set up filing.............. 9-5
Scan line density
...... 5-35, 5-48, 5-59, 5-81 Set up Preset Operation... 6-18
Schema-Guided M-Mode Measurement Setting Auto Freeze Function
....................... 11-57 ......................... 4-8
Screen division Setting COLOR BOX range... 5-72
5-36, 5-49, 5-59, 5-85, 5-86 Setting Measurement tool
Scroll.................... 11-7 ...................... 11-288
SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1 Setup Menu................. 7-5
....................... 16-14 Simpson Measurement..... 11-112
SCSI Printer............... B-1 Simult.................... 5-85
Selecting a probe and application Single Element CW-Mode.... 5-64
......................... 4-6
Single screen display of M-mode
Selecting an image subject to Image ................... 5-33
control ................. 5-37
SIZE....................... 6-1
Selecting B-color function....
5-36, 5-49, 5-59, 5-66 SORT....................... 6-5
Selecting B-mode image Refresh SPD....................... 5-19
mode .................... 5-47 Special menu............ 11-220
Selecting image subject to control Specifications............ 16-1
........................ 5-67
Standard Components........ 2-1
Selecting screen subject to
control ................. 5-88 Start of ultrasound scanner system
by system CD ............. F-1
Selecting Velocity Tagging
........................ 5-88 Starting Main Menu......... 7-1
Selection of AGC (Auto Gain Starting the Equipment..... 4-4

correction) ............. 5-60 Starting up Measurements.. 11-5
Selection of FFT analysis mode Steerable CW doppler unit 16-14
........................ 5-60
Steerable CW Mode......... 5-57
Selection of FFT-γ ........ 5-60 Storage Devices........... 16-7
Selection of polarity display of Storage to Hard Disk...... 16-7
Doppler-mode image ...... 5-59
Store to Hard Disk function
Selection of reference frequency ......................... 9-3
(REF FREQ) .............. 5-58
Index-7 Q1E-EA0611
SVolume Measurement Switching over transmit frequency
................ 11-22, 11-33 ........................ 5-10
Switches over γ-coefficient Switching over upper limit 5-88
........................ 5-38 Switching over velocity range
Switches over γ-CURVE (PRF) ................... 5-45
............ 5-38, 5-50, 5-67 Switching over velocity variance
Switching electronic focus ........................ 5-87
........................ 5-34 Switching over wall filter 5-49
Switching line density.... 5-16 Switching over γ-coefficient
Switching over AGC (Automatic gain .................. 5-50, 5-67
control) .......... 5-37, 5-49 Switching Packet size..... 5-87
Switching over APPLICATION
......................... 8-1 T
Switching over CFM interpolation Teichholz Measurements.. 11-106
level ................... 5-87
The rate of compression of a file
Switching over CFM refresh ......................... E-1
interval ................ 5-82
The usage of a Preset Operation
Switching over color map.. 5-85 function ................ 6-17
Switching over Doppler mode Thermal Index............. 8-11
polarity display ........ 5-66
Time measurement......... 11-49
Switching over electronic focus
......................... 5-9 Trace (Ratio-Area, Doppler
measurement) ........... 11-25
Switching over electronic focus
steps .................... 5-9 Trace Measurement........ 11-30
Switching over FFT analysis mode TRACKBALL PRIORITY......... 5-2
.................. 5-50, 5-67 Transfer.................. 9-18
Switching over FFT-γ . 5-50, 5-67 Transfer of Image......... 9-10
Switching over line density Transportation of equipment
........................ 5-85 ........................ 13-4
Switching over lower limit TV (Tricuspid Valve) Measurement
........................ 5-88 ....................... 11-65
Switching over persistence TV Regurg. Measurement.. 11-124
........................ 5-87
Twin screen display of B mode
Switching over polarity display of images .................. 5-13
Doppler mode image ...... 5-47
Type of Probes............ 16-1
Switching over reference
frequencies (REF FREQ) .. 5-44
U
Switching over sample gate width
ULTRASOUND POWER Control.. 4-29
........................ 5-46
Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver
Switching over sweep speed 5-35
........................ 16-1
Switching over the wall filter
Up/down reversal of image. 5-18
........................ 5-67
User Default.............. 11-8
Index-8 Q1E-EA0611
Using ALARA in B/M-mode... 5-40 VASC1 Measurement........ 11-84
Using ALARA in B/PW-mode.. 5-54 VASC2 Measurement........ 11-84
Using ALARA in B-mode..... 5-31 VCR (option).............. 10-1
Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M VCR Control............... 16-6
and/PW modes ............ 5-94 Velocity Measurement..... 11-34
Using ALARA in CW-mode... 5-62, Velocity Range (PRF)...... 5-74
5-68
Volume................... 11-20
Using the PC Printer...... AA-1
Volume Measurement....... 11-32
V
W
V Ave.(Velocity Average)
Measurement ............ 11-41 Waste Products............ 14-9
Value at center point of S-Curve Weight................... 16-16
........................ 5-60
Various adjustment functions Z
............ 5-44, 5-66, 5-74 Zooming image:ZOOM........ 5-77
E
Index-9 714 Q1E-EA0611
3D Display Software
Model EZU-3D4, EZU-3D2S
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0622-1

Trademarks
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

• Other product and company names mentioned in this document may be the
trademarks of their respective owners.
Acknowledgements
• This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation.

(http://www.apache.org/)
Preface
Thank you for purchasing 3D Display Software EZU-3D4, EZU-3D2S.

This software will allow you to use the system more effectively for ultrasonography.
To use the 3D Display Software properly, it is important to fully understand it. Therefore,
carefully read this Instruction Manual before use.
The followings are the meanings of type of precautionary notice in the text.
Type of
precautionary Meaning (Definition)
notice
DANGER This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in direct danger such as serious personal
injury or possible death, or serious property damage such as
total loss of equipment or fire.
WARNING This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in indirect danger such as possible death,
serious personal injury or light or medium-degree personal
injury, or serious property damage such as total loss of
equipment or fire.
CAUTION This note indicates any condition or action which, if not strictly
observed, could result in possible danger such as partial
equipment damage or data loss of computer.
NOTICE This note indicates important precautions which are not related
to danger but are to be taken against operation, installation and
maintenance.
(1) Q1E-EZ0622
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Purpose of use ................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Introduction to 3D ultrasound ......................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1 Scan of probe .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.2 Reconstruction of 3D image................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.3 Technical terms ...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Cautions............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Warning ............................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.5 Maintenance and checkup................................................................................................ 1-3
1.5.1 Check before use .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.5.2 Checkup while using.............................................................................................. 1-4
1.5.3 Periodical checkup ................................................................................................. 1-4
1.6 Features............................................................................................................................. 1-4
Chapter 2 System configuration and installation ........................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Standard components ....................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit .................................................................... 2-1
Chapter 3 Base software ................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Starting 3D mode .............................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 3D mode ............................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Capture execution requirements ..................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Patient information........................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.1 Necessity to enter ID of patient information ....................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 Restriction of characters for patient ID................................................................ 3-7
3.4.3 Limits on the number of characters ..................................................................... 3-7
3.5 Starting capture ................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.6 During capture ................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.7 Stopping capture ............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.8 Saving 3D image file....................................................................................................... 3-13
3.9 Exiting from 3D mode..................................................................................................... 3-14
3.10 Setting up 3D functions.................................................................................................. 3-14
3.10.1 Settings for 3D image file .................................................................................... 3-14
3.10.2 Settings of ROI for 3D image capture ................................................................ 3-15
3.11 3D function setting menu ............................................................................................... 3-15
(2) Q1E-EZ0622
3.11.1 Settings for 3D image file .................................................................................... 3-16
3.12 Messages on 3D software ............................................................................................... 3-17
3.12.1 In case of 3D software error ................................................................................ 3-17
3.12.2 In case of 3D software lockup.............................................................................. 3-18
Chapter 4 3D software.................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Screen layout..................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Free section display screen............................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Changing image display ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.2 Moving position of 3D image ................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.3 Icon function ........................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.4 3D image controller................................................................................................ 4-9
4.3 Rendering screen............................................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.1 Rendering image .................................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.2 Rendering technique.............................................................................................4-11
4.3.3 Icon function ......................................................................................................... 4-12
4.4 Multi-view screen............................................................................................................ 4-15
4.5 Database screen .............................................................................................................. 4-16
4.5.1 Screen layout ........................................................................................................ 4-16
4.5.2 Screen function..................................................................................................... 4-17
Chapter 5 Specification .................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Base software .................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 3D software........................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Image files ......................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4 Condition for using magnetic sensor unit (EZU-3D2S) ................................................. 5-2
Index..............................................................................................................................................Index-1
(3) Q1E-EZ0622
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of use

Combining EZU-3D4 or EZU-3D2S with the ultrasound diagnostic scanner allows you to
display 3D images by acquiring continuous 2D image data. Use base software to acquire 2D
image data. Use 3D software to reconstruct and display a 3D image.
In EZU-3D4, you can use the “Untracked” capture with which you move a probe in a constant
speed by yourself as a data acquisition method (tracking mode). The “Untracked” capture can
be used with all probes except EUP-TC3.
In EZU-3D2S, you can use “Magnetic tracked” capture with which you acquire data by sensing
the position of probe by means of the magnetic sensor unit as a tracking mode. The
“Magnetic tracked” capture can be used with six types of probes; EUP-C314G, EUP-C514,
EUP-C524, EUP-L53, EUP-L53S and EUP-V53W. When using these probes, an adapter is
necessary to attach the receiver to the probe.
1.2 Introduction to 3D ultrasound

1.2.1 Scan of probe
The way to obtain image data is done by the linear scan of probe.
1.2.2 Reconstruction of 3D image
The reconstruction of 3D image is the process in which 2D images are transformed into a
single 3D volume. To get a good 3D image, pay attention to the following:
• Apply enough jelly to the interested region of a subject. Move the probe smoothly to the
appropriate direction. Do not push the probe hard against the anatomy. Keep moving the
probe with slow and constant speed along the interested region. In case of pushing the
probe hard, skew scan or rotation scan, the 3D image may deforms.
• Respiration or cardiac motion may result in motion artifacts. Respiration artifacts can
be avoided by having the patient hold his/her breath during the scan.
1.2.3 Technical terms
Render display:
3D display for the transmission process or maximum intensity projection process
Volume rendering (Rendering):
Treatment for render display
MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection) mode:
It displays a 3D image that maximum value of intensity is emphasized
Opacity mode:
It displays a transparent 3D image
Transparency mode
It displays a 3D image that both monochrome image and color image are made
transparent
1-1 4 Q1E-EZ0622
1.3 Cautions
EZU-3D4
• The 3D functions cannot be used in the emergency start of SYSTEM CD.

• When turning the power OFF, the screen of 3D software may be displayed for a while.
Wait as it is.
• In the 3D software display, when main software is appeared by some operation, press
the Tab key while pressing the Alt key to return to the previous state.
• While the 3D software is displayed, the screen saver does not work.
• When using FD, follow [7.10 Disk Menu, (4) FD Format] in the Instruction Manual of
the main system to format it before use.
• When using a commercially available CD-R/RW or MO(when the EZU-MO1 is installed)
for image recording, be sure to use any MO compatible with Windows. If using a
CD-R/RW or MO not compatible with Windows, follow [Appendix G] in the Instruction
Manual of the main system to format it before use.
• It is recommended to periodically archive 3D image files to media.
• If any part of the system or cable is broken, have a contact with our service personnel.
• According to the version of main software, specifications of the function is different.
Regarding a way to confirm the main software version, refer to the Instruction Manual
of the main system, [7.9 Setup menu (2-9) Software option.]
EZU-3D2S
• If you suspect that 3D calibration is not correct, e.g. measured results differ from those
expected, have a contact with our service personnel.
• When mechanical shock has applied to the receiver, transmitter and so on, or the
adapter for fixing the receiver is broken or loosened, have a contact with our service
personnel.
• After using the magnetic sensor unit, use wet and clean towel to wipe the ultrasound
jelly off the adapter and receiver, and then use any solution required by FDA (Ex.:
Johnson & Johnson R CydexTM, Johnson & Johnson R CydexPLUSTM) to clean it.
• Do not soak the magnetic sensor unit in any liquid. However, wiping it with general
disinfectant available in the hospital is acceptable. Also the adapter can be soaked in
the hospital level disinfectant.
• The performance of the magnetic sensor unit may be affected in the conditions that
there are some apparatus emitting electromagnetism around the unit or there are some
large structures made of steel within a meter, etc.
• The table 1.3.1 shows the systems which have possibilities of being affected with the
magnetism which is generated by the transmitter of magnetic sensor unit. With respect
to magnetic field strength, refer to Fig. 1.3.1.
1-2 Q1E-EZ0622
Table 1.3.1 Maximum magnetic field strength and the systems which is affected
Maximum magnetic Systems which is affected
field strength
2 mT Motor, Camera
1.5 mT Monochrome monitor
1 mT Mechanical clock, Credit card, Magnetic tape, Magnetic disk for
computer
0.5 mT Pacemaker, CT scanner
0.3 mT Ultrasound diagnostic scanner
0.1 mT Color monitor, Image Intensifier, Microscope, Scintillation camera,
CT scanner(with I.I.)
0.05 mT Emission CT
Distance from the transmitter [cm]
Fig. 1.3.1 Distance from the transmitter and Magnetic field strength
1.4 Warning
Do not use the magnetic sensor unit for the patient using any apparatus such as a
pacemaker that could be affected by magnetism.
1.5 Maintenance and checkup

1.5.1 Check before use
Before turning on the power switch, see if the power cable cover is damaged or worn out. A
damaged cable may result in electric shocks.
1-3 Q1E-EZ0622
1.5.2 Checkup while using

After turning on the power switch, see if any abnormal sound or smell is generated or not.
1.5.3 Periodical checkup
Carry out the following checkup every month.
• See if any abnormalities are found on the probe cables and connectors.
• See if any abnormalities are found on the power cable and other cables.
If any abnormality is found or it malfunctions, stop operation of the equipment, turn off the
power and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet, then contact Hitachi Service Dept.
or our authorized dealer. For the detail periodical checkup, consult with Hitachi Service Dept.
1.6 Features
(1) 3D display of black/white image and color image: A 3D image of black/white image and color
image can be reconstructed. However, some color maps cannot display a 3D image. For
details, refer to "3.3 Capture execution requirements".
(2) Opacity mode: Allows a see-through 3D image to be displayed.
(3) Transparency mode: A black/white image and color image can be displayed at the same time
as a see-through 3D image.
(4) MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection) mode: Maximum values of brightness can be
displayed as a 3D image.
(5) Multi-view: Two types of multi-views are available, i.e. 4-image view and further displaying
view including orthogonal three planes and 6-image view added with free section view and
rendering view.
(6) Cutting: Displays an image in the depths by cutting any portion of the 3D image.
(7) Patient data management: Manages 3D image files by the patient ID.
(8) Archive: Archives 3D image files in CD-R/RW, MO (when the EZU-MO1 is installed).
(9) Snapshot: Saves 3D images in FD, CD-R/RW or MO (when the EZU-MO1 is installed) in
the BMP, JPEG or TIFF file format.
(10) Rendering parameters per application: Display parameters which is needed to the
rendering of 3D image is prepared per application.
1-4 Q1E-EZ0622
Chapter 2 System configuration and installation
2.1 Standard components

EZU-3D4
(1) 3D software installation CD 1 piece
(2) Instruction Manual (Japanese/English) 1 set each
EZU-3D2S
(1) Magnetic sensor unit 1 piece
(2) Adapter 1 piece
(3) Transmitter Support Stand 1 set
2.2 Installation
Use this option by installing it in the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.
It has been installed in the equipment at the factory or is added to existing equipment by our
service personnel or our authorized service personnel.
WARNING
Never disassemble or modify the equipment.
2.3 Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit

When using the Magnetic tracked capture, the magnetic sensor unit needs to be prepared.
Prepare the receiver of magnetic sensor unit (Fig. 2.3.1) and the adapter for probe used (Fig.
2.3.2), and put the adapter onto the probe to fix the receiver as shown in Fig. 2.3.3. At this
time, put the adapter onto the probe so that the hole of the adapter fits to the orientation mark
of probe.
Fig. 2.3.1 Receiver Fig. 2.3.2 Adapter
2-1 8 Q1E-EZ0622
Receiver
Orientation mark
Before mounting the receiver After mounting the receiver
Fig. 2.3.3 Mounting the Receiver to the Probe
The transmitter of magnetic sensor unit is mounted on the transmitter support stand as
shown in Fig. 2.3.4. And, locate it so that distance between the receiver and transmitter is
15~55cm.
Transmitter
Transmitter support stand
Fig. 2.3.4 Transmitter and Transmitter Support Stand
CAUTION
If the distance between the receiver and the transmitter is not 15~55cm, there is a
possibility to diagnose mistakenly.
2-2 Q1E-EZ0622
Chapter 3 Base software
Base software is the software of main system (ultrasound scanner). There is a possibility that
the figure is different by the main software version. In this section, if the figure is different,
the figures per main software version are shown.
3.1 Starting 3D mode

To run 3D functions, it is necessary to start other two applications, the base software and 3D
software. First start the base software, and then start the 3D mode on the base software.
The 3D software is started when the 3D mode is started for the first time after a start-up of
the base software. To switch from the base software to the 3D mode, select F6:”To 3D” from
the 3D Function menu, as shown in Fig. 3.1.1. To switch the other way, use the ”To 2D” icon.
When you switch from the 3D software to the base software, the latter enters the mode it was
in before it was switched to the 3D software.
Application switching
Base software 3D software
Function menu
F6: “To 3D”
3D mode
“To 2D” icon
Fig. 3.1.1 Relationship between Applications
There are two ways to start the 3D mode, depending on the function menu’s setting of
application. To change the function menu’s setting of application, use the Application Setup
menu. For details, refer to “8.3.10 Others Menu” in Chapter 8 "Application" of the
Instruction Manual of the main system.
(1) If the function menu’s setting of application is except 3D:
When the 3D mode is started for the first time, pressing the key displays a message
indicating that the 3D software is being initialized. Then, the image becomes black. While
this message is displayed, the keyboard is disabled. When the 3D software has been
started, the message disappears and the 3D mode is activated. When you start the 3D mode
subsequently, the message is not appeared and it is activated immediately. But, when
EZU-WS4 is executed, 3D software is shut down. Therefore, 3D software need to be
executed again.
Fig. 3.1.2 Message displayed while the 3D Software is being initialized
3-1 10 Q1E-EZ0622
(2) If the function menu’s setting of application is 3D:
When the 3D mode is started for the first time, while the application is started, the
message indicating that the 3D software is being initialized is appeared. Then, the image
becomes black. While this message is displayed, the keyboard is disabled. When the 3D
software has been started, the message disappears and the 3D mode is activated. When you
start the 3D mode subsequently, the message is not appeared and it is activated
immediately. But, when EZU-3D4 is executed, 3D software is shut down. Therefore, 3D
software need to be executed again.
If EZU-3D2S has been purchased, a following message is displayed at a starting time of 3D

software.
Fig. 3.1.3
3.1.3 Message for connecting to a magnetic sensor unit
Please set the switch of magnetic sensor unit to STBY once and switch it to FLY. Then,
press OK button. If the same message is displayed again due to any abnormality, the
magnetic sensor is suspected to have a trouble. In such case, press the Cancel button to
enable the Untracked capture only.
3.2 3D mode
When the 3D mode is started, the following function menu switches to the 3D Function menu,
and the ROI for 3D image capture and the trackball priority is selected.
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.2.1
3.2.1 3D function menu
First page
F1: Capture
Starts capture (image data acquisition) for 3D image reconstruction.
F2: Tracking Mode Selection Track; Mag./Off
Switches the tracking mode (Method for acquiring image data). However, if you
have purchased EZU-3D4 only, only “Off” is available.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0622
F6: To3D
Switches to the 3D software.
F7: Exit
Exits the 3D mode.
Second page
F6: Parameter
Displays the Settings menu for 3D functions. (For details, refer to 3.11 "3D Function
Setting Menu.")
Fig. 3.2.2
3.2.2 Setting menu for 3D Function
NOTICE
In 3D mode, if you press key, key, key or keys which is related to the
measurement or the measurement is started, the 3D mode ends automatically. Then, in
3D mode, if EZU-WS4 is executed, 3D software is shut down.
3-3 Q1E-EZ0622
3.3 Capture execution requirements
Capture is not available unless all of the requirements (1)~(4) shown below are satisfied. At
this time, ROI for 3D image capture and trackball priority mark are not displayed.
However, switching to the 3D software is executable.
(1) Freeze is OFF.
(2) Single image display
(3) In CFI mode, in case that the application is not Cardiac, the selected color map is any map
in 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. In case that the application is Cardiac, the selected color map is any
map in 5, 6 and 7. In CFA mode, the selected color map is any map in 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6.
When changing from a color map with which capture is available to that with which
capture is not available, or when capture is not available with the color map at the start of
CFM mode, a caution message (Fig. 3.3.1) appears to prompt for changing the color map.
Fig. 3.3.1 Message to Prompt for Changing Color Map
(4) 2D image is not horizontal

When the 2D image is switched to horizontal, a message is displayed to prompt for
changing probe orientation.
Fig. 3.3.2 Message to Prompt for Changing Probe Orientation
First page
Second page
Fig. 3.3.3
3.3.3 Function Menu with Capture Disabled
3-4 Q1E-EZ0622
3.4 Patient information
The 3D software manages patient information and 3D image files by linking them. Therefore,
information about the ID, name, sex, date of birth of patients is transferred from the base
software to the 3D software. Since there are some differences in specifications between the
base software and 3D software, observe the following precautions when using the 3D
functions.
NOTICE
When using the 3D functions, be sure to enter patient information. For entering patient
information, refer to “4.4 Patint” of “Chapter 4 Operation” in the Instruction Manual of
the main system.
3.4.1 Necessity to enter ID of patient information
The 3D software manages 3D files using patient ID; therefore, any patient ID cannot be
changed once a 3D-image capture file is saved using the patient ID. Also, if the patient ID
changed in the base software has been already registered to the 3D software, the patient ID
cannot be changed. Table 3.4.1.1 shows summary of the above:
Table 3.4.1.1 Operation when Changing Patient ID
Does ID after Does a 3D image

change exist in managed by ID ID Operation
3D software? before change exist?
New Registers the new ID to 3D
Not exist. Not exist.
registration software.
Not (1) Displays a message to
Exists. Not exist.
changeable. confirm patient.
Not exist. Exists.
changeable. confirm selecting existing ID.
Exists. Exists.
changeable. confirm selecting existing ID.
In case of (1) in “Operation” of Table 3.4.1.1, the message listing the Patient ID, First Name,
Last Name that have already exist is displayed to confirm that this patient is to be selected.
Fig. 3.4.1.1 Patient Confirmation Message
3-5 Q1E-EZ0622
If pressing “Yes”, the 3D software selects this patient. If pressing “No”, a message appears
to prompt entry of new patient information. After pressing the OK button, enter new
patient information.
Fig. 3.4.1.2 Message to Prompt Entry of New Patient Information

In case of (2) in “Operation” of Table 3.4.1.1, a message appears to inform you not to be able
to modify the patient data. Create new patient information.
Fig. 3.4.1.3 Message to Prompt You to Create New Patient Information
If image capture is performed without creating new patient information, the 3D image
captured will be managed as an image of patient ID of Date and Time (“yymmdd-hhmmss”)
automatically attached by the 3D software.
CAUTION
If entering patient information in small letters, the 3D software displays it in large
letters. If entering ID having difference only in capital letters and lower case letters,
the 3D software may display plural same ID’s expressed in large letters on the database
screen; however, image data is managed as the same ID. (After rebooting the system,
display returns to one.)
If the patient information could not be set by any factor, a message is displayed as shown in
Fig. 3.4.1.4.
Fig. 3.4.1.4 A Message to Prompt Patient ID Selection
Also, if the 3D image file is not entered in the location of Patient ID, though both Patient
ID and Patient name are the same as those in the 3D software, or if the message shown in
Fig. 3.4.1.4 continues to appear, select Patient ID from the patient list on the database
screen of 3D software ((1) of Fig. 3.4.1.5), and return to the base software ((2) of Fig. 3.4.1.5)
to save the 3D image file in the location of Patient ID selected.
3-6 Q1E-EZ0622
(1)
(2)
Fig. 3.4.1.5 Specifying Patient ID in 3D Software
3.4.2 Restriction of characters for patient ID
In the 3D software, ¥, /, “, *, ?, <, >, |, and space cannot be used for the patient ID.
Therefore, if using any of these characters when entering the patient ID in the main
software, the 3D software transforms them to ‘-‘ to display. At this time, a message is
displayed to inform that the entered characters has been transformed when starting the
3D mode or newly creating the patient ID in the 3D mode.
Fig. 3.4.2.1 Message Informing Characters Transformed

Transformed
3.4.3 Limits on the number of characters
The 3D software places limits on the number of characters that can be displayed in patient
information fields (see Table 3.4.3.1). Consequently, if the number of characters used for
patient information on the base software exceeds the upper limits placed on the number of
characters by the 3D software, the excessive characters are truncated on the 3D software.
In such case, a message is displayed informing that the 3D software can only display up to
its upper limit on the number of characters used for patient information on 3D software.
3-7 Q1E-EZ0622
Table 3.4.3.1 Upper Limits on Number of Characters used for Patient Information on 3D
Software
Patient Name
Patient information on 3D software ID
First Name Last Name
Upper limit on number of characters 15 40 40
Fig. 3.4.3.1 Message Stating that Excessive Characters in Patient Information are Truncated
3.5 Starting capture

After the 3D mode is started, the diagnostic screen displays an ROI for 3D image capture. Use
this ROI to define an image capture area. To start image capture, select F1:Capture from the
3D Function menu (First page), press the USER pedal of the foot switch (EZU-FS2),
key or key in the case that setting for capture is done. With respect to the setting
foot switch, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (2-7) Foot Switch” of “Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the
Instruction Manual of the main system. With respect to the setting key and key,
refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (5) Print/REC” of “Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the Instruction Manual
of the main system. When starting capture, it beeps twice. The functions related to the ROI for
3D image capture will be described below.
! The ROI-related functions include Resize and Move. To switch between the functions,
use the ENTER key.
! To resize or move an ROI, use the trackball.
! You can resize an ROI when a "!" mark is displayed in the lower right corner of the ROI.
Move the "!" mark to resize the ROI symmetrically in the vertical and horizontal
directions with respect to the center of the ROI.
! The capture area is inside the line. Therefore, the image on the lines are not captured.
3-8 Q1E-EZ0622
Fig. 3.5.1 ROI for Image Capture
If there is any abnormality in the magnetic sensor unit at a time of image capture using the
magnetic sensor unit, a following message is displayed. Once set the switch of magnetic
sensor unit to STBY and switch over to FLY, then press OK button.
Fig. 3.5.2 Caution Message for Failed Connection with Magnetic Sensor Unit
If distance between the transmitter and receiver is out of the range (15-55cm) before
starting capture in the Magnetic tracked capture, a message appears informing that
position information is not available (Fig. 3.5.3), and starting capture is canceled.
Fig. 3.5.3 Caution Message for Magnetic Sensor to be Out of Range
3-9 Q1E-EZ0622
You can store up to 900 MB of 3D image files in the equipment. (For the size of one file,
refer to "5.3 Image files".) If the total size of the 3D image files exceeds 900 MB after you
save 3D images, you are prompted to archive the image files to media or delete them (Fig.
3.5.4) and the 3D image capture is canceled.
Fig. 3.5.4 Message Cautioning You of Insufficient Storage Capacity before

before Capture
CAUTION
After switching the mode, do not start image capture right away. If doing so, a correct
image may not be acquired.
NOTICE
• Image data can be acquired also in the B-color mode; however, the reconstructed 3D
image will be black/white. If any colored 3D image is to be created, use the coloring
function in the 3D software. (Refer to [4.2.4 3D image controller, (4) Color scale].)
• Keep ECG and PCG waveform out of ROI for 3D image capture.
• If the size of ROI for 3D image capture is too big, capture distance is too big, or
distance between the transmitter and receiver is out of useful range, reconstruction
time can be longer.
• If the capture become invalid during key is ON, please turn off key.
Then, please turn on the key again.
3.6 During capture
Only the toggle, toggle, key, two pedals of the foot switch (EZU-FS2),
AAA key and key are enabled in the case that setting for capture is done. With respect
to the setting foot switch, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (2-7) Foot Switch” of “Chapter 7 Main
Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system. With respect to the setting of key
and key, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (5) Print/REC” of “Chapter 7 Main Menu” in the
Instruction Manual of the main system. The other controls are disabled.
During image capture, the remaining time is indicated in seconds until the capture completes
automatically. (Fig. 3.6.2)
First page
Fig. 3.6.1 Function Me

Menu
nu during 3D Image Capture
3-10 Q1E-EZ0622
F1: Capture (reverse video)
Finishes image capture
F7: Capture stops. If canceled after performing capture long, it may take time until
returning to the original 3D mode.
Fig. 3.6.2 Indication of Remaining Seconds
If distance between the transmitter and receiver of the magnetic sensor unit becomes out of
the range (15~55cm) during the Magnetic tracked capture, a message appears telling out of
the range (Fig. 3.6.3) and capture continues. After completing capture, a caution message
(Fig.3.6.4) appears relating to accuracy of 3D image. Press the OK button to display a
message (Fig. 3.6.5) confirming whether the image is to be saved or not regardless of the
setting.
Fig.
Fig. 3.6.3 Message Telling Out of Range
Fig. 3.6.4 Caution Message for Accuracy of 3D Image
Fig. 3.6.5 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image
If speed of moving the probe is too fast in the Magnetic tracked capture as well, a beep tone
sounds. If the beep tone sounds, slow down moving the probe.
CAUTION
• When the probe runs out of the useful range of Magnetic tracked capture, correct 3D
image cannot be acquired.
• If too fast scan speed of the probe continues, the image capture can automatically
stop.
If the magnetic sensor unit can not recognize a position of data at a time of image capture
using the magnetic sensor unit, a message urging to make scan speed of probe slower is
displayed.
3-11 Q1E-EZ0622
Fig.
Fig. 3.6.6
3.6.6 Caution message when the magnetic sensor unit
can not recognize the position of data.
When 3D image data capacity is too much so that memory capacity for reconstructing
image is not enough, a message urging to make ROI size smaller is displayed.
Fig. 3.6.7
3.6.7 Caution message when the memory capacity
is not enough for image reconstruction.
3.7 Stopping capture

There are three methods for stopping capture.
(1) If you want to complete a given capture:
The capture finishes automatically.
(2) If you want to finish a given capture when it is still in progress:
Use the toggle of the function menu (Fig. 3.6.1), key, two pedals of the foot
switch (EZU-FS2), key or in the case that setting for capture is done. With
respect to the setting foot switch, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (2-7) Foot Switch” of “Chapter 7
Main Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system. With respect to the setting
key and key, refer to “7.9 Setup Menu (5) Print/REC” of “Chapter 7 Main
Menu” in the Instruction Manual of the main system.
(3) If you want to cancel the current image capture:
Use the toggle of the function menu during capture.
When a capture is canceled, the captured data is deleted.
CAUTION
If number of 2D image frames to reconstruct a 3D image is less than the minimum
value 20 of Capture Extent in the Magnetic tracked capture, displayed image is the
same as that by the Untracked capture. In this case, measured value obtained by the
measurement function is not correct.
3-12 Q1E-EZ0622
3.8 Saving 3D image file
There are two methods for saving 3D image file after capture.
(1) To save data automatically after capture.
(2) To select Save/Delete on the message of Fig. 3.8.1.
Fig. 3.8.1 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image
For details of this method, refer to 3.10 "Setting Up 3D Functions" and 3.11 "3D Function
Setting Menu."
To confirm that images have been saved, open the Database screen by 3D software and
select the patient from the patient list ((1) of Fig. 3.8.2), select the 3D image file from the
image list ((2) of Fig. 3.8.2) and push the Display icon ((3) of Fig. 3.8.2) to check if there is
the image saved in the image list. For details, refer to 4.5 “Database Screen”.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig. 3.8.2 Message to Check Remaining

Remaining Capacity after Saving Image
You can store up to 900 MB of 3D image files in the equipment. If the total size of the 3D
image files exceeds 900 MB after you save 3D images, you are prompted to archive the
image files to media or delete them (Fig. 3.8.3). To archive the image file to media, refer to
4.5 “Database Screen”.
Fig. 3.8.3 Message Cautioning You of Insufficient Storage Capacity after You Save Images
3-13 Q1E-EZ0622
3.9 Exiting from 3D mode
Select the toggle (F7:Exit) from the 3D Function menu (First page) (Fig. 3.2.1) to return
to the ordinary diagnostic screen.
3.10 Setting up 3D functions

To set up 3D functions, use the 3D Setup menu, which you can display by selecting Main Menu
→ Setup → 3D. The 3D Setup menu contains two tabs: Save and ROI. They are used to make
settings for saving 3D image file, and settings of ROI for 3D image capture.
3.10.1 Settings for 3D image file
Fig. 3.10.1
3.10.1.1 3D Image File S
Save
ave Option Setting Menu
To make settings for saving 3D image file, use the Save tab of the 3D Setup menu.
(1) Automatically save capture file and go to 3D
After completion of capture, this option saves the 3D image file and switches to the 3D
software automatically.
(2) Display dialog to save capture file
After completion of image capture, this option displays a message asking you if you want
to save the 3D image file.
Fig. 3.10.1.2 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image

If you click the OK button after changing the setting, the change is saved. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original setting.
3-14 Q1E-EZ0622
3.10.2 Settings of ROI for 3D image capture
Fig. 3.10.2
3.10.2.1 ROI Size Setting Menu
To make settings of ROI for 3D image capture, use the ROI tab of the 3D Setup menu.
(1) Width (Step 1-6)

Selects the horizontal width of the ROI from 6 steps: 1 (small) to 6 (large).
(2) Height (Step 1-6)
Selects the vertical width of the ROI from 6 steps: 1 (small) to 6 (large).
If you click the OK button after changing settings, the changes are applied. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original settings.
3.11 3D function setting menu

The 3D setting menu, which is accessed from the Parameter function on the second page of the
3D Function menu (Fig. 3.2.1), are used to change parameters temporarily. The changes in
this menu are retained until they are changed from the function menu or the 3D mode is
turned off. The tab is used to make settings for saving 3D image file respectively.
3-15 Q1E-EZ0622
3.11.1 Settings for 3D image file
Fig. 3.11.1
3.11.1.1 Image Data Save Option Setting Menu
Use this menu to make settings for saving 3D image file.
(1) Automatically save capture file and go to 3D

After completion of capture, this option saves the 3D image file and switches to the 3D
software automatically.
(2) Display dialog to save capture file
After completion of capture, this option displays a message asking you if you want to
save the 3D image file.
Fig. 3.11.1.2 Message Confirming Saving a 3D Image
If you click the OK button after changing the setting, the change is saved. Clicking the
Cancel button restores the original setting. The new setting is applied starting from
the next image capture and is retained thereafter.
3-16 Q1E-EZ0622
3.12 Messages on 3D software
3.12.1 In case of 3D software error
If an error occurs in the 3D software while the base software screen is active, the system
displays a 3D error message together with the appropriate error number (e.g., #1), as
shown in Figure 3.12.1.1.
Error number
Fig. 3.12.1.1 3D Error Message

If this happens, check the error number after # mark of the message of dialog and click the
OK button to close the dialog. Refer to Table 3.12.1.1 to perform the process after
pressing the OK button. When the system does not work normally even if performing the
process, reboot the system. If the same message appears after rebooting the system,
contact our service personnel.
Table 3.12.1.1 Processes Related to Error Number

Error # Status Process after pressing the OK button
1 ~ 13 Failed to initialize Reboot the system.
21 ~ 39 Error related to patient Press the Patient key to open the Patient Menu.
information After pressing Edit button, press OK button.
41 ~ 59 Failed to start capturing After shutting down the system, reboot the system.
61 ~ 66 Failed to save image data Have a contact with the service personnel.
81 Failed to shut down Wait for completion since the 3D software is running
and the system cannot be shut down right away.
101 ~ 103 Failed to receive probe Switch to the other probe and switch to the original
data probe again.
121 Failed to switch over 3D After shutting down the system, reboot the system.
software to/from base
software
141 ~ 145 Failed to receive display Change the display depth and return to the original
depth data display depth.
161, 162 Failed to receive frame Switch over the mode and return it to the original
rate mode again.
201 Failed to transfer image Execute the operation once performed again.
parameter
3-17 Q1E-EZ0622
3.12.2 In case of 3D software lockup
If the 3D software locks up or terminates unexpectedly. The base software displays a

message indicating that there is no response from the 3D software. If you restart the
equipment, 3D functions can be used.
Fig. 3.12.2.1 Message Indicating No Response from the 3D Software
3-18 Q1E-EZ0622
Chapter 4 3D software
4.1 Screen layout

Use icons to switch the screen. There are database screen, 2D screen, free section display
screen, rendering screen and multi-view screen in the icons for switching the screen.
Database screen Free section display screen Multi-view screen (4-view, 6-view)
2D screen Rendering screen
Fig. 4.1.1 Screen Vie

Vieww Icons
Over the screen view icons, patient name and ID are displayed as shown in Fig. 4.1.2.
Fig. 4.1.2 Patient Name and ID
The System button is displayed at the bottom right of database screen, free section display
screen, rendering screen and multi-view screen. Press this button to display a dialog as
shown in Fig. 4.1.3.
Fig. 4.1.3 System Dialog
This system dialog allows you to confirm the version of 3D software. Press the L3Di button
to close the dialog.
4.2 Free section display screen

Press the free section display screen icon to display a screen as shown in Fig. 4.2.1. This
screen allows you to control the size, orientation and view of images and also slice a 3D image.
4-1 28 Q1E-EZ0622
Fig. 4.2.1 Free Section Display Screen
4.2.1 Changing image display
Press the UNDO key on 3D screen to display the menu. Press “Align Face” to display any
plane selected as a plane view. Press “Delete Face” to restore the plane selected to its
original image.
<Rotating image>
Moving the cursor to the outside of 3D image changes the shape of cursor to
allowing you to rotate the 3D image. Then operate the trackball while pressing the
ENTER key to rotate the 3D image to any desired direction.
<Displaying slice plane of image>

Moving the cursor to a plane within the 3D image changes the shape of cursor to
allowing you to move the slice plane in parallel. Then operate the trackball while
pressing the ENTER key to move the slice plane selected in parallel. To return to its
original shape, operate the trackball in the reverse direction while pressing the ENTER
key.
<Free section display>

Moving the cursor to any corner of 3D image changes the cursor to allowing you to
slice in any direction. Move the trackball while pressing the ENTER key to slice in any
direction. Then move the cursor to the center of new section, and operate the trackball
while pressing the ENTER key to move the slice having been created in parallel.
4.2.2 Moving position of 3D image
Pressing Shift key on 3D image, the cursor is changed to . In such status, moving the
trackball while pressing ENTER key allows you to move the position of 3D image. At this
time, releasing either of the Shift or ENTER key releases this function.
4-2 Q1E-EZ0622
4.2.3 Icon function
(1) View
Press this icon to display the view save dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.1 allowing you to
reset the view, add and delete a new view.
Resets to original view.
Displays images divided in two in parallel with the plane.
Displays images divided in two perpendicularly to the plane.
Saves the current view. Deletes the view saved.
Fig. 4.2.3.1 View Save Dialog

Dialog
<Saving view>
Press the “+” (Plus) button shown in Fig. 4.2.3.1 to display the view name
registration dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.2. Enter the name and press the Add button
to save the current view.
Fig. 4.2.3.2 View Name Registration Dialog
<Deleting view>
Select any view to be deleted from the list and press the “−” (Minus) button shown in
Fig. 4.2.3.1 to delete the view selected.
(2) Annotation
Pressing this icon displays the annotation menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3 allowing you
to display annotation.
Adds an annotation onto the 3D image (Text icon)
Adds an arrow onto the 3D image (Arrow icon)
Fig. 4.2.3.3 Annotation Menu
4-3 Q1E-EZ0622
<Adding annotation>
1. Pressing the text icon shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3 changes the cursor to that for entering
an annotation.
2. Move the cursor to any location to which an annotation is to be added and enter
any characters.
3. Press the ENTER key to determine the location.
Note that the backspace key may be used for editing, but it cannot be modified if
determining the annotation once.
<Adding an arrow>
1. Pressing the arrow icon shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3 changes the cursor to that for
entering an arrow.
2. Every time pressing the UNDO key, the direction of arrow changes clockwise.
3. Press the ENTER key to determine the location.
<Editing>
When using the annotation, measurement or cutting function, edit icons are
displayed at the right side of screen allowing you to edit any annotation,
measurement or cutting.
Clear All: Deletes all operations.
UNDO: Deletes the last operation.
REDO: Restores the last UNDO operation (Except cutting function)
Fig. 4.2.3.4 Edit Icons
(3) Measurement
This icon appears only when performing the Magnetic tracked capture. Pressing
this icon displays the measurement menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.5 allowing you to
measure distance, angle, area and volume.
Distance measurement
Angle measurement
Area measurement
Volume measurement
Fig. 4.2.3.5 Measurement Menu
<Measuring distance>
Press the icon and press the ENTER key at the start and end points on the image to
measure distance.
4-4 Q1E-EZ0622
<Measuring angle>
Press the icon and ENTER key at three points on the image to measure angle.
<Measuring area>
Press the icon and ENTER key on multiple points on the image to measure area.
Selected points are automatically connected to make a polygon. Double click the last
point to set it and complete measurement.
<Measuring volume>
Pressing the icon displays the volume measurement menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.6
allowing you to measure volume.
Step in
Step out
Step size
End of volume measurement
Fig. 4.2.3.6 Volume Measurement Menu
1. Select the step size to adjust slice interval.

2. As well as area measurement, press the ENTER key around the area to be
measured.
3. Press the step in and step out to move the slice plane in the step interval being
set.
4. Repeat Step 2 and 3 to select the area to be measured and move the slice plane.
5. Continue this measurement until completing through the region you require to
measure.
6. Press the end of volume measurement icon to complete the volume measurement.
After completing measurement, press located at the upper right of screen.
4-5 Q1E-EZ0622
CAUTION
Following shows errors when performing measurement using the phantom:

• Distance measurement : less than 10%
• Angle measurement : less than 20%
• Area measurement : less than 20%
• Volume measurement : less than 30%
As for angle measurement, the error is that at 90º. If angle is smaller, error can be
bigger.
In addition, the sensitivity/accuracy available for pointing/outlining small features on
screen may vary by +/- 2 pixels, whichever is greater.
In the following cases, however, measurement error might be further bigger.
(1) If performing linear scan on the XY plane of transmitter support stand.
X
Y
(2) If performing fan scan with the probe
Depending on conditions you are using, operation method and patient body shape,
measurement error above might be bigger. Therefore, it is strongly recommended not
to use only this measurement result for diagnosis.
(4) Automatic pendulum display function

Allows you to automatically rotate the image with its axis as a center. Pressing
this icon displays the automatic pendulum display menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.7.
Either of two icons at the left side of menu starts rotation. If pressing any part
other than this menu, the image stops rotation.
4-6 Q1E-EZ0622
Starts or ends rotation of the lateral direction.
Starts or ends rotation of the vertical direction.
Adjusts speed or span of rotation.
Changes speed of rotation.
Changes span of rotation.
Fig. 4.2.3.7 Automatic Pendulum Display Menu
(5) Layout
Pressing this icon displays the layout menu shown in Fig. 4.2.3.8 allowing you to
switch display/non display of orientation information, wire frame, measurement,
patient information. All layouts are displayed by default. If any image by the
Untracked capture is displayed, Measurement doesn’t appear in the menu.
Fig. 4.2.3.8 Layout Menu
(6) Memo
Pressing this icon displays the memo dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.9 allowing you to
enter a memo for the current 3D image. In each memo, date when entering this
dialog is recorded. Once pressing the Done button, contents will be unchangeable.
4-7 Q1E-EZ0622
Fig. 4.2.3.9 Memo Dialog
(7) Snapshot
Pressing this icon displays the snapshot dialog shown in Fig. 4.2.3.10 allowing you
to save the snapshot (JPEG format, TIFF format or BMP format) into FD,
CD-R/RW or MO (when the EZU-MO1 is installed). At this time, all annotations
are saved as well. Also, if any file with the same name exists in FD, CD-R/RW or
MO, it is saved as a file with the name of “Set file name_figure.extension”. For
example, if a file with the name of Snapshot.bmp has existed in CD-R, setting the
file format to “BMP”, destination to “CD” and name to “Snapshot”, creates a file
with the name of Snapshot_1.bmp.
Fig. 4.2.3.10 Snapshot Dialog
4-8 Q1E-EZ0622
Fig. 4.2.3.11 Snapshot Dialog (when the EZU-
EZU-MO1 is installed)
(8) Change of size

Only in the image by a free hand capturing this icon is displayed. When the icon is
pressed, a following menu is displayed. By moving a slider of the menu it is
possible to change a length along scanning direction of probe in the image. A
enlarging or shortening ratio is ranging from 20% to 500%. The change of length is
performed when the slider is stopped.
Fig. 4.2.3.12
4.2.3.12 Size changing menu
CAUTION
At a time of rendering display it may take a long time to change the length.
4.2.4 3D image controller
The 3D image controller located at the right side of screen can be operated on the free
section display screen, rendering screen and multi-view screen.
(1) Brightness
Operating this slider changes brightness of 3D image. Move the cursor to this
icon and use the trackball to move the slider while pressing the ENTER key for
desired brightness.
(2) Contrast
Operating this slider changes contrast of image. Move the cursor to this icon and
use the trackball to move the slider while pressing the ENTER key for desired
contrast.
4-9 Q1E-EZ0622
(3) Zoom
Use this icon to magnify or contract an image in 1.4-times intervals. Press the
“+” button to magnify the image or the “−” button to contract the image.
(4) Color scale

Displays a 3D image in color. However, if rendering a color image, this function is
not effected. Press any color on this color scale to display the 3D image in the
color. Also, press the center black part of color scale to display the color bar. If
pressing any color on the color bar, the 3D image is displayed in the color. If
pressing the center black part once again, the color bar is closed.
4.3 Rendering screen

The rendering screen allows you to view an image in the 3D mode
4.3.1 Rendering image
Pressing the rendering screen icon displays the rendered image. Press the rendering
screen icon to display an image shown in Fig. 4.3.1.1. At this time, cutting function and
rendering function are become effective. However, measurement is not available.
Fig. 4.3.1.1 3D Rendering Screen
4-10 Q1E-EZ0622
4.3.2 Rendering technique
The rendering screen does not express ultrasound image data superficially, but express it
with its feature enhanced. The following three rendering techniques are available:
• MIP (Maximum Intensity Projection)
• Opacity mode
• Transparency mode
<MIP mode>
The MIP mode assigns the maximum intensity of boxel in the projection direction to
each corresponding point of the display screen. This function is effective to visualize
maximum flow, skeletal structure and blood vessel structure.
<Opacity mode>
The opacity mode displays a see-through image with soft tissue, bones and so on
enhanced. However, it cannot be used for a color image. This function is especially
effective to visualize soft tissue (such as face of fetus).
<Transparency mode>
Transparency mode displays both black/white image and color image in a see-through
manner when displaying the color image three-dimensionally.
4-11 Q1E-EZ0622
4.3.3 Icon function
(1) Rendering function

The rendering function displays an image three-dimensionally. Until acquainted,
use defaulted settings.
1. Press this icon to display the rendering menu shown in Fig. 4.3.3.1.
MIP switch Opacity Filter Photo-realism
Default setting Common slider Thickness Luminance
(a) Opacity mode
(b) MIP mode
Transparency switch
(c) Color image rendering mode
Transparency of color
(d) Color image transparency mode Transparency of black/white
Fig. 4.3.3.1 Rendering Menu
2. Use the common parameter change slider to adjust the parameter selected.
Default setting : Save settings for rendering.
Opacity : Use the slider to determine opacity of the structure.
Thickness : Determine thickness of the volume to be rendered.
Filter : Determine threshold to transmit only brightness below some
level.
Luminance : Determine brightness of the image.
Photo-realism : Determine how to apply shades to the image.
4-12 Q1E-EZ0622
Transparency of color : Determine transparency of color image.
Transparency of black/white : Determine transparency of black/white image.
<MIP switch>
Pressing this icon selects the MIP mode.
<Transparency switch>
Pressing this icon selects the Transparency mode.
<Default setting>
Rendering parameters can be saved from the rendering parameter save dialog
shown in Fig. 4.3.3.2. Pressing this icon displays the rendering parameter
save dialog.
Fig. 4.3.3.2 Rendering Parameter Save Dialog

<Saving a parameter>
When you click the “+” button (shown in Fig. 4.3.3.2), the Add Parameter dialog box
appears (see Fig. 4.3.3.3 below). In this dialog box, enter a parameter name and click the
Add button. The parameter you entered will be saved.
Fig. 4.3.3.3 Add Parameter dialog box

<Deleting parameters>
To delete a parameter or parameters, select the one or ones you want to delete from the
list of parameters that are displayed. Then, click the “−” button (shown in Fig. 4.3.3.2).
The selected parameters will be deleted. You cannot delete the five parameters that are
registered from the beginning.
4-13 Q1E-EZ0622
(2) Cutting function
The cutting function engraves any unnecessary area from the 3D image rendered.
Cutting the inside or outside of the area can be designated from the cutting menu shown
in Fig. 4.3.3.4.
ON/OFF Removing outside Slider to set removing depth

Removing inside
Fig. 4.3.3.4 Cutting Menu
This icon switches display/non display of cutting menu. To close the cutting
menu, select this icon again.
ON/OFF: This icon switches display/non display of the part to be engraved.
Removing inside: Pressing this icon changes the shape of cursor to the
scalpel on the 3D image. Drawing any contour on the surface of image
while pressing the ENTER key removes the part inside it.
Removing outside: Pressing this icon changes the shape of cursor to the
scalpel on the 3D image. Drawing any contour on the surface of image
while pressing the ENTER key removes the part outside it.
Slider to set removing depth: Use this slider to set removing depth when
removing the inside. For the part contoured, 100 remove full depth and 50
removes half depth.
4-14 Q1E-EZ0622
4.4 Multi-view screen
Press the multi-view icon to display a screen as shown in Fig. 4.4.1 or Fig. 4.4.2. This
allows you to review a 3D image in 4 or 6 types of views.
Combined orthogonal views
Free section view
Orthogonal views
Rendering view
Fig. 4.4.1 Multi-

Multi-view Screen (6-
(6-view)
Combined orthogonal views
Orthogonal views
Fig. 4.4.2 Multi-

Multi-view Screen (4-
(4-view)
<Restrictions on multi-view>
On the multi-view screen, annotation, rendering of orthogonal planes and parameters
of rendering menu cannot be changed.
4-15 Q1E-EZ0622
4.5 Database screen
Press the database icon to display a screen as shown in Fig. 4.5.1. Use this screen to manage
patient information and 3D images.
Fig. 4.5.1 Database Screen
4.5.1 Screen layout
(1) Patient list

Lists all patients by ID and Name entered.
Fig. 4.5.1.1 Patient List

(2) Image list
Lists all images of the patient selected. The following shows contents:
• Scan Date & Scan Time: Shows the date and time when the image was captured.
• Archive: Shows the status of archive. For details of archive, refer to "4.5.2 Screen
function, (4) File operation". “NA” indicates that no image archived, “A” indicates
that the image file has been archived on media from HDD.
• Local: Shows the status of storage on HD. “Y” for existence on HD, “N” for not on
HD.
Fig. 4.5.1.2 Image List
4-16 Q1E-EZ0622
(3) Patient memo
Lists all information related to the patient. The patient
information cannot be entered, edited or deleted.
Fig. 4.5.1.3 Patient Memo
(4) Images in detail and memo

Lists details on the image and memo added to it in either of
the free section display screen or multi-view screen. The
patient information cannot be entered, edited or deleted on
this screen.
Fig. 4.5.1.4 Details and Memo
(5) Free HD space

This display in image indicates an empty capacity allowing
to save 3D images in HD. Blue space indicates the used
capacity and gray space does the usable capacity. The
capacity of HD is controlled by the main software to keep
any empty one always.
4.5.2 Screen function
(1) Changing memo

Select any patient of which memo is to be referred and press this icon to display
the patient information dialog.
(2) Delete
Select any patient to be deleted and press this icon to delete the patient from the
database and patient list. It is also possible to select plural patients with
selecting while pressing Ctrl key. However, if there is any image related to the
patient selected, the patient cannot be deleted. If there is any image related to
the patient, delete the image first. For the detail of the deletion of images, refer
to "4.5.2 Screen function, (4) File operation".
(3) Patient archive
Select this icon to archive all 3D images of the patient. For details of archive,
refer to "4.5.2 Screen function, (4) File operation".
4-17 Q1E-EZ0622
(4) File operation
Press this icon to archive, delete, import and copy images. The file operation
menu is displayed as shown in Fig. 4.5.2.1.
Fig. 4.5.2.1 File Operation Menu

<Archive>
Archive copies 3D image files into CD-R/RW or MO (only when the EZU-MO1 is
installed). Select a 3D image file to be archived and press Archive. At this time, if
media has no label, a dialog shown in Fig. 4.5.2.2 appears.
Fig. 4.5.2.2 Label Name Entry Dialog

Enter a label name and press the OK button, and then it starts archiving. No other
operation is available during Archive. During Archive, a message including patient ID,
file name and media name tells that archiving is in progress. After completing archive,
a confirmation message appears and the state of Archived of image list is changed to
“A”. It is also possible to select plural files with selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
When archived into media, the 3D image file is not automatically deleted from HD.
Before the capacity of 3D image files is over, delete them saved in HD at times.
CAUTION
If performing system shutdown during the writing to media, data may be lost.
4-18 Q1E-EZ0622
<Delete>
Select a 3D image file to be deleted from HD and press Delete. A message shown in
Fig. 4.5.2.3 (a) appears. When you press the Yes button, in case that the selected
image has not been archived, a message shown in Fig. 4.5.2.3 (b) is displayed. Press
the Yes button to delete the images. It is also possible to select plural files with
selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
(a) Confirming Delete 1 (b) Confirming Delete 2

Fig. 4.5.2.3 Delete Confirmation Message
If the selected image has been archived, its file name remains on the database screen,
but the 3D image file has been deleted from HD.
<Import>
If pressing Import to import images from CD-R/RW or MO (only when the EZU-MO1 is
installed) to HD, or to view the image, a screen appears in which 3D image files are
listed.
Fig. 4.5.2.4 Import Screen

Select a 3D image file to be imported and press the Import button. Selected 3D image
file is copied to the directory for import in HD. It is also possible to select plural files
with selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
Also select a 3D image file to be viewed and press the View button. Free section
display image of the 3D image file selected is displayed.
The imported images are not recorded in the database as well as not displayed in the
image list.
4-19 Q1E-EZ0622
<Import List>
If pressing Import List to display the list of all 3D image files in the import directory,
images listed are displayed by the file name, date and time, patient name and ID.
Fig. 4.5.2.5 Import List Screen
3D image file in this directory can be displayed by the View button, deleted by the
Delete button and copied to media by the Copy button. Also, pressing the title column
allows you to sort entries in the ascending or descending order.
<Copy>
Copy means to record any copy of image to media without change to the database.
Select any 3D image file to be copied and select “Copy”, and then it starts copying. It is
also possible to select plural files with selecting while pressing Ctrl key.
Fig. 4.5.2.6 Copy Confirmation Message
CAUTION
Archive copies an image from HD to media, and the database is changed. Therefore, if
the media used for archive is mounted on the drive when no archived image exists in HD,
you may use the display button on the database screen to retrieve it directly from media.
Copy takes a copy of image in media, but no patient database is changed. Therefore, you
cannot read it directly from media.
4-20 Q1E-EZ0622
(5) Icon for selecting the storage destination (displayed only when the EZU-MO1 is
installed)
When you press this icon, the Select Media dialog box appears (see Fig.
4.5.2.7 below). In this dialog box, you can select the destination where you
want to archive, import, or copy the image data files, using the File
Operation Menu shown in Fig. 4.5.2.1 above.
Fig. 4.5.2.7
4.5.2.7 Select Media dialog box
NOTICE
You may want to display the images whose Archived status is A and Local status (storage
status on the hard disk) is Y by pressing the display icon ( ) in the image list. To do
this, the media selected by pressing the storage selection icon ( ) must be specified as
the destination of archiving.
If you select a media that is not specified as the archiving destination, you cannot view
the images you want, and the following dialog box will prompt you to select the correct
media.
Re-specify the archiving destination media in the Select Media dialog box shown in Fig.
4.5.2.7, and press the display icon to view the images.
Example:
When MO is set in the Select Media dialog box, if you select an image archived on a CD
and press the display icon, the dialog box shown in Figure (a) appears.
In the Select Media dialog box, set CD as the archiving destination, and then press the
display icon.
In the same way, when CD is set in the Select Media dialog box, if you select an image
archived on an MO disk, the dialog box shown in Figure (b) appears.
In the Select Media dialog box, set MO as the archiving destination, and then press the
display icon.
(a) Message that prompts you (b) Message that prompts you
to change the media (to CD) to change the media (to MO)
4-21 Q1E-EZ0622
(6) Display icon
Select any image to be displayed and press the display icon. The free
section display screen is displayed.
(7) Search text box

Automatically searches patient information
corresponding to the characters entered into the search
text box and displays it on the patient list box. Select
any desired one from the patient list box.
4-22 Q1E-EZ0622
Chapter 5 Specification
5.1 Base software

(1) Acquisition of 3D image data
(a) Black and white image Available only for one B mode screen
(b) Color image Available only for a part of color map of color mode
(c) Initial setting of image Can be set for each probe and tracking mode
acquisition parameters
5.2 3D software
(1) Rendering
(a) Black and white image Opacity mode, MIP mode
(b) Color image MIP mode, Transparency mode
(c) Registration of rendering Available
parameters
(2) Multi-view 4-image, 6-image view including orthogonal three
planes
(3) Free section display Image rotation, slice, optional orthogonal plane
(4) Zoom function 21 steps
(5) Automatic pendulum Up/down and left/right directions, change of speed and
display function width of rotation
(6) Image management Management by patient ID
(7) Measurement function Available in case of the image which is captured with
Magnetic tracked
(8) Annotation function Characters and arrows allowed
(9) Sculpture function Available in only black and white image
(10) Size changing function With this function it is possible to change the length
of image captured in the free hand mode along the
probe scanning direction.
5-1 50 Q1E-EZ0622
5.3 Image files
(1) 3D image file
(a) Media for archiving HD, CD-R/RW, MO (when the EZU-MO1 is installed)
(b) Size of one 3D image file In case of untracked capture:
NTSC: About 10.0 MB under conditions of total
capturing time and default set pixel numbers 240pix
× 180pix
PAL: About 13.1 MB under conditions of total
× 212pix
In case of the magnetic sensor capture:
NTSC: About 7.8 MB under conditions of total
capturing time, probe scanning distance 20cm and
pixel numbers 240pix × 180pix
PAL: About 10.5 MB under conditions of total
× 212pix
However, the figures may vary in accordance with
brightness or pixel number.
(c) Total 3D images that can be 900MB
archived in HD
(d) DICOM transfer Not available
(2) File by Snapshot
(a) Media for archiving CD-R/RW, FD, MO (when the EZU-MO1 is installed)
(b) Size of bitmap file JPEG format: NTSC: about 50kB, PAL: about 100kB
TIFF format: NTSC: 678kB, PAL: 1071kB
BMP format: NTSC: 679kB, PAL: 1072kB
(c) DICOM transfer Not available
(d) Output to PC printer Not available
5.4 Condition for using magnetic sensor unit (EZU-3D2S)

(1) Range of temperature +10°C ~ +35°C
(2) Probe EUP-C314G, EUP-C514,
EUP-C524, EUP-L53, EUP-L53S, EUP-V53W
5-2 Q1E-EZ0622
Index
3 F
3D function setting menu ..........................3-15 Features ........................................................1-4
3D image controller......................................4-9 Free section display screen..........................4-1
3D mode ........................................................3-2
I
3D software............................................4-1, 5-1
Icon function ....................................... 4-3, 4-12
B Image files.....................................................5-2
Base software.........................................3-1, 5-1 In case of 3D software error.......................3-17
In case of 3D software lockup ....................3-18

C
Installation ...................................................2-1
Capture .........................................................3-2
Introduction ..................................................1-1
Capture (reverse video).............................. 3-11
Introduction to 3D ultrasound ....................1-1
Capture execution requirements.................3-4
Capture stops.............................................. 3-11 L
Cautions ........................................................1-2 Limits on the number of characters............3-7
Changing image display ..............................4-2

M
Check before use...........................................1-3
Maintenance and checkup ...........................1-3
Checkup while using....................................1-4
Messages on 3D software...........................3-17
Condition for using magnetic sensor unit
Moving position of 3D image .......................4-2
(EZU-3D2S)...............................................5-2
Multi-view screen .......................................4-15
D
N
Database screen .........................................4-16
Necessity to enter ID of patient information
During capture ...........................................3-10
....................................................................3-5
E
P
Exit ................................................................3-3
Parameter .....................................................3-3
Exiting from 3D mode................................3-14
Patient information......................................3-5
Index-1 52 Q1E-EZ0622
Periodical checkup........................................1-4 Setting up 3D functions .............................3-14
Preliminary work for magnetic sensor unit Settings for 3D image file ................ 3-14, 3-16
....................................................................2-1
Settings of ROI for 3D image capture.......3-15
Purpose of use...............................................1-1
Specification..................................................5-1
Standard components ..................................2-1

R
Starting 3D mode .........................................3-1
Reconstruction of 3D image.........................1-1
Starting capture ...........................................3-8
Rendering image ........................................4-10
Stopping capture ........................................3-12
Rendering screen........................................4-10
System configuration and installation........2-1
Rendering technique .................................. 4-11
Restriction of characters for patient ID......3-7

T
Technical terms.............................................1-1
S
To3D ..............................................................3-3
Saving 3D image file ..................................3-13
Tracking Mode Selection..............................3-2
Scan of probe.................................................1-1
Screen function...........................................4-17
W
Screen layout ...................................... 4-1, 4-16
Warning.........................................................1-3
DICOM Software
Model EZU-FC7, EZU-FC7P, EZU-FC7W
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0630-1

Preface
Thank you for purchasing the optional "DICOM Software (EZU-FC7, EZU-FC7P, EZU-FC7W) ".
By building-in this software to the DICOM Software available separately, Ultrasound Diagnostic
Scanner can be used more advantageously in ultrasound study.
In order to use this DICOM Software correctly, the most important point is to have an adequate
understanding of the contents of this Instruction Manual. Please read the Manual before using the
device.
A screen display may change with versions of ultrasound equipment.
[Term explanation]
American College of Radiology-National Electrical Manufactures Association (ACR-NEMA) Digital
Imaging and Communications v2.0, 1988.
ACR-NEMA Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM) v3.0, Final Draft, Aug,
1993.
Term:
ACR American College of Radiology
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
FSC File-set Creator
FSU File-set Updater
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step
NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association
PDU Protocol Data Unit
SCP Service Class Provider
SCU Service Class User
SOP Service Object Pair
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
UID Unique Identifier
-1- Q1E-EZ0630
Contents
Section 1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Purpose of Use .........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Components..............................................................................................................................1-1
1.3 Features....................................................................................................................................1-1
Section 2 Functional explanation .......................................................................................................2-1
Section 3 Method of Use......................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Preparation ..............................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Setting for DICOM communication........................................................................................3-1
3.3 Transferring to DICOM Server...............................................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Transferring by S-WRITE key.........................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Transferring by M-WRITE key........................................................................................3-4
3.3.3 Transferring of saving image...........................................................................................3-6
3.3.4 Transferring from Image Filing dialog ...........................................................................3-7
3.3.5 Batch transferring for every patient...............................................................................3-7
3.4 Transferring to FD, CD-R/RW or MO.....................................................................................3-9
3.5 Printing to the DICOM Printer(Option EZU-FC7P).............................................................3-9
3.5.1 Setting for Print Format..................................................................................................3-9
3.5.2 Printing ...........................................................................................................................3-11
3.6 DICOM Modality WorkList function(Option EZU-FC7W) .................................................3-16
3.6.1 Setting for Modality WorkList.......................................................................................3-16
3.6.2 Using Modality WorkList...............................................................................................3-17
3.6.3 Mobile function ...............................................................................................................3-21
3.7 Temporary save at the time of a transferring / printing error ...........................................3-23
3.8 Detailed setup of DICOM communication ...........................................................................3-24
Section 4 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................4-1
Section 5 Specifications .......................................................................................................................5-1
Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement ................................................................................... A-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
-2- Q1E-EZ0630
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of Use
The DICOM transferring Software EZU-FC7 transfers the freeze-frame images appearing on
the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner to a DICOM-compatible server using the DICOM 3.0
standard.
The DICOM Image Printing Software EZU-FC7P transfers the freeze-frame images
appearing on the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner to a DICOM-compatible printer using the
DICOM 3.0 standard.
The DICOM WorkList Software EZU-FC7W has the functions to get patient data from the
DICOM WorkList Server (HIS, RIS, etc.) with DICOM3.0 Standard and to send the
examination start and end notifications to the DICOM MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure
Step) server.
1.2 Components
(1) INSTRUCTION MANUAL ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1
Note: This option needs EZU-Pi6 network card.
1.3 Features
[1] EZU-
EZU-FC7
- Recording is digital so no deterioration of image quality.
- Transfer to a DICOM server using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
- Transfer to the FD and CD-R/RW using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
- Transfer to the DICOM server is possible at DICOM JPEG Baseline (Lossy).
- When the optionally MO Drive unit is loading, transfer to the MO using DICOM 3.0
standard possible.
[2] EZU-
EZU-FC7P
- Print to a DICOM printer using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
- Selectable Printing formats.
- Print to a DICOM printer by using the Print Key possible.
- Simultaneous output to a DICOM printer and server when outputting using the Print Key
possible.
- By converting Bitmap (BMP) files saved on Hard Disk, CD-R/RW and so on to DICOM
format, they can be print to the DICOM printer.
[3] EZU-
EZU-FC7W
- This software allows getting of patient data with DICOM3.0 Standard from the DICOM
WorkList Server.
- Examination start and end notifications with DICOM3.0 Standard can also be sent to the
DICOM MPPS Server.
- Patient data can be gotten with the date of examination or date within before-and-after 3
days including the examination date.
- The patient retrieve by patient ID is also possible.
1-1 3 Q1E-EZ0630
Section 2 Functional explanation
The DICOM function is explained in Table 2.1 and Fig. 2.1.
Table 2.1 The DICOM function

Function Name Contents Required option
The transfer function to a Storage The function to transfer the EZU-FC7,
DICOM server images to a DICOM server EZU-Pi6
The transfer function to a Media Storage The function to transfer a EZU-FC7
floppy disk, CD-R/RW and DICOM images at FD and
MO CD-R/RW
The function to transfer a EZU-FC7,
DICOM images at MO EZU-MO1
DICOM printer printing Print Management The function which prints a EZU-FC7,
function images to a DICOM printer EZU-FC7P,
EZU-Pi6
Modality WorkList function Modality WorkList The function which requires the EZU-FC7,
patient who is going to examine EZU-FC7W,
today of WorkList servers EZU-Pi6
(HIS/RIS etc.), and gets the
patient data
MPPS function MPPS The function which notifies a EZU-FC7,
examination start and end to a EZU-FC7W,
server EZU-Pi6
US device
Media CD-
CD-R/RW,
Storage FD or MO
Modality
WorkL
WorkList MPPS Print management
TCP/IP
Ether net
Storage
HIS/RIS DICOM Server DICOM Printer
Fig. 2.1 the DICOM function
2-1 4 Q1E-EZ0630
Section 3 Method of Use
3.1 Preparation
To utilize the DICOM Software, it is necessary to set up the network on the ultrasound
scanner. A host name, an IP address, a port number, AE name, etc. should come to hand
from a network administrator first. Moreover, please request Hitachi or our authorized
service representative to set up the network.
3.2 Setting for DICOM communication

If the DICOM Server [Set Up] button in the dialog displayed by selecting Main Menu →
Setup → Image Filing is clicked, the DICOM Set up dialog is displayed as shown in Fig. 3.2-1
Input the DICOM-related setup values following the procedure given below.
Note: Even if WorkList Server and MPPS Server are same, set it respectively.
1 Setup the data of (1) ~ (11) in Fig. 3.2-1 using the information given in Table 3.2-1.
2 Having checked that there are no errors in the values setup in (1) ~ (11), click [Register]
Button "A".
3 Having checked that DICOM server AE name you have just setup (the name you input in (8))
is displayed in the AE List "B", click the (12)[OK] button.
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(5) B
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) <1>
(10)
(11) <2>
A
<3>
(12)
Fig. 3.2-
3.2-1 DICOM Set up dialog
3-1 5 Q1E-EZ0630
Table 3.2-
3.2-1 Setup Data
No. Information Data To Be Setup
(1) Ultrasound Device Name Setup unnecessary(Note)
(2) Ultrasound Device IP Address Setup unnecessary(Note)
(3) Ultrasound Device Sub-network Setup unnecessary(Note)
Mask
(4) SCU (Service Class User) Name Use just as it is the value input when you use DICOM
(DICOM transfer client's name ) Software. Note however that if this field is left blank,
DICOM transfer is not possible.
(5) Transfer Destination Device Input the device name of the transfer destination
Name device.
(6) Transfer Destination Device IP Input the IP address of the transfer destination device.
Address
(7) Transfer Destination Device Input the port no. of the transfer destination device.
Port No.
(8) Transfer Destination Device AE Input the AE name of the transfer destination device.
(Application Entity Title) Name
(9) Selection SOP Class UID Select either [New] or [Retire] according to the support
condition of SOP Class UID at the server side. Check
the Conformance Statement of the server and select it
referring to the Table 3.2-2.
Please set up this item, only when a DICOM server is
chosen at (10) Service List.
(10) Selection of DICOM Service Please choose a Destination Device host's service.
Information The services that can be chosen are decided by
composition of an option. For details, please look at
Table 3.2-3.
(11) Selection of Printer Setup File Having checked the name of the DICOM Printer, select
printer name from the list.
Please set up this item, only when DICOM
Printer(Grayscale) and DICOM Printer(Color) are
chosen at (10) Service List.
Note: When editing setup values, edit from the menu displayed by selecting Main Menu → Setup
→ Peripherals → Network.
Table 3.2-
3.2-2 SOP Class UID
SOP Class SOP Class UID Selection item
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage(Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 Retire
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage(New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 New
Ultrasound Image Storage(Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 Retire
Ultrasound Image Storage(New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 New
Table 3.2-
3.2-3 Service of DICOM
Destination Device Selection Service
The case of DICOM Storage Server DICOM Server
The case of DICOM Printer(Grayscale) DICOM Printer(Grayscale)
The case of DICOM Printer(Color) DICOM Printer(Color)
The case of DICOM WorkList Server Modality WorkList
The case of DICOM MPPS Server MPPS
The following table explains functions other than table 3.2-1.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0630
Table 3.2-
3.2-4 Functional explanation
No. Information The contents of operation
<1> Deletion of a registration It is used when deleting the item registered into AE list.
item Please choose an item to delete from "B" and click <1>
[delete] button.
<2> Import of a Printer Setup It is used when importing the setup file of a printer.
File
<3> [Cancel] button When you cancel all the contents of a setting, please click
not (12)[OK] but <3>[Cancel].
3-3 Q1E-EZ0630
3.3 Transferring to DICOM Server
DICOM Server requires taking the procedures of DICOM communication set up.
Please set up DICOM communication according to Section 3.2.
3.3.1 Transferring by S-
S-WRITE key
It transfers image by the S-WRITE key on a panel.
[ I ] Set up
When Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing is selected, Set Up Filing dialog is displayed. Fig.
3.3-1 is the S-WRITE assignment portion of Set Up Filing dialog. Following procedures as
mentioned below assign S-WRITE key the function to transfer image to DICOM
Server.
1 Select (1) External Device.
2 Select “DICOM” or “DICOM JPEG (Lossy)” from (2) File Format.
Note: Even if “DICOM JPEG (Lossy)” is selected, image are transferred in “DICOM” format
unless the transferring server supports “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”.
Select either one after confirming the Conformance Statement of DICOM server.
3 As a (3) address select AE name of DICOM server set in Section 3.2.
4 Confirm contents set and click [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-1 Assignment to the S-
S-WRITE key
[II] Transfer
For DICOM transfer Patient ID is needed. Before starting the transfer it should be entered
without fail.
Press S-WRITE key on the panel.
Still images are transferred to DICOM server.
3.3.2 Transferring
Transferring by M-
M-WRITE key
It transfers image by the M-WRITE key on a panel.
[ I ] Set up
When Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing is selected, Set Up Filing dialog is displayed.
Fig. 3.3-2 is the M-WRITE assignment portion of Set Up Filing dialog. Following procedures
as mentioned below assign M-WRITE key the function to transfers image to DICOM
Server.
3-4 Q1E-EZ0630
1 Referring to Table 3.3-1 select proper items in (1) Mode (2) Tool (3) Number suited for the
transferring method.
2 Select either “DICOM” or “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)” from (4) File Format.
Note: Even if “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)” is selected, (data)are transferred in “DICOM” format
unless the transferring server supports “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”.
Select either one after confirming the Conformance Statement of DICOM server.
3 (5) As a transferring destination select AE name of DICOM server set in Section 3.2.
4 Confirm contents set and click [OK] button.
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-2 Assignment to the M-WRITE key
Table
Table 3.3-
3.3-1 Transferring method of live image
(1)Mode (2)Tool (3)Number Transferring method
F-F out Auto Frame Number selection As same numbers of live images as selected in
(3)Number are automatically produced and
transferred.
Manual ---- You can select the starting frame and ending frame
for producing live images. After M-WRITE key is
pressed, live images are produced following to
messages.
R-R out Auto Heart rate selection From R-wave frame close to freeze frame live
images as same heart rate as selected in (3)Number
are automatically produced and transferred.
Manual ---- You can select the starting R-wave frame and
ending R-wave frame for producing live images.
After M-WRITE key is pressed, live images are
produced following to message.
ALL ---- ---- From all images stored in Cine Memory live images
are automatically produced and transferred.
[II] Transfer
without fail.
Press M-WRITE key on the panel.
Following to the transferring method described in Table 3.3-1 live images are produced are
transferred to DICOM server.
3-5 Q1E-EZ0630
3.3.3 Transferring of saving image
In case Images once saved in Hard Disk, CD-R/RW and so on are in BMP format or AVI
format, it is possible to transfer them after converted into DICOM.
[ I ] Starting method of Transfer dialog

For starting transfer dialog screen there are two methods.
1 Press READ key on the panel, then Filing dialog is displayed. Select images you want
to transfer, and then click [Transfer] button.
2 Select images from Filing dialog displayed by 1. Click [Retrieve] button (Fig. 3.3-3 "A"), then
the status turns to image replay. In case of multi-display replay, select F7Transfer of the
function menu. In case of a single display replay, select F7Transfer, in second page of the
function menu.
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-3 Filing dialog
3-6 Q1E-EZ0630
[II] Transferring method
Display Transfer dialog following to the procedure described in [I] Starting method of
Transfer dialog.
Transfer images by under mentioned procedure.
1 Select DICOM server at (1) Drive.
Also it is possible to select Floppy disk, CD-R/RW and MO.
2 Select (2) File Convert and put Check mark.
3 When images in BMP format have been selected, select “DICOM” or “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”
at (3) From BMP. If images in AVI format have been selected, select “DICOM” or “DICOM
JPEG(Lossy)” at (4) From AVI.
Note: Even if “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)” is selected, (data)are transferred in “DICOM” format
unless the transferring server supports DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”. Select either one after
confirming the Conformance Statement of DICOM server.
4 Confirm contents set and click [OK] button. Transfer images in DICOM to the designated
transferring destination.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-4 Transfer dialog
3.3.4 Transferring from Image Filing dialog

If Main Menu → Image Filing is selected, Image Filing dialog is displayed. Here, it is
possible to change temporarily the transferring destination and file format. This address is
held until it turn off system or Setup Filing menu performs a re-setup. As a matter of
course, you can select “DICOM” and “DICOM JPEG(Lossy)”. Select the transferring
method referring to Sections 3.3.1 and 3.3.2.
It is reflected in operation of the S-WRITE key , and the M-WRITE key by
clicking the [OK] button.
3.3.5 Batch transferring for every patient

Images can be transferred for every patient. It transfers image by the End Exam key
on a panel.
[I] Set up
Image Filing in Main Menu / Set up is chosen and “Set up Filing” dialog is started. Please
click the [Details of filing] button of this dialog. Set Up details of filing dialog starts.
3-7 Q1E-EZ0630
Fig.3.3-5 is the Timing of Transfer portion of Set Up details of filing. Please choose "every
patient".
Fig.3.3-
Fig.3.3-5 Set Up details of filing
Please assign S-WRITE key and M-WRITE key to transferring to a DICOM

server.
Refer to “3.3.1 Transferring by S-WRITE key” and “3.3.2 Transferring by M-WRITE key” for
the assignment method.
[II] Transferring
without fail.
If S-WRITE key and M-WRITE key is pressed during Examination, the
image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk, mark is displayed on the screen
upper right.
When there is an image temporarily saved in the hard disk, an mark is displayed on
the screen upper right. When either of the following is operated, the image saved in the
hard disk temporarily is transferred.
- Pressing the End Exam key.
- Starting the ultrasound system

Note: When the [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu, Since a CPU power is
used for transferring, even if it inputs a character on ID information screen, it may
not be reflected immediately.
After an Examination end should press End Exam key , and should transfer an
image.
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain, a message shown in
Fig.3.3-6 appears when starting the system. Click the [Yes] button. If transfer is to be
Fig. 3.3-
3.3-6 Forced Output Message
3-8 Q1E-EZ0630
Note1: If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted and they cannot be transferred.
Note2: The message of Fig. 3.3-6 is displayed when the [OK] button is clicked by Set Up Filing
dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents of a setting, it is transferred
on the setting conditions before change.
3.4 Transferring to FD, CD-
CD-R/RW or MO
Images in DICOM format can be saved in Floppy disc and CD-R/RW. Select either FD or
CD-R/RW as the transferring destination. However, it is necessary to set SCU name by
DICOM Set up dialog. (Refer to Fig. 3.2-1).
Note: When the optionally MO Drive unit is loading, Images in DICOM format can be saved
in MO.
3.5 Printing to the DICOM Printer(Option EZU-
EZU-FC7P)
DICOM Printer requires to take the procedures of Setting for DICOM communication (refer
to 3.2) and Setting for Print Format (refer to 3.5.1).
Please be sure to set up an output format on a Set Up Image Print dialog (to refer to Fig.
3.5-1) after Setting for DICOM communication (refer to Section 3.2) of DICOM. When it does
not set up, transferring to a DICOM server cannot be performed.
3.5.1 Setting for Prin

Printt Format
The values for the Setup Image Print dialog (refer to Fig. 3.5-1) displayed by selecting Main
Menu → Setup → Image Print must also be setup in accordance with the setup information
given below.
1 Select "DICOM printer" in "A".

2 Setup (1) (Color select printing image) following Table 3.5-1.
3 Input (2) ~ (8) following Table 3.5-2. Select B/W Printer Setup for output format for a B/W
printer and Color Printer Values for output format for a color printer.
4 Having completed setup, check the setup information then click the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-1 Set Up Image Print dialog
3-9 Q1E-EZ0630
Table 3.5-
3.5-1 Printer Selection for Different Color Images
Setup Values
Image Transfer Destination
B/W Image Setup Color Image Setup
When printing B/W images to a Set "Send to B/W Printer" Set "Send to Color Printer"
B/W printer and color images to
a color printer
When printing B/W images and Set "Send to B/W Printer" Set "Send to B/W Printer"
color images to a B/W printer
When printing B/W images and Set "Send to Color Printer" Set "Send to Color Printer"
color images to a color printer
Table 3.5-
3.5-2 Format Setup
No. Name Information Setup Value
Select printer Printer Selection Select only the AE name registered
(2)
in The DICOM Setup menu
(3) Film Size Film Size Selection Select film size.
(4) Image Display Format Format Selection Select output format
(5) Orientation Selection of film orientation Select film orientation.
(6) Destination Film Destination Selection Select film destination.
Time out Setup of DICOM Printer The response waiting time from a
(7) response DICOM printer is setup after
association establishment.
Detail Other Detail Selection By pressing this button, the set
value of magnification rate and
smoothing method can be checked.
(8) Here, do not change the text
information displayed by pressing
the button. Printing out may
possibly become impossible.
3-10 Q1E-EZ0630
3.5.2 Printing
3.5.2.1 Printing by the PRINT key
It is possible to print the images to a DICOM printer by the PRINT key .
[ I ] PRINT key
In order to print by using the PRINT Key , select Image Printer in (1) B/W Mode and
(2) Color Mode. The Print/REC key Assignment dialog(see Fig. 3.5-2) displayed by selecting
Main Menu → Setup → Print/REC.
(1)
(2)
Fig.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-2 Print/REC
[II] Printing
1 With device in Freeze Off State, display the image you want to print on the screen and press
the Freeze Key. Alternatively, after pressing the Freeze Key, select the image you want to
print by cine replay.
2 Press the PRINT Key . By this operation, the images are temporarily saved to the hard
disk.
3 Repeat operations 1 and 2 as many times as the number of images you wish to print on one
sheet of paper. The number of images is determined by the setting value of Image Display
Format in the Setup Image Print menu of the printer.
4 When the number of accumulated images reaches the set number of sheets, printing begins
automatically.
Note 1: When printing B/W images to a B/W printer and color images to a color printer, the B/W
image and the color image are saved independently to the hard disk. It is for this reason
that printing starts automatically as described above when the number of images to be
printed on one sheet of paper is reached.
Note 2: With Report Screen etc. dialog box displays also, if the PRINT Key is pressed, the
ultrasound screen is printed.
3-11 Q1E-EZ0630
[III] Forced Printing
If any of the operations listed below is performed, the image temporarily saved to the hard
disk is printing to the printer.
- Click the [New Patient] button on the Patient Menu dialog.
End
- Press the End Exam key Exam .
- Start-up of the ultrasound device (when all images accumulated have not been printed).
1 Click the [New Patient] button on the Patient Menu dialog.
When using the Print key to output images to the printer, data of the same patient only is
outputted to the same paper. Therefore, if clicking the [New Patient] button when the
patient is changed, image print.
2 Press the End Exam key .

End
Exam
When you wish to carry out forced printing of the image temporarily saved to the hard disk,
press the End Exam key End
Exam .
3 Start-up of the ultrasound device.
If the device's power supply is turned off with the image temporarily saved to the hard disk
still remaining there, the message shown in Fig. 3.5-3 is displayed. Click [Yes] button. If
printing is to be canceled, click the [No] button of this message.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-3 Forced Output Message
Note1: If the [No] button is selected, the accumulated images file is deleted and cannot later
be printing to the printer.
Note2: The message of Fig. 3.5-3 is displayed when the [OK] button is clicked by Set Up
Image Print dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents of a setting, it is printed
3-12 Q1E-EZ0630
3.5.2.2 Printing from Filing dialog
1 If the READ key is pressed, the Image Filing dialog (refer to Fig. 3.5-4) is displayed.
2 Select the number of images that you wish to print.
3 Click the [Image Print] button (refer to Fig. 3.5-4 "A").
4 The images to be printed will be positioned in the order in which you selected them and
printing will begin automatically.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-4 Filing dialog
Note 1: If there are images accumulated by the use of the PRINT Key when you print
other images to the printer by the [Image Print] button, the message shown in Fig.
3.5-3 is displayed. If you wish to printing to the printer the images accumulated by
the PRINT key also, press the [Yes] button. If you wish to delete the images
accumulated by the PRINT Key , press the [No] button.
Note that if the [No] button is selected; the images cannot be later being printing to
the printer.
Note 2: Images in formats other than BMP format cannot be printed. If you have selected
images in formats other than BMP, the message shown in Fig. 3.5-5 is displayed.
Press the [OK] button to continue with printing processing to the printer and the
[Cancel] button to cancel printing processing to the printer. When [OK] button is
clicked, the image of other format than BMP format cannot be printed.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-5 Printing Limitation Message
3-13 Q1E-EZ0630
3.5.2.3 Simultaneous
Simultaneous Transfer DICOM Server and Printer
When pressing the PRINT Key to printing to the printer, it is possible to printing to
the DICOM Server and DICOM printer simultaneously.
[ I ] DICOM Printer Setup
1 Carry out DICOM printer-related setup following Sub-sections 3.2, 3.5.1.
2 Allocate PRINT Key to Image Printer following Sub-section 3.5.2.1[ I ].
[II] DICOM Server Setup
1 Carry out DICOM server-related setup following Sub-sections 3.2.
2 Turn the "Simultaneous Transfer DICOM Server and Printer by Pressing Print Key" in Fig.
3.5-6 "C" check-box on.
3 Click the [OK] button. You will be returned to Set Up Filing dialog in Fig. 3.5-6.
4 Assignment S-WRITE key to transferring DICOM server following sub-section 3.3.1.
Fig. 3.5-
3.5-6 DICOM Set up dialog
[III] Transferring
Press the PRINT key
When images print to DICOM printer, simultaneous transfer DICOM server.
Note: Even when an error occurs during printing to a DICOM printer and a image is
transferred only to a DICOM server, since a simultaneous output is carried out again
to a DICOM server and a DICOM printer, the same image is sent to a DICOM server
after an error dissolution.
3.5.2.4 Batch printing for every patient

Images can be printed for every patient. It prints image by the End Exam key on a
panel.
[I] Set up
click the [Details of filing] button of this dialog. Set Up details of filing dialog starts.
Fig.3.5-7 is the Timing of Transfer portion of Set Up details of filing. Please choose "every
patient".
3-14 Q1E-EZ0630
Fig.3.5-
Fig.3.5-7 Set Up details of filing
Please assign PRINT key to Image printer.

Refer to “3.5.1 Setting for Print Format“ and “3.5.2.1[1] PRINT key” for the assignment
method
[II] Printing
If PRINT key is pressed during Examination, the image is temporarily saved in a hard
disk.
At that time, the number of present image which is saved is displayed. When saved images
are 2 and image numbers to be printed out in one paper is 6, a dialog is
displayed.
Since it can save at a hard disk exceeding the number of sheets of one paper, when saved
images are 10 and image numbers to be printed out in one paper is 6, a dialog is
displayed.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk, mark is displayed on the screen
upper right.
When there is an image temporarily saved in the hard disk, an mark is displayed on
the screen upper right. When either of the following is operated, the image saved in the
hard disk temporarily is printed.
- Pressing the End Exam key.
- Starting the ultrasound system
Note: When the [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu, since a CPU power is
used for printing, even if it inputs a character on ID information screen, it may not be
reflected immediately.
After an Examination end should press End Exam key, and should print an image.
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain, a message shown in
Fig.3.5-8 appears when starting the system. Click the [Yes] button. If printing is to be
Fig.3.5-
Fig.3.5-8 Forced Output Message
3-15 Q1E-EZ0630
Note1: If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted and they cannot be outputted
to the printer any more.
Note2: The message of Fig. 3.5-8 is displayed when the [OK] button is clicked by Set Up
Image Print dialog, with temporary image saved.
When [Yes] is chosen here, even if it changes the contents of a setting, it is printed
3.6 DICOM Modality WorkList function(Option EZU-

EZU-FC7W)
DICOM WorkList function requires to take the procedures of Setting for DICOM
communication (refer to 3.2) and Setting for Modality WorkList (refer to 3.6.1).
Please be sure to set up transferring server on a Set up Modality WorkList dialog (to refer to
Fig. 3.6-1) after Setting for DICOM communication (refer to Section 3.2) of DICOM. When it
does not set up, Modality WorkList function cannot be performed.
Note: Please do not edit the Patient information got from the WorkList server.
Incompatibility may happen by the server side.
Patient name has forbidden the input of a commna. When the comma is contained in
the name got from the WorkList server, a comma is eliminated at the time of edit.
3.6.1 Setting for Modality WorkList

Select Main Menu → Setup → Image Filing and click on Modality WorkList [Set Up] button
on the displayed dialog. Set Up Modality WorkList dialog show in Fig. 3.6-1 is displayed.
Referring to Table 3.6-1, Set values on this dialog. After this setting, make sure of the set
data and click on [OK] button.
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(5) (8)
(6)
(7)
(9)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-1 Set up Modality WorkList dialog
3-16 Q1E-EZ0630
Table 3.6-
3.6-1 Setting Contents
No. Item Setting
(1) WorkList function ON/OFF To use WorkList function, click on the box to put a check
mark.
(2) MPPS function ON/OFF To use MPPS function, click on the box to put a check mark.
To use MMPS function, set (1) WorkList function to ON, too.
(3) Selection of WorkList Server Select the WorkList Server to be used.
(4) Selection of MPPS Server Select the MPPS server to be used.
(5) Using date as searching key To use date as searching key, click on the box to put on a
check mark.
(6) Using modality information To use modality information as searching key, click on the
as searching key box to put on a check mark.
(7) Using patient ID as retrieve To use patient ID as searching key, click on the box to put on
key a check mark.
Only the data of patient ID which is completely in
agreement with the inputted character sequence is acquired.
If "*" is inputted, reference by patient ID will not be carried
out.
(8) Setting date to get patient Today: Select this only when the patient data for today's
data examination is gotten.
Yesterday, Today and Tomorrow:
Select this when the patient data within before-and-after 3
days including today is gotten.
(9) Using AE title as searching To use AE Title as searching key, click on the box to put on a
key check mark.
3.6.2 Using Modality WorkList

3.6.2.1 WorkList function
Please click the [New Patient] button in Patient Menu.
Patient List dialog of Fig. 3.6-2 is displayed.
(3) (4)
(1)
(2)
(5) (6) (7)

Fig. 3.6-
3.6-2 Patient List dialog
3-17 Q1E-EZ0630
[ I ] Getting of patient data
1 Select the desired patient on the Patient List dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-2, and click on [OK]
button (5).
The getting information on selected patient is displayed on Patient Menu.
Note: Name is displayed on Last Name box.
2 With MPPS function set to ON, the examination start notification is sent to the MPPS
server.
3 Not to select any patient data, click on [Close] button (7).
[II] Searching of patient data

1 Input the keyword in (2) on the Patient List dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-2. The range of search
changes according to the contents chosen in the item of (1).
One of the items shown below can be chosen.
All : Search by ID, Name, Accession# and Exam.typ
ID : Search by ID
Name : Search by Name
Accession# : Search by Accession#
Exam.typ : Search by Exam.typ
2 Either press Enter key on the keyboard or click on [Search] button (3). A list of only the
patient data corresponding to the keyword is displayed.
3 To display all the patient data again, click on [Show all] button (4).
Result of the search displays only the image the character sequence of a keyword and
whose character sequence for reference correspond from a head. When you search the
character sequence in the middle of for reference, please put "*" into a keyword.
(The example of search)

Keyword Result of search
OKA OKADA, OKAYAMA
*OKA* OKADA, OKAYAMA, YAMAOKA
This search narrows down. When you research from the beginning, click the Show all
button.
3-18 Q1E-EZ0630
[III] Display of detailed patient data
To display detailed patient data gotten from WorkList Server, follow the next steps to display
the Detail Information dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-3. For contents of the items, refer to
"Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement".
1 Select Patient Data on Patient List Dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-2.
2 Click on [Detail Info.] button (6) shown in Fig. 3.6-2.
Detail Information dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-3 is displayed.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-3 Detail Information dialog
By selecting Patient Detail Info. [View] (1) on Set Up Modality WorkList dialog shown in Fig.
3.6-4, the detailed information of the current patient data can also be displayed.
(2)
(1)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-4 Set Up Modality WorkL
WorkList dialog
3-19 Q1E-EZ0630
[IV] Display of
of Patient List
To display Patients List gotten from WorkList server, please select Patient List [View] (2) on
Set Up Modality WorkList dialog show in Fig. 3.6-4.
Note: When a Work List function and the printing function to PC printer are used
simultaneously, it waits for a while after clicking a [New Patient] button until it
displays Patient List.
3.6.2.2 MPPS function

[ I ] Examination start notification
As the patient data is gotten in the procedure for Getting of patient data in 3.6.2.1, the
examination start notification for selected patient is simultaneously sent to the MPPS
Server.
[II] Examination end notification

By following the next steps when an examination is completed, the examination end
notification for examined patient is sent to the MPPS Server.
・ When gets the next patient
・ When press End Exam key
End
Exam
[A] When gets the next patient

1 Click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu. The Patient List dialog shown in Fig.
3.6-5 is displayed.
2 Select the desired patient on this dialog and click on [OK] button (1). The examination
end notification is sent to the MPPS Server.
(Simultaneously when the examination start signal described in [ I ] is sent.)
[B] When press End Exam key End

Exam
When press End Exam key End

Exam , the examination end notification for current patient is
also sent.
(1) (2)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3-20 Q1E-EZ0630
[III] Examination discontinuation notification
1 Click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu. The Patient List dialog shown in Fig. 3.6-5 is
displayed.
2 Click on [DISCONTINUE] button (2). The examination discontinuation notification is sent
to the MPPS Server.
3.6.3 Mobile function

This function is to save a patient list obtained from a WorkList server in a hard disk and
utilize the WorkList function in offline.
3.6.3.1 Set up
Press Patient key . Fig. 3.6-6 Patient Menu dialog is displayed.
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-6 Patient Menu dialog
Click [Mobile] button in Patient Menu dialog. Fig. 3.6-7 Mobile dialog is displayed. When
you want to utilize the WorkList function in offline after saving the list in the hard disk,
make a set up following the procedure described in "[I] When a WorkList function is used
offline".
(1) (3)
(2)
(4) (5)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6-7 Mobile dialog
3-21 Q1E-EZ0630
[ I ] When a WorkL
orkList function is used offline
1 Select [Offline] noted as (1) in the above figure.
2 Confirm that LAN cable is connected and click (3)[Update List] button. Fig. 3.6-8
Patient List dialog is displayed.
3 After confirming got data, click (6)[Close] button.
4 Click (4)[OK] button.
[II] When a WorkL

orkList function is used online
1 Confirm that LAN cable is connected and select (2)[Online].
[III] When Patient list in a hard disk is updated

1 Confirm that LAN cable is connected and click (3)[Update List] button. Fig. 3.6-8
Patient List dialog is displayed.
2 After confirming got data, click (6)[Close] button in Patient List dialog.
(6)
Fig.
Fig. 3.6-
3.6.3.2 How to use

Refer to the Instruction Manual for "3.6.2 Using Modality WorkList".
Caution: A MPPS function cannot be used offline. When accessing a MPPS function after
use offline at a MPPS server, the error of #0601~#0713 may occur. At this time,
Patient List saved at the hard disk is deleted.
Note: In case the WorkList function is used in offline, Searching key in Fig. 3.6-1 Set up
Modality WorkList dialog is effective when the list is updated. Even if the set up
of Searching key is changed, it is not effective when [New Patient] button is
clicked.
3-22 Q1E-EZ0630
3.7 Temporary save at the time of a transferring / printing error
When an error occurs at the time of transferring or printing, a image is saved temporarily at
a hard disk.
When an error occurs at the time of transferring and printing, the message of Fig.3.7-1 is
displayed and an image is saved temporarily to a hard disk.
Fig.3.7-
Fig.3.7-1 Saved temporarily message
An image is temporarily saved at a hard disk until it clicks the [New Patient] button by
Patient Menu, or it presses END Exam key, even when "Every image (film)" is chosen by
Timing of Transfer of Set Up details of filing dialog.
Since it can save at a hard disk exceeding the number of sheets of one paper, when saved
images are 7 and image numbers to be printed out in one paper is 6, a dialog is
displayed.
Please press an END Exam key after solving the problem of transferring / printing.
Note: There is a limit in the domain saved temporarily in a hard disk. If the message of
Fig.3.7-1 is displayed, please interrupt transferring/printing and solve the problem of
an error of transferring/printing. In the case of transferring/printing without solving
the problem of an error of transferring/printing, when the domain saved temporarily
in a hard disk remains and it is set to 500MB, the message of Fig.3.7-2 is displayed.
Moreover, when the domain saved temporarily in a hard disk is lost, the message of
Fig.3.7-3 is displayed and transmission/printing becomes impossible.
Fig.3.7-
Fig.3.7-2 Limit capacity of Hard disk message
Fig.3.7-
Fig.3.7-3 No availability of a hard disk message
3-23 Q1E-EZ0630
3.8 Detailed setup of DICOM communication
A setup of the timeout at the time of DICOM communication, PDU size, etc. is possible.
click the [Details of DICOM] button of this dialog. Set Up details of DICOM dialog starts.
Please change a setup of [1] - [6] to change according to Table 3.8-1.
Having completed setup, check the setup information then click the [OK] button.
Please check the contents of a setting and click the [OK] button, after setting up.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Fig.3.8-
Fig.3.8-1 Set up details of DICOM dialog
Table 3.8-
3.8-1 Setup Data
No. Item Setting
(1) Setup of response of an The timeout of the association at the time of a
association DICOM communication start is set up. This setting
value is applied at the time of an association with
all servers, such as a DICOM server and a DICOM
printer.
(2) Setup of DICOM Server response The response waiting time from a DICOM server is
set up after association establishment.
(3) Setup of WorkList Server The response waiting time from a WorkList server
response is set up after association establishment.
(4) Setup of MPPS Server response The response waiting time from a MPPS server is
set up after association establishment.
(5) Setup of max size of 4k, 8k, 16k, and 28kB can be chosen. Transmission
PDU(Protocol Data Units) speed may improve by setting up the same value as
the maximum PDU size by the side of a server.
(6) Setup of work buffer size 4k, 8k, 16k, and 28kB can be chosen. Transmission
speed may improve by setting up the same value as
the work buffer size by the side of a server.
3-24 Q1E-EZ0630
Section 4 Troubleshooting
This section describes the solution to be taken for any trouble occurred while the DICOM Software
is used.
(1) When communicating with the DICOM Server, the error message shown in Fig. 4.1 is
displayed.
Error code
Fig. 4.1 Error Message
Cause:
Cause Any of the following cases is found.
1 The network connection is not correctly made.
2 A setting for the DICOM Server is not correctly made.
3 Settings for the ultrasound device are not correctly made.
4 SCU name is not correct.
5 The server is not powered up.
6 No spare capacity in DICOM server is reserved.
Corrective action
action: Click on OK button and follow the next corrective operation.
・ Connect the network correctly.

・ Correctly set the DICOM setup data on the DICOM Server.
・ Correctly set DICOM setup data (AE name, IP address and port No.) on the ultrasound
device
・ Correctly set SCU name.
In the case of error codes #0001 ~ #0103

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM Server.
・ Make a spare capacity in DICOM server.

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM Printer.
・ When the Setup File is modified, check again if the modified content is correct.

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM WorkList Server.

・ Turn on the power to the DICOM MPPS Server.
In the case of error codes #0014

・ Restart-up the device.
If the cause of the trouble does not correspond to any of the above cases, contact Hitachi or our
authorized service representative with the displayed error code.
4-1 29 Q1E-EZ0630
(2) When communicating with the DICOM Server, the message shown in Fig. 4.2 is displayed.
Error Code
[#0104 ~ #0106]
Fig. 4.2 Warning Message
Cause: In the case DICOM text information discords with the server at DICOM Transfer start-up.
Corrective action:
action Click the [OK] button. Inform the error code to the service person of Hitachi
Medical Corporation or its agent.
(3) Image Transfer to the DICOM printer has been carried out but printing does not take place.
Cause: The transfer destination of the B/W images and the color images may be incorrect.
Corrective action
action: Check that the transfer destination is correct and then transfer again.
(4) When acquiring the patient information from DICOM WorkList server,
server, it requires time more
than 40 seconds.
Cause: The network setting of ultrasound device does not match with the network environment
(for example, setting of DNS or WINS Server) which is currently used.
Corrective action:
action Contact with Hitachi’s service staff.
(5) The following message was displayed in DICOM Set up dialog.
Fig. 4.3 message
Cause: A case where AE name of item to be registered by DICOM Set up dialog is the same AE
name existing.
Corrective action:
action Click [OK] button and change the name of AE and push again [Register] button.
(6) The following message was displayed

displayed at the time of transferring start.
start.
Fig. 4.4 message
Cause: It was going to carry out DICOM communication, without registering a SCU name.
Corrective action:
action SCU name is required. After clicking [OK] button set the SCU name in
DICOM set up dialog and transfer again.
4-2 Q1E-EZ0630
(7) The following message was displayed at the time of transferring start.
start.
Fig. 4.5 message
Cause: It was going to carry out DICOM communication, without inputting Patient ID.
Corrective action:
action Patient ID is required. After clicking [OK] button press Patient key and input
Patient ID.
(8) The following message was displayed at the time of click [Image Print] button.
Fig. 4.6 message
Cause: Select images are BMP format and no BMP formats, and it was going to print to the
DICOM printer.
Corrective action:
action Please click the [OK] button, if only the image of a BMP format may be printed.
Please click [Cancel] button, when you cancel printing.
(9) The following message was displayed at the time of click [Image Print] button.
Fig. 4.7 message
Cause: Select images are no BMP formats, and it was going to print to the DICOM printer.
Corrective action
action: Please click [OK] button. A selection images are not printed.
(10) The following error message was displayed at the time of DICOM Work
orkList server
communication.
Fig. 4.8 Error message for get patient data
Cause: When Patient data that is in agreement with Search key is 1,000 or more.
Corrective action:
action Please click [Cancel] button. Patient Data to 1,000 is got.
In addition, it takes about 30 seconds to get Patient Data of 1,000.
4-3 Q1E-EZ0630
(11) At
At the time of searching in Patient List dialog,
dialog, tthe
he following error message was displayed.
displayed.
Fig. 4.9 The error message at the time of searching
Cause: When there is no Patient Data that is in match with a keyword.
Corrective action
action: Please click [OK] button. Please input a keyword again and start searching.
(12) The following message was displayed at the time of transferring or printing.
Fig.4-
Fig.4-10 Saved temporarily message
Cause: When an error occurs during transferring or printing.
Corrective action: A transferring image or a printing image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
Please solve the problem of an error of transferring/printing, and press the END Exam key,
or click the [New Patient] button by Patient Menu.
Fig.4-
Fig.4-11 Limit capacity of Hard disk message
Cause: When the empty domain in the hard disk saved temporarily is set to 500MB.
Corrective
Corrective action: Please once interrupt transferring/printing, solve the problem of an error of
transferring/printing, and transferring /print the image saved temporarily in a hard disk.
4-4 Q1E-EZ0630
printing.
Fig.4-
Fig.4-12 No availability of a hard disk message
Cause: When the empty domain saved temporarily in a hard disk is lost.
Corrective action: Please once interrupt transferring/printing, solve the problem of an error of
transferring/printing, and transferring /print the image saved temporarily in a hard disk.
(15) It changed into the state where the screen of ultrasound equipment stopped during option
starting.
Cause: When a transferring error occurs during option starting, an error message is not displayed
on the front.
Corrective action: please carry out the following operations according to an option, and escape from
an error message with the [OK] button.
3D Display Software (EZU-3D4, EZU-3D2S)
:Press ENTER key.
WideView Software (EZU-WS4)
:Press Alt key.
4-5 Q1E-EZ0630
Section 5 Specifications
(1) Functions
[EZU-
[EZU-FC7]
Transfer to a DICOM server using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
Transfer to the FD and CD-R/RW using DICOM 3.0 standard possible.
Transfer to the DICOM server is possible at DICOM JPEG (Baseline).
When the optionally MO Drive unit is loading, transfer to the MO using DICOM 3.0 standard
possible.
[EZU-
[EZU-FC7P]
Print Service Class
Print of multiple images on one sheet of film
Simultaneous Output to DICOM printer and DICOM Server
Print to DICOM printer of Hard Disk images as well as of images transferred to CD-R/RW and
so on.
Any number of Print of the same image
Printout of B/W images to a B/W printer and color images to a color printer
[EZU-
[EZU-FC7W]
Patient data can be gotten from the DICOM WorkList server.
The examination start and end notifications can be sent to the DICOM MPPS Server.
Patient data can be gotten with the examination date or date within before-and-after 3 days
including the examination date.
Patient data can be also gotten with the patient ID.
(2) Setting application title (AE name)

- Server is to be designated by the service class user.
- Any DICOM port No. can be set (default 104).
(3) DICOM image transfer format

- B/W : MONOCHROME2
- Color: RGB, YBR_FULL_422
(4) DICOM 3.0 compatibility

For compatibility with DICOM3.0, refer to "Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement".
5-1 34 Q1E-EZ0630
Appendix A: DICOM Conformance Statement
A1 Introduction
A1.1 Purpose of This Document
This document is DICOM Conformance Statement for software EZU-FC7, EZU-FC7P and
EZU-FC7W.
EZU-FC7 software is a service class user (SCU) for the transferring of DICOM images to a
remote DICOM Service class provider (SCP). EZU-FC7 software can store image on the
FD,CD-R/RW and MO.
EZU-FC7P software can be a service class user (SCU) for the printing of DICOM Images to a
remote DICOM SCP.
EZU-FC7W software can be a service class user (SCU) for the Modality WorkList and
Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS).
A-1 35 Q1E-EZ0630
A2 Implementation Model
The EZU-FC7 software can store the images to the DICOM server (SCP). EZU-FC7 software
can store image on the FD,CD-R/RW and MO.
EZU-FC7P software can print the image on the DICOM printer (PRINT SCP).
The EZU-FC7W software can query Modality WorkList Server and Modality Performed
Procedure Step (MPPS) Server.
A2.1 Application Data Flow Diagram

DICOM 3.0 standard format Application Entity (AE) flow is following.
EZU-FC7
Images
DICOM Images stored
store
Storage SCU on Remote
System
Image EZU-FC7P
Remote
print DICOM
basic print
Print SCU
EZU-FC7W
User Remote
Modality
Query Modality
WorkList SCU
WorkList
EZU-FC7W
Remote
User Modality Performed
Modality Performed
Query Procedure Step
Procedure Step
SCU
DICOM Standard Interface

SCP
Images
store to
media EZU-FC7 FSC
CD-R/RW,
DICOM media
FSU FD or MO
Storage FSC, FSU
Images
delete in
media
Fig. A2.1-
A2.1-1 Application Data Flow Diagram
A-2 Q1E-EZ0630
A3 Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications
A3.1 Storage AE specification

The EZU-FC7 software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Storage SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.1
A3.1--1 Storage SOP Class
SOP Class SOP Class UID
Verification SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.1.1
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6
Ultrasound Image storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
A3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies
A3.1.1.1 General
Maximum PDU size offered : Initial value 16,384 bytes (The change to 4KB, 8KB,
16KB and 28KB is possible at a set up.)
Minimum PDU size accepted : 1,024 bytes
Note: Must be 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K or 16K or > 16K bytes.
A3.1.1.2 Number of associations

The number of simultaneous associations : 1
A3.1.1.3 A
Asynchronous
synchronous Nature
Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
A3.1.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
The EZU-FC7 software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.
Implementation class UID : 2.16.840.1.113669.2.931128
Implementation version name : MergeCOM3_242
Note: MergeCOM3 is the trademark of Merge Technology Inc., U.S.A.
This software uses libraries of Merge Technology Inc. and includes the license to
obtain the right to use it. For detail, refer to the Internet address:
http://www.merge.com.
A-3 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.1.2 Association initiation by Real-
Real-World Activity
Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in Real-World
Activity.
A3.1.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity
A3.1.2.1.1 Associated Real-

Real-World Activity
In Real-World Activity, an association is started at the time of the following operation.

- At the time of press S-WRITE key or M-WRITE key
- At the time of start to transfer from Transfer dialog
A3.1.2.1.2 Propos
Proposed
ed Presentation Contexts
Presentation Contexts is the composition shown in the following table.
Table A3.1-
3.1-2 Presentation Context
Presentation Context Table
Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Role Extended
Name UID Name List UID List Negotiation
Verification SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.1.1 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Little Endian Syntax
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
Storage (Retired)
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
Storage (New)
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
(Retired)
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
(New)
Table A3.1
A3.1--3 Transfer Syntax
Name List UID List
DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian Syntax 1.2.840.10008.1.2
JPEG Baseline(Process 1): 1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.50
Default Transfer Syntax for Lossy JPEG 8 Bit Image Compression
A-4 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.1.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Table A3.1
A3.1--4 Image Tag Elements
Field Name Tag Group Length Contents
Group Length 0002 0000 4
File Meta Information Version 0002 0001 2 0001
Media Storage SOP Class UID 0002 0002 28 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 for single
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 for multi
Media Storage SOP Instance 0002 0003 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.12.1106715.19961
UID 209.233045.1
Transfer Syntax UID 0002 0010 18 1.2.840.10008.1.2 for VR Little Endian Syntax
1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.50 for JPEG Baseline
Implementation Class UID 0002 0012 24 2.16.840.1.113669.2.931128
Implementation Version Name 0002 0013 16 MergeCOM3_232
Source Application Entity Title 0002 0016 ex. US1
0008 Group length 0008 0000 4
Specific Character Set 0008 0005 ex. ISO IR100
Instance Creation Date 0008 0012 8 yyyymmdd
Instance Creation Time 0008 0013 6 hhmmss
Instance Creation Date 0008 0014 26 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14
SOP Class UID 0008 0016 26 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1 for single new
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 for single retired
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1 for multi new
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 for multi retired
SOP Instance UID 0008 0018 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.
yyyymmdd.1hhmmss.i
Study Date 0008 0020 8 yyyymmdd
Series Date 0008 0021 8 yyyymmdd
Image Date 0008 0023 8 yyyymmdd
Study Time 0008 0030 6 hhmmss
Series Time 0008 0031 6 hhmmss
Image Time 0008 0033 6 hhmmss
Accession Number 0008 0050 0 ex. #1111111
Modality 0008 0060 2 US
Manufacture 0008 0070 28 US MANUFACTURE
Institution Name 0008 0080 30 ex. US HP.
Referring Physician's Name 0008 0090 0 None
Study Discription 0008 1030 0 none
Operator's Name 0008 1070
Admitting Diagnoses Description 0008 1080 0 none
Manufacture's Model Name 0008 1090 64 MODEL1
0010 Group length 0010 0000 4
Patient's Name 0010 0010 30
Patient ID 0010 0020 30
Patient's Birth date 0010 0030 8 or 0 yyyymmdd
Patient's Sex 0010 0040 2 M/F/O
Other patient IDs 0010 1000
Patient's Age 0010 1010 4 or 0 ex. 026Y
A-5 Q1E-EZ0630
Field Name Tag Group Length Contents
Patient's Size 0010 1020 6 or 0
Patient's Weight 0010 1030 8 or 0
Ethnic Group 0010 2160
Additional Patient History 0010 21B0
Pregnancy Status 0010 21C0
Last Menstrual Date 0010 21D0
Patient Comments 0010 4000
0018 Group length 0018 0000 4
Software version(s) 0018 1020 4 ex. V02-01
Frame time 0018 1063
Heart rate 0018 1088 8 or 0
Depth of Scan Field 0018 5050 4
0020 Group length 0020 0000 4
Study Instance UID 0020 000D 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.
yyyymmdd.1hhmmss
Series Instance UID 0020 000E 64 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.
yyyymmdd.1hhmmss.n
Study ID 0020 0010 0 yyyymmddn
Series number 0020 0011 2 1
Image Number 0020 0013 2 n
0028 Group length 0028 0000 4
Sample Per Pixel 0028 0002 2 1 for MONOCHROME2 3 for RGB,
YBR_FULL_422
Photometric Interpretation 0028 0004 12 or 4 MONOCHROME2/RGB / YBR_FULL_422
Planner Configuration 0028 0006 2 0
Number of Frames 0028 0008 2
Frame Increment Pointer 0028 0009 4 0002 C347
Rows 0028 0010 2 NTSC : 480, PAL : 574
Columns 0028 0011 2 NTSC : 640, PAL : 760
Bits Allocated 0028 0100 2 8
Bits Stored 0028 0101 2 8
High Bit 0028 0102 2 7
Pixel Representation 0028 0103 2 0
Windows Center 0028 1050 4 128
Windows Width 0028 1051 4 256
Lossy Image Compression 0028 2110 2 00 for No compression
01 for Compression
0040 Group length 0040 0000 4
Request Attributes Sequence 0040 0275
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040 0007
Description
Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040 0009
Requested Procedure ID 0040 1001
7fe0 Group length 7fe0 0000 4
Pixel Data 7fe0 0010 0
A-6 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.2 Media Storage AE specification
The EZU-FC7 software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Modality WorkList SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.2
A3.2--1 Media Storage SOP Class
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
DICOM Media Storage Directory 1.2.840.10008.1.3.10
A3.2.1.1 General

A3.2.1.3 Asynchronous Nature

Media Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC7 software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.
A-7 Q1E-EZ0630
Real-World Acti
Activity
vity
A3.2.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity
Media Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in

Real-World Activity.
A3.2.2.1.1
Real-World Activity

A3.2.2.1.2 Proposed Presentation Contexts

Table A3.2-
3.2-2 Presentation
Presentation Context
Abstract Syntax Transfer Syntax Extended
Role
Storage (New)
(New)
Table A3.2
A3.2--3 Transfer Syntax
Name List UID List
A3.2.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Please refer to Table A3.1-4.
A-8 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.3 Printing AE specification
The EZU-FC7P software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Printing SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.3
A3.3--1 Printing SOP Class
Basic Grayscale Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9
Basic Color Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18
A3.3.1.1 General


Printing AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC7P software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.
A-9 Q1E-EZ0630
Real-World Activity
Printing AE will open an association at the time of a printing start in Real-World Activity.
A3.3.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity

Real-World Activity

- At the time of press PRINT key
- At the time of click [Image Print] button in Filing dialog

Table A3.3
A3.3--2 Presentation Context
Role
Basic Gray Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Management Meta Little Endian Syntax
SOP Class
Basic Color Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SOP Class
This implies standard conformance for the following SOP Classes:

- Basic Film Session SOP Class
- Basic Film Box SOP Class
- Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
- Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
- Printer SOP Class
Each of there SOP classes is described in the paragraphs to follow.
A3.3.3 Basic Film Session SOP Class
Table A3.3
A3.3--3 Basic Film Session Presentation Module
Name Tag Range Description
Number of Copies (2000, 0010) 1 to many
Print Priority (2000, 0020) HIGH
MED
LOW
Medium Type (2000, 0030) PAPER
CLEAR FILM
BLUE FILM
Film Destination (2000, 0040) MAGAZINE
PROCESSOR
BIN_i : 'i' is number.
Film Session Label (2000, 0050) Used
Memory Allocation (2000, 0060) ---- Not used
A-10 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.3.4 Basic Film Box SOP Class
Table A3.3
A3.3--4 Basic Film Box Presentation
Presentation Module
Image Display Format (2010, 0010) STANDARD\1,1
STANDARD\1,2
STANDARD\2,1
STANDARD\2,2
STANDARD\2,3
STANDARD\3,2
STANDARD\3,3
STANDARD\3,4
STANDARD\4,3
STANDARD\4,4
Annotation Display Format ID (2010, 0030) ---- Not used
Film Orientation (2010, 0040) PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Film Size ID (2010, 0050) 8INX10IN
10INX12IN
10INX14IN
11INX14IN
14INX14IN
14INX17IN
24CMX24CM
24CMX30CM
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) REPLICATE Configurable
BILINEAR
CUBIC
NONE
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) CUBIC
Border Density (2010, 0100) BLACK
WHITE
i : 'i' is number.
Empty Image Density (2010, 0110) ---- Not used
Min Density (2010, 0120) Limited by printer
Max Density (2010, 0130) Limited by printer
Trim (2010, 0140) YES
NO
Configuration Information (2010, 0150) used
A-11 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.3.5 Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
Table A3.3
A3.3--5 Basic Grayscale Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules
Image Position (2020, 0010) 1-n
Preformatted Grayscale Image (2020, 0110) used
Sequence
>Samples Per Pixel (0028, 0002) 1
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) MONOCHROME2
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Pixel Aspect Ratio (0028, 0034) 1/1
>Bits Allocated (0028, 0100) 8
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
>Pixel Representation (0028, 0103) 0
>Pixel Data (7FE0, 0010) used
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- Not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- Not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- Not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- Not used
A3.3.6 Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
Table A3.3
A3.3--6 Basic Color Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules
Preformatted Color Image (2020, 0111) used
Sequence
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) RGB
>Planar Configuration (0028, 0006) 0
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- not used
A-12 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.3.7 Printer SOP Class
Table A3.3
A3.3--7 Printer Modules
Printer Status (2110, 0010) ---- not used
Printer Status Info (2110, 0020) ---- not used
Printer Name (2110, 0030) ---- not used
Manufacturer (0008, 0070) ---- not used
Manufacturer Model Name (0008, 1090) ---- not used
Device Serial Number (0018, 1000) ---- not used
Software Versions (0018, 1020) ---- not used
Calibration Date (0018, 1200) ---- not used
Calibration Time (0018, 1201) ---- not used
A-13 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.4 Modality WorkList AE specification
The EZU-FC7W software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Modality WorkList SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.4
A3.4--1 Modality WorkList SOP Class
Modality WorkList Information Model-FIND 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31
A3.4.1.1 General
The Modality WorkList will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC7W software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.


This software uses libraries of Merge Technology Inc. and includes the license to obtain
the right to use it. For detail, refer to the Internet address:

Real-world Activity
Modality WorkList AE will open an association at the time of New Patient execution start
in Real-World Activity.
A3.4.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity

Real-World Activity
- At the time of click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu
A-14 Q1E-EZ0630
Table A3.4-
Verification SOP 1.2.840.10008.1.1 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Class Little Endian Syntax
Modality WorkList 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4. DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Information Model-FIND 31 Little Endian Syntax
A3.4.3 AE Attributes
The EZU-FC7W software queries Modality WorkList Server to use following Matching
keys.
Table A3.4
A3.4--3 Inquiry Corresponding Keys
Description/Module Tag Key type Remarks
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0100 R
Sequence
Modality 0008, 0060 R "US"
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040, 0001 R AE title of Ultrasound scanner
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0002 R YYYYMMDD (today) or
Start Date YYYYMMDD-YYYYMMDD
(yesterday, today and tomorrow)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 R
The EZU-FC7W software can be accepted following tags except for tags that specifies
Remark "Not used".
Table A3.4-
A3.4-4 Response Attribute
SOP Common
Specific Character Set 0008,0005 1C
Scheduled Procedure Step
Scheduled Procedure Step 0040,0100 1
Sequence
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040,0001 1
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040,0002 1
Start Date
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040,0003 1
Time
Modality 0008, 0060 1 "US"
>Scheduled Performing 0040, 0006 2 Set to "Sonographer" on Patient
Physician's Name menu.
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0007 1C Set to "Exam.typ" on Patient menu.
Description
>Scheduled Station Name 0040, 0010 2
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0011 2
Location
A-15 Q1E-EZ0630
>Scheduled Action Item 0040, 0008 1C Not used
Code Sequence
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
>>Coding Scheme 0008, 0102 1C Not used
Designator
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 3 Not used
>Pre-Medication 0040, 0012 2C Not used
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0009 1
ID
>Requested Contrast Agent 0032, 1070 2C
>Scheduled Procedure step 0040, 0020 3 Not used
Status
Requested Procedure
Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 1
Requested Procedure 0032, 1060 1C
Description
Requested Procedure Code 0032, 1064 1C Not used
Sequence
>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 3 Not used
Study Instance UID 0020, 000D 1
Referenced Study Sequence 0008, 1110 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 1C Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 1C Not used
UID
Requested Procedure 0040, 1003 2 Not used
Priority
Patient Transport 0040, 1004 2 Not used
Arrangements
Name of Intended 0040, 1010 3
Recipients of Results
Imaging Service Request
Accession Number 0008, 0050 2 Set to "Accession#" on Patient menu
Requesting Physician 0032, 1032 2 Set to "Ordering Physician" on
Patient menu.
Referring Physician's Name 0008, 0090 2
Visit Identifi
Identification
cation
Admission ID 0038, 0010 2 Not used
Visit Status
Current Patient Location 0038, 0300 2 Not used
Referenced Patient 0008, 1120 2 Not used
Sequence
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 2 Not used
UID
Visit Admission
Admitting Diagnosis 0008, 1080 3
Description
A-16 Q1E-EZ0630
Patient Identification
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 1 Set to "Name" on Patient menu.
Patient ID 0010, 0020 1 Set to "ID" on Patient menu.
Other Patient IDs 0010, 1000 3
Patient Demographic
Patients Birth Date 0010, 0030 2 Set to "Birth Date" on Patient menu.
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 2 Set to "Sex" on Patient menu.
Patient's Weight 0010, 1030 2 Set to "Weight" on Patient menu.
Confidentiality constraint 0040, 3001 2 Not used
on patient data
Patient's Size 0010, 1020 3 Set to "Height" on Patient menu.
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160 3
Patient Comments 0010, 4000 3
Patient Medical
Patient State 0038, 0500 2 Not used
Pregnancy Status 0010, 21C0 2
Medical Alerts 0010, 2000 2 Not used
Contrast Allergies 0010, 2110 2 Not used
Special Needs 0038, 0050 2 Not used
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0 3
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0 3
The following tags are added to the image header while Modality WorkList function is used.
Table A3.4
A3.4--5 WorkList Attributes to the Standard DICOM Image Header
Description/Module Tag Remarks
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005
Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040, 0009
Scheduled Procedure Step Description 0040, 0007
Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001
Admitting Diagnosis Description 0008, 1080
Other Patient Ids 0010, 1000
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160
Patient Comments 0010, 4000
Pregnancy Status 0010, 21C0
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0
A-17 Q1E-EZ0630
A3.5 Modality Performed Procedure Step AE specification
The EZU-FC7W software provides the standard conformance for the following DICOM3.0
Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP classes as an SCU.
Table A3.5-
3.5-1 Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class
Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3
A3.5.1.1 General
Modality Performed Procedure Step AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The EZU-FC7W software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.

the right to use it. For detail, refer to the Internet address:

Real-World Activity
Modality Performed Procedure Step AE will open an association at the time of selecting of
patient or End Exam execution in Real-World Activity.
A3.5.2.1 Real-
Real-World Activity

Real-World Activity0

- At the time of select patient in Patient List
- At the time of press End Exam key
A-18 Q1E-EZ0630
Table A3.5-
Role
Modality Performed 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Procedure Step SOP Little Endian Syntax
Class
A3.5.3 AE Attributes
The EUB-FC7W software supports the following tags except for tags that specifies Remark
"Not used".
Table A3.5
A3.5--3 SOP Class N-N-Create and Final State Attribute
Attribute
of Modality Performed Procedure Step
Requirement Requirement
Description/Module Tag Type N-
N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
Specific Character Set 0008,0005 (1C) (1C)
Performed Procedure Step Relationship
Scheduled Step Attributes 0040, 0270 (1) (1)
Sequence
>Study Instance UID 0020, 000D Set data of (1)
Modality
WorkList.
(1)
>Referenced Study Sequence 0008, 1110 (2) (2) Not used
>>Referenced SOP Class 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C) Not used
UID
>>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C) Not used
UID
>Accession Number 0008, 0050 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
>Placer Order Number 0040, 2016 NULL (3)
/Imaging Service Request (3)
>Filler Order Number 0040, 2017 NULL (3)
/Imaging Service Request (3)
>Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
>Requested Procedure 0032, 1060 Set data of (2)
Description Modality
WorkList.(2)
A-19 Q1E-EZ0630
Description/Module Tag Type N-N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0009 Set data of (2)
ID Modality
WorkList.
(2)
WorkList.
(2)
>Scheduled Action Item Code 0040, 0008 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 (1C) (1C) Not used
>>Coding Scheme 0008, 0102 (1C) (1C) Not used
Designator
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 (3) (3) Not used
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 (3) (3) Not used
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Birth Date 0010, 0030 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Referenced Patient Sequence 0008, 1120 (2) (2) Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Referenced Instance UID 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C) Not used
Performed Procedure Step Information
Performed Procedure Step ID 0040, 0253 (1) (1)
Performed Station AE Title 0040, 0241 Set AE title of (1)
Ultrasound
scanner (1)
Performed Station Name 0040, 0242 NULL (2)
(2)
Performed Location 0040, 0243 NULL (2)
(2)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0244 Set Start date. (1)
Start Date (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0245 Set Start time. (1)
Start Time (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0252 "In "COMPLETED"
Status PROGRESS"(1) (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0254 NULL (2)
Description (2)
A-20 Q1E-EZ0630
Description/Module Tag Type N-
N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
Performed Procedure Type 0040, 0255 NULL (2)
Description (2)
Procedure Code Sequence 0008, 1032 (2) (2) Not used
>Code Value 0008, 0100 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 (3) (3) Not used
>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 (3) (3) Not used
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0250 (2) Set End date.
End Date (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0251 (2) Set End time.
End Time (1)
Image Acquisition Results
Modality 0008, 0060 "US" (1)
(1)
Study ID 0020, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Performed Action Item Code 0040, 0260 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
Performed Series Sequence 0040, 0340 (2) (1)
>Performing Physician's 0008, 1050 (2C) (2)
Name
>Protocol Name 0018, 1030 (1C) (1)
>Operator's Name 0008, 1070 (2C) (2)
>Series Instance UID 0020, 000E (1C) (1)
>Series Description 0008, 103E (2C) (2)
>Retrieve AE Title 0008, 0054 (2C) (2C)
>Referenced Image Sequence 0008, 1140 (2C) (2C)
>>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C)
>>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C)
UID
>Referenced Standalone SOP 0040, 0220 (2C) (2C)
Instance Sequence
>>Referenced SOP Class 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C)
UID
>>Referenced SOP Instance 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C)
UID
The requirement for the final state is that which applies at the time that the performed Procedure
Step Status (0040, 0252) is N-SET to a value of COMPLETED or DISCONTINUED. It is only
described if it is different from the SCP requirement for the N-CREATE.
A-21 Q1E-EZ0630
A4 Communication Profile
A4.1 TCP/IP Stack
This software interfaces TCP/IP stack of the computer system to be executed.
A5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations
A5.1 Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs
Not applicable
A5.2 Private Transfer Syntaxes
Not applicable
A6 Configuration
EZU-FC7, EZU-FC7P, EZU-FC7W software obtains configuration information from the
followings.
- AE name
- Host name
- Port No.
A7 Support of extended character sets

An extended character set is not supported.
A-22 Q1E-EZ0630
Index
A I
Application Data Flow Diagram .......A-2 Implementation Model ......................A-2
Application Entity Title (AE) Introduction ................................1-1, A-1
Specifications ..................................A-3
M
B
Media Storage AE specification ........A-7
Batch transferring for every patient Method of Use .................................... 3-1
......................................................... 3-7
Mobile function ................................ 3-21
C Modality Performed Procedure Step AE

specification ..................................A-18
Communication Profile....................A-22
Modality WorkList AE specification
Components ....................................... 1-1 .......................................................A-14
Configuration ...................................A-22 MPPS function................................. 3-20
D P
Detailed setup of DICOM Preparation ........................................ 3-1
communication.............................. 3-24
Printing ............................................ 3-11
DICOM Conformance Statement......A-1
Printing AE specification ..................A-9
DICOM Modality WorkList
Printing by the PRINT key ............. 3-11
function(Option EZU-FC7W) ....... 3-16
Printing from Filing dialog ............. 3-13
E Printing to the DICOM Printer(Option
EZU-FC7P) ..................................... 3-9
Extensions/Specializations/Privatizatio
ns ...................................................A-22 Private Transfer Syntaxes ..............A-22
EZU-Pi6.............................................. 1-1 Purpose of This Document ................A-1
Purpose of Use ................................... 1-1
F
S
Features ............................................. 1-1
Functional explanation...................... 2-1 Set up ........................................ 3-4, 3-21
Setting for DICOM communication .. 3-1
H Setting for Modality WorkList ........ 3-16
How to use........................................ 3-22 Setting for Print Format ................... 3-9
Simultaneous Transfer DICOM Server
and Printer ................................... 3-14
Index-1 57 Q1J-EZ0630
Specifications ..................................... 5-1
Standard Extended/Specialized/Private Transferring from Image Filing dialog
SOPs..............................................A-22 ......................................................... 3-7
Starting method of Transfer dialog... 3-6 Transferring of saving image ............ 3-6
Storage AE specification....................A-3 Transferring to DICOM Server ......... 3-4
Support of extended character sets Transferring to FD, CD-R/RW or MO
.......................................................A-22 ......................................................... 3-9
Troubleshooting ................................. 4-1
T
U
TCP/IP Stack....................................A-22
Temporary save at the time of a Using Modality WorkList ................ 3-17
transferring / printing error......... 3-23
W
Transferring by M-WRITE key ......... 3-4
Transferring by S-WRITE key .......... 3-4 WorkList function ............................ 3-17
E
Index-2 58 Q1J-EZ0630
WideView Software
Model EZU-WS4
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EZ0621-1
Copyright  Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003. All rights reserved.

Preface
We thank you for your procurement of Hitachi’s EZU-WS4 [Wide View Image Display Software].
In order to use the software safely and properly and as well to keep its function normally for long
time it is most important for you to understand the function, operation and maintenance fully.
We ask you, therefore, to read carefully this manual before starting the use of it.
(1) Q1E-EZ0621
Contents
Chapter 1 General................................
General ................................................................
................................................................................................
...................................................................
................................... 1-1
1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1-1
Chapter 2 Configuration ................................................................

.........................................................................................
......................................................... 2-1
2.1 Components..............................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................2-1
Chapter 3 Use key function ................................................................

....................................................................................
.................................................... 3-1
3.1 Use key for WideView..............................................................................................................3-1
Chapter 4 Start of scanner ................................................................

......................................................................................
...................................................... 4-1
4.1 Preparation ..............................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Starting method.......................................................................................................................4-1
Chapter 5 Operation ................................................................

...............................................................................................
............................................................... 5-1
5.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Select WideView image option ................................................................................................5-1
5.3 Display WideView function .....................................................................................................5-1
5.4 Image capture ..........................................................................................................................5-3
5.5 Wide View function ..................................................................................................................5-3
5.6 Image saving ............................................................................................................................5-4
5.7 Comment entry ........................................................................................................................5-4
5.8 Measurement ...........................................................................................................................5-5
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting................................
Troubleshooting ................................................................
......................................................................................
...................................................... 6-1
Chapter 7 Specifications ................................................................

.........................................................................................
......................................................... 7-1
7.1 Specifications of software........................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Compatible probe..............................................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 Operating conditions of scanner......................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 Specifications of display...................................................................................................7-1
Index ................................................................
................................................................................................
....................................................................................
....................................................Index
.................... Index-
Index-1
(2) Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 1 General
1.1 Outline
EZU-WS4 [Wide View Image Display Software] enables you to display the ultrasound image
of wide range regardless of the display width of probe by utilizing B-mode image captured
with the scanner.
1.2 Features
(1) Wide view image display of B-
B-mode image:
By displaying the wide view image it is possible to observe a long and large organ
exceeding the display width of probe.
(2) Use of Probe:

It is possible to display the wide view image just using a general linear or convex probe.
(3) Real time display:

As the wide view image is produced and displayed real time by moving the probe, no
waiting time is needed. So, it is easy to obtain images of full diagnostic information.
(4) Image filing function:

It is possible to record displayed images in BMP, TIFF or JPEG type.
1-1 3 Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 2 Configuration
2.1 Components
(1) Instruction manual…………………………………………1 set
2.2 Installation
There are two cases in installing.
(1) The installation has been done when the scanner is delivered from our factory.
(2) For existing system the installation should be done by engineer(s) of HMC or of our
authorized agent in your area.
< Notice >

Dismantle or modification of the system should not be conducted except field
engineer(s) trained by our specified procedures.
2-1 4 Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 3 Use key function
3.1 Use key for WideView
[6] [7] [8] [9] [2] [3] [4]
[1]
[12]
[20]
[5]
[14]
[10]
[15]
[13]
[16]
[11]
[17]
[22]
[18] [26] [23] [24] [25] [19] [21]
[1] DEPTH GAIN slide volume

It is to switch over the gain of every depth(8 steps) of B-mode image.
[2] Annotation key
It is to select abbreviations related to the diagnosis from the list and to display it.
[3] CHARACTER key
It is to switch over the mode to character entry mode in which characters can be entered
from character entry keyboard.
3-1 5 Q1E-EZ0621
[4] CHARACTER CLEAR key
All characters entered are cleared off.
[5] PROBE key
It is to select the probe which can be used with EZU-WS4.
[6] OPTION key
It is to select the function.
[7] IMAGE PROCESS key
It is to select the image processing function.
[8] MODE DEPENDED key
It is to select the function used very frequently among various kinds of function in MAIN
MENU.
[9] USER 1 key and USER 2 key
These are to select the function set in each key respectively.
[10] S-WRITE key
It is to record the wide view image on the screen into the storage of selecting destination.
[11] REPORT, MEASUREMENT, CLEAR, TRACE and CALIP keys
These are to start each measurement.
[12] REF FREQ toggle
It is to switch over the probe frequency and reference frequency respectively.
[13] US POWER toggle
It is to switch over the ultrasound output power from probe.
[14] ZOOM key
It is to put ON/OFF the image enlarging or reducing function of wide view image.
[15] DEPTH/MAG key
It is to switch over the magnifying ratio during the image enlarging or reducing function is
being used.
[16] ANGLE toggle
It is to switch over the target to be rotated by ANGLE encoder.
[17] ANGLE encoder
It is to rotate the wide view image and probe mark.
[18] POINTER key
It is to put on or off the display of pointer.
[19] B mode selection key and encoder
When a switch at the center of knob is pressed, the B-mode is selected. When an outside of
the knob is rotated, gain compensating values of B image are switched over.
3-2 Q1E-EZ0621
[20] CFM mode sele
selecting
cting key and encoder knob
When a switch at the center of knob is pressed, the CFM-mode is selected. When an
outside of the knob is rotated, gain compensating values of CFM image are switched over.
[21] Freeze key
It is to finish producing the wide view image.
[22] REC1 and REC2 keys
These are to execute the function registered.
[23] TRACKBALL
It is used for various kinds of functions in which two-dimensional manipulation is done.
[24] TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle
It is to switch over manually the using priority of trackball under a status where multiple
functions in which the trackball is used are operated.
[25] ENTER key
It works as [Setting or Entering] to such functions as measurement and dialogue.
[26] UNDO key
It works as [Cancellation] to the function like measurement and so on. Also it terminates
the screen saver.
3-3 Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 4 Start of scanner
4.1 Preparation
Regarding the start of scanner, probe connection, switching over the probe and other general
operation refer to the instruction manual for the scanner.
4.2 Starting method

method
Be noted that the WideView function does not work if 5 points as mentioned below are not
fulfilled.
(1) It is necessary that the probe compatible to the option is connected to the scanner and that
probe is selected.
(2) Release the freeze mode.
(3) Set to B-mode single image and do not upside-down the image.
(4) Finish the pan-zoom function.
(5) In case other optional functions (3D and so on) are being operated, finish them.
<Caution>
1) EZU-
EZU-WS4 can not be started at the urgent starting.
2) Before shutting down the equipment, EZU-
EZU-WS4 function should be finished.
4-1 8 Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 5 Operation
5.1 Outline
When EZU-WS4 software is combined with the scanner it becomes possible to display a wide view
image regardless of the display width of probe. It is realized by utilizing B-mode image captured
with the ultrasound scanner.
5.2 Select WideView image option
When OPTION key is pressed, selectable optional functions (base menu) are displayed. (Fig. 5.2-1)
Fig. 5.2-
5.2-1 Optional functions base menus
When is selected, a function menu related to WideView is displayed. (Fig. 5.2-2)

1
Fig. 5.2-
5.2-2 Function menus (At WideView pause)
Meantime, it is possible to return to Base menu by pressing F1 BaseMenu.
Also, it is possible to do an initial setting by Application menu so that the function menu (Fig.
5.2-2) is directly displayed when OPTION key is pressed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual,
Item 8.3.10 (3))
OFF
When 7 of the function menu is set to stop, the status turns to WideView
7 Rec, and the function menu shown in Fig. 5.2-2 changes to the one as shown in
Fig. 5.2-3.
ON
Fig. 5.2-
5.2-3 Function menus (At WideView Rec)
Note1: It becomes SCC:0, Density:1 and Focus:Single into the Wide View mode.
Note2: When EZU-WS4 is started from 3D mode, only 1 time of the beginning takes about 20
seconds by starting.
5.3 Display WideView function

In this software there are three image display modes to be used according to the work
situation. In each mode the selectable function is differen. Switching over of the mode is done
by in the function menu and by Freeze key.
7
Also, depending on the set condition REC

1 or REC
2 keys and the stop switch can be used.
(Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual.)
5-1 9 Q1E-EZ0621
a) PAUSE: Image capture waiting mode
･ In this mode an original image captured by
the scanner is displayed.
･ At the starting time the mode is always in
the waiting mode. Also, in case Freeze is
released in the image display mode (STOP)
the mode turns to the waiting mode.
･ In order to get a proper wide view image the
image should be depicted clearly up to deep
region within the display width as shown in
Fig.5.3-1.
･ In this mode besides the function menu it is
possible to select keys (1), (5), (12), (13), (15),
(19), (20) and (21).
Fig. 5.3-
5.3-1 Image in PAUSE
b) REC: Image capturing mode
･ In this mode the wide view image is produced
by moving the probe.
･ Image capturing is started by pressing 7
of the function menu in the image capture
waiting mode(PAUSE).
･ In case the image producing accuracy can not
be kept while producing the wide view image,
a status “REV” is displayed.
possible to select key (21).
Fig. 5.3-
5.3-2 REC image
c) STOP image display mode

･ In this mode the produced wide view image is
manipulated.
･ Rotating display, image saving, captured an
original image display and so on are done.
･ When below mentioned operations are perform
-ed, the status turns to this mode.
- Freeze ON
- During the image capturing mode (REC) of
7
function menu is operated.
possible to select keys (2)-(11), (14), (16), (17),
(21) and (23).
Fig. 5.3-
5.3-3 STOP image
5-2 Q1E-EZ0621
< Caution >
･ When the probe switch over key (5) is selected, WideView function is
enforcedly terminated in all modes.
REC REC
･ 1 and 2 keys (22) can be selected in all modes depending upon
the set conditions. (Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual, Item 7.9.)
7.9.)
5.4 Image capture

(1) Set the mode to the image capture waiting mode (PAUSE).
(2) Put the probe on the target part for examination and display the capture starting position.
(3) Start the capture with of function menu, etc.
7
(4) Move the probe slowly on the region you intend to display.
< Caution >

1. At first the moving direction of probe is automatically recognized. So, if
you start to produce the wide view image after you start to move the
probe, it is possible to display the wide view image smoothly.
difficultt to keep the producing accuracy of wide view image,
2. If it becomes difficul
a warning display “REV”
REV” blinks at lower right part of image. To avoid
this move the probe slowly.
3. When you move the probe, be careful not to shift it to short axis
direction.
(5) Wide view image production is finished when either of function menu is pressed or
the status turns to FreezeON. 7
< Caution >

If the probe is put away from the target region during the wide view image
production, the display will be rumpled. The probe, therefore, should be put
away from the target after the image production iiss finished.
(6) By releasing Freeze the wide view image display is cleared, and the mode returns to above said
PAUSE mode.
5.5 Wide View function

In STOP mode it is possible to change the display status of wide view image obtained by [5.4 Image
capture].
(1) Rotating display
It is possible to rotate the wide view image by utilizing Angle encoder.
If priority order of probe is given to the probe mark, switch over it by Angle toggle. (Refer to
the equipment Instruction Manual.)
(2) Image enlarging/reducing display

It is possible to display the wide view image in enlarged or reduced manner.
5-3 Q1E-EZ0621
ZOOM
When key is pressed, the mode turns to Enlarging/Reducing mode and the display
magnification ratio can be changed by toggle switch. (Refer to the equipment Instruction
DEPTH/MAG
Manual, Item 5.2.6.)
Also, it is possible to move the image up and down or right to left by the trackball.
ZOOM
When key is pressed again, this mode is finished.
(3) Cine memory display

It is possible to display the wide view image and original image simultaneously.
1) By pressing the function menu (toggle 3) the mode can be changed to the cine memory
mode so that the wide view image is displayed at left side and the original image is
displayed at right side on the monitor.
2) Yellow frame displayed on the wide view image indicates the position of the original image
within the wide view image.
By under mentioned operation it is possible to move the position of displayed image.
･ When the trackball is used, the position can be moved freely.
･ When the function menu (toggle 4) is pressed, the yellow frame moves automatically
from present position to the last position.
3) When the function menu (toggle 3) is pressed again, the mode returns to normal image
display mode.
(4) Change of body mark display position

In case the body mark is displayed overlapped with the wide image display, it is possible to
change its position by the function menu (toggle 2). (Refer to the scanner manual.)
5.6 Image saving

Wide view images can be saved in BMP,TIFF or JPEG type by using (S-WRITE) key. (Ref.
to the equipment Instruction Manual, Chapter 9)
5.7 Comment entry

On the wide view image it is possible to display characters by entering them from keyboard by
using Character key. (Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual, Item 6.1)
Also, by using Anno－
tation key it is possible to enter characters as annotation on the wide view
image. (Refer to the equipment Instruction Manual, Item 6.2)
5-4 Q1E-EZ0621
5.8 Measurement
It is possible to perform Caliper measurement and Trace measurement of the wide view image by
CALIP
using Caliper key and Trace TRACE
key.
All measurements except the histogram in B-mode among menus displayed by Meas key
MEAS MENU
.
1
can be applied to the wide view image. (Refer to the Instruction Manual, Chapter 11.)
< Caution >

- If the manipulation in reversed
reversed direction is during the wide view image
REV” mark is displayed. When this mark is appeared, it is
production, “REV”
impossible to keep the image producing accuracy and imposible to perform
the measurement.
- Measurement precision within error
1) Distance: 10%
2) Area: 20%
3) Volume: 30%
But upon error is increased to the lotate image and the position scrolled
image. There are possible to have large upon error for usage of condition,
operation and body of subject. As it has the reason, do not have to exam
for using only
only result of the measurement.
5-5 Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
In this chapter counter measures for the trouble occurred when the wide view image display
software is used are described.
- An error message is displayed when the WideView is started so that it iiss impossible
to start it normally.
Cause 1: Display setting on the work station is set to Medium[16bit] or to High[24bit].
Counter measure: Set the display setting to Highest[32bit].
- A message for confirmation is displayed.
Cause 1: This message is displayed when the memory area for wide view image or original
image is full.
Counter measure: Adjust the moving scope of probe.
6-1 14 Q1E-EZ0621
Chapter 7 Specifications
7.1 Specifications of software

7.1.1 Compatible probe
Linear and convex types
7.1.2 Operating conditions of scanner

B-mode single image
Pan-zooming
Other optional functions should be disabled.
FreezeOFF
7.1.3 Specifications of display
(1) Display mode:
Real time display of wide view image
(2) Display function:
Variable size (1 to 3 times, Auto-scaling)
Rotation of display
Cine memory display
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice for improving the equipment
performance.
7-1 15 Q1E-EZ0621
Index
C Operation ······················································5-1
Comment entry·············································5-4 Outline··················································· 1-1, 5-1
Compatible probe ·········································7-1 P
Components ··················································2-1 Preparation ···················································4-1
Configuration················································2-1 S
D Select WideView image option·····················5-1
Display WideView function··························5-1 Specifications ················································7-1
F Specifications of display·······························7-1
Features ························································1-1 Specifications of software·····························7-1
G Start of scanner ············································4-1
General··························································1-1 Starting method············································4-1
I T
Image capture···············································5-3 Troubleshooting ············································6-1
Image saving·················································5-4 U
Installation ···················································2-1 Use key for WideView ··································3-1
M Use key function ···········································3-1
Measurement················································5-5 W
O Wide View function·······································5-3
Operating conditions of scanner··················7-1
EUB-5500
Specifications
Step1 (Aug, 2003 Revised)

Rev1.0
HITACHI Medical Corporation

Copyright ©Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003 All right reserved.
1/16
1. General description
1.1 General
The EUB-5500 is a compact and multi-purpose ultrasound scanner provided with Doppler
and color flow mapping (CFM), and all functions, from the transmission of ultrasound beams to
image processing and post processing, are fully digitized and computerized. As a multi-purpose,
the EUB-5500 provides scan method as convex, linear and sector scanning
A dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging), new Hitachi original technology, improves
spatial and contrast resolution while reducing artifacts. EUB-5500 also offers various important
functions as Wide-view, 3D display, Omni-directional M-mode, Cine-memory, cardiac
measurement, Patient Data Management.
The EUB-5500 platform utilized a Windows XP based system, so it is easy to store the image
in built-in FDD, CD and HDD with various PC data format as BMP, TIFF, AVI, AVI
compression, JPEG.
1.2 Feature
(1) True Digital Architecture:
The beam former, which controls image quality, and all image processing in B, M, Doppler,
CFM, CFA are digitized. 12 bit A/D converter reproduces original wave form of reflected
signal accurately. It achieves over 177 dB system dynamic range.
(2) Improvement of resolution:
With the above True Digital Architecture and dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Imaging), new
Hitachi original technology, improve spatial/contrast resolution while reducing artifacts
substantially and realizes wider dynamic range.
(3) Improvement of image:
“Quadra Beam Processing” achieved by multi-beam and advanced image processing
technologies realize high frame rate and high density image.
(4) Variety function
a)Wide-view software (EZU-WS4)allows to displaying expansive views of the image data as a
single display according to the image changed by moving probe.
b) Omni-directional M-mode unit (EZU-OD2) allows to display M-mode image on any lines on
B-mode image, and it makes more accurate left ventricular volume measurement.
c) Network capability:
Image data can transfer to the Windows computer through network by installing Network
option (EZU-Pi6). Furthermore, image data can transfer to the DICOM server with DICOM 3.0
format by installing DICOM transfer option (EZU-FC7), and can print out to the DICOM
printer by installing DICOM image printing option (EZU-FC7P), and also can acquire patient
information from DICOM work-list server by installing DICOM work-list option
(EZU-FC7W).
d) 3D image display:
3D image can be displayed from 2D scan images by installing 3D function (untracked) unit
(EZU-3D4). Furthermore, more accurate 3D image can be displayed by using magnetic sensor
unit (EZU-3D2S).
(5) Windows XP-based system:
The Windows XP-based system, and standard superior image file features allow for a wide
variety of use as image capture and storage.
(6) User friendly operation panel:
Panel keys are arranged in consideration of frequency of use and the most suitable parameter of
observation is automatically set by each diagnostic application. And “User defined key” are
provided so that user freely defines how to use. These improve operability of system and speed
of examinations.
(7) Excellent design:
Smart body -500mm width- and 4-wheel swivel casters allow to move easily even in a narrow
space.
2/16
2. System Composition
2.1 Main System Composition
(1) Ultrasound Scanner Main Unit 1 set
- Ultrasound transmitting/receiving unit 1 set
- Digital scan converter unit 1 set
- Pulsed Doppler unit 1 set
- Color flow mapping unit 1 set
- Image storage and image file manager 1 set
- Tissue harmonic imaging function 1 set
- Power supply unit 1 set
- Compact disk driver 1 pc.
- Floppy disk driver 1 pc.
(2) Accessories 1 set
- Probe cable hanging arm 1 pc.
- Dust cover 1 pc.
- Acoustic jelly 2 pcs.
- Hexagon wrench 1 pc.
- Instruction manual 1 pc.
2.2 Options
(1) Probes
- 3.5MHz 10R Convex array probe EUP-C511
- Wideband(5-2) 40R Convex array probe EUP-C514
- 3.5MHz 40R Convex array probe EUP-C314G
- 5.0MHz 40R Convex array probe EUP-C524
- 7.5MHz Linear array probe EUP-L53

- 7.5MHz Linear array probe EUP-L53S
- Wideband(13-6) Linear array probe EUP-L54M
- Wideband(4-2) Phased array probe (steerable CW) EUP-S50

- Wideband(7-3) Phased array probe (steerable CW) EUP-S52
- 5.0MHz Multiplane transesophageal probe (steerable CW) EUP-ES52M
- 6.5MHz 10R Convex array Transvaginal probe EUP-V53W

- 8-4MHz(Convex)/8-4MHz(Convex) EUP-CC531
- 7.5MHz(Linear)/6.5MHz(10R Convex) EUP-U533
- 6.5MHz 10R Convex array Transrectal probe EUP-R53W

- 10-5MHz 270deg.display 190mm EUP-R54A-19
- 10-5MHz 270deg.display 330mm EUP-R54A-33
- Wideband(8-4) 10R Finger-top probe EUP-F531

- 7.5MHz 40R Laparoscopic probe EUP-oL334
- 7.5MHz Linear array Intraoperative probe EUP-o53T
- 5-2MHz 40R Convex array Biopsy probe EUP-B514
- Upper G.I. Fiberscope Convex FG-34UX/36UX/38UX

- Upper G.I. Videoscope Convex EG-3630U
- Upper G.I. Videoscope radial scanning EG-3630UR/3830UT
(sold by PENTAX)
- 2.5MHz Pencil CW probe EUP-TC3

3/16
(2) 15-inch non-interlace color monitor EZU-MT24-S1
(3) ECG unit EZU-EK25
(4) Steerable CW doppler unit EZU-ST5
(5) Pencil CW doppler unit EZU-CW4
(6) Omni-directional M-mode Software EZU-OD2
(7) SCSI interface EZU-Pi1
(8) Network interface EZU-Pi6
(9) DICOM transfer EZU-FC7
Required EZU-Pi6
(10) DICOM image printing EZU-FC7P
Required EZU-Pi6 and EZU-FC7
(11) DICOM work-list EZU-FC7W
Required EZU-Pi6 and EZU-FC7
(12) 3D function ( Untracked ) unit EZU-3D4
(13) Magnetic-sensor unit EZU-3D2S
Required EZU-3D4
(14) Wide view Software EZU-WS4
(15) Fujinon mini-probe interface unit EZU-MS6
(16) Probe hanger EZU-TH4
(17) Foot switch (for FREEZE) EZU-FS1
(18) Foot switch EZU-FS2
(19) VCR remote cable EZU-RO1
(20) MOD unit EZU-MO1
4/16
3. Ultrasound Transmitter / Reception
3.1 Connectable probes
(1) Convex type probes 2.0MHz to 10MHz
(2) Linear type probes 2.5MHz to 13MHz
(3) Phased array probes 2.0MHz to 7.5MHz
3.2 Probe Connection

(1)Standard Probes: 3 probes
3.3 Image examination modes

(1) Standard configuration B, B/B, B/M, M
(2) Doppler mode B/PW, PW, B/CW, CW
(3) CFM mode CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-M,
CFM-M, CFM-B/PW, CFM-B/CW
(4) Biplane probe B/B (Realtime biplane display)
(5) Tissue harmonic mode dTHI mode(max. 3 selections)
3.4 Gain adjustment

(1) Depth Gain Control(DGC) Selectable in 8 steps, 30dB variable
(Fixed depth/Variable selectable)
(2) B mode image gain correction 60 dB variable
(3) M mode image gain correction 60 dB variable
(4) Doppler gain correction 60 dB variable
(5) CFM gain correction 60 dB variable
3.5 Focus
(1) Transmitting focus Selectable in 8 steps
(2) Receiving focus Continuous dynamic focus (with variable aperture)
(3) Other 2-dimensional apodization
3.6 Beamformer
(1) Method Digital
(2) A/D converter 12 bits
(3) Process channel 192 channels
(4) System dynamic range Over 177dB
3.7 Frequency selection Max. 5 frequencies
3.8 Ultrasound power Selectable in 3 steps
3.9 B-mode image display Single image

Dual images (Two different probes can be displayed)
(Two different depth can be displayed)
3.10 Field of view

(1) Image depth range 2 to 24cm, 15steps（depend on probe）
(2) Vertical shift Available
(3) Selection during frozen Pan zoom, orientation (L/R, U/D),
and rotation by 90 deg.
(4) Pan/zoom Function Adjustable position and size, up to 8 times
5/16
3.11 Display angle (width) 6 selections
Maximum 270deg. in EUP-R54A series
Steering of view angle is available
360deg. in Fujinon probe
3.12 Frame rate

(1) EUP-C514 30 f/s (Angle:75 deg., Depth: 17cm)
(2) EUP-S50 66 f/s (Angle:90 deg., Depth: 17cm)
Max. 400 f/s (Angle:15 deg., Depth: 11cm)
3.13 Image orientation/rotation

(1)Orientation Up/down and right/left inversion in B-mode
Forward/reverse inversion in PW/CW-mode
(2)Rotation 90deg. steps in B-mode image
not available B-image at freeze B/* mode.
3.14 Presetting Possible to set application oriented probe selection

Editable to pre-defined applications
3.15 Image Processing

(1) Display range 45 - 80dB in 5 dB steps
(2) Enhancement 4 steps
(3) Scan correlation 8 steps including OFF
(4) AGC (auto gain control) 4 steps
(5) Gray map 8 steps
3.16 Post processing γ-correction, rejection, and saturation
3.17 Black/white inversion Black/white Inversion M or D-mode image independently
3.18 B color Available for B, M and Doppler images independently
3.19 M-mode image display

(1) Display method Servey
(2) Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10 s/screen
(3) Vertical shift Available
3.20 TV display Non-interlace

NTSC : 640 x 480
PAL : 800 x 600
3.21 Image memory 512x512x8bit (256 gray shades) for two image planes
3.22 Image display TV synchronous display
3.23 Character display

(1) Comments 46 characters x 13 lines at most large size Bold characters
4 kinds of character size can be selectable.
Upper case or lower case is selectable.
Movable after inputting character
4 kinds of styles are selectable.
(Normal/Bold/Italic/Italic bold)
(2) ID, Patient name ID is 15 characters at alphanumeric characters.
Patient name is 28 characters at alphanumeric characters.
6/16
(3) Hospital name 30 characters or more at alphanumeric characters
(4) Automatic displayed items Date and time(year, month, day, hour, minute and second
Lap time is available during frozen)
Operating frequency, gain compensation value
Acoustic output level, post processing setting
Dynamic range (DYN), enhancement (ENH)
Scan correlation (SCC), R-delay time
Heart rate (HR), measurement results
Doppler parameters, focus point indications
Depth range
3.24 Body Mark Display position is movable

(1)Abdominal region 10 types
(2)Cardiac region 10 types
(3)Vascular region 7 types
(4)Obstetric/Gynecology region 22 types
(5)Urology region 10 types
(6)Thyroid/Breast region 6 types
(7)Other regions 8 types
3.25 Measurement functions

(1) B-Mode
(a) Distance
(b) Area and circumference Trace method, ellipse method
(c) Volume Area-length method, ellipse method, and biplane method
(d) Ratio Ratio-distance, ratio-area
(e) Histogram 2 histograms can be displayed
(f) Cardiac function SV (Stroke Volume), CO (Cardiac Output), and
EF (Ejection Fraction) measurements
(g) Angle measurement Bony roof angle and cartilage roof angle
(h) Obstetric measurement Calculation of gestational age and estimated delivery date
Calculation of fetal body weight
(i) Urology measurement Sliced volume measurement
(2) M-mode
(a) Distance and time
(b) Velocity (Slope)
(c) Ratio Ratio-distance, Ratio-time
(d) Heart rate (HR)
(e) Schema-guided measurement
LV (Left Ventricular), MV (Mitral Valve)
AO (Aortic Valve), TV (Tricuspid Valve), and
PV (Pulmonary Valve) measurements
(3) Patient report Measurement results of measurement can be displayed in
tabular forms.
(4) Playback measurement Available for VCR and digital image archive
(5) User defined measurement Available to create unique calculation package
(6) OB table Possible to create new table and edit table
Import or export table to the external media
3.26 Storage to Hard disk

(1) Number of images Max. 300 images (keeping stored images in power-off)
(2) Write memory Single frame storage
(3) Read memory Single frame retrieval
(4) Display format for retrieval 1, 4, 9 and 16 images
(5) Transfer Transferable to the external media
7/16
3.27 External devices
(1) Floppy disk drive 1.44MB
(2) Compact disk drive
3.28 Preset operation function

(1) possible registration item A body mark and a comment
(2) The number of steps A maximum of 32 step
(3) The number of operations A maximum of 8
8/16
4. Special functions
4.1 Doppler function
4.1.1 Specifications
(1) Display mode B/D, D
PW: Interval mode, B-freeze mode, B-real mode
Side-by-side/Up and down display selectable
(Switchable in frozen)
(2) Analysis FFT (Max. 128 points)
64/128 points selectable
(3) Pulse repetition frequency (PRF) 1k, 1.5k, 2k, 2.5k, 3k, 3.5k, 4k, 4.5k, 5k, 6k, 8k, 10k, 12k,
16k, 20kHz
15 steps
(4) Reference frequency (REF) 2 frequencies
(5) Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200,
1600 Hz
(6) Baseline shift Available
(7) Detectable depth 1 to 24 cm
(8) Sample length 0.5 to 5.0 mm (0.5 mm step)
5.0 to 15.0 mm (1.0 mm step)
(9) Measurement
(a) Realtime Velocity
(b) Frozen Velocity, acceleration, index for stenosis,
Pressure gradient, flow volume, time average velocity,
Ratio-time, ratio-velocity, average velocity,
PHT (Pressure Half Time), HR (Heart Rate),
TVI (Time Velocity Integral)
Auto trace is available
(10) Audio input/output 2 ch speaker mounted (for forward/reverse flow)
VCR audio input/output (for forward/reverse flow)
(11) Maximum detectable velocity PW doppler: ±3.8 m/s (REF=2.0MHz, PRF=20kHz)
(12) B/D simultaneous Up to 12 kHz
(13) Display Servey
(14) Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
(15) Angle correction Available (Realtime and frozen)
(16) FFT-γ 8 selections
9/16
4.2 Color Flow Mapping function
(1) Display mode CFM-B, CFM-B/CFM-B, CGM-M, CFM-B/CFM-M
CFM-B/D: B-freeze mode, ALT mode
Dual CFM available (different color maps including B/W)
(2) CFM-B
(a) Color box angle Continuously selectable in B-mode image
(b) Color box depth Continuously selectable in B-mode image
select ON/OFF for color box area
(c) Color box Box type/sector type selectable
(d) Oblique scan Available
0, ±10, ±15, ±20deg. at 7.5MHz or 10MHz linear probes
(3) CFM-M
(a) Display method Servey
(b) Sweep speed 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
(4) Color display
(a) Color map Velocity/variance, velocity, intensity, variance
CFA (Color Flow Angiography), directional CFA,
Total 19 maps
Changeable in realtime and frozen
(b) Color invert Available in realtime and frozen
(5) Pulse repetition frequency (PRF) 120Hz to 20kHz
(6) Persistence 8 steps at only freeze off.
(7) Motion artifact suppression OFF + 3 steps
(8) Line density 4 steps
(9) Color Preference Below 2 modes selectable
(a) Auto
Color or B-image, which has brighter signal is
displayed
(b) Manual (16 steps selectable)
Color image is displayed where B image intensity is
less than preference bar level on the gray scale.
(10) Peak hold Overlay color data in realtime
Refresh time : 1s, 2s, 4s, 8s, Infinite
(11) Velocity tagging Available
(12) Color filter 3 steps
(13) Interleave Max. 8 lines (depends on PRF)
4.3 Digital Image filing/Patient Data Manager Function

(1) Image filing method Digital
(2) Filing mode Single frame transfer, multi frame transfer
(3) Multi frame transfer mode Manual or auto transfer selectable
(a) Manual Selected frames in cine memory
(b) Auto All or last 10, 20, 30, ….. , 100 by 10 frames
R-R frames if ECG waveform is displayed
(4) Image format (BMP)Bitmap, TIFF, AVI, AVI Compression, JPEG,
DICOM(option) , DICOM Compression(option)
(5) TIFF compression None, Pack bits
(6) Multi display in review 1, 4, 9 or 16 images
(7) Review mode Single frame : Frame by frame,
Multi frames : Continuous review, variable speed review
(8) Review speed -1/1,-1/2,-1/4,-1/8,0,1/8,1/4,1/2,1/1
(9) Divided frame display Available with multi frame review
10/16
(10) Range specification of Review Available
(11) Playback measurement Available
(However, D-Profile, CFM-Velo, Histogram, %Window,
Systolic Window, and Auto Trace are unavailable)
(12) Disk search Available with log information
(13) Comparison review Available with merge folder on hard disk
(14) Timing of Transfer Every image / Every patient
4.4 PC Printing
4.4.1 Composition Driver of PC printer
4.4.2 Available printer PC printer
(1) Method of connection Printer port/ ethernet network
(2) Number of images in a film Max.9 images
Landscape :1x1,2x2,3x3
Portrait :1x2,2x3
(3) Start of printing Press print key
Image film control menu
(4) Set up film format Film size, image display format,
Film orientation, number of copies,
Film destination
(5) Other set up Printer Properties(depending on printer driver)
EZU-Pi6 is required to use the network printer.
4.5 Cine Memory Function

4.5.1 Compositions CINE 1 pc
4.5.2 Features
(1) Recordable images Max. 4,250 images (10R, 14°, B-mode)
(2) Recording mode Cine memory, Long M mode
Cine/Long M mode independent recording available
(1:0, 1:3, 3:1, or 0:1 is selectable)
Split recording available in dual B-mode
(3) Review mode Continuous review, variable review speed
Frame forward/reverse with trackball
Automatic R-R review (ECG unit required)
Cine timing bar is available on ECG waveform
(4) Long M mode Standard : 148s (sweep speed:2.5s/screen)
Maximum : 590s (sweep speed:10s/screen)
Continuous review, Trackball search
(5) Review speed Cine memory : ±1/1, ±1/2, ±1/4, ±1/8
Long M mode : 1.25s, 2.5s
11/16
5. Options
5.1 Color monitor (EZU-MT24-S1)
5.1.1 Features
(1) Display mode 15 inches, non-interlace mode
(2) Tilt Up:15deg./down:10deg., right/left:90deg.
(3) Configuration Color monitor 1 pc
Cables 1 set
(4) Specifications Input voltage AC 100V 50/60Hz
Power consumption Max. 85VA
Image signal 0.7Vpp (RGB)
Impedance 75Ω
Synchronous signal TTL (HD, VD)
5.2 ECG Synchronization Unit (EZU-EK25)

5.2.1 Features
(1) Display signal ECG
(2) Display method Servey
(3) ECG sync 2 phases independent triggering
Vertical bar on ECG waveform for ECG trigger timing
Delay time from R-wave : 0.00 to 2.55s
(4) Display control Position control : Vertical shift
Gain control
ECG automatic inst
Sweep speed : 4 steps (1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s)
5.3 Steerable CW Doppler Unit (EZU-ST5)

5.3.1 Compositions CWREC 1 pc
5.3.2 Features
(1) Display mode CW, B/CW (B freeze), CFM-B/CW (B freeze)
(2) Reference frequency Probe Reference freq.
Phased array probe EUP-S50 2.0MHz
EUP-S52,ES52M 3.5MHz
Pencil CW probe EUP-TC3 2.5MHz
(3) FFT PRF 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 35, 50kHz
12 steps
(4) Analysis FFT method
Hi-response / hi-resolution selectable
(6) Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200,
1600 Hz
(7) Transmit focus 8 steps (automatic setting for the CW cursor)
(9) Angle correction Available (realtime and frozen)
note: EZU-ST5 is included the function of EZU-CW4.
5.4 Pencil CW Doppler Unit (EZU-CW4)

5.4.1 Compositions CWREC 1 pc
5.4.2 Features
(1) Display mode CW
(2) Reference frequency Probe Reference freq.
EUP-TC3 2.5MHz
12/16
(3) FFT PRF 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 35, 50kHz
12 steps
(4) Analysis FFT method
Hi-response / hi-resolution selectable
(6) Wall filter 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200,
1600 Hz
5.5 Omni-directional M-mode Software (EZU-OD2)

5.5.1 Features
(1) Applicable probes Phased array probes
Convex array probes :
EUP-C511, C514, C516, C524
Linear array probes :
EUP-L54M, L53S
(2) Display mode
Real-time ODM mode B (Real)/ODM
Cine ODM mode B (Cine)/ODM
Moving image display: approx.10.0s.
(Angle: 2, Line density: 1, approx. FR: 216)
Review speed: 1: 1
Long ODM mode ODM
Memory recording: Max. 194 s.
(Record mode: 0:1)
(3) Setting
Beam line direction one direction
Control of beam line center Common center / Independent control of centers
Rotation 0 to 359°(1°step)
Movement of center position By one pixel step
Sweep method Servey
Sweep speed 4 steps (1.25, 2.5, 5, 10 s/screen)
B-mode line density Fixed
B-mode FOV 6 steps
(4) Adjustment
ODM-γ 5 steps
ODM enhancement 4 steps
(5) Measurement M-mode measurement
(6) Others It is not possible to use this function with DOP and CFM simultaneously. It is not
either applicable to ECG SYNC
5.6 SCSI interface (EZU-Pi1)

5.6.1 Compositions SCSI card 1 pc
SCSI cable 1 pc
SCSI software 1 pc
13/16
5.6.2 Features
(1) Available printers Mitsubishi CP-770DW+SB770
5.7 Network interface (EZU-Pi6)

5.7.1 Compositions Network software 1 pc
5.7.2 Features
(1) Network Ethernet 10/100 BaseT
5.8 DICOM transfer (EZU-FC7)

5.8.1 Compositions DICOM software 1 pc
5.8.2 Features
(1) Available functions Transfer to the DICOM server
Save to the CD or FD as DICOM format
(2) Image Format DICOM 3.0 compatible
(3) Transfer image Still image or Motion images
(4) Motion images Frame to frame transfer
R to R transfer if ECG is used
All images transfer in cine memory
(5) Retrieve Not possible on EUB-5500
Required DICOM viewer
(6) Image conversion BMP to DICOM available
(7) Timing of Transfer Every image / Every patient
EZU-Pi6 is required for EZU-FC7
5.9 DICOM Image Printing/Worklist ( EZU-FC7P/FC7W)

5.9.1 Composition DICOM image printing software (EZU-FC7P) 1pc
DICOM work-list software (EZU-FC7W) 1pc
(1) Printer function
(a) Print formant B/W : MONOCHROME2
Color: RGB
(b) Number of images in a film Max 16 images
(c) Timing of print Every film / Every patient
(d) Start of printing Every film: Press print key(REC1 key, REC2 key)
Every patient: Click the New Patient button in Patient
menu
Filing dialog
(e) Set up film format Film size, Image display format, Film orientation,
Film destination
(f) Other set up Number of copies, Magnification type, Print Priority
(g) Simultaneous transfer Available simultaneous transfer DICOM server and
printer
(2) Worklist Acquisition of patient data
Retrieval of patient data
Display of detailed patient data
It is possible to use at off-line.
EZU-Pi6 and EZU-FC7 are required for EZU-FC7P/FC7W
5.10 3D Display Option (Free-hand/Magnetic sensor) (EZU-3D4/EZU-3D2S)

5.10.1 Composition Hardware Magnetic sensor unit (Transmitter, Receiver)
*Sensor attachment for probe
(*It is required only for magnetic sensor option EZU-3D2S)
Software 3D display software
14/16
5.10.2 Specification
(1) Software specifications
Applicable probe EZU-3D4:
All connectable probes except for EUP-TC3
EZU-3D2S:
EUP-C514, EUP-C524, EUP-L53, EUP-L53S,
EUP-V53W
Procedural requirement B/CFM-B/CFA-B (single display)
Freeze OFF
3D display mode MIP(Maximum Intensity Projection), Opacity,
Transparency
Multi-display 1/4/6 display
Display function Display any slice (Displayed face of 3D image
can be set on 2D),
Display any rotation, Zoom,
Stretch display of scanning direction of probe
Display adjustment Opacity
Thickness
Filter
Luminance
Photo-realism (Shading)
Recommendation values of the parameters are
registered.
Measurement function Distance, angle, area, volume
Sculpture function Clipping of image
Database function a) Storage media: CD
b) Storage information: Patient image data
c) Retrieve function: By patient
information
Image input signal Digital YUV
Magnetic sensor Ascension magnetic sensor (connected with
RS232C)
(2) EZU-FS2 allows to capture images by the foot switch.
The function of PC printer output is available.
5.11 Wide view Software (EZU-WS4)

5.11.1 Composition Wide view display software
(1) Applicable probes Standard convex and linear probes
(2) Specifications Procedural requirement: B/CFM-B/CFA-B (single display)
Display mode : Wide view / Cine display
Display function : Zoom, Pan and Rotation
Measurement function :B-mode measurement
(exclude Histogram, CFM VELO)
(3) EZU-FS2 allows to capture images by the foot switch.
5.12 Fujinon Mini-Probe Interface Unit (EZU-MS6)

5.12.1 Features
(1) Frame rate Max 12F/s(Scan line density:FAST)
(2) Probe frequency 7.5,12,15,20MHz
15/16
(3) Display method B,B/B
(4) Display range 20,30,40,50,65,85,110mm
(5) Image rotation Min.1°/step
(6) Scan line density FAST:512 lines
(7) Cine memory It is possible to store and playback images continuously
up to 63 frames.
5.13 MOD unit (EZU-MO1)

5.13.1Composition MO drive 1pc
Signal cable 1pc
230MB MO disk 1pc
5.13.2 Specifications Usable MO disk 640MB max.
Average seek time 23ms
Rotational speed 5,455rpm
Interface USB1.1
Power +5V ± 5%
1.4A (2.9A max.)
6. Others
6.1 Power condition
(1) Input voltage 100V, 115V, 120V, 200V, 220V, 230V and 240V ± 10%
(2) Frequency 50/60 Hz
(3) AC outlet 400VA
(4) Power consumption Max. 1,200VA
(5) Power cable 3-wire outlet including protective earth terminal

6.2.1 Environmental conditions in operation
(1) Temperature +10 to +35°C
(2) Relative humidity 30 to 85%RH (subject to no condensation)
(3) Atmospheric pressure 700-l060hPa
6.2.2 Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)
(1) Temperature -10 to +60°C
(2) Relative humidity 10 to 95%RH (subject to no condensation)
(3) Atmospheric pressure 500-l060hPa
6.3 Power condition

(1) External Dimensions 500 (width) x 800 (depth) x 1,400 (height) mm
(2) Weight Approx. 130kg
16/16
DICOM Conformance Statement
EUB-5500
Tokyo, Japan
E1E-EZ1445-1

Contents
Definitions ............................................................................................................................................. ⅰ
1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Purpose of This Document ............................................................................................................1
2 Implementation Model.........................................................................................................................2
2.1 Application Data Flow Diagram ...................................................................................................2
3 Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications ....................................................................................3
3.1 Storage AE specification................................................................................................................3
3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies ........................................................................................3
3.1.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ........................................................................4
3.1.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files ...............................................................................5
3.2 Media Storage AE specification ....................................................................................................7
3.2.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ........................................................................8
3.2.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files ...............................................................................8
3.3 Printing AE specification ..............................................................................................................9
3.3.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ......................................................................10
3.3.3 Basic Film Session SOP Class..............................................................................................10
3.3.4 Basic Film Box SOP Class ....................................................................................................11
3.3.5 Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class ................................................................................12
3.3.6 Basic Color Image Box SOP Class........................................................................................12
3.3.7 Printer SOP Class.................................................................................................................13
3.4 Modality WorkList AE specification ...........................................................................................14
3.4.1 Association Establishment Policies ......................................................................................14
3.4.2 Association initiation by Real-world Activity.......................................................................14
3.4.3 AE Attributes ........................................................................................................................15
3.5 Modality Performed Procedure Step AE specification ...............................................................18
3.5.1 Association Establishment Policies ......................................................................................18
3.5.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity ......................................................................18
3.5.3 AE Attributes ........................................................................................................................19
4 Communication Profile ......................................................................................................................22
4.1 TCP/IP Stack ...............................................................................................................................22
5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations ........................................................................................22
5.1 Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs...........................................................................22
5.2 Private Transfer Syntaxes ..........................................................................................................22
6 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................22
7 Support of extended character sets ...................................................................................................22
Index......................................................................................................................................................23
- iii -
1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of This Document
This document is DICOM Conformance Statement for DICOM software.
DICOM Transferring software is a service class user (SCU) for the transferring of DICOM
images to a remote DICOM Service class provider (SCP). DICOM Transferring software can
store image on the magneto-optical disk (MO disk) and Floppy Disk (FD).
DICOM Image Printing software can be a service class user (SCU) for the printing of DICOM
Images to a remote DICOM SCP.
DICOM WorkList software can be a service class user (SCU) for the Modality WorkList and
Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS).
1
2 Implementation Model
The DICOM Transferring software can transfer the images with DICOM 3.0 standard format.
DICOM Transferring software can store image on the magneto-optical disk (MO disk) and
Floppy Disk (FD).
DICOM Image Printing software can print the image with DICOM 3.0 standard format.
The DICOM WorkList software can query Modality WorkList Server and Modality Performed
Procedure Step (MPPS) Server.
2.1 Application Data Flow Diagram

DICOM 3.0 standard format Application Entity (AE) flow is following.
DICOM
Images Transferring
software Images stored
store DICOM
Storage SCU on Remote
System
DICOM Image
Image Printing
software Remote
print DICOM
Print SCU basic print
DICOM WorkList
User software Remote
Modality WorkList Modality
Query SCU
WorkList
DICOM WorkList
software Remote
User
Modality Performed
Procedure Step Modality Performed
Query
SCU
Procedure Step
DICOM Standard Interface

SCP
Images
store to
media DICOM Transferring FSC
DICOM media
FSU MO or FD
Storage FSC, FSU
Images
delete in
media
Fig. 2.1-1 Application Data Flow Diagram

2
3 Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications
3.1 Storage AE specification
The DICOM Transferring software provides the standard conformance for the following
DICOM3.0 Modality WorkList SOP classes as an SCU.
Table 3.1-1 Storage SOP Class

Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3
Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage (Retired) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6
Ultrasound Image storage (New) 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
3.1.1 Association Establishment Policies
3.1.1.1 General
Maximum PDU size offered : 16,384 bytes

Note: Must be 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K or 16K or > 16K. (bytes)
3.1.1.2 Number of associations

3.1.1.3 Asynchronous Nature

Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
3.1.1.4 Implementation Identifying Information
The DICOM Transferring software will respond with the following implementation
identifying parameters.
obtain the right to use it.
For detail, refer to the Internet address: http://www.merge.com.
3
3.1.2 Association initiation by Real-World Activity
3.1.2.1 Real-World Activity

Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in Real-World
Activity.
3.1.2.1.1 Associated Real-World Activity

3.1.2.1.2 Proposed Presentation Contexts

Table 3.1-2 Presentation Context

Ultrasound Multi-frame Image 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
Storage (Retired)
Storage (New)
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6 Refer to following. Refer to following. SCU None
(Retired)
(New)
Table 3.1-3 Transfer Syntax

Name List UID List
4
3.1.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Table 3.1-4 Image Tag Elements (1)
Name Tag VR Contents
File Meta Information Version 0002, 0001 OB “0001”
Media Storage SOP Class UID 0002, 0002 UI Single new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1”
Single retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6”
Multi new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1”
Multi retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3”
Media Storage SOP Instance 0002, 0003 UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
UID mdd.1hhmmss.i
Transfer Syntax UID 0002, 0010 UI DICOM Implicit VR Little Endian Syntax
: “1.2.840.10008.1.2”
JPEG Baseline(Process 1)
: “1.2.840.10008.1.2.4.50”
Implementation Class UID 0002, 0012 UI “2.16.840.1.113669.2.931128”
Implementation Version Name 0002, 0013 SH “MergeCOM3_232”
Source Application Entity Title 0002, 0016 AE SCU Name (AE title of ultrasound device)
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005 CS At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
acquired from WorkList server.
Instance Creation Date 0008, 0012 DA yyyymmdd
Instance Creation Time 0008, 0013 TM hhmmss
Instance Creator UID 0008, 0014 UI “1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14”
SOP Class UID 0008, 0016 UI Single new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1”
Single retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6”
Multi new : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1”
Multi retired : “1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3”
SOP Instance UID 0008, 0018 UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
mdd.1hhmmss.i
Study Date 0008, 0020 DA yyyymmdd
Series Date 0008, 0021 DA yyyymmdd
Content Date 0008, 0023 DA yyyymmdd
Study Time 0008, 0030 TM hhmmss
Series Time 0008, 0031 TM hhmmss
Content Time 0008, 0033 TM hhmmss
Accession Number 0008, 0050 SH “Accession #” for Patient Menu dialog
Modality 0008, 0060 CS “US”
Manufacturer 0008, 0070 LO Ultrasound equipment maker
Institution Name 0008, 0080 LO Hospital name
Referring Physician's Name 0008, 0090 PN At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Study Description 0008, 1030 LO
Operator's Name 0008, 1070 PN “Sonographer” for Patient Menu dialog
Admitting Diagnoses 0008, 1080 LO At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Description acquired from WorkList server.
Manufacturer's Model Name 0008, 1090 LO The model name of ultrasound equipment
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 PN “Name(Last Name, First Name)” for Patient
Menu dialog
Patient ID 0010, 0020 LO “ID” for Patient Menu dialog
Patient's Birth Date 0010, 0030 DA “Birth Date(YYYY/MM/DD)” for Patient Menu
dialog
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 CS “Sex” for Patient Menu dialog
Other Patient IDs 0010, 1000 LO At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Patient's Age 0010, 1010 AS “Age” for Patient Menu dialog
5
Table 3.1-5 Image Tag Elements (2)
Name Tag VR Contents
Patient's Size 0010, 1020 DS “Height” for Patient Menu dialog
Patient's Weight 0010, 1030 DS “Weight” for Patient Menu dialog
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160 SH At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0 LT At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0 DA At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Patient Comments 0010, 4000 LT At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Software Version(s) 0018, 1020 LO The software version of ultrasound equipment
Frame Time 0018, 1063 DS
Heart Rate 0018, 1088 IS
Depth of Scan Field 0018, 5050 IS
Study Instance UID 0020, 000D UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
mdd.1hhmmss
At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
Series Instance UID 0020, 000E UI 1.2.392.200036.9123.100.14.aa.bbbbbb.yyyym
mdd.1hhmmss.n
Study ID 0020, 0010 SH yyyymmddn
Series Number 0020, 0011 IS 1
Instance Number 0020, 0013 IS n
Samples per Pixel 0028, 0002 US MONOCHROME2 : “1”
RGB, YBR_FULL_422 : “3”
Photometric Interpretation 0028, 0004 CS DICOM(B/W image) : “MONOCHROME2”
DICOM(Full color image) : “RGB”
DICOM(JPEG)(B/W) : “MONOCHROME2”
DICOM(JPEG)(Full color image) :
“YBR_FULL_422”
Planar Configuration 0028, 0006 US “0”
Number of Frames 0028, 0008 IS In the case of a Multi frame image, it sets up.
Frame Increment Pointer 0028, 0009 AT “0002 C347”
In the case of a Multi frame image, it sets up.
Rows 0028, 0010 US NTSC : “480”, PAL : “574”
Columns 0028, 0011 US NTSC : “640”, PAL : “760”
Bits Allocated 0028, 0100 US “8”
Bits Stored 0028, 0101 US “8”
High Bit 0028, 0102 US “7”
Pixel Representation 0028, 0103 US “0”
Window Center 0028, 1050 DS “128”
Window Width 0028, 1051 DS “256”
Lossy Image Compression 0028, 2110 CS No compression : “00”
Compression : “01”
Request Attributes Sequence 0040,0275 SQ
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0007 LO “Exam. Typ” for Patient Menu dialog
Description
>Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040, 0009 SH At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
>Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 SH At the time of WorkList function use, it is data
6
3.2 Media Storage AE specification
The DICOM Transferring software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.2-1 Media Storage SOP Class

Ultrasound Multi-frame Image Storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.3.1
Ultrasound Image storage 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.6.1
DICOM Media Storage Directory 10008.1.3.10
3.2.1.1 General



Media Storage AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM Transferring software will respond with the following implementation
7
Media Storage AE will open an association at the time of a transferring start in

Real-World Activity.


Role
Storage (New)
(New)
Table 3.2-3 Transfer Syntax

Name List UID List
3.2.3 DICOM fields in the DICOM image files
Please refer to Table 3.1-4~5.
8
3.3 Printing AE specification
The DICOM Image Printing software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.3-1 Printing SOP Class

Basic Grayscale Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9
Basic Color Print Management Meta SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18
3.3.1.1 General



Printing AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM Image Printing software will respond with the following implementation
9
Storage AE will open an association at the time of a printing start in Real-World Activity.

- At the time of press PRINT key
- At the time of click [Image Print] button in Filing dialog


Role
Basic Gray Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.9 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SOP Class
Basic Color Print 1.2.840.10008.5.1.1.18 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
SOP Class
This implies standard conformance for the following SOP Classes:

- Basic Film Session SOP Class
- Basic Film Box SOP Class
- Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
- Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
- Printer SOP Class
Each of there SOP classes is described in the paragraphs to follow.
3.3.3 Basic Film Session SOP Class
Table 3.3-3 Basic Film Session Presentation Module

Number of Copies (2000, 0010) 1 to many
Print Priority (2000, 0020) HIGH
MED
LOW
Medium Type (2000, 0030) PAPER
CLEAR FILM
BLUE FILM
Film Destination (2000, 0040) MAGAZINE
PROCESSOR
BIN_i : 'i' is number.
Film Session Label (2000, 0050) Used
Memory Allocation (2000, 0060) ---- Not used
10
3.3.4 Basic Film Box SOP Class
Table 3.3-4 Basic Film Box Presentation Module

Image Display Format (2010, 0010) STANDARD\1,1
STANDARD\1,2
STANDARD\2,1
STANDARD\2,2
STANDARD\2,3
STANDARD\3,2
STANDARD\3,3
STANDARD\3,4
STANDARD\4,3
STANDARD\4,4
Annotation Display Format ID (2010, 0030) ---- Not used
Film Orientation (2010, 0040) PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Film Size ID (2010, 0050) 8INX10IN
10INX12IN
10INX14IN
11INX14IN
14INX14IN
14INX17IN
24CMX24CM
24CMX30CM
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) REPLICATE Configurable
BILINEAR
CUBIC
NONE
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) CUBIC
Border Density (2010, 0100) BLACK
WHITE
i : 'i' is number.
Empty Image Density (2010, 0110) ---- Not used
Min Density (2010, 0120) Limited by printer
Max Density (2010, 0130) Limited by printer
Trim (2010, 0140) YES
NO
Configuration Information (2010, 0150) used
11
3.3.5 Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class
Table 3.3-5 Basic Grayscale Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules

Preformatted Grayscale Image (2020, 0110) used
Sequence
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) MONOCHROME2
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- Not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- Not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- Not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- Not used
3.3.6 Basic Color Image Box SOP Class
Table 3.3-6 Basic Color Image Box Pixel Presentation Modules

Preformatted Color Image (2020, 0111) used
Sequence
>Photometric Interpretation (0028, 0004) RGB
>Planar Configuration (0028, 0006) 0
>Rows (0028, 0010) NTSC:480, PAL:574
>Columns (0028, 0011) NTSC:640, PAL:760
>Bits Stored (0028, 0101) 8
>High Bit (0028, 0102) 7
Polarity (2020, 0020) ---- not used
Magnification Type (2010, 0060) ---- not used
Smoothing Type (2010, 0080) ---- not used
Requested Image Size (2020, 0030) ---- not used
12
3.3.7 Printer SOP Class
Table 3.3-7 Printer Modules

Printer Status (2110, 0010) ---- not used
Printer Status Info (2110, 0020) ---- not used
Printer Name (2110, 0030) ---- not used
Manufacturer (0008, 0070) ---- not used
Manufacturer Model Name (0008, 1090) ---- not used
Device Serial Number (0018, 1000) ---- not used
Software Versions (0018, 1020) ---- not used
Calibration Date (0018, 1200) ---- not used
Calibration Time (0018, 1201) ---- not used
13
3.4 Modality WorkList AE specification
The DICOM WorkList software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.4-1 Modality WorkList SOP Class

Modality WorkList Information Model-FIND 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31
3.4.1.1 General

The Modality WorkList will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM WorkList software will respond with the following implementation identifying
parameters.


the right to use it.
3.4.2 Association initiation by Real-world Activity
Modality WorkList AE will open an association at the time of New Patient execution start
in Real-World Activity.

- At the time of click [New Patient] button in Patient Menu
14

Modality WorkList 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4. DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Information Model-FIND 31 Little Endian Syntax
3.4.3 AE Attributes
The DICOM WorkList software queries Modality WorkList Server to use following
Matching keys.
Table 3.4-3 Inquiry Corresponding Keys

Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0100 R
Sequence
Modality 0008, 0060 R "US"
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040, 0001 R AE title of Ultrasound scanner
>Scheduled Procedure Step 0040, 0002 R YYYYMMDD (today) or
Start Date YYYYMMDD-YYYYMMDD
(yesterday, today and tomorrow)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 R
The DICOM WorkList software can be accepted following tags except for tags that specifies
Remark "Not used".
Table 3.4-4 Response Attribute (1)

Description/Module Tag Key Type Remarks
SOP Common
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005 1C
Scheduled Procedure Step
Scheduled Procedure Step Sequence 0040, 0100 1
>Scheduled Station AE Title 0040, 0001 1
>Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date 0040, 0002 1
>Scheduled Procedure Step Time 0040, 0003 1
Modality 0008, 0060 1 "US"
>Scheduled Performing Physician's 0040, 0006 2 Set to "Sonographer" on
Name Patient menu.
>Scheduled Procedure Step Description 0040, 0007 1C Set to "Exam.typ" on
Patient menu.
>Scheduled Station Name 0040, 0010 2
>Scheduled Procedure Step Location 0040, 0011 2
>Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence 0040, 0008 1C Not used
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
15
>>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1C Not used
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 3 Not used
>Pre-Medication 0040, 0012 2C Not used
>Scheduled Procedure Step ID 0040, 0009 1
>Requested Contrast Agent 0032, 1070 2C
>Scheduled Procedure step Status 0040, 0020 3 Not used
Requested Procedure
Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 1
Requested Procedure Description 0032, 1060 1C
Requested Procedure Code Sequence 0032, 1064 1C Not used
>Code Value 0008, 0100 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1C Not used
>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 3 Not used
Study Instance UID 0020, 000D 1
Referenced Study Sequence 0008, 1110 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 1C Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance UID 0008, 1155 1C Not used
Requested Procedure Priority 0040, 1003 2 Not used
Patient Transport Arrangements 0040, 1004 2 Not used
Name of Intended Recipients of Results 0040, 1010 3
Accession Number 0008, 0050 2 Set to "Accession#" on
Patient menu.
Requesting Physician 0032, 1032 2 I Set to "Ordering
Physician" on
Patient menu.
Referring Physician's Name 0008, 0090 2
Visit Identification
Admission ID 0038, 0010 2 Not used
Visit Status
Current Patient Location 0038, 0300 2 Not used
Referenced Patient Sequence 0008, 1120 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 2 Not used
>Referenced SOP Instance UID 0008, 1155 2 Not used
Visit Admission
Admitting Diagnosis Description 0008, 1080 3
Patient Identification
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 1 Set to "Name" on Patient
menu.
Patient ID 0010, 0020 1 Set to "ID" on Patient menu.
Other Patient IDs 0010, 1000 3
Patient Demographic
Patients Birth Date 0010, 0030 2 Set to "Birth Date" on Patient
menu.
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 2 Set to "Sex" on Patient menu.
Patient’s Primary Language Code 0010, 0101 3 Not used
Sequence
16
>Code Value 0008,0100 1 Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1 Not used
>Patient’s Primary Language Code 0010, 0102 3 Not used
Modifier Sequence
>Code Value 0008,0100 1 Not used
>Coding Scheme Designator 0008, 0102 1 Not used
Patient's Weight 0010, 1030 2 Set to "Weight" on
Patient menu.
Confidentiality constraint on patient 0040, 3001 2 Not used
data
Patient's Size 0010, 1020 3 Set to "Height" on
Patient menu.
Ethnic Group 0010, 2160 3
Patient Comments 0010, 4000 3
Patient Medical
Patient State 0038, 0500 2 Not used
Pregnancy Status 0010, 21C0 2
Medical Alerts 0010, 2000 2 Not used
Contrast Allergies 0010, 2110 2 Not used
Special Needs 0038, 0050 2 Not used
Additional Patient History 0010, 21B0 3
Last Menstrual Date 0010, 21D0 3
17
3.5 Modality Performed Procedure Step AE specification
The DICOM WorkList software provides the standard conformance for the following
Table 3.5-1 Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class

Modality Performed Procedure Step SOP Class 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3
3.5.1.1 General

Modality Performed Procedure Step AE will not use asynchronous operations.
The DICOM WorkList software will respond with the following implementation

the right to use it.
Modality WorkList AE will open an association at the time of selecting of patient or End
Exam execution in Real-World Activity.

- At the time of select patient in Patient List
- At the time of press End Exam key
18

Role
Modality Performed 1.2.840.10008.3.1.2.3.3 DICOM Implicit VR 1.2.840.10008.1.2 SCU None
Procedure Step SOP Little Endian Syntax
Class
3.5.3 AE Attributes
The DICOM WORKLIST software supports the following tag that specifies Remark "Not
used".
Table 3.5-3 SOP Class N-Create and Final State Attribute

of Modality Performed Procedure Step (1)
Description/Module Tag Type N-Create Type Final Remarks
(Type) State (Type)
Specific Character Set 0008, 0005 (1C) (1C) Not use
Performed Procedure Step Relationship
Scheduled Step Attributes 0040, 0270 (1) (1)
Sequence
>Study Instance UID 0020, 000D Set data of (1)
Modality
WorkList.(1)
>Referenced Study 0008, 1110 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
UID
UID
>Accession Number 0008, 0050 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.(2)
>Placer Order 0040, 2016 NULL(3) (3) Not used
Number/Imaging Service
Request
>Filler Order 0040, 2017 NULL(3) (3) Not used
Number/Imaging Service
Request
>Requested Procedure ID 0040, 1001 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.(2)
>Requested Procedure 0032, 1060 Set data of (2)
WorkList.(2)
19
(Type) State (Type)
ID Modality
WorkList.
(2)
WorkList.
(2)
>Scheduled Protocol Code 0040, 0008 Set data of (2) Not used
Sequence Modality
WorkList.
(2)
>>Code Value 0008, 0100 (1C) (1C) Not used
>>Coding Scheme 0008, 0102 (1C) (1C) Not used
Designator
>>Coding Scheme Version 0008, 0103 (3) (3) Not used
>>Code Meaning 0008, 0104 (3) (3) Not used
Patient's Name 0010, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient ID 0010, 0020 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Birth Date 0010, 0030 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Patient's Sex 0010, 0040 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Referenced Patient 0008, 1120 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
>Referenced SOP Class UID 0008, 1150 (1C) (1C) Not used
>Referenced Instance UID 0008, 1155 (1C) (1C) Not used
Performed Procedure Step Information
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0253 (1) (1)
ID
Performed Station AE Title 0040, 0241 Set AE title of (1)
ultrasound
device (1)
Performed Station Name 0040, 0242 NULL(2) (2)
Performed Location 0040, 0243 NULL(2) (2)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0244 Set Start date. (1)
Start Date (1)
20
(Type) State (Type)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0245 Set Start time. (1)
Start Time (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0252 "In "COMPLETED"
Status PRGRESS"(1) (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0254 NULL(2) (2)
Description
Performed Procedure Type 0040, 0255 NULL(2) (2)
Description
Procedure Code Sequence 0008, 1032 (2) (2) Not used
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0250 (2) Set End date.
End Date (1)
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0251 (2) Set End time.
End Time (1)
Comments on the Performed 0040, 0280 (3) (3) Not used
Procedure Step
Performed Procedure Step 0040, 0281 (3) (3) Not used
Discontinuation Reason
Code Sequence
Image Acquisition Results
Modality 0008, 0060 "US"(1) (1)
Study ID 0020, 0010 Set data of (2)
Modality
WorkList.
(2)
Performed Protocol Code 0040, 0260 (2) (2) Not used
Sequence
Performed Series Sequence 0040, 0340 (2) (1) Not used
>Performing Physician's 0008, 1050 (2C) (2) Not used
Name
>Protocol Name 0018, 1030 (1C) (1) Not used
>Operator's Name 0008, 1070 (2C) (2) Not used
>Series Instance UID 0020, 000E (1C) (1) Not used
>Series Description 0008, 103E (2C) (2) Not used
>Retrieve AE Title 0008, 0054 (2C) (2C) Not used
21
(Type) State (Type)
>Referenced Image 0008, 1140 (2C) (2C) Not used
Sequence
UID
UID
>Referenced Non-Image 0040, 0220 (2C) (2C) Not used
Composite SOP Instance
Sequence
UID
UID
The requirement for the final state is that which applies at the time that the performed Procedure
Step Status (0040, 0252) is N-SET to a value of COMPLETED or DISCONTINUED. It is only
described if it is different from the SOP requirement for the N-CREATE.
4 Communication Profile
4.1 TCP/IP Stack
This software interfaces TCP/IP stack of the computer system to be executed.
5 Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations
5.1 Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs
Not applicable
5.2 Private Transfer Syntaxes
Not applicable
6 Configuration
DICOM software obtains configuration information from the followings.

- AE name
- Host name
- Port Number
7 Support of extended character sets

An extended character set is not supported.
22
Index
A Modality Performed Procedure Step AE

Application Data Flow Diagram.................... 2 specification ...............................................18
Application Entity Title (AE) Specifications. 3 Modality WorkList AE specification.............14
C P
Communication Profile ................................ 22 Printing AE specification................................9
Configuration ............................................... 22 Private Transfer Syntaxes............................22
E Purpose of This Document..............................1
Extensions/Specializations/Privatizations .. 22 S
I Standard Extended/Specialized/Private SOPs22
Implementation Model................................... 2 Storage AE specification .................................3
Introduction.................................................... 1 Support of extended character sets ..............22
M T
Media Storage AE specification..................... 7 TCP/IP Stack.................................................22
E
23
PARTS LIST
for HMSA
EUB-5500
Rev.1 (September 1, 2003)

SM- P /21
1. CART1
SM- P /21
1. CART1
1 7218940A CART/5500USA 1 USA
2 7312175B CASTER/6500 4
3 7324997B CASTER COVER 4
4 7415673B HANDLE/5500 2
5 7319012A VCR BASE/6500 1
6 7319011A OP-PLATE/6500 1
7 7319019A TRAY/6500 1
8 7417919B CN-COVER/5500USA 1 USA
9 7415783A F-SPONGE A/6500 1
10 7415784A F-SPONGE B/6500 1
11 1434754A ADJUSTING KNOB 1
12 1427110A SLIDING PLATE B 1
13 144095XA KNOB WASHER 1
14 1416371A SLIDING PLATE A 2
15 1469374A HANGER BASE/6500 1
16 7416607C F-BLIND PLT/5500 1
17 7418412A BLIND PLT A/5500 1
18 7418413A BLIND PLT B/5500 1
19 7413414A BLIND PLT C/5500 1
20 7418417A ECG BLIND/5500 2
21 7324030A CD-RW UNIT 1
22 7419818A CD-R PLATE/5500 1
23 7323332A FD PLATE/5500 1
24 7419616A MOD BLIND/5500 1
25 7315074A FD UNIT 1
26 UoF324 EZU-MO1 1
27 7419924A KB FAN UNIT/5500 1
28 7418574A SP-CABLE L/5500 1
29 7415755A SP-CABLE R/5500 1
30 K214A116 BRKER 100V/6500 1 100V
SM- P /21
31 7317898A SW-CABLE/6500 1
32 7416601A OUT-PNL SLD/6500 1
33 J8310801 OUTLET 8200-I 2 100V
34 7416599A OUT-PNL(N)/6500 1 100V
35 7319731A OUTLET(N)/6500 1 100V

36 7319018A CN-PANEL/6500 1
37 7510161A CN-PCB/5500 1
38 7419749A CN-SHIELD/5500 1
39 7420022A CN-PNL UNIT/5500 1
40 7319377B P.S. HM-071C 1 120V
41 7418968A ECG PANEL/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
42 7419966A ECG SLD/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
43 7419720A ECG BOX/EK25 1 EZU-EK25
44 7416610C CW PANEL/5500 1
45 7416611A CW SHIELD/6500 1
46 7417170C CW UNIT/5500 1
SM- P /21
2. CART2
SM- P /21
2. CART2
1 7319017A TOP SHEILED/6500 1
2 J839A106 FG CLAMP/6500 1
3 7319215E CORE/6500 1
4 7511408A MB PCB/5500 1
5 7321641A TOP SHASSIS/5500 1
6 7312642A BTM SHASSIS/5500 1
7 1481564B GUIDE 3.5MM 2 for DBF
8 J8991105 GUIDE 50-6030 10
9 7416598A SLD PLATE/6500 2
10 7418415A SLD PLATE/5500 1
11 7323765A PCB COVER/5500 1
12 7416827A PCB FAN SET/6500 1
13 1475231A FAN NET/6500 3
14 7418420A PCB RUBBER/5500 1
15 7323766A BTM FAN PLT/5500 1
16 7418571A BTM FAN SET/5500 1
17 7416604A PS COVER/6500 1
18 J836A048 GND TERMINAL 1
19 7416602A MT PANEL/6500 1
20 J8320206 OUTLET 8210-I 1
22 7218943A R-COVER/5500USA 1 USA
23 7419805A REAR PLT A/5500 1
24 7419806A REAR PLT B/5500 1
25 7415785A REAR SPONGE/6500 2
26 2455033A CORD HOLDER 1
27 7415786A AIR FILTER/6500 1
28 7420761A CLAMP PLATE/5500 1
29 7420762A CLAMP A 1
30 7420763B CLAMP B 2
31 7419925A MAP FAN UNIT/5500 1
32 7420909A HD BASE/5500 1
33 7419583A PCB GUIDE/5500 2
SM- P /21
34 7415963A PRB BTM SPT/6500 1

35
SM- P /21
3. KEYBOARD
SM- P /21
3. KEYBOARD
1 7319385F KEYBOARD UNIT(E) 1 ENGLISH
2 7320775B KB COVER(E) 1 ENGLISH
3 7320775W RUBBER KEY SET-E 1 ENGLISH
4 7320775L PADDLE SET 1
5 7320775M ENCORDER 5
6 7320775N PDL RUBBER SET 1
7 7320775P KB PCB 1
8 7320775Q KBIF PCB 1
9 7320775R TB PLATE 1
10 7320775T LIGHT TRACK BALL 1
11 7320775D KNOB SET 1
12 7323484A B GAIN CAP 1
13 7323484B CFA GAIN CAP 1
14 7323484C CW GAIN CAP 1
15 7323484D M GAIN CAP 1
16 7323484E ANGLE CAP 1
17 7323484F B GAIN KNOB 1
18 7323484G GAIN KNOB 4
19 7320775F VOL KNOB SET 1
20 7420871A VOL KNOB 8
SM- P /21
4. PC UNIT
SM- P /21
4. PC UNIT
1 7218910A PC UNIT/5500 1 w/o HDD
2 7218756A PC RACK/5500 1
3 7416847A PC RAIL/6500 2
4 7419926A PC FAN UNIT/5500 1
5 7323252Ｂ PCMB/8500 1
6 7413124A FD CABLE 1
7 7413123A HD CABLE 1
8 7319181A MEMORY PCB 1
9 K641A005 PCMB BATTERY 1
10 7413437C CPU2 1
11 7325076A CPU FAN 1
12 7419573A VIDEO PCB 1
13 7418573A CN69 CABLE/5500 1
14 7412262A HD UNIT(NL) 1
15 7420908A HD PLATE/5500 1
16 7511277A MAP1 PCB/5500 1
17 7511277B MAP2 PCB/5500 1
18 7511275A EPI PCB/5500 1
19 7315726A SCSI BRD/PI1 1 EZU-PI1
SM- P /21
5. COVER
SM- P /21
5. COVER
1 7112095A S-COVER L/6500 1
2 7112096A S-COVER R/6500 1
3 7112097A B-COVER L/6500 1
4 7112098A B-COVER R/6500 1
5 7112099B OPTION BASE/5500 1
6 7112100A BUMPER/6500 1
7 7111880A PRB HOLDER/6500 1
8 L931A049 HOLDER KNOB/6500 2
9 7215817D F-COVER/5500 1
10 7215818C TOP COVER/5500 1
11 7415788A SW LABEL/6500 1
12 7417225A UREA SCREW L=6 4
13 7417225C UREA SCREW L=10 8
Model EUB-5500
Technical Guide
(Software Upgrade Manual)
Tokyo, Japan
L2E-EA0247-1X
CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi Medical

written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright Hitachi medical Corporation. 2003. All rights reserved.
Introduction Software Upgrade manual
This Guidance Manual describes Software upgrade tasks for the EUB-5500.
A Hitachi Medical Corporation technician will perform these tasks. Please give this Guidance Manual to him/her.
Contents
Section 1 Upgrade OS and Software ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1
Appendix A:Setting Drive Letter on Manual ････････････････････････････Appendix A-1
( 1 ) 1 L2E-EA0247
Section 1 Upgrade OS and Software
Back up data before performing any of the tasks described herein.

(1) Back up the System Data
When the ultrasound scanner software is upgraded, the system setting data is initialized to default
setting. Please be sure to back up system setting data. For saving system setting data, reference to
[EUB-5500 INSTRUCTION MANUAL]. PAGE 7-15
(2) Back up some important data

When the ultrasound scanner software is upgraded, the network settings (Computer Name, Work group,
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary WINS) are initialized. Please transcribe the
network settings for setting up again after upgrade. The network setting is confirmed at [Main Menu >
Setup > Peripherals > Network...]. Network settings are NOT saved during Back up.
User data like image data in the original HD will be copied to the new HD. But please back up important
image data etc to the MO disk or etc, just in case.
(3) Shutdown system.

If the following dialog is displayed during the work, please click the [No] or [Cancel] button.
1.1 At once turning on the Ultrasound scanner, insert System CD in the CD drive.
At once turning on the Ultrasound scanner, insert the CD drive. The system is booting from System CD.
1.2 Display the Explorer

When the start-up screen (Fig. 1-1) is displayed, Press the E key during pressing Ctrl + Alt key and display the
Explorer.
It takes about 3 minutes until the start-up screen is displayed.
When the start-up screen is displayed, Press the E key during pressing Ctrl + Alt key, and the start-up screen
becomes to disappear and display the Explorer.
When an Explorer is displayed, push the second button (Fig. 1-2) from the right at the upper right
of a window. And an Explorer is shrunk and the start-up screen may be displayed on the reverse
side. Please continue the following work after waiting for a start-up screen to disappear, since the
start-up screen of Ultrasound software will disappear automatically if it is carried out for a while.
1-1 L2E-EA0247
Fig. 1-1
Fig. 1-2
<CAUTION> Maximize Window

Before the start-up screen is displayed, if the [Ctrl+Alt] key is pressed, the system is not started currently.
After waiting to display the start-up screen, it is necessary to push the [Ctrl+Alt] key.
1.3 Starting up Install Tool

(1) Double click the [C:¥Install¥EUBInstall.exe] (Fig. 1-3) by the Enter key and Install tool is started. Then
Process Dialog (Fig. 1-4) is displayed.
Fig. 1-3
1-2 L2E-EA0247
Fig. 1-4
(2) After about 2 minutes, Drive Letter dialog (Fig. 1-5-1) is displayed. Confirm the drive letters of 4 items (It is 5
items If connected the MO drive) that each drive letters is equal to the items of the following table. If an item
is not displayed on the Drive Letter dialog, click the [Cancel] button. Then please start (1) again.
Fig. 1-5-1 Fig. 1-5-2
Letter Type Size

C Partition About 650 MB
D Removeable *** ※Only connected MO
E Partition About 4 GB
F Partition ***
H CD-ROM ***
*** The size is changed according to every version. Please confirm the Letter and the Type.
<CAUTION>
If the displayed item numbers are not 4 items (It is 5 items If connected the MO drive), the Hard Disk may
have broken. Please click the [Cancel] button. And finish the install work.
If the drive letter is not equal to the table, please set the drive letter on manual. When change the drive letter on
manual, please click the [Changing Drive] button. For the way of the setting on manual, please reference to
Appendix A.
When click the [Changing Drive] button, an Alert dialog may be displayed. And the alert is no problem. Please
close the dialog.
1-3 L2E-EA0247
(3) When the Drive letter is equal to the table, click the [Install] button and start the install work automatically.
INSTALL WORK
Format C:¥ About 2 minutes
Install Operation System About 2 minutes
Install Ultrasound software About 2 minutes
<CAUTION>
Please carry out nothing, although a dialog may be displayed on the way.
(4) When the install work is finished, the following dialog (Fig. 1-6) is displayed. Click the [OK] button and turn
off the Ultrasound scanner automatically.
Fig. 1-6
1-4 L2E-EA0247
1.4 Setup of the system
<Caution>
If the following dialog is displayed during the work, please click the [No] or [Cancel] button.
(1) Turn on the Ultrasound scanner. Eject System Disk on Startup.

When the start-up screen (Fig. 1-7) is displayed, Press the [E] key during pressing [Ctrl+Alt] key and
display the Explorer.
When the start-up screen is displayed, Press the E key during pressing Ctrl + Alt key, and the start-up screen
becomes to disappear and display the Explorer.
When an Explorer is displayed, push the second button (Fig. 1-8) from the right at the upper
right of a window. And an Explorer is shrunk and the start-up screen may be displayed on the
reverse side. Please continue the following work after waiting for a start-up screen to disappear,
since the start-up screen of Ultrasound software will disappear automatically if it is carried out
for a while.
Fig. 1-7
Fig. 1-8
<CAOUTION>
Before the start-up screen is displayed, if the [Ctrl+Alt] key is pressed, the system is not started
currently. After waiting to display the start-up screen, it is necessary to push the [Ctrl+Alt] key.
1-5 L2E-EA0247
Please confirm that the disk of CD or MO or FD is not inserted the each drive. If a disk is
inserted, eject the disk in the drive.
(2) Setup the drive letter and the setting of the operation system.
Double click the [C:¥Eub-us¥tools¥SetDriveLetter¥SetDriveLetter.exe] (Fig. 1-9) by the Enter key and Setup
the drive letter tool is started.
Fig. 1-9
The Setup the drive letter tool sets the drive letter correctly. When the work is finished, the following dialog
(Fig. 1-10-1) is displayed. Confirm the drive letter equal to the following table.
When the system is not stability, the drive information on the dialog is no displayed as Fig. 1-10-2. Please
click [Cancel] button, and wait 1 minute. Then please carry out (1) again.
Fig. 1-10-1 Fig. 1-10-2
If the setting is not equal, click the manual button. And please setup the drive letter on manual. The manual
setting way is reference to Appendix A.
When the [manual] button is clicked, Sometime Alert Message is displayed. And the message is no problem.
Please close the Alert Message dialog by clicking the [OK] button.
1-6 L2E-EA0247
Letter Type Size
C Partition About 4 GB
D Removable *** ※Only connected MO
F Partition ***
H DVD-ROM ***
*** The size is changed according to every version. Please confirm the Letter and the Type.
If the setting is equal, click the [OK] button and display the following dialog (Fig.1-11). Click the [Yes]
button.
Fig. 1-11
Following the Fig. 1-11, the following dialog (Fig. 1-12) is displayed. And click the [OK] button.
Fig. 1-12
(3) Turn off the ultrasound scanner

Turn off the Ultrasound scanner.
Press [Del] key while pressing [Ctrl] key and [Alt] key and Windows Security dialog (Fig. 1-13) is displayed.
Windows Security
WindowsＸＰ
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-13
1-7 L2E-EA0247
Click the [Shut Down] button. And display the Shut Down Windows dialog (Fig. 1-14). Select the [Shut
Down] in the combo box then click the OK button. The Ultrasound scanner is shut down automatically.
Shutdown Windows
WindowsＸＰ
Shutdown ↓
OK
Cancel
Fig. 1-14
1-8 L2E-EA0247
1.5 Setting after the upgrading software
1.5.1 Install the back up system setting data.
Install the system setting data. Please make sure that the right data has been installed. For the detail, it is
reference to [EUB-5500 INSTRUCTION MANUAL]. NOTE: Reboot takes approx. 5 mins.
1.5.2 Installing Printer Driver

It is necessary to reinstall the driver of printer with the following procedure when using a printer for computer.
①After checking if the power to the main unit is OFF, turn on the power to the main unit.
②The start-up screen of the main unit appears after starting OS.
At this time, press the [E] key while pressing the [Ctrl] key and [Alt] key. This displays the Explorer dialog.
NOTICE: This operation needs to carry out while the booting screen is displayed. If it could not be carried out, turn
off the power to main unit and turn on again, and then retry the same procedure.
③After the Explorer dialog is displayed, insert FD or CD having the printer driver into the main unit.
④Double click [My computer] - [Control Panel] - [Printer and FAX] - [Printers].
⑤Refer to the instruction manual supplemented to the PC printer for installing the printer driver.
Fig. 1-15
1-9 L2E-EA0247
⑥If installation is finished, press [Del] key while pressing [Ctrl] key and [Alt] key, express “Windows
Security” on the dialog box.
Windows Security
WindowsＸＰ
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-16
⑦Click “Shutdown” on dialog box.
⑧Express “Shutdown Windows” on dialog box. Select “Shutdown”, click “OK”.
Shutdown Windows
WindowsＸＰ
Shutdown ↓
OK
Fig. 1-17
1 - 10 L2E-EA0247
1.6 Settings of Software’s relative options.
1.6.1 Setting of EZU-Pi1(SCSI card)
It is necessary to reinstall the driver of SCSI printer. Prepare “Authentic Dick”: FD (supplied with the
scanner unit) and “SCSI printer driver”: FD (CP770D (SCSI)(FOR XP)), and make sure installation of
SCSI card (EZU-Pi1).
(1) Make sure connect digital color printer to the scanner unit, switch ON on the digital color
printer it checks that the scanner unit has connected with a digital color printer.
(2) Switch ON, start the scanner unit.
(3) Express the start-up screen, and Press [E] key while pressing [Ctrl] key and [Alt] key soon. Start
“Explorer”.
Fig. 1-18
1 - 11 L2E-EA0247
(4) Double click [My computer] - [Control Panel] - [Printers and Faxes] - [Add Printer].
Fig. 1-19
(5) Click “Next>”.
Fig. 1-20
1 - 12 L2E-EA0247
(6) Express “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.
Make sure select “Local printer attached to this computer”, and make sure that
“Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer” isn’t checked, and click “Next>”.
Fig. 1-21
(7) Select “LPT1” on Port of “Use the follow port”, and click “Next>”.
Fig. 1-22
1 - 13 L2E-EA0247
(8) Set the SCSI printer driver CP770D(SCSI)(FOR XP), select “Have Disk…”.
Fig. 1-23
(9) Click “OK”.
Fig. 1-24
1 - 14 L2E-EA0247
(10) Make sure select “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on list of “Printers”, and select “Next>”.
Fig. 1-25
(11) Make sure select “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)” on Printer name, and select “Next>”.
Fig. 1-26
1 - 15 L2E-EA0247
(12) Make sure select “Do not share this printer”, and select “Next>”.
Fig. 1-27
(13) Select “No”, and click “Next>”.
Fig. 1-28
1 - 16 L2E-EA0247
(14) Select “Finish”.
Fig. 1-29
(15) Select “Continue Anyway”.
Fig. 1-30
1 - 17 L2E-EA0247
(16) Finish “Add Printer Wizard” on dialog box.
Wait to express icon of “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI )” on the “window of Printers and
Faxes”. Then select that icon.
Fig. 1-31
(17) Express “window of MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI)”.

Select “Properties “ on the Printer menu.
Fig. 1-32
1 - 18 L2E-EA0247
(18) Express “MITSUBISHI CP770D(SCSI) Properties” on dialog box.
Select “Ports tab”, select “CP770D(2:0:5)” on the list and click “OK”.
Ports tab
Select
Fig. 1-33
(19) Eject the SCSI printer driver CP770D (SCSI)(FOR XP).

(20) Press [Del] key while pressing [Ctrl] key and [Alt] key, “Windows Security” dialog box is displayed.
Windows Security
WindowsＸＰ
Logon Information
Shutdown
Fig. 1-34
1 - 19 L2E-EA0247
(21) Click “Shutdown” on dialog box.
(22) Express “Shutdown Windows” on dialog box. Select “Shutdown”, click “OK”.
Shutdown Windows
WindowsＸＰ
Shutdown ↓
OK
Fig. 1-35
(23) If the monitor's LED put out the light, and breaker switch OFF on the left side of the
Ultrasound scanner.
1.6.2 EZU-3D4
Please follow with Three Dimensional Display Software EZU-3D4 TECHNICAL GUIDE（L2E-EZ0228-2）
and reinstall the software of three dimensional display.
1.6.3 Set of EZU-FC7, -WS4, -OD2, -Pi6

No special set is necessary.
1 - 20 L2E-EA0247
1.7 Settings of Software’s relative options.
It will make the optional components workable with the following procedure. Please prepare the
AUTHENTIC DISK which attached to the equipment.
(1) Start up the main unit.

(2) Set the AUTHENTIC DISK to the main unit.
(3) Push “Main Menu” key on keyboard and select menu(“Setup”→” System”→”Entry Opt.”)
In “Main Menu”
(4) Release option protect automatically and express ｢Confirmation｣on success.
(Refer to the following figure).
If not express ｢Confirmation｣. Make sure of the AUTHENTIC DISK.
Fig. 1-36
(5) Put out the AUTHENTIC DISK to the main unit.
(6) Click “OK” in ｢Confirmation｣.
(7) Restart the main unit automatically.
(8) Make sure movement of each option with the main unit.
Please set according to the installed option before version up.

1.7.1 Install of the Back-up data for each options
Please install the Back-up data. For the way of the install, please follow with TECHNICAL GUIDE.
1.7.2 Setting up the Network

If network will be used, please record it before the version up and make sure that the network works normally.
Please refer to [EUB-5500 INSTRUCTION MANUAL] for the details.
<Caution>
If you install the EZU-FC7 (DICOM software), please carry out following work.
1 - 21 L2E-EA0247
After the installation of system data, please make sure the content of the set dialog of DICOM and push OK
button. DICOM can not communicate after backup data are installed while OK button is not pushed. Please make
sure that DICOM works normally. Please refer to instruction manual of EZU-FC7 for details.
1 - 22 23 L2E-EA0247
Appendix A
Setting up Drive Letter on Manual
If the manual button is clicked, the Disk Management is started. And display the following dialog (Appendix
Fig. A-1).
Disk 0
First Partition
Disk 0
Second Partition
Removable
DVD
Appendix Fig. A-1
When the setting drive letter is carried out, set up in lower order from a top of the following table.
Letter Type Size
H DVD ***
F Disk 0 Second Partition ***
Ｄ Removable ***
C Disk 0 First Partition About 4GB
Process of the setting drive letter on manual

(1) Click on the drive letter that you want to change by [UNDO] key and display the context menu
(Appendix Fig. A-2).
NOTICE) The context menu is changed according to the drive type.
Appendix Fig. A-2
(2) Select the [Change Drive Letter and paths...] and display the following dialog (Appendix Fig. A-3).
Appendix A-1 L2E-EA0247

Appendix Fig. A-3
(3) Click the [Change ...] button and display the [Change Drive Letter or Path] dialog (Appendix Fig.
A-4).
Appendix Fig. A-4
(4) Select the proper drive letter in the combo box right-hand the dialog and display the following
dialog (Appendix Fig. A-5).
Appendix Fig. A-5
(5) Click the [Yes] button and the drive letter is changed.
NOTICE) When the drive letter is changed, the [?] mark is displayed on the drive mark in Explorer. It is
no problem.
Appendix A-2 25 L2E-EA0247

EUB-5500
Flash Memory
Version-up Procedure
Tokyo, Japan
E1E-EA1450-1

This manual describes version-up procedure of Flash Memory on each board.
Operate when the system has been normally booted.
1. Follow Step (1) to (6) to enable “Ctrl + Alt + Del” keys.

(1) Press Ctrl + Alt + S keys. The following screen appears.
(2) Select “Service Tools” from Select.
(3) After entering “SERVICETOOL” for Password, click the “OK” button.
NOTE: For entering Password, make sure to type it in capital letters. (With the state of
Caps Lock key located on the keyboard being lit in orange color.)
（2）
（3）
(4) The following screen (Service Tools) appears. Click the “Ctrl + Alt + Del” button.
(4)
(6)
-1- E1E-EA1450
(5) The following screen appears. Click “Valid” then the “Close” button.
(5)
(6) Click the “Close” button to close the Service Tools screen.
2. Follow Step (1) to (4) below to terminate the EUB software.

(1) Press the Ctrl + Alt + Del keys.
(2) The following screen appears. Click the “Task Manager” button.
Windows Security
Log on information
Task Manager (T)
(3) The following screen appears. Click the “Processes” tag, and select “EUB-US.exe”, then
click the “End Process” button.
-2- E1E-EA1450
(4) The following screen appears. Click the “Yes” button (EUB-US.exe is terminated).
3. Follow Step (1) to (6) to start the software for flash memory write.
(1) Select the “Applications” tag in the following screen, and click the “New Task” button.
(2) The following screen appears. Click the “Browse” button,
-3- E1E-EA1450
(3) The following screen appears. Select “Local Disk (C:)” from “Look in”.
(4) Select (double click) FlashProg*.*.exe in the folder “C:\EUB-US\Tools”.
(5) Click the “OK” button in the following screen (FlashProg*.*.exe starts).
-4- E1E-EA1450
(6) Click the check box in the following screen (Windows Task Manager ends).
4. Follow Step (1) to (8) to version-up the flash memory.

(1) Insert “Flash Memory FD” into the floppy disk drive.
(2) Click “Load Flash-file” in the following screen.
-5- E1E-EA1450
(3) The following screen appears. Select “3½ Floppy (A:)” from “Look in”.
(4) Files in the floppy disk are displayed. Select (double click) any one of them.
(5) If file loading is completed, “Succeeded to load the Flash-file” appears as shown below.
And at the same time, file name, PCB name, location and check sum are displayed.
File name
PCB name
Location
Check sum
-6- E1E-EA1450
(6) Click “Program”. “You are going to program Flash-ROM” and “OK/Cancel” are displayed
as shown below. Click “OK”. Flash memory write will be automatically carried out.
(7) When flash memory write is completed, “Program completed” is displayed as shown below.
(8) When multiple files exist in “Flash Memory FD”, return to (2) and select the other file to
load and write flash memory (no particular order). Repeat this step, and if all files write
is completed proceed to Item 5.
-7- E1E-EA1450
5. Follow Step (1) to (3) below to shut down the system.
(1) Press the Ctrl + Alt + Del keys.
(2) The following screen appears. Click the “Shut Down” button.
Windows Security
Log on information
Shut Down (S)
(3) The following screen appears. Click “Shutdown” and then click the “OK” button (the
system power is shut off). Contents of version-up will be reflected after Power ON.
-8- 8 E1E-EA1450
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL CONNECTION ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… １−１

１−１
2 FRONT END
PRB CIRCUIT DGM (1/11~11/11) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ２−１
２−１
AWP CIRCUIT DGM (1/20~20/20) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ２−１２
２−１２
DBF CIRCUIT DGM (1/29~29/29) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ２−３２
２−３２
3 BACK END
EPI CIRCUIT DGM (1/5~5/5) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ３−１
３−１
MAP CIRCUIT DGM (1/5~5/5) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ３−６
３−６
MB CIRCUIT DGM (1/7~7/7) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ３−１１
３−１１
4 OTHER
KB CIRCUTI DGM (1/6~6/6) …………………………………………………… Refer to EUB-6500 Circuit Diagram
KBIF CIRCUIT DGM (1/7~7/7) …………………………………………………… Refer to EUB-6500 Circuit Diagram
CNPNL CIRCUIT DGM (1/3~3/3) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ４−１４−１
5 POWER …………………………………………………… Refer to EUB-6500 Circuit Diagram
6 EZU-EK25
BIO CIRCUIT DGM (1/7~7/7) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ６−１
６−１
7 EZU-ST5
CW CIRCUIT DGM (1/23~23/23) ………………………………………………………………………………………… ７−１
７−１
L3E-EA0244
1-1 L3E-EA0244
2-1 L3E-EA0244
2-2 L3E-EA0244
2-3 L3E-EA0244
2-4 L3E-EA0244
2-5 L3E-EA0244
2-6 L3E-EA0244
2-7 L3E-EA0244
2-8 L3E-EA0244
2-9 L3E-EA0244
2-10 L3E-EA0244
2-11 L3E-EA0244
2-12 L3E-EA0244
2-13 L3E-EA0244
2-14 L3E-EA0244
2-15 L3E-EA0244
2-16 L3E-EA0244
2-17 L3E-EA0244
2-18 L3E-EA0244
2-19 L3E-EA0244
2-20 L3E-EA0244
2-21 L3E-EA0244
2-22 L3E-EA0244
2-23 L3E-EA0244
2-24 L3E-EA0244
2-25 L3E-EA0244
2-26 L3E-EA0244
2-27 L3E-EA0244
2-28 L3E-EA0244
2-29 L3E-EA0244
2-30 L3E-EA0244
2-31 L3E-EA0244
2-32 L3E-EA0244
2-33 L3E-EA0244
2-34 L3E-EA0244
2-35 L3E-EA0244
2-36 L3E-EA0244
2-37 L3E-EA0244
2-38 L3E-EA0244
2-39 L3E-EA0244
2-40 L3E-EA0244
2-41 L3E-EA0244
2-42 L3E-EA0244
2-43 L3E-EA0244
2-44 L3E-EA0244
2-45 L3E-EA0244
2-46 L3E-EA0244
2-47 L3E-EA0244
2-48 L3E-EA0244
2-49 L3E-EA0244
2-50 L3E-EA0244
2-51 L3E-EA0244
2-52 L3E-EA0244
2-53 L3E-EA0244
2-54 L3E-EA0244
2-55 L3E-EA0244
2-56 L3E-EA0244
2-57 L3E-EA0244
2-58 L3E-EA0244
2-59 L3E-EA0244
2-60 L3E-EA0244
3-1 L3E-EA0244
3-2 L3E-EA0244
3-3 L3E-EA0244
3-4 L3E-EA0244
3-5 L3E-EA0244
3-6 L3E-EA0244
3-7 L3E-EA0244
3-8 L3E-EA0244
3-9 L3E-EA0244
3-10 L3E-EA0244
3-11 L3E-EA0244
3-12 L3E-EA0244
3-13 L3E-EA0244
3-14 L3E-EA0244
3-15 L3E-EA0244
3-16 L3E-EA0244
3-17 L3E-EA0244
4-1 L3E-EA0244
4-2 L3E-EA0244
4-3 L3E-EA0244
6-1 L3E-EA0244
6-2 L3E-EA0244
6-3 L3E-EA0244
ｘ
6-4 L3E-EA0244
6-5 L3E-EA0244
6-6 L3E-EA0244
6-7 L3E-EA0244
7-1 L3E-EA0244
7-2 L3E-EA0244
7-3 L3E-EA0244
7-4 L3E-EA0244
7-5 L3E-EA0244
7-6 L3E-EA0244
7-7 L3E-EA0244
7-8 L3E-EA0244
7-9 L3E-EA0244
7-10 L3E-EA0244
7-11 L3E-EA0244
7-12 L3E-EA0244
7-13 L3E-EA0244
7-14 L3E-EA0244
7-15 L3E-EA0244
7-16 L3E-EA0244
7-17 L3E-EA0244
7-18 L3E-EA0244
7-19 L3E-EA0244
7-20 L3E-EA0244
7-21 L3E-EA0244
7-22 L3E-EA0244
7-23 L3E-EA0244
8500 / 6500 / 5500 FUNCTION MATRIX
FUNCTIONS 8500 6500 5500

HI COMPOUND X
HI RES (Adaptive Imaging) X
Auto endocardial tracing X X
TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging) X
STANDARD
Raw Data Freeze X

dTHI (Tissue Harmonic Imaging) X X X*
WPI (Wideband Pulse Inversion) X X
Doppler realtime measurement X X
Doppler baseline shift in freeze X X X
Directional CFA X X X
User programmable keys X X X
Cine Standard MM16 Standard
Cine + ODM Standard MM17 N/A
ODM only N/A N/A OD2
STCW unit ST3 ST4 ST5
Pencil CW unit CW2 CW2 CW4
ECG unit EK24 EK24 EK25
Digital capture Pi5 Pi3 not needed
Wide View (HI SPAN) WS3 WS2 WS4
Stress echo SE3 SE1 N/A
OPTIONS
3D Freehand 3D3 3D2 3D4

3D Magnetic Tracking 3D2S 3D2S 3D2S
SCSI I/F Pi1 Pi1 Pi1
Network Standard Pi2 Pi6
DICOM Transfer FC6 FC5 FC7
DICOM Print FC6P FC5P FC7P
DICOM Worklist FC6W FC5W FC7W
Fujinon I/F unit MS6 MS6 MS6
Contrast CH4 CH3 N/A
Windows XP X X X
DVDRW, CDRW, MO DVD, MO option DVD, MO option CD, MO option
* dTHI has three steps3
CONFIDENTIAL
HIVISION MATRIX 111003 HITACHI MEDICAL SYSTEM AMERICA

Hi Vision 5500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hi Vision 5500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

CONFIDENTIALITY: This material contains proprietary information of Hitachi

Section 2 Safety ..........................................................................................................................2 - 1

Section 4 Principle of Operation ...............................................................................................4 - 1

4.3 BIO Unit EZU-EK25....................................................................................................4 - 20

Section 5 Power Unit .................................................................................................................5 - 1

Section 6 Monitor Unit ..............................................................................................................6 - 1

Section 8 Signal List ..................................................................................................................8 - 1

Section 10 Parts list

1.1 Product Overview

NOTE: Refer to Instruction Manual for details

1.3 Environmental conditions

(1) Environmental conditions in operation

・Ambient temperature : +10° C∼ +35° C

(2) Daily storage conditions

・Ambient temperature : -10°C∼ +40°C

(3) Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)

・Ambient temperature : -10°C∼ +60°C

SCSI Printer ・EZU-DA1

BW Printer Color Printer VCR MOD（USB）

SONY UP-895MD UP-895CE

2.1 Classification of the Equipment

2.2 Cautions in Operating the Equipment

2.3 Cautions in Maintaining the Equipment

Table 2.3-1 Fuses of equipment

Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF EQUIPMENT

3.1 General Operation

3.2 Special Operation for Service Personnel

3.2.1 Initialization of system environment

(4) Click the “Reset” button in “Service Tools”.

NOTE: Do not save backup data to CD-R. Use the CD-RW.

Displayed when the CD-RW disk is not prepared

★ Error message when installing backup data ★

Displayedwhen the CD-RW disk is not prepared

(3) Versions are displayed as shown below:

3.2.6.2 Preparation before the action

(5)Check that the HDD is partitioned as below.

Format partition D drive and actives.

(7) Check below, and then press the “OK” button.

(8) Click the “OK” button.

The progress is displayed on D drive in disk management.

(10) Copy “Eub-us” folder from CD (C:/Install) to HDD partition D.

(12) Select the “shut down” and click the OK button.

(17) Click the “Change “ button.

(20) Click the “Yes” button and continue assignment of drive.

(22) Shut down in accordance with (11)(12).

3.2.6.4 Action to be taken when harddisk crashes

Procedure for starting the Ultrasound equipment from the System CD

1 Turn on the equipment.

3. The initial window appears and the Ultrasound equipment starts.

(7) Click “Next>” button.

(11) Setting item as followings and click “Next>” button.

(13) Start D drive formatting and finish to 100%.

(15) Displaying “Active” mark to D drive.

(17) Click “Next>” button.

(18) Select “Extended partition” and click “Next>” button.

(19) Click “Next>” button. (Partition size is max.)

(21) Create the free space in the back of D drive.

(23) Click “Next>” button.

(25) Click “Next>” button. (Logical drive size is max.)

(27) Set item as followings and click “Next>” button.

(4) The following list show the kind of application log.

Event ID Type Event log

button action recommended mode